BMW M3 E30 S14 Repair

BMW M3 E30
with L4 2.3L S14 Dohc Engine
Repair Manual
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 2
Vehicle: Application and ID
Vehicle Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Numbers are referred to as the VIN. BMW utilizes a VIN with a 17 character structure. The characters are grouped to
included multiple information as follows:
Vehicle Identification Number
VIN Location On Vehicle
The VIN is located on the vehicle in the following locations:

- In the left lower corner of the dashplate. This can be viewed through the windshield from outside of the car.
- "B" pillar compliance label. On the driver's side door jamb.
Additionally the VIN is stamped into the body in one of the two locations below.
- Under hood on engine compartment bulkhead.
- Under hood on passenger side shock tower.
Vehicle Production Dates
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 3
The production date of the vehicle is included in the B pillar compliance label.
Production date information is required quite often when a repair procedure affects only a certain range of vehicles. The range is based on
production dates.
The date shown on the label reflects the actual month and year the vehicle was produced. It is not a model year indicator.
Vehicle Production Anti-theft Labels
Since 1987, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) requires that the VIN be marked on specific parts of the car during
manufacture for theft identification. Some models are exempt if there if the total number of vehicles imported is below a certain number.
If the vehicle does have the label it is also a reference point for the VIN.
If equipped, the label is placed on the following locations:

- Engine
- Transmission
- Hood
- Trunk lid
- Front bumper
- Rear Bumper
- Front Fenders
- Doors
- Quarter panels.
* Please reference S.I.B 00 21 86 (1267) dated June 1990 for more information on Anti-theft labels.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 4
Vehicle: Testing and Inspection
Description of Automotive Signals
The 5 Primary Types of Automotive Signals

INTRODUCTION
Let us begin by learning what primary types of signals are found in today's vehicle systems. We will take an overview look at the five
primary types of signals found in today's vehicles, and what sensors, devices or circuits use them.
Think of the five primary signal types as the building blocks of intelligent electronic communication between sensors, control units and other
devices in the system. The five primary signal types are similar to the letters in the alphabet of the English language. They each have different
electronic "sounds," if you will. In electronic terms, they are "pronounced" differently, and are even used for different communicative
purposes.
We will then dig deeper into each one of the signals separately, and explore their individual "critical features." Finally, we will see if we can
put the building blocks, the "electronic letters" if you will, and the "electronic words" together, so we can understand the universal language
of intelligent electronic communication.
THERE ARE 5 PRIMARY SIGNAL TYPES FOUND IN AUTOMOBILES
1. DIRECT CURRENT (DC) SIGNALS
The types of sensors or devices in a vehicle that produce DC signals are:
^ Power supplies such as battery voltage or sensor reference voltages created by the PCM.
^ Analog sensor signals, such as engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature throttle position, EGR valve position, oxygen, vane and
hot wire mass airflow, vacuum and temperature switches, throttle switches, and GM, Chrysler and Asian manifold absolute pressure
sensors.
2. ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) SIGNALS
The types of sensors or devices in a vehicle that produce AC signals are:
^ Magnetic Camshaft (CMP) and Crankshaft (CKP) position sensors
^ Antilock Brake System (ABS) wheel speed sensors
^ Vehicle Speed Sensors (VSS)
^ Knock Sensors (KS)
3. FIXED PULSE WIDTH SIGNALS
The types of sensors or devices in a vehicle that produce Fixed Pulse Width Signals are:
^ Hall Effect, CMP and CKP sensors
^ Digital mass airflow sensors
^ Ford MAP sensors
^ Optical VSS
^ Camshaft (CMP) and Crankshaft (CKP) sensors
4. PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SIGNALS
The types of circuits or devices in a vehicle that produce Pulse Width Modulated Signals are:
^ Fuel injectors
^ Electronic spark timing circuits
^ EGR control solenoids
^ Idle air control motors and solenoids
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 5
^ Ignition coil primary
5. SERIAL DATA (Multiplexed) SIGNALS
The type of device in a vehicle that produces Serial Data Signals is the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or Body Control Module (BCM),
if the vehicle manufacturer has equipped the Control Module with self diagnostics or other serial data/communications capability.
Now that we've learned the five primary types of automotive electronic signals and their associated sensor or device groupings, let's find out what
else is critical to know about automotive electronic signals. OK, we know the five primary signal types are; DC, AC, FIXED PULSE WIDTH,
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED, and SERIAL DATA signals. Now let's move on to the five "Critical Dimensions" of the automotive electronic
language puzzle. See: The 5 Critical Dimensions
The 5 Critical Dimensions

INTRODUCTION
There are only 5 critical features, or types of information, from five primary signal types signals that we should consider important, because
the vehicle's PCM considers them important. these are the 5 critical dimensions of the signal.
The five critical dimensions of automotive electronic signals are the equivalent of the "electronic words" that make up a sentence of
intelligent electronic communication between sensors, control units and other devices in the system. The Five Critical Dimensions are what
the vehicle's PCM "reads" and "writes" with. It "reads" what a sensor is telling it by decoding its "Critical Features" and "writes" with them to
give instructions to devices within the system that perform certain tasks, like injector on-time, etc.
THE FIVE CRITICAL DIMENSIONS ARE:
1. Amplitude
2. Frequency
3. Shape
4. Pulse Width
5. Pattern
CRITICAL DIMENSION DEFINITIONS:
Amplitude - The voltage of the electronic signal at a certain point in time.
Frequency - The time between events, or cycles, of the electronic signal, usually given in cycles per second (Hertz).
Shape - The signature of the electronic signal; its unique curves or comers, etc.
Pulse Width - The on-time, or duty cycle of the electronic signal.
Pattern - The repeated patterns that have specific messages, like sync pulses that tell the PCM that cylinder #1 is at top dead center, or a
repeated pattern in the serial data stream that tells the scan tool the coolant temperature is 2100.
Each of the five signals types use one or more of the Five Critical Dimensions, alone or in combination, to make up "intelligent electronic
sentences." See: Diagnosis Using a Labscope
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 6
Diagnosis Using a Labscope
THE GOLDEN RULE OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS IS:
For the vehicle's computer system to function properly, it must receive signals with the dimensions it was designed to communicate with.
In other words, for the vehicle's computer system to function properly, it must be able to "read" and "write" the universal language of
intelligent electronic communication. By using the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO), we will electronically "eavesdrop" on the vehicle's
electronic conversations, both to pinpoint problems, and to verify that all is well after repairs have been performed. If a sensor, actuator or
even the PCM is not generating electronic signals with the correct Critical Dimensions, then the circuit can suffer from a "communication
breakdown," which can surface as a driveability problem, emissions failure, or in some cases, set a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code).
Each of the five primary types of electronic signals use the "electronic words" or "Critical Dimensions," to establish electronic
communication. One of the five primary types of signals uses only one "electronic word" to communicate, another uses only three "electronic
words" to communicate, and another uses four and so on. Study the table above to get a better understanding of which types of signals use
which types of "Critical Dimensions" to do their "electronic communication." Don't worry too much about taking all of this in and completely
understanding it for the moment. We will cover this further in the component tests. For now, just think of the "Critical Dimensions" as
"electronic words" and imagine that the more words you can use, the more complex "electronic sentences" you can make up.
As you can see, the further you get down the list of the five signal types, the more "electronic words" they use to communicate. "Electronic
Communications" language is a lot like speaking languages in another aspect worth noting exceptions. The above rules work very well and
hold up in most cases, but just like some words in the English language don't sound like they are spelled, "Electronic Communications"
language has exceptions to its rules too. Not many, but there are a few. We will get to those as we go.
It may come as no surprise to some that Serial Data signals, the signals that PCMs and other "electronically intelligent" devices use to
communicate, are the most complex signals in the vehicle. Serial Data Signals contain the most complex "electronic sentences" in the vehicle.
In fact, they take a special analyzer to "decode" them one very familiar to us the scan tool.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 7
Labscope Quick Reference Appendix
Time Per Division VS. Frequency Chart
Chart For Determining Time Base Setting, Based On Signal Frequency
PURPOSE OF THIS CHART: To assist in choosing time per division settings on the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) based on the
signal's frequency, or to estimate the frequency of a signal on the DSO display.
HOW TO USE THIS CHART: Determine the frequency (Hz) of the signal by using the DMM function of the DSO. Take the frequency
reading from the DMM, and round off to the closest number in the left column. Choose how many cycles of the signal you want to see on the
DSO display at the same time and go over to that column. That is a good time base to begin with.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 8
Additionally, you can estimate the frequency of the signal on your DSO by counting the number of cycles on the display (1 through 5), going
to that column in the chart, and going down the column to find your current time base setting. The left column will estimate the frequency.
Setting Up A DSO to Display A Waveform

Setting the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) to display a waveform you want to see can be pretty tricky when connecting the Digital
Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) to an unknown signal. Here are a few guidelines to get you up and running:
To display a waveform you must set:
1) Voltage scale
2) Time base
3) Trigger level, or trigger mode to "AUTO"
4) AC, DC, or GND coupling. DC coupling is used for most applications. DC coupling allows both AC and DC signals to be displayed. AC
coupling filters out the DC component of the signal and only allows AC to be displayed. AC coupling is mostly used when looking at two
wire, variable reluctance (magnetic) sensors, when looking for a noise in a signal, when checking alternator ripple voltage (diode check), or
other rare instances. GND is used to position the ground, or zero level, of the DSO or to show where the zero voltage reference point is.
There are a few setups that can assist you in displaying a waveform:
1. Go into "OPERATION" on the left main menu and choose "AUTORANGE." After you get a recognizable waveform on the display, press
any button on the control panel once to get the DSO out of "AUTORANGE" and into "MANUAL" mode to do your fine tuning.
2. If there still isn't a discernible waveform on the display, you can make an educated guess and set the voltage scale and trigger level. Leave the
time base setting as the only unknown for the moment. Here's how: Use the DMM function of the DSO and measure the signal voltage.
Adjust the voltage level to be about the same as the voltage reading. This should be a good starting point.
3. Now, set the trigger level to roughly half of the voltage signal. After setting the voltage scaling and the trigger level, the only unknown is the
time base. Press the "POSITION/SCALE" button at the bottom of the control panel until "SCALE" appears at the right, lower corner of the
display. Press the right and left arrow keys from one extreme to the other. The waveform should become visible somewhere in this exercise.
Most automotive signals fall between 1 ms and 1 second per division time base.
4. The chart below may be used to help you select a time per division scale. Determine the frequency of the signal being checked by using the
DMM function of the DSO. Then determine how many cycles you wish to see on the display at the same time.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 9
Chart For Determining Time Base Setting, Based On Signal Frequency
Cross the frequency of the signal and the number of cycles on the chart, and you will have a good starting point for a time base.
When A Waveform Fails to Appear

1) Make sure "TRIGGER" mode is in "AUTO" in case the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO)'s trigger is not set properly with respect to your
signal.
2) Make sure the DSO isn't in "HOLD" mode. You can check this by looking in the upper left corner of the display and making sure "RUN" is
displayed. If "HOLD" is showing, then press the "RUN/HOLD" button at the bottom of the control panel once.
3) There may not be a signal there. Use the DMM feature of the DSO to check it out. See if a frequency is present. See if voltage is present. This
may surprise you. If you know something is there but neither the DMM or the DSO can see it, recheck your leads and connections.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 10
4) Make sure "GND" input coupling isn't selected. That pretty much kills all action.
5) Make sure the trigger source is on the channel you are working with (upper right part of the screen when you press the
"CURSORS/TRIGGER" button).
Quick Reference Labscope Glossary

Trigger Level: The voltage level the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) looks for to begin drawing a trace.
Trigger Source: The channel (CH1, CH2) that the DSO is looking at for the trigger level.
Trigger Slope: Determines if the trace begins when the voltage is rising or falling as it crosses the trigger level.
Voltage Scale: The amount of voltage each vertical division represents.
Time base: The amount of time each horizontal division represents.
DC coupling: Allows both AC and DC voltages to be displayed.
AC coupling: Allows only the AC voltage component of a signal to be displayed. It filters out DC voltage (a capacitor is used to filter out the
DC voltage).
Ground coupling: Allows you to set the zero voltage position on the DSO.
Auto trigger: Allows a scope to begin drawing its trace even if there isn't a trigger set manually.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 11
Engine: Application and ID
To identify an engine by the manufacturer's code, follow the four steps designated by the numbered blocks.
VIN PLATE LOCATION:
All - Left side of instrument panel, visible through windshield.
(1) MODEL YEAR IDENTIFICATION:
10th character of VIN
1990 - L
1989 - K
1988 - J
1987 - H
1986 - G
1985 - F
1984 - E
1983 - D
1982 - C
1981 - B
(2) ENGINE CODE LOCATION:
Prefix to engine number, stamped on engine block.
Engine Identification
(3) ENGINE CODE:
(4) ENGINE IDENTIFICATION:
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 12
Camshaft: Service and Repair
REMOVING CAMSHAFTS
Valve Timing
1. Camshaft 248°
2. Plug for oil bore in camshaft
3. Lockwasher
4. Dowel pin
5. Sprocket intake "E"
6. Sprocket- exhaust "A"
7. Lockplate
8. Hexagon head screw M 6 x 16
9. Adapter for distributor rotor
10. Intake valve - 37 mm (1.457") dia. Oversize valves with larger stem diameters are available
11. Exhaust valve - 32 mm (1.260") dia. Oversize valves with larger stem diameters are available
12. Spring retainer, lower
13. Valve spring, outside - 41 mm (1.614") long
14. Valve spring, inside - 38.5 mm (1.516") long
15. Valve stem seal
16. Valve spring retainer, upper
17. Valvecollet
18. Tappet
19. Shims from 3.00 to 4.25 mm (0.118 to 0.167")
- Remove cylinder head cover.

- Unscrew bolts (1...3) and take off distributor cap.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 13
- Unscrew distributor rotor (4).

- Unscrew adapter (5).
Installation Note: Tightening torque: 23 + 1 Nm (16.5 + 0.5 ft lbs).
- Unscrew and remove distributor housing, and plugs.
Installation Note: Check O-rings, replacing it necessary.
- Remove end cover.
Installation Note:
- Replace gasket.
- Use longer bolts in bores with a dowel sleeve (1).
- Unscrew guide rail.
Installation Note: Center guide rail with a feeler gage.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 14
- Turn crankshaft with Special Tool 11 3 020 to position cylinder no. 1 to TDC - cylinder no. 4 overlaps.
CAUTION: Never crank the engine after removing the timing chain.
- Remove chain tensioner, See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Remove and Install Chain Tensioner Piston.
- Open lockplates and unscrew sprockets.
Installation Note: Tightening torque: 9 + 1 Nm (6.5 + 0.5 ft. lbs.).
- Mount Special Tool 11 3 010 on timing case.

- Turn shaft (1) up to the arrest - camshaft is held down for removal of bearing caps.
- Unscrew camshaft bearing caps.
- Loosen the arrest and relax the camshaft. Remove Special Tool 11 3 010. Mark camshafts "E" (intake), or "A" (exhaust) and remove.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Camshafts are identical for exhaust and intake sides.
Install a used camshaft in the same position.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 15
- Turn crankshaft to TDC.

- Install camshaft that one each groove faces up and inward - TDC position.

- Hold camshaft in TDC position with Special Tool 11 3 020 and turn shaft (1) up to the arrest - camshaft is held down for installation of
bearing caps.
- Install camshaft bearing caps on timing case according to lettering.

Tightening torque: 22 + 2 Nm (16 + 1.5 ft. lbs.).
- Tighten the timing chain in opposite direction of engine rotation and mount on the intake side sprocket"E" first.
- Install lockplate and bolt down the sprocket,
Tightening torque: 9 + 1 Nm (6.5 + 0.5 ft. lbs.).
- Install exhaust side sprocket "A".

- Install adapter (1).
- Install Lockplate and bolt down the sprocket.
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 16
- Install chain tensioner, See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Remove and Install Chain Tensioner Piston.
- Turn engine once in direction of rotation and recheck the timing.
- Make sure that:
- Crankshaft at TDC
- One each camshaft groove faces in
- One each camshaft groove faces cast boss on bearing cap
- Lock sprocket mounting bolts with a lockplate.

- Adjust valve clearance,See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Clearance/Specifications.
Cam distance "N"

Nominal value: 43.713 mm (1.721").
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 17
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
REPLACING SPROCKET SET
- Timing Chain Removed -

See: Timing Components/Timing Chain
Remove oil pump drive chain.

See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Replacing Oil Pump Drive Chain
Unscrew shaft bolt (1) and take off oil pipe (2).
Installation:
Check O-rings, replacing if necessary.
Pull off sprocket with Special Tools 11 2 00 and 11 2 004.
Installation:
Heat sprocket to max. 200° C (390° F) for installation.
Tighten oil pump drive chain.
Mount Special Tools 11 3 040 and 11 3 062 on shaft of guide sprocket.

Knock Out the shaft.
Installation:
Check needle sleeve in sprocket, repacing if necessary. Press in needle sleeve in forward driving direction of car.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 18
- Forward and pressing in direction for needle sleeve.
Installation:
Replace O-ring (3).

Drive in shaft partially with bore facing up.
Slide on the guide sprocket.
Drive in shaft against the stop.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 19
Cylinder Head Assembly: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Remove and Install
REMOVING CYLINDER HEAD
CAUTION:
BMW anti-theft radios can be rendered useless by disconnecting the battery. Make sure you know the correct code before disconnecting the battery.
See your owner's manual for more information.
- Disconnect battery ground lead.

- Unscrew splash guard.
- Drain coolant on engine and radiator.
Installation Note: Fill and bleed cooling system.
- Loosen hose clamp (1) and hose clamp for the intake hose (next to radiator), and pull off hoses.
- Pull off plugs (2 and 3) and place electric leads aside.
- Loosen nuts (4 and 5) and remove air cleaner.
- Disconnect throttle cable (1) and cruise control cable (2).

- Unscrew nuts (2) on holder and place cables with holder side.
- Unscrew nut (3), pull off clamp and lift vacuum hose (4) out of brake booster.
- Loosen hose clamp (1) and pull hose off of intake manifold.
- Unscrew nut (2) on intake manifold support.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 20
- Loosen hose clamp (1) and pull off hose.

- Unscrew nuts and take off intake manifold.
Installation Note:
- Check O-rings, replacing if necessary.
- Tightening torque: 9.0 Nm (6.5 ft.lbs.).
- Loosen hose clamps (1 and 2) and pull hoses off of coolant expansion tank.
- Unscrew nut (3) and take off ground strap.
- Pull ignition lead (1) off of ignition coil.

- Pull off plugs (2 and 3).
- Unscrew nut (4) and place electric lead on opposite end of engine.
- Pull off plugs (1 and 2).

- Pull vacuum hose (3) off of pressure regulator.
- Unscrew screw (4) and take off electric lead with holder.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 21
- Pull off vacuum hose (1) and plug (2).

- Lift out rubber holder (3).
- Place idle speed control aside and take engine wire harness located behind it out of holder.
- Pull off plug plate on fuel injectors and place aside next to the pressure regulator.
- Loosen clamp (1) and pull off breather hose.

- Disconnect fuel hoses (2 and 3) on the injection pipe.
- Disconnect heater hose (4) on the cylinder head.
Installation Note: Don't mix up hoses (2 and 3).
- Loosen clamp (1) and pull off of cylinder head.
- Unscrew flange bolts.

- Disconnect oxygen sensor plug.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 22
Installation Note:
- Replace gaskets.
- Replace self-locking nuts.
- Tightening torque: 50 Nm (37 ft.lbs.).
- Loosen hose clamps and pull off radiator hoses.
- Remove camshaft, See: Remove and Install Camshaft.

.
- Pull out cam followers and place in tray, using Special Tool 11 3 030.
Installation Note: Install cam followers in same positions.
- Unscrew bolts.
Installation Note: Longer bolt (1) is required to secure the shaft for the upper tensioning rail.
- Disconnect pipe (2).

- Unscrew bolt (3).
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 23
- Unscrew timing case.
Installation Note:
- Replace O-ring (2) in oil bore.
- Check O-rings (3), replacing if necessary.
- Coat sealing surfaces with Three Bond 12 07.
- Tighten bolts uniformly. Tightening torque:
M 7 = 15 + 2 Nm (11 + 1.4 ft.lbs.).
M 8 = 21 + 1 Nm (15 + 0.7 ft.lbs.).
Measuring Play of Cam Followers

- Measure diameter of cam follower with a micrometer.
- Set internal calipers to zero on the micrometer to the measure cam follower bore diameter.
- Measure diameter of cam follower bore.
- Compare measured cam follower play with specified play.
- Cam follower play/installed distance: 0.0025 to 0.066 mm (0.0001 to 0.0026").
- Unscrew bolts.
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 24
- Unscrew cylinder head bolts in order of 10 through 1 and lift off cylinder head.
Installation
- Clean cavities in crankcase/cylinder head bolts - lubricate cylinder head bolts with oil.
- Clean sealing surfaces on cylinder head and crankcase thoroughly - use a gasket remover and hard wood scraper.
- Check levelness with a standard steel ruler.
- Replace cylinder head gasket.
- Check tensioning rail location while mounting the cylinder head.
- Tighten bolts in three steps in order of 1 though 10.
Step 1 = 50 + 2 Nm (36 + 1.4 ft.lbs.).
Step 2 = 80 + 2 Nm (58 + 1.4 ft.lbs.).
Wait 15 minutes!
Step 3 = 100 + 2 Nm (72 + 1.4 ft.lbs.).
- Reinstall all auxiliary components in reverse order of disassembly, paying close attention to installation notes and torque specs.
- Adjust valve clearance,See: Valve Clearance.
- Check engine idle speed and CO level.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 25
Remove and Install Camshaft
REMOVING CAMSHAFTS
Valve Timing
1. Camshaft 248°
2. Plug for oil bore in camshaft
3. Lockwasher
4. Dowel pin
5. Sprocket intake "E"
6. Sprocket- exhaust "A"
7. Lockplate
8. Hexagon head screw M 6 x 16
9. Adapter for distributor rotor
10. Intake valve - 37 mm (1.457") dia. Oversize valves with larger stem diameters are available
11. Exhaust valve - 32 mm (1.260") dia. Oversize valves with larger stem diameters are available
12. Spring retainer, lower
13. Valve spring, outside - 41 mm (1.614") long
14. Valve spring, inside - 38.5 mm (1.516") long
15. Valve stem seal
16. Valve spring retainer, upper
17. Valvecollet
18. Tappet
19. Shims from 3.00 to 4.25 mm (0.118 to 0.167")

- Unscrew bolts (1...3) and take off distributor cap.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 26
- Unscrew distributor rotor (4).

- Unscrew adapter (5).
Installation Note: Tightening torque: 23 + 1 Nm (16.5 + 0.5 ft lbs).
- Unscrew and remove distributor housing, and plugs.
Installation Note: Check O-rings, replacing it necessary.
- Remove end cover.
Installation Note:
- Replace gasket.
- Use longer bolts in bores with a dowel sleeve (1).
- Unscrew guide rail.
Installation Note: Center guide rail with a feeler gage.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 27
- Turn crankshaft with Special Tool 11 3 020 to position cylinder no. 1 to TDC - cylinder no. 4 overlaps.
CAUTION: Never crank the engine after removing the timing chain.
- Remove chain tensioner, See: Remove and Install Chain Tensioner Piston.
- Open lockplates and unscrew sprockets.
Installation Note: Tightening torque: 9 + 1 Nm (6.5 + 0.5 ft. lbs.).

- Turn shaft (1) up to the arrest - camshaft is held down for removal of bearing caps.
- Unscrew camshaft bearing caps.
- Loosen the arrest and relax the camshaft. Remove Special Tool 11 3 010. Mark camshafts "E" (intake), or "A" (exhaust) and remove.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Camshafts are identical for exhaust and intake sides.
Install a used camshaft in the same position.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 28
- Turn crankshaft to TDC.

- Install camshaft that one each groove faces up and inward - TDC position.

- Hold camshaft in TDC position with Special Tool 11 3 020 and turn shaft (1) up to the arrest - camshaft is held down for installation of
bearing caps.
- Install camshaft bearing caps on timing case according to lettering.

Tightening torque: 22 + 2 Nm (16 + 1.5 ft. lbs.).
- Tighten the timing chain in opposite direction of engine rotation and mount on the intake side sprocket"E" first.
- Install lockplate and bolt down the sprocket,
- Install exhaust side sprocket "A".

- Install adapter (1).
- Install Lockplate and bolt down the sprocket.
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 29
- Install chain tensioner, See: Remove and Install Chain Tensioner Piston.
- Make sure that:
- Crankshaft at TDC
- Lock sprocket mounting bolts with a lockplate.

- Adjust valve clearance,See: Valve Clearance.
Cam distance "N"

Nominal value: 43.713 mm (1.721").
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 30
Remove and Install Chain Tensioner Piston
REMOVING AND INSTALLING PISTON FOR CHAIN TENSIONER
- Unscrew plug (1).
CAUTION:
- Strong spring pressure.
- Remove spring (3) and piston (4).
Installation Note: Replace seal (2).
Installation Note:
- Check length of spring (3). Nominal value: 159 ± 0.5 mm (6.260 ± 0.020").
- Conically wound end of spring faces plug (1).
Tightening torque:
Plug (1) 40 ± 2 Nm (29 ± 1.5 ft. lbs.).
Cylinder (5) 50 ± 2 Nm (36 ± 1.5 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: Piston (4) and cylinder (5) are matched - code 1 or 2. Only install parts with same code.
- Install cylinder with groove facing back (as seen looking forward in car) and position with groove facing up.
- Guide piston opening into tensioning rail.
- Unscrew nipple (7) - replace O-ring (8) if necessary.

- Add engine oil, until oil runs out of nipple (7).
- Tighten nipple (7).
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 31
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE

- Crank engine with Special Tool 11 3 020.
- Measure valve clearance of cams facing up.

- Compare measured valve clearance with the specified valve clearance.
Nominal values:
0.26 to 0.35 mm (0.010 to 0.014") - cold.
0.31 to 0.40 mm (0.012 to 0.016") - warm.
- If the valve clearance is not within specified tolerances, turn openings of tappets as shown.
- Guide in Special Tool 11 3 170 according to camshaft "A" (exhaust) or "E" (intake) and press tappets down.
- Blow out valve shim with compressed air.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 32
- Measure thickness of removed valve shim.

- Install shim of required thickness with the lettering facing down.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 33
Cylinder Head Cover: Service and Repair
REMOVING AND INSTALLING CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Unscrew nuts (1).
Pull off spark plug connectors.
Take off ignition lead tube.
Loosen hose clamp (2) and pull off bleeder hose.
Unscrew nuts and take off cylinder head cover.
Installation:
Check gaskets, replacing if necessary.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 34
Engine Lubrication: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
Remove air cleaner with air flow sensor.
Pull off plug on oil pressure switch.

Unscrew oil pressure switch (1).
Installation:
Check seal (2). replacing if necessary.
Screw in Special Tool 11 4 060.

Connect 10 bar (142 psi) pressure tester of BMW Service Tester.
Install air cleaner.
Measure oil pressure.
Oil pressure at idle = 0.5 bar (7.3 psi)
Oil pressure at top speed = 4.0 to 6.0 bar (58 to 87 psi)
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 35
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
Pull off plug on oil pressure switch.

Unscrew oil pressure switch (1).
Installation:
Check seal (2). replacing if necessary.
Screw in Special Tool 11 4 060.

Connect 10 bar (142 psi) pressure tester of BMW Service Tester.
Install air cleaner.
Measure oil pressure.
Oil pressure at idle = 0.5 bar (7.3 psi)
Oil pressure at top speed = 4.0 to 6.0 bar (58 to 87 psi)
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 36
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
REPLACING GUIDE TUBE FOR OIL DIPSTICK
Install guide tube with Loctite No. 270 and drive in against the stop.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 37
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
REPLACING FULL FLOW OIL FILTER
Unscrew filter with Special Tool 11 4 020.
Installation:
Lubricate gasket with light coat of oil. Tighten oil filter by hand until the gasket bears on surface - then tighten filter by hand one half turn more.
Add oil, start engine and check oil level as well as for leaks.
If engine no longer builds up oil pressure after replacement of the oil filter cartridge, stop the engine. turn the filter cartridge approx. 90° and
tighten it again after starting the engine and waiting until a small amount of oil escapes from the filter (bleeding procedures).
1. From oil cooler

2. To oil cooler
3. Temperature regulator - switches off oil cooler at of approx. 95°C (203° F)
4. Oil filter
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 38
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing Lower Oil Pan
REMOVING AND INSTALLING OIL PAN LOWER SECTION
Remove splash guard.

Drain engine oil.
Unscrew oil pan bolts.
Installation:
Tightening torque:
Oil drain plug 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.)
Oil pan bolts 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.)
Take off oil pan.
Installation:
Replace gasket.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 39
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing Upper Oil Pan
REMOVING AND INSTALLING OIL PAN UPPER SECTION
Pull out oil dipstick

Remove oil pump.
Remove reinforcement plate.
Disconnect plug (1).

Unscrew holder (2) and ground lead (3).
Loosen clamp and pull off bleeding hose (4).
Unscrew oil pan bolts and remove oil pan upper section.
Installation:
Tightening torque: 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs).
Installation:
Clean sealing surface.

Replace oil pan gasket.
Coat joint on timing case cover and end cover with a brush-on universal sealing compound.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 40
Oil Pressure Sender: Locations
LH Side Of Engine Compartment.
Lower LH Front Of Engine
Applicable to: M3
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 41
Oil Pump: Service and Repair
Oil Pump Replace
REMOVING AND INSTALLING OIL PUMP
Remove lower oil pan section.
Unscrew nut (1) and take off sprocket.

Unscrew bolts (2).
Installation:
Push on sprocket with mounted oil pump.
Tightening torque of nut: 25 to 30 Nm (18 to 22 ft. lbs.).
Installation / Chain Tightness:
Check installed position of 0-ring (3) between housing and pressure pipe.
Adjust chain tightness with shim (4) in such a manner. that chain gives under light thumb pressure.
Check position of oil bore in shim.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 42
Replacing Oil Pump Drive Chain
REPLACING OIL PUMP DRIVE CHAIN
Remove timing chain.
Unscrew nut (2) and take off sprocket.
Installation:
Check sprockets for wear.

Adjust chain tightness.
Chains with green code are longer than chains with a red code.
Tightening torque: 25 to 30 Nm (18 to 22 ft. lbs.)
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 43
Testing and Servicing Oil Pump
TESTING AND SERVICING OIL PUMP
Check whether oil pump runs easily by turning the drive shaft.
Clean oil filter screen.
Disassemble oil pump.
Check oil pump for wear.
- Scoring in body
- Wear on rotors
The pressure safety valve is located in the main bore and regulates the engine oil pressure.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 44
Check whether piston (6) moves easily.

Check length of spring (7) = 68 mm (2.677").
Pressure safety valve (8 bar = 114 psi) regulates the oil pressure in front of the oil filter and prevents oil filter leakage.
Check seat of piston (8).
Check length of spring (9) = 44 ± 0.4 mm (1.732 ± 0.016").
Installation:
Press in spring (9) and washer (10) with a wrench socket and install circlip (11).
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 45
Timing Chain: Service and Repair
REPLACING TIMING CHAIN
Valve Timing
1. Double-row timing chain

2. Sprocket (guide wheel)
3. Needle sleeve
4. Shaft
5. O-ring
6. Washer
7. Spring washer
8. Hexagon nut
9. Guide rail
10. Shaft bolt
11. Lockwasher
12. Washer
13. Shaft bolt
14. Tensioning rail, lower (head removed)
15. Lockwasher
16. Circlip
17. Tensioning rail upper (chain removed)
18. Shaft bolt
19. O-ring
20. Chain tensioner piston and cylinder (matched)
21. Spring
22. Seal
23. Seal
24. Plug
25. Guide rail
26. Bolt
27. Washer
Remove lower timing case cover.

Remove sprockets on camshafts.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 46
Remove lockwashers.
Pull guide rail forward and swing aside.

Installation:
Timing chain is pre.stretched.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 47
Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair
REMOVING AND INSTALLING UPPER TENSIONING RAIL

See: Timing Chain
Unscrew bolt (1) partially.
Screw on Special Tools 11 3 040, 11 3 042 and 11 3 062.
Knock out the shaft.
Installation:
Check O-ring, replacing if necessary.
Check tensioning rail arrangement!
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 48
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair
REMOVING AND INSTALLING PISTON FOR CHAIN TENSIONER
- Unscrew plug (1).
CAUTION:
- Strong spring pressure.
- Remove spring (3) and rod (4).
Installation Note: Replace seal (2).
Installation Note:
- Check length of spring (3). Nominal value: 159 ± 0.5 mm (6.260 ± 0.020").
- Conically wound end of spring faces plug (1).
Tightening torque:
Plug (1) 40 ± 2 Nm (29 ± 1.5 ft. lbs.).
Cylinder (5) 50 ± 2 Nm (36 ± 1.5 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: Rod (4) and cylinder (5) are matched - code 1 or 2. Only install parts with same code.
- Install cylinder with groove facing back (as seen looking forward in car) and position with groove facing up.
- Guide rod opening into tensioning rail.
- Unscrew nipple (7) - replace O-ring (8) if necessary.

- Add engine oil, until oil runs out of nipple (7).
- Tighten nipple (7).
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 49
Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations

- Make sure that:
- Crankshaft at TDC
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 50
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing Lower Timing Case
REMOVING AND INSTALLING / SEALING LOWER TIMING CASE COVER
Disconnect battery ground lead.

Unscrew alternator.
Installation:
Tighten drive belt and check tightness with Special Tool 11 5 020.
Unscrew power steering pump.

Hoses remain connected
Installation:
Tighten drive belt and check tightness with Special Tool 11 5 020.
Unscrew reinforcement plate.

See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing Lower Oil Pan
Unscrew and remove bolts (1...3).

Loosen remaining oil pan bolts.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 51
Installation:
Install bolts (1...3) with Loctite No. 270.
Remove water pump.

Remove pulley on crankshaft.
Remove piston for chain tensioner.
See: Timing Chain Tensioner/Service and Repair
Unscrew bolts (4).
Unscrew remaining bolts on timing case cover.
Loosen oil pan gasket on timing case cover carefully with a knife.
If oil pan gasket is damaged, remove oil pan and replace gasket.
Take off timing case cover.
Installation:
Break upper edges with a file.
Coat sealing surfaces with Three Bond Silicone 12O7.
Installation:
Install new gaskets, coat with Three Bond Silicone 12O7 and cut off ends.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 52
Coat mating surfaces with Three Bond Silicone 12O7.
Guide in cover uniformly
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 53
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Replacing Radial Oil Seal In Timing Case
REPLACING RADIAL OIL SEAL IN TIMING CASE COVER
Remove pulley on crankshaft - see 11 21 120. Lift out radial oil seal with a screwdriver.
Lubricate sealing lip of radial oil seal with oil.

Press in radial oil seal flush with Special Tools 11 1 273 and 11 1 271.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 54
Cooling System: Service and Repair
Cooling System, Bleeding (Radiator with integral expansion tank)
NOTE: On radiators with a separate expansion tank, a bleed screw is not provided The cooling system with separate expansion tank is self
bleeding via the vent hose on the expansion tank
Air may become trapped in the system during filling. Trapped air can prevent proper coolant circulation. Whenever the coolant is drained and
filled, the system should be bled of trapped air.
1. With engine cold, add coolant to expansion tank until level reaches COLD (KALT) mark on tank.
2. Loosen bleed screw on radiator expansion tank. See Fig. 7.
Fig. 7. Cooling system bleed screw on radiator (arrow). Note cold level mark on expansion tank.
3. M3 models: Loosen bleed screw on thermostat housing.
4. Set temperature controls in passenger compartment to full warm and turn ignition on position (do not start engine).
5. Slowly add coolant until it spills from bleed screws. When coolant spilling from bleed screws is free of air bubbles, tighten screws.
6. Run engine until it reaches operating temperature. After engine has cooled, recheck coolant level and top up as necessary.
CAUTION: Always use genuine BMW coolant or its equivalent to avoid the formation of harmful, clogging deposits in the cooling system.
Use of other antifreeze solutions may be harmful to the cooling system.
Tightening Torque
- Radiator bleed screw to thermostat housing 8 Nm (71 in-lb)
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 55
Coolant: Testing and Inspection
Checking For Leaks Between Cooling System and Combustion Chamber
Warning: Danger of scalding!
Only perform this work after engine has cooled down.
Caution: When engine is running with cooling system depressurized, this can create steam bubbles. These cause the engine to overheat.
Observe coolant temperature.
Carry out test with CO leak tester for cylinder head leak test in accordance with operating instructions of equipment manufacturer.
In the event of a leak, the color of the test liquid turns yellow by the carbon dioxide (combustion gas) entering the cooling system.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 56
Auxiliary Fan Motor: Service and Repair
REMOVING AND INSTALLING EXTRA FAN ASSEMBLY
- Remove and install radiator. See: Radiator/Service and Repair
- Remove and install all radiator grill sections. See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair
- Unscrew nuts on extra tan.
- Unscrew condenser.
- Lift out trim panel.
- Disconnect wire plug.
- Tie back condenser and lift out extra fan from above.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 57
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
1. Remove sensor and immerse sensor element in suitable temperature controlled solution.
2. Connect ohmmeter across sensor terminals using suitable adapters, and monitor sensor resistance as temperature changes.
3. Resistance should be as follows:
8200 - 10,500 ohms .................................................................................................................................................................................... at 14°F,

2200 - 2700 ohms ....................................................................................................................................................................................... at 68°F,
300 - 360 ohms ......................................................................................................................................................................................... at 176°F.
4. If resistance is not within specifications, sensor is defective.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 58
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation
The heating system utilizes hot coolant from the engine cooling system to warm air for heating the passenger compartment. The amount of coolant
that flows into the heating system is controlled by an electric water valve.
The water valve is electrically actuated. It is located at the left-center back of the engine compartment (beside the brake booster). It controls coolant
flow through the heater core. The valve is powered closed by an electric switch; when not powered, it springs open. The valve, when powered
closed, prevents hot coolant from entering the heater core, so the air entering the passenger compartment is not heated, When power is removed, the
valve springs open, so that hot coolant flows through the heater core and can warm the air entering the passenger compartment.
The E31, E32, E34, E36 (IHKR and IHKA), E38, and E39 cars use pulsed water valves to control the heater core temperature.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 59
Heater Control Valve: Service and Repair
Removal:
- Drain coolant.
- Disconnect both water hoses.

- Remove left side underdash panel.
- Remove lower portion of center console.
- Pull off plug (1).
- Unscrew bolt (1).

- Take off clamp (2).
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 60
- Unscrew bolts (1 and 2).
- Unscrew bolts.
- Take off water valve with pipe lines.
Checking Water Valve:

- Water valve should be open when without electric power.
- Water valve should be closed when supplied with battery voltage.
Installation Notes:
- Replace seal.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 61
- Replace seals.
- Bleed cooling system.
- Check coolant level.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 62
Heater Core: Description and Operation
When the water valve is open, hot engine coolant circulates through the heater core, instead of the radiator. The heater core heats the air that passes
through it; the hot air can then be used to warm the passenger compartment. The heater core (like the radiator) is also a "heat exchanger."
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 63
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Removal
- Drain coolant.
- Remove lower portion of center console.
- Remove left side underdash panel.
- Loosen screw (1).
- Remove connector (1) on left side between heater (3) and rear area heater duct (2).
- Unscrew screws.
- Take off molded parts.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 64
- Unscrew bolts.
- Unscrew bolts.
- Pull heater core out of housing.
Installation Notes:
- Replace seals.
- Bleed cooling system.
- Check coolant level.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 65
Radiator: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing Radiator
Caution! Danger of scalding when engine is hot!
- Unscrew radiator cap.
- Disconnect coolant hoses and drain coolant.
Installation:
Add coolant.
- Version with Radiator Drain Plug:

‹› Unscrew drain bolt (1) to drain coolant.
- Disconnect coolant hoses.
Installation:
‹› Tighten drain bolt.
‹› Use new hose clamps.
‹› Add coolant.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 66
- Loosen clamps and suspend fan cowl over fan.
Installation:
Make sure fan cowl retainers are positioned correctly.
- Cars with Air Conditioner:

‹› Pull off plugs on temperature switches.
Cars with Automatic Transmission:

‹› Unscrew oil cooler lines and plug open connections with caps.
Installation:
Check ATF level, correcting if necessary.
- Unscrew bolt and lift out radiator.
Installation
‹› Install washers sleeves and shown.
‹› Tighten bolt.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 67
Installation:
Check installed position of rubber mounts.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 68
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
Fig. 7 Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter simultaneously removes up to 90% of all three major pollutants, (HC, CO, and oxides of nitrogen). A complete
catalytic reaction is dependent on the fuel mixture staying within a very narrow range (+/- 1% of 14.7:1) which can only be achieved with a
properly functioning oxygen sensor system. The catalytic converter consists of a metal housing, a ceramic grid substrate, and the catalytic coating
of platinum and rhodium. The active metal content is about 2 grams of platinum/rhodium.
As the exhaust gasses containing HC and CO are passed through the converter in the presence of oxygen, the platinum catalyst starts the oxidation
(burning) process. The HC and CO then unite with the oxygen to form water vapor and carbon dioxide. This oxidation process has no effect on the
NOx emissions.
To reduce the oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a separate reaction is necessary called a 'reduction.' A reduction reaction is the removal of oxygen from a
material. In the Three Way type converters, rhodium is used as the catalyst to break down the oxides of nitrogen into its components, nitrogen and
oxygen.
The effective conversion of pollutants begins at an operating temperature of about 250°C ( 480°F). The ideal operating temperature for maximum
conversion and long service life is 400°C - 800°C (750°F - 1500°F). Engine malfunctions, for example misfires, can cause the temperature of the
converter to increase to more than 1400°C (2500°F). Such temperatures lead to the complete destruction of the converter through the melting of the
substrate material.
The use of leaded fuel must be avoided except in emergencies as it will permanently render the converter ineffective. The lead compounds used in
leaded fuels are deposited in the pores and on the surfaces of the active material, reducing or eliminating exposure of to the exhaust gasses.
Excessive engine oil residues can also poison the catalyst.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 69
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection
By unscrewing the test screws on the exhaust manifold and attaching BMW adapter #13 0 100 or substitute, the efficiency of the catalytic
converter can be checked by measuring and comparing the CO content before and after the converter. The CO content after the catalytic converter
must be substantially lower then the CO content before the converter. Reconnect test screws on the exhaust manifold.
An additional testing method can be used to check the catalytic converter visually. Remove the catalytic converter from the vehicle. With either
opening toward a light source, inspect the ceramic insert from both sides. If the ceramic insert is broken, melted or clogged the catalytic converter
must be replaced.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 70
Ignition System: Description and Operation
With the Motronic system, primary current switching and dwell period are controlled within the Motronic Control Unit (MCU) based on
signals from the TDC, reference and engine speed sensors. The MCU controls ignition system operation, including ignition timing, and the
electronic fuel injection system based on signals from various engine and vehicle sensors. On these models, the ignition distributor is used
only to direct secondary spark voltage to the spark plugs.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 71
Ignition System: Testing and Inspection
Testing Requirements
1. Fully charged battery (at least 12 V DC).
2. Adequate fuel quality and quantity.
3. Fuel pump, fuel pressure, and fuel injection systems in good working order.
4. Ambient temperature approximately 20°C (68°F); (significant temperature change will affect the measured values).
5. Engine in good mechanical condition (good compression, valve clearances set, etc.)
6. Starter must be in good condition.
IMPORTANT: Carefully read "PRECAUTIONS" section before working on TCI or DME systems.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 72
Test Specifications
Pulse transmitter*
a. Resistance between terminals 1 and 2 .................................................................................................................................... 540 Ohms ± 10%
Crankshaft position (TDC) sensor**

b. Resistance between terminals 8 and 10 .................................................................................................................................... less than 1 Ohm
Ignition coil
Resistance between 1 and 15 ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.5 Ohms + 10%
Resistance between 15 and 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 6K Ohms + 10%
High voltage
Resistance across rotor contacts ............................................................................................................................................... 1000 Ohms ± 20%
Resistance of angled caps at coil and distributor ..................................................................................................................... 1000 Ohms ± 20%
Resistance of shielded spark plug connectors .......................................................................................................................... 5000 Ohms ± 20%
*Single sensor (at front of engine, with toothed vibration damper).
**TDC sensor is attached to the #1 spark plug wire, under the distributor cap protective cover.
TDC sensor is wired to the engine diagnostic plug only. (Terminal designations are for the diagnostic plug).
Note; BMW uses solid core wire with screw on resistors at each end. Because of this, all wires should have about the same resistance, regardless
of length (compared to carbon core wire in which the resistance increases with the length of the wire).
For additional Motronic information, refer to "Computers and Control Systems", See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 73
Motronic High Voltage Tests
1. Remove distributor cap and inspect.
a. Remove upper cover and spark plug wires from cap.
b. Using a 32mm wrench, unscrew the nut that holds the fan to the water pump (left hand threads!), and remove the fan.
c. Remove the three bolts that secure the distributor cap to the front cover (8mm heads), and remove the cap.
d. Inspect the cap for signs of cracking, burning, carbon tracking, corroded terminals, missing center carbon contact, etc.
e. Replace as necessary.
2. Remove distributor rotor and inspect.

a. With distributor cap removed, remove rotor by unscrewing the three socket head securing bolts with a 3mm allen wrench.
b. Check resistance between center and end contacts. Resistance should be 1000 Ohms ± 20%.
c. Inspect resistor (red compound section between contacts) for signs of cracking, or burning.
d. Inspect bakelite portion of rotor for cracking, chipping, or burning.
e. Replace rotor as necessary, tightening rotor to adapter bolts to 2.8 ± 0.2 Nm (2 ± 1 ft/lb).
3. Remove ignition wires and inspect.

a. Inspect the connectors at both ends of the wires for corrosion, bad or missing spring clips, and wire/connector connection.
b. Inspect insulation by bending wire in a tight radius and looking for cracks.
c. Check the resistance of the wires. Resistance should be:
Angled caps at coil and distributor ................................................................................................................................... 1000 Ohms ± 20%
Shielded spark plug connectors ........................................................................................................................................ 5000 Ohms ± 20%
Note; BMW uses solid core wire with screw on resistors at each end. Because of this, all wires should have about the same resistance,
regardless of length (compared to carbon core wire in which the resistance increases with the length of the wire).
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 74
Firing Order: Specifications
All 4 cyl Engines
All 4 cyl Engines
Firing Sequence 1-3-4-2
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 75
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Number One Cylinder
Cylinders numbered 1 > 4 front to back.
Firing Order 1342
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 76
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Fig. 65 Pulse transmitter plug
Fig. 67 Pulse transmitter scope pattern
The pulse transmitter is mounted on the front of the engine, and gets its signals from the teeth cast into the vibration damper. This
transmitter performs a dual function, taking the place of the separate speed and reference sensors that were mounted in the bellhousing at the
rear of the engine on other models. The speed signal comes from the teeth in the vibration damper, while the reference signal is derived from
two specific missing teeth. To test the transmitter:
1. Disconnect pulse transmitter plug.
2. Connect an oscilloscope to connections 1 and 2 of the pulse transmitter, and crank the engine. Scope pattern should look like Fig. 67.
3. Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2, Fig. 65. Resistance should be 540 Ohms ± 10%
4. Replace the transmitter if it fails either test.
Note: The preferred method of testing is with an oscilloscope. The scope pattern is more important than the resistance.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 77
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Oscilloscope Patterns and Waveforms
Electronic Ignition Distributor
BACKGROUND AND APPLICATION INFORMATION:

Magnetic Crankshaft Position (CKP) and Camshaft Position (CMP) sensors are found on many North American, Asian and European-built
cars and trucks, ranging from Toyota Corollas to Mercedes Benz flagships. They are analog sensors. They are still around because they are
very reliable, perform adequately, and are inexpensive to manufacture. These sensors can be found mounted inside a distributor, or at the
front, middle, or rear of the crankshaft or camshaft. They are two wire sensors, but many times their two wires are encased in a shielded,
wire-braid conduit. This is because their signal is somewhat delicate, in electronic terms, and is susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI or RFI) from high voltage spark plug wires, car phones or other electronic devices on the vehicle. EMI and RFI can distort the signal's
Critical Dimensions and create an "electronic communication" breakdown, which could in turn, cause a driveability problem.
CONNECT AND SETUP THE DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE (DSO):

1. Connect the "COM" probe to the sensor wire labeled (-) or "low" in the wiring diagram.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the sensor wire labeled (+) or "high" in the wiring diagram.
3. Set the voltage scaling to 2 V/div. Alter as needed later.
4. Set the time base to 10 ms/div (1/100th of a second per division). Alter as needed later. A time base of 20 ms/div may be needed to diagnose
no-starts due to slower cranking RPM.
5. Select "GND" coupling and position the trace on the division line in the center of the DSO display.
6. After ground position is set, select "AC" input coupling.
7. Select "NORMAL" acquire mode.
8. Set the "TRIGGER" mode to "AUTO." Set the "TRIGGER SLOPE" to trigger on a negative slope.
EXERCISE THE SENSOR

Crank or start the engine.
Good Crankshaft Position Sensor Pattern (Typical)
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 78
EXPECT THIS WAVEFORM RESULT

There are many AC waveform shapes produced from the different types of camshaft and crankshaft position sensors. There is nothing more
effective than having a reference waveform to compare to when determining if a magnetic cam or crankshaft position sensor signal is good or
bad. Generally, the oscillations (the "ups and downs" in the waveform) may not be perfect mirror images of each other above and below the
zero level mark, but they should be relatively close on most sensors. The amplitude of magnetic CMP and CKP sensors will increase with
increasing RPM; the higher the RPM, the taller the waveform. And, as RPM increases, frequency increases, meaning that more oscillations
show up on the DSO display. The diagnostician should look for assurance that the critical dimensions of amplitude, frequency and shape are
all intact, repeatable, regular and predictable. This means that the amplitude of the peaks has to be sufficient, the time between pulses
repeatable, and the shapes repeatable and predictable.
See: Testing and Inspection/Description of Automotive Signals/The 5 Critical Dimensions
IMPORTANT NOTE: Beware that peak voltages, as well as the shape of the waveform, will vary substantially from one type of sensor to
the next. Also, since an integral part of the sensor is a coil, or winding, their failures can be very temperature dependent. In most of these
cases the waveform will become much smaller or very deformed, and the engine will stall, misfire or cut out at the same time the waveform
takes on new shape. In general, the most common type of AC sensor failure is where the sensor won't generate a signal at all -- it's
inoperative. It's boring to look at, but if the waveform stays flat while cranking the engine, make sure the circuit isn't grounded, check the
DSO and sensor connections, make sure the proper parts are spinning, then condemn the sensor.
FOR MORE INFORMATION

See: Testing and Inspection/Description of Automotive Signals
See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnosis Using a Labscope
See: Testing and Inspection/Labscope Quick Reference Appendix
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 79
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
1. Release clamp securing sensor to engine, then pull sensor from clamp.
2. Open diagnostic connector cover, lift up retaining clips, then press connector from holder.
3. Release spring clips on TDC transmitter terminals 1, 2 and 3, then remove terminals from connector. Note installation position of each
terminal to ensure correct installation.
4. Reverse procedure to install, ensuring sensor is properly seated in holder and that air gap between sensor and contact button on balancer is
.008-.080 inch.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 80
Ignition Coil: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Check ignition coil.
a. Check pressure relief plug at the top of the coil. If the plug is missing, or if compound is running out of the coil, replace the coil and the
TCI control unit.
b. With ignition on, battery voltage should be present at coil terminal 15.
a. With low and high voltage wires disconnected from coil, check resistance between terminals.
Between 1 and 15 ................................................................................................................................................................. 0.5 Ohms + 10%
Between 15 and 4 ................................................................................................................................................................. 6K Ohms + 10%
If resistances are not within specification, replace ignition coil.
c. Check wire from coil terminal 1 to control unit terminal 4. There should be no resistance. Repair wiring as necessary.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 81
Ignition Coil: Oscilloscope Patterns and Waveforms
Import Distributor

The ignition coil primary signal can be one of the most important diagnostic signals in powertrain management systems. The ignition coil
primary signal has always been a valuable diagnostic tool. This is still true. Some of the most effective diagnostic uses of this signal are for
driveability problems, such as no starts, stalls at idle or while driving, misfires, hesitation, cuts out while driving, etc.
Many times the critical diagnostic path to pinpointing a problem successfully has the same question in it: "Is the problem ignition or fuel
related?" When a vehicle is cutting out or stalling, etc., and it is not known if the engine is starving for fuel or if it's momentarily losing spark,
the ignition primary signal is often very useful in eliminating one or the other.
The DSO is particularly effective on the ignition primary signal in instances when the driveability problem only occurs while driving or only
occurs intermittently, because the portable DSO can be taken on a road test. Unfortunately, some newer EI (distributorless) systems have
coils mounted in such a way that it is relatively difficult or impossible to get at the ignition coil primary circuit to connect the DSO. On those
systems it is advisable to use the appropriate DSO probe adapter and connect to an ignition secondary signal. In some cases where the
ignition coils are on top of the spark plugs (like the GM 2.3L Quad-4), installing temporary spark plug wires between the coils and the plugs
can assist in testing.
Connect and Setup the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO):
1. Connect the "COM" probe to a good ground source, such as the negative battery post or engine block.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the ignition coil primary signal (the pulsing side of the ignition coil). Use a wiring diagram to obtain the pin
number or the color of the wire.
3. Set the voltage scaling to 10 V/div (20 V/div may work better on some systems, and to see the height of the coil release spikes).
4. Set the time base to 5 ms/div. Alter as needed later.
5. Select "GND" coupling and position the trace on the second division line from the bottom of the DSO display.
6. After ground position is set, select "DC" input coupling.
7. Select "SPIKE DETECT" acquire mode.
8. Set "TRIGGER" mode to "AUTO".
Exercise The Circuit:
With the key on, engine running, use the throttle to accelerate and decelerate the engine or drive the vehicle as needed to make the
driveability problem occur.
Make sure that the Critical Dimensions of amplitude, frequency, shape and pulse width are all consistent, repeatable, and operating properly.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 82
Good Ignition Coil Primary Signal Pattern (Typical)
Expect This Waveform Result
The duty cycle (dwell) should change when the engine is accelerated. See the pointers on the sample waveform to help determine coil
on-time (dwell) and to identify the spark burn line. Additionally, more pulses (on/off cycles) should be seen on the screen of the DSO as
engine RPM increases.
The current limiting circuit on some vehicles will switch in about 2 milliseconds after the coil is turned on, making the waveform lift about 8
volts off the ground level, until the circuit is turned off and the tall spike is produced. Generally look for the tall peaks to have equal
amplitude. Also look for the proper shape, more in terms of it being consistent and repeatable. Pay close attention to whether the frequency
of the waveform is keeping pace with engine RPM, and that the pulse width (dwell) changes when engine load and RPM changes.
Possible defects and Critical Dimension violations to watch for are inconsistent spike heights, dwell not changing with engine RPM and load,
and instances where the waveform gets inconsistent (or goes completely flat) while the driveability problem is occurring.
For More Information
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 83
Ignition Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVING AND INSTALLING STEERING LOCK/IGNITION SWITCH:

- Remove steering wheel.
- Remove instrument panel trim at bottom left.
- Remove lower steering column casing section.
- Press in hooks on both sides toward ignition switch and pull out the ignition switch.
Installation:
- Check position between ignition switch and steering wheel lock!
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 84
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
REMOVING AND INSTALLING OR REPLACING STEERING LOCK CYLINDER:
- Insert ignition key in lock and turn lock cylinder to "R" = 60°.
- Push a 1.2 mm (3/64") dia. wire into bore of the cylinder and pull out the lock cylinder.
If There is No Bore in Lock Cylinder:
- Remove Steering wheel.

- Remove steering column casing lower section.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 85
- Press down lock with a screwdriver.

- Turn key to point of locking and pull out lock cylinder.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 86
Spark Plug: Application and ID
The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB SI B12 01 05 dated February 2010.
This technical service bulletin (12 01 05) was first published in May of 2005 (that is the meaning of the 05) and has been updated several times, if
you are currently viewing an older vehicle and you wish to see the full text of this TSB, consider selecting a 2006 (or newer) E90 (3 Series) or E60
(5 Series) with the N52 engine.
SPARK PLUG APPLICATION CHART
Application And ID
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 87
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
1. Connect suitable pressure gauge inline between cold start valve and supply hose or to main fuel supply hose, ensuring that gauge is properly
installed to prevent fuel leaks. Nominal fuel pressure with engine running should be 3.0 bar (43 psi).
2. Disconnect and plug vacuum hose to pressure regulator, start engine and observe pressure gauge. Reading with hose disconnected should be
approximately 3.3 bar (47 psi).
3. Reconnect vacuum hose to regulator and observe pressure gauge. Reading should drop to approximately 2.8 bar (40 psi).
4. Accelerate engine several times while observing gauge. Pressure reading should rise briefly as engine is accelerated.
5. If reading obtained in step 2 is too low, briefly pinch off return hose from regulator while observing gauge.
6. If pressure reading rises with hose pinched, pump, tank and lines are satisfactory.
7. If pressure readings observed in steps 2 and 3 are not as specified and pump, tank and lines are satisfactory, or if regulator fails to alter
pressure in response to engine vacuum, regulator should be replaced.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 88
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 15 Air flow meter
Intake air flow is measured by the air flow sensor. It is located in the intake passage between the air filter and intake manifold, and informs
the ECU of the rate of air flow. A measuring flap swings in the airstream against the pressure of a spring, and is connected to a
potentiometer.
The potentiometer transmits the measuring flap position to the ECU, which then uses this information to determine engine load. The air
flow meter also controls fuel pump operation and idling. An adjustable idle air by-pass is used to regulate air/fuel mixture at low engine
speeds.
Incorporated into the air flow sensor is the air temperature sensor. This sensor informs the ECU of the ambient temperature of the incoming
air.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 89
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
1. Mechanical test.
a. Detach intake hose on air flow sensor.
b. Move sensor plate with finger.
c. Sensor plate must move easily through entire range, without touching housing, or binding on its axis.
d. If not, replace the air flow sensor.
2. Electric air flow sensor test.

a. Potentiometer test.
1. Connect an Ohmmeter between terminals 2 and 3.
2. Check resistance while moving sensor plate along its entire travel.
Control unit (ECM) No.
0 280 001 106, 111, 122 ........................................................................................................................................................... 70 - 800 Ohms
0 280 001 008 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 475 - 1900 Ohms
0 261 200 007, 008, 021 ....................................................................................................................................................... 475 - 1900 Ohms
b. Air temp sensor test.
1. Disconnect connector from air flow sensor.
2. Measure resistance between sensor terminals 1 and 4 (outer terminals).
3. Resistance should be:
8250 - 10,560 ohms ................................................................................................................................................... at -9 - -11°C (12 - 16°F)
2280 - 2780 ohms ...................................................................................................................................................... at 19 - 21°C (66 - 70°F)
750 - 910 ohms ...................................................................................................................................................... at 49 - 51°C (120 - 124°F)
4. If resistance values are not within specifications, temperature sensor is defective.
Note: Air temperature sensor is integral with the air flow sensor and cannot be serviced separately. If sensor is defective, air flow
meter must be replaced.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 90
Fig. 66 Air flow meter schematic
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 91
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Oscilloscope Patterns and Waveforms
Vane Type Mass Air Flow Meter Test
Bosch Vane-Type Airflow Meter
Background and Application Information:
There are two main varieties of Bosch vane-type airflow meters (the swinging door type). The much more common variety is found on many
European, Asian, and even some U.S. built Asian vehicles (ones assembled in U.S. plants owned by Asian manufacturers -- Transplants).
The most common variety is of the type shown in the example, distinguished by its "high airflow = high voltage" operating parameter. Many
Toyotas, however, are equipped with Bosch style vane mass airflow meters that operate opposite the above -- their voltage is high when
airflow is low. Both varieties are analog in design and are potentiometers. They actually operate very much like a throttle position sensor.
They are sent a reference voltage and return a voltage signal to the PCM proportional to how far the vane, or door, of the airflow meter has
been pushed open by the incoming air. Overswing of the door caused by snap accelerations provides for acceleration enrichment.
1. Connect the "COM" probe to the airflow meter's ground circuit, engine block, or negative battery post.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the airflow meter's signal wire to the PCM. Use a wiring diagram to obtain the PCM pin number or the color of
the wire.
3. Set the voltage scaling to 1 V/div.
4. Set the time base to 500 ms/div (1/2 second per division).
8. "TRIGGER" mode is usually set automatically (Roll Mode).
Exercise the Sensor -- Method #1:
Shut off all accessories, start the engine and let it idle in park or neutral. After the idle has stabilized, check the idle voltage (the left side of
the above waveform). Now perform the following sequence of acceleration and deceleration and try to produce a waveform similar to the
example:
^ Rev the engine from idle to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) with a moderate input speed (this should only take about 2 seconds -- don't overrev
the engine).
^ Let it drop back down to idle for about two seconds.
^ Rev the engine again to WOT, but this time very quickly and let it drop back to idle again.
^ Press the "RUN/HOLD" button to freeze the waveform on the screen. The sensor has now been put through its entire operating range and
now a close look at the sensor's performance can be conducted.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 92
Good Bosch Mass Air Flow Sensor Pattern (Typical Vane-Type)
Expect This Waveform Result -- Method #1:
There aren't very many voltage specifications available anywhere to compare with, but generally the sensor's voltage should range from about
one volt at idle to just over four volts at WOT and not quite back to idle voltage on full deceleration. Generally, on non-Toyota varieties, high
airflow makes high voltage and low airflow makes low voltage. The amplitude of the waveform should remain steady in a range for a given
amount of airflow. There should be no radical departures of the Critical Dimension of amplitude throughout its operating range. When the
sensor's voltage output doesn't follow airflow closely, the waveform will show it AND the engine will be noticeably affected.
Exercise The Sensor -- Method #2:
Another good way to test the sensor is to set the DSO into SPIKE DETECT acquire mode and remove the intake air boot to the sensor. Then,
with the Key On, Engine Off (KOEO), take the eraser end of a pencil or other soft object and open and close the door manually. This method
scrutinizes the sensor a little more than the other method, and thus smaller, worn or damaged spots in the sensor's carbon track can be
identified. Some intermittent glitches will show up better this way. However, this only tests the electronic components -- it won't help test the
intake air system's (ductwork, etc.) integrity or find a intermittently binding air flapper.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The little shoulder, or peak, by the "Snap Acceleration" pointer is caused by the vane door's overswing and is used by the PCM for
acceleration enrichment.

Hot Wire Type Mass Air Flow Sensor Test
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 93
Bosch Hot Wire Mass Airflow Sensor

Bosch hot wire mass airflow sensors are found on many North American, Asian and European built vehicles. They are analog sensors and,
although some are metal, some are plastic, etc., they all look fairly similar. Additionally, most varieties of this Bosch-designed sensor operate
in the same manner -- "high air flow = high voltage." They have fairly complex inner circuitry that produces a temperature compensated,
analog mass airflow signal that is sent to the PCM. The PCM uses this signal to calculate engine load, to determine fuel delivery, ignition
timing, etc.

1. Connect the "COM" probe to the MAF ground circuit, engine block, or negative battery post.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the MAF signal wire to the PCM. Use a wiring diagram to obtain the PCM pin number or the color of the wire.
Exercise the Sensor

Shut off all accessories, start the engine and let it idle in Park or Neutral. After the idle has stabilized check the idle voltage (the left side of
the above waveform). Now perform the following sequence of acceleration and deceleration, and try to produce a waveform similar to the
example:
1. Rev the engine from idle to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) with a moderate input speed (this should only take about 2 seconds -- don't overrev
the engine).
2. Let it drop back down to idle for about two seconds.
3. Rev the engine again to WOT, but this time very quickly and let it drop back to idle again.
4. Press the "RUN/HOLD" button to freeze the waveform on the screen. The sensor has now been put through its entire operating range and
now a close look at the sensor's performance can be conducted.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 94
Good Bosch Mass Air Flow Sensor Pattern (Typical Hot-Wire)

There aren't usually many voltage specifications available to aid in waveform comparison, but generally the sensor's voltage should range
from just over two volts at idle to just over four volts at WOT, and should dip slightly lower than idle voltage on full deceleration.
The amplitude of the waveform may look like it is fluctuating considerably when the engine is revved. As shown in the sample waveform,
this is normal. Since this sensor doesn't have any moving parts, it can react very quickly to changes in airflow. The hash seen on the
waveform under acceleration is actually from the individual intake air flow pulses at low intake vacuum. The superb conditioning circuits in
the PCM are at work cleaning this signal up before it is processed by the PCM, so it doesn't matter.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Voltages will vary substantially from one vehicle engine family to another. To complicate matters, 0.25 volt (1/4 of a volt) at idle can make
the difference between a good sensor and a bad one, or an engine that is blowing black smoke and one that is in perfect control of fuel
mixture. In some cases, this sensor can be difficult to diagnose definitively. Many bad sensors will have too high of an idle voltage and won't
reach 4 volts under WOT air flow.

[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 95
Cold Start Injector: Testing and Inspection
1. Remove cold start valve leaving fuel line connected and position nozzle of valve over suitable graduated cylinder.
2. Disconnect electrical connector from valve and connect jumper wires to valve terminals using suitable adapter.
3. To activate fuel pump, remove fuel pump relay from terminal board and connect battery voltage to terminal 87 in relay socket.
4. Energize valve for 1 minute by connecting jumper wires to battery. The fuel mist from the injector is highly flammable, and potentially
explosive. Care must be taken not to produce sparks near open container of fuel when energizing and de-energizing injectors.
5. Spray pattern should be an even cone with an angle of approximately 80°.
6. Injection rate should be 85cc ± 12% at 2.5 ± 0.05 bar (36 ± 1 psi).
7. After de-energizing valve, dry valve tip and observe leakage with fuel pump energized.
8. Valve should not leak more than .3cc of fuel in 1 minute at 2.5 bar (36 psi).
9. De-energize fuel pump, then check resistance of valve solenoid coil with suitable ohmmeter. Resistance should be 3 - 5 ohms at 20°C (68°F).
10. If cold start valve performance is not as outlined, valve should be replaced.
11. Install cold start valve using new seal, start engine and check for leaks.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 96
Fuel Injector: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Fig. 3 Fuel injector specifications
1. Remove fuel distribution rail and injectors , then reassemble injectors onto distribution rail.
2. Suspend injector assembly above suitable containers to catch and measure fuel and observe spray patterns. Connect fuel supply and return
lines using suitable extensions, and place in a stable location.
3. Remove fuel pump relay and connect battery voltage to terminal 87 in pump relay socket to activate fuel pump.
4. Inspect injectors. Injectors should not leak more than 1 drop of fuel per minute with fuel pressure of 2.5 bar (36 psi).
5. Connect jumper wires to each injector using suitable adapters.
6. Place graduated cylinder under injector to be tested, energize injector for 1 minute by connecting jumper wires to battery and observe spray
pattern and discharge rate. The fuel mist from the injector is highly flammable, and potentially explosive. Care must be taken not to
produce sparks near open container of fuel when energizing and de-energizing injectors.
7. Injectors should spray fuel in an even, conical 30 degree pattern, and each injector should deliver the amount of fuel shown in Fig. 3.
Injector code number is stamped on injector body adjacent to electrical connector.
8. Disconnect jumper wires from injectors and fuel pump relay terminal.
9. Check resistance of injector solenoid coils using suitable ohmmeter. Resistance should be as shown in Fig. 3.
10. Any injectors that fail to perform as specified should be replaced.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 97
Fuel Injector: Oscilloscope Patterns and Waveforms
Saturated Switch Type Injector Driver Test
Fuel Injector

Saturated switch injector drivers are used primarily on multiport fuel injection (MFI, PFI, SFI) systems on domestic and imported vehicles
alike. This type of injector driver is used on systems where the injectors are fired in groups and on systems that fire the injectors sequentially.
It is not used very much, if at all, on Throttle Body Injection (TBI) systems. Determining, or "reading" injector on-time from the waveform
of a saturated switch type injector is fairly easy. The injector on-time begins where the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) grounds the
circuit to turn it on (see the left pointer box on the waveform). The injector on-time ends where the PCM opens the control circuit. Since the
injector is a coil, when its electric field collapses from the PCM turning it off, it creates a spike (see the right pointer box on the waveform).
How to "read" injector on-time: First, count the number of divisions between where the PCM turned the injector on and where it turned the
injector off. In the database waveform example, the injector is on for just less than two divisions, 1.96 divisions to be exact. Since the time
base is set at 2 ms/div on the sample waveform, multiply 1.96 divisions times 2 ms/div; the injector was turned on by the PCM for 3.92 ms.
Therefore, 3.92 ms is the injector's on-time. This figure can be used to see if the Feedback Fuel Control System is doing its job. The mixture
can be manually enriched by adding propane or leaned out by creating a vacuum leak, while looking for the corresponding injector on-time
change.
NOTE: Some DSO's display the injector on-time numerically on the display with the waveform, which makes manual calculations a thing of
the past.

1. Connect the "COM" probe to the negative battery post or engine block.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the injector control signal from the PCM (the pulsing side of the fuel injector). Use a wiring diagram to obtain
the PCM pin number or the color of the wire.
4. Set the time base to 2 ms/div.
7. Select "SPIKE DETECT" acquire mode so the peak heights will be accurate and bad injector drivers will show up better on the display.
8. Set "TRIGGER" mode to "AUTO" to begin with, but as soon as a waveform appears on the screen, change to "NORMAL" mode and use the
up/down buttons to raise or lower the trigger level until the waveform is steady and positioned correctly on the display. Set "TRIGGER
SLOPE" to negative and position the trigger level where the PCM turns the injector on.
FOLLOW THIS PROCEDURE -- RICH/LEAN COMPENSATION TEST:

1. Start the engine and hold throttle at 2500 RPM for 2 - 3 minutes, until the engine is fully warmed up and the Feedback Fuel System enters
closed loop. Verify this by viewing the oxygen sensor signal on the DSO.
2. Shut off A/C and all other accessories. Put vehicle in park or neutral. Rev the engine slightly and watch for the corresponding injector
on-time increase on acceleration.
3. Induce propane into the intake and drive the mixture rich. If the system is working properly, the injector on-time will diminish, or get
smaller, to try to compensate for the rich mixture (high O2 voltage).
4. Create a vacuum leak and drive the mixture lean. If the system is working properly, the injector on-time will increase, or get larger, to try to
compensate for the lean mixture (low O2 voltage).
5. Raise the engine to 2500 RPM and hold it steady. On many systems the injector's on-time can be seen modulating (changing) from slightly
larger to slightly smaller as the system controls the mixture. Generally, the injector on-time only has to change from 1/4 (0.25) to 1/2 (0.50)
of a millisecond to drive the system through its normal full rich to full lean range.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If propane is added or a vacuum leak created while looking for the corresponding injector on-time change, but the
on-time isn't changing, one of the two following things may be happening:
^ The system is operating in an "open loop" idle mode. Some newer (mostly 1988 and newer) vehicle systems temporarily or completely
ignore the O2 sensor signal at idle. There are various system design reasons for doing this, but it may provide a surprise the first time it's
encountered. Raise the engine to about 1800 RPM and try adding propane or create the vacuum leak again. Most systems will go back
into closed loop before this RPM so the test should work.
^ The oxygen sensor may be bad. If the O2 sensor can't "see" the mixture change, the PCM can't either, so the injector on-time will not
change. Time spent performing the propane and vacuum leak procedure with a bad oxygen sensor is wasted time.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 98
Good Fuel Injector Pattern (Typical Saturated Switch Type)

When the Feedback Fuel Control System can control fuel mixture properly, the injector's on-time will modulate (increase or decrease)
according to driving conditions and oxygen sensor input. Generally, the range of injector on-time run from about 1 - 6 ms at idle to about
6-35 ms under cold cranking or Wide Open Throttle (WOT) operation.
The influence of oxygen sensor voltage input to injector on-time is relatively small when compared to driving condition demands. The
oxygen sensor voltage input to the PCM functions more as a "fuel trim fine tuning" instrument than the leader of the band. Most of the
injector on-time is calculated using the MAF or MAP, RPM, and other inputs to the PCM. The oxygen sensor voltage input to the PCM just
polishes the effort to increase catalyst efficiency. Although the O2 sensor is responsible for only a relatively small change in the injector
pulse width, that small change may make the difference between good driveability or poor driveability; an emissions test pass or an emission
test failure.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Shorted injector windings will usually make the coil release spike(s) shorter or may even make them disappear. Coil
release spike height varies with vehicle make and engine family. A reference waveform is the best source of comparison. Normal ranges are from
about 30 volts to 100 volts. Some injector spike heights are "chopped" to about 30 - 60 volts by clamping diodes. These are usually identified by
the flat top on their spike(s) instead of a sharper point. In those cases a shorted injector may not reduce the spike height, unless it is severely
shorted.

TBI Type Injector/Driver Test
Typical - GM Throttle Body Injector

Peak-and-Hold fuel injector drivers are used almost exclusively on Throttle Body Injection (TBI) systems, domestic and imported alike.
Peak-and-Hold injector drivers are only used on a select few MFI systems, like GM's 2.3L Quad-4 engine family, Saturn 1.9L, and Isuzu
1.6L. The Peak-and-Hold injector driver (inside the Powertrain Control Module PCM) is designed to allow approximately 4 amps to flow
through the injector winding, then reduce the flow to a maximum of about 1 amp.
Generally, a solenoid requires 4 times more current to initiate (or start) mechanical movement than it does to hold the component in place.
Hence, the name "Peak-and-Hold." Peak-and-Hold injector drivers get their name from the fact that the PCM uses 4 amps to raise the
injector pintle, but only one amp to hold it open. The sample waveform is from a good Peak-and-Hold injector driver and injector. From left
to right, the trace starts at battery voltage, indicating the injector is off. When the PCM opens the injector, it provides a ground to complete
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 99
the circuit.
The PCM continues to ground the circuit (hold it at 0 volts) until it detects approximately 4 amps flowing through the injector. When the 4
amp "Peak" is reached, the PCM cuts back the current to a maximum of 1 amp, by switching in a current limiting resistor. This reduction in
current causes the magnetic field in the injector to collapse partially, creating a voltage spike similar to an ignition coil. The PCM continues
the "Hold" operation for the desired injector on-time, then it shuts it off by opening the ground circuit completely. This creates the second
spike at the right of the waveform (see right pointer box).
Determining, or "reading," injector on-time from the waveform of a Peak-and-Hold type injector is not too difficult. The injector on-time
begins where the PCM grounds the circuit to turn it on (see the left pointer box on the waveform). The injector on-time ends where the PCM
opens the control circuit completely (the release spike farthest to the right). To "read" injector on-time, count the number of divisions from
where the PCM turned the injector on to where it turned the injector off.
In the GM TBI example, the injector is on for just less than one division -- 0.98 of a division to be exact. Since the time base is set at 2
ms/div on the sample waveform, multiply 0.98 divisions times 2 ms/div. This shows the injector was on for 1.96 ms. Therefore, 1.96 ms is
the injector's on-time. This figure can be used to see if the Feedback Fuel Control System is doing its job. The mixture can be manually
enriched by adding propane or leaned out by creating a vacuum leak, while looking for the corresponding injector on-time change.
the past.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
^ The "Peak" portion of the waveform usually doesn't change its on-time. This is because the time it takes to "flood" the injector with current
and lift the pintle remains constant. The "Hold" portion of the waveform is where the PCM increases and decreases on-time. This
characteristic of Peak-and-Hold injectors can cause these waveform effects:
^ Under acceleration, the second spike should move to the right, while the first remains stationary.
^ If the engine is running extremely rich, both spikes may be nearly on top of one another. This indicates the computer is attempting to lean out
the mixture by shortening injector on-time as much as possible.


1. Start the engine and hold the throttle at 2500 RPM for 2 - 3 minutes, until the engine is fully warmed up and the Feedback Fuel System
enters closed loop. Verify this by viewing the oxygen sensor signal on the DSO.
2. Shut off A/C and all other accessories. Put vehicle in park or neutral. Rev the engine slightly and watch for the corresponding injector
3. Induce propane into the intake and drive the mixture rich. If the system is working properly, the injector on-time will diminish, or get smaller,
to try to compensate for the rich mixture (high O2 voltage).
5. Raise the engine to 2500 RPM and hold it steady. On many systems, the injector's on-time can be seen modulating (changing) from slightly
IMPORTANT NOTES:
^ When adding propane or creating a vacuum leak while looking for the corresponding injector on-time change, but the on-time isn't changing,
one of the two following things may be happening:
^ The system is operating in an "open loop" idle mode. Some newer (mostly 1988-and-newer) vehicle systems temporarily or completely
ignore the O2 sensor signal at idle. There are various system design reasons for doing this, but it be surprising the first time it's encountered.
Raise the engine to about 1800 RPM and try adding propane or create the vacuum leak again. Most systems will go back into closed loop
before this RPM so the test should work.
^ The oxygen sensor may be bad. If the O2 sensor can't "see" the mixture change, then the PCM can't either, so the injector on-time will not
change. Time spent performing the propane and vacuum leak procedure with a bad oxygen sensor is wasted time.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 100
Good Fuel Injector Pattern (Typical Peak-And-Hold)
EXPECT THIS WAVEFORM RESULT:

according to driving conditions and oxygen sensor input. Generally, the range of injector on-time runs from about 1 - 6 ms at idle to about 6 -
35 ms under cold cranking or Wide Open Throttle (WOT) operation.
The influence of oxygen sensor voltage input to injector on-time is relatively small when compared to driving condition inputs (MAP, MAF,
RPM, etc..) The oxygen sensor voltage input to the PCM functions more as a "fuel trim fine tuning" instrument than the leader of the band.
Most of the injector on-time is calculated using the MAF or MAP, RPM, and other inputs to the PCM. The oxygen sensor voltage input to the
PCM just polishes the effort to increase catalyst efficiency. Although the O2 sensor is responsible for only a relatively small change in the
injector pulse width, that small change may make the difference between good driveability or poor driveability; an emission test pass or an
emissions test failure.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Shorted injector windings will usually make the coil release spike(s) shorter or may even make them disappear. Coil
release spike height varies with vehicle make and engine family. Normal ranges are from about 30 volts to 100 volts. A reference waveform is the
best source of comparison. Some injector spike heights are "chopped" to about 30 - 60 volts by clamping diodes. These are usually identified by the
flat top on their spike(s) instead of a sharper point. In those cases a shorted injector may not reduce the spike height unless it is severely shorted.
IMPORTANT NOTE: On GM and some Isuzu dual TBI systems, lots of extra oscillations or "hash" in between the peaks indicates a faulty
injector driver in the PCM.

Bosch Type Peak and Hold Injector/Driver Test
Bosch Fuel Injector

Bosch type Peak-and-Hold fuel injector drivers are found on a few European models with MFI systems and some early to mid-1980s Asian
vehicles with MFI systems. Bosch type Peak-and-Hold injector drivers (inside the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)) are designed to allow
approximately 4 amps to flow through the injector winding, then reduce the flow to a maximum of about 1 amp by pulsing the circuit on and
off at a high frequency.
This differs from the other Peak-and-Hold variety because the other current limiting method uses a "switch-in" resistor to achieve the same
result. One type lowers the current with a resistor and the other pulses the circuit on and off. Generally, a solenoid requires 4 times the
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 101
current to initiate (or start) mechanical movement than it does to hold the component in place. Hence, the name "Peak-and-Hold."
Peak-and-Hold injector drivers get their name from the fact that the PCM uses 4 amps to raise the injector pintle, but only 1 amp to hold it
open.
The example waveform is from a good Bosch type Peak-and-Hold injector driver and injector. From left to right, the trace starts at battery
voltage, indicating the injector is off. When the PCM opens the injector, it provides a ground to complete the circuit. The PCM continues to
ground the circuit (hold it at zero volts) until it detects approximately 4 amps flowing through the injector. When the 4 amp "Peak" is
reached, the PCM reduces current flow by pulsing the circuit at high speed. The PCM continues the "Hold" operation for the desired injector
on-time, then it shuts the injector off by stopping the pulsing and opening the ground circuit completely. This creates the spike at the right of
the waveform (see right pointer box).
Determining, or "reading" injector on-time from the waveform of a Bosch type Peak-and-Hold injector is as follows: The injector on-time
begins where the PCM grounds the circuit to turn it on (see the left pointer box on the example waveform ). The injector on-time ends where
the PCM opens the control circuit completely (the release spike to the right). To "read" injector on-time, count the number of divisions
between where the PCM turned the injector on and where it turned the injector off. In the Nissan example, the injector is on for just over one
division (1.1 divisions to be exact). Since the time base is set at 2 ms/div, multiply 1.1 divisions times 2 ms/div; the injector was turned on
for about 2 ms, or to be exact, 2.23 ms. Therefore, 2.23 ms is the injector's on-time. This figure can be used to see if the Feedback Fuel
Control System is doing its job. The mixture can be enriched manually by adding propane or leaned out by creating a vacuum leak, while
looking for the corresponding injector on-time change.

3. Set the voltage scaling to 10 V/div (20 V/div may work better on some models with taller spike heights).
4. Set the time base to 2ms/div.
FOLLOW THIS PROCEDURE: RICH/LEAN COMPENSATION TEST:

1. Start the engine and hold the throttle at 2500 RPM for 2 - 3minutes until the engine is fully warmed up and the Feedback Fuel System enters
2. Shut off the A/C and all other accessories. Put vehicle in park or neutral. Rev the engine slightly and watch for the corresponding injector
5. Raise the engine to 2500 RPM and hold it steady. On many systems, the injector's on-time can be seen modulating (changing) from slightly
larger to slightly smaller as the system controls mixture. Generally, the injector on-time only has to change from 1/4 (0.25) to 1/2 (0.50) of a
millisecond in order to drive the system through its normal full rich to full lean range.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
^ The system is operating in an "open loop" idle. Some newer (mostly 1988-and-newer) vehicle systems temporarily or completely ignore the
O2 sensor signal at idle. There are various system design reasons for doing this, but it may be surprising the first time this is encountered.
Raise the engine speed to about 1800 RPM and try adding propane or create the vacuum leak again. Most systems will go back into closed
loop before this RPM, so the test should work.
modulate (change). Time spent performing the propane/vacuum leak procedure with a bad oxygen sensor is wasted time.
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 102
Good Fuel Injector Pattern (Typical Peak-And-Hold)

according to driving conditions and oxygen sensor input. Generally, the range of injector on-time runs from about 1 - 6 ms at idle to about 6 -
35 ms under cold cranking or Wide Open Throttle (WOT) operation.
RPM, etc..). The oxygen sensor voltage input to the PCM functions more as a "fuel trim fine tuning" instrument than the leader of the band.
Most of the injector on-time is calculated using the MAF or MAP, RPM, and other inputs to the PCM. The oxygen sensor voltage input just
polishes the effort to increase catalyst efficiency. Although the O2 sensor is responsible for only a relatively small change in the injector
pulse width, that small change may make the difference between good driveability or poor driveability; an emission test pass or an emission
test failure.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Shorted injector windings will usually make the coil release spike shorter or may even make it disappear. Coil release
spike height varies with vehicle make and engine family. Normal ranges are from about 30 volts to 100 volts. A reference waveform is the best
source of comparison. Some injector spike heights are "chopped" to between 30 - 60 volts by clamping diodes. These are usually identified by the
IMPORTANT NOTE: On some Asian vehicles there may be two release spikes, similar to normal Peak-and-Hold type injector drivers.

PNP Type Injector/Driver Test
Jeep Fuel Injector

PNP type injector drivers get their name from the type of switching transistor (driver) within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) that
operates them. A PNP driver has two positive legs on the transistor and one negative leg, thus the name PNP. What distinguishes the PNP
injector driver from the rest is how it pulses the power side of the injector instead of the negative side.
[email protected]
7
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 103
PNP injector drivers pulse power to an already grounded injector to turn it on. Almost all other injector drivers are NPN type, and are
opposite. They pulse ground to an injector that already has voltage applied. This is why the release spike is upside-down. Current flow is in
the opposite direction. PNP type injector drivers can be found on several MFI systems: Jeep 4.0L engine families, some pre-1988 Chrysler
engine families, a few Asian vehicles, and some of the first Bosch electronic fuel injected vehicles in the early 1970s, like the Volvo 264 and
Mercedes V-8s. Generally, PNP type injector drivers are pretty rare. Besides their upside-down appearance, PNP injector drivers operate in
much the same way as a saturated switch injector driver.
The injector on-time begins where the PCM switches power to the circuit to turn it on. See the left pointer box on the example waveform.
The injector on-time ends where the PCM opens the control circuit completely (the release spike to the right). To "read" injector on-time,
count the number of divisions between where the PCM turned the injector on and where it turned the injector off.
In the example, the injector is on for just over three divisions. Since the time base is set at 2 ms/div on the example waveform, multiply 3
divisions times 2 ms/div and we find that the injector was turned on for about 6 ms, or to be exact, 6.07 ms. Therefore, 6.07 ms is the
injector's on-time. This figure can be used to see if the Feedback Fuel Control System is doing its job. The mixture can be manually
enriched by adding propane or leaned out by creating a vacuum leak, while looking for the corresponding injector on-time change.
the past.

4. Set the time base to 2 ms/div (1 ms/div may work better on some models).
5. Select "GND" coupling and position the trace on the third division line from the top of the DSO display.
up/down buttons to raise or lower the trigger (level) position until the waveform is steady and positioned correctly on the display. Set
"TRIGGER SLOPE" to positive and position the trigger level where the PCM turns the injector on.

Start the engine and hold the throttle at 2500 RPM for 2 - 3 minutes, until the engine is fully warmed up and the Feedback Fuel System
enters closed loop. Verify this by viewing the oxygen sensor signal on the DSO.
Shut off the A/C and all other accessories. Put vehicle in park or neutral. Rev the engine slightly and watch for the corresponding injector
3. Raise engine to 2500 RPM and hold it steady. On many systems, the injector's on-time can be seen modulating (changing) from slightly
IMPORTANT NOTES:
^ The system is operating in an "open loop" idle. Some newer (mostly 1988-and-newer) vehicle systems temporarily or completely ignore the
O2 sensor signal at idle. There are various system design reasons for doing this, but it may be surprising the first time it's encountered. Raise
the engine speed to about 1800 RPM and try adding propane or create the vacuum leak again. Most systems will go back into closed loop
modulate, or change. Time spent performing the propane/vacuum leak procedure with a bad oxygen sensor is wasted time.
[email protected]
8
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 104
Good Fuel Injector Pattern (Typical PNP)
EXPECT THIS RESULT

according to driving conditions and oxygen sensor input. Generally, the range of injector on-times runs from about 1 - 6 ms at idle to about 6
- 35 ms or more under cold cranking or Wide Open Throttle (WOT) operation.
RPM, etc..) The oxygen sensor voltage input to the PCM functions more as a "fuel trim fine tuning" instrument than the leader of the band.
emission test failure.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Shorted injector windings will usually make the coil release spike shorter or may even make it disappear. Coil release
spike height varies with vehicle make and engine family. Normal ranges are from about 30 volts to 100 volts. A reference waveform is the best
source of comparison. Some injector spike heights are "chopped" to between 30 - 60 volts by clamping diodes. These are usually identified by the

Bosch PNP Type Peak and Hold Injector/Driver Test
TBI Fuel Injector
Bosch type PNP Peak-and-Hold injector drivers are a hybrid, or a composite variety, of two of the four main types of injector drivers. They
are an electronic cross germination of a PNP and a Bosch Peak-and-Hold injector driver. All the PNP rules apply and all the Bosch type
[email protected]
9
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 105
Peak-and-Hold rules apply. This waveform is included mainly to show how a variation or derivative of the four main injector drivers look.
This injector driver type can be found on Mazda RX-7s, Subaru TBIs, and a few other engine families. Bosch type PNP Peak-and-Hold
injector drivers are very rare.
5. Select "GND" coupling and position the trace on the third division line from the top of the DSO display.
SLOPE" to positive and position the trigger level where the PCM turns the injector on.
Follow This Procedure -- Rich/Lean Compensation Test:
Start the engine and hold the throttle at 2500 RPM for 2 - 3 minutes, until the engine is fully warmed up and the Feedback Fuel System enters
Shut off the A/C and all other accessories. Put vehicle in park or neutral. Rev the engine slightly and watch for the corresponding injector
1. Raise engine to 2500 RPM and hold it steady. On many systems, the injector's on-time can be seen modulating (changing) from slightly
IMPORTANT NOTE:
When adding propane or creating a vacuum leak while looking for the corresponding injector on-time change, but the on-time isn't changing,
1. The system is operating in an "open loop" idle. Some newer (mostly 1988-and-newer) vehicle systems temporarily or completely ignore the
O2 sensor signal at idle. There are various system design reasons for doing this, but it may be surprising the first time it's encountered. Raise
the engine speed to about 1800 RPM and try adding propane or create the vacuum leak again. Most systems will go back into closed loop
2. The oxygen sensor may be bad. If the O2 sensor can't "see" the mixture change, the PCM can't either, so the injector on-time will not change.
Time spent performing the propane/vacuum leak procedure with a bad oxygen sensor is wasted time.
[email protected]
10
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 106
Good Fuel Injector Pattern (Typical PNP Peak-And-Hold)
Expect This Result:
according to driving conditions and oxygen sensor input. Generally, the range of injector on-times runs from about 1 - 6 ms at idle to about 6
- 35 ms or more under cold cranking or Wide Open Throttle (WOT) operation.
RPM, etc.) The oxygen sensor voltage input to the PCM functions more as a "fuel trim fine tuning" instrument than the leader of the band.
emission test failure.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Shorted injector windings will usually make the coil release spike shorter or may even make it disappear. Coil release spike height varies
with vehicle make and engine family. Normal ranges are from about -30 volts to -100 volts. A reference waveform is the best source of
comparison. Some injector spike heights are "chopped" to between -30 - -60 volts by clamping diodes. These are usually identified by the flat
top on their spike(s) instead of a sharper point. In those cases a shorted injector may not reduce the spike height unless it is severely shorted.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 107
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation
Fig. 12 Pressure regulator
The pressure regulator consists of a sealed, spring loaded diaphragm, with a connection for intake manifold vacuum. Fuel is provided to the
fuel injectors under approximately 2.5 bar (36 psi).
A connection for intake manifold vacuum provides a constant pressure differential which ensures that the amount of fuel injected is solely
dependent upon injector 'open' time. Excess fuel is returned to the fuel tank.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 108
Fuel Pump: Testing and Inspection
1. Connect suitable pressure gauge inline between cold start valve and supply hose or to main fuel supply hose, ensuring that gauge is properly
installed to prevent fuel leaks. Nominal fuel pressure with engine running should be 3.0 bar (43 psi).
2. Disconnect and plug vacuum hose to pressure regulator, start engine and observe pressure gauge. Reading with hose disconnected should be
approximately 3.3 bar (47 psi).
3. Reconnect vacuum hose to regulator and observe pressure gauge. Reading should drop to approximately 2.8 bar (40 psi).
4. Accelerate engine several times while observing gauge. Pressure reading should rise briefly as engine is accelerated.
5. If reading obtained in step 2 is too low, briefly pinch off return hose from regulator while observing gauge.
6. If pressure reading rises with hose pinched, pump, tank and lines are satisfactory.
7. If pressure readings observed in steps 2 and 3 are not as specified and pump, tank and lines are satisfactory, or if regulator fails to alter
pressure in response to engine vacuum, regulator should be replaced.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 109
Fuel Pump: Service and Repair
NOTE: If necessary, draw off some fuel with a scavenging pump.
1. Lift out the rear seat cushion.

2. Partially remove the insulation sheet.
Fuel Tank And Components
3. Remove the inspection plate located at the right side of the rear passenger area.
4. Remove the electrical connections and the fuel supply hose. Plug the fuel supply hose.
5. Remove the four nuts retaining the fuel level sender and remove the sender.
Fuel Pump View
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 110
6. Turn the fuel pump body counterclockwise and pull it out carefully.
7. With a new seal reinstall the fuel pump assembly in the reverse manner.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 111
Idle Control Valve: Description and Operation
Fig. 18 Idle Control Valve
An electrically operated idle rpm control valve keeps the idle speed stable under various operating conditions. Measured intake air from the
airflow meter bypasses the throttle plate through a variable orifice in the idle control valve.
The Motronic ECU controls the orifice opening according to the engine speed and operating conditions as specified by various sensors and
switches on the engine and transmission.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 112
Idle Control Valve: Testing and Inspection
Fig. 18 Idle Control Valve
1. Check the idle control valve with the engine cool.

2. Check to be sure that the rotating piston in the valve moves freely inside its bore.
3. Check resistance between terminals:
1 and 3 ..................................................................................................................................................................... approximately 40 Ohms
4. Connect plug back on to idle valve.
5. Open or close rotating piston completely (with ignition OFF).
6. With ignition ON, piston should go to its 50% position, and stay there.
7. If idle control valve does not test within specifications, replace it.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 113
Thermo Time Switch: Testing and Inspection
Fig. 9 Thermo Time Switch
1. Disconnect electrical connector from switch and connect test lamp between battery positive terminal and terminal W on switch, Fig. 5.
2. Test lamp should light with coolant temperature below 35°C (95°F), and should not light with temperature above 35°C (95°F).
3. Connect ohmmeter between switch terminal W and ground, Fig. 5. With coolant temperature below 30°C (86°F), meter should indicate
continuity; with temperature above 104°F, meter should indicate no continuity.
4. Remove switch and cool sensor element to approximately 0°C (32°F).
5. Connect ohmmeter between switch terminal W and housing, connect negative battery terminal to housing using jumper wire, then connect
positive battery terminal to switch terminal G.
6. Meter should indicate continuity for 2 - 6 seconds, then infinite resistance.
7. If thermo time switch fails to perform as outlined, switch should be replaced.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 114
Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection
Fig. 7 Throttle switch test connections
Ensure that throttle plate is properly adjusted as outlined in "THROTTLE PLATE ADJUST" before adjusting throttle switch.
1. Disconnect electrical connector from throttle switch and connect ohmmeter between terminals 3 and 18 on switch, Fig. 7.
2. Meter should indicate continuity at wide open throttle and no continuity with throttle in any other position.
3. Connect ohmmeter between terminals 2 and 18 on switch, Fig. 7.
4. Meter should indicate continuity with throttle closed and infinite resistance as soon as throttle is opened.
5. If readings are not as specified, loosen switch mounting screws, adjust switch position, tighten screws and check switch operation.
6. If switch cannot be adjusted to obtain proper operation, replace switch.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 115
Throttle Plate - PFI: Adjustments
Fig. 60 Primary Throttle Linkage Rod
Fig. 61 Adjustable Throttle Linkage Rod
1. Basic throttle setting

a. Adjust push rod for #3 and 4 throttle valves to 97.5 ± 0.4mm (3.838 ± 0.016in).
b. Adjust push rod for #1 and 2 throttle valves to approx. 100mm (3.937in).
c. Mount a dial indicator to a fixed mounting point (like a valve cover stud) with the necessary adapters, so that the gauge pushes against
the throttle linkage actuating lever, at the back of the engine.
d. Shorten the push rod for 1st and 2nd cylinders until the gauge needle begins to move. (Both throttle levers should have equal load on
the idle stop).
Fig. 62 Full Throttle Measurement
2. Full load stop.

a. Remove airbox to gain unobstructed access to the throttle plates.
b. Open throttle valves until the plates are parallel to the direction of air flow.
c. Adjust the full throttle stop until it makes contact with the operating lever.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 116
d. Adjust the distance from the top of the throttle plate to the upper edge of the throttle bore to 21.7 ± 1mm (0.854 ± 0.039 in) with the
throttle stop screw.
Note; Do not change the adjustment of the push rods for this adjustment.
e. If the specified distance is not possible on all throttle valves, replace necessary components.
3. Synchronization
a. Set idle speed with idle speed screw, located between valve cover and fuel rail, and between cylinders 2 and 3.
b. Remove vacuum port caps from each intake tube, and connect a set of matched vacuum gauges or mercury tubes.
c. With the engine running at idle, each cylinder should differ by no more than 5 mbar.
d. If synchronization is necessary, remove the anti-tamper cap from the appropriate adjustment screw(s) (beside each vacuum port), and
adjust with a 7mm socket.
e. Install new anti-tamper caps, check idle speed, and reset CO if necessary.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 117
Computers and Control Systems: Description and Operation
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 118
Fig. 52b Motronic System Diagram (Typical)
The Motronic system, provides central microprocessor control of ignition system operation and fuel injection. The system uses an Electronic
Control Unit (ECU) which monitors engine and vehicle operating conditions through a variety of sensors to determine proper ignition timing and
the amount of fuel required for proper engine operation. The ECU monitors crankshaft position, engine speed and temperature, intake air flow
volume and temperature, throttle position and vehicle speed, and exhaust gas oxygen content in order to compute proper ignition timing and the
amount of fuel required to maintain acceptable engine performance while controlling exhaust emissions.
The ECU controls ignition timing by controlling current switching in the primary ignition circuit, based on signals from the TDC, reference and
engine speed transmitters, and the coolant and air temperature sensors. Crankshaft position and the basic ignition timing are established by the
transmitters, and the ECU delays or advances primary current switching depending upon engine speed, coolant temperature and intake air
temperature. A conventional type ignition coil is used on these models, however, the ignition distributor is integral with the timing cover and serves
only to deliver secondary voltage to the spark plugs in the proper firing order.
Electronic fuel injection is controlled by the ECU based upon signals from sensors which monitor engine and vehicle operating conditions and
signals from the exhaust gas oxygen sensor. The ECU controls operation of the fuel pump, cold start system and idle speed control module either
directly or through relays, and provides the ground circuit to control fuel injector operation.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 119
Fig. 71 55 pin Motronic control unit plug
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 120
Engine Control Module: Oscilloscope Patterns and Waveforms
Power Supply (B+) Test

This same Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) setup and test procedure can be applied to a lot of different automotive circuits that use B+, or
battery voltage as their power source, such as power supply circuits (to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and other control modules,
such as cruise control, Antilock Brake System, climate control, etc.), temperature switches, throttle switches, vacuum switches, light
switches, brake switches, cruise control switches, etc. The relatively slow time base of 500 ms (milliseconds) allows a glitch to stay on the
screen for 5 long seconds, so the diagnostician can get a good long look at what is occuring in the circuit. The DSO is set in "SPIKE
DETECT" acquire mode so it's sampling the signal at warp speed -- about once every 40 billionths of a second. At 500 ms/div however, the
DSO displays the information slowly, so the diagnostician has plenty of time to interpret it.

1. Connect the "COM" probe to the negative battery post or the engine block.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the B+ circuit to be tested.
8. "TRIGGER" mode should be set automatically (Roll Mode).
EXERCISE THE SENSOR, SWITCH, OR CIRCUIT UNDER TEST:

Make sure power is switched on in the circuit so that the sensor, device or circuit is operational. Exercise the sensor, device or circuit while
paying particular attention to the amplitude of the signal. It should stay in a predetermined voltage range for a given condition. In most cases,
the amplitude of the waveform should stay at B+, or battery voltage, when the circuit is on, and go to zero volts when the circuit is off or the
switch is activated.
Good Battery + Pattern (Typical)

If there is a failure in the circuit, the waveform's amplitude will change when it is not supposed to; for example, when the switch in the circuit
is not being operated. Possible violations of the "Critical Dimension" rule to watch for are spikes to ground (meaning there is an open circuit
in the power side, or a voltage short to ground), upward spikes (meaning possible open in ground side), or out of range voltage (either too
low or too high).


Example of Open In Power Supply (B+) Circuit
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 121
Bad Battery + Pattern (Typical Failure)

This waveform is presented for reference to show what a failure looks like on the display of the Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO). In the
example above, an open in the B+, or battery supply voltage, to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is the culprit. A bad wiring harness
connector was the cause. When comparing this example to the "POWER SUPPLY (B+) TEST" example, it is easy to see why amplitude is
the Critical Dimension for DC signals. The downward spikes indicate an open in the power supply circuit.

1. Connect the "COM" probe to the negative battery post or the engine block.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the B+ circuit to be tested.
7. Select "SPIKE DETECT" or "MIN/MAX" acquire mode.
8. "TRIGGER" mode should be set automatically (Roll Mode).
EXERCISE THE SENSOR, SWITCH, OR CIRCUIT UNDER TEST:

Make sure power is switched on in the circuit so that the sensor, device or circuit is operational. Exercise the sensor, device or circuit while
paying particular attention to the amplitude of the signal. It should stay in a predetermined voltage range for a given condition. In most cases,
the amplitude of the waveform should stay at B+, or battery voltage, when the circuit is on, and go to zero volts when the circuit is off or the
switch is activated.

If the circuit under test is a B+ power supply, the waveform's amplitude should not change with respect to time. If the circuit under test is a
switch or other operational device, then the waveform's amplitude should only change if the switch or device is being operated. Possible
violations of the "Critical Dimension" rule to watch for are spikes to ground, as in the above example (meaning there is an open circuit in the
power side, or a voltage short to ground), upward spikes (meaning possible open in ground side), or out of range voltage (either too low or
too high).

Sensor Reference (VREF) Test
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 122
Chrysler SBEC Engine Controller
BACKGROUND AND APPLICATION INFORMATION

This DSO setup and test procedure can be applied to most all VRef circuits on 1980-and-up Electronic Powertrain Management systems.
This setup and test procedure verifies that the sensors using the VRef signal as their power source are getting the quality of power they need
to operate properly. Many Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP), Throttle Position Sensor (TPS), Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT), Intake
Air Temperature (IAT) and other sensors and circuits use a 5 volt VRef as their power source. The relatively slow time base of 500 ms
(milliseconds) allows a glitch to stay on the screen for 5 long seconds, so the diagnostician can get a good look at what is happening. The
DSO is set in SPIKE DETECT acquire mode so it's sampling the signal superfast, looking for small or intermittent glitches.

1. Connect the "COM" probe to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) ground circuit, negative battery post or the engine block.
2. Connect the "CH1" probe to the VRef circuit to be tested. Use a wiring diagram to obtain the PCM pin number or the color of the wire.
7. Select "SPIKE DETECT" or "MIN/MAX" acquire mode.
EXERCISE THE CIRCUIT UNDER TEST:

Make sure power is switched on to the PCM so the VRef circuit is on. The amplitude of the VRef waveform should stay very close to 5 volts
under all conditions. It is common to see a few tenths of a volt increase from KOEO (Key On Engine Off) to KOER (Key On Engine
Running). This is normal. If an intermittent problem is suspected, wiggle the wiring harness or tap very lightly on the PCM.
Good 5 Volt Voltage Reference Pattern (Typical)

If there is a failure in the circuit, the waveform's amplitude will change. Possible violations of the "Critical Dimension" rule to watch for are
spikes to ground (meaning there is an open circuit in the power side, or a voltage short to ground), upward spikes (meaning possible open in
ground side), or out of range voltage (either too low or too high), usually indicating a PCM problem.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 123

SEE Description of Automotive Signals
SEE Diagnosis Using a Labscope
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 124
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Oscilloscope Patterns and Waveforms
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

Most Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensors and Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors on 1980-and-newer vehicles operate in the
same way, so the same setup and test procedure will apply. Most ECTs and IATs are Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) type
thermistors. This means they are primarily two wire sensors that change resistance when their temperature changes. They are supplied with a
5-volt VRef power signal and return a voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the engine coolant or intake air temperature. The rule for
NTC resistors is: their resistance goes down as their temperature goes up. When the DSO or DMM is connected to the signal from an ECT or
IAT, what is being read is the voltage drop across the sensor's NTC resistor. Just remember: when they're cold, their resistance (and voltage)
is high and when they're hot, their resistance (and voltage) is low. The DSO setup, and what to look for in a bad sensor, is the same.

1. Connect the "COM" probe to the ECT or IAT ground circuit, engine block, or negative battery post.
2. Connect the "COM" probe to the ECT or IAT signal wire to the PCM. Use a wiring diagram to obtain the PCM pin number or the color of
the wire.
4. Set the time base to 20 s/div (20 seconds per division).
Exercise the Sensor

It's best to start the testing procedure with a stone cold engine unless the problem being dealt with is temperature dependent and it's already
known (from customer input, etc.) what temperature to start with. Start the engine and hold the throttle at 2500 RPM until the trace goes
from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. At 20 seconds per division this will seem like forever, but it is only 3 minutes
and 20 seconds. Press the "RUN/HOLD" button on the DSO to freeze the waveform on the display for closer inspection. The sensor has now
been put through its entire operating range, from stone cold to operating temperature.
Good Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Pattern (Typical)

Check the manufacturer's specifications for exact voltage range specifications, but generally the sensor's voltage should range from between
three volts to just under five volts when stone cold, dropping to around one volt at operating temperature. The Critical Dimension of this DC
signal is amplitude. The sensor must generate a signal with a certain amplitude at any given temperature for it to be good. Opens in the ECT
or IAT circuit will appear as upward spikes to VRef. Shorts to ground in the ECT or IAT circuit will appear as downward spikes to ground
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 125
level.
IMPORTANT NOTE #1:

It is sometimes advantageous to perform this test procedure in "SPIKE DETECT", or "MIN/MAX" mode to find quirky opens or intermittent
glitches, provided that the waveform on the display doesn't get too "noisy" in this very sensitive mode. A lot of systems are too noisy to use
"SPIKE DETECT" mode when the engine is running or accessories like blower motors are on.
IMPORTANT NOTE #2:

It may be advantageous to shorten the time base to 200 ms/div (2/10ths of a second per division), or lower, to hunt for intermittent glitches in
"NORMAL" acquire mode.
IMPORTANT NOTE #3:

Beware of 1985-and-newer Chrysler and GM vehicles that switch a 1000 OHM resistor into the circuit at about 125° F (at about 1.25 volt).
This makes the waveform take an upward step. The waveform jumps up to about 3.7 volts and then begins to drop until it reaches its fully
"warmed-up" voltage of about 2.0 volts. The step up from 1.25 volts to 3.7 volts is normal on the 1985-and-newer Chryslers and GM's and
some other vehicles. This can be surprising when seen for the first time. If the engine is running properly check the vehicle manufacturer's
specs to see if the system being serviced switches a resistor into the circuit.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 126
Cylinder Identification Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Fig. 70 Inductive cylinder identification sender
Using an Ohmmeter, check the resistance between terminals 8, 9, and 10 on the engine diagnostic plug. The resistance should be:
Between 8 and 10 ........................................................................................................................................ less than 1 Ohm, at 20°C (68°F)
Between 8 and 9, or 10 and 9 ........................................................................................................................................... at least 60K Ohms
Replace the sensor if it is not within specification.*
* The TDC sensor is used for checking ignition timing only. It has no Motronic function.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 127
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 21 Oxygen Sensor (Three-Wire Type)
Fig. 64 Oxygen Sensor With Internal Heater
Fig. 20 Oxygen Sensor Voltage
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 128
An oxygen (Lambda) sensor Fig. 21 and 64, is used to provide more precise control of air/fuel mixtures. This system operates by measuring
oxygen content in exhaust gases, as the amount of oxygen remaining in the exhaust gases is directly proportional to the air/fuel ratio of mixtures
entering the engine. The sensor, mounted in the exhaust stream, reacts to the oxygen remaining in the exhaust gases and produces a variable voltage
signal (0-1.0 vdc) depending upon the oxygen content. A rich mixture will produce a high voltage (up to 1.0V) and a lean mixture will produce a
lower voltage, Fig. 20.
The heated oxygen sensor has an internal heating element built into the sensor. It has three wires going to the sensor.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 129
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair
Remove and Install
Fig. 21 Oxygen Sensor
Oxygen Sensor Replacement:

1. Disconnect oxygen sensor wire plug.
2. Remove the heat-shield in front of sensor (if equipped).
3. Unscrew the oxygen sensor.
4. Coat threads of new sensor with "anti-seize" lubricant (don't get any lubricant an to the tip of sensor, this could render the sensor
inoperative), Fig. 21.
5. Install new oxygen sensor and torque to 55 ± 5 Nm (40 ± 3 ft. lbs.).
6. Reinstall the heat-shield.
7. Reconnect oxygen sensor wire plug.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 130
Alignment: Description and Operation
General Information and Definitions
-Toe-difference angle.
-Toe-difference angle.
-Center point of operating circle.
The toe-difference angle is the angle setting of the wheel on the inside of a curve to the wheel on the outside of a curve during cornering.
Steering is designed in such a way that angular position of wheels changes as steering lock progresses.
A correctly adjusted toe-difference angle produces equal values for left and right lock and consideration of factory tolerances.
Toe-difference angle provides information on corresponding operation of steering trapezoid for left or right steering lock from center position.
Camber
Inclination of the wheel from the perpendicular.
Toe
Reduction in distance of front of front wheels to rear of front wheels. The toe-in prevents the wheels from moving apart during driving and thus:
the wheels from vibrating and grinding
excessive tire wear
excessive strain on the steering linkage and its links/joints
heavy car steering.
Measurement is performed in "straight-ahead mode".
Caster
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 131
Is the inclination of the kingpin in the direction of travel viewed from the side. The line through the center point of the spring strut support
bearing and the control arm ball joint corresponds to the "kingpin".
Thanks to caster, wheels are pulled and not pushed. In a similar manner to king-pin inclination, when driving in curves or around corners,
returning forces are reproduced to help return wheels to straight-ahead position.
Geometrical axis 1
Is the angle bisector from the total rear-wheel toe.

Front-wheel measurements are taken in reference to this axis.
Symmetrical axis 2
Center line running through front and rear axles.
Wheel offset
Angle by which one front wheel is displaced more towards front or rear than the other front wheel.
Kingpin Offset/Scrub Radius
Is the distance from the center of the wheel contact face to the intersection point of the kingpin extension. The line through the center point of the
spring strut support bearing and the control arm ball joint corresponds to the "kingpin".
The scrub radius is influenced by camber, kingpin angle and wheel offset of the wheel rim.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 132
Alignment: Specifications
Alignment Specifications:
Note: Given specifications are for car loaded down to normal position. Refer to Inspection Conditions
See: Testing and Inspection
1 Of 2
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 133
2 Of 2
Front wheel alignment
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 134
1 Of 2
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 135
2 Of 2
Rear wheel alignment
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 136
Front Ride Height Specifications
Front ride height
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 137
Alignment: Testing and Inspection
Inspection Conditions
Car loaded down to normal position

Vehicle with complete equipment for normal operation with:
2 x 68 kg on the front seats (seats in center setting)
1 x 68 kg on the back seat (center) (if applicable)
1 x 21 kg in the luggage compartment (center)
and with full tank
Requirement:
1. Specified rims and tires with even tire profile.
2. Specified tire pressure (refer to instruction plate on vehicle)
3. Specified wheel bearing play.
4. Ride height check in normal position (see above)
Attention! If there is any deviation from nominal value, repair the vehicle.
5. Specified height setting for alignment check = Specified value ± 2 mm by loading or unloading the vehicle.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 138
Alignment: Service and Repair
Front Wheel Alignment
CASTER
Caster values are designed into the front suspension geometry and are not adjustable. If caster is not within specification, check for worn or
damaged suspension components and replace as necessary.
CAMBER
Except 3 - Series
Although designed into the front suspension geometry, camber can be altered up to plus or minus 1/2° by installing eccentric upper mounting plates
on the strut assembly. These mounts are marked with a + or - at the bolt bores. Depending on the situation, press knurled bolts into the bolt bores as
required using press tool No. 31 3 130 or equivalent. After installation, ensure bolts are vertical and completely flush with mount.
3 - Series
Camber is preset during production and is not adjustable.
TOE-IN
Toe-in is adjusted by varying length of tie rod assemblies. To adjust toe-in, proceed as follows:
1. Position steering gear in straight ahead position.

2. Loosen tie rod sleeve retaining clamp nuts, then rotate both sleeves as required until toe value is within specification.
3. Ensure tie rod end ball stud is vertically centered, then tighten clamp nuts.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 139
Alignment: Service and Repair
Rear Wheel Alignment
Rear Wheel Alignment Camber & Toe-In
Camber and toe values are designed into the rear suspension geometry and are not normally adjustable. However, eccentric trailing arm blocks are
available on most models to modestly compensate for slight camber or toe deviations. If camber or toe-in values deviate radically from
specification, check for the following conditions:
1. Damaged rear axle carrier mounts or carrier.

2. Damaged trailing arm blocks or trailing arm.
3. Damaged final drive mount.
4. Excessive suspension sag. Replace coil springs and recheck alignment.
5. Damaged floor assembly. Check and repair body if necessary, then recheck alignment.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 140
Steering: Testing and Inspection
Engine at operating temperature.
1. Checking Power Pump:
- Detach pressure line (2) on steering gear and connect on tester 32 4 000.
- Connect pressure line (1) of tester 32 4 000 on steering gear.
Installation:
Tightening torque M14 35 Nm, M16 40 Nm
Bleed power steering.
Test:
- Valve (A) must always be closed for high pressure testing (if not. pressure tester would be damaged!).
- Open valve (B) and bleed power steering.
- With engine running shut Valve (B) for max. 10 seconds and read pressure.
- The rated pump pressure must be reached within +/- 10%.
- If this pressure in not reached, check drive belt tightness.
- Repeat test:
If pressure is still not reached, replace power steering pump.
If rated pressure is exceeded. replace power steering pump.
2. Checking Power Steering:
- Run engine.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 141
- Pull steering wheel against final left lock with a force 100 N (22 lbs.) about 5 seconds; use a force meter.
- Read pressure from tester 32 4 000.
- Repeat same test on right leak.
- If pressure values are less then the previously measured pump pressure. replace steering gear.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 142
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair
Disassembling/Assembling Power Steering Pump
Pump Code Number: 7681 955
Code No. 76 81 955
Absolute cleanliness is essential when working on power steering pumps.
- Mark position of holder (1) to pump body (2).
- Unscrew bolts and take body apart.
- Remove face plate (3).
- Press rotor (4) on shaft (5) downward.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 143
- Remove circlip (6) and pull shaft out of body.
- Remove rotor (4) with wings.
Assembling:
- Clean all parts and lubricate with hydraulic fluid.
- Replace radial oil seal (7) - sealing lip faces in - and pack space between sealing and dust lips with grease.
- Guide shaft (5) into body.
- Install rotor (4) - groove for snap ring faces up - and insert snap ring (6) in radial groove of shaft.
- Insert wings with polished, rounded outside surfaces facing cam ring.
- Check that wings move easily.
- Install seal (8) - wide side facing down - and place guide (9) in face plate (3).
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 144
- Place face plate (3) on dowel pins.
- Replace O-ring (10).
- Mount body - check position of bores - and bolt down with holder.
- Tightening torque = 16 to 19 Nm (12 to 14 ft. lbs.).
- After finishing installation, check operation of power steering pump.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 145
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing Power Steering Pump
- Draw off hydraulic fluid in tank.
- Disconnect lines.
- Plug connections with dust caps.
Installation:
Replace seals.
Tightening torque M14 35 Nm, M16 40 Nm
Check for sufficient space between hoses and body-mounted parts.
Important! Never reuse drained oil.
- Loosen nut (1) and release drive belt by turning toothed element (2).
- Unscrew bolts and take off pump.
Installation:
Tighten drive belt before tightening bolts.
Tightening Drive Belt
- Tighten toothed element to torque of 8 to 8.5 Nm (5.8 to 6.1 ft. lbs.) and lock with nut.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 146
- Check or correct drive belt tightness with tester 11 5....
- Hook (4) rests on tip of tooth.
- Bleed power steering.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 147
Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair
Replacing Steering Lock Assembly:

- Remove and install steering wheel.
- Remove steering column casing lower section.
- Disconnect turn signal and wiper switch.
- Remove collar ring (1).
Installation:
- Notch of collar ring (1) must lock snap ring (2).
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 148
- Remove snap ring (1), washer (2), spring (3), and ring (4).
Installation:
- Stem of ring (4) faces bearing.
Installation:
- Install snap ring (1) with Special Tools 32 3 052 and 32 3 050 (hammer knock).
- Lift out steering spindle bearings with a screwdriver.
Installation:
- Drive in bearings with Special Tool 00 5 550.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 149
- Disconnect central electric plug.
- Remove shear-off screw (1) with a chisel.

- Pull steering lock with casing upper section off of outer tube.
Installation:
- Tighten Torx shear-off screws.
- Press down locking hook and remove ignition starter switch.
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 150
Installation:
- Check position of ignition/starter switch and steering wheel lock,
- Press down lock with a screwdriver.

- Turn key to point of locking and pull out lock cylinder.
Since 1987 Models:
- Insert ignition key in lock cylinder and turn to position "R" 60°.
- Push a 1.2 mm (3/64") dia. wire into bore of cylinder and pull out the lock cylinder.
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 151
- Drill out rivets and bolt carbon contact (1) on new steering lock.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 152
Steering Gear: Service and Repair
Steering Gear Replace
1. Ensure that steering wheel is centered and front wheels are in straight ahead position, then raise and support vehicle and remove front wheels.
2. Scribe matching marks between steering shaft joint coupling and steering gear housing, loosen pinch bolt and pry coupling off steering gear
spindle.
3. Disconnect fluid pressure and return hoses from steering gear, drain fluid into suitable container, then plug lines and open fittings. Do not
reuse power steering fluid.
4. Remove nuts securing tie rods to spring struts and disconnect tie rods using suitable puller.
5. Remove bolts securing gear to crossmember and the steering gear.
6. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following:
a. Replace self locking nuts during installation.
b. Torque steering gear bolts to 29-34 ft.lbs. and tie rod retaining nuts to 25-29 ft.lbs.
c. Ensure that steering shaft joint is properly aligned and that pinch bolt is engaged in groove, then torque nut to 16 ft.lbs.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 153
Steering Gear: Service and Repair
Power Steering Gear Service
Fig. 5 Power rack & pinion steering gear exploded view.
Disassembly
1. Remove clamps securing rack boots, and pull back boots to expose tie rod joint.
2. Bend up tabs on tie rod lock plates, position rack as needed to secure rack with suitable spanner, then remove tie rods.
3. Disconnect and remove fluid lines.
4. Remove cap spring and spacer from rack adjuster pressure piece, Fig. 5.
5. Thread self-tapping screw into pressure piece, then remove pressure piece along with seal and plastic insulator.
6. Pull off cap protecting pinion steering spindle, then ensure that rack is centered.
7. Mark position of steering spindle, valve body housing and gear housing in relation to each other.
8. Remove valve housing bolts, the housing and pinion assembly, and the housing O-ring.
9. Remove pinion and thrust washer from valve housing, then the seal and bearing, noting installation position.
10. Mark position of cylindrical tube (22), Fig. 5, in relation to gear housing, then loosen ring nut and remove tube.
11. Withdraw rack assembly from gear housing, then remove piston assembly (11-14) and cylindrical tube (8), Fig. 5, from rack, noting
installation position for assembly.
12. Remove seal, spacer, snap ring and friction washer (4-7) from tube (8), Fig. 5, then drive seal and support ring out of opposite end of tube.
13. Insert screwdriver through slot in bearing retainer in tube (22), Fig. 5, and drive remove seal and support ring.
14. Remove seal (1) and snap ring (18) from end of tube (22), Fig. 5.
15. Remove seal and piston ring from piston.
16. Inspect components and replace any that are damaged, deformed or excessively worn.
Assembly
Replace seals and O-rings, and coat seal and friction surfaces with suitable hydraulic fluid during assembly.
1. Replace pinion shaft seal in gear housing, as needed, ensure that seal is fully seated, then pack seal lip with grease.
2. Install support ring into tube (8), Fig. 5, with chamfer facing inside of tube, then press seal into tube with open end facing out.
3. Cover cuts in rack with cellophane tape to prevent seal damage, then slide tube (8) over rack and remove tape.
4. Install friction washer, snap ring, spacer and O-ring on end of tube (8), Fig. 5.
5. Install piston, washers, O-ring and circlips (11-14) on rack, Fig. 5, in position noted during disassembly.
6. Install O-ring and piston ring on rack piston, then coat assembly with hydraulic fluid.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 154
7. Install support ring and seal (10) into tube (22), Fig. 5, ensuring that seal is fully seated and that open end faces up.
8. Measure and record thickness of snap ring (18), then install snap ring and new O-ring over end of tube (22).
9. Insert rack into tube assembly (22), slightly compressing piston ring to prevent damage, and ensure that tube is flush with friction washer (7),
Fig. 5.
10. Lubricate rack teeth with grease, then insert rack assembly into gear housing and tighten ring nut.
11. Ensure that rack teeth are properly positioned and that mounting flanges on tube and housing are aligned horizontally, then torque ring nut.
Ring nut torque is dependent upon thickness of snap ring (18), Fig. 5, recorded in step 8. If snap ring is .098 inch thick, torque ring nut
to 87 ft.lbs. If snap ring is .138 inch thick, torque ring nut to 108 ft.lbs.
12. Install seals (88) and round seals (87) onto pinion valve body, ensuring that round seals are positioned on top, then coat assembly with
hydraulic fluid.
Fig. 6 Rack centering measurement
13. Center rack in gear housing, ensuring that distance between ends of rack and cylinder stops (A), Fig. 6, is 2.835 inches on both sides.
14. Coat pinion splines with grease, then insert pinion into gear housing, ensuring that marks made during disassembly are aligned.
15. Install new oil seal in valve body housing with open end facing in, then install the bearing, ensuring that both bearing and seal are fully
seated.
16. Position valve body seal on gear housing, install valve body housing ensuring that matching marks are aligned and torque bolts to 14 ft.lbs.
17. Pack spindle cap with grease, then install cap, aligning tab on cap with slot in housing.
18. Install new seal and plastic insulator on rack adjuster pressure piece, then insert assembly into gear housing.
19. Install adjuster spring, spacer and cap, and torque cap bolts to 14 ft.lbs.
20. Install fluid lines, using new seals on union bolts, and torque union bolts to 14 ft.lbs.
21. Install rack boots, tie rod lock plates and tie rods, secure rack with suitable spanner and torque tie rods to 50-56 ft.lbs.
22. Secure rack boots with clamps, install steering gear and check operation.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 155
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
With SRS
Caution! Conform with safety regulations! Improper handling could cause unwanted activation of SRS and lead to injury!
- Disconnect battery and cover the negative pole terminal.
- Unscrew casing lower section.
Pull (orange) plug out of holder and disconnect.
- Unscrew bolts with Special Tool 00 2 110.
Installation:
Tightening torque 8 Nm.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 156
- Pull off plug and remove the airbag unit.
Caution! Place airbag unit aside (in trunk) only with the padded side facing up.
Installation:
Don't pinch the wires.
- Turn steering wheel to straight ahead position (marks on steering gear and steering spindle).
- Unscrew and remove nut with washer.
Important: Steering wheel can only be pulled off after unlocking the steering lock.
Installation:
Lock pin (1) must engage in opening (2).
Replace self-locking nut.
Tightening torque 80 Nm.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 157
Note: Unscrewing the nut activates spring clip (1), which holds the contact ring in center position.
Adjusting Center Positions When Necessary
- Press down on spring (1), turn contact ring clockwise or counterclockwise against the stop, turn back about three turns until the arrows for center
position are aligned and release spring (1).
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 158
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Without SRS
- Lift off BMW emblem.
- Mark position of steering wheel to steering spindle.
- Unscrew nut (1) and remove washer (2).
Important! Steering wheel can only be pulled off after unlocking steering lock.
Installation:
Tighting torque 80 Nm.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 159
Coil Spring: Service and Repair
CAUTION: To avoid damaging CV joints when removing rear shocks, suspension must remain approximately within its normal range of travel
Rear Suspension
1. Raise and support rear of vehicle, and support trailing arm at outboard end with suitable jack.
2. Disconnect exhaust hanger and suspend resonator from frame with wire.
3. Remove bolts securing differential housing rubber mount on side to be serviced, pull down on mount and wedge with block of wood.
4. Disconnect lower shock absorber mount and stabilizer bar, if equipped, from trailing arm.
5. Slowly lower jack supporting trailing arm until spring tension is released, then remove coil spring. Only lower trailing arm enough to allow
spring to be removed. If arm is allowed to hang free, output shaft constant velocity joints will be damaged.
6. Reverse procedure to install. Ensure coil spring is properly positioned in mount. Tighten shock absorber bolt and rubber axle mount bolt to:
Lower shock mount to trailing arm ......................................................................................................................... 52 - 63 ft lb (72 - 87 Nm)

Final drive rubber mount to body ............................................................................................................................ 58 - 63 ft lb (80 - 87 Nm)
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 160
Control Arm: Service and Repair
Control Arm Bushing Bracket
REMOVING AND INSTALLING / REPLACING BRACKET FOR LEFT OR RIGHT CONTROL ARM
Punch mark center of control arm.
Unscrew control arm bracket

Remove heat shield if applicable
Installation:
Tightening torque. 42 Nm (30 ft lb)
Pull bracket off of control arm with Special Tools 31 2 151 and 00 7 500.
Important!
Never reuse a rubbe mount pulled off of the control arm.
The rubberized inner sleeve will be destroyed when pulled off dry.
Replace rubber mounts 31 12 130.
Always replace left and right mounts and use mounts of same make (visible on mount).
Coat control arm journal with an approved lubricant.

Engage Special Tool 31 2 153 in control arm bore.
Pull on bracket/mount against stop on control arm with Special Tools 31 2 152/154 and 00 7 501.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 161
All Wheel Drive:

Use Special Tool 31 2 155 instead of Special Tool 31 2 153.
Note:
Centering bores (large diameter) of bracket face engine carrier.
Important!
Bolt bracket on body immediately.
Load down car to normal position. [1]

Leave car in normal position at least 30 minutes and avoid any suspension movement.
The lubricant will evaporate after 30 minutes, so that the control arm fits tight and is positioned correctly in the rubber mount.
Non conformance with these procedures could impair handling considerably!
[1] Normal position:

Car loaded down with 2 x 68 kg (2 x 150 lbs) of front seats (seats in center position), 1 x 68 kg (1 x 150 lbs) on center of rear seat (not
for coupes), 1 x 21 kg (1 x 46 lbs) in middle of trunk, and a full tank of gas.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 162
Control Arm Bushing
REPLACING RUBBER MOUNT FOR LEFT OR RIGHT CONTROL ARM
Remove and install control arm bracket. See:

Press rubber mount out of bracket with Special Tool 31 2 130.
Always replace rubber bearings on both sides and use bearings of same make (visible on bearing).
Installation:
Check installed position!
Arrow on rubber mount faces cast boss (1) on bracket.
Bracket and rubber mount cleaned to remove grease.
Rubber mounts for 6 cylinder and M 3 models are marked with an "orange" paint dot (2)
Press rubber mount into bracket from the angled end of bracket with Special Tool 31 2 130.
Checking Rubber Mount:

Car in normal position. [1]
Measure gap (A) with a feeler gauge blade.
Nominal value A = 0.7 to 1.7 mm (0.028 to 0.067").
If meesured value deviates from nominal value, replace rubber mount.
[1] Normal position:

Car loaded down with 2 x 68 kg (2 x 150 lbs) of front seats (seats in center position), 1 x 68 kg (1 x 150 lbs) on center of rear seat (not
for coupes), 1 x 21 kg (1 x 46 lbs) in middle of trunk, and a full tank of gas.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 163
Removing/Installing Left or Right Control Arm
REMOVING AND INSTALLING LEFT OR RIGHT CONTROL ARM
Remove front wheel.

Unscrew holder for control arm.
Installation:
Unscrew push rod on stabilizer.
Installation:
Unscrew nut.
Installation:
Keep grease off of pins and bores.
Install locknut (1) and washer (2) instead of the standard polystop nut.
Knock pin loose with a plastic hammer.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 164
Unscrew nut and press off guide joint with Special Tool 31 1 110 (or 31 2 160 for M3 cars).
Installation:
Keep grease off of pins end bores.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 165
Shock Absorber: Service and Repair
CAUTION: To avoid damaging CV joints when removing rear shocks, suspension must remain approximately within its normal range of travel.
Rear Suspension
1. Raise and support rear of vehicle, and support trailing arm with suitable jack.
2. Remove bolt securing shock absorber to trailing arm.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 166
Upper Shock Bolts
3. Pull back trunk trim panel and remove 2 nuts securing upper shock absorber mount and the shock absorber assembly.
4. Reverse procedure to install. Tighten fasteners as follows:
Lower mount to trailing arm .................................................................................................................................... 52 - 63 ft lb (72 - 87 Nm)

Shock to upper mount bracket ................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11 ft lb (13 - 15 Nm)
Upper bracket mount nuts ........................................................................................................................................ 16 - 17 ft lb (22 - 24 Nm)
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 167
Suspension Strut: Service and Repair
Disassemble/Assemble Front Strut Assembly
REPLACING FRONT SPRING STRUT SHOCK ABSORBER
Important!
Always replace shock absorbers with ones having same code K.
To know whether shock absorbers have to be replaced check installed absorbers with a "Shock Tester" or removed in an absorber testing
machine.
Remove spring strut assembly. See: Removing/Installing Front Spring Strut Assembly
Take up spring strut in a vise with Special Tool 31 3 000.
Set up Special Tool 31 3 116 on mount.
All Wheel Drive Cars:

Compress coil spring with Special Tool 31 3 111
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 168
Important!
Pins must fit in openings.
Lift off cap.

Unscrew self-locking nut with Special Tool 31 3 170 - counterholding on the piston rod.
Installation:
Take off washer (2).

Screw in Special Tool 31 3 115 entire length of threads.
Release and take off special tool compressor.
Take off mount.

Installed Order:
1 Self-locking nut
2 Washer with small diameter
3 Mount
4 insulator
5 Washer with large diameter
6 Cap
Inside curved surface of insulator (4) faces mount.
Lift off upper spring retainer with rubber ring and coil spring.
Installation:
Check upper and lower rubber rings, replacing if necessary.
Ends of coil spring must rest on shoulders in lower and upper spring retainers.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 169
Installation:
Check protective tube and rubber damper or rubber bellows, replacing if necessary.
Unscrew screwed-on ring with Special Tool 31 3 150 or 31 3 180.
Installation:
Pull out shock absorber (1).
Installation:
Remove old oil from spring strut tube (2). Fill new shock absorber with engine oil prior to installing. Engine oil will carry off heat from
shock absorber to the spring strut tube.
Imporfant!
Single-pipe gas pressure cartridges, recognized on piston rod diameter of at least 33 mm (1.299") may not be installed with oil.
Only store shock absorbers standing upright. If shock absorbers are stored laying down with their piston rods run in, this could cause rattling
or knockrig noise when used in car again.
Remedy:
Store shock absorbers in upright posilion with piston rods run out at room temperature for 24 hours.
M 3 with EDC:
Install bolts (1) with a bolt cement.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 170
Removing/Installing Front Spring Strut Assembly
REMOVING AND INSTALLING LEFT OR RIGHT FRONT SPRING STRUT ASSEMBLY
Remove front wheel.

Disconnect plugs for brake pad wear indicator and EDC.
Unscrew ground lead.
Disconnect wires and brake hose in holder on spring strut.
Remove ABS pulse sender.
Unscrew brake caliper and suspend from body on a piece of wire - brake hose remains connected.
Installation:
Tightening torque. 86-110 Nm (63-79 ft lb)
Unscrew push rod on stabilizer.
Installation:
Unscrew nut and press off guide joint with Special Tool 31 1 110 (or 31 2 160 for M3 cars).
Installation:
Keep grease off or out of pin and bore.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 171
Unscrew nut and press ow tie rod joint with Special Tool 32 2 070 (or 31 2 160 for M3 cars).
Installation:
Keep grease off and out of pin and bore.
Press spring strut out and push over the guide joint pin.
Support spring strut.

Unscrew nuts.
Installation:
Replace self-locking nuts.
Important!
Always store shock absorbers in upright position.
If shock absorbers are stored laying down with their piston rods moved in this could cause a knocking noise when used in car again.
Remedy:
Store shock absorbers standing upright and with piston rods moved out at ambient temperature for 24 hours.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 172
Replacing Front Spring Strut Mount
REPLACING FRONT SPRING STRUT SHOCK ABSORBER
Remove spring strut assembly. See: Removing/Installing Front Spring Strut Assembly
Take up spring strut in a vise with Special Tool 31 3 000.
Important!
If correction mount is used, install a new mount with the same code.
All Wheel Drive Cars:

Compress coil spring with Special Tool 31 3 111
Important!
Pins must fit in openings.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 173
Lift off cap.

Unscrew self-locking nut with Special Tool 31 3 170 - counterholding on the piston rod.
Installation:
Take off washer (2).

Screw in Special Tool 31 3 115 entire length of threads.
Release and take off special tool compressor.
Take off mount.

Installed Order:
1 Self-locking nut
2 Washer with small diameter
3 Mount
4 insulator
5 Washer with large diameter
6 Cap
Inside curved surface of insulator (4) faces mount.
Lift off upper spring retainer with rubber ring and coil spring.
Installation:
Check upper and lower rubber rings, replacing if necessary.
Ends of coil spring must rest on shoulders in lower and upper spring retainers.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 174
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair
REPLACING WHEEL BEARINGS AND SHAFT SEAL
Remove output shaft assembly See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly
Remove brake drum.On 323 I, 325 e/I and Cars with ABS:Remove brake disc and Loosen exhaust assembly.
Drive Out stub shaft with Special Tool 334010.
Lift Out circlip.
Pull out wheel bearings with Special Tool 33 4 040.On 323 I, 325 e/i and Cars with ABS: Use Special Tool 33 4 031 beginning with 1986 models.
Use Special Tool 33 4 045.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 175
If applicable, pull inner bearing shell off of axle shaft with Special Tool 00 7 500 and a thrust pad.
323 I, 325 e/i and Cars with ABS beginning with 1986 Models: Use Special Tools 334 090 and 33 1 307.
Pull in wheel bearing assembly with Special Tool 33 4 040.On 323 I, 325 e/i and Cars with ABS beginning with 1986 Models: Use Special Tool 33
4 049.
Apply Special Tool 334 047.
Insert circlip.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 176
Pull in rear axle shaft with Special Tools 33 4 040 and 33 4 048.
Use Special Tool 33 4 045.
install output shaft, pulling in with Special Tool 332110. Tightening torque: 58-63nm(42-46ft.lbs)
Drive in lockplate with Special Tools 33 4 050 and 00 5 000.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 177
Wheel Hub: Service and Repair
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the wheel, brake caliper, and the brake disc.
3. Pry off and discard dust cap.
4. Using special tool 31 2 080 remove and discard hub nut.
Bearing Puller
5. Remove bearing assembly using special tools 31 2 102, 31 2 105, and 31 2 106. Discard bearing assembly after removal.
Axle Guard Retaining Bolts
6. Remove stub axle guard.
Inner Race And Dust Cover Removal
7. Remove bearing inner race and dust cover using special tools 31 2 100 and 31 2 102.
8. Install stub axle guard.
Bearing Installation Shaft
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 178
Bearing Installation
9. Install new dust cover. Using special tools 31 2 110 install new bearing assembly and hub.
10. Install new hub nut and torque to 214 ftlb (290 Nm).
11. Install new dust cap with sealing compound 81 22 8 407 420 or equivalent.
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 179
Vehicle: Specifications
Rated Voltage 12 V
Capacity (cold testing current in A) 50/(265) Ah
75/(380) Ah
85/(410) Ah
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes

Solenoid Valves ............................................................................................................................................................................................ Resistance
Left Front ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 0.8 - 1.9 Ohms
Right Front .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.8 - 1.9 Ohms
Rear ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.8 - 1.9 Ohms
Resistance Front 600 - 1.6 K ohms
Rear 600 - 1.6 K ohms
Foot-Pounds to Newton-Meters
The conversion formula to convert foot-pounds (ft/lbs) to newton-meters (Nm) is to take the foot-pounds and multiply by 1.35.
For example: 47 ft/lbs X 1.35 = 63.45 Nm
Some of the more common conversions are found below.
Pound-foot Newton-meter
1..................1.35
5..................6.75
10.................13.50
15.................20.25
20.................27.00
25.................33.75
30.................40.50
35.................47.25
40.................54.00
45.................60.75
50.................67.50
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 180
Fig. 2 Conversion Table, Millimeters To Inches
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 181
Fig. 3 Conversion Table, Inches To Millimeters
Fig. 4 Conversion Table, Feet To Meters
Fig. 5 Conversion Table, Meters To Feet
Cubic Inches to Cubic Centimeters
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 182
Fig. 6 Conversion Table, Cubic Inches To Cubic Centimeters
The conversion formula to go from cubic inches to cubic centimeters (cc) is to take the cubic inches and multiply by 16.387.
For example: 305 in. X 16.387 = 4998 cc.
Some common conversions can be found in the chart.
Cubic Centimeters to Cubic Inches
Fig. 7 Conversion Table, Cubic Centimeters To Cubic Inches
The conversion formula to go from cubic centimeters (cc) to cubic inches is to take the cubic centimeters and divide by 16.387
For example: 4998 cc / 16.387 = 305 cubic inches.
Some common conversions can be found in the chart.
Fig. 8 Conversion Table, U.S. Gallons To Liters
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 183
Fig. 9 Conversion Table, Liters To U.S. Gallons
Fig. 10 Conversion Table, Imperial Gallons To Liters
Fig. 11 Conversion Table, Liters To Imperial Gallons
Fig. 12 Conversion Table, Fahrenheit To Centigrade
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 184
Fig. 13 Conversion Table, Centigrade To Fahrenheit
Standardized Bolt Torque Specifications
Alignment
Alignment Specifications:
Note: Given specifications are for car loaded down to normal position. Refer to Inspection Conditions
[email protected]
7
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 185
See: Maintenance/Alignment/Testing and Inspection
1 Of 2
[email protected]
8
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 186
2 Of 2
Front wheel alignment
[email protected]
9
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 187
1 Of 2
[email protected]
10
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 188
2 Of 2
Rear wheel alignment
[email protected]
11
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 189
Front Ride Height Specifications
Front ride height
Wires to alternators
KI. D+ 7 Nm
KI. B+ 13 Nm
Alternator Pulley Torque

Alternator Pulley Torque
Pulley 45 Nm
Pulley (Ribbed Drive Belt) 60 Nm
Wire/Alternator Torque
Wire/Alternator Torque
Fillister head screw for wire holder 3.5 Nm
Rear holder 3.5 Nm
Alternator on bearing block 43 Nm
Front
Tighten ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 290 Nm (214 ft lbs)
Rear
Torque
Axle Nut ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 200 Nm. / 148 ft. lbs.
Reversing light switch 20 Nm
Front Caliper
Front Caliper
Caliper to Steering Knuckle 123 Nm
Guide Bolt 30 to 35 Nm
[email protected]
12
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 190
Bolts to Guide Pins 35 Nm
Always replace.
Rear Caliper
Rear Caliper
Caliper on Semi-Trailing Arm/Wheel Carrier 67 Nm
Guide Bolt 30 to 35 Nm
Wrench size 7 mm.
Front Disc Dimensions

Front Disc Dimensions
Machinining Limit 23.4 mm

(MIN TH) is stamped in brake shell.
Wear Limit 23.0 mm
Max. Thickness Tolerance (Parallelism) 0.02 mm
Max. Axial Runout Disc Installed 0.2 mm

Measured at largest diameter of braking surface.
Disc Removed 0.05 mm
Front Disc
Front Disc
Disc Diameter 260 mm
Front Disc
Front Disc
Disc to Wheel Hub 16 Nm
Rear Disc Dimensions

Rear Disc Dimensions
Machinining Limit 10.4 mm

(MIN TH) is stamped in brake shell.
Wear Limit 10.0 mm
Max. Thickness Tolerance (Parallelism) 0.02 mm
Max. Axial Runout Disc Installed 0.2 mm

Measured at largest diameter of braking surface.
Disc Removed 0.05 mm
Rear Disc
Rear Disc
Disc Diameter 258 mm
Rear Disc
[email protected]
13
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 191
Rear Disc
Disc to Wheel Hub 16 Nm
Compressor To Engine 22 Nm
Magnetic clutch spring plate 20 Nm
Compressor Clutch Gap

Compressor Clutch Gap
All Models With Vane Type (Rotary Style) Compressor 0.3 - 0.6 mm
Clutch gap specifications for other compressor types are not supplied Adjustbale by using shims
by the manufacturer.
Distributor Cap Torque

Distributor Cap Torque
Distributor Cap 4.0 Nm
Comparison Table Units - Thread Torques
Conversion And Comparison Tables
[email protected]
14
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 192
Table 2 Of 3
Table 3 Of 3
[email protected]
15
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 193
Instructions
M4 & M5 Thread Torques
M6 & M7 Thread Torque
[email protected]
16
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 194
M8 & M8x1 Thread Torque
[email protected]
17
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 195
M16 & M16x1.5 Thread Torque
M18 & M18x1.5 Thread Torque
Engine Technical Data

ENGINE TECHNICAL DATA
[email protected]
18
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 196
Engine Specifications
[email protected]
19
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 197
Determining Oil Consumption
[email protected]
20
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 198
Crankcase Specifications
[email protected]
21
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 199
Cylinder Head
[email protected]
22
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 200
Valve Seat Inserts
[email protected]
23
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 201
Valve Seats
[email protected]
24
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 202
Timing Case
[email protected]
25
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 203
Crankshaft And Bearings
[email protected]
26
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 204
Crankshaft And Bearings Cont.
[email protected]
27
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 205
[email protected]
28
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 206
[email protected]
29
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 207
[email protected]
30
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 208
Flywheel
[email protected]
31
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 209
Connecting Rods And Bearings
[email protected]
32
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 210
Pistons
[email protected]
33
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 211
Piston Rings
[email protected]
34
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 212
Camshaft
[email protected]
35
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 213
Chain Tensioner
[email protected]
36
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 214
Valves
[email protected]
37
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 215
Oil Supply
[email protected]
38
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 216
Fan Clutch
Engine Torque Specification

S14 engine
Engine Block
1AZ Main bearing screws

M10
[email protected]
39
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 217
Jointing Angle ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 20 Nm
Torque Angle ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 50°
Note: Replace, wash and oil screws.
4AZ Struts/bracing shell
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 66 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
5AZ Drain plug for coolant in engine block
M14 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm
6AZ Main oil gallery seal plugs
M16 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34 Nm
M18 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm
7AZ Oil spray nozzle on engine block
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil spray nozzle to engine block
Banjo bolt
M8 x 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
Cylinder Head and Cover
9AZ Cylinder head bolts

torque .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 50 Nm
torque .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 80 Nm
setting time ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 min
torque ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 100 Nm
Note: Replace, wash and oil cylinder head bolts.
11AZ Cylinder head cover
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
13AZ Timing case to cylinder head
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 20 Nm
Oil Pan
1AZ Oil drain plug

M12 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm
M18 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30 Nm
M22 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 60 Nm
2AZ Oil pan on engine block
M6 8.8 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm
M6 10.9 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Nm
M8 8.8 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 22 Nm
Oil sump, lower section to upper section
M6 8.8 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm
M8 8.8 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 22 Nm
Oil sump bottom section to top section with microencapsulated screws
M6 10/9 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Nm
Note: Replace screws
Case Cover
1AZ Timing case and timing case cover top and bottom
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm
2AZ End cover, Front/rear, to crankcase
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
Crankshaft and Bearings
1AZ Incremental Wheel on Crankshaft

M5 10.9 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Nm
M5 8.8 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5.5 Nm
Note: Replace screws.
Flywheel
1AZ Flywheel to crankshaft
[email protected]
40
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 218
Manual transmission flywheel to crankshaft ............................................................................................................................................ 105 Nm
Vibration Damper
2AZ Vibration damper / hub to crankshaft

M24 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 440 Nm
Note: Replace Screws.
3Az Belt pulley / vibration damper to hub
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
Connecting Rods and Bearings
1AZ Connecting Rod bolts ................................................................................................................................................................................... 55 Nm

Note: Replace, wash and oil screws.
Camshaft
1AZ Camshaft bearing cap

M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 20 Nm
3AZ Sprocket to camshaft flange
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
7AZ Screw plug for chain tensioner
M22 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm
8AZ Cylinder for chain tensioner plunger
M26 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 50 Nm
11AZ Screw-in pin on camshaft
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 20 Nm
Nut on screw-in plug
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Pump With Strainer and Drive
2AZ Oil pump to crankcase

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
3AZ Oil pump cover
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
4AZ Sprocket to oil pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M10 x 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm
Oil Filter and Pipes
1AZ Oil filter (one way cartridge) (Tighten to specifications on spin on oil filter)
2AZ Full flow oil filter (cover)
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 33 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 33 Nm
Screwed-on cover ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm
3AZ Oil filter housing and lines on crankcase
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M20 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm
6AZ Oil line to bearing points and camshaft lubricant
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
7AZ Oil line for camshaft lubricant on cylinder head
Banjo bolt M8 x 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm
M5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
8AZ Oil cooler oil pipes to oil filter housing
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
9AZ Oil pipes to turbo charger
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
10AZ Oil lines from turbocharger to engine block
Hollow bolt M16 x 1.5 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm
11AZ Oil supply pipe to turbocharger
Hollow bolt ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
Coupling nut ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 30 Nm
[email protected]
41
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 219
Water Pump and Drive
1AZ Water pump to crankcase

M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
Fan
1AZ Fan clutch on water pump

Coupling nut ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm
Note: left handed thread.
Thermostat and Connections
1AZ Thermostat housing

M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
2AZ Bleeder screw
M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Intake Manifold
1AZ Intake manifold on cylinder head

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Exhaust Manifold
1AZ Exhaust manifold to cylinder head

Coat screw connections with Molykote HSC past
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Note: Replace Nuts.
M7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
Note: Replace Nuts.
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Note: Replace Nuts.
Emissions-Control, Lambda Oxygen Sensor
1AZ Oxygen control sensor, oxygen monitor sensor

M18 x 1.5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 50 Nm
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket
Sprocket To Camshaft Flange
Tighten ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
Technical Data
[email protected]
42
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 220
Camshaft
[email protected]
43
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 221
Cam Specs I
[email protected]
44
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 222
Cam Specs II
[email protected]
45
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 223
Cam Specs III
System Specifications
[email protected]
46
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 224
Crankcase Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing
[email protected]
47
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 225
Technical Data
[email protected]
48
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 226
Torque
Conrod Bolts [1]
Step #1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Nm (3.5 ft lb)
Step #2 .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 30 Nm (21 ft lb)
Step #3 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... Torque Angle 60°
[1] Replace, wash and oil bolts.
Coolant Drain Plug, Cylinder Block
[email protected]
49
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 227
Plug
12 mm x 1.5 [1]................................................................................................................................................................................. 30 Nm (22 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket
Vibration Damper Hub To Crankshaft
Tighten [1] .................................................................................................................................................................................... 440 Nm (325 ft lb)
[1] Replace Bolt.

Technical Data
[email protected]
50
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 228
Crankshaft And Bearings
[email protected]
51
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 229
[email protected]
52
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 230
[email protected]
53
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 231
[email protected]
54
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 232
Torque, Main Bearings

Main Bearing Caps
10 mm Bolts [1][2]
Step #1 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 20 Nm (14.75 ft lb)
Step #2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... Torque Angle 50°
[1] Replace bolts.

[2] Bolts washed and lubricated.
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley

[email protected]
55
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 233
Pulley And Vibration Damper To Hub
8 mm [1] 8.8 [2] ............................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
[1] Bolt size.

[2] Bolt strength.
Piston, Engine
Pistons
[email protected]
56
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 234
Piston Rings
Rear Engine Plate

Rear Cover To Crankcase
6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Technical Data
[email protected]
57
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 235
Cylinder Head
[email protected]
58
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 236
Valve Seat Inserts
[email protected]
59
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 237
Valve Seats
[email protected]
60
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 238
Timing Case
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Torque Sequence
[email protected]
61
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 239
Cylinder Head Bolts [1]

Step #1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 50 Nm (37 ft lb).
Step #2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 80 Nm (59 ft lb).
Run engine warm 15 minutes!
Step #3 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm (74 ft lb).
CAUTION:Remove oil and debris from bolt holes. If not, improper values or damage may result.
[1] Install new, lightly oiled bolts.
Timing Case Cover to Cylinder Head

Tighten
7 mm [1] .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lb).
8 mm [1] .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft lb).
[1] Screw size.
Valve Cover
Cylinder Head Cover Screws
6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (7 ft lb).
7 mm [1] .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lb).
[1] Screw size.
Valve Seat
[email protected]
62
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 240
Valve Seat Inserts
[email protected]
63
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 241
Valve Seats
Valve, Intake/Exhaust
[email protected]
64
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 242
Valves
Engine Mount
Rubber Mount To Axle Carrier
8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
10 mm [1] ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 47 Nm (35 ft lb)
Rubber Mount To Engine Console

8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
10 mm [1] ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 47 Nm (35 ft lb)
[email protected]
65
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 243
Engine Console To Engine

8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
10 mm [1] ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 47 Nm (35 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Engine Oil Drain Plug

Plug
12 mm x 1.5 [1] ................................................................................................................................................................................ 35 Nm (26 ft lb)
22 mm x 1.5 [1] ................................................................................................................................................................................ 60 Nm (44 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Intake Manifold
Manifold To Cylinder Head
8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.

Oil Filter, Engine
Filter Element (Throw Away Type)
Tighten .......................................................................................................................................................... By Hand To Specifications On Filter
Oil Filter Housing Pipe To Crankcase

Tighten ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm (18 ft lb)
Oil Line, Engine

Oil Cooler Pipes To Oil Filter Housing
Tighten ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 35 Nm (26 ft lb)
Oil Pan, Engine

Tighten
6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Oil Pressure Switch 35 Nm
Oil Pump, Engine

Oil Pump To Crankcase
8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
Oil Pump Cover

6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
Sprocket To Oil Pump

10 mm x 1 [1] ................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Timing Chain Tensioner
[email protected]
66
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 244
Chain Tensioner
Timing Cover
Tighten
7 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lb)
8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Exhaust Manifold
[email protected]
67
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 245
Exhaust Manifold To Cylinder Head
6 mm [1][2] ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.

[2] Coat screw connections with Molykote HSC compound.
Fan Clutch
Fan Clutch To Water Pump
Tighten [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm (30 ft lb)
Fan To Clutch
6 mm [2] ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
[1] Coupling nut/Left hand threads.

[2] Screw size.
All 4 cyl Engines

All 4 cyl Engines
Firing Sequence 1-3-4-2
Thread Size of Line Torque Specification
5/8" 20 Nm
3/4" 39 Nm
7/8" 42 Nm
11/16" 48 Nm
Rotor Torque
Rotor Torque
Distributor Rotor to Adapter 2.8 Nm
Seat Belt Component Torque

Seat Belt Component Torque
Saftey belt on body (Except for B-pillar) 48 Nm
Saftey belt on B-pillar 31 Nm
Saftey belt on seat, on touring also on rear seat backrest 48 Nm
Screws for seatbelt height adjustment on body 24 Nm
Saftey belt with belt height adjustment 31 Nm
Spark Plug Gap

The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB SI B12 01 05 dated December 2009.
This technical service bulletin (12 01 05) was first published in May of 2005 (that is the meaning of the 05) and has been updated several times, sinc
Electrode gap .................................................................................................................................................................. 0.024 - 0.028 in (0.6 - 0.7 mm)

Torque Specifications
The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB SI B12 01 05 dated December 2009.
[email protected]
68
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 246
Special Tools And Torque Specifications
Sender Torque
Sender Torque
Screws for speedometer sender 6.6. - 8.4 Nm
Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling

Thermostat Housing
6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
Bleeder Screw
8 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm (6 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
3HP-22
Automatic Transmission
3HP-22
All
Transmission to Engine Hex Head Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
Reinforcement to transmission
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
Transmission Extension
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
Converter Bell Housing
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
[email protected]
69
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 247
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Filler Pipe ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Collar Nut ................................................................................................................................................................................ 100 Nm

Valve body to transmission
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Valve housing to valve body
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
Governor Flange to Transmission

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
Centrifugal governor stud
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
Hexagon nut on stud ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Nm
Centrifugal governor Screw
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm
Transmission Lever to Transmission

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Crossmember to Body ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 21 Nm

Rubber mount to crossmember or transmission ............................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
4HP-22/24
4HP-22/24

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 46 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
M14 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
M20 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 50 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
[email protected]
70
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 248
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Filler Pipe ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 98 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Collar Nut

M6............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm
Torx Screws for Clutch Fork to Transmission Case
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Governor housing to hub
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Pressure Regulator to Valve Body

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Solenoid to Valve Body
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Transmission Socket to Case

M26 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

Pipe support to engine carrier
A4S 270R (THM-R1/ Wide Stepped)

Automatic Transmissions
A4S 270R (THM-R1 Wide Stepped)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
[email protected]
71
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 249
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Slotted Nut .................................................................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm
Valve Body
5/15 inch ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
Hexagon nut on stud ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Crossmember to Body ................................................................................................................................................................................ 21 Nm

Rubber mount to crossmember or transmission ......................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Pipe support to engine carrier ..................................................................................................................................................................... 42 Nm
Rubber mount to pipe support .................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Pulse Support ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm

A4S 310 R

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 82 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 28 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
M20 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 50 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
[email protected]
72
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 250
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm
Filler Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Slotted Nut................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm
Valve Body
5/16 inch ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
Oil Strainer ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Pressure Regulator to Valve Body...................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm

Solenoid to Valve Body ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
Transmission Socket to Case ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
Shift Element to Shaft .................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
Crossmember to Body ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm

Pipe support to engine carrier ........................................................................................................................................................................... 42 Nm
Rubber mount to pipe support .......................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Pulse Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
A5S 310Z (5HP-18)
A5S 310 Z (5HP-18)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
[email protected]
73
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 251
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Oil bore plugs.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm
Output Flange Slotted Nut............................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm
Oil Pump body.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Guide/parking lock mechanism ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm
Pulse Sender ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Nm

M26 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

Pipe support to engine carrier...................................................................................................................................................................... 42 Nm
Rubber mount to pipe support..................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Pulse Support.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
A5S 325Z (5HP-19)
Automatic Transmission ZF
A5S 325 Z (5HP-19)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
[email protected]
74
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 252
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Slotted Nut......................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
Oil cooler pipe adapter to transmission...................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

A5S 360R / 390R

A5S 360R / 390R
A5S 360R / 390R Hydramatic

Transmission to engine Hex screws
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 82 Nm
Transmission to engine Torx bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72 Nm
Reinforcement shell to transmission/extension
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transmission Case, Oil Sump

Transmission extension
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
Guard
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9 Nm
Converted Bell Housing
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
Oil Pan
[email protected]
75
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 253
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil drain plug
M14 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18 Nm
Oil filter plug
M14 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18 Nm
Radial shaft seal on converter bellhousing
M4................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3 Nm
Electrical fittings
Position switch on transmission
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Flange nut, output flange without spring washer ............................................................................................................................................. 30 Nm

Flange nut, output flange with spring washer .................................................................................................................................................. 60 Nm
Hydraulic/electric control parts and controlling elements

M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Nm
Primary Pump
Oil pump to case
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Nm
Oil strainer .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
Oil pump body
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Governor
Governor flange to transmission
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16 Nm
Stud in centrifugal governor
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
Hexagon head screw on centrifugal governor
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Nm
Shift Valves, Parking Lock

Guide Plate/Parking Lock Mechanism
M6 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21Nm
Pulse sender
M6 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11Nm
Torque converter
Torque converter to flywheel
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 45 Nm
External shift linkage

Selector lever on transmission
M8x1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm
Transmission mounts
Cross member to body ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Rubber mounts to cross member or transmission ............................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
Support tube to engine subframe
E36 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42 Nm
Rubber mounts to carrier pipe
E36 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
Carrier plate
E36 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
A5S 440Z (5HP-24)

A5S 440Z

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
[email protected]
76
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 254
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Shift Element to Shaft

A 4 S 310 R ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm

A5S 560Z (5HP-30)

A5S 560 Z (5HP-30)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug

M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
[email protected]
77
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 255
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 50 Nm
Filler Plug
M10 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Oil bore plugs ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm

M6 X 12 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm
M6 X 55 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

Pulse Sender ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm
560 Z ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

Pulse Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Automatic Transmission Technical Data
[email protected]
78
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 256
Transmission Data
Shift Points, Partial Throttle
[email protected]
79
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 257
Shift Points, Full Throttle
Shift Point, Kickdown
[email protected]
80
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 258
Shift Points, Manually
Oil Pressure
[email protected]
81
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 259
Primary Pump
3HP-22
3HP-22
All
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Filler Pipe ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Collar Nut ................................................................................................................................................................................ 100 Nm

M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
[email protected]
82
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 260
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

4HP-22/24
4HP-22/24

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 46 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
M14 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
M20 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 50 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Collar Nut

M6............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
[email protected]
83
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 261
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm

M26 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

Pipe support to engine carrier

A4S 270R (THM-R1 Wide Stepped)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Slotted Nut .................................................................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm
Valve Body
5/15 inch ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
[email protected]
84
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 262
Oil Strainer ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

Pipe support to engine carrier ..................................................................................................................................................................... 42 Nm
Rubber mount to pipe support .................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Pulse Support ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm

A4S 310 R

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 82 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 28 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
M20 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 50 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm
Filler Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Slotted Nut................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm
Valve Body
5/16 inch ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
Oil Strainer ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Nm
[email protected]
85
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 263

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Pressure Regulator to Valve Body...................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm

Transmission Socket to Case ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Nm
Shift Element to Shaft .................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm
Crossmember to Body ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm

Pulse Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
A5S 310Z (5HP-18)
A5S 310 Z (5HP-18)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Oil bore plugs.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
[email protected]
86
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 264
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm
Oil Pump body.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Pulse Sender ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Nm

M26 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

Pipe support to engine carrier...................................................................................................................................................................... 42 Nm
Rubber mount to pipe support..................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Pulse Support.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
A5S 325Z (5HP-19)
Automatic Transmission ZF
A5S 325 Z (5HP-19)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Output Flange Slotted Nut......................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm

[email protected]
87
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 265
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
Oil cooler pipe adapter to transmission...................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

A5S 360R / 390R

A5S 360R / 390R
A5S 360R / 390R Hydramatic

Transmission to engine Hex screws
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 82 Nm
Transmission to engine Torx bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72 Nm
Reinforcement shell to transmission/extension
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transmission Case, Oil Sump

Transmission extension
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
Guard
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9 Nm
Converted Bell Housing
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
Oil Pan
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil drain plug
M14 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18 Nm
Oil filter plug
M14 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18 Nm
Radial shaft seal on converter bellhousing
M4................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3 Nm
Electrical fittings
Position switch on transmission
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Flange nut, output flange without spring washer ............................................................................................................................................. 30 Nm

Flange nut, output flange with spring washer .................................................................................................................................................. 60 Nm
Hydraulic/electric control parts and controlling elements

M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Nm
[email protected]
88
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 266
Primary Pump
Oil pump to case
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Nm
Oil strainer .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
Oil pump body
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Governor
Governor flange to transmission
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16 Nm
Stud in centrifugal governor
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
Hexagon head screw on centrifugal governor
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Nm
Shift Valves, Parking Lock

Guide Plate/Parking Lock Mechanism
M6 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21Nm
Pulse sender
M6 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11Nm
Torque converter
Torque converter to flywheel
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 45 Nm
External shift linkage

Selector lever on transmission
M8x1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm
Transmission mounts
Cross member to body ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Rubber mounts to cross member or transmission ............................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
Support tube to engine subframe
E36 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42 Nm
Rubber mounts to carrier pipe
E36 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
Carrier plate
E36 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Nm
A5S 440Z (5HP-24)

A5S 440Z

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Oil Pump
[email protected]
89
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 267
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
Shift Element to Shaft

A 4 S 310 R ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm

A5S 560Z (5HP-30)

A5S 560 Z (5HP-30)

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 78 Nm
Torx Bolts
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42 Nm
M12 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Cover
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Transfer Plate Plug

M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm
Oil Sump
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
Oil Drain Plug
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 50 Nm
Filler Plug
M10 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Nm
Oil Plug
M18 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm
Oil bore plugs ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm

M6 X 12 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm
M6 X 55 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Nm
Oil Pump
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
[email protected]
90
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 268
Oil Strainer ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm

M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Nm
M6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Nm
M6 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm

Pulse Sender ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Nm
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
Torque Converter
M8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
M10 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Nm
560 Z ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45 Nm

M8 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm

Pulse Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm
Temperature switch 91 deg C 14 Nm
99 deg C 14 Nm
Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints

Torque
Axle Nut ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 200 Nm. / 148 ft. lbs.

Output Shaft Bolts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 83 Nm. / 61 ft. lbs.
Flex Plate
Flywheel To Crankshaft
Tighten [1] ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 105 Nm (75 ft lb)
[1] Use new micro-encapsulated (cement) bolts.
Flywheel
Flywheel To Crankshaft
Tighten [1] ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 105 Nm (75 ft lb)
[1] Use new micro-encapsulated (cement) bolts.
Manual Transmission/Transaxle
Clutch With Drive Plate
Clutch to Flywheel
[email protected]
91
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 269
Clutch to Flywheel
M8 Bolts [Grade 10.9] 34 Nm

Replace bolt and taper sleeve.
Water Pump To Crankcase
6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
8 mm [1] ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Drive Pulley, Water Pump

Pulley To Water Pump
6 mm [1] ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (7 ft lb)
[1] Screw size.
Wheel Stud / Lug Nut

ALL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 75 ft/lbs
Air Temperature Sensor ( Ambient / Intake )

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
At 68°F..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.3 - 2.7K ohms

At 178°F................................................................................................................................................................................................. 0.3 - 0.36K ohms
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
At 68°F..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.2 - 2.7K ohms

At 122°F............................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.76 - 0.91K ohms
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer)

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
At 68°F..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.3 - 2.7K ohms

At 178°F................................................................................................................................................................................................. 0.3 - 0.36K ohms
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
At 68°F..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.2 - 2.7K ohms

At 122°F............................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.76 - 0.91K ohms
Normal System Pressure

Normal System Pressure
Oil Pressure At Idle Speed (Overpressure) 0.5 bar

Engine at operating temperature min. pressure
Oil Pressure At Top Speed (Overpressure) 4.0 to 6.0 bar
Component Pressure Specification

Component Pressure Specification
Inlet Pressure 14 bar
Outlet Pressure 1.8 bar
Leak test with detector at pressure of 1 - 2 bar
[email protected]
92
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 270
Fuel Pressure Specifications
Fuel Pump
For fuel pressure specifications, please refer to fuel pressure.
See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Pressure/Specifications
Component Operation
Component Operation
Switching-on Pressure (high Pressure) 0.2 - 0.5 bar
Cooling System
MAKE, YEAR & MODEL LITERS QUARTS
BMW
1992-91 318i 6.5 7.0

325 Series 10.5 11.0
535i 12.0 12.5
850i 13.0 13.5
M3 9.5 10.0
M5 13.5 14.0
1992-89 525i 10.5 11.0
1992-88 750iL 15.0 16.0
1990-85 325e, 535i, 635CSi,
735i, 735iL 12.0 13.0
1988-85 528e 11.0 11.5
1986-85 524td 12.0 13.0
1985-83 318i 7.0 7.5
1984-83 528e, 533i 12.0 13.0
633CSi, 733i 12.0 13.0
1983 320i 7.0 7.5
Without Filter Change 4.1 L
With Filter Change 4.4 L
Fluid - M/T
NOTE: Inspect for a color coded fluid identification label, usually affixed to the passenger side of the transmission bellhousing. Verify fluid installe
GREEN LABEL*..................................................................................................................................................................................................... GLS

RED LABEL*............................................................................................................................................................................................................. AF
NO LABEL**................................................................................................................................................................................................. 80W GL-4
CAPACITY, Refill:
1983-84 533i, 633CSi, 733i.............................................................................................................................................................. 1.6 liters 3.4 pints
1983-85 318i..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.2 liters 2.5 pints
1983-88 528e..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.6 liters 3.4 pints
1985-87 535i, 635CSi, 735i.............................................................................................................................................................. 1.6 liters 3.4 pints
[email protected]
93
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 271
1987-90 M5....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 liters 2.7 pints
1988-89 635CSi, M6......................................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 liters 2.7 pints
1988-92 735i..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 liters 2.7 pints
1988-90 325i, 525i, 535i................................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 liters 2.7 pints
1988-90 M3....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.2 liters 2.5 pints
1991-92 525i..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.0 liters 2.2 pints
1991-92 325i, 535i, M5..................................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 liters 2.7 pints
1991-92 850i..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.3 liters 4.8 pints
*Units that are factory filled with AF or GLS are fitted with 17mm external hex head drain and fill plugs.
**Units that are factory filled with GL-4 are fitted with 17mm internal hex (Allen) head drain and fill plugs.
Fluid - Transfer Case

Type.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. AF
CAPACITY, Refill:
325ix.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 0.5 liters 1.0 pints
Specifications are found under the component level.
For Refrigerant See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant/Specifications/Capacity Specifications
For Refrigerant Oil See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant Oil/Specifications/Capacity Specifications
Oil Replacement After Service
Amount of refrigerant machine oil 20 g

Evaporator 40 g


Total Capacity 1.93 lb (US)
Refrigerant Oil Capacity Drum Type Compressor 300 cc
Impeller Cell Type Compressor 200 cc
Power Steering Fluid

Power Steering System Capacity ....................................................................................................................................... approx. 1200 ml (40 fl. oz.)
Brake Fluid
All vehicles with DSC without pre charging pumps must be filled with the new DOT4 low-viscosity brake fluid!
[email protected]
94
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 272
All other models can be filled with the DOT4 or DOT4 low viscosity brake fluid.
Specifications are found under the component level.
For Refrigerant See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant/Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications
For Refrigerant Oil See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant Oil/Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Type R 12
Refrigerant Oil Type BMW Part No. 81 229 407 028 or equivalent
Maintenance
KEY TO LUBRICATION ABBREVIATIONS
NOTE: Some manufacturer lubricant names may differ from the following list. If the manufacturer does not recommend a specific lubricant, use th
ATF Dexron(r)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid

AP ATF-PLUS(r) Automatic Transmission Fluid
BJ Suspension Lubricant
BL Brake Lubricant
CC Motor Oil, API Service CC
CD Motor Oil, API Service CD
CE Motor Oil, API Service CE
CF-4 Motor Oil, API Service CF-4
DC Distributor Cam Lubricant
EC Ethylene Glycol Coolant
EP Extreme Pressure Gear Oil
FA Automatic Transmission Fluid, Type F
GC Wheel Bearing Grease, NLGI Classification GC
GF-1 Motor Oil, API Service GF-1 (Starburst)
GL-1 Gear Oil, API Service GL-1
GL-5* GL-5 Gear Oil for Limited Slip Differentials
GLS Gear Lubricant, Special
HB Hydraulic Brake Fluid, SAE J1703, DOT-3 or 4
HBH Hydraulic Brake Fluid, Extra Heavy Duty
HG High Temperature Grease
HP Hypoid Gear Oil
HP* Hypoid Gear Oil for Limited Slip or Traction-Lok Differentials
LB Chassis Grease, NLGI Classification LB
LL Steering Linkage Lubricant
LM Lithium Multipurpose Grease
MA Mercon(r) Automatic Transmission Fluid
MH Manifold Heat Riser Solvent
MO Motor Oil, Any API Service Classification
PC Carburetor Cleaner
PS Power Steering Fluid
SF Motor Oil, API service SF
SG Motor Oil, API service SG
SH Motor Oil, API service SH
SLF Special Lubricant - Fluid
SLS Special Lubricant - Spray
WB Wheel Bearing Grease
Power Steering Fluid

Power Steering System Fluid ................................................................................................................................................. Dexron or Dexron II ATF
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 273
Vehicle: Locations
Location Index
Location Index:
150 Degree Compressor Oil Temp Sw - Coolant Temp Sender
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 274
Coolant Temp Sensor - Lock Heater
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 275
Lock Heater Control Unit - Unlock Inhibit Switch
Washer Fluid Level Sw - Wiper Motor
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 276
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 277
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 278
[email protected]
7
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 279
[email protected]
8
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 280
[email protected]
9
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 281
[email protected]
10
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 282
[email protected]
11
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 283
[email protected]
12
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 284
[email protected]
13
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 285
[email protected]
14
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 286
[email protected]
15
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 287
[email protected]
16
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 288
Additional Information
If the component you are looking for is not listed here, please refer to System or Sub-Assembly Locations. Example: If Air Flow Meter is not
found here, refer to Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Air Flow Meter/Locations.
Location Index
Connector Location Index:
[email protected]
17
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 289
Connectors C101 - C204
[email protected]
18
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 290
[email protected]
19
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 291
[email protected]
20
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 292
[email protected]
21
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 293
[email protected]
22
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 294
[email protected]
23
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 295
[email protected]
24
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 296
[email protected]
25
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 297
[email protected]
26
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 298
[email protected]
27
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 299
[email protected]
28
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 300
[email protected]
29
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 301
[email protected]
30
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 302
[email protected]
31
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 303
Fuse And Relay Positions In Distribution Box
[email protected]
32
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 304
Location Index
Ground Location Index:
Grounds G100 - G600
[email protected]
33
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 305
[email protected]
34
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 306
[email protected]
35
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 307
[email protected]
36
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 308
[email protected]
37
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 309
[email protected]
38
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 310
[email protected]
39
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 311
[email protected]
40
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 312
[email protected]
41
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 313
[email protected]
42
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 314
[email protected]
43
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 315
[email protected]
44
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 316
Splice Location Index

Slice Location Index:
This index lists all the splices in the vehicle, the harness location of each splice, and the figure on which each splice appears. The images after the
index show how the harnesses are routed through the vehicle and the location of the splices on the harnesses.
Splice S100 - S209
[email protected]
45
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 317
Splice S210 - S252
[email protected]
46
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 318
Splice S260 - S542
[email protected]
47
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 319
Door Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
48
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 320
Engine Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
49
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 321
Instrument Panel Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
50
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 322
Main Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
51
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 323
On-Board Computer Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
52
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 324
Main Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
53
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 325
Engine Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
54
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 326
Door Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
55
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 327
Instrument Panel Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
56
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 328
On-Board Computer Harness Splice Location
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 329
Vehicle: Diagrams
Wire Color Code Identification

Black .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. SW or BK
Blue ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. BL or BU
Brown ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ BR
Gray .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... GR
Green ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ GN
Orange ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... OR
Pink ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ RS
Red .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. RT or RD
Violet .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI
White ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ WS or WT
Yellow ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. GE or YL
BK or SW ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... BLACK
BU ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ BLUE
BR .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... BROWN
GY or GR ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ GRAY
GN ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... GREEN
OR ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ORANGE
PK or RS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... PINK
RD or RT ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ RED
VI ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIOLET
WT or WS ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... WHITE
YL or GE ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... YELLOW
Part 1 A
67292 Recirculated Air Control Valve 2
A2 Telematics Control Unit
A3 Operating Unit, Driver Assistance Systems

A4 Rear Passenger's Side Seat Module
A5 Seat Heating Module, Rear Passenger's Side
A6 RDS Transmitter, Front Left
A6 Trailer Module
A6 Trailer Module (Convertible)
A6 Trailer Module (Without Convertible)
A7 RDC Transmitter, Front Right
A8 RDC Transmitter, Rear Left
A9 RDC Transmitter, Rear Right
A11 Crash Safety Module
A12 Central Information Display
A12 Multiple Restraint System Control Unit
A14 Control Module, Independent/Auxiliary Heating

A14 Light Switch
A14 Park Heating/Ventilation Control Module
A16 Car Access System
A17 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Driver's Door
A18 Amplifier
A18 Amplifier (AMP Hi-Fi Amplifier)
A18 Amplifier (Without Convertible)
A18 Rear Driver's Side Seat Module
A21 Roof Functions Module, High Variant
A22 Electrochromic Interior Rear-View Mirror
A23 DVD Changer
A24 Reversing Camera
A25 Video Module
A26 Passenger's Seat Module
A27 Electronic Outer Door Handle Module, Driver
A28 Outside Door Handle Electronics, Driver's Side, Rear
A29 Exterior Rear-View Mirror, Driver's Side
A2a Instrument Cluster Control Module
A30 Damper Satellite, Rear Right
A31 Drive, Soft Close Automatic, Passenger's Door
A32 Drive, Soft Close Automatic System, Driver's Side, Rear
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 330
A33 Drive, Soft Close Automatic System, Passenger's Side Rear
A33 Sunroof (SHD Sliding/Tilting Sunroof)
A34 Junction-Box Electronics
A35 Rear Compartment Controller
A36 Intermittent Wipe/Wash Control Module, Rear
A36 Trailer Module
A37 HiFi Amplifier
A38 Rear Seat Entertainment
A39 Rear Compartment Automatic Climate Control
A40 Video Switch
A42 Car Informtion Computer
A42 Rear Power Distribution Box
A43 Boot Lid Lift
A44 Seat Heating Module, Rear Driver's Side
A46 Digital Motor Electronics
A46 Fuse Holder, Rear
A47 Damper Satellite, Front Left
A48 Damper Satellite, Front Right
A49 Vertical Dynamics Management
A50 Rejector Circuit Ground, Rear Window Defogger
A51 Central Gateway Module
A52 Top-HiFi Amplifier
A56 Camera-Based Driver Assistance System
A57 Eject Box, Front
A58 Footwell Module
A60 Electrochromic Interior Rear View Mirror
A61 Electronic Ride-Height Control
A63 Rejector Circuit 2, Rear Window Defogger
A64 Passenger's Seat Occupancy Detection
A65 Active Steering
A66 Type Pressure Control
A69 Electronic Steering Wheel Module
A6a Electronic Wheel Module, Front Left
A71 Instrument Cluster Control Unit
A72 Steering Column Switch Center

A73 Exterior Rear-View Mirror, Passenger's Side
A74 Damper Satellite, Rear Left
A75 Outside Door Handle Electronics, Passenger's Side, Rear
A76 Electronic Outer Door Handle Module, Passenger
A77 Rear Axle King Pin Inclination Control
A78 Integrated Chassis Management
A7a Electronic Wheel Module, Front Right
A80 Electronic Night Vision Module
A81 Night Vision Camera
A84 Camera For Lane Departure Warning
A85 Rear Compartment Display II
A86 Satellite Tuner
A88 Controller
A89 Rear Compartment Display
A8a Electronic Wheel Module, Rear Left
A90 Parking Brake Control Module
A91 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
A92 Steering Column Switch Cluster
A93 Driver's Seat Module
A94 Head-Up Display
A95 Heating/Air Conditioning System
A96 Convertible Top Module
A98 Fuel Pump Control (EKPS)
A9a Electronic Wheel Module, Rear Right
A112 Bumper Camera, Left
A113 Bumper Camera, Right
A113 Seat Occupancy Recognition
A117 Diagnostic Module For Fuel Tank Leakage
A11a Heating/Air Conditioning Control Module
A11a Heating/Air Conditioning System
A11a Heating/Air-conditioning System
A122 Aerial Diversity
A123 Fully Automatic Towing Hitch
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 331
A124 Rejector Circuit, Rear Window Defogger
A129 Cooler Box
A12a Crash Safety Module
A131 Rear Compartment Air Conditioning System
A132 Electric Motor-Driven Reel, Left
A133 Electric Motor-Driven Reel, Right
A135 USB Hub
A139 Lateral-Acceleration Sensor, Dynamic Drive
A14a Independent Auxiliary Heater
A150 Eject Box, Rear
A151 Eject Box 2, Rear
A152 Switch Block Multifunction Steering Wheel, Left
A153 Switch Block Multifunction Steering Wheel, Right
A154 Control Panel, Rear Compartment Air Conditioning, Right
A155 Rear Air Conditioning Control Panel, Left
A167 All-Round Vision Camera
A168 Interface Box
A169 Center Console Switch Centre
A169 Centre Console Switch Centre
A169 Console Switch Center
A169 Interface Box, High
A172 Roof Functions Module, Basic Variant
A173 Airbag Sensor, Left B-Pillar
A173 Airbag Sensor, Left B-Pillar (Non-Coupe)
A174 Airbag Sensor, Right B-Pillar
A186 Passenger's Seat Module
A187 Driver'S Seat Module
A187 Driver's Seat Module
A195 Towing Hitch Release
A197 Video Module
A207 Control Module, Rear Compartment Air Conditioning
A208 Outside Mirror Fold-In
A215 Comfort Access Control Module
A215 Comfort Access Control Module (CA Comfort Access)
A221 Seat Occupancy Electronics, Driver's Seat
A234 Accelerator Pedal Module
A23a XXX
A23b Driver'S Switch Cluster
A23b Driver's Switch Cluster
A244 Reversing Camera
A247 TV Amplifier, Rear Lid
A260 Integrated Chassis Management (ICM)
A269 Active Video Switch
A33C Slide/Tilt Sunroof Drive Unit
A33c Slide/Tilt Sunroof Drive Unit
A400 Fuse Box
A404 Fuse Box
A406 Fuse Box
A409 Tone Sequence Control Module
A420 Wave Trap
A421 Antenna Diversity
A421 Antenna Diversity (Convertible)

A421 Antenna Diversity (Without Convertible)
A436 Operating Unit RTK-6
A453 Left TV Amplifier
A460 VICS Antenna
A467 Active Steering
A468 Headset Socket
A473 DC/DC Converter
A476 Switch Cluster, Officials Utility
A477 Switch Cluster, Officials Utility, Disguised
A482 Basic Control Module, Deployment Vehicle
A503 Head-Up Display
A65a Dynamic Stability Control ( DSC)
A65a Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
A80a EDC Electronic Damper Control
A80b Vertical Dynamics Management
A81a Park Distance Control ( PDC)
A81a Park Distance Control ( PDC) (Without Convertible)
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 332
A81a Park Distance Control (PDC)
A81a Park Distance Control (PDC) (PDC Park Distance Control)
A821 Rear Compartment Display
A838 Socket, Rear
A839 Socket Outlet, Rear
A840 Charging Socket, Luggage Compartment
A85a Tire Pressure Control (RDC)
A85a Tire-Pressure Control (RDC)
A872 Lateral-Moment Distribution, Rear Axle (QMV-H)
A873 USB Hub
A96a Convertible-Top Module
A96a Convertible-Top Module (CTM)
A96B Convertible Top Module
A96b Convertible Top Module
A112A Navigation System
A112a Navigation System
A112a Navigation System (Without Convertible)
A117a Eject Box
A117a Eject Box (ULF-SBX Interface Box)
A117a Ejector Box
A118a Electronic Ride Height Control
A121B Interior Movement Detector
A121b Interior Movement Detector
A144a Active Cruise Control
A148a Dynamic Drive
A149a Car Access System
A164a Parking Brake Control Module
A165a Central Information Display
A167a Controller
A167b MINI Joystick
A173a Airbag Sensor, B-Pillar, Drive's Side
A174a Airbag Sensor, B-Pillar, Passenger's Side
A181a Seat Heating Module, Rear Left
A182a Seat Heating Module, Rear Right
A186a Passenger'S Seat Heating Module
A186a Passenger's Seat Heating Module
A187a Driver's Seat Heating Module
A204a Trunk Lid Lift
A2076 B+ Potential Distributor
A222a Passenger's Seat Occupancy Detection
A2249 Digital Diesel Electronics Control Module
A234a Accelerator Pedal Module
A267a AUX-IN Connection
A267a AUX-In Connection
A3000 Control Module, Control Menu
A400a Front Power Distribution Box
A4010 Junction Box
A4011 Footwell Module
A453a TV Amplifier RH Side
A6000 Engine Control Module (DME)
A6000 Engine Control Module (DME) (N12 Engine or N14 Engine)
A6710 NOx Sensor After SCR Catalytic Converter
A7000 Transmission Control
A838a Socket Outlet II, Rear
A838b Charge Socket
A8680 Fuse Carrier, Engine Electronics
A8680 Fuse Carrier, Engine Electronics (N51 or N52 Engine)
A8680 Fuse Carrier, Engine Electronics (N54 engine)
A8682 Fuse Holder
A8683 Fuse Holder
A9001 Additional Instrument
A13663 Electronically Controlled Fuel Pump
A13663 Electronically Controlled Fuel Pump (Without Convertible)
A13663 Fuel Pump Control (EKPS)
A14102 Multi-Drive Sunroof
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 333
A14112 Luggage Compartment Socket Outlet
A14147 Siren With Tilt Alarm Sensor
A14282 Longitudinal Dynamics Management
A14286 Function Control Center, Roof
A14286 Function Control Centre, Roof
A16761 SDARS Antenna
A18807 AV Socket
A4010a Junction Box, Electronics
A60210 Variable Valve Timing Gear Control Module
A60233 Electronic Power Steering (EPS)
A70006 Control Module, Transfer Box
A7000a Transmission Control
A7000a Transmission Control (EGS Electronic Transmission Control)
A70020 Transmission Control DKG
A14147a Siren With Tilt Alarm Sensor
A60233a Electromechanical Power Steering
Part 2 B
B1 Front Right Wheel Speed Sensor
B2 Front Left Wheel Speed Sensor
B2 Microphone 2
B3 Microphone
B3 Rear Right Wheel Speed Sensor
B4 Evaporator Temperature Sensor
B4 Rear Left Wheel Speed Sensor
B5 Ventilation Grille, Front Left
B6 Ventilation Grille, Front Right
B7 Coolant Pressure Sensor
B8 Driver's Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly
B9 Heating Heat Exchanger Temperature Sensor, Right
B10 Accelerator Pedal Module
B11 Rear Left Level Sensor
B12 Emergency Speaker
B13 AUC Sensor
B14 Rear Compartment Footwell Temperature Sensor, Left
B15 Rear Compartment Footwell Temperature Sensor, Right
B16 Heating Heat Exchanger Temperature Sensor, Left
B17 Washer Fluid Level Switch
B18 Coolant Level Switch
B19 Oil Level Switch
B20 Actuator, Active Steering
B21 Fuel Level Sensor 1
B22 Fuel Level Sensor 2
B23 Central Sensor
B24 Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Right Side
B25 Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Outer Right
B26 Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Left Side
B27 Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Outer Left
B28 Airbag Sensor, Front Right Door
B29 Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Center Right
B30 Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Outer Right
B31 Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Center Left
B33 Tweeter 2, Rear Left
B34 Close-Range Sensor, Right
B35 Front Right Level Sensor
B36 Close-Range Sensor, Left
B37 Rear Right Level Sensor
B39 Front Left Level Sensor
B40 Airbag Sensor, Left B-Pillar
B41 Right Front Acceleration Sensor
B42 Front Right Level Sensor
B42 Roof Outlet Nozzle, Left
B43 Roof Outlet Nozzle, Right
B44 Generator, Seat Belt Tensioner, Driver
B45 Airbag Front Sensor, Right
B46 RDC Antenna
B47 Generator For Active Head Restraint, Driver's Seat
B48 Inflator Assemblies, Passenger's Airbag
B48 Right Rear Acceleration Sensor
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 334
B49 Ventilation Grille, Front Centre
B50 Long Range Sensor
B51 Airbag Front Sensor, Left
B52 Inflator Assemblies, Driver's Airbag
B53 Head Airbag Inflator Assembly, Left
B54 Side Airbag Inflator Assembly, Driver
B55 Tweeter, Front Center
B56 Outside Temperature Sensor
B57 Airbag Sensor, Right B-Pillar
B57 Low Beam/Rain Sensor
B58 Rear Compartment Ventilation Grille
B59 Tweeter, Rear Right
B60 Mid-Range Speaker 2, Rear Left
B61 Mid-Range Speaker 2, Rear Right
B62 Tweeter 2, Rear Right
B62 Ventilation Temperature Sensor
B62 Ventilation Temperature Sensor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
B62 Ventilation Temperature Sensor (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
B63 Woofer, Front Left
B64 Woofer, Front Right
B65 Mid-Range Speaker, Front Center
B66 Solar Sensor
B66 Solar Sensor (IHKA integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
B67 Generator For Active Head Restraint Passenger's Seat
B68 Head Airbag Inflator Assembly, Right
B69 Rear Right Level Sensor
B69 Side Airbag Inflator Assembly, Passenger
B70 Evaporator Temperature Sensor, Rear
B70 Rear Left Level Sensor
B73 Generator, Safety Battery Terminal
B75 Mid-Range Speaker, Rear Right
B77 Passenger's Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly
B78 Airbag Sensor, Front Left Door
B79 Airbag Sensor, Front Right Door
B79 Generator For Seat Belt Force Limiter, Front Left
B80 Airbag Sensor, Front Left Door
B81 Accelerator Pedal Module
B82 Mid-Range Speaker, Front Left
B83 Tweeter, Front Left
B84 Tweeter, Rear Left
B85 Mid-Range Speaker, Rear Left
B86 Front Left Level Sensor
B86 Mid-Range Speaker, Front Right
B87 Tweeter, Front Right
B88 Ioniser
B89 Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Outer Left
B90 Temperature Sensor at Radiator Outlet
B91 Generator, Seat Belt Tensioner, Passenger
B92 Generator For Seat Belt Force Limiter, Front Right
B100 Condensation Sensor
B101 Front Left Wheel Speed Sensor
B102 Front Right Wheel Speed Sensor
B103 Rear Left Wheel Speed Sensor
B104 Rear Right Wheel Speed Sensor
B105 Brake Pad Wear Sensor, Front Left
B105 DSC Sensor 2
B106 Brake Pad Wear Sensor, Rear Right
B106 Fuel-Level Sensor, Passive Tank
B109 Front Left Temperature Sensor, Air Conditioning
B110 Front Right Temperature Sensor, Air Conditioning
B110 Intelligent Battery Sensor
B111 EAC Sensor
B11a Heating Heat Exchanger Temperature Sensor, Left
B11b Heating Heat Exchanger Temperature Sensor
B121 Footwell Temperature Sensor, Rear Left
B122 Footwell Temperature Sensor, Rear Right
B123 Ventilation Temperature Sensor, Rear Left
B124 Ventilation Temperature Sensor, Rear Right
B12a Heating Heat Exchanger Temperature Sensor, Right
[email protected]
7
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 335
B147 Seat Position Sensor
B14a Evaporator Temperature Sensor
B14a Evaporator Temperature Sensor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/ Air Conditioing)
B150 Lane Departure Warning, Slave
B151 Ventilation Temperature Sensor, Front Left
B152 Ventilation Temperature Sensor, Front Right
B156 Solar Rain/Light Fogging Sensor
B15a Servotronic Valve
B168 Infrared Receiver, Left
B169 Infrared Receiver, Right
B16A Brake Pad Wear Sensor, Front Left
B16a Brake Pad Wear Sensor, Front Left
B16a Servotronic Valve
B17a Brake Pad Wear Sensor, Rear Right
B18a Brake Fluid Level Switch
B206 Ultrasonic Sensor, Center Front
B207 Ring Aerial
B21a Outside Temperature Sensor
B25a Fuel Level Sensor, Left Tank Half
B30a Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Left
B31a Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Center Left
B32a Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Center Right
B33a Ultrasonic Sensor, Front Right
B34a Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Left
B35a Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Center Left
B36a Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Center Right
B37a Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Right
B400 Microphone
B401 Pressure-Chamber Speaker, Right
B402 Microphone, Left
B403 Microphone, Right
B404 Pressure-Chamber Speaker, Left
B414 Automatic Air Recirculation Sensor
B414 Automatic Air Recirculation Sensor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
B429 Hands-Free Microphone
B42b Ride Height Sensor, Front
B43a RDS Transmitter, Front Left
B43b Electronic Wheel Module, Front Left
B44a RDC Transmitter, Rear Right
B44a RDS Transmitter, Rear Right
B44b Electronic Wheel Module, Rear Right
B456 Neutral Sensor
B45a RDC Transmitter, Rear Left
B45a RDS Transmitter, Rear Left
B45b Electronic Wheel Module, Rear Left
B46a RDC Antenna
B46a Ride Height Sensor, Rear
B47a RDC Transmitter, Front Right
B47b Electronic Wheel Module Front Right
B47b Electronic Wheel Module, Front Right
B47b RDC Electronic Wheel Module, Front Right
B47b Wheel Electronics, Front Right
B57a Rain/Light Solar Sensor
B57b Rain/Headlight Sensor
B602 Rear Axle Temperature Sensor
B604 Temperature Sensor At Radiator Outlet
B604 Temperature Sensor at Radiator Outlet
B604 Temperature Sensor at Rediator Outlet
B64a Ride Height Sensor, Rear
B78a Airbag Sensor, Front Driver's Side Door
B79a Airbag Sensor, Front Passenger's Side Door
B895 Battery Sensor
B109a Footwell Temperature Sensor
B109a Footwell Temperature Sensor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
B109a Footwell Temperature Sensor (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
B2008 Oil Pressure Switch
B2014 Boost Pressure Sensor
B2231 Electrical Changeover Value , Engine Mount
B2231 Electrical Changeover Valve, Engine Mount
B2261 Rail Pressure Sensor
[email protected]
8
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 336
B2262 Rail Pressure Control Valve
B2292 Fuel Temperature Sensor
B2307 NOx Sensor Before SCR Cat.
B2353 Charge-Air Pressure Controller 1
B2365 Electric Changeover Valve, Swirl Flaps
B2382 Volume Control Valve
B2389 Exhaust Backpressure Sensor
B2391 Exhaust Temperature Sensor Before Particle Filter
B2407 Wastegate Valve
B2408 Turbine Control Valve
B2409 Compressor Bypass Valve
B2435 Differential Pressure Sensor, Particulate Filter
B2440 Solenoid Valve, Exhaust Recirculation Cooler Bypass
B2450 Temperature Sensor After HP-EGR Cooler
B2451 Temperature Sensor Before SCR Catalytic Converter
B2455 Exhaust Gas Pressure Sensor Before Turbine
B2457 ND-AGR ND EGR Valve
B2460 EGR Valve, Low Pressure
B429a Voice Control Microphone
B6027 Rail Pressure Sensor
B6028 Rail Pressure Sensor 2
B6042 Vacuum Sensor
B6123 Intake Temperature - Boost Pressure Sensor
B6125 Low Pressure Fuel Sensor
B6203 Crankshaft Position/RPM Sensor
B6203 Crankshaft Sensor
B6205 Intake Air Temperature Sensor
B6206 Hot-Film Air-Mass Flow Sensor
B6206 Secondary Air-Hot-Film Air-Mass Meter
B6206 Secondary Air-Hot-Film Air-Mass-Meter
B6207 Hot-Film Mass Air Flow Sensor
B6217 Air Mass Sensor
B6219 Hall-Effect Sensor, Camshaft 1
B6227 Air Mass Flow Sensor 2
B6229 Hall Sensor 9
B6229 Hall Sensor For Luggage Copartment Partition
B6231 Oil Pressure Switch
B6232 Engine Temperature Sensor
B6236 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
B6239 Intake Pipe Pressure Sensor
B6241 Knock Sensor
B6241 Knock Sensor, Cylinder 1 and 2
B6241 Knock Sensor, Cylinders 1 And 2
B6242 Knock Sensor, Cylinders 3 and 4
B6249 Acceleration Sensor, Front Left
B6257 Knock Sensor
B6258 Knock Sensor2
B6279 Characteristic Map Thermostat
B6286 Intake Temperature - Differential Pressure Sensor
B6583 Intake Temperature - Boost Pressure Sensor
B6583 Intake Temperature-Boost Pressure Sensor
B6951 Heating, Crankcase Breather
B6985 Electric Oil Pump
B895a Intelligent Battery Sensor
B9529 Brake Vacuum Sensor
B9801 DSC Sensor
B9801 DSC Sensor
B9801 DSC Sensor
B10508 Airbag Front Sensor, Left
B10509 Airbag Front Sensor, Right
B14143 Microwave Sensor, Driver's Door
B14143 Microwave Sensor, Driver'S Door
B14143 Microwave Sensor, Driver's Door
B14144 Microwave Sensor, Passenger's Door
B14144 Microwave Sensor, Passenger'S Door
[email protected]
9
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 337
B14144 Microwave Sensor, Passenger's Door
B14145 Microwave Sensor, Rear Left
B14145 Microwave Sensor, Rear Left
B14146 Microwave Sensor, Rear Right
B14146 Microwave Sensor, Rear Right
B2012a Charge Air Temperature Sensor
B2014a Boost Pressure Sensor
B2015a Coolant Temperature Sensor
B2244a Exhaust Gas Recirculation Actuator 1
B2264c Charge-Air Pressure Controller (Pressure Converter)
B2292a Fuel Temperature Sensor
B2390a Temperature Sensor Before Catalytic Converter
B2391a Temperature Sensor Before Particulate Filter
B2394a Heating, Crankcase Breather
B2439a Temperature Sensor After LP-EGR Cooler
B2440A Exhaust Recirculation Actuator
B2440a Exhaust Recirculation Actuator
B2440b Bypass Actuator, Intercooler
B2446a Fuel Pressure/Temperature Sensor
B60213 Eccentric Shaft Sensor
B60223 Eccentric Shaft Sensor 2
B6027a Rail Pressure Sensor
B6028a Rail Pressure Sensor 2
B60814 Motor Position Sensor, Left
B60815 Motor Position Sensor, Right
B60817 Oil Temperature Sensor, Left
B60818 Oil Temperature Sensor, Right
B6125A Low Pressure Fuel Sensor
B6125a Low Pressure Fuel Sensor
B6203a Crankshaft Sensor
B6203A Crankshaft Sensor
B6203a Crankshaft Sensor
B6206a Secondary-Air Hot-Film Air-Mass Sensor
B6207a Hot-Film Air Mass Meter
B6207b Air Mass Flow Sensor
B6207b Air Mass Flow Sensor (N52 Engine or N51 Engine)
B6207b Air Mass Flow Sensor (N52 Engine)
B62101 Oxygen Sensor Before Catalytic Converter
B62102 Oxygen Sensor Behind Catalytic Converter
B62141 Intake Camshaft Sensor
B62141 Intake Camshaft Sensor (S65 Engine)
B62142 Exhaust Camshaft Sensor
B62142 Exhaust Camshaft Sensor (S65 Engine)
B6214a Intake Camshaft Sensor
B6219a Camshaft Sensor
B62201 Oxygen Sensor 2 Before Catalytic Converter
B62202 Oxygen Sensor 2 Behind Catalytic Converter
B62203 Exhaust Temperature Sensor 3
B62241 Intake Camshaft Sensor 2
B62242 Exhaust Camshaft Sensor 2
B6224a Exhaust Camshaft Sensor
B62301 Exhaust Temperature Sensor
B6236a Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
B62400 Double Knock Sensor
B62540 Oil Condition Sensor
B62540 Oil Quality Sensor
B6279a Characteristic MAP Thermostat
B6571a Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
B65781 Charge-Air Pressure Sensor
B65782 Intake Air Temperature/Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor
B65791 Charge-Air Pressure Sensor 2
B65792 Intake Air Temperature/Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor 2
B6950A ATF Temperature Sensor
B6950a ATF Temperature Sensor
B10508a Front Airbag Sensor, Drive's Side
B10509a Front Airbag Sensor, Passenger's Side
B62540A Oil Condition Sensor
B62540a Oil Condition Sensor
[email protected]
10
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 338
Part 3 C-G
E1 Direction Indicator Light Repeater, Front Left
E2 Direction Indicator Light Repeater, Front Right
E3 Rear Window Defogger
E4 Passenger's Seat Cushion Heating
E5 Right Headlight
E6 Seat Cushion Heating, Rear Passenger's Side
E7 Seat Backrest Heating, Rear Passenger's Side
E9 Rear Window Defroster
E10 Entry Light, Passenger's Side Rear
E11 Entry Light, Driver's Side, Rear
E12 Glove Compartment Light
E13 Vanity Mirror Light, Front Left
E14 Courtesy Lighting, Passenger's Side, Rear
E15 Backrest Lighting, Left
E17 Light, Door Trim Panel, Front Left
E19 Driver's Seat Cushion Heating
E20 Driver's Seat Backrest Heating
E21 Entrance Light Passenger's Door
E21 Side Market Light, Front Left (USA_LHD)
E22 Interior Aerial, Center Console, Rear
E22 Side Market Light, Front Right (USA_LHD)
E23 Interior Antenna, Driver's Side
E24 Electric Auxiliary Heater, Rear Left
E25 Electric Auxiliary Heater, Front
E26 Left Fog Light
E26 Roof Aerial
E27 Bumper Aerial
E27 Right Fog Light
E28 Front Cigar Lighter
E28 Luggage Compartment Aerial, Driver's Side
E29 Left Fog Light
E30 Centre Armrest Light, Rear
E30 Rear Cigar Lighter
E31 Right Fog Light
E32 Rear Right Footwell Light
E32 Trunk Compartment Light
E33 Luggage Compartment Light, Truck Lid/Tailgate
E33 Luggage Compartment Light, Trunk Lid/Tailgate
E34 Luggage Compartment Light
E35 Make-Up Mirror Light, Front Left
E36 Luggage Compartment Aerial, Passenger's Side
E36 Make-Up Mirror Light, Front Right
E37 Entrance Light, Driver's Door
E38 Footwell Light, Front Left
E39 Footwell Light, Front Right
E43 Ventilation Grille, Left B-Pillar
E44 Rear Left Footwell Light
E45 Inside-Door-Handle Light, Rear Left
E46 Inside-Door-Handle Light, Rear Right
E46 Tail Light, Outer Left
E47 Door-Pocket Light, Front left
E47 Tail Light, Outer Right
E48 Door-Pocket Light, Front Right
E49 Light, Door Trim Panel, Rear Right
E50 Electric Auxiliary Heater, Rear Right
E51 Door-Pocket Light, Rear Left
E52 Door-Pocket Light, Rear Right
E53 Seat Cushion Heating, Rear Driver's Side
E54 Passenger's Seat Backrest Heating
E55 Ventilation Grille, Right B-Pillar
E56 Centre Armrest Light, Front
E57 Tail Light, Outer Right
E58 Tail Light, Inner Right
E59 Auxiliary Brake Light
E60 Tail Light, Inner Left
E61 Bluetooth Antenna
E61 Footwell Light, Front Left
E62 Footwell Light, Front Right
[email protected]
11
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 339
E62 Taillight, Outer Left
E63 Left Rear Footwell Light
E63 Light, Door Trim Panel, Rear Left
E64 Right Rear Footwell Light
E64 Seat Backrest Heating, Rear Driver's Side
E65 Courtesy Lighting, Driver's Side, Rear
E66 Emergency GSM Antenna
E67 Noise Suppressor Filter
E68 Backrest Lighting, Right
E69 Light, Door Trim Panel, Front Left
E70 Side Market Light, Rear Left (USA_LHD)
E70 Vanity Mirror Light, Front Right
E71 Inside-Door-Handle Light, Front Left
E71 Side Market Light, Rear Right (USA_LHD)
E72 Inside-Door-Handle Light, Front Right
E73 Luggage Compartment Light, Boot Lid/Tailgate
E74 Interior Aerial, Rear Window Shelf
E76 Enterance Light, Front Left
E77 Enterance Light, Front Right
E78 Enterance Light, Rear Left
E79 Enterance Light, Rear Right
E80 Passenger's Door Enterance Light
E80 Tail Light, Inner Left
E81 Interior Light, Rear
E81 Tail Light, Inner Right
E82 Driver's Door Entrance Light
E82 Gear Indicator Lighting
E82 Gear Indicator Lighting (EGS Electronic Transmission Control)
E83 Interior Aerial, Passenger's Side
E84 Interior Aerial, Center Console, Front
E85 Independent Auxiliary Heater
E86 Left Headlight
E88 Exit Light, Driver'S Door
E88 Exit Light, Driver's Door
E89 Exit Light, Passenger'S Door
E89 Exit Light, Passenger's Door
E89 Washer-Nozzle Heating, Left
E90 Washer-Nozzle Heating, Right
E91 Washer-Nozzle Heating, Centre
E9b Rear Window Defogger, Split Door, Left
E043 Licence Plate Light, Left
E044 Licence Plate Light, Right
E102 Fuel Filter Heating
E103 TV Antenna 2
E104 TV Antenna 3
E108 Interior Light, Rear
E109 Interior Light, Left B-Pillar
E10a Rear Window Defogger, Split Door, Right
E110 Interior Light, Right B-Pillar
E111 Entrance Light, Rear Driver'S Side Door
E111 Entrance Light, Rear Driver's Side Door
E112 Entrance Light, Rear Passenger'S Side Door
E112 Entrance Light, Rear Passenger's Side Door
E112 Steering Wheel Heater
E113 Entrance Light, Driver'S Door
E113 Entrance Light, Driver's Door
E113 Licence Plate Light With Rear Lid Button
E114 Entrance Light, Passenger'S Door
E114 Entrance Light, Passenger's Door
E114 Telephone Antenna, Bumper
E123 Vanity Mirror Light, Rear left
E124 Vanity Mirror Light, Rear Right
E126 Left Headlight
E127 Right Headlight
E128 Courtesy Light, Driver'S Door
E128 Courtesy Light, Driver's Door
E129 Courtesy Light, Passenger'S Door
E129 Courtesy Light, Passenger's Door
E136 Oddments Compartment Lighting, Driver's Door
E137 Oddments Compartment Lighting, Passenger's Door
[email protected]
12
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 340
E138 Oddments Compartment Lighting, Rear Left
E139 Oddments Compartment Lighting, Rear Right
E140 Door Handle Plate Lighting, Driver's Door
E141 Door Handle Plate Lighting, Passenger's Door
E142 Door Handle Plate Lighting, Rear Left
E143 Door Handle Plate Lighting, Rear Right
E145 Lighting Top of Oddments Compartment
E145 Lighting, Top of Oddments Compartment
E163 Ambient Light, B-Pillar, Left
E164 Ambient Light, B-Pillar, Right
E172 Oddments Compartment Lighting, Driver's Door
E174 Oddments Compartment Lighting, Passenger'S Door
E174 Oddments Compartment Lighting, Passenger's Door
E34a Interior/Reading Lamp, Front
E39a Interior Light, Rear Left
E40a Interior Light, Rear Right
E42a Glove Compartment Light
E43a License Plate Light, Left
E445 Luggage Compartment Light, Left
E445 Luggage Compartment Light, Left (Without Convertible)
E446 Luggage Compartment Light, Right
E44a License Plate Light, Right
E46a Taillight, Left
E47a Taillight, Right
E51a Heated Washer Nozzle, Left
E51b Heated Washer Nozzle, Driver's Side
E52a Heated Washer Nozzle, Right
E52a Heated washer nozzle, right
E52b Heated Washer Nozzle, Passenger's Side
E56a Driver'S Seat Backrest Heating
E56a Driver's Seat Backrest Heating
E57a Driver'S Seat Cushion Heating
E57a Driver's Seat Cushion Heating
E58a Passenger'S Seat Cushion Heating
E58a Passenger's Seat Cushion Heating
E59a Passenger'S Seat Backrest Heating
E59a Passenger's Seat Backrest Heating
E61a Driver'S Side Footwell Light
E61a Driver's Side Footwell Light
E62a Passenger'S Side Footwell Light
E62a Passenger's Side Footwell Light
E65b Seat Backrest Heating, Rear Left
E66b Seat Cushion Heating, Rear Left
E67b Seat Cushion Heating, Rear Right
E68b Seat Backrest Heating, Rear Right
E840 Charging Socket, Center Console, Rear
E841 Charging Socket 2, Center Console, Rear
E841 Charging Socket 2, Centre Console, Rear
E842 Power Socket, Luggage Compartment
E88a Driver's Door Entrance Light
E89a Passenger's Door Entrance Light
E90a Exit Light, Rear Left Door
E91a Exit Light, Rear Right Door
E91b Entrance Light, Clubdoor
E108a Rear Compartment Interior Light
E111a Courtesy Lighting, Rear Left Door
E112a Courtesy Lighting, Rear Right Door
E130A Courtesy Lighting, Driver's Side, Rear
E131a Courtesy Lighting, Passenger's Side, Rear
E164a Ambient Lighting, Clubdoor
E2000 Fuel Heater
E2000 Fuel Heater (Engine)
E2284 Heater Plug, Cylinder 1
E2288 Glow Plug, Cylinder 5
E2289 Glow Plug, Cylinder 6
E9015 Side Marker/Fog Light, Left
E9016 Trunk Lid Push-Button/Licence Plate Lights
[email protected]
13
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 341
E9017 Side Marker/Fog Light, Right
E9032 Flashing Beacon, Front Left
E9033 Flashing Beacon, Front Right
E65390 Crankshaft Breather Heating 1
E65390 Engine Breather Heater 1
E65391 Engine-Venting Heating
E65392 Engine-Venting Heating 1
G1 Battery
G5 Inflator Assemblies, Driver's Airbag
G5 Inflator Assemblies, Passenger'S Airbag
G6 Inflator Assemblies, Passenger'S Airbag
G6 Inflator Assemblies, Passenger's Airbag
G12 Generator, Driver'S Seat Belt Tensioner
G12 Generator, Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
G13 Generator, Driver'S Seat Belt Tensioner
G13 Generator, Passenger's Seat Belt Tensioner
G17 Head Airbag Inflator Assembly, Left
G18 Head Airbag Inflator Assembly, Right
G27 Seat Belt Tensioner, Rear Left
G27 Seat Belt Tensioner, Rear left
G28 Seat Belt Tensioner, Rear Right
G30 Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly, Front Left
G31 Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly, Front Right
G39 Generator For End Fitting Pretensioner, Driver's Seat
G40 Generator For Anchor-Fitting Pretensioner, Passenger's Seat
G45 Adaptive Seat Belt Force Limiter, Front Left
G46 Adaptive Seat Belt Force Limiter, Front Right
G14b Side Airbag Inflator Assembly, Driver
G14c Side Airbag Inflator Assembly, Front Left
G15b Side Airbag Inflator Assembly, Passenger
G15c Side Airbag Inflator Assembly, Front Right
G17a Inflator Assembly, Driver's Side Head Airbag
G18a Inflator Assembly, Passenger's Side Head Airbag
G19a Generator, Safety Battery Terminal
G30a Driver'S Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly
G30a Driver's Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly
G31a Passenger'S Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly
G31a Passenger's Knee Airbag Inflator Assembly
G34a Active Head Restraint Generator, Front Left
G35a Generator, Active Head Restraint, Front Right
G6430 Jump Start Terminal Point
G6524 Generator
Part 4 H-M
H1 Siren With Tilt Alarm Sensor
H2 Fanfare Horn, Low Range
H3 Fanfare Horn, High Range
H1a Horn, Anti-Theft Alarm System
H1b Siren and Tilt Alarm Sensor
H26 Rear Fog Light, Left (N14 Engine)
H29 Rear Fog Light, Right (N14 Engine)
H2a Left Horn
H2b Horn
H2c Horn
H3a Right Horn
H3b Horn 2
H3c Horn 2
H40 Park Distance Control Loudspeaker
H44 Right Front Speaker
H45 Parking Aid Speaker, Rear
H51 Woofer, Front Right
H52 Woofer, Rear Right
H53 Right Rear High Range Speaker
H54 Mid-Range Speaker, Front Right
H55 Mid-Range Speaker, Front Left
H56 Left Rear High Range Speaker
[email protected]
14
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 342
H58 Woofer, Front Left
H60 Woofer, Rear Left
H66 Subwoofer, Right
H75 Subwoofer, Front Left
H76 Subwoofer, Front Right
H77 Center Speaker
H82 Emergency Speaker
H83 Speaker, Left D-Pillar
H84 Speaker, Right D-Pillar
H8a Auxiliary Direction Indicator, Front Right
H8a Direction Indicator Light Repeater, Front Right
H9a Direction Indicator Light Repeater, Front Left
H34a Auxiliary Brake Light
H452 Flash Lamp
H50a Tweeter, Front Right
H53a Tweeter, Rear Right
H56a Tweeter, Rear Left
H59a Tweeter, Front Left
H66a Subwoofer, Left
H68a Mid-Range Speaker, Front Left
H68a Mid-Range Speaker, Front left
H69a Mid-Range Speaker, Front Right
H70a Mid-Range Speaker, Rear Left
H71a Mid-Range Speaker, Rear Right
H71a Mind-Range Speaker, Rear Right
H77a Speaker, Top Centre Instrument Panel
H78a Mid-Range Speaker, Rear Left Door
H79a Mid-Range Speaker, Rear Right Door
H472a Flashing Beacon 2
H472b Flashing Beacon 3
H9115 Mid-Range Speaker, Side Trim Panel Right
H9115 Mid-Range Speaker, Side Trim Panel, Right
H9117 Mid-Range Speaker, Side Trim Panel, Left
H16026 Rear Fog Light (Without N14 Engine)
I01003 Charging Socket, Rear
I01008 Circulation Pump, Independent Heater
I01009 Combustion Air Blower, Independent-Heater
I01010 Heater Plug, Independent Heater
I01012 Rear Window Aerial
I01032 Switch Block Multifunction Steering Wheel, Left
I01033 Switch Block Multifunction Steering Wheel, Right
I01046 Interference Suppression Capacitor For Ignition Coils
I01046 Suppression Capacitor For Ignition Coils
I01058 Ventilation Flap Motor, Left
I01059 Ventilation Flap Motor, Right
I01068 Relay, Terminal 30G
I01069 Relay, Terminal 15
I01086 Volute Spring
I01091 Rocker Switch, Left
I01092 Rocker Switch, Right
I01096 Steering Torque Sensor
I01103 TV Antenna, Rear Left Side Window
I01104 TV Antenna, Rear Right Side Window
I01110 Steering Wheel Heating Control Module
I01116 Hall Sensor, Cowl Panel Released
I01118 Steering Wheel Heating With Temperature Sensor
I01121 B+ Terminal Point, Luggage Well
I01134 Trunk Lid Resistor, Left
I01135 Trunk Lid Resistor, Right
I01139 BI-Stable Relay (Variant-Dependent)
I01139 Bi-Stable Relay (Variant-Dependent)
I01143 Antenna Amplifier, Left Side Window
I01144 Antenna Amplifier, Right Side Window
I01145 Antenna, Left Side Window
I01146 Antenna, Right Side Window
I01157 Seat Belt Positioner Controller, Driver
I01158 Seat Belt Positioner Controller, Front Passenger
I01159 Seat Position Sensor, Driver
I01160 Relay, Terminal 30G 2
I01162 Backpressure Flap Motor
[email protected]
15
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 343
I01163 Front Stratifying Air Flap Motor, Left
I01164 Front Stratifying Air Flap Motor, Right
I01165 Rear Stratifying Air Flap Motor, Left
I01166 Rear Stratifying Air Flap Motor, Right
I01167 Rear Footwell Flap Motor, Left
I01168 Rear Footwell Flap Motor, Right
I01170 Electric Auxiliary Heater, Rear
I01171 Inner Antenna, Luggage Compartment 2
I01172 Washer Pump Relay, Rear
I01173 Ground Distribution
I01174 Infrared Interface
I01179 Rear Spoiler Aerial
I01180 Microswitch, Air Distribution
I01181 Blower Motor, 3RD Row of Seats
I01182 Blower Button, 3RD Row of Seats
I01183 Auxiliary Heater Control Module, 3RD Row of Seats
I01184 Seat Position Sensor, Front Passenger
I01185 FM Antenna 1
I01185 FM Antenna 1 (Convertible)
I01186 FM Antenna 2
I01187 FM Antenna 3
I01187 FM Antenna 3 (Convertible)
I01188 FM Antenna 4
I01197 Microswitch, Coupling Fastener, Left
I01197 Microswitch, Coupling Fastener, Left, Closed
I01197 Microswitch, Coupling Fastener,Left, Closed
I01198 Hall Sensor 5.3
I01198 Hall Sensor, Rear Module Almost Closed
I01199 Hall Sensor, Rear Module Open
I01200 Microswitch 4.1
I01200 Microswitch, Cowl Panel Locked
I01201 Microswitch, Cowl Panel Unlocked
I01202 Microswitch, Coupling Fastener, Right
I01203 Hall Sensor, Roof Package Up
I01204 Hall Sensor, Roof Package Down
I01205 Hall Sensor, Roof Shells Partially Closed
I01206 Hall Sensor, Roof Shells Partially Open
I01207 Hall Sensor, Rear Module Closed
I01208 Hall Sensor, Coupling Fastener, Right
I01209 Drive Unit For Hardtop Lock
I01209 Engine Unlocking Convertible Top
I01209 Engine, Unlocking Convertible Top
I01211 Drive Unit For Boot Lid Lift, Left
I01212 Drive Unit For Boot Lid Lift, Right
I01213 Boot Lid Contact Switch, Bottom
I01217 Terminating Resistor D-CAN
I01220 RTTI Splitter
I01221 Split Door Lighting, Right
I01222 Split Door Lighting, Left
I01223 Rear Spoiler AM/FM Aerial
I01223 Rear Spoiler Am/FM Aerial
I01226 CAN Terminating Resistor (S65 Engine)
I01229 Hall Sensor, Main Pillar Erected
I01229 Hall Sensor, Main Pillar Erected
I01230 Hall Sensor, Main Pillar Taken Down
I01231 Hall Sensor, Tensioning Bar Extended
I01232 Hall Sensor, Clamping Bracket Erected
I01233 Hall Sensor, Clamping Bracket Taken Down
I01234 Hall Sensor, Cowl Panel Closed
I01234 Hall Sensor, Cowl Panel Locked
I01235 Incremental Encoder, Locking Motor
[email protected]
16
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 344
I01236 Hall Sensor, Convertible Top Compartment Lid Locked
I01237 Hall Sensor, Convertible-Top Compartment Lid Opened
I01238 TV Antenna, On Left In Bumper
I01239 TV Antenna, on Right In Bumper
I01241 Microswitch, Roof Shell 2 Closed, Right
I01242 Microswitch, Roof Shell 2 Closed, Left
I01243 Hall Sensor, Roof Panel 2 Packed
I01244 Microswitch, Rear-End Module, Closed, Right
I01244 Microswitch, Rear-End-Module, Closed, Right
I01245 Microswitch, Rear-End Module, Closed, Left
I01245 Microswitch, Rear-End-Module, Closed, Left
I01248 NOx Sensor Behind Catalytic Converter
I01249 Heating, SCR System
I01250 Heater, Active Tank
I01251 Temperature Sensor, Active Tank
I01252 Fuel Level Sensor, Active Tank
I01254 Valve 1 For Rectractable Hardtop
I01257 Hall Sensor, Stowage Lock, Left
I01258 Incremental Transducer, Direction
I01259 Incremental Transducer, Speed
I01260 Antenna, Digital Tuner
I01261 Antenna, Digital Tuner II
I01555 Component(S) According to Vehicle Equipment Level
I01555 Component(s) According to Vehicle Equipment Level
I13444 Heated Windscreen , Left
I13445 Heated Windscreen , Right
I14255 MOST-Bus Connector
I14255 Most-Bus Connector
I14286 Roof Operating Unit
I011032 Switch Block Malfunction Steering Wheel, Left
I011033 Switch Block Malfunction Steering Wheel, Right
I01111a Valve For Roof Segments
I01123a Valve 1 For Rear Module
I01123b Valve 1 For Convertible-Top Drive
I01124a Valve For Coupling Fastener
I01125a Hydraulic Oil Temperature Sensor
I01127b Valve 2 For Convertible Top Drive
I01128b Valve 3 For Convertible Top Drive
I011111a Valve For Roof Segments
K1 Compressor Relay
K2 Horn Relay
K4 Heater Blower Relay

K5 Cut-Out Relay, Electric Fan
K5 Washer Pump Relay, Front
K6 Relay, Headlight Washer
K9 Load-Shedding Relay, Terminal 15
K11 Windshield Wiper Relay
K13 Rear Window Defroster Relay
K19 Relay A/C Compressor
K21 Electric Fan Relay
K22 Electric Fan Relay 2
K2a Horn Relay
K36 Wiper Relay 1

K37 Wiper Relay 2
K91 Rear Wiper Relay
K96 Fuel Pump Relay
K126 Relay, Compressor, Air Suspension

K207 Relay, Automatic Soft-Close
K213 Relay, Electric Vacuum Pump
K411 Relay For Transceiver
K416 Windscreen Heater Relay
K424 Gun Mount Relay
[email protected]
17
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 345
K441 Relay, Direction Indicator Repeaters
K91a Relay 2 For Rear Window Wiper
K2068 Relay, Fuel Pump
K2085 Load Relay, SCR System
K2283 Preheater Relay
K2399 Relay, Additive Pump
K6300 DME Relay
K6301 Fuel Pump Relay
K6304 Secondary Air Pump Relay
K6317 Valvetronic Relay 2

K6319 VVT Relay
K6326 Power-Saving Relay, Terminal 15
K6327 Relay, Fuel Injector (N14 Engine)
K6327 Relay, Fuel Injectors
K6341 Relief Relay For Ignition Coils and Fuel Injectors
K6342 Relay, Volume Control Valves
K6539 Engine Breather Heating Relay
K9137 Cut-Out Relay, Electric Fan
K18363 Relay, Convertible Top 1
K18364 Relay, Convertible Top 2
K2003a DDE Main Relay
K6304A Secondary Air Pump Relay
K6304a Secondary Air Pump Relay

K6319a Valvetronic Relay (N12 Engine)
K18363a Relay 1 For Hardtop Drive Unit
K18364A Relay 2 For Hardtop Drive Unit
K18364a Relay 2 For Hardtop Drive Unit
M1 Drive, Longitudinal Seat Adjustment, Passenger's Side
M2 Drive, Seat-Angle Adjustment, Passenger
M2 Electric Fuel Pump
M3 Drive, Seat-Back Angle Adjustment, Passenger
M3 Wiper Module
M4 Lumbar Support Drive, Rear Passenger's Side
M4 Windshield Washer Pump
M7 Footwell Flap Motor, Front Right
M7 Headlight Washer Pump
M8 Rear Compartment Flap Motor
M9 Electric Fan
M9 Stratification Flap Motor, Front Left
M10 Drive For Passenger's Seat Lumbar Support
M11 Power Window Drive, Driver
M12 Wiper Module
M13 Power Window Drive, Passenger
M14 Electric Fuel Pump
M16 Central Locking Drive, Fuel Filler Flap
M17 Slide/Tilt Sunroof Drive Unit
M19 Steering Column Adjustment Motor
M20 Ventilation Flap Motor, Outer Left
M21 Driver'S Window Motor
M21 Driver's Window Motor
M21 Footwell Flap Motor, Front Left
M22 Ventilation Flap Motor, Centre Right
M23 Passenger'S Window Motor
M23 Passenger's Window Motor
M23 Ventilation Flap Motor, Centre Left
M24 Rear Stratifying Air Flap Motor, Right
M25 Fresh Air Flap Motor
M26 Blower Motor
M27 Sunroof Shade Drive
M28 Rear Compartment Footwell Flap Motor, Right
M29 Drive, Backrest-Head Adjustment, Passenger
M30 Blower Motor
M30 Blower Motor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
M30 Blower Motor (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
M30 Drive For Driver's Seat Lumbar Support
M31 Drive For Head-Restraint Height Adjustment, Driver
M31 Footwell Flap Motor
[email protected]
18
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 346
M31 Footwell Flap Motor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
M32 Drive, Seat-Back Angle Adjustment, Driver
M35 Auxiliary Water Pump
M36 Drive, Seat-Back Width Adjustment, Passenger
M37 Auxiliary Water Pump
M37 Drive, Seat-Depth Adjustment, Passenger
M38 Rear Compartment Blower Motor
M38 Ventilation Flap Motor
M39 Drive, Seat-Angle Adjustment, Driver's Seat
M3a Wiper Motor
M40 Drive Unit, Driver's Seat Forward/Backward Adjustment
M42 Lumbar Support-Active Seat Drive Unit, Front Passenger
M43 Rear Lid Lift Drive, Right
M44 Fuel Metering Pump, Independent Heating
M45 Drive For Head-Restraint Height Adjustment, Passenger
M46 Backrest Head Adjustment Drive, Driver's Seat
M48 Drive, Backrest-Head Adjustment, Passenger
M49 Seat Belt Positioner Motor, Left
M4a Lumbar Support Drive For the Driver's and/or Passenger's Side, Rear
M50 Drive, Longitudinal Seat Adjustment, Passenger's Side
M51 Drive, Seat-Angle Adjustment, Passenger
M52 Drive For Head-Restraint Height Adjustment, Passenger
M54 Seat Depth Adjustment Drive, Driver's Seat
M55 Circulation Pump, Independent Heater
M56 Drive For Head-Restraint Height Adjustment, Driver
M57 Drive For Rear Window Roller Sun Blind
M60 Drive Unit, Driver's Seat Height Adjustment
M61 Defroster Flap Motor
M62 Rear Stratifying Air Flap Motor, Left
M62 Seat Belt Positioner Motor, Right
M63 Secondary Air Injection Pump
M64 Drive, Seat-Height Adjustment, Passenger's Side
M65 Drive, Seat-Back Angle Adjustment, Passenger
M66 Power Window Drive, Driver's Side, Rear
M67 Power Window Drive, Passenger's Side, Rear
M68 Drive, Longitudinal Seat Adjustment, Driver's Side
M69 Rear Compartment Blower Motor
M69 Stratification Flap Motor, Front Right
M70 Drive, Seat-Angle Adjustment, Driver's Side
M71 Drive, Seat-Back Angle Adjustment, Driver
M72 Central Locking Drive, Fuel Filler Flap
M73 Drive, Backrest-Width Adjustment, Driver
M74 Lumbar Support-Active Seat Drive Unit, Driver
M74 Motor, Rear Window Roller Sun Blind
M77 Air-Distribution-Flap Motor, Rear Climate Control, L
M78 Air-Distribution-Flap Motor, Rear Climate Control, R
M79 Blower Motor, Rear Air Conditioning System
M80 Drive, Backrest-Head Adjustment, Driver's Side
M81 Radiator Shutter Drive Unit
M82 Lumbar Support Drive, Rear Driver's Side
M83 Ventilation Flap Motor, Outer Right
M84 Rear Compartment Footwell Flap Motor, Left
M85 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Right
M85 Mixing Air Flap Motor, Rear Air-Conditioning System, Left
M85 Soft Close Automatic Drive, Right
M86 Mixing Air Flap Motor, Rear Air-Conditioning System, Right
M87 Electric Fan
M88 Rear Lid Lift Drive, Left
M89 Release Drive, Glovebox
M89 Roller Sun Blind Drive, Driver's Side, Rear
M90 Roller Sun Blind Drive, Passenger's Side, Rear
M91 Recirculated Air Flap Motor
M92 Central Locking Drive, Oddments Compartment
M93 Washer Pump For Headlight Washer System
M94 Windscreen Washer Pump
M94 Wiper Drive, Rear
M95 Rear Window Washer Pump
M98 Window Regulator Motor, Rear Left
M99 Fan 2, Infotainment
M99 Window Regulator Motor, Rear Right
[email protected]
19
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 347
M101 Convertible Top Drive
M106 Motor, Backrest Head Adjustment, Driver's Seat
M110 Motor, Backrest Head Adjustment, Passenger's Seat
M111 Fan 1, Driver's Seat Cushion
M111 Fresh Air/Recirculating Air Flap Motor
M111 Fresh Air/Recirculating Air Flap Motor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
M111 Fresh Air/Recirculating Air Flap Motor (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
M116 Fan 1, Driver's Seat Backrest
M120 Fan 1, Passenger's Seat Cushion
M125 Fan 1, Passenger's Seat Backrest
M132 Drive For Locking Cowl Panel
M135 Electric Fan
M137 Seat Cushion Fan, Rear Driver's Side
M137 Steering Column Adjustment Motor
M142 Backrest Fan, Rear Driver's Side
M146 Seat Cushion Fan, Rear Passenger's Side
M148 Front Passenger's Active Seat
M149 Driver's Active Seat
M14a System Lock, Rear Passenger'S Side
M14a System Lock, Rear Passenger's Side
M150 Air Distribution Flap Motor
M150 Air Distribution Flap Motor (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
M151 Backrest Fan, Rear Passenger's Side
M152 Mixer Flap Motor
M152 Mixer Flap Motor (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
M153 Mixed Air Flap Motor, Left
M153 Mixed Air Flap Motor, Left (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
M154 Mixed Air Flap Motor, Right
M154 Mixed Air Flap Motor, Right (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
M156 Motor, Backrest Width Adjustment, Driver's Seat
M157 Motor, Backrest Width Adjustment, Passenger's Seat
M157 Steering Column Inclination Motor
M158 Blending Pump Unit
M159 E-Box Fan (7er-Reihe_F01/F02 Without N57 Engine)
M15a System Lock, Rear Driver'S Side
M15a System Lock, Rear Driver's Side
M161 Vibration Motor
M164 Drive For Electric Motor-Driven Reel, Left
M165 Drive For Electric Motor-Driven Reel, Right
M179 Steering Gear
M17a Central Locking Drive, Trunk Lid
M17a Central Locking Drive, Trunk Lid (Without Convertible)
M17c Central Locking Drive Unit, Split Door, Right
M17d Central Locking Drive Unit, Split Door, Left
M180 Metering Pump
M184 Motor, Backrest Angle Adjustment, Driver's Side
M184 Motor, Backrest Angle Adjustment, FA Rear
M191 Motor, Driver's Seat Depth Adjustment
M192 Motor, Passenger's Seat Depth Adjustment
M20a Ventilation Flap Motor, Left
M20b Power Window Motor, Rear Driver'S Side
[email protected]
20
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 348
M20b Power Window Motor, Rear Driver's Side
M214 Drive Unit, Driver'S Seat Height Adjustment
M214 Drive Unit, Driver's Seat Height Adjustment
M216 Drive Unit, Driver'S Seat Forward/Backward Adjustment
M216 Drive Unit, Driver's Seat Forward/Backward Adjustment
M218 Drive Unit, Driver'S Seat Angle Adjustment
M218 Drive Unit, Driver's Seat Angle Adjustment
M218 Drive, Seat-Angle Adjustment, Driver's Seat
M220 Turbocharger Coolant Pump (N14 Engine)
M22a Ventilation Flap Motor, Right
M22b Power Window Motor, Rear Passenger'S Side
M22b Power Window Motor, Rear Passenger's Side
M300 Roller Cover Motor, Release, Left
M301 Roller Cover Motor, Release, Right
M35a Defroster Flap Motor
M35a Defroster Flap Motor (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
M37a Circulating Pump, Auxiliary Heater
M407 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Trunk Lid/Tailgate
M408 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Driver's Door
M409 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Passenger's Door
M410 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Rear Left
M411 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Rear Right
M455 Fan M-ASK/CCC
M50a Drive, Driver's Seat Angle Adjustment
M51a Drive, Driver's Seat Forward/Backward Adjustment
M52a Drive, Driver's Seat Height Adjustment
M53a Drive, Driver'S Seat Backrest Angle Adjustment
M53a Drive, Driver's Seat Backrest Angle Adjustment
M54a Drive, Driver's Seat Head Restraint Adjustment
M55a Drive For Driver's Seat Lumbar Support
M55b Vacuum Pump, Driver's Seat
M55b Vacuum Pump, Passenger's Seat
M55c Lumbar Support-Active Seat Drive Unit, Driver
M56a Drive For Passenger's Seat Lumbar Support
M56b Vacuum Pump, Passenger'S Seat
M56b Vacuum Pump, Passenger's Seat
M56c Lumbar Support-Active Seat Drive Unit, Front Passenger
M57a Drive, Passenger'S Head Restraint Adjustment
M57a Drive, Passenger's Head Restraint Adjustment
M58a Drive, Passenger'S Backrest Angle Adjustment
M58a Drive, Passenger's Backrest Angle Adjustment
M59a Drive, Passenger'S Seat Height Adjustment
M59a Drive, Passenger's Seat Height Adjustment
M60a Drive, Passenger'S Seat Forward/Backward Adjustment
M60a Drive, Passenger's Seat Forward/Backward Adjustment
M610 Parking Brake, Left
M615 Parking Brake, Right
M61a Drive, Passenger'S Seat Angle Adjustment
M61a Drive, Passenger's Seat Angle Adjustment
M79a Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Left
M79a Soft Close Automatic Drive, Left
M82a Lumbar Massage-Seat Drive, Driver's Side, Rear
M89a Unlock Drive Unit, Glove Compartment
M94a Wiper Drive, Rear Left
M94b Wiper Drive Unit, Rear Right
M96a Rear Window Lock
M101a Hardtop Drive Unit
M107a Release Drive, Glovebox II
M119A Diagnostic Module For Fuel Tank Leakage
M119a Diagnostic Module For Fuel Tank Leakage
M132a Drive Unit, Lock and Sliding Canvas Sunroof
M137a Electric Steering Lock
M137a Electric Steering Lock
M137a Electric Steering Lock (As of 12/04)
M164a Fan 1, Driver's Seat Backrest
[email protected]
21
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 349
M164b Fan 1, Passenger's Seat Backrest
M180a SCR Delivery Module
M1997 Radiator Shutter Drive Unit
M2327 Friction Wheel Drive
M2399 Additive Pump
M2458 SCR Metering Module
M4723 Rear Compartment Mixing Flap Motor
M4729 Front Mixing Flap Motor
M6035 Electric Coolant Pump
M6351 Valvetronic Actuator Motor
M6351 Valvetronic Actuator Motor (N12 Engine)
M6352 Valvetronic Actuator Motor 2
M6353 Actuator, Variable Valve Timing Gear
M6506 E-Box Fan
M6510 Starter
M8533 VTG Actuator
M8540 Drive Unit For Towing Hitch Release
M9149 Luggage-Compartment Fan 1
M9575 Throttle Valve
M14104 Visor Motor
M14105 Glass Roof Motor
M60353 Coolant Pump For Intercooler
M60354 Turbocharger Coolant Pump
M60811 Actuator Motor, Left
M60812 Actuator Motor, Right
M6510a Starter
M6510a Starter (S65 Engine)
M9910a Antenna Amplifier, Rear Window
M13734a Footwell Flap Motor, Left
M13735a Footwell Flap Motor, Right
Part 5 N-Z
N1 Blower Output Stage, Rear Air Conditioning System
N2 Blower Output Stage
N2 Blower Output Stage (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
N4 Output Stage For Rear Compartment Fan Motor
N9 Radio
N9 Radio (RAD Radio)
N22 CD Changer
N22 CD Changer (Without Convertible)
N24 Rollover Protection Controller
N41 Digital Tuner
N47 Satellite Receiver
N47 Satellite Receiver (USA_LHD)
N47 Satellite Receiver (Without Convertible)
N48 Digital Tuner US (USA_LHD)
N48 Digital Tuner US
N48 Digital Tuner US (Without Convertible)
N8C Antenna Amplifier, Side Section, Left
N8c Antenna Amplifier, Side Section, Left
N27a Compensator
N38a CCC/M-ASK
N38a CCC/M-ASK (RAD2-BO User Interface or CCC-BO User Interface)
N38b CIC Car Information Computer
N39a DVD Changer
N406 UDS Control Module
N407 RAG Control Module
N40a Hifi Amplifier
N42a Headset Connection Module
N45b Antenna Amplifier, Side Section, Right
N47a Digital Tuner
N550 Pulse Adapter
N550 Pulse Adaptor
N552 Headset Connection Module
N554 Rear Seat Entertainment
[email protected]
22
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 350
R1 Mixing Actuator
R11 Blower Resistors (Without IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
R12 Fresh Air Grill, Rear Compartment
R012 Rear Compartment Mixing Flap Potentiometer
R3554 Classification Resistor
R6138 Electric Auxiliary Heater
R6138 Electric Auxiliary Heater (Engine)
R6138 Electric Auxiliary Heater (IHKA Integrated Automatic Heating/Air Conditioning)
R6138 Electric Auxiliary Heater (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
R6139 Electric Auxiliary Heater, Rear Left
R6140 Electric Auxiliary Heater, Rear Right
R8554 Classification Resistor
R62521 Throttle Valve Sensor (S65 Engine)
R62522 Throttle Valve Sensor 2 (S65 Engine)
S1 Brake Fluid Level Switch
S2 Ignition Switch
S3 Rear Lid Button, Interior
S4 Hazard-Warning Switch, Central-Locking Button
S4 Horn Switch
S5 Hotel Position Switch
S6 Switch Block, Seat Adjustment, Passenger's Side
S7 Direction Indicator/High Beam Headlight Switch
S7 Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Contact
S8 Light Switch Unit
S01 Rear Bench Seat Switch, Left 1
S05 Rear Bench Seat Switch, Right
S11 Switch Block, Seat Adjustment, Driver's Side
S13 Switch Block , Seat Adjustment, Passenger's Side
S15 System Lock, Rear Passenger's Side
S16 Switch, Lumbar Support, Driver
S17 Bonnet Contact Switch
S17 Mirror Adjustment Switch
S18 Hazard Switch
S19 Hood Contact Switch
S19 Seat Switch Cluster on Driver's Door
S21 Rear Lid Button on Inside of Rear Lid
S21 Rear Lid Lamp
S23 Seat Switch Cluster on Passenger's Door
S24 Power Window Switch, Passenger's Side, Rear
S25 Brake Light Switch
S27 Switch Block, Seat on Door, Driver's Side, Rear
S28 Switch Block, Seat on Door, Passenger's Side
S29 Brake Light Switch
S2a START-STOP Button
S2a START-STOP button
S2a Start-Stop Button
S30 Boot Lid/Tailgate Lock
S31 Vanity Mirror Switch, Front Right
S32 Switch Block, Seat Adjustment, Driver's Side
S34 System Lock, Passenger's Door
S35 Switch Block, Driver's Door
S36 Passenger's Door Power Window Switch
S37 Switch, Lumbar Support, Passenger
S38 Power Window Switch, Driver's Side, Rear
S40 System Lock, Driver's Door
S43 Vanity Mirror Switch, Front Left
S44 Switch For Passenger Airbag Deactivation
S45 Transmission Selector Switch
S47 System Lock, Diver's Door
S47 System Lock, Driver'S Door
S47 System Lock, Driver's Door
S48 Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Contact
S49 System Lock, Passenger'S Door
S49 System Lock, Passenger's Door
S49 System Lock, Rear Driver's Side
S4a Horn Switch
S50 Switch, Driver'S Seat Adjustment
[email protected]
23
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 351
S50 Switch, Driver's Seat Adjustment
S52 Driver'S Lumbar Support Switch
S52 Driver's Lumbar Support Switch
S52 Parking Brake Button
S55 Passenger'S Lumbar Support Switch
S55 Passenger's Lumbar Support Switch
S56 Switch, Passenger'S Seat Adjustment
S56 Switch, Passenger's Seat Adjustment
S63 START-STOP Button
S65 Oil Level Switch
S67 Rear Compartment Operating Unit, Left
S68 Rear Compartment Operating Unit, Right
S68 Seat Heating Switch, Rear Left
S69 Center Console Operating Unit
S69 Seat Heating Switch, Rear Right
S71 Button, Fully Automatic Towing Hitch
S72 Switch, Trailer Socket
S76 Seat Belt Buckle Contact, Rear Driver's Side
S77 Make-Up Mirror Switch, Front Left
S77 Seat Belt Buckle Contact, Rear Passenger's Side
S78 Make-Up Mirror Switch, Front Right
S87 Fanfare Horn Button
S89 Rocker Switch, Left
S90 Rocker Switch, Right
S93 Switch, Steering-Wheel Heating and Column Adjustment
S94 Glove Compartment Light Switch
S96 Seat Heating Switch, Rear Driver's Side
S97 Switch, Seat Heating, Passenger's Side, Rear
S103 Backrest Lock Switch, Driver
S107 Seat Belt Buckle Contact, Rear Driver's Side
S108 Seat Belt Buckle Contact, Rear Passenger's Side
S113 Glove Compartment Button
S119 Steering Column Adjustment Switch
S122 Backrest Lock Switch, Passenger
S126 Switch Block, Driver's Door
S127 Passenger'S Power Window Switch
S127 Passenger's Power Window Switch
S138 Easy Entry Switch, Passenger
S139 Easy Entry Switch, Driver'S Side
S139 Easy Entry Switch, Driver's Side
S141 Microswitch, Windscreen Cowl Panel Reached
S141 Switch, Convertible Top on Cowl
S18a Hazard Warning Switch
S19a Hood Contact Switch
S204 Trunk Lid Release Switch (Interior)
S227 Selector Lever Position Switch
S227 Selector Lever Position Switch (EGS Electronic Transmission Control)
S237 Rear-Lid Button, Inside, Automatic Rear Lid
S239 Switch, Convertible Top Compartment Floor
S243 Parking Brake Push Button
S243 Parking Brake Pushbutton
S251 Hotel Switch
S263 Outer Door Handle Electronic Module, Driver'S Side
S263 Outer Door Handle Electronic Module, Driver's Side
S263 Outer Handle Electronic Module, Driver's Side
S264 Outer Door Handle Electronic Module, Passenger'S Side
S264 Outer Door Handle Electronic Module, Passenger's Side
S289 Switch For Backrest-Width Adjustment, Driver
S31a Parking Brake Warning Switch
S38a Slide/Tilt Sunroof Switch
S419 Rear Lid Lock Switch, Left
S419 Rear Lid Lock Switch, X11584
S41a Power Window Switch, Rear Driver'S Side
S41a Power Window Switch, Rear Driver's Side
S42a Power Window Switch, Rear Passenger'S Side
S42a Power Window Switch, Rear Passenger's Side
S492 Towing Hitch Release Button
S559 Switch, Passenger Airbag Deactivation
S560 Passive Video Switch
S58a Driver'S Seat Belt Buckle Contact
[email protected]
24
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 352
S58a Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Contact
S58a Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Contact (Without Coupe)
S59a Passenger'S Seat Belt Buckle Contact
S59a Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Contact
S59a Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Contact (Without Coupe)
S63b Coolant Level Switch
S700 Hardtop Operating Unit
S700 Switch, Convertible Top
S0241 Center Console Switch Cluster
S0241 Centre Cosole Switch Cluster
S0289 Switch For Backrest-Width Adjustment, BA Seat
S0289 Switch, Seat-Back-Width Adjustment, Passenger Side
S136a Washer Fluid Level Switch
S147a Rear Window Button
S167b Rear Lid Lock Switch, Right
S167c Split Door Button, Right
S167d Split Door Button, Left
S172a Trunk Lid Button
S172a Trunk Lid Button (Without Convertible)
S224a Steptronic Switch
S227a Gear Selector Switch
S239a Microswitch, Rear Parcel Shelf, Bottom
S239a Switch For Convertible Top Compartment Floor
S239b Clubdoor_V Lock, Top
S239c Clubdoor_V Lock, Button
S263a Button, Outside Door Handle, Diver's Side (CA Comfort Access)
S264a Outer Door Handle Button, Passenger's Side (CA Comfort Access)
S265a Electronic Outer Door Handle Module, Rear Left
S266a Electronic Outer Door Handle Module, Rear Right
S4017 Talk Button
S805a Clutch Switch Module
S805b Clutch Module
S8511 Back-Up Light Switch
S14028 Slide-In Compartment
S14099 Push-Button, Center Console Control Center
S60354 Turbocharger Coolant Pump
S8503a Drive Logic Switch
S8503a Drive logic Switch
T6151 Ignition Coil, Cylinder 1
T6157 Ignition Coil, Cylinder 7 (S65 Engine)
T6158 Ignition Coil, Cylinder 8 (S65 Engine)
U6 Voice Input Control Module
U6a Voice Control System
U410 AF Interface Suppressor Filter
U410 AF Interference Suppressor Filter
U400a Telephone Transceiver
U400a Telephone Transceiver (Without Convertible)
U400b TCU (Autarkic Rear-Cabin Telephone)
U400c ULF
U400d ULF-SBX
U400e ULF-SBX-H
V1 Anti-Theft LED Indicator (DWA)
W8 GPS Antenna
W12 Interior Antenna, Rear (CA Comfort Access)
W13 Inner Antenna, Luggage Compartment
W14 Fender Aerial, Rear
W14 Fender Aerial, Rear (CA Comfort Access)
W16 Roof Antenna
W18 Bluetooth Antenna
W19 Emergency Antenna
W19 Emergency Antenna (Without Convertible)
W9a Inner Antenna, Centre Console, Front
W10a Inner Antenna, Centre Console, Rear
[email protected]
25
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 353
W10a Interior Antenna, Center Console, Rear
W10a Interior Antenna, Centre Console, Rear
W10b Interior Antenna, Centre Console, Front
W10b Interior Antenna, Centre Console, Front (CA Comfort Access)
W11a Interior Antenna, Side Section, Left (CA Comfort Access)
W11b Interior Antenna, Centre Console, Rear
W12a Interior Antenna, Side Section, Right (CA Comfort Access)
W13a Inner Antenna, Luggage Compartment, Rear
Y1 A/C Compressor
Y3 Valve Block, Driver Lumbar Support
Y4 Water Valve Assembly
Y5 Driver's Side Mirror
Y6 Passenger's Side Mirror
Y6 Pressure Distributor, Active Seat, Passenger
Y7 Fuel Metering Pump, Independent Heating
Y7 Valve Block, Dynamic Drive
Y8 Water Valves
Y11 Intake Throttle Valve
Y12 Coolant Changeover Valve, Independent Heating
Y12 Valve Block, Lumbar Support, Driver's Side, Rear
Y13 Valve Block, Lumbar Support, Front Passenger's Side
Y14 Electric Lock
Y15 ECO Valve
Y16 Servotronic Valve
Y17 Actuator, Rear-Axle Slip-Angle Control
Y19 Park/Neutral Position Switch
Y19 Valve Block, Passenger's Lumbar Support
Y20 Refrigerant Shut-Off Valve, Front
Y22 Air Supply System
Y22 Pressure Distributor, Active Seat, Driver
Y25 Air Supply System
Y26 Coolant Changeover Valve, Independent Heating
Y27 Automatic Soft-Close Drive, Boot Lid
Y29 Pressure Distributor, Massage Seat, Driver's Side, Rear
Y2a Control Valve, Refrigerant Compressor (S65 Engine)
Y2b Control Valve In A/C Compressor
Y34 Refrigerant Shut-Off Valve, Rear
Y40 Valve Block Dynamic Drive
Y42 Electric Changeover Valve, Exhaust Flap
Y48 Drive For Fully Automatic Towing Hitch
Y4a Water Valve
Y6, X624, Y5, X623
Y65 Pressure Distributor, Massage Seat, Passenger's Side, Rear
Y85 Rollover Protection Actuator, Left
Y86 Rollover Protection Actuator, Right
Y193 Valve Block, Driver's Lumbar Support
Y194 Valve Block, Passenger's Lumbar Support
Y194 Valve Block, Passenger'S Lumber Support
Y198 Exhaust Flap
Y19a Parking Lock
Y206 Valve Block For Backrest-Width Adjustment, Driver
Y401 Damper Valve, Front Left
Y402 Damper Valve, Front Right
Y403 Damper Valve, Rear Left
Y404 Damper Valve, Rear Right
Y715 Microswitch, Air Distribution
Y715 Microswitch, air distribution
Y715 Microswitch, Air Distribution (IHR Integrated Heater Control)
Y801 Valve 1
Y802 Valve 2
Y803 Valve 3
Y804 Valve 4
Y805 Valve 5
Y0206 Valve Block For Backrest-Width Adjustment, Passenger
Y2381 Volume Control Valve
Y2381 Volume Control Valve (N14 Engine)
Y401b Damper Satellite, Front Left
Y402b Damper Satellite, Front Right
Y403b Damper Satellite, Rear Left
Y404b Damper Satellite, Rear Right
[email protected]
26
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 354
Y5392 Electric Throttle Valve Actuator
Y5393 Electric Throttle Valve Actuator 2
Y6039 Pressure Converter, Wastage Valve
Y6039 Wastegate Valve
Y6039 Wastegate Valve (N14 Engine)
Y6040 Thrust Air Control Valve (N14 Engine)
Y6046 Volume Control Valve
Y6047 Volume Control Valve 2
Y6101 Fuel Injector, Cylinder 1
Y6120 Evaporative Emission Valve
Y6121 Charcoal Filter Valve (S65 Engine)
Y6123 Charge-Air Pressure Controller
Y6275 VANOS Solenoid Valve, Intake
Y6275 Vanos Solenoid Valve, Intake
Y6276 VANOS Solenoid Valve, Exhaust
Y6276 Vanos Solenoid Valve, Intake
Y6279 Characteristic MAP Thermostat
Y6279 Characteristic Map Thermostat
Y6279 Characteristic map Thermostat
Y6281 VANOS Solenoid Valve, Intake
Y6281 Vanos Solenoid Valve, Intake (S65 Engine)
Y6282 VANOS Solenoid Valve, Exhaust
Y6282 Vanos Solenoid Valve, Exhaust (S65 Engine)
Y6283 VANOS Solenoid Valve 2, Intake
Y6283 Vanos Solenoid Valve 2, Intake (S65 Engine)
Y6284 VANOS Solenoid Valve 2, Exhaust
Y6284 Vanos Solenoid Valve 2, Exhaust (S65 Engine)
Y6384 Oil Pressure Control Valve
Y6540 DISA Controller 1
Y6541 DISA Controller 2
Y6723 Pressure Converter, Wastegate Valve 2
Y6723 Wastegate Valve 2
Y6939 Idle Actuator (S65 Engine)
Y8099 Compressor Clutch
Y8532 Transmission Shift Device
Y8616 RPM Sensor, Transmission Main Shaft
Y13864 Solenoid, Radiator Shutter
Y14035 Electric Lock
Y6165a Suction Jet Pump Valve
Y63900 Electric Throttle Valve Actuator
Y63901 Electric Throttle Valve Actuator 2
Y63901 Electronic Throttle-Valve Actuator 2
Y67291 Thrust Air Control Valve
Y67292 Recirculated Air Control Valve 2
Y14040a ECO Valve
Z1 Bistable Relay
Z1 Distribution Box, Front
Z1 Fanfare Horn Relay
Z1 Lockout Circuit For Rear-Window Defroster (Positive)

Z1 Relay, Terminal 15N
Z1 Relay, Terminal 30B
Z2 Bistable Relay
Z2 Distribution Box, Rear
Z2 Lockout Circuit For Rear-Window Defroster (Ground)
Z2 Relay, Terminal 15N
Z2 Relay, Terminal 30B
Z3 Blocking Circuit For Heated Rear Window, Right
Z3 Fuse Box
Z4 Blocking Circuit For Heated Rear Window, Right
Z4 Front Power Distribution Box
Z13 Noise Suppressor Filter
Z14 Suppression Filter
[email protected]
27
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 355
Z1a Blocking Circuit For Heated Rear-Window, Left (Positive)
Z2a Blocking Circuit For Heated Rear Window, Left (Ground)
Z402 Noise Suppressor Filter
Key To Wiring Diagrams & Symbol Identification
[email protected]
28
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 356
[email protected]
29
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 357
[email protected]
30
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 358
Troubleshooting Procedures
Diagnostic procedures for many of the circuits in this manual are included with the schematics. These procedures are based on a logical
problem-solving procedure. The steps listed below are provided for those circuits that do not include diagnostic procedures. Following these steps
will enable you to make a quick diagnosis of the problem.
1. Verify the Problem

Operate the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the complaint. Note the symptoms of the inoperative circuit.
2. Analyze the Problem

Refer to the schematic of the problem circuit in the ETM. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current path(s) from
the power feed through the circuit components to ground. Then, based on the symptoms you noted in step 1 and your understanding of circuit
operation, identify one or more possible causes of the problem.
3. Isolate the Problem

Make circuit tests to prove or disprove the preliminary diagnosis made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to
efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points which are easily accessible.
[email protected]
31
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 359
4. Repair the Problem

Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair using the proper tools and safe procedures.
5. Check the Problem

Operate the circuit to check for satisfactory circuit operation. Good repair practice calls for rechecking all circuits you have worked on.
Troubleshooting Tools
TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS:
Isolating the problem (Step 3 of TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES) requires the use of a voltmeter and/or ohmmeter. A voltmeter
measures voltage at selected points in a circuit. An ohmmeter measures a circuit's resistance to current flow. It has an internal battery that
provides current to the circuit under test. Disconnect the car battery when using an ohmmeter because the battery voltage will cause the
ohmmeter to give false readings. Also. do not use an ohmmeter on solid-state components. The voltage that the ohmmeter applies to the circuit
could damage these components.
Voltage Test
Voltage Test:
Voltage Test
This test measures voltage in a circuit. By taking measurements at several points (terminals or connectors) along the circuit. you can isolate the
problem.
To take a voltage measurement, connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery's negative terminal or other known good ground. Then
connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the point you want to test. The voltmeter will measure the voltage present at that point in the circuit.
Voltage Drop Test

Voltage Drop Test:
[email protected]
32
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 360
Voltage Drop Test
Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates
a problem.
To test for voltage drop. connect the voltmeter leads to connectors at either end of the circuit's suspected problem area. The positive lead should
be connected to the connector closest to the power source. The voltmeter will show the voltage drop between these two points.
Continuity Test
Continuity Test:
[email protected]
33
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 361
Continuity Test
To perform a continuity test, first disconnect the car battery. Then adjust the ohmmeter to read zero while holding the leads together. Connect
the ohmmeter leads to connector or terminals at either end of the circuit's suspected problem area The ohmmeter will show the resistance across
that part of the circuit.
Short Test Using Voltmeter

Short Test Using Voltmeter:
Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Connect the voltmeter leads to the fuse terminals. The positive lead should be connected to the
terminal closest to the power source.
[email protected]
34
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 362
Starting near the POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX, move the wire harness back and forth and watch the voltmeter reading. If the voltmeter
registers a reading, there is a short to ground in the wiring. Somewhere in the area of the harness being moved, the wire insulation is worn away
and the circuit is grounding.
Short Test Using Ohmmeter

Short Test Using Ohmmeter:
Disconnect the battery. Adjust the ohmmeter to read zero while holding the leads together. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load.
Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to the fuse terminal that is closest to the load. Connect the other lead to a known good ground.
Starting near the POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX, move the wire harness back and forth and watch the ohmmeter reading. Low or no resistance
indicates a short to ground in the wiring. Infinitely high resistance indicates no short.
Current Test Using Ammeter
Systematic Troubleshooting: Current Test Using Ammeter
To measure the current, connect the ammeter leads to the connector or terminals in series with the circuit. The ammeter will show the current
through the circuit.
[email protected]
35
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 363
Clutch, M/T
Clutch Assembly:
1. Crankshaft
2. Grooved ball bearing
3. Flywheel
4. Clutch disc
5. Pressure plate
6. Release bearing
C = 25 ±0.25 mm (0.984 ±0.010 in)
7. Release lever
8. Clutch slave cylinder
Section Drawings of Transmission
[email protected]
36
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 364
Section Drawing of Getrag 265/6 Transmission

1. First gear
2. Second gear
3. Third gear
4. Fourth gear
5. Fifth gear
R. Reverse gear
6. Input shaft
7. Output shaft
8. Layshaft
Section Drawing of Getrag 265/6 Transmission Shift Mechanism

1. Selector rod - 1st/2nd gear
2. Selector rod - 3rd/4th gear
3. Selector rod - 5th/rev. gear
[email protected]
37
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 365
4. Selector shaft
5. Selector arm
6. Selector rail
7. Dog
8. Reversing lever
Transmission Shafts and Gears
1. Ball bearing
2. Input shaft with 4th gear
3. Turning lock
4. Needle bearing
5. Synchromesh ring
6. Snap ring
7. Washer
8. Thrust part
9. Ball
10. Spring
11. Guide sleeve
12. Sliding sleeve
13. 3rd gear
14. Needle bearing
15. Bearing sleeve
16. Output shaft
17. Ball
18. 2nd gear
19. 1st gear
20. Bearing race
21. Roller bearing
22. Shim X
23. Reverse gear
24. Circlip
25. Bearing sleeve
26. Split needle bearing
27. 5th gear
28. Washer
29. Ball bearing
30. Washer
31. Speedometer drive gear
32. Radial oil seal
33. Output flange
[email protected]
38
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 366
34. Collar nut
35. Lockplate
36. Roller bearing
37. 4th gear
38. Circlip
39. 3rd gear
40. Layshaft
41. Roller bearing
42. 5th gear
43. Roller bearing
44. Bolt
45. Washer
46. Washer
47. Thrust washer
48. Needle bearing
49. Reverse gear
50. Bearing shaft
51. Bearing holder
Shift Layout With Steel Console
SHIFT LAYOUT FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION

- Sheet Metal Shift Console -
1. Selector arm
2. Console
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Nut
6. Selector rod
7. Spacer
8. Circlip
9. Selector rod joint
10. Pin
11. Lubricating felt
12. Spring sleeve
[email protected]
39
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 367
13. Lower plate
14. Damper plate
15. Rubber cover
16. Rubber mount
17. Holder
18. Cap
19. Circlip
20. Shift lever upper Section
21. Shift lever assembly
22. Circlip
23. Shift lever lower Section
24. Upper plate
25. Spring
26. Spacer
27. Circlip
28. Rubber ring
29. Washer
30. Dust cover
31. Shift lever knob
Shift Layout With Aluminum Console
[email protected]
40
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 368
1. Shift lever
2. Dust cover
3. Holder
4. Support
5. Dust cover
6. Bearing shell
7. Selector rod
8. Shift console
9. Selector rod joint
10. Backup light wires
11. Body
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber

LAYOUT DRAWING OF SHOCK ABSORBER WITH MOUNT AND COIL SPRING
[email protected]
41
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 369
1- Cap
2- Mount
3- Self-locking nut
4- Washer
5- Insulator
6- Washer
7- Rubber damper
8- Protective tube
9- Spring strut tube
10 - Upper rubber ring
11 - Upper spring retainer
12 - Coil spring
13 - Shock absorber piston rod
14 - Lower rubber ring
15 - Screw-on ring
[email protected]
42
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 370
Accessory Connector
[email protected]
43
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 371
Diagnostic Connector
[email protected]
44
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 372
ABS Control Unit ... Auxiliary Fuse
[email protected]
45
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 373
A/C Comp Control Unit - Chime Module
[email protected]
46
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 374
Control Switches ... Fog Light Switch
[email protected]
47
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 375
Fresh/Recirc Air Relay ... Light Switch
[email protected]
48
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 376
Main Relay ... Motronic Control Unit
[email protected]
49
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 377
On-Board Computer ... Rear Light
[email protected]
50
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 378
Rear Lights Check Relay ... Sunroof Switch
[email protected]
51
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 379
Throttle Switch ... C101 - C140
[email protected]
52
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 380
C152 - C210
[email protected]
53
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 381
C240 - C503
[email protected]
54
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 382
[email protected]
55
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 383
Fig. 9 Ground Distribution, G103
[email protected]
56
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 384
Fig. 5 Ground Distribution, G104 and G200 (Partial)
[email protected]
57
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 385
Fig. 5 Ground Distribution, G104 and G200 (Partial)
[email protected]
58
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 386
Fig. 6 Ground Distribution, G200 (Partial) and G201
[email protected]
59
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 387
Ground Distribution
[email protected]
60
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 388
[email protected]
61
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 389
[email protected]
62
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 390
Ground Distribution
[email protected]
63
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 391
[email protected]
64
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 392
Fig. 2a Power Distribution
[email protected]
65
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 393
Fig. 2b Power Distribution
[email protected]
66
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 394
Fig. 2c Power Distribution
[email protected]
67
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 395
Fig. 1 Power Distribution
[email protected]
68
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 396
[email protected]
69
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 397
[email protected]
70
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 398
[email protected]
71
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 399
[email protected]
72
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 400
[email protected]
73
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 401
[email protected]
74
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 402
Supplemental Restraint System
Air Bag
For electrical diagrams refer to "Air Bag Systems : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Restraints and Safety Systems/Air Bag Systems/Diagrams

Air Bag Control Module

Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag
[email protected]
75
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 403

Impact Sensor

Antenna, Radio
For electrical diagrams, refer to "Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
[email protected]
76
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 404
Antitheft and Alarm Systems

For electrical diagrams of the Antitheft System refer to "On Board Computer : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/On-Board Computer/Diagrams
[email protected]
77
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 405
Brake Warning System
[email protected]
78
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 406
Charging System
Alternator
For electrical diagrams refer to "Charging System : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Diagrams
[email protected]
79
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 407
Fig. 46 Auxiliary Fan
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor

Refer to "Cooling System : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams

Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay

Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor
[email protected]
80
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 408

Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch

Temperature Gauge
For electrical diagrams refer to "Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Diagrams
Fig. 48 Cruise Control
[email protected]
81
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 409
Fig. 44 Heating and Air Conditioning (Fresh/Recirculating Air Controls)
[email protected]
82
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 410
Fig. 43 Heating and Air Conditioning (Blower Controls)
[email protected]
83
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 411
Fig. 45a Heating and Air Conditioning (Compressor Controls
[email protected]
84
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 412
A/C - Heater. Compressor Controls
[email protected]
85
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 413
Fig. 42 Heating and Air Conditioning (Hot Water Control)
[email protected]
86
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 414
Fig. 46 Auxiliary Fan
Blower Motor
Locating Electrical Diagrams:
Electrical Diagrams for SubSystems and Components can be found at the System level.
Please refer to Heating and Air Conditioning - Diagrams / Electrical.
See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
System Diagram
[email protected]
87
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 415
Compressor Clutch
Condenser Fan Motor
Refer to Heating and Air Conditioning : Diagrams : Electrical

Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC

Condenser Fan Resistor

Control Module HVAC
System Relay, HVAC
[email protected]
88
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 416
Fig. 31 Instrument Cluster (Gauges Indicators)
[email protected]
89
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 417
Fig. 27 Instrumeter Cluster (Speedometer/Indicators)
[email protected]
90
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 418
Fig. 30 Instrument Cluster (Tachometer/Fuel Economy Gauge)
[email protected]
91
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 419
[email protected]
92
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 420
[email protected]
93
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 421
Fig. 16 A/C Compressor Controls
[email protected]
94
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 422
[email protected]
95
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 423
Fig. 29 Instrument Cluster (Gauges)
[email protected]
96
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 424
[email protected]
97
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 425
[email protected]
98
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 426
[email protected]
99
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 427
[email protected]
100
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 428
Fig. 25 Ignition Key Warning, Seatbelt Warning
[email protected]
101
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 429
Fig. 28 Instrument Cluster (Service Interval Indicator)
[email protected]
102
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 430
[email protected]
103
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 431
Fig. 25 Ignition Key Warning, Seatbelt Warning
[email protected]
104
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 432
[email protected]
105
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 433
Active Check Control
[email protected]
106
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 434
[email protected]
107
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 435
[email protected]
108
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 436
Fig. 32a Active Check Control
[email protected]
109
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 437
Fig. 10 Cigar Lighter, Glove Box Light, Auto-Charging Flashlight, Map Reading Light
Fuel Gauge

System Diagram
[email protected]
110
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 438
Fig. 33b Light Switch Details
[email protected]
111
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 439
Fig. 12 Light Switch Details
[email protected]
112
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 440
[email protected]
113
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 441
Fig. 39 Backup Lights
[email protected]
114
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 442
Fig. 13 Headlights/Fog Lights
[email protected]
115
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 443
Headlights, Fog Lights
[email protected]
116
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 444
Fig. 15 Interior Lights
[email protected]
117
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 445
Fig. 33b Light Switch Details
[email protected]
118
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 446
Fig. 40 Stop Lights
[email protected]
119
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 447
Fig. 14 Turn/Hazard Lights
[email protected]
120
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 448
Fig. 35b Turn/Hazard Lights
[email protected]
121
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 449
Fig. 36 Parking, Tail, Front Marker Lights
[email protected]
122
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 450
Fig. 38 Trunk Lights
[email protected]
123
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 451
Fig. 22 Horns
[email protected]
124
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 452
Fig. 39 Backup Lights
[email protected]
125
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 453
Fig. 40 Stop Lights
[email protected]
126
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 454
Fig. 15 Interior Lights
[email protected]
127
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 455
[email protected]
128
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 456
[email protected]
129
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 457
[email protected]
130
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 458
[email protected]
131
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 459
[email protected]
132
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 460
[email protected]
133
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 461
[email protected]
134
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 462
[email protected]
135
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 463
Fig. 12 Light Switch Details
[email protected]
136
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 464
Fig. 22 Horns
[email protected]
137
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 465
[email protected]
138
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 466
[email protected]
139
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 467
[email protected]
140
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 468
[email protected]
141
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 469
Fig. 38 Trunk Lights
[email protected]
142
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 470
[email protected]
143
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 471
[email protected]
144
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 472
Fig. 19a Central Locking (2 Door)
[email protected]
145
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 473
Fig. 19b Central Locking
System Diagram
For electrical diagrams, refer to "Locks : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Body and Frame/Locks/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
[email protected]
146
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 474
Lock Heater
System Diagram

Power Door Lock Actuator

Power Door Lock Control Module

Trunk / Liftgate Lock
[email protected]
147
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 475
Fig. 18 Power Mirrors
Oil Level Warning Indicator

Refer to Instrument Panel / Gauges and Warning Indicators / Diagrams / Electrical
[email protected]
148
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 476
Fig. 15a Injection Electronics (Engine Block Diagram)
[email protected]
149
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 477
Fig. 15b Injection Electronics (Engine Block Diagram)
[email protected]
150
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 478
Fig. 15c Injection Electronics (Engine Block Diagram)
[email protected]
151
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 479
Fig. 15d Injection Electronics
[email protected]
152
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 480
Fig. 15f Injection Electronics
[email protected]
153
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 481
Fig. 15g Injection Electronics
[email protected]
154
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 482
Fig. 8 Injection Electronics
System Diagram
For wiring diagrams please refer to "Powertrain Management : Diagrams : Electrical". See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor
For electrical diagrams refer to "Computers and Control Systems : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Diagrams

Air Temperature Sensor ( Ambient / Intake )
[email protected]
155
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 483

Barometric Pressure Sensor

Camshaft Position Sensor

Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer)

Crankshaft Position Sensor

Cylinder Identification Sensor

Data Link Connector
BMW does not supply a wiring diagram specifically for the Diagnostic Connector.
The Diagnostic Connector is equipped with circuits from various electrical systems and components, i.e. Computers and Controls, Antilock Brakes,
Battery, etc.. Use the information provided at the Data Link Connector View to determine the correct component or system diagram you need to
use. Then proceed to appropriately.
Refer to Data Link Connector : Diagrams : Connector Views
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Connector Views

Engine Control Module
For wiring diagrams please refer to "Powertrain Management : Diagrams : Electrical". See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic

Intake Air Temperature Switch

Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)

Oxygen Sensor

Oxygen Sensor Relay

Emission Control Systems

System Diagram
[email protected]
156
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 484
Fuel Injector

System Diagram

Distributor, Ignition

Ignition Coil
[email protected]
157
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 485
Fig. 17a Radio/Antenna
[email protected]
158
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 486
Fig. 17c Radio/Antenna
Amplifier, Sound System

Radio/Stereo
[email protected]
159
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 487
Fig. 24 Rear Defogger
[email protected]
160
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 488
Heated Seats
Seat Temperature Element

For electrical diagrams refer to "Seats : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Body and Frame/Seats/Diagrams
[email protected]
161
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 489
Fig. 14 Starting System
[email protected]
162
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 490
Fig. 21 Sunroof
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor

For electrical diagrams refer to "Sunroof/Moonroof : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Body and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Diagrams

Sunroof / Moonroof Relay
For electrical diagrams refer to "Sunroof/Moonroof : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Body and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Diagrams
[email protected]
163
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 491
On-Board Computer
[email protected]
164
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 492
On-Board Computer
[email protected]
165
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 493
Fig. 20 Power Windows
Power Window Motor

For electrical diagrams refer to "Windows : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Diagrams
[email protected]
166
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 494
Fig. 26 Wiper/Washer
Windshield Washer Pump

For electrical diagrams refer to "Wiper and Washer Systems : Diagrams : Electrical"
See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Diagrams
[email protected]
167
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 495
Fig. 11 Windshield Washer Jet Heater
Wiper Motor

Wiper Switch
[email protected]
168
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 496
[email protected]
169
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 497
[email protected]
170
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 498
Fig. 41 Expansion Tank/Hose Routing
[email protected]
171
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 499
Fig. 40 Fuel Tank
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 500
Computers and Control Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Troubleshooting Hints For Electrical & Computer Problems

***UPDATED BY TSB #6106923582, JULY 1992
GENERAL INFORMATION:
As electronically controlled systems continue to be developed and introduced in BMW vehicles, the level of complexity and sophistication of these
systems has risen dramatically in the past ten years. This does not mean, however, that the diagnosis and repair of these systems is more difficult.
On the contrary, these systems are possibly easier to diagnose, if a systematic troubleshooting method is used.
The purpose of all electrical troubleshooting is to identify and correct a malfunction which has caused a customer to complain. However, before
repairs are attempted, the following steps should be taken:
VERIFY THE COMPLAINT
Whenever possible, the repairing technician should personally verify the complaint.
VERIFY THAT THE COMPLAINT IS A MALFUNCTION
If a customer does not fully understand a particular system, he or she may complain about an aspect of operation in that system that is normal (that
is, the system is operating as designed, and therefore not malfunctioning). An example of this would be a customer complaining of "rapid vibrations
in the brake pedal during a panic stop on wet pavement." While this is a customer complaint, if the vehicle is equipped with ABS this is not
necessarily a malfunction. Determine that the system is operating correctly or incorrectly before proceeding with troubleshooting.
Refer to DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION for a description of system operation, and to any related Technical Service Bulletins for changed
operation (for example, changes in General Module operation from MY 92 on).
Comparing the complaint to system operation in a known good vehicle is another acceptable means of verifying a malfunction.
CHECK FOR PREVIOUS REPAIRS
If a system had been working properly and now exhibits a malfunction, a review of the vehicle's repair history can provide significant insights into
the problem. The improper installation of accessories, or the installation of non-approved accessories, can have detrimental effects on a variety of
systems.
Once a malfunction has been verified, troubleshooting should be devoted to finding the cause of the problem, then correcting the fault; only if the
cause is positively identified can the vehicle be confidently released to the customer.
Remember that the vast majority of causes for complaint concerning electronically-controlled systems are not exotic electronic malfunctions; rather,
the cause is almost always a simple electrical fault, such as an open circuit, a short circuit (to B+ or B-), or excessive resistance (poor contact).
If the faulted system is equipped with self-diagnostics, the first step should be to call up any flash codes (for systems - without the diagnostic link)
or to read out the control module's fault memory (for systems with the diagnostic link). Read out and print the contents of all systems' fault
memories.
Refer to the appropriate testing procedures and examine the schematics of the system circuitry in CHASSIS ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS. If
several systems are faulted, common or shared circuits may provide a clue that will aid in more efficient diagnosis.
On systems which have no self diagnostic capabilities (or on any self-diagnostic systems which does not provide clear evidence of a fault location),
an examination of all circuits of the system should be performed. Installation of the appropriate adapter ("break-out box") between the control
module and harness will allow the technician to monitor the electrical activity at each pin of the control module.
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 501
Before any parts (such as a control module) are condemned as faulty, thorough investigation of all circuits connected to the control module should
be performed. (If a system has self-diagnostic capabilities, this should be done if the troubleshooting for a specific fault is inconclusive.)
All electronically controlled systems should be approached with one rule in mind:
A control module will not produce the desired output if one or more of its inputs is impaired.
Consider a standard 4-pin relay:
When switch (S1) closes, the contacts should close and battery voltage should appear at terminal 87.
If any one of the inputs is impaired or missing, the desired output will also be impaired or missing. Since all inputs must be within nominal values
at the control module (in this case, a relay), this is the point at which measurements are taken.
The same approach should be taken for all electronically controlled systems: verify that all inputs are present before replacing a control module. If a
control module is producing the proper output (in the above example, battery voltage at pin 87) and the load is not operated, it is obvious that the
load or the wiring between it and pin 87 is faulty. If all inputs are present, and no output is present at the control module, then and only then should
the control module be replaced.
In all cases, verify proper voltage level at all power inputs, and check all grounds by measuring voltage drop. Depending on the type of input, other
signals (e.g., A.C. voltage, frequency, etc.) may have to be verified. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic manual for this information.
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 502
ALWAYS "CHECK THE BASICS":

Look for such obvious problems as battery state of charge, loose battery cables, defective fuses, etc. Very few things are as discouraging as
troubleshooting alternator noise in a sound system for four hours, only to discover that a partially discharged battery was causing increased
alternator current and ripple.
When reading the fault memory of a control module with the diagnostic link, remember that the message "no faults found" simply means that all
monitored circuits are intact and within limits. Some circuits cannot be monitored for faults; for example, it is "okay" for the stop light switch to be
either open or closed as far as the control module is concerned - check the switch operation by monitoring its status.
INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
Intermittent electrical problems can be difficult to diagnose. Gather as much information as possible from the customer concerning the conditions
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 503
under which the problem occurs - this may provide valuable diagnostic clues.
When trying to locate an intermittent open or short in a circuit, attach the meter to the circuit (according to the test being performed) and flex, twist,
pull and shake the harness or wire in question.
UNAPPROVED ACCESSORIES
If unapproved accessories are installed, they should be disconnected electrically from the vehicle's original harnesses - if they are not, voltage and
resistance measurements may be erroneous. Such unapproved accessories may in fact be the cause of the malfunction being diagnosed.
DOCUMENTATION
Always write down all of your measurements. If Customer Service is contacted, the Technical Specialists must have all of this
information.
Please follow these procedures whenever troubleshooting electrical problems. A systematic, thorough approach to troubleshooting is one of the
easiest ways to ensure customer satisfaction, by finding and repairing electrical problems quickly and correctly.
Troubleshooting Procedures
1. VERIFY THE PROBLEM
Operate the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the complaint. Note the symptoms of the inoperative circuit.
2. ANALYZE THE PROBLEM
Refer to the schematic diagrams in CHASSIS ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the
current path(s) from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Based on the symptoms noted in step 1 and an understanding of
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible causes of the problem.
3. ISOLATE THE PROBLEM
Make circuit tests to prove or disprove the preliminary diagnosis made in step 2. A logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. REPAIR THE PROBLEM
Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair using the proper tools and safe procedures.
5. CHECK THE PROBLEM
Operate the circuit to check for satisfactory circuit operation. Good repair practice calls for rechecking all circuits that have been worked on.
Troubleshooting Tests
Voltage Test
VOLTAGE TEST
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 504
This test measures voltage in a circuit. By taking measurements at several points (terminals or connectors) along the circuit, you can isolate the
problem.
To take a voltage measurement, connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery's negative terminal or any other known good ground.
Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the point you want to test. The voltmeter will measure the voltage present in the circuit.
Voltage Drop Test
VOLTAGE DROP TEST
Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a
problem.
To test for voltage drop, connect the voltmeter leads to connectors at opposite ends of the circuit's suspected problem area. The positive lead
should be connected to the circuit connector closest to the power source. The voltmeter will show the voltage drop between the two points. Any
switches in the circuit should be ON during this test.
Continuity Test
CONTINUITY TEST
Before performing a continuity test, disconnect the car's battery. Zero the ohmmeter by holder the test leads together and setting the meter to zero.
Isolate the circuit to be tested. Connect the ohmmeter leads to opposite ends of the circuit's suspected problem area. The ohmmeter will show the
resistance across the circuit. Continuity can also be tested with a self-powered test light.
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 505
CAUTION: DO NOT use an ohmmeter or self-powered test light on solid state or computer related circuits. The voltage that an ohmmeter/test
light applies to a circuit could damage these components.
SHORT TEST USING A VOLTMETER
To locate a wiring short to ground, remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Connect the voltmeter leads to the fuse terminals. The positive
lead should be connected to the terminal closest to the power source.
Starting near the power source, move the wire harness back and forth while watching the voltmeter. If the voltmeter shows a reading while moving
a particular section of the harness, the harness has a short to ground.
SHORT TEST USING AN OHMMETER
Disconnect the battery. Zero the ohmmeter by holder the test leads together and setting the meter to zero. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect
the load. Connect the ohmmeter leads to the fuse terminals.
Starting near the power source, move the wire harness back and forth while watching the ohmmeter. If the ohmmeter shows a low or no resistance
reading while moving a particular section of the harness, the harness has a short to ground.
[email protected]
7
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 506
Current Test Using Ammeter
CURRENT TEST USING AN AMMETER
To measure the current in a circuit, connect the ammeter leads to the connectors or terminals in SERIES with the circuit. The ammeter will show
the current through the circuit.
Troubleshooting Tools
Isolating electrical problems requires the use of a voltmeter, an ohmmeter, and sometimes an ammeter. A voltmeter measures voltage at selected
points in a circuit. An ohmmeter measures a circuit's resistance to current flow. An ammeter measures the current flow through a circuit.
When using an ohmmeter, disconnect the battery. Battery voltage will cause the ohmmeter to give false resistance readings.
CAUTION: DO NOT use an ohmmeter on solid state or computer related circuits. The voltage that an ohmmeter applies to a circuit could damage
these components.
Fused Jumper Wire
FUSED JUMPER WIRE
A jumper wire is made up from an in-line fuse holder and a set of test leads. The fuse holder should contain a five amp fuse. Use the fused jumper
wire for bypassing open circuits. Do NOT use a jumper across high load circuits, such as electric motors.
General Information
All troubleshooting must begin by "CHECKING THE BASICS". Certain basic faults can be undetectable by the self-diagnostic system of the
DME control unit and in some cases can actually interfere with the self-checking and fault memory operation.
Low battery voltage, for example, can cause erroneous faults to set in control unit fault memories or can cause a system to go "Fail Safe" without
setting a fault in memory. Also, testing procedures done on a running engine will cause malfunctions to be stored that were caused by a simulation
or a disconnected circuit. On the other hand, system fault memories are cleared whenever the control unit or the battery is disconnected. Therefore,
all fault memories should be read prior to any vehicle power interruption or troubleshooting. This will ensure that the technician can differentiate
between actual malfunctions and "simulated malfunctions."
After testing is completed, the malfunction memory of the DME control unit(s) must be cleared.
Prior to any teardown, repair or component replacement, the following steps should always be considered.
COMPLAINT VERIFICATION
Whenever possible the repairing technician should personally verify the complaint. Having experienced the malfunction, the technician is less
likely to try to repair non-existent faults.
MALFUNCTION VERIFICATION
[email protected]
8
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 507
Today's sophisticated automotive systems are easily misunderstood, which can lead to repairs that attempt to force a particular system to perform in
a way that it was never intended to operate. Therefore, the troubleshooting technician should compare the system operation to the nominal system
operation as described in the section DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION. Furthermore, the technician is also encouraged to compare the
problem vehicle system operation with a known good vehicle.
PREVIOUS REPAIRS
The vehicle repair history can provide explanations to unusual complaints which seem to elude normal troubleshooting attempts. Incorrect
components or unapproved repairs can have subtle influences on seemingly unrelated systems.
NOTE: Always inquire about accident history. Vehicles with a history of accident damage and repair, may be exhibit very unusual
symptoms.
BATTERY STATE OF CHARGE
Batteries in a state of partial discharge can have a dramatic effect on DME control units and related components.
POSITIVE BATTERY CABLE INTEGRITY
All B+ connections must be in perfect condition for trouble-free electronic system operation. Refer to ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC
DIAGRAMS for B+ interconnects.
FUSIBLE LINK INTEGRITY
Fusible links are employed to prevent possible damage to electrical components and wiring harnesses. These links and their connections must be
without dynamic resistance. Dynamic resistance can only be checked using the voltage drop method of testing.
NEGATIVE GROUND CONNECTIONS
As all electrical circuits are a circle, all B- connections must also be checked and verified to be in perfect condition. A poor "common" ground point
will cause seemingly unrelated systems to influence one another. High current systems which encounter a poor "common" ground can back feed
through other electrical systems causing unusual operation and perhaps inexplicable component failure. As with the B+ side of the electrical
system, the ground side should be checked dynamically using the voltage drop technique.
POWER TRAIN CABLE ATTACHMENTS
Metal cables attached to the engine or transmission which appear overheated and/or discolored indicate the need to thoroughly test all ground
connections.
POWER SUPPLY RELAYS
Fuel pump and DME main relays as well as their plug connections can be a source of intermittent operation which will not set a fault in the DME
fault memory.
CRANKSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Monolithic sensors should be checked statically and dynamically. Physical mounting and condition of the sensor and segment wheel must be
assured.
HIGH TENSION COIL AND SECONDARY COMPONENTS WIRING
The secondary ignition system should be checked visibly as well as with a suitable engine analyzer and scope. All components should be examined
for tight connections and freedom from carbon tracking, moisture and corrosion.
FUEL DELIVERY AND CIS-E PRESSURE
Fuel delivery must begin at once when cranking and the pressure in the fuel system must be within specifications. Fuel pressure retention must be
maintained between the fuel pump outlet and the pressure regulator after engine shutdown.
GENERAL ENGINE CONDITION
Verify that the engine meets minimum mechanical requirements. Low compression, vacuum leaks, worn valve train, restricted exhaust etc. must be
corrected.
VALVE CLEARANCE AND SPARK PLUGS
These two service items, if out of specification, can significantly impair engine performance. Valve clearance adjustment procedures should be
strictly observed. Spark plug type, condition and gap must verified according to specification.
[email protected]
9
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 508
AIR/FUEL RATIO
When troubleshooting idle quality or driveability complaints, it is necessary to consider the following:
^ INJECTOR SPRAY PATTERN

^ PRESENCE OF UNMETERED AIR LEAKS
^ EVAPORATIVE PURGE SYSTEM
^ EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL DILUTION
^ SUBSTANDARD FUEL OR UNAPPROVED ADDITIVES
^ CARBON BUILD-UP
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 509
A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ): Testing and Inspection
With AST 5500

*** FOR UPDATED INFORMATION NOT INCLUDED HERE, REFER TO TSB# 72 01 90 (3008) DATED JANUARY 1990 ***
Flash Codes
TROUBLE CODE TABLE

Three digit numeric flash codes are converted to two digit numeric trouble codes with description and possible remedy. After code(s) have
been identified proceed to Trouble Code Diagnosis. See: Manufacturer Code Charts/With AST 5500
NOTE: Applicable to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) using Siemens control module only. Refer to Application and ID, See:
Restraints and Safety Systems/Air Bag Systems/Application and ID
Cipro Control Module

TROUBLE CODE TABLE
Three digit numeric flash codes are converted to alphabetical trouble codes below. After code(s) have been identified proceed to Trouble
Code Diagnosis. See: Manufacturer Code Charts/With BMW or BMW Compatible Equipment/Cipro Control Module
1-1-1 = B
1-1-2 = A
1-4-1 = H
1-4-2 = G
2-1-1 = K
2-1-2 = J
2-2-1 = M
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 510
2-2-2 = L
2-3-1 = O
2-3-2 = N
2-4-1 = Q
2-4-2 = P
3-1-1 = S
3-1-2 = R
3-2-1 = U
3-2-2 = T
3-3-1 = W
3-3-2 = V
3-4-1 = Y
Siemens Control Module

*** THIS ARTICLE REFLECTS CHANGES MADE BY TSB# 72 01 90 (3008), DATED JANUARY 1990 ***
Three digit numeric flash codes are converted to two digit numeric trouble codes below. After code(s) have been identified proceed to Trouble
Code Diagnosis. See: Manufacturer Code Charts/With BMW or BMW Compatible Equipment/Siemens Control Module
1-1-1 = 07
1-1-3 = 03
1-1-4 = 18
1-2-1 = 08
1-2-4 = 05
1-3-1 = 13
1-3-2 = 01
1-3-4 = 20
1-4-3 = 04
2-1-1 = 08
2-1-4 = 02
2-2-1 = 11
2-2-4 = 06
2-3-1 = 15
2-3-4 = 20
2-4-1 = 02
2-4-2 = 03
3-1-1 = 10
3-1-4 = 19
3-2-1 = 13
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 511
3-2-2 = 01
3-2-3 = 04
3-2-4 = 19
3-3-1 = 13
3-3-2 = 03
3-3-4 = 20
3-4-1 = None
4-1-4 = 11
4-1-3 = 03
4-1-4 = 19
4-2-1 = 15
4-3-1 = 15
4-3-4 = 20
4-4-1 = None
4-4-3 = 17
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 512
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 513
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 514
[email protected]
7
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 515
[email protected]
8
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 516
[email protected]
9
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 517
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 518
Technical Service Bulletins
All Technical Service Bulletins:

Number Date Name
611512 Apr 12 Electrical - Updated Battery Registration Procedure
090509 Mar 12 Computers/Controls - ISTA/P Programming/Coding Info.
090707 Mar 12 Computers, Controls - Programming VS Veh. Data Status
110109 Mar 12 Engine - CPO Engine Inspection Information
512909 Feb 12 Body - Windshield Urethane Sealant Information
660211 Feb 12 Keyless Sys. - Remote Control And Comfort Access Inop.
611808 Jan 12 Electrical - Battery Maintenance Requirement Information
110511 Dec 11 Engine - Removal/Installation Tips
240511 Dec 11 A/T - Failures Due To Incorrect Installation
620195 Nov 11 Instruments - Odometer Reading Can't Be Recovered
540111 Oct 11 Body - Test Plans For Panoramic Roof
160107 Sep 11 Emissions System - Evaporative System Leak Testing
110308 Aug 11 Emissions - Pressure Cont. Crankcase Ventilation Info.
070211 Jul 11 Compuetrs/Controls - Recommended Diagnostic Procedures
070111 May 11 Computers - ISTA Diagnosis On Vehicles Prior To E46
130106 May 11 Fuel System - Alcohol Fuel Blend Usage
320511 May 11 Steering - Steering Wheel Leather Peeling From The Rear
161110 Apr 11 Fuel System - Fuel Cap Tether Is Broken Or Lost
130510 Apr 11 Fuel System - High Alcohol Fuel Detection
170106 Apr 11 Cooling System - Information on Coolant Refilling
110609 Jan 11 Engine - Crankshaft Seal/Bedplate Sealing Information
610800 Dec 10 Electrical System - Parasitic Draw Measurement
210110 Nov 10 M/T - Dual Mass Flywheel Diagnostic Criteria
360110 Nov 10 Wheel/Tires - New Style Tire Valves
514010 Nov 10 Interior - Proper Installation Of Carpet Floor Mats
661010 Oct 10 Accessories - Integrated Univ. Remote Control Diag. Tips
840410 Oct 10 Cell Phone - Bluetooth Compatibility Information
640910 Sep 10 A/C - Revised Refrigerant/Compressor Oil Reuse Statement
130506 Aug 10 Fuel System - BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus Info.
652403 Aug 10 Restraint System - Passenger Airbag Status Lamp Info.
090409 May 10 Computers/Control - Loading/Activation Of Enabling Codes
642105 May 10 A/C - Compressor Noise Troubleshooting
170110 Mar 10 Cooling System - Proper Cooling System Service Procedure
653209 Nov 09 Audio System - Interference/Noise From Door Speakers
630408 Nov 09 Lighting - Headlamp Condensation Diagnosis
340409 Oct 09 Brakes - Brake Rotor Removal Procedures/Precautions
611109 Jun 09 Electrical - Battery Charging And Testing Procedure
610109 Mar 09 Wipers/Washers - Windshield Washer Malfunctions
513508 Jan 09 Body - Windshield Damage Analysis
640508 Oct 08 A/C - Control Assembly Damage Information
990108 Sep 08 Paint - Environmental/Industrial Fallout Repair
321008 Aug 08 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Information
650104 Jul 08 Audio System - AM/FM Radio Reception Problems
330308 Apr 08 Drivetrain - Differential Cover Sealant
650599 Feb 08 Audio System - Retrieving Radio Security Codes
654207 Jan 08 Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly
410104 Oct 07 Body/Frame - Structural Repair Requirements
160107 Aug 07 Emissions - Evaporative Emissions System Testing
610107 Apr 07 Electrical - Wiring Harness Repair Information
621506 Dec 06 Instruments - SIA Function Not Available
130706 Nov 06 Fuel System - Fuel Quality and Additive Information
720603 Nov 06 Restraints - Passenger Air Bag Status Lamp Information
042706 Oct 06 Battery - Charging Voltage Change
130206 Sep 06 Fuel System - TOP TIER Gasoline Usage Recommendations
512106 Sep 06 Body - Glass Repair Recommendations/Service Kit
110406 Jun 06 A/T, M/T - Repair Precautions to Prevent Damage
651006 May 06 Audio System - Erratic/Inoperative CD Player
130306 May 06 Fuel System - Damage Caused By Fuel Contaminants
360406 Apr 06 Tires - Nitrogen Usage Recommendations
640402 Feb 06 A/C Replacement Compressor Information Insert
410104R Apr 05 Body - Structural Repair Requirements
640403 Oct 04 A/C - Musty Odors From Heater and A/C Systems
320201 Jul 01 Steering Gear - Replacement Due to Accident Damage
340201 Mar 01 Brake Caliper - Lubrication
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 519

Number Date Name
640101 Jan 01 A/C System - Musty Odors

610500 Jul 00 Electrical Connnectors - Stabilant 22A Contact Enhancer
170493 Mar 00 Recall - Heater Core Cracking Additional Notice
040800 Feb 00 Tools - New Special Tool CD
002292 Jan 00 Spark Plug/Engine Oil Capacity Reference Chart
000194 Jan 00 Campaign/Recall - Codes Index
040899 Jun 99 New Self Adjusting Clutch Clamping Fixture
001098 May 99 Electrical Trouble Shooting Manuals - Available on CD
040699 Mar 99 Electrical Connector Kit 4 - Supplement
040199 Mar 99 Windshield - Replacement Tools
230199 Feb 99 M/T - Difficult to Shift, Diagnostic Tips
510998 Oct 98 Windows/Glass - New Adhesive Kit
NHTSA98V178000 Aug 98 Recall 98V178000: Coolant Cap/Overflow
080398 Aug 98 MoDic III(R) - Questions and Answers
080198 Jul 98 MoDic III(R) - System Description/Operation
340298 Apr 98 ABS/ASC - Warning Lights On During Dynamometer Test
040298 Mar 98 Electrical Repair Kit IV - Additional Connectors
070198 Mar 98 DIS Schematic Information
080596 Jan 98 Updated MoDic(R) Diagnostic Software - D12.0
080396 Jan 98 Updated MoDic(R) Software - ZCS Coding
841397 Dec 97 Motorola Mobile Phones - Replacement Parts
041697 Nov 97 New BMW Special Tools..
041597 Nov 97 New BMW Special Tools.
080396 Oct 97 Updated MoDic(R) Software - C11.0 ZCS Coding
080496 Oct 97 Updated MoDic(R) Software - P11.0 Programming
640993 Aug 97 A/C - Replacement of Receiver Dryers: R12/R134a
001396 Aug 97 Microfiche Update - All Models
100396 Aug 97 TIS Software Update - 07/97
100396 Jun 97 TIS - Software Update
000897 May 97 Label for Service Action or Recall Campaign (#201-220)
0109954318 Apr 97 Diagnostic Time - Warranty Reimbursement
010397 Apr 97 Modified Vehicles - Warranty Exclusion
080396 Feb 97 Updated MoDic(R) Software - C9.0 ZCS Coding
080496 Feb 97 Updated MoDic(R) Software - P9.0 Programming
100396 Feb 97 TIS - Software Update 12/96
0101943986 Dec 96 Paint and Paint Repairs - Warranty Coverage
610788 Dec 96 Battery - Maintenance System
004089 Nov 96 Microfiche - Service Information Bulletins List
010396 Oct 96 Service/Warranty - Information Statement
080496 Oct 96 Updated MoDic(R) Software - P8.0 Programming
010696 Oct 96 Certified Pre-Owned BMW Vehicle Program
002196 Oct 96 Service Action/Recall Campaign 181- 200 - Labels
720696 Sep 96 Restraint System - Transportation of Infants/Children
640596 Sep 96 A/C - Retrofiting R-12 Air Conditioning with R-134a
010290 Sep 96 Warranty Defect Code Microfiche - Revision
100396 Sep 96 TIS - Software Updated
651396 Aug 96 Cellular Phone Antenna - Installation
042796 Aug 96 Wheels/Tires - New Wheel Weight Tools
070396 Aug 96 DIS Maintenance and Operation
990296 Jul 96 Paint - Approved Materials
042196 Jul 96 Special Tools - New Torque Angle Indicator
120195 May 96 Electrical - 2 and 3 Pin Plug Connector Seal Information
620296 May 96 Speedometer - Maximum Permissible Error
650296 Apr 96 Audio - 6-Disc Alpine CD Changer Troubleshooting Guide
041896 Apr 96 Windshield - Bonding Adhesive Cutter
080396 Apr 96 Undefined MoDic(R) Software
720396 Apr 96 Safety Belts - Child Restraint Feature
640695 Apr 96 A/C System - Warranty Claim Noise Questionnaire
041196 Apr 96 New Environmentally Safe Parts Washer
041696 Mar 96 Special Tool - Clutch Disc Wear Gauge
310193 Mar 96 Suspension - Replacement of Shock Absorbers
100396 Mar 96 TIS Software Update
360296 Feb 96 Wheel - Size/Configuration
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 520

Number Date Name
320196 Feb 96 P/S - Identification and Diagnosis

0026903100 Jan 96 Engine Repair Manual - Microfiche Update
1108944139 Dec 95 Engine - Will Not Start In Cold Weather
1203933824 Nov 95 Starter - Motor Failures, Binding/Sticking Ignition
1111903149 Aug 95 Engine Oil Capacities - All Current Models
1203851085 Aug 95 Ignition - Spark Plug Application Chart
3301954202 Jun 95 Campaign - Rear Wheel Hub Improper Machining
IDC1017957 Jun 95 Service Information - Updated TIS Software
IDC002 Apr 95 DIS tester Software - Update
0040891999 Apr 95 Service Information - Microfiche/Diskette Bulletins
0104954209 Apr 95 Dealer Communications System - Enhancements
0428944128 Mar 95 New Special Tool - MoDic(R) Replacement Cable
0405954166 Mar 95 Tools - Infrared Transmission Device (IR)
0404954155 Feb 95 Electrical Connector Kit Supplement
IDC1014 Feb 95 MoDic(R) - Updated Software V5.1
IDC1015 Feb 95 MoDic(R) - Software Update V12.0
0403954154 Feb 95 Portable Telephone - Special Tool
0203954170 Feb 95 Winter Tire - Recommendations Brochure
0202954164 Feb 95 Winter Tires - Recommendations Brochure
IDC024 Jan 95 MoDiC(R) - Diagnostic Software Update
4101954150 Jan 95 Body - Structural Adhesives
IDC023 Jan 95 Service Manual - Updated CD for TIS
7202913338 Dec 94 SRS - Diagnostic Cables
6504944049 Oct 94 Cellular Phone - CMT 2000VR Number Memory
5106944039 Sep 94 BMW Individual Vehicles
0404943981 Sep 94 Special Tools - Simulator Tool For Bosch Oxygen Sensors
6103944032 Aug 94 Brake Light Switch - Revised
3202944041 Aug 94 Starting - Ignition Key Cutting Services Caution
1303923589 Jul 94 Fuel - Engine Compartment Return Fuel Hoses
3301903168 Jul 94 Rear Axle - List of Ratios Updated
3402933855 Jul 94 Brakes - Steering Wheel/Body Vibration
7202933794 May 94 SRS - Collision Repair Guidelines
6411933929 May 94 A/C - Oil Charge Procedure for R12 and R134a
2101943953 Jan 94 Clutch - Release Bearing With Plastic Sliding Sleeve
6105933895 Nov 93 Battery - Jump Starting the Vehicle Is Not Recommended
ATRATB191 Oct 93 A/T - Failsafe Modes
5109933856 Sep 93 Central Locking System - Failure
1111903149 Sep 93 Engine - Oil Capacities and Oil Dipstick Part Numbers
1801933846 Aug 93 Emissions - Rotten Egg Smell From Exhaust
1302903009 Aug 93 ECM - Codes and Hardware Numbers
3203933839 Jul 93 Steering - Microfiche Error Update
0010933771 Jun 93 Recall - Coolant System Overheating
7204933822 Jun 93 SRS (Air Bag System) - Checking
7203933820 Jun 93 SRS - Deployment Reports
0213933804 May 93 A/T 4HP22/4HP22EH - Overhaul Kit Availability
1203851085 Apr 93 Ignition - Spark Plug Application
6401903042 Mar 93 A/C System - Fill Capacity and Information
5101933766 Mar 93 Interior Vinyl Trim - Shrinks/Pulls Loose
3405923692 Mar 93 Brakes - Diagnostic Capability of Slip Control Systems
0433923693 Mar 93 Tools - ABS/ASC Diagnostic Tool
6204891913 Mar 93 Service Intervall Indicator II - Installation
0403933739 Mar 93 Motorola Telephone Diagnostic Tool Kit - Usage
6501933727 Mar 93 Cellular Phone Antenna - Whistle
NHTSA93V015000 Feb 93 Recall 93V015000: Cooling System Pressure
6108891896 Jan 93 Windshield Wiper - Chatter, Adjustment Tool Modification
0224923665 Dec 92 Audiovox Cellular Telephone - Kit Availability
6421923695 Nov 92 A/C System - Refrigerant Capacity Information
1111903149 Nov 92 Engine - Oil Capacities Chart Error
0432923688 Nov 92 New Tool - Accumulator Wrench
0426923644 Oct 92 New A/C Leak Detection Equipment
0020913302R Oct 92 A/C - Vermont CFC Legislation
6413923646 Oct 92 A/C - Nominal System Pressures R12/R134A
ATRATB132 Sep 92 A/T - Intermittent Electrical Problems
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 521

Number Date Name
7201923633 Sep 92 Airbag Ignitor Circuit - Resistance Testing

1701923608 Aug 92 Cooling System - Coolant Leak Near Expansion Tank
6106923582 Jul 92 Electrical/Electronic Systems - Troubleshooting Hints
6212913421 Jun 92 Fuel Gauge - Inaccurate Fuel Tank Level
IDC0089120 May 92 MoDic(R) - Current Diagnostic and Coding Software
IDC001928 May 92 MoDic(R) System - Undefined Software Message
6112913391 May 92 Hybrid Battery (65 A/H) - Availability
0414923562 May 92 Various New Special Tools
IDC0029215 Apr 92 MoDic(R) - Updated Software
5402903022 Mar 92 Convertible Top - Replacement Parts
1111903149 Mar 92 Engine - Oil Capacities
3301903168 Mar 92 Rear Axle - Ratios
1203851085 Mar 92 Ignition - Spark Plug Application Charts
1102923491 Feb 92 Engine - Oil Recommendations
6102923493 Feb 92 Electrical System - Non Approved Aftermarket Accessories
3401923490 Feb 92 Brakes - ABS, ASC, and ASC + T Malfunctions
7203891835 Feb 92 Air Bag System - Handling of Pyrotechnic Devices
3602923512 Feb 92 Wheels - Fastening Bolts
1103923500 Feb 92 Intake and Vacuum System - Leak Detector
6411913438 Feb 92 A/C - Repair Instructions Coming On Microfiche
0202923479 Jan 92 A/C - Freon (R) R12 Recycling Poster
0403923481 Jan 92 Seat Rail - New Special Tool
0430913454 Jan 92 MoDic(R) - Loss of Program
6512913384 Jan 92 Radio - AM Interference From Interior Lights/Accessories
2405923520 Jan 92 A/T - Cooler Flushing and Equipment
1101923484 Jan 92 Engine - Hydraulic Lock
6215913452 Dec 91 Instrument Cluster - Cannot Be Coded With MoDic
6210913399 Dec 91 Oil Service Indicator - Resetting
6508903184 Dec 91 Alpine/Pioneer CD Player - Mounting Brackets
2404913240 Dec 91 A/T - Diagnostic Strategy
0429913446 Dec 91 Tools - SRS Diagnostics Cable Adapter
2410913428 Nov 91 A/T - Slips/Engine Races When Upshifting From 3rd Gear
ATRATB078 Nov 91 A/T - How To Use A Pressure Gauge
6113913401 Nov 91 Windshield Wipers - Erratic Operation
6307913425 Nov 91 Headlights - Condensation/Misting
7203913352 Oct 91 Safety Belt Tensioner - Replacement
0426913400 Oct 91 Speicial Tools - Test Cables
0416913317 Oct 91 New Special Tools - Adapter Cables
0422891946 Oct 91 SRS Control Module - Reset/Recall Tool
6510913345 Sep 91 Cassette Player - Howling, Dull Bass/Reduced Treble
6207913357 Sep 91 Tools - Service Indicator Resetting and Adapter
6406913329 Sep 91 A/C Compressor - Warranty Return Procedure
6410903180 Aug 91 A/C - Diagnosing Compressor Noise
1701881743 Jul 91 Cooling System - New Antifreeze
3202913263 May 91 Alignment - Checking and Setting Revisions
1201913202 May 91 Ignition Timing Angle - Diagnostic Readout
24079132156 May 91 A/T - Scope of Repairs Policy
0409903090 May 91 Tools - Torque Converter Front Radial Oil Seal Installer
6502913223 Apr 91 Audio - Static Noise When Driving Over Bumps
6503913238 Apr 91 Audio - CD Changer/Radio Compatibility
6103913244 Apr 91 Battery - Acid ( Electrolyte) Precautions
2403913235 Apr 91 A/T - Shift Solenoid Locations
3601913224 Apr 91 Tires - Flat Tire Inflators That Contain Hazardous Gases
1203851085 Apr 91 1203851085 - 04/01/91 Adds Information to 1990/10/01
0404913194 Apr 91 MoDic(R) - Sporadic Memory Failure
5101913216 Mar 91 Electric Window Motor - Diagnostic Procedure
1102913219 Mar 91 Exhaust Manifold Studs - Service Precautions
0006913208 Mar 91 Mobile Diagnostic Computer Software - Update
9901903125 Jan 91 Engine/Luggage Compartment - Clear Coating Discontinued
0403913190 Jan 91 Relay - Remote Test Kit
0401913187 Jan 91 Special Tools - Automatic Tool Shipment Program
IV29 Jan 91 Cellular Telephone - Introduction
6505903132 Jan 91 6505903132 Adds Information to 1990/10/01
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 522

Number Date Name
6101903019 Jan 91 Battery - Additional Electrolyte Level Checks

6417881776 Jan 91 A/C - Windows Fogging Up
5102903183 Dec 90 Electrochromic Mirror - Troubleshooting
0040891999 Dec 90 Service Information - Index Program
1107903117 Nov 90 Throttle Housing Gasket - Sealing Instruction
II24 Nov 90 A/T - ZF Cross Reference Part Numbers
I34901101 Nov 90 Non-Approved Accessories - May Cause Malfunctions
0417903155 Nov 90 Tools - Fuel Injection Leakage Tester
3602903150 Nov 90 Tires - Recommended Snow Tire/Wheel Combinations
1202903115 Nov 90 Distributor Cap and Rotor - New Design
3202903124 Oct 90 Alignment - Specifications and Microfiche Correction
6503903112 Oct 90 Audio - Electric Antenna Mast Replacement Tool Tip
ATRATB028 Oct 90 A/T - Engine Vacuum Testing
0412903103 Oct 90 A/T - THM-R1 Special Tools
0410903099 Oct 90 MoDic(R) - Has Become A Mandatory Tool
1308903096 Oct 90 Starting - Troubleshooting Long Cranking Times
6505903132 Oct 90 Alpine/Pioneer Radios/CD Changers - Description
6504903121 Oct 90 Cruise Control - Troubleshooting
0408903079 Oct 90 Special Tools - New Coil Spring Compressor
1203851085 Oct 90 Ignition - Spark Plug Applications
3405903118 Oct 90 Brakes - Body Vibration/Steering Wheel
1102842033 Oct 90 Engine - Identification
0003902108 Oct 90 New Systems Descriptions
0414903114 Sep 90 Tools - New 88 Pin Universal Adapter
6106903107 Sep 90 Horns - Activated by Themselves
2403903109 Sep 90 A/T - Correct Shift Cable Adjustment
IV78 Aug 90 Radios/CD Changers - Compatibility Chart
2402903098 Aug 90 A/T - Primary Oil Pump Housing Production Change
I23900801 Aug 90 Embossing Tools - For Recall Campaigns
0015891895 Jul 90 Service Tester - Revised and Expanded Software
1702903086 Jul 90 Cooling System - Radiator/Knuckle Saver
0023903087 Jul 90 Operating Fluids Specifications - Update
0407903075 Jun 90 A/C - Recycling Freon(R) R12
6104903082 Jun 90 Horn Contact - Squeaks
ATRATB9002006 Feb 90 A/T - Choosing the Right ATF
7201903008 Jan 90 SRS Flash Codes - Manual Revision
ATRATB8930 Oct 89 A/T - Math Part II
2405891945 Sep 89 A/T - Dipstick Production Change, No Retrofit
ATRATB8927 Sep 89 A/T - Twenty Steps To Successful Repairs
ATRATB8923 Aug 89 A/T - Math Formulas Part I
0417891897 Jul 89 Special Tools - Coolant Tank Adaptor
0414891873 Jun 89 Tools - Cooling/Heating Gun
0415891874 Jun 89 Tool Tips Directory
3401891850 May 89 Brakes - ABS Sensor Lead Faults/Repairs/Parts
0412891853 Apr 89 Special Tools - Seat Belt Pliers
0408891843 Mar 89 Tools - Seal Pliers For Speedometer Sender
1203891838 Mar 89 Engine - High Pressure Steam Cleaning Warning
0421881707 Dec 88 BMW Special Tools
1105881742 Nov 88 Flywheel and Attaching Hardware - Change
0423881722 Oct 88 Tools - Rivet Pliers For Plastic Rivets
0416881672 Jul 88 Repair Of Simulator Adaptor Cables
5203881587 Jun 88 Seats - Revised Upholstery Fastening Clips Available
3602881627 Jun 88 Wheels - Balancing Tips and Procedures
0432871553 May 88 Tools - Seat Pivot Pin Installer/Remover
0408881612 Mar 88 Special Tool - Lateral Runout/Brake Rotor Adapter
0431871550 Feb 88 Special Tools - Transmission Alignment Gauge
3402881585 Feb 88 Brakes - New Disc Checking Tools
ATRATB8754 Sep 87 A/T - Front Bushing Wear
ATRATB8748 Aug 87 A/T - Slipping or No-Shift/Metal Sealing Rings
[email protected]
1
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 523
Vehicle: All Technical Service Bulletins
Technical Service Bulletin # 611512 Date: 120401
Electrical - Updated Battery Registration Procedure

SI B61 15 12
General Electrical Systems
April 2012
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Updated Battery Registration Procedure
MODEL
All
SITUATION
With the release of ISTA (Integrated Service Technical Application) D2.30.6 or later, an updated battery registration test plan has been introduced.
The test plan allows the technician to enter a 12-digit "Data Code Matrix" or 6-digit "Supplier Number" that is easily read off the new battery. This
will allow for tracking of the new battery in the vehicle, which will improve quality control of replacement batteries.
PROCEDURE
In order to obtain the proper numbers required by the test plan, before installing the replacement battery, note the 12-digit "Data Code Matrix" or
6-digit "Supplier Number" from the new battery. These numbers can be found on top of the battery. The next 2 steps will provide examples of the
numbers.
1. The 12-digit "Data Code Matrix" shown in this example is "11B336BE2015" and is a combination of numbers and letters.
Note:
Not all replacement batteries have this code. If this is the case, use the 6-digit code identified in step 2.
2. The 6-digit "Supplier Number" shown in this example is "165902". If this number is entered in the test plan, you also need the numbers
stamped on top of the negative post of the battery, for example, "46 11."
3. After the numbers have been obtained and the battery is installed in the vehicle, start diagnosis using ISTA D2.30.6 or later.
4. Select "Identification / Vehicle selection / Read out vehicle data / Start identification." A vehicle test is not necessary in order to perform
[email protected]
2
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 524
battery registration.
5. Select "Activities / Service function / 03 Body / Power supply / Register battery change / Start search."
6. Select the test plan "AS6120_WECHSEL - Register battery replacement."
7. Once the test plan starts, select "Register battery replacement."
8. The test plan reads out the current battery that is registered in the vehicle. Select the appropriate entry that applies to the replacement battery:
^ "Enter battery replacement: same capacity"
^ "Enter battery replacement: higher/lower capacity"
^ "Enter battery replacement: Change from normal lead-acid battery to AGM battery"
9. The test plan then asks the question, "Is there a data matrix code on the label of the newly installed battery?"
^ Select "Yes" if the 12-digit code displayed in step 1 is present. After yes is selected. proceed to step 10.
^ Select "No" if the 6-digit code displayed in step 2 is present. After no is selected, proceed to step 11.
Note:
Most replacement batteries only have the 6-digit code on the new battery.
10. The test plan prompts to "Enter second line of data matrix code as described (Note! Upper and lower case sensitive)." Enter the 12-digit code
recorded from the new battery in step 1 with no spaces, for example, "11B336BE2015." Select "Next" when finished. The new battery is
registered in the vehicle and the test plan can be completed. You are finished.
11. This step should only be performed if "No" was selected in step 9. The test plan prompts to "Enter 6-digit supplier number as described."
Enter the 6-digit code recorded from the new battery in step 2, for example, "165902." Select "Next" and proceed to the next step.
12. The test plan prompts to "Enter number of polarity mark without spaces." Enter the 4 digits that were recorded in step 2 from the top of the
negative battery post, for example "4611." Select "Next" when finished. The new battery is registered in the vehicle and the test plan can be
completed. You are finished. Technical Service Bulletin # 110109 Date: 120301
Engine - CPO Engine Inspection Information

SI B11 01 09
Engine
Technical Service
March 2012
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B11 01 09 dated March 2011.
[NEW] designates changes to this revision
SUBJECT
CPO Inspection Guidelines: Engine Inspection on Vehicles with Extended ("Overdue") Oil Service Intervals
MODEL All
SITUATION
During the CPO inspection process, vehicles with a questionable service history may require further consideration prior to continuing with the CPO
inspection.
Such vehicles will fall into the category of "TSE must approve" when qualifying for the CPO Program, using the "CPO Service Guidelines -
Maintenance Tables" document (copy is attached). This Service Information bulletin provides the engine inspection procedure for vehicles with an
extended ("overdue") service history.
In general, the high quality synthetic oils used in BMW engines provide sufficient protection against oxidation, nitration and thermal breakdown,
even in situations when the regular service maintenance was extended ("overdue"), due to the customers neglect.
However, certain external conditions (mainly city driving style and/or high engine loads; poor fuel quality; extreme ambient temperatures),
combined with excessively long oil service intervals, may accelerate engine oil degradation, which may cause premature wear of the engine
components.
Continuous city driving (stop & go traffic); fuels with high content of olefins; sulfur and certain aromatic fractions; and very high ambient
[email protected]
3
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 525
temperatures are the most influential factors causing premature oil aging and a consecutive engine mechanical deterioration.
If the vehicle falls into the category of "TSE must approve" (red zone in the table), the following steps need to be performed in order to determine
vehicles CPO eligibility:
1. Remove the engine valve cover (on N62/N62TU and N73 engines, only from the left bank) and the oil filter insert.
2. To document the engine condition, digital pictures of the valvetrain; the inside surface of the valve cover; the oil filter insert; and the
identification plate from the left B-pillar must be taken.
3. Create and submit a PuMA case titled "CPO Engine Inspection", which should be categorized as follows:
The submitted PuMA case must describe the vehicles service history and must also have the pictures listed above (taken in "jpeg" format with low
resolution camera settings) attached.
4. Based on the information provided in the PuMA case, the TSE will qualify the vehicle for the CPO enrollment. If the TSE determines that the
vehicles condition will disqualify it for the CPO Program, then he will reply to the "CPO Engine Inspection" case denying the approval for
the CPO Program.
5. If the TSE determines that the vehicle condition is acceptable for the enrollment in the CPO Program, then the TSE will reply to the PuMA
case approving the CPO enrollment.
6. The attached illustrations below are the examples of how the engine components should be photographed, and should be used as guidelines in
the inspection process.
Example # 1:
Picture of the valvetrain components after the valve cover is removed (camshafts, VANOS units, timing chain, and eccentric shaft - if fitted, should
be visible)
Example # 2
[email protected]
4
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 526
Picture of the inside surface of the valve cover
Example # 3
Picture of the oil filter insert
Example # 4
Picture of the vehicles identification plate from the B-pillar
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
5
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 527
B110109_Maintenance_Tables.
Computers, Controls - Programming VS Veh. Data Status

SI B09 07 07
Programming/Coding Explanations
March 2012
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B09 07 07 dated February 2012.
Changes only affect the attachment.
SUBJECT
Programming Version Vehicle Data Status
MODEL All
SITUATION
All affected vehicles have a Vehicle Data Status stored in the vehicle, e.g., E065-07-09-500. This Vehicle Data Status describes the current
configuration of the vehicle, and is used for programming by ISTA/P.
[email protected]
6
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 528
INFORMATION
To compare the Vehicle Data Status against with the ISTA/P version, refer to the [NEW] attachment or the 3g Technology website on Centernet.
For future ISTA/P releases, the attachment will only be posted on the 3g Technology website in Centernet.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
7
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 529
B090707_BMW_ISTAP_ILevel_Overview.
Computers/Controls - ISTA/P Programming/Coding Info.

SI B09 05 09
March 2012
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B09 05 09 dated April 2011.
SUBJECT
Enabling Code Information
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
When ISTA/P requests an Enabling Code during a programming session, only an Application ID and Upgrade Index are shown. The [NEW]
attached cross-reference will help identify which enabling code is required:
For further information on the use of enabling codes, refer to SI B09 04 09.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
8
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 530
B090509 FSC Enabling Codes.
Keyless Sys. - Remote Control And Comfort Access Inop.

SI B66 02 11
Distance Systems, Cruise Control, Remote Control
February 2012
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B66 02 11 dated August 2011.
SUBJECT
[NEW] Remote Control and/or Comfort Access Functionality Is Inoperative
MODEL
All
[NEW] Vehicles with remote control keys that have a replaceable battery
SITUATION
The radio remote control and Comfort Access functionality is inoperative:
[email protected]
9
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 531
^ The vehicle can only be unlocked or locked with the mechanical key.
^ The vehicle can only be started with the remote control key in the slot of the Car Access System (CAS) or when held very closely to the
steering column.
CAUSE
[NEW] The replaceable battery in the remote control key is either damaged or depleted.
CORRECTION
Step A:
A defective/depleted battery in the remote control key will mimic that no battery is installed in the remote control key; hence, no check control
message will be displayed. This is why it is imperative to test the battery in the remote control key first.
[NEW] Testing showed that even when performing diagnosis and following the test plan for the key battery charge/voltage status check offered in
ISTA, a damaged/depleted key battery will not be recognized.
[NEW] As a result, follow the recommendation below without performing a vehicle test:
1. [NEW] Check the battery functionality by removing the original key battery in the key and install a known good key battery; or, even better, use
a battery tester called state of charge (e.g., ZTS Multi-Battery Tester MBT-1) to test the key battery capacity
2. [NEW] Retest the functionality of the remote control key.
3. [NEW] When proper functionality is confirmed, replace the key batteries on all assigned remote control keys for the vehicle.
4. [NEW] If proper functionality cannot be restored with a known good key battery, refer to Step B.
Note:
The average life cycle of a battery in the remote control key is approximately 3 years from the day of production of the vehicle.
[NEW] More details on the ZTS Multi-Battery Tester MBT-1 can be found in Attachment_A and on the ZTS manufacturer website,
www.ztsinc.com/mbtl.html.
[NEW] Note:
The ZTS Multi-Battery Tester MBT-1 must be purchased through your center (e.g. from Amazon.com, SEARS, etc.). It will not be offered through
BMW.
Step B:
Perform diagnosis using ISTA (Integrated Service Technical Application). Complete any test plans related to the radio remote control system.
Note:
If the remote control key must be replaced, swap the existing slide-in (mechanical) key into the new replacement remote control(s).
Important:
If the rearview mirror must be replaced (remote receiver is integrated) on a Convertible, please perform a visual check on the mirror to assure that
the frequency of the remote receiver installed in the mirror is 315 MHz.
[NEW] PARTS INFORMATION
[email protected]
10
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 532
[email protected]
11
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 533
[NEW] WARRANTY INFORMATION
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
12
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 534
Attachment A - Information on ZTS Multi-Battery Tester MBT-1
Body - Windshield Urethane Sealant Information

SI B51 29 09
Body Equipment
February 2012
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. B51 29 09 dated September 2009.
SUBJECT
1-Hour Windshield Urethane
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
[NEW] A "1-hour" system windshield urethane is currently available (P/N 83 19 2 223 012) and should be used in place of the previous "1-day"
system, (P/N 83 19 0 444 141).
[email protected]
13
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 535
The primary advantage to the "1-hour" system is a significantly quicker curing time.
The properties of the "1-hour" system are comparable to that of the "1-day" system, but the curing time is reduced by 1 hour.
The "1-hour" system is applied at room temperature and with the same procedure as the "1-day" system.
For additional details and precautions regarding the use of the "1-hour" urethane for windshield replacement, refer to Repair Instruction REP 51
31... "Instructions on gluing windscreen"
WARRANTY INFORMATION
For information only
Electrical - Battery Maintenance Requirement Information

SI B61 18 08
January 2012
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B61 18 08 dated January 2011.
SUBJECT
Battery Maintenance Requirements
MODEL
All (new and used vehicles in BMW center inventory
[NEW] SITUATION
Battery maintenance is vital when vehicles are in BMW center inventory. Allowing battery voltage to drop below 12.0 volts (12.0V) permanently
reduces the battery life expectancy, and causes premature failure of the battery.
We are providing a flexible battery maintenance system that can be used by every BMW center in accordance with its particular needs. This
bulletin announces the 2012 Battery Charging calendars.
PROCEDURE FOR 12V BATTERY SYSTEMS (INC. 12 VOLT SYSTEMS IN HYBRID VEHICLES)
[NEW] Upon receipt of a new vehicle, remove the battery log form (see attachment) from the glove compartment and complete section "A". Check
the voltage of the 12V battery and recharge if less than 12.5V or 71% SoC (State of Charge).
The maintenance tracking system provides for 3 distinct options:
1. The vehicle goes into storage (back lot), or in a new vehicle display (not in the showroom)
^ The battery main disconnect switch has been removed; and
^ The vehicle may or may not be in Transport Mode.
A four-week charging cycle and calendar have been established for these cases.
The vehicle arrives, marked with a color-coded round sticker on the windshield. The respective color (one out of four possible colors)
designates that the vehicle's battery voltage must be checked in accordance with the new calendar on a four-week cycle.
[NEW] Recharge any time the battery voltage is less than 12.5V or 71% SoC.
Each time a battery is checked, record the voltage in section "B" of the BATTERY LOG FORM.
2. The vehicle goes into the showroom, or a similar display area
^ The electrical system is "Customer ready"; and
^ The battery main disconnect switch has been removed; and
^ The vehicle has been taken out of Transport Mode using the BMW Diagnosis System.
When in the showroom display, energy consumption is frequent and unpredictable because of the showroom traffic. A four-week charging
[email protected]
14
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 536
cycle will not suffice, due to the increased current draw imposed on the battery. This is because of frequent usage of the vehicle's electrical
components (demonstrations, product familiarization, etc.).
To ensure the battery charge is maintained, connect the battery via the underhood charging terminals to a suitable power supply (SI B04 23
10 and B04 21 09).
[NEW] If the showroom vehicle battery needs to be disconnected due to state regulations, check the battery voltage on a regular basis to
ensure the state of charge is maintained above 12.5V or 71% SoC. Record when the battery is recharged in section "C" of the BATTERY
LOG FORM.
Note 1: For those BMW centers which have established their own working battery maintenance procedure which fulfills BMW guidelines,
Section C can be used to track the charging of those vehicles.
3. The battery draw has been minimized for storage purposes
^ Either the battery main disconnect switch remains on the vehicle in the "OFF" position; or
^ The vehicle battery has been disconnected.
With the battery draw minimized, a 12-week charging cycle can be followed. Use section "D" of the BATTERY LOG FORM to document
when the charging has been performed.
The columns on the form are identified by the colors white, red and green of the 12-week charging calendar, designating the months when
the vehicles are to be charged. The windshield labels can also be used to track these vehicles, with the exception of the 4th color, yellow.
Therefore, vehicles received with a yellow label will need to be reassigned another color.
The 12 week charging cycle requires the battery to be recharged at every check.
IMPORTANT:
Use a calibrated fluke 87 multimeter or similar device to measure battery voltage.
On vehicles equipped with maintenance-free batteries (with integrated hydrometer - "Magic Eye"), under certain circumstances (vehicle
parked for an extensive period of time) due to electrolyte density stratification inside the battery, the internal hydrometer ("Magic Eye") may
remain black after recharging, even though the battery tester shows it to be fully charged. Such batteries are fully serviceable.
Replace the battery if the battery acid level is too low (Magic Eye light yellow).
Since BMW uses only maintenance-free or AGM batteries, DO NOT ADD DISTILLED WATER!
If, at any time, the battery open circuit voltage should drop below 12.0V, or a battery replacement is indicated during the CBS handover
inspection, perform Energy Diagnosis (refer to SI B61 13 05) to determine the cause. Any necessary repairs should be carried out and the
battery MUST BE REPLACED. The replacement battery must be registered using the service function in the diagnosis equipment.
Dispose of all batteries properly, observing legal regulations.
Charging Procedure:
Battery charging must be performed using an approved battery charger (recommended charging voltage 14.8V). Refer to SI B04 21 09 and
B04 23 10 for recommended chargers.
For an optimized charging procedure, the ambient temperature should be between 60°F and 75°F. Under these conditions, the battery can be
considered fully charged when the charging current has fallen below 2.5 Amps.
Charging below 60°F should be avoided if possible, since the capacity of the battery to take up current is reduced and the charging time is
extended considerably. However, if provisional charging below 60°F is performed, the charging voltage must be set to 14.8V. Charging shall
be discontinued no earlier than when the charging current falls below 1.5 Amps.
Further Technical Notes
PROCEDURE FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY PACKS INSTALLED IN HYBRIDS
High-voltage battery packs should be checked at the same maintenance intervals as for 12 volt batteries.
[email protected]
15
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 537
The charge status of the high-voltage battery pack is shown in the instrument cluster. If the charge indicator displays a state of charge in the
lower quarter of the gauge (A), the high-voltage battery pack must be recharged until the charge indicator displays a value in the upper
quarter (B).
On the battery log form, charge indicator positions A or B should be logged as follows:
A = 0 or 1/4 (depending on actual needle position)
B = 3/4 or F (depending on actual needle position)
^ Charge the high-voltage battery pack by starting the engine and letting it run until the required charge status is reached. If the vehicle is inside
a building, exhaust extraction must be used. If the vehicle is outside, the vehicle must be in a secure area.
^ For vehicles where the state of charge of the high-voltage battery pack is insufficient to start the engine, connect a BMW recommended
battery charger to the battery posts under the hood. Only use Deutronic DBL 1600 or Multi Charger 1500 battery chargers due to
amperage requirements needed to bring the HV battery up to the necessary state of charge (refer to SI B04 23 10 for more information on
currently approved battery chargers). The ignition must be switched on and all consumers that are not required switched off (e.g., lights,
radio, A/C). When the CC message "Charging completed" is displayed, this means that the engine start capability has been restored. Start
the engine and continue the charging process as described above.
Vehicles on the showroom floor should have the high-voltage system de-energized using the Service Disconnect on the top of the
high-voltage battery unit.
USED VEHICLES
Used vehicles in BMW center inventory should be monitored and recharged according to the above principles. There is no reason why the
battery maintenance should be neglected, since poor reliability of a pre-owned BMW may deter a customer from buying a new one at a later
date.
VEHICLE DELIVERY
The CBS Handover Inspection must be performed as the last process step, immediately before delivery to the customer! Refer to the Service
Information entitled "New Vehicle Preparation and Maintenance Requirements" for the vehicle model concerned.
Upon the sale of a vehicle, its BATTERY LOG FORM should be removed from the BATTERY CHARGE LOG (binder) and filed in the
vehicle file, to be available for future reference.
To ensure that the battery remains fully charged, start the engine before demonstrating the operation of components to the customer at the
time of delivery.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES should a vehicle equipped with a battery disconnect switch be sold or delivered to a customer.
GENERAL INFORMATION
If a vehicle is used as a demonstrator, the battery disconnect switch MUST BE REMOVED.
When reconnecting the battery, torque the battery nut by following the appropriate specification listed in Tightening Torque 61 21...
Under special circumstances where the battery disconnect switch is not removed, extreme caution must be taken not to turn off the battery
disconnect switch while driving (for example, when moving the vehicle on the lot).
Note that the procedures outlined above are meant to be guidelines to assist BMW centers in assuring a sufficient state of charge of vehicle
batteries at all times. Following these procedures, however, will not guarantee a sufficient state of charge on all batteries: there may be
exceptional cases of excessive current draw through very frequent movement of back lot vehicles, for example, which may call for more
[email protected]
16
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 538
frequent recharging than otherwise necessary.
The above guidelines for proper battery maintenance are meant to provide maximum flexibility for every BMW center. Regional BMW
personnel will be happy to assist with setting up an effective charging and monitoring program.
PARTS INFORMATION
Batteries are covered under the terms of the BMW New Vehicle/SAV Limited Warranty as applicable.
Failures due to lack of battery maintenance are not covered.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
17
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 539
B611808 - Flow Chart
[email protected]
18
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 540
[email protected]
19
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 541
B611808 - 2012 Battery Log Form
A/T - Failures Due To Incorrect Installation

SI B24 05 11
Engine
December 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin replaces SI B01 04 98 dated June 1998.
SUBJECT
Transmission Failures Due to Incorrect Installation
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Transmission failure and damage can result from the incorrect installation of the transmission.
These transmission failures and or damages are often caused by damaged, misaligned or missing dowel bushings between the engine block and the
transmission housing. The resulting transmission-to-engine misalignment will gradually wear off the splines on the input shaft of the clutch cylinder
[email protected]
20
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 542
until power transfer is no longer possible.
The failure symptom relating to the misalignment is a popping sound while driving,loss of forward and reverse gears and finally totals failure of the
transmission. Transmission failure may occur between 1,000 and 25,000 miles after removal of the engine and or transmission depending on the
severity of the misalignment.
Misalignment of the transmission to the engine can also occur as a result of improper engine removal procedures (transmission is left in vehicle
during short block replacement), etc.
It is imperative that the proper procedures, tools and equipment necessary to repair or replace an engine or transmission be used. Additional
installation information can be found in SI B11 05 11 "Engine Removal and Installation Tips".
See attached document describing the damage that will result from improper transmission installation.
The warranty does not apply to the following:
Damage that results from improper repair.
Claims for transmissions replacements that result from the situation described in this Service Information bulletin will not be accepted.
ATTACHMENT
B240511Technical Service Bulletin # 110511 Date: 111201
[email protected]
21
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 543
Engine - Removal/Installation Tips
SI B11 05 11
Engine
December 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin replaces SI B 11 04 96 dated February 1998.
SUBJECT
Engine Removal and Installation Tips
MODEL
All
SITUATION
If repairs involving the removal and installation of the engine become necessary, the transmission must always be removed first as outlined in the
repair manual.
Note:
Always support the engine and transmission using the appropriate special tools to avoid automatic transmission oil pump damage due to engine and
transmission "sagging" at the mating point (engine block to transmission bell housing) before the fastening bolts are removed.
Before reinstallation of the transmission, the dowel sleeves must be removed from the transmission bell housing and installed in the engine block as
outlined in the repair manual and shown in the illustration below.
Note:
The transmission bell housing and engine block mating surfaces must always seat flush with each other (dowels seated in holes) before the bolts are
installed and tightened to avoid damage as seen in the illustrations below.
Failure to follow the proper repair procedures will result in engine and or transmission damage due to engine/transmission misalignment.
[email protected]
22
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 544
Additional installation information can be found in "Transmission Failures Due to Incorrect Installation".
The warranty does not apply to the following:
Damage that results from improper repair.
Claims for engines replacements that result from the situation described in this Service Information bulletin will not be accepted.
Instruments - Odometer Reading Can't Be Recovered

SI B62 01 95
Instruments
November 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B62 01 95 dated September 1995.
SUBJECT
[NEW] After an Odometer, Coding Plug or Instrument Cluster Replacement, the Mileage Displayed Reads Zero
MODEL
All
[NEW] SITUATION
The actual odometer reading cannot be recovered after a related repair.
[NEW] CAUSE
Both the primary and backup control modules that contain the "restore" mileage data are replaced at the same time.
The transfer of the stored mileage data from the old part to the new replacement part has failed.
[NEW] INFORMATION
Disclosure Requirements
Under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Transportation that include the way in which information is disclosed and retained, a person
transferring ownership of a motor vehicle shall give to the transferee the following written disclosure:
^ Disclosure of the cumulative mileage registered on the odometer.
^ Disclosure that the actual mileage is unknown due to modification or replacing a used part that shows the odometer reading is different from
the number of miles the vehicle has actually traveled.
^ The Federal Odometer Act (49 US Code Section 32701 - 32705) makes provisions for the lawful service, repair, or replacement of
odometers.
A. If the mileage registered by the odometer remains the same as before the service, repair, or replacement.
B. If the mileage cannot remain the same:
^ Adjust the odometer to read zero; and
^ The vehicle owner or his/her agent shall attach a written notice to the left door frame (B-pillar) specifying the mileage before and the date of
the odometer service, repair, or replacement.
Note:
State-specific odometer regulations may also apply.
If it becomes necessary to replace an odometer, coding plug, light module or instrument cluster (resulting in the new odometer reading being reset
to zero miles), a "non-removable" label is available from BMW NA to record the previous mileage.
[email protected]
23
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 545
On all repairs going forward, add the mileage on the label to the current odometer mileage to compute the "total" true mileage (document the
mileage and the procedure on the repair order).
[NEW] The label must be ordered separately.
Body - Test Plans For Panoramic Roof

SI B54 01 11
Special Roofs
October 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B54 01 11 dated February 2011.
SUBJECT
Test Plans for Panoramic Roof
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Test plans have been developed and tested for all vehicles with the Panoramic Roof. Test plans must be performed before submitting a PuMA case.
INFORMATION
After completing a Vehicle Test~ the various test plans for the Panoramic Sunroof are found using the following paths:
^ [NEW] Guided Troubleshooting / Fault pattern / 06 Body / 0601 Roof / Calculate Test Plan (then choose the applicable test plan).
^ [NEW] Information Search / Function Structure / 03 Body / Locking and security functions / Sunroof / Start search (then choose the applicable
test plan).
^ [NEW] Information Search / Function Structure / 05 Non-electrical diagnosis - NED / 03 Body / Start Search (then choose the applicable test
plan).
Note:
Selections may vary from car to car, which could result in different test plans.
Please report any errors in the test plans using the Diagnosis Feedback icon (envelope) from the top status bar (refer to SI B07 06 08).
Emissions System - Evaporative System Leak Testing

SI B16 01 07
Fuel Supply Systems
[email protected]
24
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 546
September 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B16 01 07 dated March 2010.
SUBJECT
Testing Evaporative Systems for Leaks
MODEL
All
[NEW] EVAP SYSTEM TANK LEAKAGE DMTL TEST MODULE OPERATING HINTS
Evaporative system leakage is found using the DMTL tank leakage test plan:
If a leakage is found to be present using the DMTL leakage test plan, the following points should be verified.
1. Check that the fuel cap is properly closed.
2. Testing the evaporative system requires all venting pipes and electrical connectors to be properly connected.
3. Search for leakage; if needed, use the VACUTEC(R) Smoke Machine 625-522B-BMW.
4. Do not replace the DMTL pump or fuel cap.
Evaporative system leakage is NOT found using the DMTL tank leakage test plan:
Only perform the applicable test plans for the faults stored. Performing additional leak measurements using a smoke machine on a vehicle that
does not fail the DMTL leakage test plan will not be reimbursed by Warranty. Do not replace the fuel cap, DMTL pump or carbon canister.
DMTL pump "system error" fault is stored in the vehicle:
Only perform the applicable test plan for the fault stored. If the test plan states to replace the DMTL pump, only replace that component.
^ Do not smoke test the vehicle.
^ Do not replace the fuel cap.
^ Do not drain the fuel tank or refill.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS WHEN USING THE VACUTEC SMOKE MACHINE
Testing evaporative systems for leaks is very challenging. We have developed some diagnostic hints, along with the introduction of a new special
tool, to properly connect a smoke machine to the DMTL
fresh air vent/filter connection.
Recently the VACUTEC(R) Smoke Machine 625-522B-BMW was added to the BMW Equipment Program. The VACUTEC(R) Smoke Machine
625-522B-BMW is the only approved testing device for the fuel and evaporative systems. This device automatically converts air to high purity
nitrogen, using Pressure Swing Absorption (PSA) nitrogen technology. Orders for the VACUTEC(R) Smoke Machine 625-522B-BMW, can be
placed by calling the BMW Equipment program.
[NEW] Included with the new VACUTEC(R) smoke machine are various caps and adaptors to help connect the applicator hose to the vehicle. It is
always suggested not to disturb the system before testing; try to create as little disturbance as possible to the system when connecting the smoke
machine. This smoke machine utilizes an UltraTraceUVF smoke solution. The smoke solution incorporates an ultraviolet dye, which helps pinpoint
the leak with an ultraviolet residue surrounding the leak area. Determining the source of the leak is made easy when the included Hi-Density True
UV LED light and incandescent white light are used.
[NEW] When testing the vehicle's evaporative system using the flow meter on the VACUTEC smoke machine, the ball indicator should not lift
from the zero measurement on the scale when the system is leak-free. All BMWs are designed to be 100% leak-free. A flow meter indicating zero
flow would be the same as placing your finger over or kinking the application hose of the VACUTEC smoke machine (no flow = 100% leak-free).
For more information regarding evaporative system testing, describing possible fire hazards using oxygen vs. nitrogen, please refer to the following
SAE web site:
www.sae.org/technical/papers/2007-01-1235
Shown below is the Evaporative Test Adaptor, which can connect directly to DMTL (Diagnosis Module Tank Leakage) pump-equipped vehicles
[email protected]
25
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 547
only after the fresh air filter connection has been removed. When properly connecting the tool to the system, the main benefit is that it does not
disturb the integrity of the system. This tool should be used anytime the vehicle is in the workshop for a small or large leak in the evaporative
system. Shown in the picture is the tool connected to the DMTL at the fresh air filter connection.
Evaporative Test Adapter

(for vehicles equipped with a DMTL pump) P/N 83 30 0 433 207
Hose Connection to DMTL
When properly connecting the tool to the system, the main benefit is that it does not disturb the intergrity of the system. This tool should be used
anytime the vehicle is in the workshop for a small or large leak in the tool connected to the DMTL at the fresh air filter connections.
[email protected]
26
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 548
All vehicles equipped with a LDP (Leak Diagnosis Pump) system
Vehicles equipped with the LDP system will require a series of small pieces of rubber hose to adapt the smoke machine application hose.
NOTE:
It is important that the initial test of the system is conducted with the system intact; avoid disturbance of the system. All electrical connectors and
ventilation pipes should not be disturbed, because an intermittent issue could be disturbed and nothing will be found during the test plan. Electrical
connector seals and pin or socket grommets are important parts of the system's integrity; each component relies on the electrical connectors for
proper sealing. Removing these connectors during testing will result in an incorrect diagnosis of the system.
[email protected]
27
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 549
Emissions - Pressure Cont. Crankcase Ventilation Info.

SI B11 03 08
Engine
August 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B11 03 08 dated May 2011.
SUBJECT
[email protected]
28
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 550
Crankcase Ventilation System Diagnosis and Measurement
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
All current BMW engines incorporate a pressure-controlled crankcase ventilation system. The crankcase ventilation systems use various different
crankcase ventilation valves, depending on the engine type. Although the valves all look different, they function similarly, using a spring and
diaphragm assembly to control the crankcase pressure. A properly functioning pressure control valve is designed to maintain a slight vacuum
(underpressure) in the crankcase, which assures reliable crankcase venting during all engine operating conditions. Some of the causes and results of
a malfunctioning crankcase ventilation system are listed below.
Causes of Excessive Overpressure (Pressure)
^ Internal engine damage/wear
^ Obstruction in the crankcase ventilation system
^ Defective pressure control valve(s)
Results of Excessive Overpressure
^ Damage to the engine oil seals
^ Increased engine oil consumption (can be misdiagnosed as a defective turbocharger)
^ Excessive engine oil in the intake system
^ Excessive engine oil in the charged intake tubes or the intercooler on turbocharged engines (can be misdiagnosed as a defective turbocharger)
^ Engine oil dip stick is dislodged from the guide tube (if equipped)
Cause of Excessive Underpressure (Vacuum)
^ Defective pressure control valve
Results of Excessive Underpressure
^ Damage to the engine oil seals
^ Increased engine oil consumption
^ Excessive engine oil in the intake system
^ Rough engine idling or engine misfire
^ Whistling or howling noise from the engine (can be misdiagnosed as a defective turbocharger)
^ Increased mixture adaptation values
Attached to this Service Information bulletin is a procedure for measuring the crankcase ventilation system, using the ISID and IMIB diagnostic
equipment.
[email protected]
29
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 551
Specification and actual readings from the vehicle may vary by up to +/-10%, but not more than 2.0 mBar.
ATTACHMENT
[email protected]
30
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 552
[email protected]
31
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 553
[email protected]
32
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 554
[email protected]
33
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 555
B110308 Measuring Crankcase Pressure Using IMIB
Compuetrs/Controls - Recommended Diagnostic Procedures

SI B07 02 11
Workshop Environment Systems
July 2011
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Recommended Diagnostic Procedures
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
Information and test plans in ISTA (Integrated Service Technical Application) are provided to assist the technician in troubleshooting. Diagnostic
test plans are available for electrical and electromechanical vehicle systems, as well as selected mechanical systems (NED; Non-electric Diagnosis).
Some electrical components and electromechanical systems do not require test plans to be performed for reimbursement via warranty.
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide:
^ Information on when diagnostic test plans are required/not required.
^ A recommended procedure on how to utilize the diagnostic information and test plans in ISTA.
Your knowledge and understanding of this information will result in efficient diagnostic procedures and warranty claim processing.
Within ISTA (D2.26 or later) detailed information can be found on:
[email protected]
34
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 556
^ Mechanical systems requiring diagnosis (NED): ISTA document "Contents Non-electric Diagnosis (NED)".
^ Electrical or electromechanical systems require no diagnosis: ISTA document "Contents Diagnosis", chapter "Component Repair without
Diagnosis." Some items are:
^ Faulty bulbs (except xenon and LED)
^ Items with visual defects
^ Electrical components with broken retaining elements
^ Items damaged by water ingress or thermal event (excluding control units)
^ Mechanical engine components with leaks or mechanical damage
^ Display devices with visual or mechanical defects
^ Inoperative horns, cigarette lighters or power sockets
These documents can always be called up in ISTA via "News", and are updated with each ISTA version.
These documents are automatically displayed on the ISTA home screen when ISTA is first opened.
Utilize ISTA whenever:
a. A fault is stored, but the fault cause is not clearly identifiable.
b. A fault causes an indicator warning lamp to illuminate.
c. A fault lies within a mechanical system, and the fault cause cannot be clearly identified.
d. A fault lies within a mechanical system, and the repair is too costly. For example replacing the entire panoramic sunroof as opposed to
installing a repair kit.
e. TeileClearing is active for the component requiring replacement.
PROCEDURE
Refer the attachment to this service information for more information on diagnostic procedures.
This Service Information bulletin is intended to provide technical, diagnostic and/or repair process information only.
If an eligible warranty claim is a result of this process, submit by following the regular claim procedures that apply.
Please refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual regarding proper support, documentation and archiving requirement for claims, as
applicable.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
35
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 557
[email protected]
36
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 558
[email protected]
37
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 559
[email protected]
38
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 560
[email protected]
39
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 561
[email protected]
40
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 562
[email protected]
41
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 563
[email protected]
42
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 564
B07 02 11 - Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 320511 Date: 110501
Steering - Steering Wheel Leather Peeling From The Rear

SI B32 05 11
Steering and Wheel Alignment
May 2011
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Steering Wheel Leather Cover Is Peeling
MODEL
All
SITUATION
The steering wheel leather is peeling away from the rear side of the steering wheel.
CAUSE
The adhesive application is poor or insufficient.
CORRECTION
Apply instant adhesive to the affected areas.
PROCEDURE
Refer to the attachment.
Replacement of the complete steering wheel for this peeling issue will not be accepted by warranty.
[email protected]
43
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 565
PARTS INFORMATION
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
44
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 566
[email protected]
45
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 567
B320511 - Procedure.
Fuel System - Alcohol Fuel Blend Usage

SI B13 01 06
Fuel Systems
May 2011
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Alcohol Fuel Blends in BMW Vehicles
MODEL
All with gasoline engines
SITUATION
Fuel blends containing a high percentage (above 10%) of alcohol, mainly ethanol, are becoming more commercially available. Customers inquire
about the possibility of using alcohol fuels (e.g., E85) in BMW vehicles.
INFORMATION
Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol; or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE (methyl tertiary
butyl ether); or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of cosolvent will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or
[email protected]
46
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 568
workmanship.
Usage of such alcohol fuel blends may result in drivability, starting, and stalling problems due to reduced volatility and lower energy content of the
fuel. Those drivability problems may be especially evident under certain environmental conditions such as high or low ambient temperatures and
high altitude.
Only specially adapted vehicles (FFV - Flexible Fuel Vehicles) can run on high alcohol fuel blends. BMW, for the various technical and
environmental reasons explained below, does not offer FFV models.
Usage of E85 or any other high-alcohol content blend (e.g., E30) in BMW vehicles will cause various drivability complaints (cold-start problems,
stalling, reduced performance, poor fuel economy, etc.); may cause excessive emissions; and may cause irreversible damage to engine, emission
control and fuel delivery systems due to incompatibility of materials with alcohols.
General Notes Regarding E85 Fuel
E85 fuel contains 85% (by volume) ethanol and 15% gasoline. Ethanol can be produced chemically from ethylene or biologically from grains,
agricultural wastes, or any organic material containing starch or sugar. In the US, ethanol is mainly produced from corn and is classified as a
renewable fuel.
Similar to gasoline, ethanol contains hydrogen and carbon with additional oxygen molecules built into its chemical chain. This chemical structure
makes ethanol's burning process slightly cleaner than gasoline (lower tailpipe emissions).
On the other hand, due to lower carbon content, ethanol provides 27% less energy (for identical volume) than gasoline, resulting in reduced fuel
economy of E85 vehicles (approximately 22% higher consumption). Increased fuel consumption requires appropriately enlarged fuel tank
capacities (usually a 30% increase), and specific DME calibrations for E85 lower stoichiometric air/fuel ratio (10 compared to 14.7 for gasoline
engines).
E85 fuel volatility is typically lower than gasoline (RVP 6-10 psi, compared to 8-15 psi for gasoline). Lower fuel volatility will reduce vehicle
evaporative emissions, but it may cause cold-starting problems, especially with lower ambient temperatures.
Under certain environmental conditions, mainly lower ambient temperatures, ethanol separates from the gasoline/alcohol mixture and absorbs
water. The ethanol-absorbed water molecules are heavier than gasoline or ethanol; they remain at the bottom of fuel tank and, when introduced into
the combustion process, they tend to form an extremely lean mixture resulting in misfire, rough idle and cold-starting problems.
Certain materials commonly used with gasoline are totally incompatible with alcohols. When these materials come in contact with ethanol, they
may dissolve in the fuel, which may damage engine components and may result in poor vehicle drivability.
Some metals (e.g., zinc, brass, lead, aluminum) become degraded by long exposure to ethanol fuel blends. Also, some nonmetallic materials used in
the automotive industry such as natural rubber, polyurethane, cork gasket material, leather, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polyamides,
methyl-methacrylate plastics, and certain thermo and thermoset plastics degrade when in contact with fuel ethanol.
In order to safely and effectively operate a motor vehicle running on E85, the vehicle must be compatible with alcohol use. Some manufacturers
have developed vehicles called FFV (Flexible Fuel Vehicle) that can operate on any blend of ethanol and gasoline (from 0% ethanol and 100%
gasoline to 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline). Ethanol FFVs are similar to gasoline vehicles, with main differences in materials used in fuel
management and delivery systems, and DME control module calibrations. In some cases, E85 vehicles also require special lubricating oils.
Aftermarket conversions of gasoline-powered vehicles to ethanol-fueled vehicles, although possible, are not recommended, due to internal
materials and DME software incompatibility as well as the high costs of conversion.
[NEW] In order to correctly diagnose various drivability complaints caused by fuel blends with a high level of ethanol content, refer to SI B13 05
10, Testing Fuel Composition for applicable tools and procedures.
Components damage/malfunctions or any drivability problems caused by the use of fuels containing more than 10% ethanol (or other oxygenates
with more than 2.8% oxygen by weight) will not be covered under BMW warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.
Computers - ISTA Diagnosis On Vehicles Prior To E46

SI B07 01 11
Workshop Environment Systems
May 2011
Technical Service
SUBJECT
ISTA Diagnosis on Older Vehicles (Prior to E46)
MODEL
[email protected]
47
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 569
E30, E36 (3 Series)
E28, E34, E39 (5 Series)
E24 (6 Series)
E23, E32, E38 (7 Series)
E31 (8 Series)
E53 (X5)
Z3
SITUATION
Diagnosis of older vehicles (prior to the E46 3 Series) using ISTA (Integrated Service Technical Application) takes place using the BST (BMW
Service Tester) mode. BST mode is the older diagnosis mode and was migrated into ISTA. Because of this, the diagnosis of these vehicles has to be
handled differently than diagnosis on current vehicles.
There are currently two types of BST modes available, depending on the model of the vehicle.
1. Full BST mode: E30, E28, E34, E24, E23, E32, E31 vehicles
^ The vehicle can be identified by "VIN" or "Basic Feature" only.
^ The following tabs are not used in ISTA:
"Fault memory"
"Guided Troubleshooting"
"Service functions"
"Function structure"
Components and signals"
"Call up ECU functions"
^ Selecting "Vehicle test" initiates BST mode and brings you to the "Brief test" screen in order to perform diagnosis. BST mode offers the
following functions:
"Read fault memory"
"Status Requests"
"Activate Components"
"Test Sequence"
"Special Functions"
"Output test code"
"Clear fault memory"
^ Wiring diagrams can only be found on the TIS website or in CD/paper format.
^ Repair Instructions (REP), Technical Data (TED), Tightening Torque "AZD" and Functional Description (FUB) can be found in ISTA under
"Product Structure".
2. Embedded BST mode: E36, E39, E53, E38, Z3 vehicles
^ The vehicle is automatically identified.
^ Selecting "Vehicle test" starts a vehicle test in ISTA with the familiar "Control unit tree" or Control unit list".
^ Faults are displayed in the ISTA "Fault memory" list.
^ Most test plans are listed in ISTA, but some are linked to the BST interface and can only be accessed from the "Function structure" tab. These
test modules are indicated by 3 letters. For example, diagnosis of the General Module would use the test module "ZKE". Once in BST mode for
that particular control unit, the following functions are available:
"Fault symptoms"
[email protected]
48
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 570
"Function test"
Service functions"
"Expert mode"
1. "Diagnosis requests"
2. "Component activation"
3. "Test modules"
4. "Read fault memory"
5. "Clear fault memory"
^ Diagnosis requests and component activation are only available in BST mode. (These tabs are grayed out in the control unit "Call up ECU
functions" tab.)
^ Wiring diagrams are integrated into ISTA (except the E36 and Z4, which are on the TIS web site or in CD/paper format).
This service information bulletin is intended to provide technical, diagnostic and/or repair process information only.
If an eligible warranty claim results that includes this process, it should be submitted following the regular warranty claim procedures that apply.
Please refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual regarding proper support, documentation and archiving required for claims, as
applicable.
Cooling System - Information on Coolant Refilling

SI B17 01 06
Cooling System
April 2011
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Refilling Coolant Systems
MODEL
All
SITUATION
BMW recommends filling the cooling system for protection against freezing down to -34°F (-37°C). This means an antifreeze ratio of 50%
antifreeze and 50% water. In severely cold areas, the antifreeze can be increased to 60%, which provides freezing protection down to -62 °F (-52°
C). Do not exceed a 60% ratio of antifreeze. The specified antifreeze ratio is important, since an insufficient amount would impair anti-freezing and
corrosion, inhibiting protection. An excessive amount would not improve freezing protection, but would instead reduce freezing protection. At all
times, the antifreeze and water should be pre-mixed before pouring into the engine. If pre-mixing is not performed, damage will occur to the water
pump assembly.
Since model year 2004 (and Z4 MY 2003), BMW has been using an engine coolant with a long-term life rating. The long-term antifreeze/coolant
must be completely drained and replaced only in conjunction with any Repairs that require replacement of aluminum or metal cooling system
components. The corrosion protection for these components is provided only in a new long-term coolant. On all other repairs that involve draining
of partial quantities of coolant, replace the drained quantities with new long-term antifreeze/coolant.
[NEW] Refer to SI B17 01 07 and B17 01 10 for additional information regarding BMW long-term antifreeze/coolant, maintenance, repairs,
replacement requirements and replacement procedures.
[email protected]
49
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 571
Fuel System - High Alcohol Fuel Detection

SI B13 05 10
Fuel Systems
April 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin replaces SI B13 04 06 dated August 2006.
SUBJECT
Testing Fuel Composition
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Fuel blends containing a high percentage of alcohol (10% and above), mainly ethanol, are becoming more commercially available. Usage of E85 or
any other high alcohol content blend (e.g., E30) in BMW vehicles will cause various drivability complaints (cold start problems, stalling, reduced
performance, poor fuel economy, etc.); may cause excessive emissions; and may cause irreversible damage to engine, emission control and fuel
delivery systems due to incompatibility of materials with alcohols. Refer to SI B13 01 06 Alcohol Fuel Blends in BMW Vehicles for complete
details.
In order to correctly diagnose various drivability complaints caused by fuel blends with a high level of ethanol content, BMW is providing you with
an electronic fuel composition tester.
Fuel Composition Tester

P/N 83 30 0 439 685
Refer to B04 04 11 for more details.
PROCEDURE
Safety Precautions:
^ Gasoline is highly flammable; observe normal precautions for working with flammable liquids. Perform all tests away from any source of
ignition. A class B fire extinguisher must be available.
^ Wear protective eye protection with side shields and Nitrile rubber gloves for handling the tester.
^ Please adhere to any applicable OSHA regulations when handling gasoline.
^ Dispose of the mixture according to local, state and federal regulations.
Refer to the attached procedure for testing the fuel composition of gasoline.
Component damage, malfunctions, or any drivability problems verified to be caused by the use of fuels containing more than 10% ethanol (or other
oxygenates with more than 2.8% oxygen by weight) will not be covered under BMW warranties as this is not considered a defect in materials or
workmanship. Always document the results found on the vehicle repair order whenever performing this test.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
50
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 572
[email protected]
51
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 573
[email protected]
52
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 574
[email protected]
53
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 575
[email protected]
54
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 576
[email protected]
55
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 577
[email protected]
56
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 578
[email protected]
57
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 579
B130510 Fuel Composition Tester

Fuel System - Fuel Cap Tether Is Broken Or Lost

SI B16 11 10
Fuel Supply Systems
April 2011
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Fuel Cap Tether Broken or Lost
MODEL
All
SITUATION
The customer complains that the fuel cap rubber tether is broken or is lost because it has become dislodged from the fuel cap and body of the
vehicle.
PROCEDURE
If either of these situations is encountered, replace the fuel cap and tether using the appropriate cap part number described in EPC.
[email protected]
58
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 580
Engine - Crankshaft Seal/Bedplate Sealing Information

SI B11 06 09
Engine
January 2011
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B 11 06 09 dated July 2009.
SUBJECT
[NEW] Crankshaft Seal and Bed Plate Sealer
MODEL
[NEW] All
INFORMATION
When replacing the front or rear crankshaft radial oil seals, or resealing the crankcase bedplate, the repair instructions advise using P/N 83 19 0 439
030 Loctite 193140. At this time, Loctite 193140 is not available using the BMW part number. As a substitute, P/N 83 19 7 536 051 Loctite 128357
can be used until further notice.
All other sealing materials, application tools, and instructions are correct when performing these repairs.
Electrical System - Parasitic Draw Measurement

SI B61 08 00
December 2010
Technical Service
[email protected]
59
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 581
SUBJECT
Closed-circuit Current Measurement
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Increased closed-circuit currents may occur permanently or intermittently and cause the battery to discharge prematurely. The increase in
closed-circuit current may be caused by a faulty control unit, or by the installation of a non-approved accessory.
In a situation where a vehicle has broken down due to a discharged battery, for diagnostic purposes it is important not to disconnect the battery.
This is because a control unit will be reset if the battery is disconnected. Following a reset, the faulty control unit may start functioning correctly
again, making accurate diagnosis impossible.
To correctly measure closed-circuit current, the 50-amp clip-on probe (previously used with the MIB) can now be used in conjunction with the
IMIB (Integrated Measurement Interface Box) to properly diagnosis closed-circuit current problems over an extended period of time. Connect the
50-amp clip-on probe directly to the IMIB Measurement input 3 (green socket). Refer to for information about the IMIB.
PROCEDURE
1. It is very important that any "Power management" faults stored be diagnosed and corrected, and the "Energy Diagnosis" test plan carried out
before the following procedure is performed.
2. Check and test the battery using the BMW Battery Tester. Refer to for information about the BMW Battery. If necessary, recharge or replace the
battery.
3. If the battery is installed in the trunk, open the trunk and turn the lock to the locked position, using a screwdriver or similar (simulates the trunk
lid being closed). The hood must be closed. If the battery is installed in the engine compartment, open the hood and pull the front lid contact switch
fully up, and lock in this position (workshop position, simulates the front lid being closed). The trunk must be closed.
4. With the exception of the trunk/hood above, all other doors/lids must be closed.
5. In order to simulate normal closed-circuit conditions:
^ Turn the ignition on and activate all electrical consumers, including any accessories. Turn the ignition off. In some cases, a drive cycle may need
to be carried out in order to duplicate a closed-circuit current problem.
^ Open and close the driver's door (simulates somebody getting out).
^ Lock the car, arming the DWA if this is installed.
6. In general, closed-circuit current consistently over 50mA must be investigated. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, closed-circuit current by
vehicle model is approximately as follows:
[email protected]
60
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 582
7. If the nominal milliamp reading is not achieved after the appropriate time, refer to the attached troubleshooting charts. On 2005 MV vehicles
equipped with BMW ASSIST, there are additional current fluctuations as high as 500ma that last for approximately 2 minutes. The fluctuations
occur every 15 minutes for up to 14 hours after key off. This is considered normal operation of the TCU, and should not be considered a fault. This
also applies to 2005 TCUs that are installed into earlier production vehicles as replacement parts.
^ E60, E63, E64 Closed-Circuit Current Troubleshooting E6x up to 9/05 production
^ E60, E61, E63, E64 Closed-Circuit Troubleshooting E6x from 9/05 production
^ E65, E66 Closed-Circuit Current Troubleshooting up to 3/04 production
^ E65, E66 Closed-Circuit Current Troubleshooting from 3/04 production
^ Normal closed-circuit current values for E65, E70, E60, E61, E63, and E64
CLOSED-CIRCUIT CURRENT MEASUREMENT WITH THE IMIB:
Note:
This technique with an IMIB is particularly suitable for extended measurements, and provides a graphical readout of recorded measurements over
time. It is recommended for situations where the use of a multimeter provided insufficient information for problem diagnosis.
1. The IMIB can be accessed from any ISID within the workshop.
2. Select "Activities".
3. Select "Measuring devices".
4. Select from the "Level 1" column, "Measuring devices", and then "OK".
5. From the "Connection manager" screen, select the free IMIB and "Set up connection"
[email protected]
61
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 583
6. The "Measures devices" screen opens on the "Multimeter" tab.
7. Select the "Oscilloscope" tab.
8. Highlight the "CH1" tab to activate channel 1.
9. Under channel 1, "Source", scroll with the arrows to select "Clip-on probe 50A".
10. Make sure that clip-on probe is not connected to the battery cable, and acknowledge the pop-up message with "OK".
11. Change the "A/Div" setting to "1A".
12. Under the "Time" selection box, change the "Time/Div" setting based on the number of measurements needed (5 ms to 200 s). The longer times
should be selected when performing the measurement over an extended period.
13. Select "CH 1" under "Cursor" to monitor the actual readings.
14. Select "Record" if performing long term measurements.
15. After performing the measurement, select "Record" again; the display will change to "Compress" and display the recorded data on the 1 screen.
ATTACHMENTS
B610800 Troubleshooting - E6x from 9/2005

B610800 Troubleshooting - E65 from 3/2004
B610800 Troubleshooting - E6x up to 9/2005
B610800 Troubleshooting - E65 up to 3/2004
B610800 Troubleshooting - Normal Closed Circuit Current Values
[email protected]
62
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 584
[email protected]
63
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 585
[email protected]
64
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 586
[email protected]
65
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 587
[email protected]
66
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 588
[email protected]
67
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 589
[email protected]
68
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 590
[email protected]
69
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 591
[email protected]
70
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 592
[email protected]
71
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 593
[email protected]
72
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 594
[email protected]
73
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 595
[email protected]
74
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 596
[email protected]
75
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 597
New Self Adjusting Clutch Clamping Fixture

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 08 99
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1999
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New SAC Clamping Fixture
MODEL:
All with Self Adjusting Clutch (SAC)
Situation:
Distribution of the following tool will be through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased through your PDC.
Refer to Parts Information bulletin 01 01 95 for tool warranty details. All prices on this bulletin are introductory prices and are only valid during the
Automatic Tool Shipment.
[email protected]
76
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 598
Tool Information:
SAC Clamping Fixture P/N 90886212160 Price = $145.00
Used on all SAC- self adjusting clutches to reset the clutch for installation. This tool supercedes tool number 90 88 6 212 150 on SIB 04 03 97.
This tool is applicable for all SAC equipped vehicles. Refer to repair manual section 21 21 500.
Note:
Remove the locking pin (#4) from tool 212 150 and place it on the new tool 212 160. Both locking pins will be required with 212 160.
Operating Fluids Specifications - Update

Group 00 Maintenance and General Hints
Bulletin Number 00 23 90 (3087)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ July 1990 Service Engineering

Subject: Operating Fluids Specifications - Update
The Operating Fluids Specifications publication of September, 1987 has been fully revised and updated.
Three significant changes have been incorporated into the revised Operating Fluids Specifications (OFS) supplement:
1. All fluids are listed on an index, arranged in numerical order within the
[email protected]
77
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 599
Construction Group Sequence. The index is enclosed with this Bulletin for your convenience, as well as appearing in the OFS
supplement. All fluids are readily available through your Parts Distribution Center.
2. BMW Car Care Products are included in the OFS supplement and in the index.
3. If a specific fluid is mentioned in an applicable S.I. Bulletin (since 1987) the
S.I. Bulletin number and issue date are referenced after the fluid's part number (index and supplement).
Due to these changes, please discard the previous supplement from your OFS binder and insert the new publication (being sent under
separate cover). It will be updated as necessary.
Additional copies of the OFS supplement may be ordered from Service Engineering (a pre-printed order form is enclosed).
Item No. Description Qty Price
SD 89-020 Operating Fluids Specifications 1 $12.50
(OFS) - update
The binder, labels and register tabs must be ordered through your Parts Department.
Description Part Number
OFS Binder 01 99 9 699 280

or
blue Service Information Binder 01 09 9 099 480
OFS Register Tabs: use 01 99 9 781 294 S.I. Main Group Register Tabs
OFS Labels 01 91 9 770 571
[email protected]
78
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 600
[email protected]
79
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 601
[email protected]
80
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 602
[email protected]
81
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 603
Service Action/Recall Campaign 181- 200 - Labels

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
Bulletin Number
00 21 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Label for Service Action or Recall Campaign (# 181 - # 200)
[email protected]
82
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 604
New labels have been printed and are now available to cover Service Actions or Recall Campaigns having assigned code numbers 181 through 200.
Labels may be ordered under item number SD92-085. A pre-printed order form is enclosed for your convenience.
[email protected]
83
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 605
Item Number Description Quantity Price
SD92-085 Service Action/ 1 = 100 $4.00

Recall Campaign
Label (# 181 - # 200)
Label for Service Action or Recall Campaign (#201-220)

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
Bulletin Number
00 08 97
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1997
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Label for Service Action or Recall Campaign (# 201-220)
New labels have been printed and are now available to cover Service Actions or Recall Campaigns having assigned code numbers 201 through 220.
[email protected]
84
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 606
Labels may be ordered under item number SD92-090. A pre-printed order form is enclosed for your convenience.
Item Number Description Quantity Price

SD 92-085 Service Action/ 1=100 $4.00
Recall Campaign
Label (# 201-220)
Tools - New Special Tool CD

NO.
04 08 00
[email protected]
85
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 607
DATE
February 2000
TITLE
Tools and Equipment
SUBJECT
New Special Tool CD
MODEL
All
SITUATION
A software program has been developed that will aid the technician in the search for information regarding BMW special tools. Minimum system
requirements for installing the Special Tool CD are:
Windows 95 16MB RAM

Pentium processor 90MHz 175MB of hard drive space
The database will be updated approximately 4 times a year depending on the quantity of special tools to be distributed.
TOOL INFORMATION WINDOWS
The main operating screen contains the following tool information.
PN:
Displays the complete tool part number.
Description:
Displays the selected tools description.
Model:
Displays the selected tools model information.
SIB:
Displays Service Information Bulletin Number.
Notes:
Displays additional tool information such as how the tool is used.
Auto Ship: An "X" in this field indicates that the tool was shipped via the BMW automatic tool shipment program. No "X" indicates it was an
optional tool.
Illustration Window:
An illustration of the tool is displayed. A few tools are missing illustrations. These illustrations will be added in future software updates.
TOOL SEARCH PARAMETERS
Five paths to search for tool information are included in the software. They are:
Find PN:
Enter the last 7 digits of the BMW part number (Example "001 410").
Find Group # :
Searches only for tools in the specified group. If you are looking for all tools in group 11, enter "11". This search will yield all tools with the 6th &
7th digits matching that number.
Find Description:
Enter a word or phrase. For example if you enter the word "reset", all of the tools with the word reset in the description will be displayed.
Find Model:
Find any model containing the digits entered. Example "E32", "M73" etc.
Find All:
Finds all models with the "Model" description listed as "All".
NAVIGATION BUTTONS
There are five additional buttons that assist the user in navigating the software. They are:
[email protected]
86
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 608
First Tool:
Displays first tool of the database search.
Previous Tool:
Displays the previous tool in the database search.
Next Tool:
Displays the next tool in the database search.
Last Tool:
Displays the last tool in the database search.
Refresh Screen:
If a search yields no results, the window will become blank. Click on the "Refresh screen" button to return to the main screen.
Print All:
Print a chart listing every tool currently in the BMW Special Tools database. Note: The Chart is ~ 30 pages long and may take some time to print.
Print Page:
Prints information and related graphic for the current Tool.
Note:
A separate page will be printed for each model version that is attributed to that tool. This will be fixed in future versions.
Exit:
Selecting this button will allow you to exit the program and will automatically shut down Access 97.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
If you wish to install the program on your hard drive, follow these instructions.
1. Exit all other Windows applications before beginning installation.
2. Insert the CD into your CD ROM drive
3. Run "F:\Setup.exe" . "F" should be changed to your CD ROM drive letter.
4. Follow the on screen instructions
5. When asked for the type of installation choose "Custom" and select "All Options".
6. When installation is complete start by selecting "start", "Programs", BMW Special Tools", BMW Special Tools Database".
If you wish to run the program from your CD ROM drive and not load it on your hard drive, follow these instructions.
1. Place the CD in your CD ROM drive.
2. In explorer double click on "user.mdb"
PARTS INFORMATION:
One copy of the BMW special tool CD will be sent automatically to every center. Additional copies may be purchased by faxing the attached form
to 201 930 8401. One copy of all future software updates will be sent automatically to every center.
Special Tool CD - 1/2000 version 1

PN = SD92-129
Price = $45.00
[email protected]
87
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 609
MATERIALS ORDER FORM
[email protected]
88
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 610
DISCLAIMERTechnical Service Bulletin # 000194 Date: 000101
Campaign/Recall - Codes Index

NO.
00 01 94
DATE
January 2000
TITLE
Maintenance and General Hints
SUBJECT
Service Action/Recall Campaign Codes Index
MODEL
All
The Service Information bulletins supersedes S.I. 00 01 94 dated November 1999.
SITUATION
[email protected]
89
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 611
[email protected]
90
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 612
[email protected]
91
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 613
[email protected]
92
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 614
[email protected]
93
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 615
[email protected]
94
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 616
[email protected]
95
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 617
[email protected]
96
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 618
The attached listing of Service Action and Recall Campaign codes, along with the referenced Service Information bulletin has been compiled for
your information.
MoDic III(R) - System Description/Operation

Group O8
MODIC
Bulletin Number
O8 O1 98
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1998
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
MODIC III
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
MoDiC III is a completely new diagnostic computer designed from the ground up. The MoDiC II was first distributed in 1990 and is being replaced
by the MoDiC III.
Although "trying out" the MoDiC III upon receipt is very tempting, it is absolutely necessary to read the entire "Operating and Installation "book
that is included with every MoDiC III. The book should be kept in a safe place for future reference. The MoDiC III is delivered with the following:
^ Intel Pentium Processor
^ 64 MB RAM
^ TFT color touch screen with 1024 X 768 pixels. TFT is a display that can be read at an angle unlike many lap top computers.
^ Touch pen. The touch pen should always be used as it will keep the screen clean, avoid damage and is more efficient. Never use any other
device such as a screw driver of wrench to touch the screen.
^ a gigabyte hard drive
[email protected]
97
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 619
^ PCMCIA slot plus interface connectors
^ Radio frequency wireless diagnostic head. A direct connection cable is also included. Future diagnostic head software updates will be
accomplished via the MoDiC III update CD. Future applications include flight recorder capabilities.
^ Future networking capability.
^ Docking station - the docking station downloads diagnostic updates via the CD drive to the MoDiC III. Unlike the MoDiC II, the MoDiC III has
enough memory to download all Diagnostic, Programming, Coding and TIS software. No more loading and unloading between vehicles. The
docking station is equipped with a floppy drive, CD drive, 2 main battery charging compartments, printer input and output and docking
connection for the MoDiC III. The MoDiC III will print any material saved in it's print queue when installed on the docking station. The
docking station(s) can be connected in line with the DIS printer. A docking station is needed for each MoDiC III.
^ 2 main batteries and 1 buffer battery. The buffer battery is an emergency backup battery that is utilized by the MoDiC III only if the installed
main battery is depleted. The buffer battery is charged when the MoDiC III is installed on the docking station. When the main battery requires
charging it must be removed from the MoDiC III and placed in one of the station's charging ports. At the end of the day it is recommended to
place both main batteries in the station's charging ports and the MoDiC III on top of the station. This will ensure that all of the batteries will be
charged up and ready for the next day's work.
NOTE:
The batteries must be activated (Refer to page 2-9 of your hand book) before they are installed in the MoDiC III the first time (upon receipt
from BMW).
^ 12 volt power supply cable-plugs into the vehicle's lighter socket
^ alligator clips and measuring probes
^ OBD II test cable - attaches to the diagnostic head in order to interface with the vehicle's OBD socket.
^ Main diagnostic cable - attaches to the diagnostic head in order to interface with the vehicle's main diagnostic connector.
^ Multifunction cable MFK 1 - up to 50 volts and 2amps with resistance and diode measurement, multimeter functions and freeze frame
capability. Refer to "maximum ranges with MFK 1" on page 2-27 of your manual.
^ Multifunction cable MFK 2 - up to 500 volts with multimeter functions and freeze frame capability. Refer to "maximum ranges with MFK 2" on
page 2-30 of your manual.
^ Current probe - 0 to 50amps DC/AC
Modic III Distribution

During the first round of MoDiC III distribution, one MoDiC III will be sent to each BMW center. Centers will not receive a MoDiC III until the
"BMW Diagnosis and Information Systems and MoDiC III use Agreement" has been signed and returned to BMW NA, attention Paul Manzer. The
use agreement was sent out to all centers under separate cover. Refer to SI 02 06 98. The total amount of MoDiC IIIs a center will receive is
calculated per the following. One Modic III per center, additional MoDiC IIIs calculated by 1 MoDiC III per three technicians. DIS tester(s) will be
included in the calculation of total MoDiC IIIs required.
BMW centers cannot order a MoDiC III on their own. Orders will automatically be canceled.
Per the Use Agreement "BMW center Obligations" numbers 3 and 4, a $2000.00 core charge will be automatically placed on the BMW center
number until the MoDIC II station is returned. All MoDiC II stations are to be returned to the USCO New Jersey address only.
USCO Distribution Services 99-B Caven Point Road Jersey City, NJ 07305 MoDiC II station core charge number is 86 00 0 000 066 MoDiC II
station non-warranty return code: CMODC
Refer to Parts bulletin 06 01 97 for complete core charge details.

Service
Service for the MoDiC III is being handled by SIEMENS. The SIEMENS hotline number is 1 800 215 1646. If SIEMENS determines that the
MoDIC III in question requires service, a replacement unit will be sent to you. The defective unit should be placed in the box and promptly returned
to SIEMENS. The defective unit will not be returned to you after it has been repaired. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary not to physically abuse
the MoDiC III in any way. This includes, but is not limited to, using anything other than the touch pen or your finger on the screen, writing on the
case etc. Misuse requiring repairs will be charged directly to the BMW center.
Software Installation
When you receive your new MoDiC III the operating systems and basic software are already installed. Upon start-up you must set the language and
input your center data. Refer to page 3-12 section 3.2.5 of your hand book for complete details. Save the MoDiC installation floppy that is included
with the MoDiC. It will be required to load future operating software versions. The basis system and program CDs are the same CDs that are used
with the DIS. The difference is that the MoDiC III completely loads all of the operating software programs (DIS program and TIS) directly on the
hard drive.
[email protected]
98
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 620
If a new Basis system CD is received (IDC 07 02 96) follow the "Installing the DIS basis system CD-ROM" instructions in your hand book page
3-18 sections 3.3.1, 3.3.2 and 3.3.3.
Pricing
MoDiC III pricing is included in the "Center Services Cost Recovery" charge. Refer to your user agreement "Fees" section number 1-3 for complete
details.Technical Service Bulletin # 080398 Date: 980801
MoDic III(R) - Questions and Answers

Group 08
MODIC
Bulletin Number
O8 03 98
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1998
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
MODIC III/CD 14 Questions and Answers
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
The first round of MODIC IIIs has been released to all automotive dealers that have signed and returned the "use agreement". Refer to SIBs 02 06
98 and 08 01 98 for details. Information has been gathered regarding MODIC III questions from the BMW and SIEMENS technical hotlines.
Below are answers to the frequently asked questions.
^ Question: CD14 (MODIC III & DIS) will not reprogram an E46 MS 42 DME control module.
Answer: A pre-programmed control module must be ordered from the parts department via the direct shipment program. The P/Ns to
order are:
323i - 12 141 440 090

328i - 12 141 430 674
This will be corrected with CD 15.
^ Question: If my MODIC loses communication with the head, it locks up. What should I do?
Answer: This happens because of an error in CD14. When it happens, turn the MODIC off, then back on. This will initiate the MODIC to
communicate with the head. This will be corrected with CD 15.
^ Question: My MODIC locks up if I switch the head from one car to another.
Answer: Before disconnecting the head from the first car, select "End", then "cancel"
^ Question: My MODIC will not communicate with some control modules.
Answer: More than likely CD14 has been loaded with the Basis system from CD 13. Do a complete new download using "MODIC
Installation "floppy, "CD 14 basis" and "CD 14 Program" CDs.
^ Question: I hooked up a printer and it will not work.
Answer: Follow the directions in the owners manual. It must be a post-script printer and the MODIC (and DIS if linked) must be turned
off when attaching the cables, then turned on. Like any computer the MODIC and DIS identifies peripheral hardware during start
up.
^ Question: I do not understand the fax number on the registration form.
^ Answer: All registration forms must be faxed to Kontron at - 011 4972 1595 5252. Do not put a "1" in front of the number.
^ Question: My MODIC will not turn on, the lights blink and then go out.
Answer: Either the backup battery and/or the main battery is dead. The backup battery stays in the MODIC when it charges (on the
station), but the main battery must be removed from the MODIC and placed in the station charging slot to charge.
[email protected]
99
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 621
^ QUESTION: If I push the suspend button, my MODIC loses communication with the head. What should I do?
ANSWER: Due an error in CD 14, the suspend button (hard button on MODIC face) should not be used. If used, the button will break
communication between the MODIC and the head.
To re-establish communication with the head from the diagnostic screen:
Select "Services"
Select "Setting up a connection"
This problem will be eliminated with CD 16.Technical Service Bulletin # 080396 Date: 980101
Updated MoDic(R) Software - ZCS Coding

Group 08
MODIC
Bulletin Number
08 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1998
Product Engineering
This IDC bulletin supersedes IDC 08 03 96 dated September 1997 which should be removed and discarded from your IDC binder.
SUBJECT:
Updated MODIC Software -ZCS Coding
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
Stand-alone ZCS coding software (floppy disc P/N 01 11 9 788 251 and DIS MODIC II download) are no longer available for the MODIC II. This
is due to the limited size of the MODIC II memory capacity.
All ZCS coding functions must be performed with the DIS. This is effective with the release of DIS CD 12 (to be released shortly).
TIS Software Update - 07/97

Group 10
TIS
Bulletin Number
10 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1997
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 10 03 96 dated July 1997 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Updated TIS Software - 7/97
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
TIS software dated 7/97 now includes the following:
^ Service Information bulletins for all models from 1988, plus all recall information.
^ Technical Data and Tightening Torque's from 1988 for E31, E32, E34, E36, E38, E39.
^ TIS Version 7/97 is distributed through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. All retailers will automatically receive 2 TIS CDs which is
included in the monthly usage fee (1-DIS/TIS, 1-EPC/TIS server).
[email protected]
100
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 622
Retailers with a second DIS Tester should order a TIS CD as follows:

P/N 01 57 9 788 177 Price = Cost included in DIS agreement
Retailers with a second EPC/TIS Server should order a TIS CD as follows:

P/N 01 57 9 788 607 Price = $25.00 each
Retailers ordering a TIS CD for additional EPC/TIS Servers must use the 607 part number.
TIS Loading Instructions For DIS Tester

Loading time is approximately 1.5 hours. Only load the TIS CD. Reloading the DIS diagnostic CD or the Basis system CD is not required!
1. Select "Administration" at the main menu.
2. Highlight the TIS drive.
3. Deactivate the TIS drive.
4. Insert the new TIS 7/97 CD label up in the CD carrier.
5. Insert the CD carrier in the drive clear side up, arrow first.
7. "Activate" drive.
8. Select "TIS Installation".
9. Select "OK".
10. When the software has finished loading select "OK".
11. Select "End".
12. Select "Quit".

TIS Loading Instructions For EPC/Tis Server
Contact ADP or Reynolds & Reynolds directly with questions regarding loading/updating your EPC/TIS server.
ADP 1 800 770 7093
R&R 1 800 767 0080

Proper Care of CDs
^ Never handle a CD by the top or bottom; only touch the edges.
^ Do not affix paper or tape, and avoid scratching either side of the disc.
^ The disc revolves at high speed within the CD changer, so defective (cracked or badly bent) discs should not be used.
^ Dust and/or finger smudges will have no direct effect on the signal recorded on the disc, but dirt can decrease the amount of light reflected from
the recorded surface, thus affecting quality. If the disc should become soiled, gently wipe the surface with a soft lint-free cloth, wiping from the
center of the disc to the edge.
^ Do not use record cleaning sprays or anti-static agents. Such volatile chemicals as benzene and thinner can damage the surface of the disc and
should not be used.
^ As with traditional audio records, compact discs are made of plastic. To avoid warping, keep the discs in their cases and do not store them in
places exposed to direct sunlight.
CD Return Procedure
As agreed in your DIS USE AGREEMENT and defined in the "General Terms of License Agreement for BMW EPC/TIS" under section 6.
(Property rights of the data carrier), whenever the licensee receives a new version of the product on a data carrier (CD), he shall return the data
carrier (CD) used previously to the provider.
BMW will add a core charge to each CD after the initial shipment of CDs to your dealership has been completed. There will be 3 types of CDs:
- EPC
- TIS
[email protected]
101
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 623
- DIS
After initial shipments are completed, additional quantities of CDs must be requested in writing from BMW NA's Parts Technical Group. These
will also be sent out without a core charge on the initial shipment. There after, any new CDs which replace your existing CDs will have a core
charge of $300.00 each. These will be credited to you upon your return of the earlier version CD of the same part number.
In order for you to determine which return part number to use, below is a list of cores:
- P/N 86 00 0 000 043 EPC
- P/N 86 00 0 000 044 EPC (use only for Euro CD EPC)
- P/N 86 00 0 000 045 TIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 046 DIS
All returns of CDs will be sent to USCO; please refer to Parts Bulletin 1-33 for complete details. Technical Service Bulletin # 100396 Date:
970601
TIS - Software Update

Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1997
Product Engineering
Bulletin Number
10 03 96
Group 10
TIS
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 10 03 96 dated May 1997 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
TIS software dated 5197 now includes the following:
^ TIS Version 5197 is distributed through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. All retailers will automatically receive 2 TIS CDs which is
included in the monthly usage fee (1-DIS/TIS, 1-EPC/TIS server).
Retailers with a second DIS Tester should order a TIS CD as follows:
P/N 01 579 788 177 Price = Cost included in DIS agreement
Retailers with a second EPC/TIS Server should order a TIS CD as follows:
P/N 01 57 9 788 607 Price = $25.00 each
Retailers ordering a TIS CD for additional EPC/TIS Servers must use the 607 part number.
Tis Loading Instructions For DIS Tester

Loading time is approximately 1.5 hours. Only load the TIS CD. Reloading the DIS diagnostic CD or the Basis system CD is not required!
4. Insert the new TIS 5197 CD label up in the CD carrier.
[email protected]
102
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 624
9. Select "OK".
11. Select "End".
12. Select "Quit".

Tis Loading Instructions For EPC/TIS Server
Contact ADP or Reynolds & Reynolds directly with questions regarding loading/updating your EPC/TIS server.
ADP 18007707093
R&R 18007670080
Proper Care of CDs

should not be used.
CD Return Procedure
- EPC
- TIS
- DIS
- P/N 86000000043 EPC
- P/N 86 000000044 EPC (use only for Euro CD EPC)
- P/N 86000000045 TIS
- P/N 86000000046 DIS
All returns of CDs will be sent to USCO; please refer to Parts Bulletin 1-33 for complete details. Technical Service Bulletin # 001396 Date:
970801
[email protected]
103
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 625
Microfiche Update - All Models

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
Bulletin Number
00 13 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1997
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 13 96 dated May 1997 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Microfiche Update
MODEL:
All
Situation:
The following microfiche has been updated and will be sent to all BMW dealers under the Automatic Tool shipment Program. Additional fiche may
[email protected]
104
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 626
be ordered through your PDC.
Description Edition Part Number
Technical Data 8 01 51 9 788 311
Certified Pre-Owned BMW Vehicle Program

Group 01
Warranty
Bulletin Number
01 06 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1996
Warranty
SUBJECT:
Certified Pre-Owned BMW Vehicle Program
MODELS:
All
Situation:
During the second quarter of this year, BMW sent a special mailing to every BMW NA dealership that introduced the Certified Pre-Owned BMW
Vehicle Program. Dealerships who elected to participate in the program were sent a complete Dealer Launch Kit that included a Dealer Operations
Manual, as well as the necessary support materials for the program.
We have become aware that many dealership Service and Warranty Personnel are not familiar with this program at all. Accordingly, we are
forwarding a copy of the Dealer Operations Manual insert to every dealership's Service Manager and Warranty Administrator.
Please review this information carefully and share this information with your entire Service Department. The Service Manager's copy should be
kept in a binder, fully accessible by all Service Personnel. The Warranty Administrator's copy should be kept in the BMW Warranty Policy and
Procedures Manual in Section 9 under "Special Programs".
Sales - related questions should be directed to Anthony Ascione at (201) 307- 3892. For claims processing questions, please call your Warranty
Processing Representative. Program administration questions should be directed to Paul Feuss at (201) 307-4170, or Joanne Stevens at (201)
307-3752.
Service/Warranty - Information Statement

Group 01
Warranty
Bulletin Number
01 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1996
Warranty
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 01 03 96 dated October 1996 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded. This
bulletin corrects a typographical error in the earlier release.
SUBJECT:
1997 Service and Warranty Information Statement
MODELS:
All
Situation:
Ten copies of the third printing (version 3) of the 1997 Service and Warranty Information Statement, together with a copy of this Service
Information Bulletin, will be under separate cover to every automotive BMW Dealer, addressed to the attention of the Sales Manager. An additional
single copy will be sent to the attention of the Service Manager.
[email protected]
105
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 627
In 1996, we combined the information for all models into a single statement. However, due to the staggered introduction of 1997 model year
vehicles, several printings/versions have been required. Version 1 (3/96) contained information only for the 1997 E39 (5 Series). Version 2 (5/96)
contained information for the E39 (5 Series), E38 (7 Series), and E31 (8 Series). The third printing (Version 3) accompanying this bulletin contains
information on all 1997 models. For easier identification, the model(s) covered by each printing are noted on the back cover of the statements.
Please be aware that because of the decision to include 3-year/36,000-mile Scheduled Maintenance on all 1997 BMWs (except the 750iL and
850Ci, which are covered by 4-year/50,000-mile Full Maintenance) retailed after October 1, 1996, major revisions have been required to the
Service and Warranty Information Statement. Please check the portfolio of any eligible vehicles retailed after October 1, 1996 to ensure that the
customer is being supplied with this latest version of the 1997 Service and Warranty Information Statement.
Warranty Information must be readily available to the consumer before a purchase is made. Moreover, a Service and Warranty Information
Statement must be given to the consumer with an explanation at the time of delivery. Every vehicle shipped from the BMW Vehicle Processing
Centers will have the Service and Warranty Information Statement in the glove box. If a vehicle is received without a Service and Warranty
Information Statement, please order the booklet required following the procedure noted below.
Requests for additional Service and Warranty Information Statements should be addressed to:
Service Engineering
BMW of North America, Inc.
1 BMW Plaza
Montvale, N.J. 07645
New Environmentally Safe Parts Washer

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 11 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New Environmentally Safe Parts Washer
MODELS:
All
Situation:
The use of mineral spirits and other petrochemicals for the purposes of degreasing vehicle components has become highly regulated in the
workplace. These chemicals may have adverse effects on the environment.
Correction:
ChemFree TM Corporation offers for sale to BMW dealers the ChemFree SmartWasher TM. The SmartWasher utilizes an environmentally friendly
parts washing system. The SmartWasher system continues BMW's policy of actively pursuing products which reduce the Environmental
Regulatory impact of service shop operations and positively affect the environment by controlling pollution. The SmartWasher was tested and
approved by BMW under actual shop conditions.
The SmartWasher can save you money.
[email protected]
106
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 628
1. No administrative, transportation or disposal costs for flammable petrochemical solvents.
2. No expensive fluid changes. It uses a safe (water based) solution that maintains its effectiveness through repeated uses and requires no
replacement.
3. No expensive disposal contracts or regulatory reporting required since no hazardous by-products are created.
4. No monthly service costs or maintenance contracts are required.
How the SmartWasher works
1. The SmartWasher will not create environmental or employee hazardous material safety concerns. The cleaning fluid is a PH balanced fluid
(PH = 7 which is the PH of water). There is no need for special disposal of regulatory reporting. The SmartWasher uses Bioremediation
which is a process that uses live microorganisms called OzzyEnzymes to eat and digest the contaminants such as grease that is removed from
dirty parts. The cleaning fluid is nonflammable, has no flash point and is nontoxic.
2. The cleaning solution is kept so clean by the OzzyEnzymes that it never requires replacement. Additional fluid needs to be added periodically
because of evaporation.
3. The cleaning solution is a powerful degreaser. It does not use harsh solvents to dissolve the grease like conventional parts washers. The
SmartWasher uses a fluid that breaks the surface tension of the grease and then lifts the grease off of the part.
What must be periodically replaced
1. The solution must be periodically topped off due to evaporation. The "add fluid" light will let you know when to do this.
2. The filter must be replaced once a month in order to maintain the optimum level of microbe effectiveness.
The OzzyEnzymes are Safe
Completely safe. All types of microorganisms exist in your every day life. The microorganisms used in this product are so safe that they were used
to help clean up the Alaskan Oil spill from the Valdez in 1989.
Below is a list of attachments with this bulletin.
[email protected]
107
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 629
[email protected]
108
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 630
^ An MSDS Material Safety Date Sheet for the filter
[email protected]
109
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 631
[email protected]
110
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 632
^ An MSDS Material Safety Date Sheet for the degreasing solution
[email protected]
111
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 633
^ A copy of "The Alternate Cleaning Solution"
[email protected]
112
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 634
^ An order form
Ordering Information:
The ChemFree SmartWasher is available for purchase through the BMW Service Equipment Program. included is an order form for your
convenience. All orders must be sent to BMW to receive the special pricing. Order forms should be taxed to:
Bob Lyons @ 201 930 8401
Special offer:
ChemFree is so confident in the SmartWasher that they will send you a unit on a free 30 day free trial. If you are pleased with the SmartWasher and
wish to keep it after the 30 day free trial, you will be invoiced. If you are not pleased with the SmartWasher you can return it with no obligation. To
apply for this special deal simply fill out the enclosed form and fax it to:
Bob Lyons @ 201 930 8401
Additional information regarding the SmartWasher can be obtained from ChemFree at:
[email protected]
113
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 635
Tel: 770 564 5580 or Fax 770 564 5533
Pricing:
Smartwasher-including 20 gallons
SW1 degreasing solution and 1 filter $1073.00
SW-1 degreasing solution (5 gallon) $42.20
FL-3 SmartFilter (1) $7.40
TIS - Software Updated

Group 10
TIS
Bulletin Number
10 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Updated TIS Software
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
Updated TIS software dated 9/96 now contains the following:
^ The E36/Z3 repair manual has been updated.
^ The E38 and E39 repair manuals have been updated to include the glass sunroof.
^ The M44 and M52 repair manual groups have been updated.
^ ABS Mark 20 has been added to the E36 repair manual.
^ Technical Data and Tightening Torques from 1988 for E31, E32, E34, E36, E38, E39.
^ In the Administration screen there is a new button called "KDS". The intent of this button is to allow the operator to download the latest wheel
alignment specifications onto a floppy disc. The disc may then be loaded into the Hunter KDS alignment machine.
NOTE:
At this time this function will not work with Hunter Alignment equipment. When operation has been established you will be notified.
^ TIS Version 9/96 is distributed through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. All dealers will automatically receive 2 TIS CDs free of charge.
Dealers with a second DIS Tester should order a TIS CD as follows:
P/N 01 57 9 788 177 Price = Free of charge

(included in DIS agreement)
Dealers with a second EPC/TIS Server should order a TIS CD as follows:
P/N 01 57 9 788 607 Price = $75.00 each
Dealers ordering a TIS CD for additional EPC/TIS Servers must use the 607 part number. *Dealers ordering a TIS CD for their authorized second
DIS Tester may use the 177 part number.
[email protected]
114
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 636
TIS CD for DIS Tester
P/N 01 57 9 788 177
Price = Free of Charge to DIS users (included in each monthly DIS payment)
TIS CD for EPC/TIS Server
P/N 01 57 9 788 607
Price = First CD shipped free automatically, additional CDs are $75.00 each
TIS LOADING INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIS TESTER
Loading time is approximately 1.5 hours.
9. Select "OK".
11. Select "End".
12. Select "Quit".
TIS LOADING INSTRUCTIONS FOR EPC/TIS SERVER
Please refer to applicable loading/updating instructions received from ADP or Reynolds and Reynolds.
PROPER CARE OF CDs
1. Never handle a CD by the top or bottom; only touch the edges.
2. Do not affix paper or tape, and avoid scratching either side of the disc.
3. The disc revolves at high speed within the CD changer, so defective (cracked or badly bent) discs should not be used.
4. Dust and/or finger smudges will have no direct effect on the signal recorded on the disc, but dirt can decrease the amount of light reflected
from the recorded surface, thus affecting quality. If the disc should become soiled, gently wipe the surface with a soft lint-free cloth, wiping
from the center of the disc to the edge.
5. Do not use record cleaning sprays or anti-static agents. Such volatile chemicals as benzene and thinner can damage the surface of the disc and
should not be used.
6. As with traditional audio records, compact discs are made of plastic. To avoid warping, keep the discs in their cases and do not store them in
CD Return Procedure
[email protected]
115
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 637
- EPC
- TIS
- DIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 O43EPC
- P/N 86 00 0 000 045TIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 046DIS
All returns of CDs will be sent to USCO; please refer to Parts Bulletin 1-33 for complete details.
Engine Repair Manual - Microfiche Update

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
Bulletin Number
00 26 90 (3100)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1996
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 26 90 (3100) dated September 1995 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT:
Microfiche Update
The following microfiche has been updated.
Description Date Part Number
E38 Repair Manual No. 3 9/95 01 51 9 788 321

E36 Repair Manual No.10 9/95 01 51 9 784 761
Note:
A listing of all current microfiche is printed in this bulletin.
These microfiche will be sent to all automotive BMW dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional fiche may be ordered from
your Parts Distribution Center.
[email protected]
116
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 638
LIST OF CURRENT U.S. SERVICE MICROFICHE

Warranty Defect Code Microfiche - Revision

Group 01
Warranty
Bulletin Number
01 02 90
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1996
Warranty
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 010290 dated February 1996 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
Attention:
Service Manager Warranty Administrator

Service Advisor Parts Manager
SUBJECT:
Revised Defect Code Microfiche
Situation:
Enclosed is Edition 28 of the Defect Code Microfiche, dated August 1996 (Warranty Administrator Only). This new fiche is one page and contains
all the changes and additions to the defect code system since Edition 27. Please ensure that all concerned personnel are informed of this new fiche
and that all previous editions are discarded immediately.
[email protected]
117
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 639
The defect code microfiche is divided into the same numerical sections/groups as the flat rate manual, the parts microfiche and other service
publications. When selecting a defect code, you begin by determining the actual cause of the failure.
Each failure is identified by a 10-digit defect code. The first 6 digits identify the component that failed. The next 2 digits (positions 7 and 8)
identify the failure code. The final 2 digits are the vendor code and in most cases will be 00.
The requirement for use of vendor codes on domestic supplied parts and accessories during DCS warranty claim entry has been eliminated;
however, the special defect codes outlined on the attachment should still be utilized when appropriate.
If the cause of a failure cannot be lined to one specific component, the failure should be coded based on the customer's perception of the failure by
utilizing the new observational findings defect codes as outlined on the defect code microfiche. This method of defect coding should only be used if
the cause of the failure cannot be traced to a single component.
Warranty claims received with proper defect codes provide valuable product quality feedback. Your efforts to properly code warranty claims are
appreciated.
Special Defect Codes
Certified Pre-Owned BMW Protection Plan
Defect codes for claims submitted under this Plan are provided in the Certified Pre-Owned BMW Vehicle Program Dealer Operations Manual.
Please refer to the Dealer Operations Manual for complete Program Details. A copy of this manual should also be found in the Warranty Policy and
Procedures Manual under Section 9 - Special Programs.
Core Credits Warranty
85 99 00 01 CN (Facing PDC is Mt. Olive, New Jersey)

85 99 00 01 CC (Facing PDC is Ontario, California)
Freight Reimbursement - Monthly
00 11 11 22 BL
Goodwill
Rental Reimbursement (Authorized by Area Team)
11 00 99 99 ER Eastern Region Dealers

SR Southern Region Dealers
WR Western Region Dealers
CR Central Region Dealers
Towing Reimbursement (Authorized by Area Team)
00 00 00 99 ER Eastern Region Dealers

Goodwill Repairs (Authorized by Area Team)
The first eight digits of the defect code must describe the defect. The last two digits of the defect code identifies the region.
ER Eastern Region Dealers

Dealer Administered Customer Assistance Program
SA :
The first eight digits of the defect code must describe the defect. The last two digits of the defect code will always be SA.
[email protected]
118
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 640
Special Defect Codes
Quality Service
Description Defect Code
Display Vehicle Check (QCI) 11 00 00 77 BV
Delivery Vehicle Check (QCI) 11 11 00 77 BV
Quality Certification II (QCII) 11 12 00 77 BV
Please refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual and current Service Information Bulletins for proper application of all Special Defect
Codes.
Microfiche - Service Information Bulletins List

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
Bulletin Number
00 40 89
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Microfiche - Service Information Bulletins - Edition September 30, 1996
[email protected]
119
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 641
All current Service Information, Technical Reference, Information Diagnosis/coding and Special Service Bulletins (valid through September 30,
1996) have been incorporated onto microfiche.
Each category of bulletins has been separated onto individual fiche and is further identified by a colored border on the fiche.
Description Color of Border No. of Fiche
Service Information Bulletins Green 17

Technical Reference Information Yellow 4
Information Diagnosis/coding Blue 1
Special Service Bulletins Orange 1
One set of microfiche will be sent to every automotive BMW dealer under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
Additional microfiche sets can be ordered from Product Engineering (a pre-printed order form is enclosed).
Item No. Description Qty. Price
SD 89-009 Microfiche-Service Information 1 = 1 set $20.00
The paper versions of all bulletins will continue to be available (refer to S.I. 00 06 88 (1615) for ordering information of a complete set).
TIS Software Update

Bulletin #: 10 03 96
Date: March 1996
System: DIS/TIS
Version: 2/96
Model: All
Control Module: N/A
Subject:
Updated TIS Software. This IDC supersedes IDC 10 O2 96 dated January 1996.
Situation:
The updated CD now contains:
^ Technical Data and Tightening Torques from 1988 for E31, E32, E34, E36, E38, E39.
^ Dealers with a second DIS Tester should order a TIS CD (using the P/N below) from the PDC.
^ In the Administration screen there is a new button called "KDS". The intent of this button is to allow the operator to download the latest wheel
alignment specifications onto a floppy disc. The disc may then be loaded into the Hunter KDS alignment machine. NOTE: At this time this
function will not work with Hunter Alignment equipment. When operation has been established you will be notified.
^ Z3 repair manual, Tech Data and Tightening Torques have been added.
^ E38 with M62 repair manual information, Tech Data and Tightening Torques have been added.
^ The Service Bulletin listing has been changed. Only the first 6 digits of the Service Bulletin number are in TIS. Example: 04 25 95 (4322) can
be accessed in TIS by typing 042595. Leave the last 3 digits in the input box blank. Note - Service Bulletins are not sorted numerically in the
2/96 TIS CD. This will be corrected in the next issue.
TIS Version 2/96 is distributed through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
TIS CD
P/N 01 57 9 788 177
Price = Free of Charge to DIS users
LOADING INSTRUCTIONS FOR TIS
[email protected]
120
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 642
9. Press "OK".
10. When the software has finished loading press "OK".
11. Press "End".
12. Press "Quit".
PROPER CARE AND FEEDING OF CDs
from the recorded surface, thus affecting quality. If the disc should become soiled, gently wipe the surface with a soft lintfree cloth, wiping
should not be used.
CD Return Procedures
- EPC
- TIS
- DIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 043 EPC

- P/N 86 00 0 000 045 TIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 046 DIS
All returns of CDs will be sent to USCO; please refer to Parts Bulletin I-33 for complete details.

[email protected]
121
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 643
DIS Maintenance and Operation

Group 07
DIS
Bulletin Number
07 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1996
Product Engineering
This Service Information Diagnosis/Coding bulletin replaces S.I. 04 12 95 dated June 1995 which is hereby deleted. It should be removed and
discarded from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
DIS Maintenance and Operation
MODEL:
All
Situation:
Due to a software modification introduced as of CD 7.1, the main power switch should be left in the "ON" position at all times. Especially in humid
climates this will help prevent the buildup of moisture in the unit. At the end of every service day the DIS monitor should be turned off.
DIS down time due to heat related breakdowns may be avoided by following the simple maintenance procedure outlined below. The described
maintenance should be performed every month during the summer months and every other month thereafter.
Remove left hand outside cover
Brush any dust or dirt from the capacitor casing (1)
Clear any dirt or debris from the air outlet grates on the bottom of the air conditioning unit.
Blow compressed air through the capacitor casing.
Install outside cover.
Modified Vehicles - Warranty Exclusion

Group 01
Warranty
Bulletin Number
01 03 97
[email protected]
122
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 644
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1997
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Modified Vehicles
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty and Emission Warranty provide coverage to the BMW vehicle against defects in materials and workmanship.
The proper understanding and interpretation of these warranties is vital to maximizing customer satisfaction and maintaining confidence in the
product and the BMW organization.
The following is a reprint of BMW's policy on vehicle modifications.
Warranty does not apply to the following:
"Modification of the vehicle or installation of any performance accessories or components attached to the vehicle which alters the original
engineering and/or operating specifications or which result in damage to the other original components, electrical interference, electrical short,
radio static, water leaks and wind noise."
In addition, warranty coverage may be null and void in the following situations:
"This warranty shall be null and void if the vehicle identification number has been altered or cannot be read, if the odometer has been replaced or
altered and the true mileage cannot be determined, if the vehicle has been declared a total loss or sold for salvage purposed, or if the vehicle has
been used in any competitive event."
In general terms, the BMW warranty on a component is void due to a modification where the modification, alteration or installation of an
aftermarket part was directly responsible for the failure.
Installation of an aftermarket part or accessory does not necessarily void the vehicle warranties. The scope of possible alterations is very large and
therefore a listing of all situations would be impossible. Common sense must prevail and in a questionable situation the retail center staff should ask
for assistance by calling the Warranty Department. Additional information on the retailer's responsibilities can be found in Service Information
bulletin 00 35 89 (1976), 00 08 90 (3028) and the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual.
For example, a vehicle with a modified engine control module still retains all warranties provided and may in fact have additional warranty
coverage from the aftermarket supplier. A repair is not covered by the BMW warranties if the modification has contributed to or was directly the
cause of the failure.
When unknown, modification of a vehicle can complicate troubleshooting and may result in multiple repair attempts. Over the years, BMW NA has
been supplied with the Vehicle Identification Numbers of some vehicles which have reportedly been modified. These VINs have been entered into
BMW's computer and will provide you with the message to "Call the Warranty Department" when inquired upon using "Delivery Date Inquiry" or
"Vehicle History Inquiry" via the BMW Dealer Communication System (DCS).
The purpose of flagging the Vin is not to be mis-interpreted. By obtaining the details of the modification, an easier diagnosis of the vehicle can
often be made. The Warranty Department will define, based on the information supplied by the BMW retailer, whether or not the modification
should or should not be covered under the BMW warranties.
Please call at any time for warranty guidance on the issue of modifications to BMWs.
Diagnostic Time - Warranty Reimbursement

Group 01
Warranty
Bulletin Number
01 09 95 (4318)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1997
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin is being re-issued without changes to emphasize the subject material. (Previously issued December 1995)
SUBJECT:
Reimbursement for Diagnostic Work
MODEL:
All
[email protected]
123
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 645
Situation:
This bulletin restates warranty policy for diagnostic time utilized while addressing a customer complaint.
Current Policy
BMW currently provides one of the most liberal policies in the industry for warranty repairs. The reason for this policy is to permit you to perform
all warranty work and receive full reimbursement on one claim.
1. Valid diagnostic time necessary in conjunction with performing a warranty repair may be claimed for that repair.
2. Valid diagnostic time (up to a maximum of one half hour) which initially does not result in locating a defect may later be added to the
warranty claim submitted in conjunction with a final defect repair.
3. Area Team authorization is available permitting you to claim for diagnostic time per repair order.
"Enhancement to Current Policy"
Warning Light on - (SRS, ABS, Check Engine Light, Etc.)

Also other diagnostic time - no problem found
Warranty Index over 100%
Should a customer request repairs due to a warning light being illuminated, the fault memory should be interrogated and diagnosis performed as
necessary. BMW will cover the diagnosis and clearing fault memory under the terms of the applicable warranty for up to one half hour which may
immediately be claimed. This policy also applies to other intermittent problems where diagnosis is performed but no problem found. Should the
diagnostic time exceed one half hour, Area Team authorization is required.
Warranty Index at or below 100%
Dealers who have achieved a warranty index at or below 100% during the preceding 3 months, do not require Area Team authorization should
diagnosis time exceed one half hour when no problem is found.
In General
Many of the situations which result in extended diagnostic time, lengthy road tests by the technician and work performed unnecessarily are the
result of incomplete service write-up. Service Advisors need to take the time to carefully listen to the customer, inspect the vehicle during the
write-up process verifying the VIN, mileage, vehicle condition and customer complaint. Often this may require a test drive with the customer
explaining in detail how a system was designed and operates or otherwise defining the customer complaint. Time expended and parts used
unnecessarily by the technician adds to the cost of ownership and customer dissatisfaction.
Proper component testing can lead to a repair rather than the replacement of a part. The replacement of an electrical component, for example, can
often be avoided by physically separating, cleaning, inspecting for integrity and repairing the connection prior to reinstalling the part. Remember, a
valid warranty claim does not require a part being replaced.
Test drives to warm up the vehicle, clarify a customer complaint and verify the quality of a repair are not covered by warranty.
Warranty Information:
Detect Code -
Always select the nearest code available for the cause or complaint requiring the diagnosis or cleaning the fault memory, however, if no further
problem found enter 7 as the 7th & 8th digit.
xx xx xx 77 xx
Flat Rate -
0000005 - 3 for interrogating the fault memory when appropriate.
0099000 - WT for additional diagnosis and troubleshooting time as necessary when no problem is found.
Comments -
In all cases, please be specific as to what work was performed.
Quality Observation Report
A Quality Observation Report (pink sheet) for each case where no problem was found, must be submitted. The report should detail the diagnostic
procedure performed and the fact that after diagnosis, no further repair is indicated.
[email protected]
124
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 646
Documentation Requirement
In all cases, valid time documentation must be maintained and correct diagnostic procedure be followed. Diagnostic time in excess of one half hour
normally indicates the need to contact the technical hotline.
DIS printouts are to be attached to the repair order on file and provided upon request. With the release of software version 5.0 for DIS, a completed
diagnosis report must be produced and kept with the R.O. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedure Manual, Section 5, 6 & 8.
All warranty payments are subject to audit.
Dealer Letter
April 1997
To: All BMW Retailers
Subject: Diagnostic Time - Warranty Reimbursement
Dear Retailer and Operating Managers
Customers have identified "vehicle not repaired right the first time" as the biggest reason for not giving a retailer an excellent CSI rating. Some
retailers may believe that it is BMW's worktime policy that restricts their ability to diagnose a vehicle properly.
To address this misperception, we have reissued the December 1995 bulletin, 01 09 95 (4318), announcing a warranty policy enhancement on
diagnostic time. This policy permits payment of diagnostic time when it occurs rather than in conjunction with a later warranty repair. In addition,
this bulletin deals with diagnostic time when no problem is found. It permits retailers with a warranty index at 100% or less for 3 consecutive
months to immediately claim for diagnostic time without limits, whereas, a retailer whose index is over 100% have a 1/2 hour limit. Note: High
index retailers can exceed this 1/2 hour limit and still be paid on a case by case basis with Market Team authorization. A copy of the bulletin is
attached.
Finally, this bulletin has given us the opportunity to demonstrate that good performance should be rewarded with less procedural restrictions.
It has always been BMW's policy to pay all retailers diagnostic time when performed in conjunction with finding a defect and completing a repair.
A credible time control system must be in place documenting the repair and the technician's work day. Good technical judgment must be exercised,
the time record must support the request and the time should be reasonably compatible with that experienced by other retailers for similar work.
We do request your support in two areas. First, we need to make service advisors aware that many of the situations which result in extended
diagnostic time and other work performed unnecessarily are the result of incomplete service write-up. Service Advisors need to take the time to
carefully listen to the customer's concern, verify the condition and accurately document the job request on the repair order. This may require the
Service Advisor to inspect the vehicle and perform a road test with the customer for clarification. Time expended and parts installed unnecessarily
by the technician adds to the cost of ownership, loss of confidence in the vehicle and ultimately customer dissatisfaction.
Secondly, we need to be sure that work is being assigned to the most qualified technicians. A master technician should be assigned, especially in
cases of intermittent problems and other difficult diagnosis. A properly trained technician with experience, given adequate repair order instructions
will be best equipped to resolve these most difficult situations.
Above all, we need to encourage all service personnel to take all reasonable care necessary to "diagnose the problem and perform the repair
correctly the first time." Accordingly, the retailer work time objective of 9% was eliminated effective April 1, 1997.
To assist you in troubleshooting high index situations, WT will still be tracked on your Warranty Composite.
It is BMW's intent to continue to introduce programs that recognize positive achievements. Ultimately, we plan to apply this philosophy to all areas
of claim processing and warranty part return activities.
Please take a personal interest in your monthly warranty performance as you do with your Customer Satisfaction Index since they are both
inter-related. Both will be a determining factor for program participation at a level that provides you with the greatest freedom of operation.
Technical Service Bulletin # IDC1017957 Date: 950601
Service Information - Updated TIS Software

Bulletin #: IDC 1017/95-J
Date: June 1995
Section: 7
System: DIS/TIS
Version: 3/95
[email protected]
125
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 647
Model: All
Control Module: N/A
Subject:
Updated TIS Software. This IDC supersedes IDC 025/95-7 dated March 1995.
Situation:
^ Technical Data and Tightening Torques from 1988 for E31, E32, E34, E36 and E38.
^ Repair Manual, Tightening Torques and Technical data for the M52 engine.
^ This CD has a version date of 3/95. This means that all Service Informations up to and including 2/95 (release date) are on this CD. Also, some,
but not all of the 3/95 Service Informations have been included. Please note that the date that can be retrieved under "TIS administration" is not
the version number. Please ignore this number.
Distribution of TIS Version 3/95 is through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
TIS CD
P/N 01 57 9 788 177
Price = Free of Charge to DIS Users
LOADING INSTRUCTIONS FOR TIS
Note:
Loading time takes approximately 1.75 hours.
3. Press "Deactivate CD-ROM."
4. Remove TIS carrier.
5. Replace 11/94 TIS CD with new 3195 TIS CD. Only handle the sides of the CD.
6. Replace TIS carrier in the drive.
7. Highlight TIS drive (screen will say "Not Active").
8. Select "Activate CD-ROM."
9. Select "OK."
10. Select "OK" at the TIS installation completion screen.
11. Switch the DIS monitor power switch off when the cursor appears.
12. Press the monitor switch again to reboot the system when the DIS is powered down.
should not be used.
[email protected]
126
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 648
CD Return Procedure
As agreed in your DIS USE AGREEMENT and defined in the "General Terms of License Agreement for BMW EPC/TIS" under section 6
BMW will add a core charge to each CD after the initial shipment of CDs to your dealership has been completed. There will be three types of CDs:
- EPC
- TIS
- DIS
will also be sent out without a core charge on the initial shipment. Thereafter, any new CDs which replace your existing CDs will have a core
- P/N 86 00 0 000 043 EPC
- P/N 86 00 0 000 045 TIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 046 DIS
All returns of CDs will be sent to USCO; please refer to Parts Bulletin I-33 for complete details.
Tools - Infrared Transmission Device (IR)

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 05 95 (4166)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1995
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Infrared Transmission Device (IR)
MODELS:
DIS Tester
Situation:
The DIS Tester has been prewired for the IR transmitter that will operate your printer. If you have not yet received a printer for your DIS, please
fax the following to Product Engineering at (201) 930-8401:
1. Dealership Name
2. Contact Name
3. Phone Number
4. Dealer Number
Your printer shipment will be traced and you will be contacted. The printer is a Hewlett Packard HP4ML. At this time a limited quantity of IR
Transmission Devices are available. One will be sent to your dealership as they become available. IR Transmission Devices cannot be ordered from
the Parts Department.
Included with the Infrared Transmission Device is a printer enclosure. The enclosure must be mounted in a suitable location (refer to instructions
for mounting location) and the printer must reside inside.
The enclosure is equipped with a fan and air filter. It is designed to protect the printer from the harsh shop environment. The printer must be
[email protected]
127
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 649
mounted in the enclosure. Noncompliance with this will result in non-warranty repairs.
Before you start your installation, make sure that your tester has been prewired as follows:
1. Remove rear vertical boom cover (fig. 3/d in the installation instructions included with this bulletin).
2. There should be two cables with connectors (unattached) in the boom. One thick black or grey cable, the other a black/brown two-wire cable
with a brown plug.
If you do not see both of these cables, go no further. Contact the Siemens Hotline at (800) 215-1646. All future service for the IR Transmission
Device will be handled by Siemens. The printer service will be handled in accordance with the instructions in Service Information 04 16 94 (4026).
A set of corrected installation instructions has been included with this bulletin. Please remove and discard the instructions that are in the box. If you
have difficulty with the installation, contact the BMW Technical Hotline at (800) 472-7222. There will be no extra charge for the IR Transmission
Device. The IR unit must be installed by dealership personnel. Any installation costs, such as wall anchors, are the responsibility of your dealership.
The IR unit and printer enclosure remain the property of BMW of North America, Inc.
Dealer Communications System - Enhancements

Group 01
Warranty
Bulletin Number
01 04 95 (4209)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1995
Product Engineering
ATTENTION:
Dealer Principal General Manager
Service Manager Warranty Administrator
SUBJECT:
DCS Enhancements
MODELS:
All
SITUATION:
BMW NA is pleased to announce three enhancements to the Warranty functions on the Dealer Communications System with release 8.0. These
enhancements are designed to improve warranty administration.
The enhancements are:
WEEKLY CREDIT NOTE SUMMARY
The Weekly Credit Note Summary, formerly transmitted to all dealers through DCS on a weekly basis, will be available for transmission on a daily
basis. The title of the credit note report has been changed to Daily Detailed Credit Notes."
WARRANTY COMPOSITE
The Warranty Composite, formerly available to your dealership through your BMW Area Team, is now available via DCS. The Warranty
Composite will be an option on the Inquiries Menu off of the DCS Service Menu.
[email protected]
128
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 650
Sample Warranty Claim Sheet
TRAINING
Warranty Composite Training is now provided under topic # 15 "Inquiry" of the Warranty Training System available via the Service function of the
Training Menu.
An updated Warranty Manual is being printed for your reference. This manual, containing details on the enhanced DCS function and updated
Policy and Procedures, will be mailed to your dealership shortly.
Your suggestions on future changes and improvements are always encouraged and will be evaluated and incorporated as possible with upcoming
DCS releases.
[email protected]
129
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 651
SPECIAL FEDERAL EXPRESS AIRBILL
AUDIO SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS AND CORE RETURN FORM
[email protected]
130
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 652
You will be charged a $ 50.00 diagnostic fee if this form is not completed or not returned with the unit.
Service Information - Microfiche/Diskette Bulletins

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
Bulletin Number
00 40 89 (1999)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1995
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 40 89 (1999) dated February 1995 and both Attachments, which should be removed from your
S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT:
[email protected]
131
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 653
1) MICROFICHE - SERVICE INFORMATION BULLETINS - EDITION MARCH 31, 1995
2) DISKETTE - BMW SERVICE BULLETIN INDEX - EDITION MARCH 31, 1995
1) All current Service Information, Technical Reference and Special Service Bulletins (valid through March 31, 1995) have been incorporated
onto microfiche.
DESCRIPTION COLOR OF BORDER NO. OF FICHE

Information Diagnosis/Coding Blue 1
2) A diskette containing an index of all current Service Information bulletins issued through March 31, 1995 is now available. The purpose of
this software program is to provide you with a quick overview of all applicable Service Information bulletin titles via computer display or
printer hard copy.
One set of microfiche and one diskette will be sent to every automotive BMW dealer under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
[email protected]
132
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 654
Additional microfiche sets and diskettes can be ordered from Product Engineering (a printable order form is illustrated).
NOTE
The paper versions of all bulletins will continue to be available (refer to S.I. 00 06 88 (1615) for ordering information of a complete set).
Installation Instructions
BMW SERVICE INFORMATION INDEX PROGRAM
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
[email protected]
133
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 655
The following instructions will install/update your Service Information Bulletin Index and Retrieval Software.
Please follow these instructions to install (or update the existing) Service Information Bulletin Index program on your PC.
1) Turn computer ON.
2) Open diskette drive door.
3) Insert diskette into drive A with label side up and towards you. Do not force or bend the diskette.
4) Exit your DOS menu and answer "NO" to backup.
5) At the "C: DOS>" prompt, type the command "A:INSTALL" and press ENTER.
NOTE
Some PCs are not configured to display the correct prompt. If this occurs type the command "PROMPT $P$G" and press ENTER to display
accurate directory listings.
EXAMPLE: Exiting the DCS menu and the prompt reads "C:\>" or "C>" instead of "C:\DCS>"
6) Installation screen will appear; it will prompt the user to:
a. Press any key to continue installation.
b. Press the "Ctrl" and "Pause/Break" key at the same time to cancel installation.
7) When installation is complete a "0:">" prompt will appear.
8) If the prompt does not read "0: DCS>", type command "CD DOS" and press ENTER.
9) Entering and Exiting the Program:
a. At the "C: DCS>" prompt, type the command "ANA". This will execute the Service Information program.
b. At the "0: DCS>" prompt, type the command "AUTOEXEC". This will execute the DCS menu.
DBMENU Screen Layout
[email protected]
134
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 656
DBMENU SCREEN LAYOUT
MENU OPTIONS
[email protected]
135
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 657
When No. 1 is selected, the records will be sequenced by Model Code. This will place the Bulletins in order first by Group Number then by
Bulletin Issue Sequence Number.
[email protected]
136
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 658
When No. "3" is selected, the records will be sequenced by Body Code. This will place the Bulletins in order first by Group Number then by
[email protected]
137
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 659
User Prompt for Selection # 4: Enter Bulletin No._ _ _ _ _(_ _ _)
When No. "4" is selected, the records will be sequenced by Bulletin Number. This will place the Bulletins in order first by Group Number then by
Two new options have been added to the Menu. These options will allow the user to Display only those items desired and Print index records from
the file.
1) Display option: to activate the user will have to use the "arrow" keys to highlight the option and press the ENTER key.
The Display option is used to display:

a. All Bulletins
b. All Service Actions.
c. All Recall Campaigns.
d. All General Actions.
e. All of b,c,d.
After the option is selected the user will be returned to the main menu. Only the items that qualify will be displayed on the screen.
NOTE
This display will remain active until reset by the user to the original state.
2) Print option: to activate, the user will have to use the "arrow" keys to highlight the option and press the ENTER key.
A menu will appear on the screen prompting the user to print in a selected order:
1. Bulletin order (prints all bulletins)

2. Model code.
3. Body code.
4. Engine code.
If option 2, 3, or 4 is selected a second prompt appears and asks the user to enter a code. If a code is entered, all matching codes in the index will be
printed. If left blank, all bulletins in the index will be printed in the selected order.
NOTE
The Display option can also be used in conjunction with the Print option.
Example 1:
- Display option is set for only Recall Campaigns.

- Print option is set for Bulletin order (all bulletins)
Result:
All bulletin titles with Recall Campaigns are printed.
Example 2:
[email protected]
138
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 660
- Display option is set for Recall/Service/General.

- Print option is set for Body Code.
- E-32 is entered for a Code.
Result:
All bulletin titles with Recall/Service/General actions for E32 are printed.
Example 3:
- Display option is set for ALL bulletins. Print option is set for Engine Code.
- S-38 is entered for a Code.
Result:
All bulletin titles with an Engine Code of S38 are printed.
NOTE
If code field had been left empty all bulletin titles would have been printed in Engine Code order.
WORD SEARCH OPTION
Under "Locate Options" the (Word) Search option has been activated. It allows the user to choose a keyword (example: LEAK) and searches the
entire database for bulletins having that word in its Subject. The words having LEAK as their root, such as LEAKAGE, LEAKING, and LEAKS
will also be searched for automatically. Note: When doing a "Word Search," if you don't know which Construction Group you wish to search, it
will be necessary to return to TOP (beginning of file) before you start the search. If you don't do this, it will only search from where you are
presently at in the database.
[email protected]
139
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 661
To activate the Word Search option proceed as follows:
Use "arrow" keys to highlight LOCATE option and press ENTER.
To expedite the search, if you know what Model and Construction Group you wish to search, do the following:
Highlight: 1) Model/Grp. Press ENTER.
Type: 750iL and 11. Press ENTER.
"LOCATE" will be highlighted on next screen that appears. Press ENTER.
Highlight SEARCH option. Press ENTER.
"Search for" is displayed.
Type: LEAK. Press ENTER.
First instance of key word LEAK appears.
GROUP NUMBER PRINT OPTION
This option allows the user to obtain a listing of a specific Model, Engine or Body within a particular Construction Group.
To activate this option proceed as follows:

Highlight PRINT option with "arrow" keys and press ENTER. "Print Index" will be displayed. For a specific category, type 2, 3 or 4 and press
ENTER.
"Print by Group Number?" will be displayed. Type Y(Yes) and press ENTER.
"Code equal to:" will be displayed. As an example, type 54 and press ENTER.
"Group No. equal to:" is displayed. As an example, type 54 and press ENTER.
All bulletin titles in Group 54 covering Model 325iC will be printed
If you should encounter any difficulties when using this program, please contact
Barry Janetski
c/o Anacomp, Inc.
at 708-364-6500 Ext. 348
Service Information
Bulletin #: IDC 023/94-7
Date: January 1995
Section: 7
[email protected]
140
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 662
System: DIS/TIS
Version: 9/94
Model: All
Control Module: N/A
Subject:
An updated CD has been completed for TIS.
Situation:
^ Service Information bulletins for all models from 1988.
^ Technical Data and Tightening Torques from 1988 for E31, E32, E36, E38.
^ Complete repair manuals for E36 and E38; this includes pertinent information from the Construction Group fiche.
This CD will be distributed via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
TIS CD
P/N 01 57 9 788 177
Price = Free of Charge to DIS users
Loading Instructions For Tis

1. At the DIS main screen select "Administration."
2. Select "TIS Administration."
3. Highlight the TIS drive, then press "CD-ROM Deactivate."
4. Remove TIS carrier and replace old TIS CD with new TIS CD (never touch the top or bottom surface of a CD, only handle the sides).
5. Replace TIS carrier.
6. Highlight TIS drive (screen will say "Not Active").
7. Select "CD-ROM Activate."
8. Select "TIS Installation."
9. Select "Hard Disk & CD ROM."
10. Select "OK."
11. Loading time takes approximately 3 hours.
12. When the cursor appears on the screen, switch the DIS monitor power switch off.
13. When the DIS is powered down, press the monitor switch again to reboot the system.
Care and Feeding of CD's

5. Do not use record cleaning sprays or anti-static agents. Such volatile chemicals as benzine and thinner can damage the surface of the disc and
should not be used.
CD Return Procedure
As agreed in your DIS USE AGREEMENT and defined in the "General Terms of License Agreement for BMW EPC/TIS" under Section 6
^ EPC
^ TIS
[email protected]
141
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 663
^ DIS
^ P/N 86 00 0 000 043 EPC

^ P/N 86 00 0 000 045 TIS
^ P/N 86 00 0 000 046 DIS
Electrical/Electronic Systems - Troubleshooting Hints

Group 61
Electrical Systems
Bulletin Number
61 06 92 (3582)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Troubleshooting Electrical and Electronic Problems
MODELS:
All
General
Information:
As electronically controlled systems continue to be developed and introduced in BMW vehicles, the level of complexity and sophistication of these
systems has risen dramatically in the past ten years. This does not mean, however, that the diagnosis and repair of these systems is more difficult.
On the contrary, these systems are possibly easier to diagnose, if a systematic troubleshooting method is used.
The purpose of all electrical troubleshooting is to identify and correct a malfunction which has caused a customer to complain. However, before
repairs are attempted, the following steps should be taken:
Verify the Complaint and Verify the Complaint Is A Malfunction

Verify the Complaint
Whenever possible, the repairing technician should personally verify the complaint.
Verify that the Complaint is a Malfunction
If a customer does not fully understand a particular system, he or she may complain about an aspect of operation in that system that is normal (that
is, the system is operating as designed, and therefore not malfunctioning). An example of this would be a customer complaining of "rapid vibrations
in the brake pedal during a panic stop on wet pavement." While this is a customer complaint, if the vehicle is equipped with ABS this is not
necessarily a malfunction. Determine that the system is operating correctly or incorrectly before proceeding with troubleshooting.
Refer to the Electrical Troubleshooting Manual - Diagnostic Procedures for a description of system operation, and to any related Service
Information Bulletins for changed operation (for example, changes in General Module operation from MY 92 on).
Comparing the complaint to system operation in a known good vehicle is another acceptable means of verifying a malfunction.
Check for Previous Repairs
If a system had been working properly and now exhibits a malfunction, a review of the vehicle's repair history can provide significant insights into
the problem. The improper installation of accessories, or the installation of non-approved accessories, can have detrimental effects on a variety of
systems.
Systematic Troubleshooting
Once a malfunction has been verified, troubleshooting should be devoted to finding the cause of the problem, then correcting the fault; only if the
cause is positively identified can the vehicle be confidently released to the customer.
Remember that the vast majority of causes for complaint concerning electronically-controlled systems are not exotic electronic malfunctions; rather,
the cause is almost always a simple electrical fault, such as an open circuit, a short circuit (to B+ or B-), or excessive resistance (poor contact).
[email protected]
142
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 664
If the faulted system is equipped with self-diagnostics, the first step should be to call up any flash codes (for systems - without the diagnostic link)
or to read out the control module's fault memory (for systems with the diagnostic link). Read out and print the contents of all systems' fault
memories.
Refer to the appropriate Electrical Troubleshooting Manual and examine the schematics of the system circuitry. If several systems are faulted,
common or shared circuits may provide a clue that will aid in more efficient diagnosis.
On systems which have no self diagnostic capabilities (or on any self-diagnostic systems which does not provide clear evidence of a fault location),
an examination of all circuits of the system should be performed. Installation of the appropriate adapter ("break-out box") between the control
module and harness will allow the technician to monitor the electrical activity at each pin of the control module.
Inputs, Processing, and Outputs
Before any parts (such as a control module) are condemned as faulty, thorough investigation of all circuits connected to the control module should
be performed. (If a system has self-diagnostic capabilities, this should be done if the troubleshooting for a specific fault is inconclusive.)
All electronically controlled systems should be approached with one rule in mind:
A control module will not produce the desired output if one or more of its inputs is impaired.
Consider a standard 4-pin relay:
[email protected]
143
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 665
When switch (S1) closes, the contacts should close and battery voltage should appear at terminal 87.
If any one of the inputs is impaired or missing, the desired output will also be impaired or missing. Since all inputs must be within nominal values
at the control module (in this case, a relay), this is the point at which measurements are taken.
The same approach should be taken for all electronically controlled systems: verify that all inputs are present before replacing a control module. If a
control module is producing the proper output (in the above example, battery voltage at pin 87) and the load is not operated, it is obvious that the
load or the wiring between it and pin 87 is faulty. If all inputs are present, and no output is present at the control module, then and only then should
the control module be replaced.
Important:
If a control module is determined to be defective, the printout from the Service Tester showing control module identification page, test codes, and
all applicable troubleshooting must be attached to the control module being returned under warranty. The Technical Hotline contact number must
be noted on the repair order and claim.
In all cases, verify proper voltage level at all power inputs, and check all grounds by measuring voltage drop. Depending on the type of input, other
signals (e.g., A.C. voltage, frequency, etc.) may have to be verified. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic manual for this information.
Common Sense Hints
- Always "check the basics": look for such obvious problems as battery state of charge, loose battery cables, defective fuses, etc. Very few
things are as discouraging as troubleshooting alternator noise in a sound system for four hours, only to discover that a partially discharged
battery was causing increased alternator current and ripple.
[email protected]
144
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 666
- When reading the fault memory of a control module with the diagnostic link, remember that the message "no faults found" simply means that
all monitored circuits are intact and within limits. Some circuits cannot be monitored for faults; for example, it is "okay" for the stop light
switch to be either open or closed as far as the control module is concerned - check the switch operation by monitoring its status.
- Intermittent electrical problems can be difficult to diagnose. Gather as much information as possible from the customer concerning the
conditions under which the problem occurs - this may provide valuable diagnostic clues.
- When trying to locate an intermittent open or short in a circuit, attach the meter to the circuit (according to the test being performed) and flex,
twist, pull and shake the harness or wire in question. Refer to Section 0130 of the Diagnostic Manual for meter and BMW Service Tester
hookups.
- If unapproved accessories are installed, they should be disconnected electrically from the vehicle's original harnesses - if they are not, voltage
and resistance measurements may be erroneous. Such unapproved accessories may in fact be the cause of the malfunction being diagnosed.
- Always write down all of your measurements. If the BMW Technical Hotline is contacted, the Technical Specialists must have all of this
information.
- Any problems which elude BMW Diagnostic Procedures must be reported to BMW.
Please follow these procedures whenever troubleshooting electrical problems. A systematic, thorough approach to troubleshooting is one of the
easiest ways to ensure customer satisfaction, by finding and repairing electrical problems quickly and correctly.Technical Service Bulletin #
0423881722 Date: 881001
Tools - Rivet Pliers For Plastic Rivets

GROUP 04
Tools and
Equipment
[email protected]
145
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 667
Bulletin Number
04 23 88 (1722)
Montvale, NJ
October 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Rivet Pliers (for plastic rivets)
Blind rivets (P/N 51 11 1 942 789 and 51 21 1 916 976) are being used more often for retaining various attachment parts. Due to the unique size of
the above mentioned rivets, a special rivet plier has been developed. The chuck sizes are 4 mm, 5 mm and 6 mm.
This tool may be ordered directly from your Parts Distribution Center.
BMW Special Tools

GROUP 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 21 88 (1707)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
BMW Special Tools
The special tools have been developed to ensure professional repair work, and will be sent to all Automotive BMW dealers under the Automatic
Tool Shipment Program.
[email protected]
146
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 668
Due to a design modification to the general module for the central body electronics (ZKE), it is no longer possible to remove the module with the
existing puller (P/N 88 88 6 005 590). The development of a new bridge allows the puller to once more be used on all modules.
Due to the new size of the H31 pressure accumulator, it is necessary to use a new set of holding jaws to remove the DS Regulator.
[email protected]
147
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 669
The tools will not be included in the Automatic Tool Shipment, but may be ordered directly from your Parts Distribution Center.
Special pliers have been developed to ease the removal of spark plug connectors.
A new set of jaws have been developed to use on the E30 for mounting the rain gutter trim. They are to be used in conjunction with Rain Gutter
Pliers P/N 88 88 6 511 060.
A new fixture has been developed to facilitate leak testing of the M70 cylinder head.
Repair Of Simulator Adaptor Cables

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 16 88 (1672)
Montvale, NJ
July 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
[email protected]
148
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 670
Replacement Spring - Loaded Contact Pins for Simulator Adaptor Cables
Note:
This Service Information bulletin refers only to adaptor cables that are beyond the terms of the Special Tool Warranty Period. Cables within the
terms of the Special Tool Warranty Period should be handled in accordance with instructions in your BMW Parts Information binder.
Situation:
There have been cases where the spring-loaded contact pins have broken on out-of-warranty cables, rendering them useless. So that these
out-of-warranty cables may be restored to operational usage, we have acquired a supply of the two different types of spring-loaded contact pins for
your convenience. The following chart explains which pins go with which cables:
SIMULATOR SPRING
ADAPTER CABLE LOADED PIN
81 12 9 425 010 81 12 9 425 800

81 12 9 425 011 uses 81 12 9 425 800
81 12 9 428 901 81 12 9 425 800
81 12 9 428 902 81 12 9 425 801
It is recommended that you give the adaptor cable, and the new spring-loaded contact pin to an electronic repair shop in your area.
The broken pins must be desoldered, and pressed from the housing, reversing the procedure to install the new pin. Refer to illustration in this
Bulletin.
Spring-Loaded Contact Pins
[email protected]
149
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 671
P/N 81 12 9 425 800
P/N 81 12 9 425 801
Introductory Price = $3.20 each
These parts can be ordered directly through your Parts Distribution Center.
Tool Tips Directory

Group 04 Tools and Equipment
Woodcliff Lake, NJ June 1989 Technical Dept.
SUBJECT: Tool Tips Directory
Tool Tips has been developed to save the BMW service technician repair time. The concept of Tool Tips involves a repair where
there is no BMW Special Tool, but a slightly modified over-the-counter tool makes the repair easier. Tool Tip Service Information
bulletins will be easy to recognize by their blue color.
This directory will be perpetually updated with Tool Tips information.
Technicians with ideas for Tool Tips should submit them via a Quality Control Information ("pink") Sheet. To more easily
recognize a tool tip "pink" sheet the technician should write "TOOL TIP" in large letters at the top of the problem description
section.
Please Note: The first technician to send in a Tool -Tips "pink" sheet (that results in a Tool Tips Service Information
Bulletin) shall receive a $30.00 SNAP ON" Tool gift certificate.
How To Use
[email protected]
150
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 672
Tool Tip Service Information is arranged in the directory by the familiar Construction Group numbering system. Simply go to the
desired construction group, pick out the proper subject and refer to that subject's S.I. bulletin.
Example: Group = 32 Steering
Subject = Steering Box Pressure Point Adjustment - 750iL
[email protected]
151
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 673
S.I. Bulletin Number = 32 04 89 (1889)

Various New Special Tools

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 14 92 (3562)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New BMW Special Tools
Situation:
The tool is in stock and will be sent out via the BMW Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be ordered through your PDC.
[email protected]
152
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 674
[email protected]
153
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 675
The tools are in stock and will not be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. You may however order them through your PDC.
Tools - Cooling/Heating Gun

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 14 89 (1873)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1989
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Cooling of Automobile Components for Test Purposes
Situation:
Where cooling of automobile components is required for test purposes (for example, S.I. 34 01 89 (1850), it is strongly suggested by BMW NA
that dealers not use refrigerant (e.g. FREON(R)) to cool the components (due to chlorofluorocarbons (CFC) related ozone depletion). Instead, we
[email protected]
154
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 676
suggest that you use a heating/cooling gun (available through the BMW Service Equipment Program).
This unique time saving service tool creates hot and cold air with no moving parts. Using shop air as its only source of power, the heating/cooling
gun discharges cold air (down to 0~F) from one end and hot air (up to 140~F) from the other.
MoDic(R) - Sporadic Memory Failure

Woodcliff Lake, NJ April 1991 Service Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes (orange) S.I. 04 04 91 (3194) dated January 1991 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT: MoDiC Memory Failure
Situation: Sporadic memory failure has been reported in certain MoDiC's. This occurs even though battery voltage (MoDiC
batteries) has been checked and found to be 1.5 volts on each "AA" battery.
Solution: One 1.5 volt "AA" battery must be replaced with a VARTA CRAA6117 3 volt battery. The second battery remains in the
original configuration - 1.5 volt "AA". The affected MoDiC's have serial numbers 1600-3500.
Parts
Information: The MoDiC battery may be ordered from your Parts Distribution Center.
MoDiC 3.0 volt battery

P/N 88 88 5 000 364
Introductory price: $8.60
Service Information - Index Program

GROUP 00 Maintenance and General Hints
Woodcliff Lake, NJ December 1990 Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 40 89 (1999) dated June 1990 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT: 1) Microfiche - Service Information Bulletins - Edition July 1990
2) Diskette - BMW Service Bulletin Index - Edition July 1990
1) All current Service Information, Technical Reference and Special Service

Bulletins (valid through June 30, 1990) have been incorporated onto microfiche.
Description Color of Border No. of Fiche
2) A second diskette covering all current Service Information bulletins issued through June 1990 and with two new Menu options, is now
available. The purpose of this software program is to provide you with a quick overview of all applicable Service Information bulletin titles
via computer display or printer hard copy.
For example, if you are troubleshooting the air conditioning system on a 735i (E32), following the procedures as detailed in the attachment,
you can call up all Service Information bulletin titles and numbers in Group 64 pertaining to this particular model.
Also displayed will be the microfiche number and frame location where each bulletin may be found.
Please note that there are separate instructions for installing/updating the software program:
[email protected]
155
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 677
1) New (First Time) Installation Instructions
2) Update Instructions (Service Information program already on your PC)
The diskette and microfiche will be updated periodically. During the time period between updates, a (paper) listing of all current and deleted S.I.
bulletins will be issued. These lists should be stored together with the diskette and microfiche.
When you receive an updated diskette and microfiche, the interim (paper) list and outdated diskette/microfiche can be discarded.
One set of microfiche and one diskette will be sent to every automotive BMW dealer under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
Additional microfiche sets and diskettes can be ordered from Service Engineering (a pre-printed order form is enclosed).
Item No. Description Qty. Price
SD 89-009 Microfiche-Service Information

Bulletins 1 = 1 set $16.50
SD 90-011 Diskette-BMW Service Bulletin

Index 1 $12.25
Note: The paper versions of all bulletins will continue to be available.
New (First Time) Installation Instructions/Attachment 1

Attachment 1 to S.I. 00 40 89 (1999)
NEW (FIRST TIME) INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The following instructions will install your Service Information Index and Retrieval Software.
Please follow these instructions if this is a first time installation of the Service Information Index program on your PC.
3) Slide diskette into drive A with label side up and towards you. Do not force or bend the diskette.
4) Exit you DCS menu and answer "NO" to backup.
5) Type the command "CD/" and press ENTER.
6) Type the command "MD ANACOMP" and press ENTER.
7) Type the command "A:INSTALL" and press ENTER.
NOTE: Some PCs are not configured to display the correct prompt. If this occurs type the command "PROMPT $P$G" and press ENTER
to display accurate directory listings.
EXAMPLE: Exiting the DCS menu and the prompt reads "C:/ > or "C >" instead of "C:/DCS > ".
9) When installation is complete a "C:/ >" prompt will appear.
10) If the prompt does not read "C: DCS >", type the command "CD DCS" and press ENTER.
a. At the "C: DCS >" prompt type the command "ANA". This will execute the Service Information program.
b. At the "C: DCS >" prompt type the command "AUTOEXEC". This will execute the DCS menu.
Update Instructions
[email protected]
156
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 678
UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS
The following instructions will update your Service Information Index and Retrieval Software.
Please follow these instructions to update the existing Service Information Index program on your PC.
3) Slide diskette into drive A with label side up and towards you. Do not force or bend the diskette.
4) Exit your DCS menu and answer "NO" to backup.
7) At the "C: DCS >" prompt, type the command "A:INSTALL" and press ENTER.
NOTE: Some PCs are not configured to display the correct prompt. If this occurs type the command "PROMPT $P$G" and press ENTER
to dispfay accurate directory listings.
EXAMPLE: Exiting the DCS menu and the prompt reads "C:/ > or "C >" instead of "C:/DCS > ".
7) When installation is complete a "C:/ >" prompt will appear.
8) If the prompt does not read "C: DCS >", type the command "CD DCS" and press ENTER.
a. At the "C: DCS >" prompt type the command "ANA". This will execute the Service Information program.
b. At the "C: DCS >" prompt type the command "AUTOEXEC". This will execute the DCS menu.
[email protected]
157
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 679
Menu Options
MENU Options
Menu Options available to user.
Locate .... Presents a menu of available search options. Standard options include sequential
search.
Next ..... Positions display to the next screen of records.
Previous .. Positions display to the previous screen of records.
Top ......Positions display to the beginning of the file.
Bottom ... Positions display to the end of the file.
Quit ......Cancels the current operation or press ESCape at main menu to exit the program.
Display ... Displays bulletins by classification (Service Action, Recall Campaigns, General).
Print ...... Prints bulletins in a selected order (all bulletins, model code, body code, engine
code).
[email protected]
158
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 680
[email protected]
159
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 681
Locate:Goto
Selections "Search" and "Goto" are restricted for the use of Anacomp Inc.
Two new options have been added to the Menu. These options will allow the user to Display only those items desired and Print index
records from the file.
1) Display option: to activate, the user will have to use the "arrow" keys to highlight the option and press the ENTER key.
The Display option is used to display:

a. All Bulletins
b. All Service Actions.
c. All Recall Campaigns.
d. All General Actions.
e. All of b,c,d.
[email protected]
160
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 682
After the option is selected the user will be returned to the main menu. Only the items that qualify will be displayed on the screen.
NOTE: This display will remain active until reset by the user to the original state.
2) Print option: to activate, the user will have to use the "arrow" keys to highlight the option and press the ENTER key.
A menu wil appear on the screen prompting the user to print in a selected order:
a. Bulletin order (prints all bulletins)
b. Model code.
c. Body code.
d. Engine code.
If option b, c, or d is selected a second prompt appears and asks the user to enter a code. If a code is entered, all matching codes in
the index will be printed. If left blank, all bulletins in the index will be printed in the selected order.
NOTE: The Display option can also be used in conjunction with the Print option
Example 1: - Display option is set for only Recall Campaigns.

- Print option is set for Bulletin order (all bulletins)
Result: All bulletins with Recall Campaigns are printed.
Example 2: - Display option is set for Recall/Service/General.

- Print option is set for Body Code.
[email protected]
161
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 683
- E-32 is entered for a Code.
Result: All bulletins with Recall/Service/General actions for E32 are printed.
Example 3: - Display option is set for ALL bulletins.

- Print option is set for Engine Code.
- S-38 is entered for a Code.
Result: All bulletins with an Engine Code of S38 are printed.
(NOTE: If code field had been left empty all Bulletins would have been printed in Engine Code order).
If you should encounter any difficulties when using this program, please contact Roger A. Parient Jr. clo Anacomp, Inc. at 708-364-6500 Ext. 378
for help.
New Systems Descriptions

Woodcliff Lake, NJ October 1990 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Overview of New Systems for 1991 Model Year
MODELS: All
Note: The following information was correct at the time of publication. This bulletin will not be updated.
Drive Train
The following 1991 models have a new EGS automatic transmission shift program along with a recalibrated transmission and
a changed rear axle ratio.
Model Final Drive Ratio

Old New
535iA 3.91 4.27
735iA/iL 3.91 4.27
750iL 3.15 3.64
85OiA - 3.64
The lower final drive ratio provides improved acceleration off the line while enabling the use of a new "EGS Map" which is
biased towards early upshifts at light throttle, yielding increased performance without sacrificing fuel efficiency. During light
throttle duty cycles, 4th gear can be reached as early as 40 mph with the converter clutch engaged.
More important than the actual acceleration time is the heightened feeling of "power on demand". As the system detects the
driver's desire to accelerate (by comparing throttle opening to road speed and gear position), it is programmed to downshift
sooner than previous models to make maximum use of the engine's power. The cars are still equipped with a kick-down
switch; however, in most driving situations, the transmission will have shifted to the lowest gear permissible for a given road
speed before the switch is activated.
The major changes to the transmission include the torque converter and converter clutch solenoid. Due to the lower rear axle ratios, the torque
[email protected]
162
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 684
converter stall speeds have been decreased to between 1954 and 2135 rpms with the M30 engine, and between 1815 and 1980 rpms with the M70
engine. These figures will be slightly lower (50-100 rpms) if the engine is not yet broken in. The lower stall speed converters are not
interchangeable with previous models. The frequency of torque converter clutch engagement/disengagement has increased on these models. In
order to ensure the reliability of the converter clutch solenoid, the construction of the solenoid has been changed from aluminum to steel.
These drivetrain components are certified by the EPA together as a complete system. These parts are not compatible with past models and fault
codes will be set if parts are interchanged between systems.
Egs Control Units

There are many changes regarding the correct application of EGS control units on these models. Not only do these vehicles have a revised "EGS
Map", but the 535i and 735i/iL now have the possibility of coming equipped with EML. The following table lists the different control unit
applications. These control units are not compatible with previous models.
Control Units Available for 1991 Models
535iA Without EML 535iA With EML 735iA Without EML 735iA With EML 750iL 850iA
Pay close attention to the equipment level of the vehicle when selecting a replacement control unit. The EGS system can still be diagnosed using the
"Understanding AEGS" manual for the third version, E9 system.
THM-R1 Transmission
Available in the 525i, the THM-R1 is an electronically controlled fourspeed automatic transmission with a lock-up clutch type converter. The
transmission is manufactured by Hydra-Matic. Please refer to TRI 24 01 90 (2111) for specific information on the THM-R1.
M50 Engine
The new M50 engine is an in-line six, 2.5 liter 4 valves per cylinder engine. Power output is 188hp (141 kw) at 5900 rpm. Maximum torque of 181
lb. ft. (245 N-m) is produced at an engine speed of 4700 rpm. A fuel grade of 90AKI/95RON Premium unleaded is required for this engine. Please
refer to TRI 11 04 90 (2103) for further information on the M50 engine.
M42 Engine
The Motronic for the M42 engine has a new BMW hardware number from 9/90. The new BMW hardware number (1 734 131) is fully compatible
wah vehicles produced before 9/90. Motronics with the previous BMW hardware number (1 734 060) must not be used in vehicles manufactured
from 9/90. The new version Motronic monitors the primary ignition circuit and when it sees a failure shuts off the fuel injectors of the affected
group of cylinders.
M30 Engine
To accommodate the option of EML, the Motronic for the M30 engine has a new Bosch hardware number, 0 261 200 179. This new hardware
number is compatible for use on previous models.
M50 Engine
The new M50 engine will use Motronic 3.1. This system does not have a codeable control unit and will therefore have separate control units for
vehicles with automatic or manual transmissions.
M70 Engine
The engine management system for the M70 engine has changed from Motronic 1.2 to Motronic 1.7. There are also new variant codes for each
application.
Automatic Stability Control

ASC is available as an option on the 535i and 735i/iL and will be standard on the 850iA. The 750iL and 850i will be equipped with ASC+T. ASC
uses the ABS sensors to detect wheel spin and automatically reduces the engine's power (output) to eliminate wheel slip. On the 535i and 735i/ iL,
the ASC option requires that the vehicle be equipped with EML, which is otherwise not available on these two models. In addition to the control
unit and hardware of the EML system, the EGS control unit and the Motronic's variant code are different from a non-EML equipped 535i or 735i.
The 750iL and 850i (manual trans.) will add Traction Control to the ASC system (ASC+T). Traction control takes ASC one step further by also
pulsing the brakes to control wheelspin. Please refer to TRI 12 01 89 (2095) and TRI 34 01 90 (2105) for specific information on these systems.
Electronic Dampening Control

In order to improve handling while still maintaining a smooth ride, 7 and 8 series vehicles have the option of Electronic Dampening Control (EDC
III). This system varies the dampening characteristics for the front and rear shocks between soft, medium, or hard based on input from sensors that
monitor front and rear vertical body acceleration, longitudinal body acceleration, and steering angle changes. A selector switch allows the driver to
choose the Comfort position, which permits shock dampening in all three modes, or Sport, which limits the shock dampening to medium and hard
only for firm control. Please refer to TRI 37 01 90 (2107) for specific information on EDC.
Adjustable Steering Column

The 525i, 535i and 735i/iL will have the option of a mechanically adjustable telescoping steering column. The 750iL has an electrically adjustable
telescoping steering column with memory. The 850i has an electri cally adjustable steering column combining tilt and telescopic action and a
memory function. The steering wheel on the 850i will automatically raise up when the driver exits the vehicle. Please refer to TRI 32 01 90 (2106)
[email protected]
163
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 685
for specific information.
Mirror Heating
From 6/90 a PTC Heating System has been used. Previously, the heating element circuit used a thermo-switch to turn the current ON if the glass
temperature fell below 5~C (41~F) and OFF if it exceeded 50~C (120~F). This system resulted in a large spread of tolerances complicating fault
diagnosis. With PTC heating, the resistance of the heating circuit changes depending on the temperature. The heating is never completely turned
off, resulting in a constant current draw of 0.9-1.0 Amp. per mirror with the ignition switch ON.
The coloring on the backside of the mirrors has no meaning. A green dot on the mirror glass identifies it as a service (replacement) part.
The E32 will continue to use the thermo-switch system until the introduction of a new outside mirror in early 1991.
Electrochromic Mirror
7 and 8 series vehicles have a rearview mirror with continuously variable reflectivity. The mirror's reflectivity is varied in relation to the strength of
light picked up from the headlights of following cars. This feature automatically provides the best possible vision without blinding the driver.
Please refer to TRI 51 01 90 (2102) for further information on this system.
Free Form Headlamps

Free form low beam headlamps will be used on all models except the 850i, which will have ellipsoid low beam headlamps. Conventional
headlamps use a paraboloid reflector to first produce parallel light that is then refracted by a patterned lens and directed onto the road. In marked
contrast to conventional headlamps, free form reflectors shift the light distribution back to the reflector itself. Using the reflector to distribute the
light requires minimal patterning of the lens while affording better control of the ray path.
Air Filtration System

The 750iL and 850i have a microfilter in combination with the automatic air conditioning. Fresh air drawn in from the outside will be passed
through an electrostatically charged filter. 100% of the particulates down to 5 micrometers and 60% of smaller particulates down to approximately
.5 micrometers will be filtered out.
Fuel Gauge
On the 5 and 7 series models, the red band to the right of the white line at the "R" position has been eliminated. On 5, 7, and 8 series models the
yellow low fuel warning light now comes on momentarily for a function test when the ignition is turned on. Please refer to the Owner's Manuals for
reserve fuel capacities. The 3 series fuel gauge remains unchanged.
Tire Pressure
The following table contains tire pressure specifications for the 1991 models. Please consult the tire information sticker on driver's door B-pillar for
the latest information, including the recommended values for maximum load condition.
Model Normal Load

Front Rear
(Bar/PSI) (Bar/PSI)
318is 1.9/28 2.1/30

318i, iC 1.9/28 2.1/30
325i, iA, iC, iAC 2.0/29 2.2/32
325iX, iAX 2.0/29 2.2/32
M3 2.1/31 2.1/31
525i, iA 1.8/26 2.2/32
535i, iA 2.0/29 2.4/35
M5 2.6/38 2.8/41
7 Series 2.0/29 2.3/33
850i, iA 2.0/29 2.2/32
Mobile Diagnostic Computer Software - Update

Bulletin Number 00 06 91 3208
Woodcliff Lake, NJ March 1991 Service Engineering
This Advance Dealer Information Bulletin (orange) supersedes 00 37 89 (1990) dated 01/01/90, which should be removed from your S.I. binder
and discarded.
SUBJECT: Updated BMW Mobile Diagnostic Computer (MoDiC), Software Versions 3.0 and 1.0.
Situation: Updated software is now available for the BMW MoDiC. (MoDiC software does not operate the 2013 Service Tester and shodd
[email protected]
164
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 686
not be ordered for this reason).
With the issuance of versions 3.0 and 1.0, version 2.0 (P/N 01 57 9 782 477) becomes invalid.
Software version 3.0 is diagnostics only, while version 1.0 is DME encoding only.
Note: Versions 3.0 and 1.0 are,to be loaded in the MoDiC together (see loading instructions).
Software Version 3.0 (MoDiC) Software Version 1.0 (MoDiC)

P/N 01 58 9 784 657
Introductory Price = $10.75
Parts
Information: ^ Copies of diskette version 3.0 will be delivered to you by your District Service Manager.
^ Defective 1.0 diskettes, should be returned to BMW NA via the BMW Tool Limited Warranty. Details of the program can be
found in your Parts Information binder under Bulletin I-24.
^ Copies of diskette version 1.0 will be sent out through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional copies of 3.0 and
1.0 disketes may be ordered through your Parts Distribution Center.
Defective 3.0 diskettes should be sent to:

1 BMW Plaza
Montvale, New Jersey 07645
to the attention of Product Service Engineering.
Attachment 1 - Software Version

Attachment I to S.I. 00 06 91 (3208)
SOFTWARE VERSION 3.0 (FOR BMW MoDiC)
How to load the 3.0 Software
To help deter theft of your MoDiC from your service shop, a secret code has been built into the 3.0 and 1.0 software that will
prevent an unauthorized person downloading the software.
Software must be downloaded when:
1. Memory batteries in the MoDiC die;

2. Fifty control units have been encoded;
3. New updated software has become available. When ordering a MoDiC, the order form (available from the BMW Product
and Service Engineering Department) has a space for the name of your authorized person. The secret access code will be sent
to your authorized person via a separate communication.
4. The 3.0 encoding program must be loaded to perform E31 encoding.
[email protected]
165
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 687
Downloading Steps
[email protected]
166
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 688
Program Structure
The structue of version 3.0 fundamentally corresponds to the diagnostic program of version 8.0 and version 1.0 (E31) for the
BMW Service Tester.
The diagnostic program has been selected:
The following systems can be tested with the selection of 2 (Series 8):
01 MDE/DDE
02 EML
03 EGS
10 EKM
11 ZKE/ZVM
12 IR
13 K/CC
14 LKM
16 MID
18 DWA
19 AB
20 SPM/SM
21 LSM
30 IHKA
50 ABS/ASC
54 EDC
Important Program Additions
*1 DME/DDE
A new diagnostic program for DME 1.7 M42, DME 1.7 M70, and
DME 3.1 M50
*3 EGS
A new diagnostic program with new program prompting for version
GS 1.2x of the 4HP-22/24. New diagnostic program for version GS
4.1x of the THM-RL.
Special features: Oil level measurement with temperature compensa-
tion.
[email protected]
167
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 689
*11 ZKE
Activating function for central locking, windows and sunroof has
been eliminated.
*30 IHR/IHKR
A new diagnostic program for the IHKR2.
*50 ABS/ASC
A new diagnostic program for the "Automatic Stability Control plus
Traction" system (ASC+T).
*54 EDC
A new diagnostic program for the Electronic Damper Control III
(EDC III).
Version 1.0 Encoding Program
The 1.0 encoding version has no new features over the previous 2.0 software. Dealers are reminded that:
UNDER NO circumstances should the "Recoding" section of the software be used in the U.S. It is for Non-U.S. cars only.
Attachment 2 - List of Current Service Software

Attachment 2 to S.I. 00 06 91 (3208)
LIST OF CURRENT BMW SERVICE SOFTWARE
2013 Service Tester
Version Description Models
1.0 A&B Diagnostic diskette E31 only 01 57 9 783 657

8.0 A&B Diagnostic diskette All-except E31 01 51 9 782 957
MoDiC
Version Description Models
2.01 Encoding DME 1.1 - 1.7
E31 - all codeable

control units 01 07 9 784 017
3.0 Diagnostic All 01 57 9 783 797
1.0 Encoding DME 1.1 - 1.7 01 58 9 784 657
Technical Service Bulletin # I23900801 Date: 900801
Embossing Tools - For Recall Campaigns

TO: ALL BMW DEALER PARTS MANAGERS
SUBJECT: CAMPAIGN EMBOSSING TOOLS

8/90 1-23
Supercedes 1-23 dated 10/88
The Service Department requires that vehicles involved in special actions or recall campaigns be identified through the use of embossed labels.
The embossing tool handle (P/N 88 88 6 900 305) and hole punch (P/N 88 88 6 900 306) are used along with special labels to identify which
campaign/recall has been performed on a given vehicle.
All new dealers will automatically receive the embossing tool, punch, and labels as part of their initial dealer parts and tool kit. However, P/N 88 88
6 900 305 will yield only the embossing tool handle without the dealer code I.D. plate.
New dealers (and existing dealers ordering replacement embossing tool handies) must order their dealer code I.D. plates from:
Excelsior Graphics 406 West 31st Street New York, NY 10001
Your order for a dealer code I.D. plate should include a check for $50.00 including shipping and handling payable to Excelsior Graphics, and must
specify your dealer code.
[email protected]
168
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 690
Price is effective as of May 1, 1990.
NOTE: NEW YORK AND NEW JERSEY DEALERS MUST INCLUDE APPLICABLE SALES TAX.
Labels may be ordered using the following methods:
CAMPAIGN/
RECALL NUMBERS ITEM NO. QUANTITY WHERE
1-20 01 99 9 750 968 1 = Bag of 200 Labels Parts Order
21-40 SD89-003 1 = Bag of 100 Labels Service/Engineering
201-573-2091
41-60 SD89-006 1 = Bag of 100 Labels Service/Engineering
201-573-2091
A/C - Windows Fogging Up

Group 64 Heating and Air Conditioning
Bulletin Number 64 17 88 (1776) Page 1 of 2
Woodcliff Lake, NJ January 1991 Service Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 64 17 88 (1776) dated December 1988. It contains additional information concerning causes of
the complaint.
Please remove and discard S.I. 64 17 88 (1776) dated December 1988 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT: Fogging Up of Windows
MODELS: All
Situations: Under certain conditions a customer may complain that all of the windows start to fog up when entering the vehicle after
exercising (skiing, jogging, etc.) or, if several passengers are in the vehicle.
These complaints generally increase in number during the winter months.
Attempts to alleviate this condition by pressing the defroster button (E32/E34) or move the defroster lever to the open
position (E30) may only be moderately successful.
This condition can only be avoided if the causes are known.
Cause: Windows fog up when warm moist air in the cabin contacts cold window glass, and the moisture condenses on the
windows. Windows may fog up more quickly if the air conditioning system has just been shut off, as condensation remains
on the evaporator.
Remedy: Depress the A/C (snowflake) button. This will dehumidify the air, clearing the windows. (This button can be left depressed
at all times if so desired.)
When the A/C button is depressed, the cooled and dehumidified air stream is forced through the heater core and reheated as
required via the temperature control wheel setting.
Note: Sales Personnel are requested to explain this to the customer upon delivery of the car.
Notes: In addition to the water vapor in the interior due to perspiration and respiration of the occupants, the following adddional
sources of moisture must be considered:
^ Rain/Snow: Air that is drawn in is already saturated before it enters the vehicle, making rapid dehumidification more
difficult.
Snow can be tracked into the vehicle, and the accessory velour floor mats can hold the resultant moisture for several
days. Removal and drying of the floor mats will reduce considerably this source of moisture.
^ Water entering the cabin: Check for possible causes such as A/C drainage, sliding roof drainage, sealing plugs, etc.
[email protected]
169
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 691
The fogging up of windows can be aggravated by dirty windows. If the windows are dirty on the inside, a milky film will
form. This film can act like a sponge, attracting moisture to the windows.
The customer should be advised to regularly clean the windows using BMW Cleaner, P/N 82 14 9 400 349 or 82 14 9 406
684.
Warranty
Status: Information only.
A/C - Nominal System Pressures R12/R134A

Group 64
Heating and
Air Conditioning
Bulletin Number
64 13 92 (3646)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Nominal Air Conditioning System Pressures R-12/R-134a
MODELS:
All
[email protected]
170
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 692
Situation:
The chart has been provided to assist the technician in determining the operational status of a BMW vehicle with a suspected air conditioning
problem. The chart provides "nominal" values that approximate typical high side pressure, low side pressure, and center vent discharge temperature
for a given ambient temperature, humidity, and refrigerant type.
Note that the pressures given are directly dependent on the amount of refrigerant charge in the air conditioning system. If wide variation exists
between the measured pressure values and those given on the chart, the technician should consider an overcharge/undercharge situation as a
possible cause.
Warranty Status:
Information only.
[email protected]
171
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 693
THIS INFORMATION IS CURRENT AND SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER SERVICE INFORMATION ON

PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY RELATIONSHIPS FOR A/C SYSTEMS AS WELL AS ANY OTHER SOURCE OF SIMILAR
INFORMATION.
A/C - Repair Instructions Coming On Microfiche

Group 64
Heating and Air Conditioning
February 1992
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 64 11 91 (3438) dated November 1991 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT:
Repair lnstructions for Air Conditioning Systems-Rl34a Supplement
MODELS: All
General Information:
Revised repair instruction have been developed for air conditioning system which use the new environment-friendly refrigerant,R134a Supplement
These revised repair instructions will appear in the following repair instructions microfiche:
BMW 3 Series E36 No. 2,
BMW 5 Series E34 No.4
BMW 7 Series E32 No.6.
BMW 8 Series E31,No. 2
Note:
The scheculed introduction dates for R134a in US and Canada vehicles are as follows:
Date Models
E31 M70 US
Mar 1992 E32 M70 US
E32 M30 US
E31 M60 US& Canada
Aug 1992 E34 All engines US & Canada
E30 Convertible US & Canada
E36 All engines US & Canada
A/C - Oil Charge Procedure for R12 and R134a

Group 64
Heating and
Air Conditioning
Bulletin Number
64 11 93 (3929)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1994
Product Engineering
[email protected]
172
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 694
SUBJECT:
Air Conditioning Oil Charge Procedure: R-12/R-134a
MODELS:
All
Situation:
During A/C service/repairs, if too much refrigerant oil is added, the system looses cooling efficiency. Severely oil-overcharged systems may suffer
compressor damage. On the other hand, systems with insufficient lubricant may exhibit shortened compressor life.
Correction:
When servicing an A/C system that requires replacement of a major component (e.g. compressor, condenser, evaporator) the following procedure
MUST be followed exactly to make certain the proper A/C lubricant level is maintained.
1. All types of A/C systems must be recovered with an approved recycling machine. Follow the machine manufacturer's instructions concerning
oil recovery. After the refrigerant is evacuated, drain the recovered used lubricant into an empty measuring bottle.
2. Remove the necessary A/C components according to the appropriate repair manual instructions.
3. Drain as much as possible of the oil remaining in every removed component into the same measuring bottle used in Step (1). Accumulate all
of the drained/extracted oil into this same bottle.
Note:
When draining a compressor, it may be helpful to turn the clutch plate by hand to "pump" out any remaining oil.
4. Measure and write down the total extracted/drained amount in the measuring bottle.
[email protected]
173
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 695
5. If the compressor is being replaced, the entire oil content of the new compressor (compressors are shipped containing oil) must be drained
into a clean, dry container. Turn the clutch plate by hand, as in Step (3), to remove as much oil as possible.
6. Reassemble all components of the A/C system.
7. Fill the recharging machine oil injection bottle with fresh oil. The amount poured into the bottle must be equal to the total amount written
down from Step (4). Make certain the injection bottle is clean, and use the fresh oil removed from the new compressor, or a new can of
refrigerant oil if the compressor is not being replaced.
8. Apply a deep vacuum for a minimum of 30 minutes to remove any moisture that has entered the system. A vacuum decay test should be used
at this time to check for any leaks. Using the charging machine manufacturer's instructions, inject into the A/C system the fresh oil from the
bottle filled in Step (7).
9. Dispose of all remaining fresh/used oil properly - do not attempt to store or reuse refrigerant oils.
A/C - Retrofiting R-12 Air Conditioning with R-134a

Group 64
Heating and
Air Conditioning
Bulletin Number
64 05 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Retrofitting R-12 Air Conditioning with R-134a
MODEL:
E23 / E24 / E28 / E30
Situation:
Retrofit kits are available for the above models for customers who wish to convert their R-12 A/C system to the newer, more
environmentally-friendly R-134a refrigerant.
Solution:
A retrofit kit may be installed as a "customer-pay" accessory. Although so far this procedure is not a necessary part of any general A/C repair, we
highly recommend encouraging the customer to consider this environmentally-friendly solution. This is particularly the case if the compressor
needs replacement; we recommend the retrofit be performed at that time. For the customer, there is only a minimum additional cost for retrofitting
his A/C system, compared to the costs of only replacing the compressor.
Some models are equipped with BOSCH A/C compressors, which are not compatible with R-134a refrigerant. Those compressors must be replaced
when the system is being converted to R-134a.
[email protected]
174
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 696
The above list shows the models with factory-installed compressors which are NOT R-134a compatible:
The above list should not be the only deciding factor, since a non-R-134a compatible compressor might have been installed on a previous A/C
repair on these, or other, models.
A non-compatible BOSCH compressor may be identified by its part number. Please refer to the list of non-compatible BOSCH compressors:
If a vehicle is equipped with one of the compressors listed above, the compressor must be replaced by the compressor P/N 64 52 8 363 550, when
the system is being converted to R-134a. For some of the compressors (specified in the above list), an additional adapter wire for the magnetic
clutch P/N 64 52 1 386 224 is required.
Compressor and adapter cable are not part of the retrofit kit. They must be ordered separately if required.
Procedure:
The following procedure replaces the steps listed in the installation instructions included with the kit. The information has been revised and
expanded for clarity:
1. Safety Precautions when Handling Refrigerant
A/C systems are filled with refrigerant under pressure. Safety precautions must be followed when working with these systems. Refer to S.I.
64 10 92 (3536) for a list of procedures relating to safe refrigerant handling.
2. Evacuating and Removing Mineral Oil from the A/C System
2.1 Evacuate the A/C system using an approved R-12 recovery/recycling machine. Follow the directions included in the machine's instruction
manual.
2.2 If you are replacing the compressor, follow this step; otherwise, skip to 2.3.
Replace the compressor according to the appropriate repair manual. Install the adapter wire for the magnetic clutch, if necessary.
2.3 Recharge the A/C system with R-12. Fill with the quantity of R-12 specified on the vehicle A/C label, or refer to S.I. 64 01 90 (3042). Do
NOT add any oil when recharging with R-12.
2.4 Start the engine and turn on the A/C system. Run the vehicle with the A/C system turned on, engine at idle, for 10 minutes.
2.5 Repeat steps 2.1 through 2.4. This will remove most of the mineral oil from the R-12 system during the discharge. The remainder of the oil
will be collected in the bottom of the receiver-dryer, which will be replaced. Any residual mineral oil left in the system will remain in the
evaporator or condenser, and is not harmful to the retrofitted system.
2.6 Evacuate the A/C system.
[email protected]
175
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 697
3. Converting the A/C System Components
3.1 NOTE
E30 models only
Apply the new pressure switch onto the new receiver dryer, using a new 0-ring. All components are provided with the retrofit kit.
All models except E30
Remove the pressure switch/switches from the old receiver dryer and install it/them into the new receiver dryer, using new 0-rings. All
components are provided with the retrofit kit.
3.2 Replace the old receiver dryer with the new unit along with the pressure switch/switches. Replace the 0-rings on all receiver dryer
connections opened during the retrofit procedure. All necessary 0-rings are provided in the kit.
3.3 Connect the Pressure Switch/Switches to the Vehicle Harness
Reconnect the old pressure switch(es) to the vehicle harness. Proceed with step 3.4.
Only E30 models with separate high and low pressure switch
Refer to the illustrations below.
Cut off connector (1) from the vehicle harness.
Splice the wire ends together, solder the connection and insulate it with shrink-wrap tubing (1).
Cut off connector (2) from the vehicle harness.
[email protected]
176
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 698
Strip the isolation from the wire ends and install a new black 2-pin connector (1), repair set D, P/N 1 378 400. Splice the wire ends of the new
connector together with the wire ends from the harness, solder the connections and insulate it with shrink-wrap tubing (2).
Connect the plug of the new pressure switch to the new connector on the vehicle harness.
3.4 Install the service port quick-disconnect adapters.
The larger, red-capped adapter is for the high side line, which runs from the condenser to the evaporator. The line with the sight glass is the
high side line.
Only E30 models
The high side service port is located on the high side pipe.
The high side service port is located right on top of the receiver dryer.
The smaller, blue-capped adapter is for the low side line, which runs from the evaporator to the compressor inlet.
Do not overtighten the adapters on the line fittings. The adapters contain 0-ring seals and will seat fully with minimum torque. The pipe
fitting joints are relatively fragile and will shear if overtightened. A torque of 10-12 Nm should be applied.
3.5 Connect an R-134a vacuum pump to the vehicle and maintain a vacuum close to 30 inches for a minimum of 40 minutes. This extended
vacuum purge will ensure that any remaining R-12 or moisture trapped in the system is boiled away before charging with R-134a. After the
vacuum cycle completes, a vacuum decay test should be performed on the sealed system to detect any leaks caused by improperly seated
0-rings. Close off all manifold valves and monitor the pressure gauges for a loss of vacuum. Vacuum should not decrease over several
minutes.
4. Charging A/C System with Lubricant and R-134a Refrigerant
4.1 Charge the system with compressor lubricant
With compressor replacement
No lubricant has to be charged into the system. The R-134a replacement compressor already contains the appropriate amount of PAG oil.
Without compressor replacement
Use the established system vacuum to draw in the appropriate amount of PAG lubricant (P/N 82 11 1 468 042) into the A/C system. Refer to
the blue charging label included in the retrofit kit for the proper amount of PAG lubricant to use.
[email protected]
177
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 699
4.2 Charge the A/C system with R-134a. The refrigerant flow will push the PAG lubricant out of the service hoses and into the system. Charge
with the appropriate amount of refrigerant according to the blue label included in the retrofit kit. Refer to the chart above if the kit contains
multiple labels.
5. Checking A/C System for Leaks
Check for leaks with an electronic R-134a leak detector, especially at connections that were opened for the retrofit. Refer to S.I. 04 26 92
(3644) for an approved R134a leak detector.
6. Verify the A/C System Works Properly.
7. Locate and peel off the original engine-compartment A/C information label. Make certain this area is clean, and attach the new appropriate
blue A/C information label from the retrofit kit. If necessary, refer to the chart above to determine the proper label. Both English and German
language labels are provided in the kit. The English version of the label should be installed. Record the date and the name of the
dealership/service organization that performed the retrofit on the label with a permanent marker.
Parts Information:
E23 Retrofit kit 82 31 9 067 400
64 50 1 365 078 0-Ring

64 50 8 363 256 Label R-134a
64 11 8 363 259 Valve
64 11 8 363 260 Valve
64 53 8 363 554 Drying Container
64 50 8 390 602 O-Ring
64 50 8 390 603 O-Ring
01 29 9 788 367 Installation Instruction
E24 Retrofit kit (up to 2/86) 82 31 9 067 397
64 50 8 363 255 Label R-134a

64 50 8 363 258 Label R-134a
64 11 8 363 259 Valve
64 11 8 363 260 Valve
64 50 8 390 601 O-Ring
64 50 8 390 602 O-Ring
E24 Retrofit kit (as of 2/86) 82 31 9 067 398
64 50 8 363 255 Label R-134a

64 50 8 363 258 Label R-134a
64 11 8 363 259 Valve
64 11 8 363 260 Valve
64 50 8 390 601 O-Ring
64 50 8 390 602 O-Ring
E28 Retrofit Kit 82 31 9 067 401
64 50 8 363 254 Label R-134a

64 50 8 363 256 Label R-134a
64 50 8 363 258 Label R-134a
64 11 8 363 259 Valve
64 11 8 363 260 Valve
64 50 8 390 602 O-Ring
[email protected]
178
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 700
64 50 8 390 603 O-Ring
E30 Retrofit Kit 82 31 9 067 394
64 50 8 363 254 Label R-134a

64 11 8 363 259 Valve
64 11 8 363 260 Valve
64 50 8 390 601 O-Ring
64 50 8 390 602 O-Ring
64 53 8 390 971 Pressure Switch
A/C Compressor 64 52 8 363 550
Adapter Wire 64 52 1 386 224
PAG lubricant 82 11 1 468 042
The retrofit of an R-12 system to R-134a is not covered under warranty. Technical Service Bulletin # 640695 Date: 960401
A/C System - Warranty Claim Noise Questionnaire

Group 64
Heating and
Air Conditioning
Bulletin Number
64 06 95
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Air Conditioning System Noise Questionnaire
MODELS:
All vehicles
Situation:
A substantial number of compressors returned under warranty were replaced on the basis of a noise complaint. Upon testing and inspection very
few of these units produced an audible noise or had failed components.
In an effort to identify the true cause(s) of customer noise complaints a special quality reporting program is being established. The purpose is to
obtain more detailed information about the customer complaint and technician findings during the diagnostic process in order to improve existing
diagnostic procedures and make product changes as necessary.
Procedure:
[email protected]
179
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 701
[email protected]
180
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 702
In the event of an Air Conditioning System related noise complaint, please fill out the questionnaire (SD 92-068). If, after proper diagnosis, the
replacement of an air conditioning component should become necessary, please return a copy of the completed questionnaire with that component
through the regular warranty channels.
In any case, please mail the completed questionnaires to BMW, Service Engineering. The forms are self addressed and postage prepaid.
Parts Information:
[email protected]
181
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 703
One pad with 25 sheets will be mailed to each automotive dealer. Additional pads can be ordered from product engineering (a pre-printed order
form is enclosed).
Any Air Conditioning parts returned under warranty must be accompanied by a completed Air Conditioning System Noise Questionnaire (SD
92-068) in order for the claim to be credited. An additional 3 FRU may be claimed for the completion of the questionnaire.
[email protected]
182
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 704
Defect Code: 64 00 31 39 00
Labor Operation: 64 99 000

Labor Allowance: 3 FRU
A/C System - Musty Odors

Group 64
64 01 01
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
Service Engineering
January 2001
This Service Information bulletin replaces S.I. 64 08 91 dated October 1991.
SUBJECT:
Musty Odors from Air Conditioning System
MODEL:
All
SITUATION:
Under certain environmental conditions, moisture that remains/condenses on the evaporator after the vehicle's ignition is turned OFF may
eventually result in a musty odor coming from the vents when the air conditioner is first switched ON.
CORRECTION:
On customer complaint basis only, apply air conditioning disinfectant to produce an environment inhospitable to microorganisms.
Disinfectant (AirPlus A/C Cleaner Scented Kit - 10531-S) that can be used to treat air conditioning systems is available through:
AirPlus USA
P.O. Box 5035 Orange,
California 92863
Phone: (714) 901-8770, or (714) 240-4359
Important Notes:
1. Follow the manufactures direction exactly.
2. Observe all precautions on container.
3. Before applying the product remove the microfilter. Reinstall (or replace if necessary) the microfilter after cleaning service was completed.
A/C - Musty Odors From Heater and A/C Systems

SI 64 04 03
October 2004 Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 64 04 03 dated December 2003.
SUBJECT
Air Conditioning System Musty Odor
MODEL
ALL
SITUATION
The customer may complain of a musty odor that is coming from the heating and air conditioning system.
CAUSE
[email protected]
183
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 705
Certain environmental conditions may cause a musty odor when the air conditioning system is used.
PROCEDURE
Clean the heating and air conditioning system using the Wynn's Aircomatic Cleaning tool. Refer to SI B04 30 03 on information on how to acquire
the tool and the cleaning solutions.
The following items are needed to complete the cleaning procedure:
1. Wynn's Aircomatic Ultrasonic Cleaner (P/N 211-0300).
2. Wynn's Airco clean (P/N 211-30208).
Some of the advantages of this new tool are as follows:
^ No drilling or disassembly of the vehicle is necessary.
^ Ease of use; tool can be started and then left unattended to finish the cleaning.
^ The cleaning procedure is very effective for not only cleaning the evaporator but can rid the interior of the vehicle of certain odors.
Before the cleaning procedure is carried out the following points should be taken into consideration;
^ Always inspect the microfilters and replace as necessary.
^ Inspect the microfilter housing water drains for clogging and clean as necessary.
^ Some vehicles (E38 7 Series) have recirculating air filters that need to be inspected and replaced as necessary.
^ Make sure the evaporator housing drains are not clogged.
^ Always verify customer complaint, sometimes the vehicle interior carpet may be soaked because of a water leak. Also inspect the trunk for
water leaks or items that may cause a smell.
Safety Precautions
Always wear proper eye protection. The use of safety goggles or glasses, gloves and shop coat is recommended.
Always set the vehicle's parking brake before any work is performed.
Before starting the engine, check to be sure that the vehicle's fan blades, pulleys, belts and other moving parts are clear of any obstructions.
[NEW] AIRCO-CLEAN A/C Treatment Application
1. Start the vehicle's engine.
2. Turn the air conditioning off.
3. Set the blower to a middle speed.
4. Open all dashboard center air vents and set the airflow control to direct air toward the dashboard center vents and not through floor facing
vents or window defroster vents.
5. Set the ventilation system to recirculate.
[email protected]
184
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 706
6. Ensure that there is no remaining liquid from a previous treatment in the unit.
7. Shake the bottle of Wynn's AIRCO-CLEAN Ultrasonic Air Conditioning Treatment.
8. Remove the cap from the bottle.
9. Turn the bottle of AIRCO-CLEAN Ultrasonic Air Conditioning Treatment upside down and screw the bottle (hand-tight) onto the filling
opening of the unit. The spike in the AIRCOMATIC unit will puncture the bottle seal and allow the liquid to empty into the unit. Leave the
bottle attached for the duration of the service.
10. Connect the clear flexible hose to the spout opening on the AIRCOMATIC unit.
11. Place the AIRCOMATIC unit in the passenger side footwell.
12. Make sure the machine is placed horizontally and not at an angle.
13. NOTE: As the AIRCOMATIC unit creates 5-micron droplets; it is not necessary to remove the vehicle's pollen filter (this generally filters
fresh air and not recirculating air). The product will pass through the pollen filters. However, activated carbon/charcoal filters should be
removed during the treatment and replaced if necessary at the completion of the service, as these filters will absorb the AIRCO-CLEAN
product.
14. Point the clear flexible hose away from the face and skin. Attach the power cord from the transformer into an 110V wall outlet and the
opposite plug into the AIRCOMATIC electrical socket. The unit will immediately begin producing vapor through the flexible hose. Make
sure the hose is not kinked. Direct the hose so that the vapor is pulled into the ventilation ducts above the passenger side footwell. This will
direct the vapor into the air conditioning system evaporator and back into the vehicle's interior through the open dashboard vents.
15. Close all doors and let the treatment continue.
16. It is important to stop the treatment after 15 minutes. If the unit is run any longer it may overheat and may shorten the lifespan of the unit.
NOTE:
Some condensation will occur in the clear plastic hose. Exercise caution when removing the unit to avoid spillage.
17. Disconnect the power supply.
18. Remove the flexible hose from the AIRCOMATIC unit.
19. Remove the empty bottle of AIRCO-CLEAN product.
20. Turn the unit upside down and pour any remaining liquid through the flexible hose connection opening into the empty bottle. This liquid will
typically be discolored due to the heat produced in the unit.
21. Do not rinse the unit. Emptying the machine of remaining fluid is sufficient.
22. The AIRCOMATIC unit is now ready for the next service.
23. Open the vehicle's windows set the A/C control to the ON position (normal operation), the temperature to the coldest setting and the blower
to the highest setting. Allow the vehicle to air-out for at least 10 minutes prior to driving the vehicle or releasing it back to the customer.
In some extreme cases the evaporator may still need to be flushed out. For this procedure refer to SI B64 08 91. Technical Service Bulletin #
320196 Date: 960201
P/S - Identification and Diagnosis

Group 32
Steering
[email protected]
185
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 707
Bulletin Number
32 01 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Power Steering Diagnosis
MODELS:
All
Situation:
In order to assist in properly diagnosing power steering problems, the attached Troubleshooting Aid has been developed.
One side of the chart is for diagnosing rack and pinion steering systems (E30, E36) and the other is for recirculating ball and nut type steering
boxes (E31, E32, E34, E38).
The steps should be followed in the indicated order to assure that a proper diagnosis is obtained.
Warranty Status: Information only.
[email protected]
186
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 708
[email protected]
187
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 709
[email protected]
188
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 710
[email protected]
189
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 711
[email protected]
190
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 712
[email protected]
191
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 713
TIS - Software Update 12/96

Group: 10
TIS
Bulletin Number
10 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1997
Product Engineering
This IDC supersedes S.I. 10 03 96 dated December 1996 which should be removed and discarded from your IDC binder.
[email protected]
192
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 714
SUBJECT:
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
TIS software dated 12/96 now includes the following:
^ E39 540i Self Adjusting Clutch - SAC
^ The E36/Z3 2.8 liter repair manual has been updated.
^ In the Administration screen there is a button called "KDS". The intent of this button is to allow the operator to download the latest wheel
alignment specifications onto a floppy disc. The disc may then be loaded into the Hunter KDS alignment machine.
NOTES:
1. At this time this function will not work with Hunter Alignment equipment. When operation has been established you will be notified.
2. TIS CD 12/96 does not contain wheel alignment data for the Z3 2.8 L.
The only difference between the 1.9 L and the 2.8 L wheel alignment settings is the rear axle toe. The correct information is:
Z3 2.8 L Rear Axle Total Toe Setting
20' +/- 13' (minutes)
.334 +/- .217 (decimal degrees)
^ TIS Version 12/96 is distributed through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. All dealers will automatically receive 2 TIS CDs free of
charge.
Dealers with a second DIS Tester should order a TIS CD as follows:
P/N 01 57 9 788 177 Price = Cost included

in DIS agreement
Dealers with a second EPC/TIS Server should order a TIS CD as follows:
P/N 01 57 9 788 607 Price = $75.00 each
Dealers ordering a TIS CD for additional EPC/TIS Servers must use the 607 part number.
TIS Loading Instructions For DIS Tester

9. Select "OK".
[email protected]
193
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 715
11. Select "End".
12. Select "Quit".

TIS Loading Instructions For EPC/TIS Server
Please refer to applicable loading/updating instructions received from ADP or Reynolds and Reynolds.
Proper Care of CDs
should not be used.
CD Return Procedure
- EPC
- TIS
- DIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 043 EPC
- P/N 86 00 0 000 045 TIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 046 DIS
All returns of CDs will be sent to USCO; please refer to Parts Bulletin I-33 for complete details. Technical Service Bulletin # 080496 Date:
970201
Updated MoDic(R) Software - P9.0 Programming

Group: 08
MODIC
Bulletin Number
08 04 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1997
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 08 04 96 dated January 1997 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I. binder.
*Changes to this revision are identified by a black bar and asterisks.*
[email protected]
194
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 716
SUBJECT:
Updated MODIC Software P9.0 Programming
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
A revised and expanded version of the MODIC Programming Software has been
developed. With the release of P9.0 MODIC Software, Version P8.0 Programming Software has become invalid.
Program Highlights
^ *P9.0 does not include:
M44 DME programming special disc information (SI 12 15 96)
Continue to use the special diskette that was distributed with the above bulletin.*
^ MODIC Software version P9.0 contains a modified version M50 vanos/non-vanos program to address cold start complaints.
^ MODIC software version P9.0 (programming/encoding) will allow DME variant coding of the following engine control module versions: DME
M1.1; M1.2; M1.3; M1.7, M1.7.2, M1.7.1.
^ MODIC software version P9.0 (programming/encoding) will allow DME programming of the following engine control module versions: DME
M3.1; M3.3.1; M3.3; M5.2 (M73).
^ MODIC software version P9.0 (programming/encoding) will allow DME flash programming of the following engine control module versions.
Engine Control Model Engine

Module (DME)
M5.2 318,Z3 M44
M5.2 540i,740i,840i M62
MS41.1 328i,528i M52
MS41.2 M3 S52/B32
For complete flash programming details refer to service information 12 O5 96.
^ MODIC software version P9.0 (programming/encoding) will allow EGS flash programming of the following control module versions. The EGS
flash programming procedure is identical in operation to DME flash programming
A5S 440Z/5HP 24
EGS Control Model From Production

Module Date
GS 8.55 840i 9/96
GS 8.55 740I 1/97
GS 8.55 540i 1/97
Parts Information
This diskette contains encoding and programming programs only. All diagnostic work should be done with the current diagnostic software.
Software Version 9.0 A/B

P/N 01 11 9 787 861
Any defective diskettes should be returned to BMW NA via the BMW Tool Warranty. Details of the program can be found in your Parts
Information Binder under bulletin 1-24 dated 4/95.
This software will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional copies may be purchased through your Parts Distribution
Center.
Flash Programming Features
^ Flash programming is the electronic deletion and reprogramming of data and programs in the control module. Flash programmable control
modules can be programmed up to 13 times.
^ EPROM replacement is not possible. Flash programming will automatically delete data, reprogram new data and align the engine control
module with the EWS control module.
[email protected]
195
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 717
^ When communication with the control module is not possible, the required part numbers for programming must be entered manually. The
required part numbers are located on the label of the defective control module. The label is located on the top cover.
^ After flash programming is complete adaptation values must be cleared. P90 will automatically guide the technician through this procedure.
^ Adaptation of the control module (DME or EGS) will begin to take place automatically during the test ride.
^ "Quick clearing" of all control modules must be performed after flash programming of the control module is complete. When the data is erased
from the control module EEPROM (an EEPROM is an electrically erasable PROM) communication is temporarily interrupted with control
modules that normally communicate with the control module (example: AGS,MID). This interruption can result in the setting of erroneous
faults.
^ It takes roughly 2 to 15 minutes to flash program a control module depending on the level of data needed.
Battery voltage must not drop below 12.0 volts during programming. If battery voltage drops below this level the flash programming procedure will
be discontinued. If necessary the BMW battery charger(P/N 88 88 7 000 005) may be connected before programming. Peaks in voltage caused by
connecting the clips to the battery while programming will erase data being transmitted to the control module.
Menu Access
DME EGS
Select 3-DME Programming Select 4 "EGS Programming"
Select 2-Exchange CM Select 1 Exchange CM
Select 1-Determine basic CM Select 1 Determine Basic CM
Select 2-Program basic CM Follow all program directions
Follow all program instructions
Programming the Control Module

The menu for "DME Programming" has 5 options. See Steps
1 thru 5.
1. "Determine Customer Service Measures"
This step is for special program modification updates that do not require an EPROM replacement (example M3.3.1). When activated, the program
will automatically determine whether the vehicle it is connected to is eligible for a modification. If eligible, the modification will be displayed and
can be activated by selecting the "Y" button. If the vehicle is not eligible, the program will display "No Programming Data Available for this SG
Version".
Note:
Please disregard any Service Campaign numbers that may be displayed in the software. The control module may only be updated one (1) time.
2. "Exchange Control Module"
This step is used to:
1. Determine and program a replacement basic control module. This affects DME 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.3, 5.2(M73) only. Under no circumstances
should the parts microfiche be used in place of the determination step.
or
2. Reprogram a Flash programmable control module. Refer to "Flash Programming Features" for complete flash programming information (SI
12 05 96).
The programming procedure is divided into 2 steps.
Step 1 - Determining the basic control module.
The MODIC reads the data (chassis number, part number of the basic control module, and part number of the programmed control module)
necessary for determining a replacement control module from the defective control module and will display the acceptable replacement part
number(s) which need to be installed in that vehicle.
Note:
Two part numbers will be displayed. The first number is for a new basic programmable control module. The second number is for a
remanufactured basic programmable control module. Only order the remanufactured part number.
If automatic determination is not possible, the data may be read off the label of the defective control module and entered manually into the MODIC.
[email protected]
196
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 718
Step 2 - Programming the basic control module.
The MODIC programs the newly installed basic control module with the aid of the data derived in step 1. The new control module label can be
printed out by the MODIC station printer, or completed by hand. The MODIC programs the basic control module with the latest data.
Basic control modules may only be programmed one time per EPROM replacement. If a basic control module can no longer be programmed the
message "Basic control module defective. Install new control module" is displayed.
Extensive help information is available by pressing the "C" key on the MODIC. This help information is only available when the "C" key is
displayed.
Be advised that there may not be a Basic Programmable Control Module available for all DME Control Module versions. In this case, a new
pre-programmed control module must be installed.
3. "Exchange EPROM"
This step is used to determine and program a programmable EPROM that is to be installed for DME 3.1 and 3.3 only. The programming procedure
is divided into 2 steps.
Step 1 - "Determining EPROM"
necessary for determining a replacement control module EPROM from the defective control module and will display the acceptable replacement
part number(s)which need to be installed in that vehicle.
Step 2 - "Program EPROM"
The MODIC programs the newly installed EPROM with the aid of the data derived in step 1. The new control module label can be printed out by
the MODIC station printer, or completed by hand. The MODIC programs the basic control module with the latest data.
An EPROM may only be programmed one time. It is possible however to install a new EPROM and program it.
This procedure takes approximately 3 minutes. Extensive help information is available by pressing the "C" key on the MODIC. This help
information is only available when the "C" key is displayed.
Be advised that there may not be an EPROM for all control modules. If this is the case, a preprogrammed control module must be ordered.
4. "Adjustment EWS - DME Vehicles From 1/95
NOTE:
After synchronizing an EWS vehicle the ignition must be switched off for at least 10 seconds prior to restart.
This step is used to synchronize an EWS control module with the DME if:
1. The DME control module has been replaced with a pre-programmed DME control module or
2. After programming a basic programmable control module or a replacement EPROM, the message "Programming complete-EWS
alignment not carried out" is displayed. Start adjustment EWS-DME Y/N
Refer to TRI 61 01 95 (2144) for complete EWS details.

5. "Clear Adaptation Values"
^ This step is only used after a control module has been flash programmed.
^ Clearing adaptation values removes any improper operating characteristics that may have been saved in the control modules memory.
^ The control module will temporarily operate on internally programmed default values.
^ Adaptation is an ongoing process in the Control Module.
^ The default values may occasionally lead to temporary rough running characteristics(DME). Rough running characteristics are a normal part of
the initial adaptation process.
Menu Access
Select 5 "Clear adaptation values"
Select "Y"
How to Load V9.0 Software With the MODIC Station
[email protected]
197
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 719
DISKETTE CONTENTS
DME Variant Code data is automatically loaded when Disc A is loaded.
(MODIC I or MODIC II)
1. Place 9.0 A in the MODIC Station drive.
2. Press 2 - Load diskette then -
3. Press 1 coding and
4. Screen says "Program Overwrite?" Y or N
5. Press "Y" - Disc A will now load. Please note that if you do not have an earlier version of this software in your MODIC you will not have to
perform steps 4 and 5.
6. After Disc A is completely loaded remove disc A and replace it with Disc B. During loading the MODIC screen will display a bar graph.
When the bar reaches the right side of the screen loading of the disc is complete.
7. Press 2, "Load Diskette" and a menu of Disc B will be displayed. If you wish to check and see if your MODIC has enough memory press "C"
the screen will display the amount of memory that each section of the disc needs and how much memory remains in your MODIC (black box
on the right).
Special Note:
When the MODIC is attached to a car and the main menu is displayed the "C" may be pressed to bring you to an "erase" menu. You erase a
program by simply pressing the number and.
8. Disc B may be partially loaded by simply pressing any combination of the menu # s. Only 1 selection may be loaded at a time.
9. If you attempt to load a program and there is insufficient memory for it, the MODIC will display "Memory Insufficient. Do you want to erase
Y or N".
If "Y" is entered a menu screen will allow you to pick which software you wish to erase.
Downloading of this software must only be done with the MODIC Station. Never attempt to load this software with the DIS.
Label Printing
Used in conjunction with the MODIC Station (menu # 3, printing) coding labels may be printed out with the Central Coding Key. The MODIC will
store the data for printing if:
1. The function "display coding key and store in MODIC" is displayed and selected.
2. The central coding key has been modified.
Extra labels may be purchased through your PDC under P/N 81 22 9 407 713.
Prerequisites For Programming
The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
During programming:
1. The ignition must not be switched off
2. The engine must not be started
3. No other work can be carried out on the vehicle
[email protected]
198
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 720
4. The MODIC must not be disconnectedTechnical Service Bulletin # 080396 Date: 970201
Updated MoDic(R) Software - C9.0 ZCS Coding

Group O8
MODIC
Bulletin Number
08 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1997
Product Engineering
This IDC bulletin supersedes IDC 08 O3 96 dated September 1996 which should be removed and discarded from your IDC binder.
SUBJECT:
Updated MODIC Software C9.0 ZCS Coding
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
A revised and expanded version of the MODIC ZCS coding Software has been developed. With the release of C9.0 MODIC Software, Version
C8.0 ZCS Encoding Software has become invalid.
Program Highlights
^ Updated information for all models.
^ Only codeable control modules (on the vehicle in question) are displayed on the MODIC screen. The Central Coding Key determines which
control modules are codeable.
^ Central Coding Key - The E39 and the Z3 use a 37 digit instead of a 48 digit Central Coding Key. If the Central Coding Key is altered (via
conversion), write the new Central Coding Key on a label. Affix the label to the appropriate vehicle Central Coding Key sticker location. Place
the new label next to the old label. Cross out the old label. Label location -
E39 - In the right side of the trunk next to the fusible link
Z3 - On the bottom side of the E-Box lid
[email protected]
199
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 721
[email protected]
200
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 722
^ After replacement the following control modules require coding with C9.0. When coding is complete check the control module's fault memory
and erase any faults present.
[email protected]
201
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 723
Overview of Conversions
Footnote: # = It is only possible to enhance the blower on the IHKA from software 37 that was introduced approximately 9/95.
Menu Access
Select Series
Select "4" conversion
Select system (example IHKA)
Select Function (example "1" temperature C/F)
Select "Y" to start automatic coding
Overview of Retrofits
E36
5-Onboard Computer E36/5 - must be encoded within 36 hours of
installation.
6-Cruise Control From 9/94 production
Menu Access:
Select Series
Select "2" Retrofitting
Select System (example "1" IHKA)
Select "Y" to start automatic encoding
Parts Information
Software Version C9.0 A/B

P/N 01 11 9 788 251
introductory Price = $49.00
Return any defective diskettes to BMW NA via the BMW Tool Warranty. Details of the program can be found in your Parts information Binder
under bulletin 1-24 dated 4/95.
[email protected]
202
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 724
Additional copies may be purchased through your Parts Distribution Center.
How to Load C9.0 Software With the MODIC Station
DISKETTE CONTENTS
1. Place C9.0 in the MODIC Station Drive.
2. Press 2-- Load diskette then --
5. Press "Y" -- Disc A will now load. Please note that if you do not have an earlier version of this software in your MODIC you will not have to
6. After Disc A loads completely remove Disc A and replace it with Disc B. During loading the MODIC screen will display a bar graph. When
the bar reaches the right side of the screen loading of the disc is complete.
7. Press 2, "Load Diskette" to display the disc B menu. If you wish to check and see if your MODIC has enough memory press "C". The screen
will display the amount of memory that each section of the disc needs and how much memory remains in your MODIC (black box on the
right).
Special Note:
Attach the MODIC to a car and press the "C" to erase parts of the loaded program. You erase a program by simply pressing the number and
8. Press one of the menu choices to partially load disc B. Load only 1 selection at a time.
Y or N."
Label Printing
store the data for print if:
Order extra labels through your PDC under P/N 81 22 1 466 646. Technical Service Bulletin # 1102842033 Date: 901001
Engine - Identification
Group 11 Engine
This Technical Reference Information supersedes T.R.I. 11 02 84 (2033) dated October 1985. it has been updated to include several new engine
versions.
Please remove and discard T.R.I. 11 02 84 (2033) dated October 1985 from your T.R.I. binder.
SUBJECT: Engine Indentification
MODEL: All U.S. Versions since 1978
CONDITION: Determination of engine information on displacement size, country version, fuel system, revision state and engine serial
number from codes stamped on engine block.
[email protected]
203
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 725
CORRECTION: Endosed explanation of codes stamped in engine block should clarify information. If you are investigating a code which
does not appear in the enclosures (i.e. grey market import), contact your regional technical manager for assistance.
GENERAL
INFORMATION: Various codes may be stamped into the engine block. These codes represent:
1.Engine Number and Code:

1. ENGINE NUMBER AND CODE:
NEW ENGINES INSTALLED IN PRODUCTION
Engine Number:
A series production engine will have an eight-digit engine number consisting of two groups of four digits. The 1st block contains 4 digits
with information on the assembly line and serial number of engines produced daily. The 2nd block shows the factory code and day of
production.
[email protected]
204
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 726
Engine Code: (New Engines Installed in Production)
In addition to the eight digit engine number, an engine designation code is stamped in series production engines for model indentification. The
decoding of these numbers can be accomplished using Attachment 1.
Note: These production engine designation codes are different from the codes of new/remanufactured engines obtained from the parts dept. and
should not be confused with them. This code (see below) provides information on displacement, number of cylinders, fuel system, change
status and country version of engines installed during production:
Hyphens and dashes are not die-stamped in the sequence, e.g.
16 4V B/A stands for:
16 = Displacement (e.g. 1.6I)
4/6/12 = 4- or 6- or 12-cylinders
E/V/T = Fuel Injected/Carbureted/Turbocharged engine
A,B,C = Internal BMW information (change index)
[email protected]
205
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 727
A/C/E/W/Y/Z = Country Codes
K = Catalytic converter
Fig. 1 M10-, M30-, S14 and S38 engines (Flywheel End of Crankcase)
Fig. 2 M20/M21 Engine (intake Side of Crankcase)
Fig 3. M42 Engine (intake Side of Crankcase)
Fig. 4 M50 Engine (intake Side of Crankcase)
[email protected]
206
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 728
Fig. 5 M70 Engine (Right Front Side of Crankcase)
Fig. 6 S38 Englne (Water Pump Flange)
Engine Number and Code:

2. ENGINE NUMBER AND CODE:
NEW/REMANUFACTURED ENGINES OBTAINED FROM YOUR PARTS DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Engine Number:
After grinding off the numbers for the original engine data, information for the remanufactured engine is now die-stamped in the same position
as for new engine identification. Similar to series production engines, the 8-digit engine number also consists of 2 blocks of 4 digits, but stand
for different data:
- The 1st block of 4 digits provides information on the serial number of engines produced daily.
- The 2nd block contains a code for either a remanufactured or for a new engine as well as the month and year of production.
[email protected]
207
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 729
Engine Code:
Codes for new/remanufactured spare parts engines are also different from the codes used on series production engines:
The decoding of these numbers can be accomplished using Attachment 2 for U.S. version engines. This decoding identifies the specific part
number of the engine.
Special Tools - New Torque Angle Indicator

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
[email protected]
208
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 730
04 21 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New Torque Indicator Tool
MODEL:
All
Situation:
Please refer to Parts Information bulletin 1-24 dated 4/95 for tool warranty details. All prices on this bulletin are introductory prices. Introductory
prices are only valid during the Automatic Tool Shipment.
Torque Angle Tool

P/N 90 88 6 009 120
Price = $116.98
Used to quickly and easily adjust the torque angle on engine bolts with a torque angle specification. Refer to the latest Tightening Torque
microfiche or TIS for torque angle specifications. Special tool 90 88 6 009 120 supersedes special tool 88 88 6 112 110.
Engine - High Pressure Steam Cleaning Warning

Group 12
Engine - Electrical
Bulletin Number
12 03 89 (1838)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1989
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
High Pressure Engine Steam Cleaning
MODELS:
All
Situation:
High pressure engine steam cleaning can force cleaning solutions into the engine harness sheath and associated cables, causing unusual problems
which otherwise would not have occurred
The high quality BMW engine harness multiplugs and related sealing measures were never intended to be subjected to the discharge velocity and
force of typical commercial steam cleaning units. Further, cleaning solutions used in conjunction with the high pressure discharge can leave
corrosive, if not conductive, residues deep within the harness and cables.
BMW engines are rarely so encrusted with automotive residues and dirt that normal low pressure degreasing methods fail to provide proper,
efficient cleaning.
[email protected]
209
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 731
Clearly, high pressure engine steam cleaning is unnecessary and should be restricted to extreme cleaning jobs, i.e., commercial trucks, off road
vehicles, et
CONSEQUENTLY HIGH PRESSURE ENGINE STEAM CLEANING IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED FOR BMW ENGINES.
Typical BMW engine washing procedure:
1. Bring engine to operating temperature, switch engine off.
2. Cover or shield any component (AFM, ignition distributor, multiplugs etc.) situated in the area to be cleaned with plastic sheeting. Pieces of a
"BMW Clean Kit" seat cover or the equivalent will provide adequate protection.
3. Apply engine degreaser or general engine cleaning solvent and allow to soak for up to five minutes (follow manufacturer's instructions).
4. Warm water spray the area to be cleaned, flushing the solvent and the contaminants loose.
Note:
- Do not aim the water spray directly at components.
- Do not use the waterspray any longer than necessary.
- Do not wash the entire engine compartment when only one area requires degreasing, e.g., front crankshaft radial seal, M20 oil filter
replacement, etc.
5. Blow dry the cleaned area immediately with a moderate compressed air jet.
6. Start engine immediately and preferably road test vehicle.
Information:
Warranty claims for corroded connections and contaminated multiplugs which a caused by improper engine cleaning will no longer be honored.
Labor Operation Information:

The general engine cleaning procedure stated herein is a simple, common sense guideline. The labor allowance for cleaning is always included in
any labor allowance for fluid leakage repair.
When special cleaning is requested, additional time and a definite labor operation will be provided for that specific repair.
Engine - Hydraulic Lock

Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 01 92 (3484)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Engine Hydraulic Lock
Engines:
All
Situation:
A fuel injector which is subject to a mechanical malfunction and remains stuck in the open position may cause an engine hydraulic lock condition,
i.e. the engine will no longer turn over due to the noncompressible liquid fuel which is trapped in the cylinder.
Correction:
If a vehicle is towed into the workshop with a suspected hydraulic lock condition, the following repair tips should be applied:
- Remove the spark plugs and rotate the engine manually.
Caution: Do not crank engine over with the starter. Fire hazard due to possible liquid fuel in a cylinder.
- Check the compression of all cylinders.
Testing conditions:
[email protected]
210
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 732
Battery in perfect condition.
Engine warm - coolant temperature maximum of 95~F (35~C). Accelerator pedal fully depressed when cranking engine.
See appropriate Repair Manual (Group 11) for further information regarding main/fuel pump relay(s) which must be removed to disable the
ignition system and fuel pump(s) before cranking and also special tools/ adaptors used for the compression check.
Crank the engine until the compressor gauge indicator stops rising.
The compression pressures should be approx. equal for all cylinders (10-11 bar/143-156 psi). If the compression pressures are all within
specification, check the engine oil for fuel dilution and replace if necessary.
Note:
If the compression is lower i.e. < 10 bar (143 psi) in the cylinder in which a "stuck open" injector has been diagnosed, that piston/ connecting rod
may have been damaged due to the hydraulic lock.
- Remove all of the fuel injectors and check the leakage rate as outlined in S.I. 13 08 90 (3096).
- Further engine tear down should be carried out to determine the cause of low compression in the affected cylinder, i.e. bent connecting red,
damaged piston, etc. as outlined in the repair manual.
- The starter drive and ring gear should also be checked for damage, i.e. missing or stripped teeth.
Warranty
Status:
Information only.
Recall - Heater Core Cracking Additional Notice

GROUP 17
Coolant System
Bulletin Number
17 04 93
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 2000
Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 17 04 93 (3775) dated May 1993. Customer notification letters were originally sent during the
period of June 1993 - April 1994 to the registered owners (as ascertained from States Motor Vehicle Registration data) of affected vehicles. The
current owners of "not yet repaired" vehicles will be mailed notification letters during the period of March 2000 - April 2000. A copy of the
customer letter is included, for your information.
PERFORM THE PROCEDURE OUTLINED IN THIS SERVICE INFORMATION ON ALL AFFECTED VEHICLES THE NEXT TIME THEY
ARE IN THE SHOP FOR MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
SUBJECT:
Coolant System Recall Campaign - No. 93V-015 Model E30 with S14 Engine (M3)
Situation:
BMW of North America, Inc. has voluntarily initiated a safety-related defect recall campaign that involves the coolant system of the affected
vehicles. This bulletin outlines specific procedures for implementing the modification portion of the campaign.
The malfunction or failure of a coolant system component, such as a thermostat, water pump, or fan belt, can result in significantly increased
coolant temperature and system pressure.
If the indications (e.g. movement of the coolant temperature gauge needle into the red zone) of such a critical overheating condition are not heeded
by the driver, and if, in addition, the vehicle is operated under high-load conditions such that the elevated pressure cannot be adequately relieved, it
is possible that damage to, or failure of, a coolant system component could occur.
If a crack were to form in the end piece of the heater core, coolant could be expelled, perhaps suddenly. In some cases, the coolant could contact the
lower right leg of the driver, possibly resulting in injury. It is also possible that, in some cases, coolant expelled from the heater core as vapor could
cause fogging of the interior surfaces of the windows, reducing the drivers field of view.
Affected Vehicles:
This Recall Campaign involves E30 (M3) vehicles with S14 engines which were produced from 12/86-12/90.
[email protected]
211
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 733
In order to determine if a specific vehicle is affected by this Recall Campaign, it will be necessary to utilize the "Service Menu" of the DCS (Dealer
Communication System). Based on the response of the system, either proceed with the corrective action or take no further action.
The Chassis Number Ranges listed are only for informational purposes and are not to be considered as the only deciding factor.
As this modification will not prevent engine overheating, any problems (e.g. mechanical defects improper coolant level/antifreeze protection, etc)
with the coolant system should be corrected before performing the recall modification.
Such repairs are not reimbursable under this recall campaign. The customer must be made aware of the required repairs, and their liability for
payment, before such repairs are made.
Procedure:
Replace the radiator cap with a new version to control system pressure and provide greater coolant overflow in the event of overheating. Install
thermostatic bypass valve and associated installation hardware to control coolant temperature in the heater core.
Remove the radiator cap. Remove the drain plug located in the bottom center of the radiator, and drain the coolant into a large clean catch pan. A
funnel may be helpful in directing the flow of coolant. Save the coolant, since it will be poured back into the system later.
Remove the plastic cover over the wiring tray that runs along the top of the firewall. The cover secured with clips underneath. Loosen the wiring
tray by removing three phillips screws (one on each side of the diagnostic plug, and one at the passenger end). This assembly (wiring tray and
wiring) may now be moved forward to gain better access for the modification. Refer to the illustration.
Note:
Original coolant hoses must be left in the vehicle when performing this procedure. Do not loosen the hose clamps at either end of the hose.
Tests have shown that reinstalled hoses may develop a leak at their ends due to settlement of the hose material during the first installation, and
likely over-torquing during reinstallation. If during this modification the coolant supply and/or return hoses are found to be damaged
(ripped/torn), so that they are no longer watertight, the hose(s) must be replaced. Remove the damaged hose(s) carefully - do NOT cut the
hose(s) to remove.
Note:
That all replaced hoses must be returned for evaluation by the Warranty Parts Center.
Reinstall the radiator drain plug, and move the catch pan directly where the heater hoses pass through the firewall. The next two steps in the
procedure will illustrate where the hoses need to be cut for installation of the bypass assembly. Coolant will spill from the hoses as they are cut.
[email protected]
212
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 734
Bend the hoses down to drain as much coolant as possible into the catch pan.
Carefully remove a 30 mm section of the supply hose measuring from the lower bend at the firewall end, using tin snips, hose cutters, or a sharp
knife. This must be done with the hose installed in the vehicle. Refer to the illustration for location of cuts:
Make a single cut in the return hose, still installed on the vehicle. Refer to illustration. Cut carefully, since assembly will be easier if the cut is clean
and square.
The required parts to assemble the bypass are shown. Assemble the bypass valve (item # 3) into the cut supply hose. The illustration # S 17 93 U 06
shows the proper orientation of the components when installed in the vehicle. Note that an arrow on the body of the bypass valve shows the
direction of coolant flow, from the cylinder head to the heater core. Do not install the valve backwards. Secure the supply hose to the bypass valve
with two of the larger hose clamps (item # 2). Attach the curved end of the bypass hose (item # 4) to the small nipple on the bypass valve and
secure with a small hose clamp (item # 1). Large hose clamps are to be torqued to 1.5 Nm, small hose clamps to 1.5 Nm, using a torque wrench.
[email protected]
213
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 735
Trim the bypass hose to the proper length as shown in the illustration:
Install the "T" piece into the cut return hose, using new large hose clamps to secure. Connect the free end of the bypass hose to the small fitting on
the "T", and secure with a new small hose clamp. Verify that all hose clamps are tight, and that none of the hose or valve components rub on the
engine, intake manifold, etc.
Pour the coolant from the catch pan back into the system. Strain coolant through a screen funnel to filter out any dirt or grit. Install the new
redesigned radiator cap. Add enough new, properly mixed coolant to compensate for any spillage during the modification (typically less than 32 oz.
of 50/50 mix antifreeze/water). Leak check per E30 repair manual (operation 17 00 009). Verify that there are no leaks once the car is warmed up,
and that the heater works. Reinstall the wiring tray with the phillips screws, and snap the cover back into place.
Parts Information:
Label Instructions:
This Recall Campaign has been assigned code number 92 After the vehicle has been checked, and corrected if necessary, obtain a label (SD
92-008) and:
a. emboss your BMW dealer warranty number in the middle of the label (1)
b. punch out code number 92 printed on the label and,
[email protected]
214
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 736
c. affix the label to the B pillar as shown.
If the vehicle already has a label from a previous Service Action/Recall Campaign, affix the new label next to the old one. Do not affix one label on
top of another one because a number from an underlying label could appear in the punched-out hole of the new label.
Reimbursement for this recall will be provided through DCS Campaign Entry.
Special Defect Code: 00 17 01 05 00
[email protected]
215
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 737
These work packages are only to be used if hoses are found damaged during the modification procedure. Note that all replaced hoses are to be
returned to the Warranty Parts Center for evaluation.
[email protected]
216
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 738
[email protected]
217
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 739
New BMW Special Tools.

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
94 15 97
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1997
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
MODEL:
All
Situation:
[email protected]
218
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 740
Due to a design change in the engine coolant tank cap, the old test adapter 88 88 6 170 006 should no longer be used and must be discarded. The
new test adapter can be used on all screw on caps. Testing is accomplished as before by following the instructions in the Repair Manual group 17
00 009.
Distribution of the following tools will not be through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Tools may be purchased through your PDC. Refer to
Parts Information bulletin 01 01 95 for tool warranty details.
Used to remove the C33 radio without damaging the cassette mechanism. Unlatch the radio prior to removal. Refer to repair manual section 65 11
030.
Used to remove the EWS ring antenna without damage. Refer to repair manual section 61 35 900.
Due to a design change in the diameter of the E39 wiper arm shaft, previously distributed special tool 90 88 6 616 000 will no longer work. To
correct this there are 2 choices.
[email protected]
219
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 741
1. Purchase special tool 90 88 6 616 001 and replace the body of your existing tool.
Note:
Do not discard the threaded shaft of your old tool. It is reused on the new tool.
2. Enlarge the opening of your existing tool to 16.3 mm. Refer to illustration W616 001. Be careful to remove any burrs
Either the purchased tool or the modified tool will work on the E38.
Brakes - Body Vibration/Steering Wheel

Group 34 Brakes
SUBJECT: Brake Induced Steering Vibration
MODELS: E24, E28, E30 (equipped with Jurid 506 brake pads)
Situation: Some vehicles equipped with Jurid 506 brake pads may exhibit a brake induced steering vibration (usually when decelerating
in the 60 --> 40 mph range), especially when the brakes are hot. When checking the brake discs for runout and thickness
variation the discs are usually found to be within specifications.
The cause for this complaint was found to be that some brake pads were produced in production lots that were excessively
hardened. These hard pads would exaggerate any surface differences in the brake disc material, causing the vibration.
Later production pads are being manufactured under a more controlled process, to prevent the pads from being
over-hardened. These pads are commonly referred to as Jurid 5061 pads, and can be differentiated by the * symbol on the
back of the pad.
Correction: When a vehicle equipped wfth Jurid 506 pads has a complaint of brake induced vibration, the front pads only must be
replaced wfth Jurid 506* pads.
The brake discs should be checked for thickness using BMW special tool 88 88 6 341 280, and reground if the disc thickness is at least 0.5 mm
more than the machining limit stamped on the disc.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove large amounts of material when grinding the disc. Removal of 0.15 mm of material on each side during
the rough cut (fast speed) and 0.05 mm of material on each side during the finish cut (slow speed) is usually sufficient. Removal of
excess material only shortens disc life.
If there is not sufficient material remaining to grind the discs, they must be replaced.
Warranty
Status: Covered under the terms of the BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect code: 34 11 00 21 00
Labor operations:
Replace front pads 34 11 000

R&R front discs: E30 34 11 613
E24, E28 34 11 610
Grinding both discs 34 11 667
(only if discs are not replaced)
Any questions regarding warranty coverage should be discussed with your District Service Manager.
[email protected]
220
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 742
Brakes - Steering Wheel/Body Vibration

Group 34
Brakes
Bulletin Number
34 O2 93 (3855)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1994
Product Engineering
This bulletin supersedes S.I. 34 02 93 (3855) dated March 1994, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded. It provides revised
information in the shaded areas.
SUBJECT:
Brake Induced Vibration Felt in Steering Wheel
MODELS:
All Models
Situation:
Some cars, especially those equipped with Jurid 506 brake pads, may exhibit a vibration in the body and steering while braking. When the brake
discs are checked for runout, they frequently are found to be within specification.
This vibration is caused by the hard composition of the Jurid 506 pads, which amplify any variations in the brake discs, and the vibrations are
transmitted into the body and steering.
New brake pad compositions have been developed and tested for various models which greatly reduce the tendency to cause vibrations.
The new style pads have been phased into production approximately as follows:
E36 5/93
E34 M50 5/94
E34 M60 3/93
E32 M60 9/93
There will be no production changes on the E31, E32-M70, or Motorsport models.
Correction:
In case of customer complaint, replace the front brake pads and discs. The list gives the part numbers of the latest compound brake pads for front
axles. It is not necessary to replace the rear pads or discs to cure a vibration complaint. If the rear pads and discs currently on the car are not beyond
specifications they do not have to be replaced.
[email protected]
221
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 743
Whenever pads are replaced, all metal to metal contact points of the pad and caliper should be lubricated with Plastilube, BMW part number 81 22
9 407 103.
To prevent cold brake squeal when replacing pads on the E3G models only, all edges of the front pads should be chamfered with a file, cutting in 2
mm to a depth of 3 mm. Apply Permatex Disc Brake Quiet to the back of the front pads, as per the manufacturer's instructions on the can.
Warranty Status:
Brake pads and brake discs are covered for defects in materials or workmanship by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recent analysis of brake rotor claims indicate that this bulletin is being interpreted by some dealers as a field action. Please consider that:
1) The customer complaint must be for brake induced vibration with Jurid 506 pads installed hence, add-on repairs by the technician, whether
approved by management or not, are ineligible.
2) The front brake motors must be above minimum thickness. Since the bulletin's repair instructions are to place rotors and Jurid 506 pads with a
customer complaint of steering vibration, checking run-out is redundant and not claimable.
3) Rear brake pads and rotors do not fall under the provisions of this bulletin.
Deviations from the above procedure requires regional authorization. Technical Service Bulletin # 1203851085 Date: 901001
Ignition - Spark Plug Applications

Group 12 Engine - Electrical
Bulletin Number 12 03 85 (1085) Information Sheet
[email protected]
222
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 744
[email protected]
223
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 745
Please remove and discard the Spark Plug Application Chart dated May 1990 from S.I. 12 03 85 (1085) and insert the attached chart dated October
1990 in its place.
The October 1990 chart incorporates the spark plug recommendations for the M50 engine in the 525i model and the M70 engine in the 850i model.
Note: This information sheet may be discarded after completing the above action.
Attachment Spark Plug Application Chart
[email protected]
224
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 746
[email protected]
225
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 747
SPECIAL NOTES:
1. The BMW Special Tool Combinations listed below will facilitate spark plug installation.
Englne Part Number
M10 88 88 6 121 172

M20 and
M30 standard (13/16") spark plug socket
S14 88 88 6 121 172 and

S38 88 88 6 121 160 (S38 Tool)
M42 88 88 6 121 171 (M70 Tools)

M50 and
M70 88 88 6 121 171
2. Torque specifications for unlubricated spark plugs (i.e. no oil, grease, etc. on threads)
Standard Engines: 20-30 N-m (15-22 ft.lb.)

Motorsport Engines: 15-25 N-m (11-18 ft.lb.)
3. Symbol (t) indicates platinum spark plugs may be used in place of the standard type. However, for all other applications, platinum spark
plugs are not approved.
Ignition - Spark Plug Application

Group 12
Engine - Electrical
Bulletin Number
12 03 85 (1085)
Information Sheet
[email protected]
226
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 748
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1993
Product Engineering
[email protected]
227
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 749
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 12 03 85 (1085) and the spark plug application chart dated September 1992 which should be
removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
It includes the spark plug manufacturer and plug designation for the 530i and 540i models with M60 engines.
Ignition - Spark Plug Application Charts

Group 12
Engine - Electrical
Bulletin Number
12 03 85 (1085)
Information Sheet
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1992
Product Engineering
Please remove and discard the Spark Plug Application Chart (dated January 1992) from S.I. 12 03 85 (1085) and insert the chart dated March 1992
in its place.
It includes the E36 (M42) spark plug number and Manufacturer.
Note:
This information sheet may be discarded after completing the above action.
[email protected]
228
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 750
[email protected]
229
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 751
[email protected]
230
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 752
Ignition - Spark Plug Application Chart

Group 12
Engine Electrical
Bulletin Number
12 03 85 (1085)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1995
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 12 03 85 (1085) dated November 1994, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT:
Spark Plug Application - Chart
MODELS:
All
[email protected]
231
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 753
Situation:
The spark plug application chart includes spark plug manufacturer and plug designation for all BMW models which should be used whenever a
spark plug replacement becomes necessary.
^ A mix of platform tri-electrode spark plugs and dual electrode spark plugs and/or different manufacturer spark plugs, i.e., Bosch/NGK should
never be installed on one engine.
^ Spark plugs must always be torqued to the proper specifications as outlined on the chart.
[email protected]
232
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 754
Warranty Status:
Information only.
Spark Plug/Engine Oil Capacity Reference Chart

January 2000
00 22 92
Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 22 92 dated March 1999.
SUBJECT
Spark Plug/Engine Oil Capacity Reference Chart
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Attached is an update to the quick reference chart which includes all current spark plug applications and engine oil capacities.
Description
Spark Plug/Engine Oil Capacity Reference Chart (Chrome Coated)

Order # SD 92-016
cost $3.00 each
Requests for additional copies (chrome coated) should be sent to:
Service Engineering
1 BMW Plaza
Montvale, NJ 07645
Fax Number: (201) 930-8401
A preprinted form is attached for your convenience.
[email protected]
233
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 755
[email protected]
234
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 756
ENGINE OIL CAPACITIES FOR CURRENT BMW MODELS
[email protected]
235
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 757
MATERIALS ORDER FORM
[email protected]
236
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 758
1203851085 - 04/01/91 Adds Information to 1990/10/01

INFORMATION WAS TAKEN FROM TSB # 1203851085, DATED 4/1/91 TO UPDATE TSB # 1203851085, DATED 10/1/90.
A/C Compressor - Warranty Return Procedure

Group 64
Bulletin Number
64 06 91 (3329)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1991
Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 64 05 91 (3329) dated August 1991 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT:
Air Conditioning Compressors
MODELS:
All
Situation:
Air conditioning compressors which are returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center are being received without shipping caps on the inlet and
outlet fittings.
Because both R-12 refrigerant and refrigerant oils are hygroscopic, moisture from the air starts a rusting process very quickly in the compressor,
making meaningful failure analysis impossible.
Return the failed compressor in the packaging supplied with the replacement unit to prevent damage in transit. Compressors returned to the
Warranty Parts Return Center without both inlet and outlet fittings sealed with the plastic caps from the replacement compressor will have to be
returned to the dealer.
Please adhere to the above procedure to prevent debit action.

A/C - Diagnosing Compressor Noise

Group 64
Bulletin Number
64 10 90 (3180)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1991
Service Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 64 10 90 (3180) dated January 1991. It incorporates additional troubleshooting guidelines.
Please remove and discard S.I. 64 10 90 (3180) dated January 1991 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Troubleshooting Air Conditioning Compressor Noise
MODELS:
All
Situation:
A high percentage of air conditioning compressors which are returned under warranty for complaints of noisy operation have been found to be
non-defective.
[email protected]
237
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 759
Several situations can produce noisy operation of the compressor without the compressor being faulty. The work involved replacing a compressor
often corrects the situation that caused the noisy operation, misleading the technician into believing that the compressor was faulty.
Before replacing an air conditioning compressor, please consider the following guidelines.
Troubleshooting Guidelines
1. Make sure that the noise is present with the clutch of the compressor engaged. If it is present without the compressor clutch engaged, remove
the drive belt and recheck - if it continues, it is not related to the compressor.
2. If removing the drive belt reduces or eliminates the noise, before proceeding further, check the following:
A. Tightening torque of compressor and bracket mounting bolts.
B. Belt tension and condition - A loose or slipping belt can cause noise, and an overly tight belt can damage the clutch bearings.
3. If the compressor is noisy with the compressor clutch engaged, make sure that the system is charged with the correct amount of refrigerant.
If an air conditioning system is overcharged by even a small amount the compressor noise level can increase. This is due to varying amounts
of liquid refrigerant entering the compressor suction port, resulting in a symptom known as "liquid shock".
If the compressor is replaced for a complaint of noise and the cause of the noise is an overcharged system, the actual cause will be corrected
by the proper recharging of the system, and the compressor will have been unnecessarily replaced. When tested, the compressor will then be
returned to the dealer.
Because most currently produced refrigerant recycling equipment does not measure the amount of refrigerant recovered from a system, the
only reliable means of ensuring that the amount of refrigerant in the system is correct is to evacuate the system and recharge it with the
specified quantity of refrigerant. (Refer to the refrigerant quantity label in the engine compartment or to S.I. 64 01 90 (3042).
This procedure must be carried out in all cases of complaint of noisy compressor prior to replacement of any components.
Important Note:
A certain amount of "liquid shock" is unavoidable in one circumstance: if a vehicle has been stored in a cool environment (e.g., in a air
conditioned garage) and is then operated in a high ambient temperature and the air conditioning switched on during high engine rpm, the
compressor will be noisy for a brief period. This is a normal situation and should be explained to the customer. Compressor replacement will
not correct this complaint.
4. The function of the expansion valve and evaporator temperature sensor or switch should also be checked (refer to repair manual, Group 64).
If either malfunctions and allows liquid refrigerant to reach the compressor via the suction port, compressor noise can result.
Important Note:
If compressor noise is a result of liquid refrigerant reaching the suction port of the compressor, the compressor may not have been damaged,
depending on the type of compressor. Correct the cause of liquid refrigerant at the suction port (e.g., expansion valve stuck open) and recheck
the compressor for noise. A vane-type compressor will exhibit noisy operation when liquid reaches the suction post but will not be damaged by
this condition, and therefore should not be replaced until it has been rechecked as described above.
5. A complaint may be received of "Compressor continues to run after engine shut off" or "Compressor continues to turn with A/C shut off".
This is caused by pressure equalization inside the compressor as refrigerant and oil bleed back from the high pressure (output) side to the low
pressure (suction) side.
This situation will only be encountered in vane-type compressors (others incorporate a one-way valve in the intake port) and should not be
considered a defect. This situation may cause a brief noise, as the clutch plate rotates backwards against the pulley, and is considered a
normal condition.
Compressors that are found to be non-defective will be returned to the dealership and the corresponding warranty claim will be debited.
Labor for evacuating and recharging the air conditioning system (as part of diagnosis of noise related complaints) is covered under the terms of the
applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Refer to the Flat Rate Manual for the appropriate model.
Campaign - Rear Wheel Hub Improper Machining
[email protected]
238
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 760
Group 33
Rear Suspension
Bulletin Number
33 01 95 (4202)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1995
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes Orange S.I. 33 01 95 (4202), dated March 28, 1995, which should be removed from your S.I. binder
and discarded.
YOU SHOULD PERFORM THE PROCEDURE OUTLINED IN THIS SERVICE INFORMATION BULLETIN WHENEVER AN AFFECTED
VEHICLE IS IN THE SHOP FOR MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR.
SUBJECT:
Rear Wheel Hub
MODELS:
M3
Situation:
The splining of either of the two rear axle output shafts ("half-shafts") may not be machined to proper tolerances. This could result in the wheel
mounting flange not being properly centered, which can lead to wheel bearing damage.
Vehicles Involved:
ONLY the vehicles listed below are involved in the inspection/repair.
In order to determine if a specific vehicle still requires inspection for this Service Action, it will be necessary to check on DCS. Based on the
response of the system, either proceed with the inspection or take no further action.
Correction:
BMW will notify customers in possession of affected vehicles via letter, a sample of which is included.
As soon as an affected vehicle comes into the workshop for any maintenance or repair, or whenever a customer presents a notification letter, the
vehicle must be inspected per the attached procedure.
If either half-shaft is found to be out of specification, the car must not be delivered to the customer until the necessary repairs have been performed.
Instructions for inspection of the vehicles are enclosed as Attachment 1. Instructions for repair of vehicles found to be out of specification are
enclosed as Attachment 2.
Parts Required:
Two hub nuts (P/N 33 41 1 133 785) have been sent to all dealers that were wholesaled an affected vehicle. Before attempting an inspection of an
affected vehicle, a dealer must have two of these nuts on hand.
Since only approximately 10% of the axles inspected will require a repair, the remaining parts should not be ordered until an inspection has
determined that parts are need. A VOR order can then be placed, and the customer provided with alternate transportation for a day.
The following parts are those required to repair one wheel. It is possible that a particular vehicle will require two sets of these parts.
Description Part Number Quantity

Half-shaft 33 21 2 227 272 1
[email protected]
239
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 761
Torx Screw 33 21 1 227 665 6
Shim 33 21 1 209 543 3
Wheel Hub 33 41 1 138 581 1
Wheel Bearing 33 41 1 137 685 1
Service Action Label Instructions:

This Service Action is assigned code number 137. After the vehicle is checked, and corrected if necessary, obtain a label (SD 92050) and:
a) Emboss your BMW dealer warranty number in the middle of the label (1).
b) Punch out code number 137 printed on the label (2).
c) Bend the label to crease an edge and remove the backing paper. Then affix the label to the B pillar as shown:
If the vehicle already has a label from a previous Service Action/Recall Campaign, affix the label next to the old one. Do not affix one label on top
of another one because a number from an underlying label could appear in the punched-out hole of the new label.
Warranty Status:
Covered under the terms of the BMW New Car Warranty. Reimbursement for this Service Action will be via Campaign Entry.
Defect Code: 00 33 01 11 00
Work Package # 5: Inspection of both half-shafts
Labor Operation: 0051 097 Checking both half-shafts

Parts Allowance: 33 41 1 133 785 Qty=2 Hub Nuts
Work Package # 6: Checking both half-shafts and replacing related parts on one wheel.
Labor Operation: 00 51 098 Checking both half shafts and replacing related parts on one wheel.
Parts Allowance:
33 21 2 227 272 Qty=1 Half-shaft
33 21 1 227 665 Qty=6 Torx Screw
33 21 1 209 543 Qty=3 Shim
33 41 1 138 581 Qty=1 Wheel Hub
33 41 1 137 685 Qty=1 Wheel Bearing
33 41 1 133 785 Qty=2 Hub Nuts
Work Package # 7: Checking both half-shafts and replacing related parts on two wheel.
Labor Operation: 00 51 099 Checking both half shafts and replacing related parts on two wheels.
Parts Allowance:
33 21 2 227 272 Qty=2 Half-shaft
33 21 1 227 665 Qty=12 Torx Screw
33 21 1 209 543 Qty=6 Shim
33 41 1 138 581 Qty=2 Wheel Hub
[email protected]
240
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 762
33 41 1 137 685 Qty=2 Wheel Bearing
33 41 1 133 785 Qty=2 Hub Nuts
Inspection Procedure
Inspection Procedure
To Be Performed on Both Rear Wheels
Set parking brake firmly, raise car on lift with a suitable punch, push out the staked areas on the hub nut (1) so that the nut can be rotated. Tighten
the nut to 300 Nm, then loosen two turns.
Mount the special tools as shown.
Note:
6 332 113 can be used in place of 6 332 117.
Run the center shaft tool in until it contacts the axle shaft. Use a torque wrench to tighten the center shaft of the tool. If the torque required to turn
the tool goes over 40 Nm before the hub contacts the nut again (approximately two turns), the bearing is defective. If found defective, snug up the
nut, and order parts per instructions in bulletin. The car should not be driven.
If bearing is found to be in order, replace the hub nut with a new one and tighten to 300 Nm.
Repair Procedure
Disconnect rear sway bar and allow it to hang to allow access to half-shaft. If left side is being worked on, remove rear section of exhaust system
for access.
[email protected]
241
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 763
Remove hub nut (1).
Remove bolts, separate half-shaft from output flange. and hang from car with a piece of wire.
Mount special tools as shown, press out halfshaft, and remove.
Note:
6 332 113 can be used in place of 6 332 117
Remove caliper mounting bolts (1) and hang caliper out of the way on a piece of wire.
[email protected]
242
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 764
Remove brake disc.
Drive out hub with special tool 33 4 010.
Remove snap ring.
Pull out wheel bearing with special tools as shown.
Note:
Tool 33 3 260/262 can be used as an alternate.
[email protected]
243
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 765
Install new wheel bearing with special tools as shown.
Note:
Tool 333 260/264 can be used as an alternate.
Reinstall snap ring.
Pull in new hub as shown.
Reinstall brake. Tighten retaining bolt to 16 Nm.
[email protected]
244
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 766
Reinstall caliper. Tighten caliper mounting bolts to 65 Nm.
Mount special tools as show, and pull in new half-shaft.
Fasten half-shaft to output flange using new bolts and plates (1). Tighten to 100 Nm.
Tighten hut nut to 300 Nm and loosen two turns.
[email protected]
245
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 767
Mount the special tools as shown. Repeat procedure described in Attachment 1.
If new assembly is found to be in order, tighten hub nut to 300 Nm and stake in place.
Owner Letter
June 1995
Dear BMW Owner:
BMW of North America, Inc. (BMW NA) is conducting a Service Action to further protect your investment in your automobile.
In the course of our continuous quality testing, it was discovered that splines on some rear wheel drive shafts may have been machined slightly off
center. As a result, the rear wheel bearing can be exposed to a vibration that could cause premature bearing wear.
Our records indicate that your 1995 M3 may be affected. In order to prevent any future problems with the rear wheel bearing, BMW NA requests
that you schedule an appointment with your BMW dealer at your earliest convenience, possible within the next few weeks, to have your car
inspected and repaired if necessary.
If upon inspection the dealer finds that your M3 requires repair, the dealer will perform the repairs free of charge. Please arrange with your dealer
for alternate transportation until the necessary parts are installed.
BMW urges you to take advantage of this Service Action since it is part of our commitment to maintain the value of your investment and the
driving pleasure offered by BMW.
Should you have any further questions, please feel free to call our Customer Assistance Department at (800) 831-1117. Technical Service
Bulletin # 320201 Date: 010701
Steering Gear - Replacement Due to Accident Damage

GROUP 32
32 02 01
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 2001
Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletins replaces S.I. 32 04 84 dated September 1984. Please remove S.I. 32 04 84 from your binder and discard.
SUBJECT
[email protected]
246
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 768
Replacement of Steering Gear Due to Accident Damage
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Impacts due to accidents or similar driving conditions can cause damage to steering boxes or racks. It may be extremely difficult to diagnose
internal damage to steering boxes or racks which otherwise appear undamaged externally.
A thorough internal check of steering gears is generally not economically feasible. However, damage to other related components can be taken into
consideration when deciding whether a steering gear must be replaced.
PROCEDURE
The steering gear does NOT have to be replaced if:
There is no visible damage to front axle parts such as spring struts, hubs or spindles, control arms or wish bones, thrust or tension rods or stabilizers
performing a locating function, steering drop arms or Pitman arms, track rods or drag links, tie rods, front axle subframe, steering column, and
attachment points for suspension components to body.
-- There is no binding or increase in turning effort when operating the steering gear from lock to lock with engine off.
-- The impact has not caused the wheel alignment to become not adjustable within specified tolerances using normal adjustment procedures.
The steering gear MUST be replaced if:
-- There is visible damage to the steering gear, including blackening or discoloration of the housing from fire damage.
-- There is any permanent deformation or cracks on:
Steering gear mounts;
Front axle subframe;
Steering drop arms or Pitman arms
Spring struts;
Spindles or hubs;
Steering column;
Control arms or wishbones (except damage caused by improper towing or tie-downs);
Thrust or tension rods or stabilizers performing a locating function (except damage caused by improper towing or tie-downs);
Track rods or drag links and tie rods (except damage caused by improper towing or tie-downs)
If a recommended replacement under the criteria described above is refused by the customer or insurance company, the repair order should be so
noted and signed by the refusing party.
Information only.
Distributor Cap and Rotor - New Design

Group 12
Engine - Electric
Bulletin Number
12 02 90 (3115)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1990
[email protected]
247
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 769
Service Engineering
SUBJECT:
Modified Distributor Cap and Rotor
MODEL:
M3 (E30)
Situation:
A new style distributor cap and rotor has been phased into production since 12/88 on S14 engines. The new style distributor cap incorporates a rigid
brass pin instead of a spring loaded carbon brush which rides in a contact hole of the new style rotor (see illustration).
A mixed installation of components belonging to different engineering developments, i.e., later style distributor cap and early style rotor without
contact hole, is not acceptable. The distributor cap may be destroyed upon assembly due to an unfavorable buildup of tolerances between the
camshaft and rotor.
Parts
Information:
(Early Style) (Later Style)
Description Part Number Part Number
Distributor cap 12 11 1 309 797 12 111 312 160

Rotor 12 11 1 309 798 12 111 312 157
Do not mix early and later style components.
This information will be incorporated into the next update of the Parts Microfiche.
Cooling System - Coolant Leak Near Expansion Tank

Group 17
Cooling System
Bulletin Number
17 01 92 (3608)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Radiator Expansion Tank Seals
MODELS:
E30 and E36 with M42 Engines, E34 with M20 or M50 Engines
Situation:
An evaluation of radiators which have been returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center for leaking complaints has indicated that many of the
leaks occurred at the sealing O-rings which seal the coolant expansion tank to the radiator body.
Correction:
[email protected]
248
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 770
If a coolant leak is detected in the area of the coolant expansion tank, it should be removed from the radiator as outlined in the appropriate repair
manual and both sealing O-rings, P/N 17 11 1 712 966 (small round O-ring) and 17 21 1 712 965 (large rectangular O-ring) should be replaced (see
illustration).
Warranty
Information:
Covered under the terms of the BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect Code:
17 11 00 48 00
Labor Operation:
17 11 100
Labor Allowance:
7 FRU
Note:
Warranty claims for radiators found to be leaking from the sealing O-rings described in this Service Information Bulletin will be rejected and the
parts returned the dealer.
Cooling System - Radiator/Knuckle Saver

Group 17 Radiator
Woodcliff Lake, NJ July 1990
Service Engineerlng
Tool Tip
SUBJECT: Radiator "Knuckle Saver"
Situation: Performing work on the front of the motor (example - water pump replacement) can be a knuckle "skinning" experience.
[email protected]
249
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 771
Radiator damage from tools is also a possibility.
Solution: A sheet of shiny aluminum can be bent (see diagram) so that it hangs down over the face of the radiator (with the fan shroud
removed).
This sheet will:
^ protect the radiator from damage;

^ protect your knuckles from damage;
^ the shiny surface will reflect light on the work surface.

Suggested by Wayne Hambrick of Chris Motors BMW, Decatur, Georgia.
A/C - Replacement of Receiver Dryers: R12/R134a

Group 64
Heating and
Air Conditioning
Bulletin Number
64 09 93
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1997
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI 64 09 93 dated October 1993, which should be removed and discarded from your SI binder.
SUBJECT:
Replacement of Receiver Dryers: R-12 / R-134a
MODEL:
All
Situation:
Long term tests have indicated that it is not necessary to replace a receiver dryer provided the receiver dryer is installed in a correctly functioning,
sealed system.
Correction:
Replacement hints for the receiver dryer are given in the repair manual 64 53.., "Notes on Replacing Dryer Flask".
The receiver dryer must be replaced as part of an air conditioning repair whenever:
- there is dirt in the refrigerant circuit (e.g. compressor has seized),
- the system is leaking and there is no more refrigerant in the system,
[email protected]
250
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 772
- the refrigerant circuit was opened for longer than 24 hours during a repair.
Technical Service Bulletin # NHTSA93V015000 Date: 930201
Recall 93V015000: Cooling System Pressure

The malfunction or failure of a coolant system component results in significantly increased coolant temperature and a resulting increase in system
pressure. Vehicles operated under this increased cooling system pressure condition can suffer damage or failure of parts of the cooling system such
as (1) leakage from a coolant hose, (2) leakage of the radiator or expansion tank, (3) disconnection of a hose from a pipe or a fitting, and (4)cracks
in the heater core end piece resulting in coolant leakage. In some cases,boiling coolant can contact the lower right leg of the driver resulting in
burns. Also, escaping coolant in the passenger compartment can cause vapor fogging of the interior surface of the windows, reducing driver
visibility.
Dealers will install a thermostatic bypass valve in the engine compartment to control coolant temperature in the heater core. Also, a new design
radiator cap will be installed, to control pressure and provide greater coolant overflow in the event of overheating.
SYSTEM: COOLANT SYSTEM.
VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: PASSENGER CARS.Technical Service Bulletin # 1103923500 Date: 920201
Intake and Vacuum System - Leak Detector

Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 03 92 (3500)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Intake and Vacuum System Leak Detector
ENGINES:
All
Situation:
Leaks in the intake system are often responsible for starting problems, poor idling, and poor throttle response. Until now such leaks were localized
by selective spraying with gasoline and other similar fluids. However, this method does not conform to safety regulations. The Liqui Moly (Lubro
Moly) "Motor Lecksucher" Intake and Vacuum System Leak Detector is a spray used for localizing such leaks, and allows the safety regulations to
be observed.
The active ingredient is drawn into the engine at the leak location while the engine is running. This leads to a decrease in engine speed on vehicles
without an adaptive idle control system (fuel metering systems prior to DME 1.1), and an increase in the exhaust gas CO value.
Application:
- Connect the BMW Service Tester or other exhaust gas analyzing system to the engine (in front of the catalyic converter) as outlined in the
repair manual.
- Disconnect the Oxygen Sensor.
- Start the engine and allow the CO and HC values to stabilize.
- Spray the intake system components selectively and systematically in the area of the suspected air leak and observe the CO reading and idle
speed.
- When the product is drawn into the engine, an increase in CO and a sudden drop in idle rpm will be noticed.
Note:
Vehicles equipped with an adaptive idle control system will not allow the idle speed to drop off during this test. On these vehicles only a CO
increase will be noticed.
- Reconnect the oxygen sensor after locating and repairing the air leak.
Caution:
This product is flammable and should not be exposed to open flames or glowing components. Always obey all cautions and warnings displayed on
the container when using this product.
[email protected]
251
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 773
Parts
Information:
Liqui Moly (Lubro Moly) Motor Lecksucher - Intake and Vacuum System Leak Detector is distributed locally through Western Automotive
Warehouse Distributors (W.A.W.D.) under Liqui Moly, part number 2021 (1 can 6.76 fl. oz.). Call 1-800-477-9293 for a local distributor in your
area. When calling, also identify yourself as a BMW dealership to receive special pricing.
Warranty
Status:
Information only.
Exhaust Manifold Studs - Service Precautions

Group 11 Engine
Woodcliff Lake, NJ March 1991 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Exhaust Manifold Studs
MODEL: E32/E34 (with M30 Engines)
Situation: The studs which are used to fasten the exhaust manifold to the exhaust pipe /catalyst may sheer off or the threads may be
damaged when the selflocking nuts are loosened during a repair.
This damage is caused by the self-locking nut seizing on the stud thread.
Remedy: In order to avoid damage to the exhaust manifold studs during repairs and before any attempt is made to loosen the self-locking
nuts, a few drops of engine oil should be applied to the exposed threaded section of the studs. This will prevent excessive
torque being used when the nuts are loosened.
This method should be used on all stud/bolt and nut connections which are subjected to extreme temperature changes.
Note:
When reinstalling new self-locking nuts, always torque to the proper specifications as outlined in the Tightening Torque
Values.
Only apply oil if you intend to loosen the nut; otherwise it will carbonize and form deposits in the stud threads making the nut
even harder to remove.
Warranty
Special Tools - New Coil Spring Compressor

[email protected]
252
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 774
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 04 08 90 (3079) dated June 1990 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT: Coil Spring Compressor Tool
Situation: The tool presently used for compressing coil springs in BMW automobile suspensions (P/N 88 88 6 313 110) is no longer to be
used for repairs in the workshop. Due to the increased vehicle weight the current tool (313 110) has reached its operating limit.
Solution: A new spring compressor has been developed that should be used on all
BMW models (except 850i (E31) rear coil springs).
The tool will be sent to all automotive BMW dealers under the automatic tool shipment program. Additional tools can be ordered
directly from your Parts Distribution Center.
Special
Note: At the time of publication (June 1990) of above bulletin (new version attached), an adaptor for the spring compressor (P/N 88 88
6 313 120) was not available. This adapter allows you to compress the front springs on the 850i (E31). Please refer to Service
Information bulletin 04 13 90 (3104) for the special tool that removes the rear coil springs of the 850i (E31).
E31 Front Coil Springs Remover Adapter P/N 88 88 6 313 124
Introductory Charge = No charge for this special issue
The above tool will be sent to all BMW automotive dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program free of charge.
Additional tools may be purchased from your Parts Distribution Center.
Suspension - Replacement of Shock Absorbers

Group 31
Front Axle
Bulletin Number
31 01 93
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1996
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes 5.1. bulletin number 31 01 93 (3723) dated March 1993. It expands the model lines affected. Please
remove 5.1. bulletin number 31 01 93 (3273) dated March 1993 form your binder and discard.
SUBJECT:
Replacement of Shock Absorbers
MODELS:
All except M3 and M5
Situation:
Research has shown that on the above models, if one front or rear shock absorber must be replaced due to damage, and the car has under 30,000
miles, the other shock absorber on that axle does not have to be replaced automatically. Also, the replacement shock absorber does not have to be
replaced by manufacturer.
This information supersedes any previous information requiring replacement of shock absorbers in pairs on the above referenced models.
Tires - Recommended Snow Tire/Wheel Combinations

Group 36 Wheels and Tires
Woodcliff Lake, NJ November 1990 Service Engineering
[email protected]
253
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 775
SUBJECT: Snow Tire Application
MODELS: All 1990-1991
The recommended snow tire/wheel combinations for the 1990-1991 models are as follows:
*Note: The speed designation given for each tire size is a recommended minimum. A higher speed rated tire can be substituted.
Speed Rating
Q - 100 mph (160 km/h) T - 118 mph (190 km/h) H - 130 mph (210 km/h)
Wheels - Balancing Tips and Procedures

GROUP 36
Wheels and Tires
Bulletin Number
36 02 88 (1627)
Montvale, NJ
June 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Balancing of Wheel and Tire Assemblies
MODELS:
All
Situation:
With state-of-the-art tire and wheel technology, the need to follow proper procedures when balancing wheels and tires as well as using the
appropriate equipment has become critical. If proper balancing procedures are not followed, a less then first class quality balancing job will be
[email protected]
254
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 776
done, which can lead to comebacks and cause a detrimental effect on customer satisfaction as well as reducing the workshop's productivity.
Attempts to take shortcuts to save time in dealing with a wheel/tire imbalance will often cause the job to take longer because everything has to be
done over.
Procedure:
1. Check tire pressure of all four wheels and correct if necessary.
2. Warm the tire by driving the car for a sufficient distance at speeds that will thoroughly warm the tread.
Note:
State-of-the-art tires are more prone to "flat spotting" than previous, technology tires.
As a precaution against "flat spotting", immediately raise the car up so that all four tires are off the ground. If the vehicle is allowed to rest on the
tires even for a short period, "flat spots" can develop in the tires, which will give false readings when attempting to balance.
3. Check general condition of wheels and tires. Look for physical damage to tread or sidewalls, general condition of tread, or unusual wear
patterns. Visually check for physical damage to wheels. Replace as necessary.
4. Check to see if the tire is completely seated on the rim by visually inspecting the ribs on the sidewall in relation to the rim. If the tire is not
fully seated, it should be dismounted, and the bead should be visually checked for damage. If not damaged, coat the bead liberally with a tire
mounting lubricant, and remount.
CAUTION:
NEVER USE SILICONE SPRAY TO LUBRICATE THE BEAD.
5. Mount the tire and wheel assembly on the wheel balancer using the proper centering bushing. DO NOT USE A CENTERING CONE! (See
S.I. 04 03 87 (1335) for further information). Spin the assembly and visually check for radial and lateral runout. If there is any suspicion of
excessive runout, the lateral and radial runout of the wheel and the wheel/tire assembly must be checked.
Use a runout gauge (P/N 88 88 6 361 000) to check the lateral and radial runout of the tire and wheel assembly. Radial runout should be checked at
both shoulders of the tread as well as the center of the tread. Lateral runout should be checked in an area where sidewall lettering will not affect the
readings.
If the runout of the assembly is beyond specifications (refer to current Technical Data fiche), mark the position of the valve and dismount the tire.
Check the radial and lateral runout of the wheel in the bead seating area. If the wheel is within specifications, lubricate the tire bead with a tire
mounting lubricant and remount the tire, turning it 900 from its original mounted position. Re-check the assembly for runout and, if necessary,
rotate the tire another 900 on the rim. If the runout of the assembly cannot be brought into specifications by rotating the tire, the tire must be
replaced.
6. Mount the tire/wheel assembly on the balancer using the proper centering bushing. If the balancer has a horizontal shaft, mount the wheel
with the valve stem at the bottom.
[email protected]
255
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 777
Balance the assembly according to the balancer manufacturer's instructions, using the chart for correcting any remaining imbalance after the initial
weights are installed.
7. After the assembly has been balanced, remove from the balancer and remount on the car. If the balancer used is of the horizontal shaft type
the wheel should be mounted on the car with the valve stem pointed down. This compensates for any play between the wheel and the hub by
ensuring that any slack is always in the same position and eliminating the possibility of movement of the slack to a different relative position.
If a wheel lock is used, it should be located opposite the valve stem. Torque the wheel studs as specified.
8. In order to compensate for any imbalance in the hubs or brake rotors, on the car finish balancing is required. Finish balancing is the only way
to ensure that all residual imbalance is removed from the tire and wheel assembly as it runs on the vehicle.
When setting up the finish balancer, the surface used must be hard, firm and level. All doors and deck lids must be completely closed and no one
should be in or leaning on the vehicle (exception being the E-30).
Once again, use the attached chart as a guide for weight changes or movement when removing any remaining imbalance with an off-the-car finish
balancer.
Special Hint:
If a customer should wish to have the BMW alloy wheels chromeplated, the plating shop should not polish the bead seating surface of the rim.
Polishing the bead seating surface will reduce the friction coefficient between rim and tire, thereby allowing micro-motion of the tire on the rim and
eventually creating an imbalance situation.
For more information, review the VIS program "Tire and Wheel Balancing" and S.I. 36 02 79 (395) "Diagnosis and Handling of Tire/Wheel and
Related Vibration Complaints".
Wheels/Tires - New Wheel Weight Tools

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
[email protected]
256
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 778
Bulletin Number
04 27 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New Wheel Weight Tools
MODEL:
All
Situation:
Spring Clip Lift

P/N 90 88 6 361 010
Price = $51.50
Used to easily lift the wheel weight retaining clip when removing or replacing the wheel weight.
The following tool will not be sent out through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. It may be ordered through your PDC.
Sidewall depressor
P/N 90 88 6 361 020
Price = $393.00
Used to depress the tire sidewalls so that the wheel weight retaining clip may be installed without damage to the wheel.
Tires - Flat Tire Inflators That Contain Hazardous Gases

[email protected]
257
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 779
Group 36 Tires and Wheels
Woodcliff Lake, NJ April 1991 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Flat Tire Inflators
MODELS: All
Situation: Some brands of emergency flat tire inflators contain propane and/or isobutane as a propenant and inflating agent. The presence of
these gases can present a hazard to a technician dismounting a tire.
Whenever a tire on a customer's vehicle is being dismounted, and it cannot be determined whether a flat tire inflator has been
used, the tire should be considered to contain these hazardous gases.
Deflate the tire in a well ventilated area, away from any open flames, sparks, or other ignition sources. Inflate and deflate the tire
several times to purge as much residual gas from the tire as possible.
Once the tire has been purged, it may be dismounted in the normal manner, but reasonable care should be taken to prevent any
unnecessary sparks or ignition sources in the work area.
Winter Tires - Recommendations Brochure

Group 02
Aftersales Development
Bulletin Number
02 02 95 (4164)
February 1995
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 02 02 95 (4164) dated February 1995, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT:
BMW Winter Tire Recommendations Brochure
MODELS:
All
General information:
[email protected]
258
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 780
A winter tire brochure that provides specifications, sizes and applications of winter tires for all 1995 model year cars is being inserted into the
vehicle portfolios (see illustration for location).
A sufficient quantity of brochures is being distributed to the vehicle distribution centers so that they can be manually inserted into the new vehicle
portfolios that are already prepared.
Additional brochures can be ordered in limited qualities by calling ADH at 908-225-2800 and asking for part number NU-S-3-026.
Winter Tire - Recommendations Brochure

Group O2
Bulletin Number
02 03 95(4170)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1995
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
BMW Winter Tire Recommendations Brochure (Aftersales)
MODELS:
All
Situation:
Many of our customers question the need for snow tires and others request your assistance in recommending what brand of snow tire to purchase.
To assist you in addressing this issue and also to enhance your seasonal displays and service programs we have created the BMW Winter Tire
Recommendations brochure. This brochure can be displayed in your service and parts departments to assist you in merchandising winter tires. It is
important to note that after a customer reads this brochure they will want to ask you questions regarding recommended brands and size applications.
For information you can refer to S.I. 36 02 93 (3788) dated October 1993 (Tire Applications). For 1995 model BMWs, you can refer to the BMW
1995 Winter Tire Applications and Recommendations brochure, found in the new vehicle portfolio, available from ADH, part number NU-S-026.
For additional brochures, please contact ADH at 908-225-2800 and ask for part number NU-S-030.
[email protected]
259
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 781
Tires - Nitrogen Usage Recommendations

SI B 36 04 06
Wheels and Tires
April 2006
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Nitrogen Inflated Tires
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Many customers have inquired about the use of Nitrogen, instead of air, to inflate tires on their BMW vehicles. Please review the information
below to help answer some of the customer's inquiries.
INFORMATION
^ Nitrogen, an inert gas, is nothing more than dry air with the Oxygen removed. The majority of "air" already consists of Nitrogen (78% by
volume). The other elements of air by volume are 21% Oxygen and 1% other gases.
^ All BMW approved tires have been designed and tested to deliver their expected performance when inflated with "air" and the correct tire
inflation pressure is maintained on a regular basis.
^ The use of Nitrogen to inflate tires is not recommended for normal use of BMW vehicles; however, the use of Nitrogen is also not prohibited.
^ There are certain applications where Nitrogen inflation is advisable, i.e. in abnormal environment where wheel and tire overheating may occur
such as in aircrafts, space shuttles, military vehicles, off-road trucks, and race cars. In these applications, the non-flammable Nitrogen can
reduce the risk of fire, because Nitrogen does not support combustion and does not add fuel to the fire.
^ The physical properties of Nitrogen may reduce the inflation pressure loss only from the tire material natural permeability (diffusion through
rubber). However, similar to air, Nitrogen can still escape from other sources of inflation pressure loss such as from wheel, wheel/tire interface,
valve, and valve/wheel interface.
^ The most important thing for the customers is to maintain the correct tire inflation pressure on a regular basis as recommended in the Owner's
Manual. Under inflated tires can reduce road holding, increase hydroplaning risk, increase road hazards sensitivity, reduce tire life, increase fuel
consumption, etc.
^ If equipped on the vehicle, always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor (FTM) or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) after the tire inflation
pressure has been corrected.
Disclaimer
Wheels - Fastening Bolts

Group 36
Wheels and Tires
Bulletin Number
36 02 92 (3512)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Wheel Fastening Bolts
[email protected]
260
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 782
MODELS:
All
Situation:
In approximately late February 1991 a running production change was made to the wheel bolt, part number 36 13 1 126 191.
The newer style bolts have a hollowed-out head, and can be differentiated from the early style by their "yellow chrome" plating. (Early bolts have
"silver chrome" plating.) Because of this design change the new bolts are approximately 9 grams (.3 oz) lighter than the early bolts.
Early and late style bolts should not be mixed on one wheel as the weight difference could cause an imbalance when the wheel is mounted on the
car. This could amount to as much as 2.9 grams (.1 oz) imbalance on a mounted 14" tire and wheel assembly, or 2.7 grams (.09 oz) on a 15"
assembly.
Warranty
Tools - Seat Pivot Pin Installer/Remover

GROUP 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 32 87 (1553)
Montvale, NJ
May 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Seat Pivot Pin Installer/Remover
MODELS:
7 Series (E32), 3 Series (E30) with Standard Seats; 5 and 6 Series with Sport Seats
A special tool is needed to remove and install the seat pivot pin in the above mentioned models. For complete Service-information please see S.I. 52
04 87 (1551).
This tool will be sent to all automotive BMW dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be ordered directly from
Seats - Revised Upholstery Fastening Clips Available

GROUP 52
Seats
Bulletin Number
52 03 88 (1587)
Montvale, NJ
June 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Upholstery Fastening Clips
MODELS:
[email protected]
261
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 783
All
Situation:
When repairing seats, the fastening clips (hog rings) for attaching the upholstery may have to be replaced. These clips are available under part
number 52 10 1 945 543.
A tool for crimping these clips the proper way is also available, under part number 88 88 6 520 050.
SRS - Collision Repair Guidelines

Group 72
Equipment and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
72 02 93 (3794)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1994
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin replaces S.I. 72 01 88 (1645) dated May 1988, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT:
Collision Repair Guidelines: Restraint Systems
MODELS:
All
Situation:
In the event of a collision involving SRS deployment, specific components of the system MUST be replaced. In addition, other checks and/or
replacements may be necessary for any collision.
Correction:
The following components MUST be replaced after a collision involving more than "parking" damage:
^ Safety Belts (if worn during impact)
The following components MUST be replaced if the SRS has been deployed:
^ Air bag(s)/Gas generator(s) (both front-passenger and driver if so equipped)
^ Contact ring
^ Front impact sensors
^ Control/Diagnostic Module
^ ZAE Control Module after third impact or fault code "100"

[Refer to TRI 72 01 93 (2137)]
^ Pyrotechnic safety belt tensioner (if so equipped, i.e. 10/91 and later E30 convertible)
The following components MUST be checked and replaced only if there is any visible damage:
^ Knee Bolster, Glovebox
^ SRS/airbag wiring harnesses (do NOT attempt to repair ANY harness damage)
^ SRS indicator lamp
^ Steering Wheel
^ Steering Column
^ Dashboard
^ E31 Integrated Seats (seats must be checked according to Repair Manual, Group 52)
[email protected]
262
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 784
The following components MUST be checked and replaced only if deployed or visibly damaged.
^ Mechanical safety belt tensioners (do NOT attempt to reset deployed unit)
NOTE:
Always include replacement of the safety belts, safety belt tensioners, seat components, airbag(s), and other related components (see above)
when estimating the cost of body repair damages.Technical Service Bulletin # 041696 Date: 960301
Special Tool - Clutch Disc Wear Gauge

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 16 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New Clutch Disc Wear Gauge
MODELS:
All
Situation:
Clutch Gauge
P/N 90 88 6 212 080
Price = $48.00
Used to check the clutch disc wear. Refer to repair manual section 21 00 010 for usage details. This tool replaces previously distributed tool 88 88 6
212 070. Remove 212 070 from the tool board and replace it with 212 080.
[email protected]
263
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 785
Clutch - Release Bearing With Plastic Sliding Sleeve
Group 21: Clutch
Bulletin Number: 21 01 94 (3953)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1994
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Clutch Release Bearing with Plastic Sliding Sleeve
MODELS:
All with Manual Transmission (except E31)
Situation:
Clutch release bearings with plastic sliding sleeves instead of aluminum were phased into production during 1992 on the above models.
Since November 1993, only clutch release bearings with a plastic sliding sleeve have been available through the parts department for the above
models.
Action:
Clutch release bearings with a plastic sliding sleeve should NOT be greased.
If lubricant contacts the plastic sliding sleeve, wear particles and contamination will build up resulting in a considerable increase in clutch pedal
effort.
Additionally, any residual grease on the guide sleeve must be removed when installing a clutch release bearing with a plastic sliding sleeve in place
of a clutch release bearing with an aluminum sliding sleeve.
No lubricant is to be present when the release bearing has a plastic sliding sleeve.
Rear Axle - List of Ratios Updated

Group 33
Rear Axle
Bulletin Number
33 01 90 (3168)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1994
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 33 01 90 (3168) dated April 1993, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT:
Rear Axle Ratios
MODELS:
All (Model Years 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995)
[email protected]
264
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 786
The accompanying table of rear axle ratios has been brought up-to-date to include the 1994 models and select 1995 models.
Warranty Status:
For information only.Technical Service Bulletin # 3301903168 Date: 920301
Rear Axle - Ratios

Group 33
Rear Axle
Bulletin Number
33 01 90 (3168)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1992
Service Engineering
[email protected]
265
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 787
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 33 01 90 (3168) dated June 1991 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT:
Rear Axle Ratios
MODELS:
All (model years 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992)
General
Information:
The accompanying tables of rear axle ratios have been brought up-todate to include the E36 coupes (318is, 325is) and 525iA touring.
Warranty
Status:
For information only.
[email protected]
266
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 788
Rear Axle Ratios - U.S. Models From Model Year 1988
A/T - Primary Oil Pump Housing Production Change

Group 24 Automatic Transmission
Woodcliff Lake, NJ August 1990 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: New Style Primary Oil Pump Housing
MODELS: All Equipped with 4HP22 or 4HP24 Transmissions
[email protected]
267
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 789
Situation: A new style primary oil pump housing has been phased into production since approximately May 1989 transmission production
date:
4HP22 - from transmission # 1 113 936 onwards; and 4HP24 - from transmission # 0 029 160 onwards.
On the new style pump housing (Fig. A) the oil return channel is now located between the 8 and 9 o'clock position when looking
into the bell housing (see arrow) as compared to the early style (Fig. B) where the oil channel is positioned at the 6 o'clock
position.
The front radial oil seal installation depth has also been changed on the new style pump (1 mm deeper than on the early pumps).
A new special seal driver tool has been developed, P/N 88 88 6 240 110, (see also S.I. # 04 09 90 (3090)) which will allow
proper installation of both types of radial oil seals. The 1 mm shim (included with the new special tool) should always be used in
conjunction with the seal installer tool when installing a radial oil seal in a new style oil pump (Fig. A).
With the 1 mm shim removed from the seal installer tool it may be used on the early style oil pump (Fig. B). These guidelines
must be followed whenever replacement of the oil pump radial oil seal is required to assure a quality repair.
A/T - Cooler Flushing and Equipment

Group 24
Bulletin Number
24 05 92 (3520)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Transmission Cooler Flushing
MODELS:
Automatic transmission vehicles
Situation:
To avoid the possibility of a repeat transmission failure when performing a repair, the oil cooler and lines should be thoroughly flushed to remove
any remaining contamination. If the cooler and lines are not flushed, the contaminated fluid will be cycled back into the transmission where it enters
the lubrication circuit unfiltered.
[email protected]
268
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 790
Solution:
The repair manual recommends flushing with ATF, but does not go into detail concerning how this is to be accomplished. Product Engineering has
tested and recommends the HECAT MODEL HCF-1 Transmission Oil Cooler Flusher. This tool provides a fast, easy to use method of flushing the
cooler and lines.
Ordering
Information:
The Hecat HCF-1 may be purchased through the BMW Service Equipment Program. Orders may be faxed to Bob Lyons @ (201) 930-8401.
Additional Information regarding this tool is available from:
Harvey Chambers; Hecat, Inc. (404) 623-8286
Warranty
Information:
Work time for flushing the cooler and lines is included in the labor operation for exchanging a transmission. No additional work time may be
claimed for this operation, however, use of the Hecat Flusher will reduce the time needed to perform this operation.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF HECAT TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER FLUSHER
1. Remove fill cap from flusher and fill with approximately 5 quarts of solvent. Do not overfill, allow a head space on top of solvent level for
self-pressurization of flusher. Reinstall fill cap and tighten hand tight. DO NOT USE WRENCH TO TIGHTEN FILL CAP.
CAUTION:
Approved solvents are only those petroleum-based solvents generally used to clean automatic transmission parts (i.e. mineral spirits). DO NOT
USE SOLVENTS CONTAINING ACIDS, WATER, GASOLINE, OR ANY CORROSIVE LIQUIDS.
Safety-Kleen is one company offering such a solvent. They also provide for pick-up of used solvent for processing in an environmentally accepted
practice. For more information in your area, contact your local Safety-Kleen representative or:
Marshal Wood, 1-800-669-5740 ext. 2592.
2. Shut off both air and solvent valves on flusher. Install quick coupling connector on flusher to match your present shop air supply. Couple
shop air supply hose to flusher with quick coupler.
[email protected]
269
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 791
3. Clean fitting on vehicle oil cooler lines and connect the appropriate line adapters furnished with the flusher. These adapters are designed to
attach at the transmission end of the oil cooler lines.
No additional O-rings or seals should be required; however, new O-ring seals should be used on the lines when reinstalling the transmission as the
old O-rings may have been damaged by the flusher line adapters.
When installing the hollow bolt type adapters to the banjo eyes on the cooler lines, sealing washers are to be used on both sides of the banjo eye.
Tightening of the adapter with wrenches will be required to effect a tight seal between the adapter and the banjo eye. Failure to use the sealing
washers could result in possible damage to the sealing surface on the banjo eye.
For optimum cleaning of the cooler and lines, it is required that the initial flushing procedure be carried out against the normal flow of transmission
fluid through the cooler. The chart lists the ncessary connections for initial back-flushing of the cooler and lines.
Suspend or place muffler assembly on return hose in a suitable container (i.e. 5 gallon pail). DO NOT SUBMERGE MUFFLER IN LIQUID. This
will result in solvent blowing out of the container.
4. Open air valve slightly and observe for movement of air and oil through return hose and muffler.
CAUTION:
If no flow is observed or if pressure relief valve on flusher begins to vent air pressure, shut off air valve immediately and slowly loosen
fittings to allow system to depressurize. Correct blockage in transmission cooler or lines before proceeding.
If oil flow is observed from return line, open solvent valve on flusher completely to allow full flow of solvent. Allow solvent to flow until return
hose appears clean.
5. Shut off air and solvent valves on flusher, reverse connections of flusher at cooler lines and repeat flushing procedure. When system is
thoroughly cleaned, shut off solvent valve. Air valve should be left on until solvent is purged from oil cooler and lines.
6. Shut off air valve and disconnect air supply hose from quick coupler on flusher. No further purging of system is required as solvent has been
adequately removed from the system.
A/T - Shift Solenoid Locations

Group 24
Bulletin Number
24 03 91 (3235)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Repair Manual - Supplementary Information
MODELS: All with Version E9 Electronic/Hydraulic Control System
[email protected]
270
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 792
Situation: Group 24 of the Repair Manual Microfiche only shows solenoid location for the Version E7 EH Control System.
Correction: Refer to the attached chart for solenoid locations on the Version E9 EH Control System.
Tools - Torque Converter Front Radial Oil Seal Installer

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 09 90 (3090)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1991
Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 04 09 90 (3090) dated July 1990. It lists the availability of the spacer ring as a separate item.
Please remove and discard S.I. 04 09 90 (3090) dated July 1990 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
1) Front Radial Oil Seal Installer for Torque Converter
[email protected]
271
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 793
2) Adapter for Puller 88 88 6 230 080
The subject special tools have been developed to ensure professional quality repair work.
1) A special tool is available that allows for correct installation of the above mentioned seal on 4HP22 and 4HP24 transmissions. A 1 mm thick
spacer ring (P/N 88 88 6 240 111) has been included with this tool.
From 4HP22 gearbox # 1 113 936 and

4HP24 gearbox # 0 029 160 onwards,
the spacer ring must be used on the tool. This insures proper fit of the seal.
This tool will be sent to all automotive BMW Dealers under the Automotive Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools can be ordered directly from
Note:
Spacer ring (P/N 88 88 6 240 111) is now available separately and may be ordered from your Parts Distribution Center if lost or damaged.
A/T - Correct Shift Cable Adjustment

Group 24 Automatic Transmission
Woodcliff Lake, NJ September 1990 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Correct Adjustment of Automatic Transmission Shift Cable and Automatic Transmission Accelerator Cable.
MODELS: All
Situation: Poor shift quality (i.e., harsh gear changes or incorrect shift points) and/or selector lever quadrant not synchronized with
transmission detents after repairs to the transmission or changes in engine settings.
Cause: Improper handling of cables during repairs (bending, overstretching, misadjustment).
Solution: To ensure correct operation of the transmission, replace any damaged cables and adjust according to procedures in repair manual
for specific model.
Note: - Correct full throttle adjustment of engine accelerator cable is necessary before adjusting transmission accelerator
cable.
- When loosening or tightening the clamping nut for the shift cable adjustment, the cable housing must not be
allowed to rotate. Rotation of the housing will allow the shift cable rod to turn, possibly causing damage at the
transition point between the shift cable rod and the wire cable.
- If the shift cable is wedged-in or stretched during the removal or installation of the transmission (i.e., because
the shift cable was not disconnected at the transmission), the shift cable must be replaced.
Warranty
Information: The labor allowance for cable adjustment is already included in the labor units for transmission removal and installation.
Tools - Fuel Injection Leakage Tester

SUBJECT: Fuel Injection Leakage Tester
[email protected]
272
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 794
MODEL: All
Situation: A special tool has been developed that will permit BMW dealers to test for leaking injectors (see Long Cranking Times
bulletin S.I. 13 08 90 (3096).
Fuel Injection Leakage Tester P/N 88 88 5 000 362 Introductory Price = $245.66
This tool will be sent to all BMW automotive dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional kits may be purchased through your
Parts Distribution Center.
List of spare parts for the Fuel Injection Tester:
Bowl 88 88 5 000 715

Rack 88 88 6 136 205
Harness 88 88 6 136 206
ECM - Codes and Hardware Numbers

GROUP 13
Fuel System
Bulletin Number
13 02 90 (3009)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
Aug. 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 13 02 90 (3009) dated March 1991, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT:
Engine Control Module Codes
Versions:
M1.1, M1.2, M1.3, M1.7, M3.1, M3.3, M3.3.1
Situation:
Successful diagnosis requires that BMW technicians be able to recognize and verify all engine control module codes.
Solution:
[email protected]
273
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 795
[email protected]
274
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 796
[email protected]
275
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 797
[email protected]
276
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 798
The Illustrations shown provide a quick cross-reference of all known compatible U.S. engine control module codes and hardware numbers. The
information provided is also available in a separate reference booklet format.
Note:
Additional engine control module reference booklets are available.
With the introduction of this new format, the previous slide chart insert (SD 90-012) and sleeve (SD 90-010) are invalid and no longer available.
Action:
The engine control module codes should be checked whenever any troubleshooting (drivetrain related) is conducted or when using the BMW
MoDiC to enter an engine control module variant code.
A mismatch of engine control module codes can produce driveability complaints. Such complaints will generally elude regular troubleshooting
techniques. Therefore, when troubleshooting the first step is to verify all engine control module codes using the latest information available.
Identification Information:
[email protected]
277
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 799
Illustration "A" shows the locations of the codes on the engine control module as well as how the codes appear on the engine control module
identification page when using the BMW Service Tester.
As shown, the engine control module codes are printed at various places on the outside of each control module. This information is helpful when
handling the actual control module, but final verification must always be made electronically using the BMW MoDiC or Service Tester.
Code Explanation:
Bosch Hardware Number (10 digits)
Assigned by the vendor, this code is related to the engine control module series and engine size. Typically, only the last three digits indicate
changes.
BMW Hardware Number (7 digits)
The application or use of the control unit is specified by the BMW Hardware Number. Application can include self-diagnosis, maximum RPM
limit, and related system compatibility (ABS, EML, etc.).
[email protected]
278
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 800
Engine Control Module Variant Code (4 digits)
The variant code "personalizes" the Bosch and BMW Hardware characteristics by signaling anticipated fuel grade, on-board emissions equipment,
and transmission control type.
Only the engine control module variant code can be changed using the BMW MoDiC (except on M3.1, M3.3, M3.3.1). Control modules having
hardware numbers which are incorrect for the subject vehicle must be replaced. In such instances, the vehicle repair history should be reviewed for
previous repairs involving engine control module replacement.
A control module which has been installed in the wrong vehicle and is not defective is not a warranty matter. Any claim of this type will be
declined.
All available resources should be consulted when an incorrect control module application is suspected. In addition to the information contained in
this bulletin, an international listing of control module hardware numbers and variant codes can be found in Group 13 of the Technical Data
microfiche. If these resources lead you to believe that the control module is Incorrect for the application, it Is recommended that this be confirmed
with the BMW Technical Hotline.
Variant Code:
The variant code can be entered or changed up to seven times using the BMW MoDiC. See ID 03/92-14 for complete MoDiC operating
information.
NOTE:
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE VERSIONS M3.1, M3.3, AND M3.3.1 CANNOT BE CODED USING A VARIANT CODE.
Variant code entry or changes are only approved for the following situations:
A) Replacement engine control modules supplied in a "basic state" bearing the variant code FF01 After installation, the correct variant code
should be entered using the BMW MoDiC.
B) Variant code changing provides greater utilization of existing parts stock. Engine control modules having compatible BMW and Bosch
Hardware Numbers can undergo a variant code change using the BMW MoDiC.
Example:
One engine control module bearing the following hardware numbers can be used in six different U.S. models.
BMW Hardware Number: 1 722 611

Bosch Hardware Number: 0 261 200 179
[email protected]
279
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 801
Entering or changing of variant codes is only approved with strict adherence to the following designation limitations:
- engine family
- BMW Hardware Number
- engine size
- Bosch Hardware Number
These classifications are fixed and limited to each specific engine size. Illustration "B" shows all known approved U.S. variant code/hardware
number combinations. An international listing of control module hardware numbers and variant codes can be found in Group 13 of the Technical
Data microfiche.
WARNING:
BMW personnel are reminded that it impossible to change the engine family of size through variant code changing. The variant code is only
used to precisely match the control module hardware with other variables such as vehicle type, market, equipment, and so forth. Intentional
miscoding will not serve any useful purpose and may result in poor engine performance or engine damage. Repairs for poor engine performance
or engine damage as a result of miscoding are not covered under warranty.
Parts Information:
Refer to the appropriate film area to find the engine control module that fits your vehicle. Precoded engine control modules can be identified on the
microfilm by the description field, which contains the variant code for the vehicle for which you are replacing the control module.
Non-coded engine control modules contain the description, "Basic Control Unit" or "Control Unit DME Without Code" and must have the variant
code entered using the BMW MoDiC after installation.
NOTES
1) 3 Series M1.3 Model Year 87 may use replacement control modules and variant codes from 3 Series M1.3 Model Year 88 and later
2) 6 Series M1.3 may use replacement control modules and variant codes from 7 Series M1.3
3) For vehicles without oxygen sensor heater relay
4) For vehicles with oxygen sensor heater relay or pull-up resitor installed in harness
5) Control modules on each bank may have different hardware numbers

Special Tools - Simulator Tool For Bosch Oxygen Sensors

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 04 94 (3981)
[email protected]
280
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 802
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1994
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Simulator Tool for Bosch Oxygen Sensors
MODELS:
All
Situation:
A new tool has been developed to systematically check the various operating functions of the Bosch oxygen sensor system. See operating
instructions for details. The new simulator has been designed to easily test the oxygen sensor's
^ heating circuit (Test 1);

^ voltage output (Test 2);
^ DME control module - control circuits (Test 3); and
^ complete oxygen sensor connecting harness.
The simulator should be used if no obvious faults are determined in the oxygen sensor system (i.e., broken/chafed wires, poor connections, rattling,
etc.), to determine the exact location of the defect and thus eliminating the need for "guesswork" when an oxygen sensor replacement becomes
necessary.
Note:
Testing of returned oxygen sensors (under warranty) has shown a large percentage of non-defective sensors.
The new simulator is used in conjunction with a multimeter and a workshop emissions tester as outlined in the operating instructions.
[email protected]
281
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 803
Oxygen Sensor Tester

P/N 90 88 6 117 450
Please substitute the enclosed instruction book for the one that comes with your tester.
This tool will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased through your PDO.
Simulator for Bosch Oxygen Sensor (Lambda Probe)

Operating Instructions
[email protected]
282
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 804
NOTES ON SAFETY
ATTENTION!
Hot exhaust pipes pose a risk of injury!

Use the simulator only for Bosch Oxygen Sensors.
Verify by means of the latest diagnostic program for DME.
Individual Parts of the Simulator

INDIVIDUAL PARTS OF THE SIMULATOR
Simulator for Bosch Oxygen Sensor 90 88 6 117 451 with plug-in jumper 90 88 6 117 458.
Connection lead with 4-pin plug connector, code A (black) 90 88 6 117 452. This lead also contains the 12 volt power lead.
Adapter for connection lead with 4-pin plug connector, code B (brown) plug connection oxygen sensor 90 88 6 117 453 plug connection wiring
loom 90 88 6 117 454.
[email protected]
283
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 805
Adapter for connection lead with 1 and 3/4-pin plug connector (Bosch and Cannon) plug connection oxygen sensor 90 88 6 117 455 plug
connection wiring loom 90 88 6 117 456.
Operator Control/ Panel of Simulator

OPERATOR CONTROL - PANEL OF SIMULATOR
Signal:
Yellow connection socket for measuring the oxygen sensor voltage of all Bosch oxygen sensors.
Ground:
Blue connection socket for measuring the oxygen sensor voltage of the 4-pin oxygen sensor only.
Heating:
Red connection sockets for measuring the heating current of heated oxygen sensors. The jumper is only removed when Test # 1 is being performed.
It remains installed throughout all other tests.
Level:
[email protected]
284
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 806
Yellow LED flashes when simulation in progress.
The yellow LED flashes whenever the "RICH" or "LEAN" button is pushed. This verifies oxygen sensor and oxygen sensor circuit simulation.
12V:
Green LED lights when battery voltage (>1O.5V) is applied (using 117 452).
Oxygen sensor at catalytic converter oxygen sensor at exhaust pipe:
Selector switch to select the location of the oxygen sensor.
Rich/Lean:
[email protected]
285
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 807
This button when depressed will interrupt the oxygen sensor circuit and simulate a rich or lean condition. See Test 2 & 3 for further details.
Connecting the Simulator

CONNECTING THE SIMULATOR - OXYGEN SENSOR INSTALLED.
Switch off ignition.
Disconnect oxygen sensor from wiring harness. Connect connection lead 90 88 6 117 452 to oxygen sensor and wiring harness. (If necessary use
adapter 90 88 6 117 453/454 or 90 88 6 117 455/456.)
Connect power lead 90 88 6 117 452 to cigarette lighter socket. The green LED on the simulator must light.
[email protected]
286
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 808
Determine the location of the oxygen sensor. Set the selector switch for the proper location of the oxygen sensor to one of the following positions:
1. Oxygen sensor) at catalytic converter or....

2. Oxygen sensor) at exhaust pipe.
Set up commercially available multimeter. Refer to the individual tests for connection and setting data.
Connect exhaust emission tester in accordance with repair instructions.
ATTENTION!
When connecting the exhaust emission tester ensure that any changes in the CO values can be clearly detected:
Test 1: Oxygen Sensor Testing

TEST 1: OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
This test only applies to heated oxygen sensors with 3-pin or 4-pin plug connector.
Note:
If an exhaust emission inspection was carried out beforehand, the engine must be allowed to cool to ambient temperature in order to carry out
Test 1. If necessary start with Test 2.
There are two basic types of heated sensor circuits. The first type such as DME 1.7, turns the heater on as soon as the engine is started (as long as
the engine was cold). The cold current should be approximately 4.0 amps. If operating properly the current will drop off to approximately 1.4 amps
by the time the engine has reached normal operating temperature. If the sensor does not operate in this fashion it is defective.
The second type of sensor heating circuit such as DME 3.3 & 3.3.1 uses a delay. The time at which the heater circuit is turned on is determined by
three factors.
1. Load
2. Temperature
3. Time
Varying any one of these will change the time at which the circuit is activated. Until the circuit is activated there will be no current. After activation
the heating circuit should act the same as the DME 1.7 heater circuit.
This heated sensor circuit may be easily recognized by its utilization of an oxygen sensor heated relay. Consult your ETM for the location.
Disconnect plug-in jumper from simulator.
[email protected]
287
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 809
Note:
The plug-in jumper must be reconnected on completion of the test.
Select multimeter measuring range "A/DC" (Amp/direct current) so that at least 5 A can be measured.
Connect multi meter to the red "heating" sockets on the simulator.

Start engine.
Read out heater current on the multimeter until operating temperature

is reached.
The heating current drops during the engine heating-up phase.
Engine cold:
4.0 A +/- 0.30 A

Engine at operating temperature:
1.4 A +/- 0.15 A
Diagnosis:
Heating resistor of oxygen sensor OK.
Test 2: Oxygen Sensor Voltage

TEST 2: OXYGEN SENSOR VOLTAGE
Select multimeter measuring range "V/DC" (Volt/DC voltage) so that at least 1000mv can be measured.
For this test to be performed the engine must be:
1. At normal operating temperature.

2. At approximately 1500 RPM's.
3. Simulator, cable, and adapter attached to the car as specified below.
4. The oxygen sensor must pass test 2 before you go on to Test 3. If the oxygen sensor fails test 2 it must be replaced.
With the engine running and warmed up full Lambda swing should be observed on the multimeter. At this point the simulator passes the oxygen
sensor voltage straight through to the DME control module. This signal is unchanged.
Connect a 4-pin oxygen sensor:
[email protected]
288
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 810
Connect negative lead of multimeter to blue "ground" socket on simulator. Connect positive lead of multimeter to yellow "signal" socket on
simulator.
Connection for 1-pin or 3-pin oxygen sensor:
Connect negative lead from multimeter to vehicle ground.

Connect positive lead from multi meter to yellow "signal" socket on simulator.
Ensure the engine is running and has reached operating temperature. Read off changes in the oxygen sensor voltage at the multimeter.
At 1500 RPMs, oxygen sensor changes between: approx 800 mv (rich) and approx. 100mv (lean).
Diagnosis:
This indicates oxygen sensor voltage is OK and is functioning correctly.
At 1500 RPMs, oxygen sensor voltage changes between: approx 500mv (rich) and approx. 450mv (lean).
Diagnosis:
This indicates a defective oxygen sensor.
At 1500 RPMs, oxygen sensor voltage is at constant 475mv.
Diagnosis:
This indicates either the oxygen sensor is defective, or a break in a wire. The engine is running on the emergency values stored in the DME control
module.
Test 3: Simulation of Probe Voltage
TEST 3: SIMULATION OF PROBE VOLTAGE
"RICH"/"LEAN"
[email protected]
289
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 811
For this test to be performed please observe the same conditions as in Test 2 with the addition of an emission tester. For best results the emission
tester should be attached to the exhaust manifold gas test port. If this port is not available the tailpipe adapter may be used. Always allow the
emission tester to stabilize before starting a test.
The purpose of this test is to determine if the fault (if any) lies in the oxygen sensor, wiring, or control module (DME). When either the "RICH or
LEAN" button is depressed the oxygen sensor signal can still be read out by the multimeter, but is no longer passed on to the control module. A
false signal is generated by the simulator and sent on in its place. This allows you to monitor the oxygen sensors as well as the control modules
reaction to the false signal.
Rich Test:
When the "RICH" button is depressed the oxygen sensor circuit is interrupted and a lean signal (approximately 100mv) is sent to the DME. The
DME reacts (if operating properly) by increasing the mixture. This can be observed at the emission tester as higher CO values. The yellow LED
marked "Pegel Level" on the simulator will blink while the button is depressed indicating the circuit is interrupted.
If the CO level rises, the control module, its wiring and the oxygen sensor plug (control module side) are working properly.
If the CO level does not rise, the problem is between and including the control module, its wiring, and/or the plug (control module side).
During the rich test, the oxygen sensor voltage should rise to approximately 800mv. This is dependent on the control module and its circuit working
properly.
If the oxygen sensor voltage does not rise to approximately 800mv and the control module has passed the rich test, then the oxygen sensor, its
wiring or plug are faulty.
Lean Test:
For this test to be performed, please observe the same conditions as in the rich test with the following addition. On engines without an exhaust
manifold gas test port it may be impossible to read changes (in CO) to the lean side due to the low levels of CO exhaust gas emissions behind the
catalytic converter. It may, however, be possible to read a drop in HO. Always allow the emission tester to stabilize before starting a test.
[email protected]
290
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 812
The purpose of the "LEAN" test is the same as the "RICH" test with the difference being the observation of the oxygen sensor circuit's ability to
This indicates either the oxygen sensor is defective, or a break in a wire. The engine is running on the emergency values stored in the DME control
module.
react properly with an opposing signal.
When the "LEAN" button is depressed, the oxygen sensor circuit is interrupted and a rich signal (approximately 800mv) is sent to the DME control
unit. The DME reacts (if operating properly) by decreasing the mixture. This can be observed on the emission tester as a drop in CO level. Please
see the exception to this above. The yellow LED marked "pegel level" on the simulator will blink while the button is depressed indicating the
circuit is interrupted.
If the CO level drops (as per the emission tester) the DME control module, its wiring the plug (control module side) are working properly.
If the CO level does not drop, the problem is between and including the control module, its wiring, and/or the plug.
During the lean test, the oxygen sensor voltage should be approximately 100mv. This, of course, is dependent on the control module and its circuit
working properly.
If the oxygen sensor voltage does not go down to approximately 100mv and the control module has passed the lean test, the oxygen sensor, its
wiring, or the plug (oxygen sensor side) are faulty.
Release push button on simulator.
Exhaust emission assumes "normal" values.
(The control circuit and oxygen sensor are active.)
Diagnosis:
The oxygen sensor and DME control module circuits for the oxygen sensor system are OK.
Shut down engine.
Reassemble vehicle. Read out defect code memory of the DME control unit.
Check stored defect codes and rectify defects as required. Clear defect code memory.
Tools - Seal Pliers For Speedometer Sender

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 08 89 (1843)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1989
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Seal Pliers for Speedometer Sender
[email protected]
291
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 813
Situation:
With the advent of Model Year 1989, the speedometer sender is equipped with a lead seal designed to prevent mileage tampering. In order to
replace the seal after a repair, BMW has developed a two-sided die stamp with the BMW logo.
Included with this Automatic Tool Shipment order is an initial supply of lead seals and sealing wires.
Description Part Number Introductory Price
Lead Seal 62 12 1 354 984 $0.20 each
Sealing Wire 62 12 1 354 983 $0.20 each
These parts will be sent to all dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools, seals and wires can be ordered directly
through your Parts Distribution Center.
Brakes - ABS Sensor Lead Faults/Repairs/Parts

Group 34
Brakes
Bulletin Number
34 01 89 (1850)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1989
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
ABS Sensor Lead Faults/Repair Procedure
MODELS:
E30, E32, E34
Situation:
Previously, if a problem was encountered in an ABS Sensor Lead on one of these models, the repair required replacement of the vehicle main
harness. Separate leads are now available that allow individual replacement of each of the 4 separate sensor leads.
In most cases a fault in a sensor lead will show up as an intermittent fault (ABS warning lamp comes on while driving).
If the ABS warning lamp is continuously illuminated after starting the vehicle, the BMW Service Tester should be used to diagnose the problem.
Parts Information:
These sensor leads are available under the following part numbers.
One lead and the necessary connectors for the repair are included in each package.
Sensor lead E32/E34 - P/N 61 13 9 061 686
[email protected]
292
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 814
Sensor lead E30 - P/N 61 13 9 061 687
Diagnostic and Repair Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure:
1) Disconnect the 35-pin connector from the ABS Control Unit.
2) Connect the Universal Adaptor to the harness using the appropriate adaptor lead.
3) Using a Fluke 83 Multimeter (or equivalent) check the resistance of the individual sensor leads (refer to appropriate ETM for proper pin
numbers.
The resistance should be between 650-1,600 ohms.
Wiggle and tap the connection of the sensor lead/sensor.
If a fault is not detected, try cooling the lead and connector, followed by wiggling and tapping the sensor lead/sensor.
If a fault is still not detected, repeat this procedure, heating (with a hot air gun) the lead and connector.
Repair Procedure:
Read through the entire repair procedure before proceeding.
1) Disconnect the sensor lead from the wheel sensor connector.
2) Cut the defective lead off at the point where it enters the main harness.
[email protected]
293
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 815
[email protected]
294
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 816
3) Connect the new lead to the wheel sensor connector. Route the lead through the vehicle to the ABS Control Unit as illustrated.
4) Disassemble the 35 pin connector as described in Group 61 of the Repair Manual.
5) Cut the excess wiring off the new lead.
[email protected]
295
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 817
6) Strip away approx. 100 mm of the outside covering exposing the two wires (E30) or 1 wire and screening (E32/E34).
7) On an E30: Connect the two connectors supplied in the kit to the two wires.
8) Remove the two wires from the 35-pin connector for the lead that is being replaced.
Note:
On an E32/E34, remember which terminal the screened wire came out of as the new one must go in the same terminal.
9) Insert the new wires into the 35-pin connector housing.
Note:
On an E32/34, make sure the screened wire is inserted into the same terminal that the previous screened wire was taken out of.
10) Remove the old wires from the connector and connect to the ABS Control Unit ground point as follows:
E30 - connect both wires.
E32/E34 - only connect the screened wire. Tape the other wire back against the harness.
Failure to do this may result in erroneous faults due to these wires acting as antennas.
11) Reassemble 35-pin connector.

Warranty and Labor Operation
[email protected]
296
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 818
Labor and/or parts covered under the terms of the BMW New Car, Limited Warranty of 3 Years/36,000 Miles.
Labor operation/Flat rate units: Refer to Attachment I.Technical Service Bulletin # 340298 Date: 980401
ABS/ASC - Warning Lights On During Dynamometer Test

Group 34
Brakes
Bulletin Number
34 02 98
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1998
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
ABS/ASC Warning Lights Illuminated During Dynamometer Test
MODEL:
8 Series (E31) 91 Model Year to 97 Model Year
7 Series (E23, E32, E38) from 85 Model Year to 8/97 production
6 Series (E24) from 85 Model Year
5 Series (E28, E34, E39) from 85 Model Year except 540iA from 9/97 production
3 Series (E30, E36) from 86 Model Year
Situation:
Many State Motor Vehicle Agencies require vehicles to be tested on a dynamometer during annual emissions testing. This test may set the ABS and
[email protected]
297
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 819
ASC warning lights on the instrument cluster, and cause the vehicle owner concern.
Note that ABS/ASC warning lights are likely to be set under any conditions where the front wheels are stationary, and the rear wheels are spinning.
The vehicle ABS/ASC systems will be immobilized until the warning lamps are switched off.
Cause:
The warning lights are illuminated because the ABS/ASC system sees an implausible speed differential between the spinning rear wheels, and the
stationary front wheels. Note that vehicles equipped with DSC3 (E38 from 9/97, and 540iA from 9/97) will not set the ABS/ASC warning lights
under these conditions.
Procedure:
The ABS/ASC warning lights will automatically switch off as follows:
^ Switch off engine

^ Wait a minimum of 30 seconds
^ Restart engine, and drive away
^ Warning lights will go out when speed exceeds 8 mph (Fault codes will be retained in memory)
Because of this mechanism for turning off the warning lights, it is unlikely that a customer will arrive at a BMW Center with the warning lights still
illuminated. In case of a customer complaint, confirm with the customer the conditions when the lights were set.
If the fault was set during a dynamometer, or similar test, no further diagnosis is required.
Importantly, reassure the customer that the lights were set because the ABS/ASC system was working normally. The fact that the lights go out by
themselves, confirms this.
Note 1:
For BMW Centers who have State approval to carry out enhanced I/M dynamometer testing, accurate emissions measurements, on ASC
equipped vehicles, can only be made with the ASC switch switched to the "off" position.
Note 2:
This bulletin is being sent to State Motor Vehicle Agencies (Attachment 1), together with a letter which can be provided to the BMW owner
(Attachment 2).
State Motor Vehicle Agency Letter

April 1998
To State Motor Vehicle I/M Agencies
BMW of North America, Inc. has been advised, that motor vehicle inspection stations which use the enhanced I/M dynamometer type emissions
test, can cause the Automatic Slip Control (ASC) and Anti Lock Brake (ABS) warning lights on the vehicle instrument cluster to illuminate during
the test procedure. This is a normal function of the vehicle system, but causes the BMW vehicle owner unnecessary concern.
BMW of North America, Inc. has issued a Service Information Bulletin (34 02 98), describing the features of the BMW ABS/ASC systems, to all
its Retail Centers. It the enhanced I/M dynamometer type emissions test is carried out in your State, would you please arrange to post this Bulletin
at all your testing stations, where it can be seen by BMW owners. Also attached, is a letter which can be provided to the BMW owner explaining
the ABS/ASC system function.
In addition, please make your testing stations aware that when carrying out enhanced I/M dynamometer testing on BMW vehicles fitted with ASC,
accurate emissions measurements can only be made with ASC switched off using the ASC switch on the vehicle dashboard. Please incorporate this
revised procedure into your test sequence when testing an affected BMW vehicle.
Thank you for your help in this matter.

Owner Letter
April 1998
Dear BMW Owner,
ABS/ASC Warning Lights Illuminate During Dynamometer Test
Please be aware that if your State Motor Vehicle Agency uses a dynamometer for emissions testing, this may cause the Anti Lock Brake System
(ABS) and Automatic Slip Control (ASC) warning lights to illuminate on your BMW vehicle.
This is a normal function, which is caused by the dynamometer spinning the rear wheels, while the front wheels remain stationary. The vehicle
ABS/ASC systems will be immobilized until the warning lamps are switched off.
If these warning lights illuminate on your vehicle, follow the procedure below, and they will turn themselves off automatically, and normal
ABS/ASC functions will be restored:
[email protected]
298
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 820
^ Switch off the engine

^ Wait a minimum of 30 seconds
^ Restart the engine, and drive away
^ The warning lights will go out when speed exceeds 8 mph
We apologize for any inconvenience. Technical Service Bulletin # 340201 Date: 010301
Brake Caliper - Lubrication

Group 34
Brakes
34 02 01
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
Service Engineering
March 2001
SUBJECT:
Greasing Brake Caliper
MODEL:
M3, M5, M roadster, M coupe, Z8
SITUATION:
When performing brake maintenance on M cars equipped with black coated brake calipers, the customer may object to the use of Bostik
Never-Seez(r) to lubricate the contact point that are visible, as the gray colored lubricant is unsightly against the black caliper.
PROCEDURE:
On cars with black coated brake calipers, Plastilube, part number 81 22 9 407 103, should be used to lubricate the contact points that will be visible.
All other models should continue to be lubricated with Bostik Never-Seez(r) to reduce the possibility of brake noise.
Information only.
Hybrid Battery (65 A/H) - Availability

Group 61
Electrical System
Bulletin Number
61 12 91 (3391)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1992
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes the Service Information bulletin number 61 12 91 (3391) dated December 1991. It incorporates
revised Parts Information.
Please remove and discard Information bulletin number 61 12 91 (3391) dated December 1991 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
65Ah Hybrid Battery Availability for Engine Compartment Use
MODELS:
E30 Convertible, 525i w/battery in engine compartment
Situation:
A new hybrid 65Ah battery is available which has significant performance advantages over the older style battery for "under-hood" applications,
which tend to expose the battery to extreme heat. The hybrid design of the new battery consumes less water and should require less maintenance in
E30 Convertible applications as well as 525i models with the battery under the hood.
Action:
When replacing the battery in these vehicles, use the new hybrid unit. This should provide improved performance to the customer.
[email protected]
299
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 821
Note:
525i models with the M50 engine are originally equipped with a 75Ah battery. The new hybrid 65Ah battery should be used in these vehicles, if
replacement becomes necessary. Although the new battery 65Ah rating is lower, the higher 75Ah capacity battery was provided only to prolong the
charge during overseas shipment.
On 525i vehicles with the baftery in the engine compartment, use the new hybrid 65Ah battery if replacement is necessary.
On 525i vehicles with the battery under the rear seat (as of 4/91 production), use the original style 75Ah battery if replacement is necessary.
Parts Information:
The production of the non-hybrid 65Ah batteries has stopped. Only the hybrid style 65Ah is available. The proper part number for the hybrid 65Ah
battery will become P/N 61 21 1 378 094. This number will be on the case of the battery, the internal chemistry will be hybrid, and there will NOT
be any sticker with other part numbers or the word "HYBRIDTECHNIK" on the packaging. This change is a result of the depletion of non-hybrid
battery stock, and it will therefore be unnecessary to use a special part number.
In order to determine if a 65Ah battery with the 61 21 1 378 094 part number (such as a dealer stock battery, or OEM "original" vehicle battery) is
hybrid, the following procedure can be used:
A 65Ah battery with the Part Number 61 21 1 378 094 on the side of the battery case will only be hybrid IF:
* There are fold-down carrying handles integrated into the lid, AND the battery is an OEM (original vehicle) battery with a date code stamped
into one of the lead terminals "24 91" (week of 1991) or LATER.
- OR -
* There are fold-down carrying handles integrated into the lid, AND the battery is a remanufactured (replacement) battery with a date code
stamped into the plastic case in between the terminals. The date code is two groups of four digits, and the third or fourth digit in the second
group must be a "2" for a hybrid battery.
Examples:
1. Battery is 65 Ah P/N 61 21 1 378 094 with a flat top, and no carrying handles. This IS NOT a hybrid battery.
2. Battery is 65Ah P/N 61 21 1 378 094 and has a sticker on the case "HYBRIDTECHNIK". This IS a hybrid battery.
3. Battery is 65Ah P/N 61 21 1 378 094 with fold-down carrying handles. Date code stamped into lead terminal is "2391". This IS NOT a
hybrid battery. (The date code must be "2491" or later for hybrid.)
4. Battery is 65Ah P/N 61 21 1 378 094 with fold-down carrying handles. Date code stamped into plastic case between the terminals is "HAX5
3657". This IS NOT a hybrid battery. (The date code must have a "2" for the third or fourth digit in the second group of numbers. "HAX5
3627" or "HAX5 3652" would be hybrid.)
Battery - Additional Electrolyte Level Checks

Group 61 Chassis - Electrical
Woodcliff Lake, NJ January 1991
Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 61 01 90 (3019) dated January 1990. Please remove and discard S.I. 61 01 90 (3019) dated
January 1990 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT: Battery Electrolyte Level
MODELS: All
Situation: Due to the higher loads placed upon the battery during the winter months and as a result of the increased utilization of
electrical systems on the car, the electrolyte level may drop at a higher rate.
On the 325i convertible and the 525i sedans, the placement of the battery in the engine compartment adds to this increased
electrolyte depletion due to higher operating temperatures.
Corrective
[email protected]
300
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 822
Action: In accordance with the Service Maintenance Checklist, the electrolyte level has to be checked on every car during
Inspection I and Inspection II, and filled up with distilled water, if necessary.
In addition, the electrolyte level should be checked/corrected on 325i convertibles and 525i sedans, whenever these vehicles
are brought to the workshop for any repair, maintenance or service.
The electrolyte level should be about 0.2 inches (5 mm) above the upper edges of the plates or at the mark visible in the
filler opening, depending on the battery type.
Warranty
Information: Covered under the terms of the BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect code: 61 21 00 12 (+ vendor code)
Labor operation: 61 20 509 (Checking battery of 325iC and 525i not in conjunction with Inspection I or II.)
Labor allowance: 1 FRU
Battery - Acid ( Electrolyte) Precautions

Group 61
Electrical System
Bulletin Number
61 03 91 (3244)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT:
Battery (Acid) Electrolyte
MODELS:
All
Situation:
1) ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
If the battery electrolyte level is allowed to drop substantially, the gas volume inside the battery grows proportionately resulting in an increased
amount of flammable gas mixture. In addition, the plates are no longer covered by the electrolyte and may corrode. Any external or internal spark
can potentially result in an oxyhydrogen explosion.
Corrective Action:
As described in S.I. 61 01 90 (3019), dated January 1991, the battery electrolyte level should be checked on every Inspection I and Inspection II on
every vehicle. In addition, it should be checked whenever the vehicle is brought into the workshop if its battery is located in the engine
compartment (325iC and 525i). A sufficiently high electrolyte level will prevent an oxyhydrogen explosion in the battery to occur.
Use only distilled water to top up batteries! No tap water nor electrolyte (dilute sulfuric acid) may be used to refill automobile batteries!
Situation:
2) NEUTRALIZING ELECTROLYTE (ACID)
Any leakage or spillage of battery (acid) electrolyte should be neutralized as soon as possible to prevent any damage to paint or body.
Corrective Action:
Depending on the amount of spillage, dilute some baking soda in water and apply to areas of the car that had been exposed to battery (acid)
electrolyte. The neutralizing action will create some foaming in the area where the chemical reaction takes place. Flush with ample amounts of
water once the chemical reaction has subsided.
Situation:
3) DARK STAINS ON INSIDE OF BATTERY PLUGS
In batteries with separate pockets (plates insulated by pockets), polyethylene film is used as separating material. During the initial charging process
or when the batteries are subsequently charged, residual oil may be released by the separating material and be deposited on the underside of the
battery cover and on the inside of the plugs. This oil is between dark grey and black in color. Sometimes, a very thin film can form on the surface of
[email protected]
301
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 823
the electrolyte; however, the electrolyte itself does not change color or become cloudy.
Comment:
The residual oil is electrochemically neutral and does not affect the operation of the battery. As there are no adverse effects when this occurs,
replacing the battery cannot be justified.
Battery - Jump Starting the Vehicle Is Not Recommended

Group 61
Electrical
Bulletin Number
61 05 93 3895
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Jump Starting of Vehicles
MODELS:
All
Situation:
"Jump starting" should be avoided because of possible damage to certain electric components. The electrical components found throughout our cars
can handle voltages up to 15V for brief periods only. Jump starting equipment found on some tow trucks operate at 18 and up to 24 volts. Damage
to certain electrical components is assured if this equipment is used.
Disconnecting the battery leads and charging the battery is recommended.
However, in certain circumstances, jump starting may not be avoidable. To protect the electric components in the car, follow the procedure
described below.
Procedure:
1. Ensure that the vehicle being jump started and the vehicle used to jump start are not touching (on certain vehicles, ground points may exist on
bumpers).
2. Ensure that both vehicles have batteries of the same voltage and of approximately the same ampere-hour rating (ampere-hour rating must be
similar to ensure sufficient power for jump starting).
3. Carefully observing polarity, connect the positive jumper cable to the B+ Junction Post (or battery positive terminal, if vehicle is not
equipped with B+ Junction Post) of the vehicle to be jump started, and then to the battery positive terminal of the vehicle being used to jump
start. Next connect the negative jumper cable to a CHASSIS GROUND (e.g., bolt at front shock absorber upper mount) on both vehicles. In
this manner, sensitive electronic components will be afforded more protection from voltage surges by the damping action of the chassis
ground.
4. Jump start the vehicle. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, switch on:
^ Heater fan to highest speed

^ Rear window defroster
^ Low beam headlights
By switching on these consumers, voltage surge at the moment of jumper cable disconnection is minimized.
5. Disconnect the negative jumper cable, then disconnect the positive cable. Disconnecting the cables in this order ensures that any momentary
arcing that might occur is away from the battery (in the case of vehicles with the battery in the engine compartment) and any gases produced
by the battery.
Failure to follow this procedure exactly may result in damage to sensitive electronic components. Such damage is assured if jump starting is
performed with equipment developing over 15 volts.
Battery - Maintenance System

Group 61
[email protected]
302
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 824
Bulletin Number
61 O7 88
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1996
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 61 07 88 (1717) dated December 1995 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I.
binder.
SUBJECT:
Battery Maintenance Requirements
MODEL:
All (New and used cars in dealer inventory)
Situation:
We are providing a flexible battery maintenance system that can be used by every dealership in accordance with their particular needs. This bulletin
announces the 1997 Battery Charging Calendars.
Procedure
The maintenance tracking system provides for 3 distinct options:
1) Removal of battery main disconnect switch upon arrival of car at dealership (or car not equipped with disconnect switch)
1.1) Vehicle goes into storage (back lot)
A four-week charging cycle and calendar has been established for these cases.
The car arrives marked with a color-coded sticker on the windshield. The respective color (one out of four possible colors) designates the
vehicle's battery must be charged in accordance with the new calendar on a four-week cycle.
Also, the car will be provided with a BATTERY LOG FORM. This form has to be filled in upon receipt and subsequently has to be filed in
the BATTERY CHARGE LOG (binder) under the applicable color coded section. All cars identified by their respective sheets in one section
will have to be recharged in that week.
1.2) Vehicle goes into showroom or new car display
Due to the exposure to customer traffic, that is, the increased current draw imposed on the battery because of frequent usage of the vehicle's
electrical components (demonstrations, product familiarization), a four week charging cycle will not suffice.
Please fill in section "A" of the BATTERY LOG FORM upon receipt of the car. Further, the battery voltage should be monitored depending
on the extent of customer traffic the car is subjected to or is used for demonstrations. (Maximum: 1 check per day; minimum: 1 check per
week.) The battery has to be recharged as frequently as necessary to ensure that the voltage never drops below 12.5V.
Please note every instance of recharging on the BATTERY LOG FORM, section "C". Please file in BATTERY LOG FORM in the
BATTERY CHARGE LOG (binder) under the section "SHOWROOM" to provide for an instant overview of the charging activities on these
cars at all times.
2) Battery main disconnect switch remains on car if "OFF" position Since the battery main switch, in its "OFF" position minimizes the current
draw on the battery, a 3-month charging cycle can be followed. Please use section "D" of the BATTERY LOG FORM to document every
occurrence of charging.
Please fill in section "A" of the BATTERY LOG FORM upon receipt of the vehicle. The new windshield labels can be used to track these
cars with the exception of those vehicles bearing a "yellow" label. These yellow labels have to be removed and replaced by one of the three
applicable colors.
Please file the BATTERY LOG FORM in the BATTERY CHARGE LOG (binder) also under the SHOWROOM" section.
3) Used cars
Used cars in dealer inventory should be monitored and recharged according to the above principles. There is no reason why the battery
maintenance should be neglected since poor reliability of a pre-owned BMW may deter a customer from buying a new one at a later date.
The above guidelines for proper battery maintenance are meant to provide maximum flexibility to every dealership. Regional BMW
personnel will be happy to assist with setting up an effective charging and monitoring program.
[email protected]
303
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 825
Upon the sale of a car, its BATTERY LOG FORM should be removed from the BATTERY CHARGE LOG (binder) and filed in the vehicle
file to be available for future reference.
Because leaving a battery in a discharged state has a detrimental effect on its service life, improper battery maintenance will be grounds to
reject battery warranty claims.
Further technical notes:
Topping up a battery with anything but distilled water will cause irreparable damage to that battery.
DO NOT ADD TAP WATER! DO NOT ADD ACID!
If, at any time, battery voltage should drop below 11.6 volts and remain at this level or less for three or more days, this battery MUST BE
SCRAPPED, and the vehicle battery MUST BE REPLACED.
Dispose of all batteries properly.

Parts Information
[email protected]
304
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 826
Refer to the attachments to this bulletin for the procedure flowchart.
[email protected]
305
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 827
Requests for additional binders, forms, calendars or windshield labels should be addressed to:

BMW Plaza
Montvale, NJ 07645
Attn: Service Engineering
OR
Fax: 201-930-8401
A preprinted order form is enclosed for your convenience.

Battery Log Form Procedures
A battery log form and binder have been developed to assist in tracking the battery maintenance of the vehicles at dealerships. The form is 2-sided
[email protected]
306
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 828
which allows the use of a 4-week charging cycle or a 3-month cycle for those vehicles that have the main switch installed and "turned off".
The form will be put in the glove box of each vehicle and the charging cycle windshield label will be installed at the VPC. When the vehicle arrives
at the dealership, the form should be completed in the first section (A) which lists basic vehicle information; and the dealer stock # entered on top.
The form has 3 charging cycles that can be used depending on the location of the car at the dealer (showroom display or storage), and the use of the
main disconnect switch.
For storage vehicles that do not have the main disconnect switch installed and in the "off' position, Section B should be used. These vehicles follow
a 4-week charging cycle, indicated by the windshield label color (white, red, green or yellow). This section of the form has 4 columns with the 4
individual colors and dates of the weeks when the vehicle must be recharged. The windshield label color indicates the column to be used for the
charging cycle. The voltage should be checked and noted before charging and the form initialed after charging has been completed.
Section C has been designed for the showroom vehicles and all the vehicles in a "display area. Any of these vehicles with a high rate of activity
(i.e., customer demonstrations, etc.) should have the battery voltage monitored daily and if battery voltage drops below 12.5V, must be recharged
and entered on the log form. As a minimum, each vehicle must be monitored once per week.
Note:
For those dealers who have established their own working battery maintenance procedure which falls within the BMW guidelines, Section C
can be used to track the charging of those vehicles.
Any storage vehicle moved to a display area then follows the daily/weekly monitoring cycle and should be tracked using Section C of the form.
Section D should be used by those dealers who use the main disconnect switch (installed and turned OFF) to extend their battery maintenance
requirements. These vehicles will follow the previous 3- month charging calendar. The columns on the form are identified by the colors white, red
and green of the 3-month charging calendar designating the months the vehicles are to be charged. The windshield labels can also be used to track
these vehicles with the exception of the 4th color, yellow. Therefore, the colored windshield labels will be available to reassign a vehicle (with a
yellow charging cycle) to another cycle of the 3-month calendar, if necessary.
To facilitate the use of the forms and vehicle monitoring, a BATTERY CHARGE LOG binder was developed with 5 separators to file the
maintenance forms by charging cycle. Four of the separators come in the colors of the charging cycles and the 5th separator will be marked
SHOWROOM. As each form is received along with a new vehicle, it should then be filed in the binder in the appropriate section for easier
tracking.
Each form should remain in the binder until the vehicle is sold, at which point it should be moved to the vehicle history file.
* On the 8 Series, the batteries must be load tested individually by isolating each battery; i.e., by disconnecting the negative battery terminal.
^ Before performing load test make sure temperature of electrolyte is at least 65° F.
^ New batteries should not be load tested after initial filling of electrolyte. Check state of charge with a voltmeter.
To ensure the battery remains fully charged, start the engine before demonstrating the operations of components to the customer at the time of
delivery.
Please note that the procedures outlined above are meant to be guidelines to assist dealerships in assuring a sufficient state of charge of vehicle
batteries at all times. Following these procedures, however, will not guarantee a sufficient state of charge on all batteries since there may be
exceptional cases of excessive current draw through very frequent movement of back lot vehicles, for example, which may call for more frequent
recharging than otherwise necessary.
WARNING:
Under no circumstances should a vehicle equipped with a battery disconnect switch be sold or delivered to a customer.
It a vehicle is used as a demonstrator, the battery disconnect switch must be removed.
Under those circumstances where the battery disconnect switch is not removed, extreme caution must be taken not to turn off the battery disconnect
switch while driving (for example, when moving the car on the lot). Technical Service Bulletin # 3202944041 Date: 940801
Starting - Ignition Key Cutting Services Caution

Group 32
Steering and
Alignment
Bulletin Number
32 02 94 (4041)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1994
Product Engineering
[email protected]
307
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 829
SUBJECT:
BMW Key Cutting Services
MODELS:
All
Situation:
BMW Vehicle keys are being obtained from third-party locksmithing operations. A recent investigation showed that the key duplicating process
that these shops utilize is not precise which may result in locks sticking, or ignition locks failing to operate properly.
Correction:
Keys for BMW vehicles are to be obtained ONLY from BMW Parts. Each PDC has a stock of the original equipment blanks, as well as access to
the computer-controlled machines that allow key cutting from the key code. (Duplication by physical measuring/contact methods creates a
potentially unfavorable stack up of tolerances).
Fuel - Engine Compartment Return Fuel Hoses

Group 13
Fuel System
Bulletin Number
13 03 92 (3589)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1994
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 13 03 92 (3589) dated December 1992, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded. It includes additional parts information indicated by grey shading.
SUBJECT:
Engine Compartment Return Fuel Hoses
MODELS:
All
Situation:
A new return fuel hose has been released for all BMW models. A new style hose clamp has also been introduced which features a "shear-off" hex
nut head to avoid over tightening and allow proper torque to be maintained on the fuel hose and line assembly as illustrated in S.I. 13 04 92 (3657).
The new style hose clamp is a "one time" clamp, i.e., whenever removal becomes necessary it cannot be reused and must be replaced.
Whenever a return fuel hose is removed from a fuel line/component in the engine compartment, the hose and clamps must be replaced with the new
fuel hose and new style clamps.
Application
When a return fuel hose replacement in the engine compartment becomes necessary, only the appropriate fuel hose kit (see current parts microfiche
for applicable part numbers), which includes the new style fuel hose and hose clamps, or the new style fuel hose, P/N 13 53 1 731 015 (sold by the
meter) and hose clamp, P/N 13 31 1 703 387, should be used.
Note:
The early style hose, P/N 13 31 1 722 262, and fuel hose clamps should still be used for all other applications, i.e., fuel tank vent system,
coolant expansion tank, all feed and return fuel hoses outside of the engine compartment, etc.
Warranty Status:
Information only.
Emissions - Rotten Egg Smell From Exhaust

Group 18
Exhaust System
Bulletin Number
18 01 93 (3846)
[email protected]
308
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 830
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Hydrogen Sulfide Odor from the Exhaust System
MODELS:
All
Complaint:
Rotten Egg Smell from Exhaust
Situation:
Since the introduction of the 3-way catalytic converter in 1978, BMW has been working with catalyst manufacturers to find the ideal type of
promoter to minimize the formation of Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) which is a by-product of the catalytic action and is often described as a "rotten egg"
smell from the exhaust. Over the years changes have been phased into production to optimize the overall performance of catalytic converters.
Sulfur dioxide (S02) is formed in the catalytic converter, which subsequently attaches to the so-called promoters during constant speed driving with
an ideal air/fuel ratio or slightly lean condition. Under acceleration or slightly rich condition, S02 is reduced to H2S and released through the tail
pipe. The amount of H2S that is released from the catalytic converter depends heavily on the sulfur content of the fuel being used. The higher the
sulfur content in the fuel the greater the odor from the exhaust pipe under the above circumstances.
Correction:
If a complaint is received of "rotten egg" smell from the exhaust system, and there are no faults stored in the DME Engine Control Module, the
recommendation of a different name brand fuel may eliminate the complaint since the sulfur content of today's fuels varies significantly.
The replacement of a catalytic converter for the above complaint should not be considered since a new catalytic converter may even emit a slightly
higher amount of H2S during its initial break-in period.
Replacement of catalytic converters for the complaint of "rotten egg" smell/odors from exhaust is not covered under warranty.
Electric Window Motor - Diagnostic Procedure

Group 51
Body Equipment
Bulletin Number
51 01 91 (3216)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Electric Window Motors
MODELS: 3 Series (E30) - All so Equipped
Situation: An increasing number of window motors (P/N 51 31 1 380 854) returned under warranty are found to be not defective when
tested.
Before condemning a window motor as defective, check the motor by holding the "UP" button depressed for approximately
10 seconds, and listen for a "click" from the area of the affected motor.
Note: This "click" can be heard best in a quiet environment (i.e., engine not running, radio & air conditioner off, windows
and doors closed). Familiarize yourself with this sound by performing this procedure in a vehicle with known good
window motors.
If this motor is continuously powered against a stop (stalled), a thermal protection switch inside the motor will open after
approximately 6 seconds. It will reset after approximately 2 seconds. The opening of this switch produces a distinctive
"click".
If it is determined that this thermal protection circuit is working properly i.e., if "clicks" from the switch can be heard, the
motor is in all probability working properly, but encountering excessive load. The window regulator and window channels
should be inspected for binding, distortion, lack of lubrication, etc.
[email protected]
309
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 831
Important Note: Window motors returned under warranty and found to be not defective will be returned to the dealer.
Warranty
Cruise Control - Troubleshooting

Group 65
Radios and Accessories
Bulletin Number
65 04 90 (3121)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1990
Service Engineering
SUBJECT:
Cruise Control Electrical Troubleshooting
MODELS:
All (equipped with Cruise Control with Electrical Actuator)
Situation:
Cruise Control with electric actuator (introduced in 1982) can be diagnosed by a pin by pin examination of the circuits involved (see appropriate
Repair Manual and Electrical Troubleshooting Manual).
Troubleshooting procedures may contain the following information:
1) The technician is directed to use Pin 3 as a ground for voltage or resistance tests, using the 26-pin adaptor; and, 2) Pin 3 of the control unit is
referred to as a "Cruise Enable" input.
Both of these items may be misinterpreted, resulting in a faulty diagnosis.
Correction:
When troubleshooting this cruise control system, consider the following points:
1) Pin 3 may not be grounded through the instrument cluster. On later vehicles, the wire attached to Pin 3 is not connected to anything else. Pin
23 should be used as a ground in all testing.
2) Pin 3 should be considered as a "cruise disable" input. Cruise control operation is not enabled by Pin 3 being grounded. Rather, cruise control
operation is disabled by the application of voltage to Pin 3 (via Park/Neutral circuit).
Refer to the appropriate ETM and Repair Manual in all cases.

Technical Service Bulletin # IV78 Date: 900801
Radios/CD Changers - Compatibility Chart

8/90
IV-78
TO:
ALL BMW DEALER PARTS MANAGERS
SUBJECT:
COMPATIBILITY CHART FOR ALL CD-READY RADIOS AND CD CHANGERS
[email protected]
310
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 832
Soon we will announce the new 1991 CD-Ready Radio and Changer Programs.
In order to make things easier, we have put together a chart designed to eliminate the guesswork when determining what radio will work with what
changer.
Radio - AM Interference From Interior Lights/Accessories

Group 65
Radio and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
65 12 91 (3384)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: AM Radio Interference from Interior Lights and Accessories
MODELS: 3 Series (E36), 5 Series (E34)
Situation: Complaints of clicking or popping noises from the radio in the AM range associated with switching ON or OFF interior lights,
rear window defogger, and other electric accessories. Interference may also be noticed when interior lights are dimmed or
faded-out.
Solution: Two capacitors must be installed on the antenna amplifier, as well re-routing some wiring to prevent interference (see illustration).
Procedure: 1. Remove the driver's side "C" pillar trim and unbolt the antenna amplifier.
2. Clip the connector off of the lead on the 4.7 uF capacitor (P/N 65 81 1 370 418) and strip about 3/8" of insulation.
3. Remove the black defogger connection from the antenna amplifier. Clip off the female spade terminal and strip about 3/8"
of insulation.
4. Crimp both the defogger lead and the 4.7 uF capacitor lead in a new female spade terminal (P/N 81 24 9 408 335) and
insulate with a new lock housing (P/N 81 24 9 408 336).
[email protected]
311
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 833
[email protected]
312
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 834
5. Remount the antenna amplifier with the 4.7 uF (P/N 65 81 1 370 418) and
47 uF (P/N 65 31 1 357 878) capacitors in place (see illustration). The
4.7 uF capacitor mounting tab must go under the mounting flange on the
antenna amplifier in order to fit properly.
6. Reconnect the modified defogger terminal to the antenna amplifier.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector for the interior light, and remove the brown/red wire socket from the connector with a
2.5 mm terminal extraction tool (61 1 150). Cut off the socket from the brown/red wire and strip about 3/8" insulation.
8. Obtain a 14" piece of similar wire, and strip about 3/8" off of both ends.
Crimp one end of the wire along with the brown/red interior light wire in a new socket (P/N 81 24 9 408 415).
9. Crimp the free end of the 14" wire in a male spade terminal
(P/N 81 24 9 408 108) and connect to the female spade terminal of the .47 uF capacitor (P/N 65 31 1 357 878).
10. Insulate this connection with electrical tape or shrink tubing.
11. Install the new brown/red wire socket in the old connector housing, and plug the connector into the interior light.
12. Check the routing of the interior light wires and the AM/FM antenna leads from the antenna amplifier to the
antenna/defogger grid. Tape interior light wires to the inside edge of the "C" pillar trim. Tape the AM/FM antenna leads
between the antenna amplifier and the rear glass. See illustration for preferred wire locations.
[email protected]
313
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 835
Parts
Information: Part Number Description
65 31 1 357 878 .47 uF capacitor

65 81 1 370 418 4.7 uF capacitor
81 24 9 408 335 Female spade terminal

81 24 9 408 336 Lock housing
81 24 9 408 108 Male spade terminal
81 24 9 408 415 2.5 mm socket terminal
Warranty
Status: Covered under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect code: 65 31 00 12 00
Labor operation: 00 50 193 (install capacitors)
Alpine/Pioneer Radios/CD Changers - Description

Group 65 Radio and Accessories
SUBJECT: 1991 Model Alpine and Pioneer Anti-Theft Radios and CD Changers
MODELS: All so Equipped
BMW is pleased to introduce the 1991 model radio and CD changer system.
For the first time, both radios and CD changers are interchangeable between the two manufacturers.
While the anti-theft features are retained from the 1987/88 and 1989/90 model radios, the 1991 model radio incorporates many
improvements in the areas of radio and CD operation.
Anti-Theft Features
The BMW anti-theft radio circuitry is designed to essentially render the radio unusable if it is stolen. If the radio is subsequently
electrically reconnected, it will not operate again until a five-digft security code assigned to that particular radio chassis is entered.
Note: This radio does not require any mounting bracket or installation clips for installation into the dash. A latch is built into
both sides of the radio and is drawn into place with special tool P/N 88 88 1 600 143. For details see the attached
installation instructions.
Anti-Theft Radio Program Responsibilities

Dealer Responsibilities
1) Dealers where the radio is removed upon vehicle receipt - Remove radio chassis but assure that the anti-theft radio program
instructions and identification card is also removed from glove box and is taped or secured to radio chassis. This packet has
the security codes for that particular radio chassis.
2) Dealers where the radio remains in vehicle upon vehicle receipt - Remove anti-theft packet, mark packet with dealer stock
number and vehicle chassis number, store anti-theft packet in stock sales jacket.
3) California - Remove boxed radio and store in secure area. The anti-theft radio program instructions/identification packet is
inside the box.
Dealer Responsiblilties at PDI (All Dealers)
1) With radio chassis in vehicle, open anti-theft packet, turn radio ON, enter code, check radio functionally. Do not remove code cards from the
packet.
2) Mark code on PDI checklist and file in customer service files (maintain security of code information).
3) The anti-theft packet should be returned and stored in the stock sales jacket until time of delivery to the customer.
Dealer Responsibilities at Vehicle Delivery to Customer

1) Explain elements of anti-theft program to customer.
2) Explain operation of radio to customer.
Exchange and Over-The-Counter Radio Sales Anti-theft packet to be included in all exchanges and new radio chassis.
[email protected]
314
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 836
Return of Radio under Warranty

1) Obtain the codes from the customer and attach them to the radio chassis.
2) Properly fill out and attach a Warranty Parts Return Tag.
3) Return radio to: BMW NA Warranty Parts Receiving Department Montvale, NJ 07645
Customer Responsibilities
1) Remove first code card from packet and place in wallet.
2) Remove second code card from packet and if applicable, give to second driver or file away for emergency usage.
3) Provide police with radio chassis number from code card for positive identification in the event radio is stolen.
4) Install "Warning Anti-Theft Radio" decals on car in places desired.
Loss of Code Cards by Customer The customer is informed in his BMW RADIO OWNER'S MANUAL and packet instructions to contact a BMW
dealer who will then obtain the code from BMW NA. The customer should be advised that he may be charged for removal of the radio to ascertain
the radio chassis number.
IT IS THE DEALER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO REQUIRE CUSTOMER AND VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION (LICENSE AND VEHICLE
REGISTRATION) PRIOR TO CONTACTING BMW NA FOR THE CODE.
To obtain a code from BMW NA contact your regional Service Manager with the radio serial number and your dealer code. These codes will only
be given out to authorized dealership personnel.
Additional blank code cards are available under P/N 88 88 1 600 134.
Radio Operation - Improved Features

The number of FM preset stations has been increased from 6-12.
The display is now of the dot-matrix type wfth photocell illumination control.
If a BMW cellular phone is installed in the vehicle, the radio can be muted when an incoming call is received (cassette/CD functions go into a
pause mode).
CD Changer Operation - Improved Features

A "random play" feature has been added giving the system the ability to randomly select one track after another. In this mode, the system chooses
from all tracks of all discs in the magazine randomly.
Both CD changers are compatible with either radio. However, they differ slightly in some areas, such as magazine design.
The Alpine CD Changer uses a new magazine that features improved design and easier loading and unloading. The Pioneer CD Changer is smaller
than the previous design, and incorporates an improved shock absorber design. It uses the familiar 6-disc magazine (BMW part number 88 88 1 600
188) which is compatible with certain home multi-play CD players.
Both units are now capable of verticle mounting.
Wiring and Additional Improved Features

The 1991 model year radio features an improved wiring connection with integral CD data cable mounting. It is also equipped to accept the new 50
ohms antenna connector.
Although radios of both Pioneer and Alpine manufacture are identical in appearance in their installed positions, the radio manufacturer may be
identified (in the dot-matrix display) by pressing the "Prog" and "-" keys simultaneously.
Important
Note: Both CD changers are designed to give years of trouble-free service.
However, improper maintenance of compact discs can comprise the reliability of the changer. It is therefore important to
observe the following cautions:
1. Never use 3 inch discs in the changer (even with an adapter). Use only 5 inch (12 cm) compact discs.
2. Never affix labels, paper, or tape to compact discs.
3. Never load a cracked, bent, or otherwise damaged disc into the magazine.
4. Never apply any foreign substance (record cleaning spray, anti-static agents, marking ink, etc.) to a compact disc. If
the disc should become soiled, gently wipe the surface with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth, wiping from the center of the
disc to the edge.
FM/AM
[email protected]
315
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 837
Press the BAND button and FM or AM will appear on the display indicating which band is being received. When FM or AM is chosen, the
currently tuned frequency is also displayed. Press the button to change from band to band. There are two FM program selections: FM1 and FM2.
Press the PROG button to switch between them.
Weather Band (WB) Automatic Frequency Selection

When the WB button is pressed, regardless of what source you are currently listening to, weather band seek tuning begins automatically and finds
the strongest broadcast frequency. If the broadcast frequency in your area is too weak, or nonexistent, a beep will sound after the WB frequencies
have been automatically scanned three times, and NO STATION will appear on the display. If you press the WB button again, the radio returns to
the previous source.
NOTE: In certain areas weather band broadcast frequencies may be too weak for automatic radio scanning. In this situation the weak weather
band frequency can be manually tuned with the tuning buttons.
Manual/Seek Tuning
The TUNING buttons are used for both manual and seek tuning. For manual tuning, press either of the tuning buttons one step. To tune to a higher
frequency, press the right button; to tune to a lower frequency, press the left button. For seek tuning, press the right or left button 2 steps (as far as it
will go). The radio will automatically tune and lock onto the next higher or lower receivable broadcast frequency. When seek tuning the next higher
frequency, the display shows SEEK UP; when seek tuning the next lower frequency, it shows SEEK DN.
Stereo
The ST indicator will light up on the display whenever a stereo station is received. The indicator will flash when signal strength diminishes.
Automatic Local/Distance Switching

New electronic circuitry automatically selects the local/distance mode for best reception, eliminating the need for manual switching.
Scan Tuning
Signal scan tuning allows you to tune into each medium-to-strong frequency pausing seven seconds at each. Push the SCAN button once to begin
tuning up scale, and press it again during a pause to stop the scanning. The display shows SCAN during tuning.
FM Reception
Signal reflections or blockage caused by hills or tall buildings may cause hissing and fluttering noises in FM reception. FM signal strength
diminishes beyond 25 miles from the transmitter.
Preset Station Indicators With LED

Each PRESET button has a built-in LED. When a PRESET button is pushed, the LED will change from orange to green, indicating selection of the
preset frequency. This also causes the display to show the PRESET memory number (for example, M3).
Programming/Reprogramming Preset Stations

Tune in the desired radio station. Then push a PRESET selection button for 1.5 seconds. When you hear a beep, the frequency has been memorized.
Repeat this procedure for the remaining preset station selectors on the FM (FM1 and FM2) and AM bands.
NOTE: The radio programming controls have triple functions. Each button can be set to one FM1, one FM2 and one AM station.
Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance Control
[email protected]
316
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 838
Each time the MODE button is pressed, control of bass, treble, fader, or balance is selected in turn. The selected mode is shown on the display and
can be adjusted by the + and - buttons. Approximately five seconds after adjustment, the display returns to fts previous state.
When the MODE button is pressed continuously for more than 1.5 seconds, the level of each mode returns to flat or center. At this time a beep is
solinded and "FLAT" is displayed on the display.
Telephone Muting
Should your BMW vehicle be equipped with the cellular telephone with muting feature, the radio volume will be reduced (gradually) when an
incoming telephone call is received. Tape cassette/compact disc functions will automatically go into a pause mode. Radio volume is restored after
the telephone call has been completed as are tape cassette/ compact disc functions.
Cassette Operation
To use the cassette player, turn the radio on. When a cassette is inserted, the unit will switch automatically from radio to tape mode.
Fast Forward/Rewind
The fast forward/rewind button has a two-step operation. Press the right side of button one step to fast forward; press the left side of button one step
to rewind. Repeat the same action to stop the appropriate function. The logic circuitry in your radio will automatically determine the right direction
for fast forward or rewind. While the tape is fast forwarding, the display shows FORWARD; while tape is rewinding, it shows REWIND.
A standard cassette has two sides and can be played in either direction. When in play, the top side of a cassette will be indicated as "1" on the
display. The bottom side will appear as "2".
Tape Seek
Pressing the fast forward/rewind button two steps (as far as it will go) activates the seek mode. To move to the next selection on your tape, press the
right side of button (as far as it will go). The display shows SEEK UP. The tape will move rapidly to the next selection. To restart the current
selection, press the left side of button in the same manner. The display shows SEEK DN.
Tape Seek will only function correctly if there are four seconds of silence between the selections on your tape. Excessive noise between selections
on home-recorded tapes may interfere with these functions.
The cassette automatically ejects from the unit if tape setting operations cannot be completed within a few seconds. This may be caused by a faulty
or damaged cassette. Determine the cause of the problem or use a different cassette.
Reversing Tape Direction

To reverse tape direction, push the PROG button. Additionally the tape will reverse automatically when a side is complete.
Tape Scan
If you wish to scan through the tape until a desired selection is found, press the SCAN button. Each selection on the tape will play for
approximately 13 seconds. (The display will show SCAN.) Scanning stops when the SCAN button is pressed again.
[email protected]
317
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 839
Automatic Equalization
The playback equalization of normal tapes differs from that of chrome and metal tapes. When a high-bias tape, including metal, is inserted, the unit
will automatically change to the correct equalization level, and MTL will be indicated on the display.
Tape Eject (1 Ej)

Press the EJECT button -1 EJ-to eject tape cassette and return to the radio mode.
Skip Blank (2 Sb)

The SKIP BLANK button -2 SBautomatically advances the tape to the next recorded portion when a blank section of tape exceeds approximately
15 seconds. When there is a long, unrecorded portion at the end of the tape, the unit advances the tape to the end and then starts to play the other
side. When the SKIP BLANK button is pushed, SB will appear on the display. Additionally, SB will flash while the tape is advancing.
Dolby(R) B Noise Reduction (3)

Use the Dolby(R) B Noise Reduction function button - 3 -to reduce the level of hiss on Dolby(R) B-encoded cassettes. If you do not use the
Dolby(R) B noise-reduction function with Dolby(R) B encoded tapes, the high-frequency response will be diminished.
The word "Dolby(R)" and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
Ignition-Key-Off Pause Mode

If the ignition is turned off while a tape is playing, the unit automatically enters the pause mode. The unit will return to normal play mode when the
ignition is turned on. The unit will not accept another cassette when it is in the pause mode.
Automatic Tape Slack Canceller (Atsc)

The automatic tape slack canceller removes any slack in the tape before play to protect the tape and extend its life.
Rotating Tape Head

The rotating tape head in your tape cassette player ensures accurate horizontal tape alignment in both directions for optimum sound level
reproduction and frequency response.
NOTE: The BMW Anti-Theft Radio contains a full-logic computer-controlled 3-motor drive which controls the automatic tape slack
canceller (ATSC) and rotating tape head mechanism. During cassette tape loading/unloading or tape transpod directional changes, the
motor drive emits a precision mechanical sound which is indicative of normal tape cassette player operation.
CD Operation
To use the CD player, turn the radio on and press the BAND button. The display indicates FM, AM or CD. Select CD to switch from radio mode to
CD mode.
Direct Disc Selection

DIRECT DISC SELECT buttons 1 through 6 correspond to the magazine tray numbers. When there is a disc in a tray, the number lights up in
orange on the corresponding button. To play a disc in the magazine, press one of the buttons whose indicator is lit. Indicator number on button will
turn to green.
NOTE: Nothing will happen if you press a button whose indicator is not lit. The display will read "NO DISC" for approximately 5 seconds
and the volumn will be muted at the same time.
Fast Forward/Reverse
The fast forward/reverse button has a two-step operation. Press the right side of button one step to fast forward; press the left side of button one step
to reverse. During the fast forward operation, the display shows FORWARD; during the reverse operation, it shows
REVERSE.
Track Search
Pressing the fast forward/reverse button two steps (as far as it will go) activates the track search mode. To advance to the next track, press the right
side of button (as far as it will go). To return to the previous track, press the left side of button in the same manner. Push and hold the button down
(as far as it will go) to move forward or backward thorugh the tracks.
[email protected]
318
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 840
Music Scan
When the SCAN button is pressed, the word "SCAN" appears on the display and the player begins playing the first part (approximately 10 seconds)
of each track on the current disc. Press the button again when you find a track you want to listen to: the player will return to normal playback and
continue with the current track.
Random Play
Press the PROG button for random play. (RANDOM appears on the display.) This function randomly plays one track after another, choosing from
all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine randomly. Press the PROG button again to cancel random play.
NOTE. Since tracks are selected at random, it is possible that the same track may be
played twice in succession.
Magazine Check
When there is no magazine in the CD changer, the words "NO MAGAZIN" appears on the display to advise you to load a magazine.
NOTE: After you load a magazine, there is a short pause before playback begins. The changer is checking each of the trays for discs in the
magazine. (The display indicates "DISC CHECK.)
Disc Check
A "DISC ERROR" indication is shown on the display and operation of the system becomes impossible when the CD players optical laser has
difficulty reading the discs or when the discs are loaded into the magazine with their labels facing down. Whenever this message appears, remove
the magazine and check the discs.
Radio Installation Instructions

BMW ANTI-THEFT CD-READY
RADIO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
PART NO. 88 88 1 600 245
Fig. 1
1. After removing the radio from the carton, check to see if the two installation latches are flush against the chassis side panel per Figure 1.
Fig. 2
If the latch must be adjusted, remove the rubber end cap from the installation wrench and use the flat metal portion to open the mounting hole
covers on the front plate. Then insert the pentagon end of the tool through the holes and turn counterclockwise until the latches on both sides
are flush with the chassis.
2. Remove the panel from the dashboard and connect all wires to the radio chassis in the following sequence:
3. Turn the vehicle ignition and the radio to the "on" position and "CODE" will appear on the display.
Note: If the radio is installed by a dealer or BMW customer. read the "anti-theft" instruction booklet and then decode the "anti-theft"
[email protected]
319
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 841
system. Then operate the radio and tape to verify that all functions perform properly.
Fig. 3
4. Turn the vehicle ignition and the radio to the "off" position, insert the radio into the dashboard. Remove the rubber end cap from the special
installation tool, then use the flat metal portion to open the mounting hole covers on the front plate. Carefully push the radio until the front
plate firmly touches the dashboard. Insert the pentagon portion of the tool through the hole and turn it clockwise until the radio is secured.
Audio - CD Changer/Radio Compatibility

Group 65
Radio and Accessories
Bulletin Number
65 03 91 (3238)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT: CD Changer/Radio Compatibility
MODELS: All (equipped with 1991 Alpine/Pioneer Anti-theft Radios and CD Changers)
Situation: Alpine radio goes into a locked, non-functional mode when used with CD changer produced by Pioneer.
General
Information: Software incompatibility may occur when an Alpine radio (P/N 88 88 1 600 245 - new; P/N 88 88 1 600 246 - exchange) is
used in conjunction with the Pioneer CD changer (P/N 88 88 1 600 240 - new; P/N 88 88 1 600 241 - exchange).
Correction: Until further notice, do not install a Pioneer CD Changer in a vehicle equipped with an Alpine radio. Other combinations are
not affected.
Refer to the table below.
Radio CD Changer Compatibility
Pioneer Pioneer Yes

Alpine Alpine Yes
Alpine Alpine No
Pioneer Pioneer Yes
Warranty
Audio - Static Noise When Driving Over Bumps

Group 65
Bulletin Number
65 02 91 (3223)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1991
Service Engineering
[email protected]
320
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 842
SUBJECT:
Static Noise on AM/FM Bands When Vehicle is Driven over Bumps
MODELS:
All equipped with 1991 model Alpine radio
Situation:
In rare cases, the antenna connection on 1991 Alpine radios may loosen.
If this occurs, driving over bumps may produce static noise through the speakers with the radio tuned to an AM or FM station.
Correction:
Use needle-nose pliers to slightly push in and tighten the 4 ground tab contacts to obtain a firmer contact between the antenna cable and the radio.
Refer to illustration.
Also, slightly spread the ends of the center contact with a tool (such as a knife blade, center punch) in order to widen this contact and improve the
connection. Refer to the illustration.
Warranty Status:
Covered under the terms of the BMW New Car Limited Warranty of 4 Years/50,000 Miles.
Defect code:
65 21 00 44 A5
Labor operation:
65 11 030 Main Work
65 11 530 Associated Work
Labor allowance:
Per Flat Rate Manual, applicable model
Note:
The following explanations will spell out the correct use of the work times.
Main Work:
Use this time when the only repair performed is the listed warranty repair.
OR
Associated Work:
Use this time when other repairs or services are performed along with the listed warranty repair.
[email protected]
321
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 843
Under no circumstances should both work times be claimed. Attempts to claim both times will result in an unnecessary delay in claim processing
and payment.
6505903132 Adds Information to 1990/10/01

TSB # 6505903132, DATED 1/1/91 HAS BEEN APPENDED TO TSB # 6505903132, DATED 10/1/90.
Technical Service Bulletin # IV29 Date: 910101
Cellular Telephone - Introduction

SUBJECT: 1991 CELLULAR TELEPHONES
1/91 IV-29
Replaces IV-29 dated 3/89
NEW COMPETITIVE PRICING
PLUS
$250.00 COMMISSION
FOR EACH NEW PHONE NUMBER
ACTIVATED BY
YOUR DEALERSHIP
EXAMPLE:
Dealer net price for CMT-100-A $566.00
[email protected]
322
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 844
Part number 99 99 9 737 780/781
Commission paid to dealer for -250.00
new phone number activation
Actual dealer net price $316.00
after Activation Commission
TO RECEIVE $250.00
CALL
1-800-338-1948
AND ACTIVATE ALL PHONES
YOURSELF
Important Program Information

IMPORTANT PROGRAM INFORMATION
1. All 1991 750iL come standard with the CMT-300 and mute feature.
2. All other 1991 7 Series are pre-wired to accept either the CMT-300 (use kit part number 99 99 9 737 766) or the CMT-100-A (use kit part
number 99 99 9 737 781).
3. All 850i come standard with the CMT-200 and mute feature. (Same as CMT-300, but uses a shielded style data cable).
4. All 1991 5 Series are pre-wired to accept either the CMT-300 (use kit part number 99 99 9 737 766) or the CMT-100-A (use kit part number
99 99 9 737 781).
5. All E30 3 Series must be wired at time of kit installation. Use either the CMT-300 (kit part number 99 99 9 737 765) or the CMT-100-A (kit
part number 99 99 9 737 780).
6. The CMT-100 is the same as the CMT-100-A except it uses a shielded style data cable.
7. You cannot add Voice Activated Dialing to the CMT-100-A. (Use CMT-300, part number 99 99 9 737 765/766).
FEATURES
CMT-300
^ Voice Activated Dialing
^ Duplex Hands-Free Operation
^ One Touch Dialing
^ Multiple-City Registration
[email protected]
323
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 845
^ 911 Emergency Dialing
^ 15 Second Recorded Message for incoming calls
CMT-100-A
^ Duplex Hands-Free Operation
^ One Touch Dialing
^ Multiple City Registration
^ 911 Emergency Dialing
^ Auxiliary Port for Fax Machine and/or Lap Top Computer
^ On-Hook Dialing
^ Auxiliary Port for Fax Machine and/or Lap Top Computer
^ On-Hook Dialing
^ Last Number Redial
^ 15 Digit Alpha Numeric Display
^ Stores 99 numbers
^ 16 Digit extended readability
^ Transportable Conversion Kit Available
^ Last Number Redial
^ 15 Digit Alpha Numeric Display
^ Stores 50 Numbers
^ 16 Digit Extended Readability
^ Transportable Conversion Kit Available
Installation
INSTALLATION
To perform a complete installation on a PRE-WIRED vehicle you will need the following:
1. Telephone Kit 99 99 9 737 766 - CMT-300 or 99 99 9 737 781 - CMT-100-A
2. Antenna Kit 99 99 9 737 749 - Kit for pre-wired cars
3. Installation Kit (hardware) 99 99 9 737 714 - E32 7 Series, E34 5 Series
[email protected]
324
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 846
To perform a complete installation on a NON-WIRED vehicle you will need the following:
1. Telephone Kit 99 99 9 737 765 - CMT-300 or 99 99 9 737 780 - CMT-100-A
2. Antenna Kit 99 99 9 737 724 - Kit for non-wired cars
3. Installation Kit (hardware)
99 99 9 737 729 - E30 3 Series

99 99 9 737 730 - E28 5 Series
99 99 9 737 731 - E24 6 Series
99 99 9 737 714 - E32 7 Series, E34 5 Series
NOTE: E23 7 Series does not require a special installation kit.
Options
OPTIONS
Transportable Unit - Transforms the vehicle system into a portable that can be carried to the golf course, tennis court, boat or anywhere. Includes
battery, antenna, and cords for recharging. Just transfer the handset and transceiver from the car to the transportable and you're ready to go.
Nylon Carrying Case - Designed specifically for the Transportable Unit.
Pricing
PRICING
TELEPHONE KITS
*DEALER
NET AFTER SUGGESTED
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION COMMISSION RETAIL
99 99 9 737 765 CMT-300 (Complete Kit) $576.00 $1,010.00

99 99 9 737 766 CMT-300 (Kit for Pre-Wired Cars) 576.00 1,010.00
99 99 9 737 780 CMT-100-A (Complete Kit) 316.00 711.00
99 99 9 737 781 CMT-100-A (Kit for Pre-Wired Cars) 316.00 711.00
* Dealer must activate the new phone number to receive the $250.00 commission included in this net cost.
ANTENNA KITS
DEALER SUGGESTED
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION NET RETAIL
99 99 9 737 724 Antenna Kit Complete $51.00 $78.50

99 99 9 737 749 Antenna Kit Pre-Wired Cars 41.50 64.00
INSTALLATION KITS
DEALER SUGGESTED
99 99 9 737 729 E30 3 Series $22.50 $34.50

99 99 9 737 730 E28 5 Series 22.50 34.50
99 99 9 737 731 E24 6 Series 30.50 47.00
99 99 9 737 714 E32 7 Series, E34 5 Series 33.00 50.50
TRANSPORTABLE - FOR CMT-300 OR CMT-100-A
DEALER SUGGESTED
99 99 9 737 771 Transportable Kit $323.00 $497.00

99 99 9 737 795 Nylon Carrying Case 56.50 87.00
WARRANTY
[email protected]
325
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 847
Four years 50,000 miles when it is installed in a new 1991 vehicle. When installed after the vehicle sale, the normal BMW Parts and
Accessories Warranty will apply.
This is a tremendous selling point and should be mentioned at every opportunity.
SPARE PARTS
See attached chart.
[email protected]
326
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 848
Cellular Phone Antenna - Whistle

Group 65
Radio and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
65 01 93 (3727)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Cellular Telephone Mast Antenna Whistle/Removal
MODELS:
All equipped with BMW Cellular Telephone
Situation # 1:
Cellular telephone antenna masts may create a whistling noise at highway speed. In every case investigated, the noise was caused by improper
mounting of the antenna.
Correction:
In case of customer complaint, examine the mounting of the antenna. The base of the cellular telephone antenna assembly must be at least 1-3/4
inches lower than the bottom of the rear window trim. Refer to the illustration. If the antenna is mounted too close to the trim, the antenna base will
be in the airstream at speed and create a whistling noise. Also, if the antenna is mounted too far down on the rear window, a different part of the
antenna is in the airstream which can also create wind noise. Remove and remount the antenna base in the proper location with remounting kit (P/N
99 99 9 737 727). It is advised to refer to the specific installation instructions for the model of telephone and vehicle to determine the exact proper
location for antenna base mounting.
Situation # 2:
Cellular telephone antenna masts cannot be unscrewed from antenna base sockets for car washes or theft prevention. The painting process on the
[email protected]
327
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 849
antenna assembly has bonded the antenna mast threaded insert to the socket in the base.
Correction:
In case of customer complaint, detach the antenna mast portion along with the threaded insert and socket by removing the two screws from the side
of the antenna mounting base (shown in illustration). Place the mast on a workbench, and carefully score around the "waist" of the socket joint with
a knife (area indicated in illustration) to break through the paint. Wrap the parts in cloth to prevent marring the paint, and twist the two sections
counterclockwise carefully with two pairs of pliers.
If the above process (or similar attempts by customer) has chipped or marred the paint extensively, replace the antenna mast socket (P/N 65 22 1
467 985).
Parts Information
Antenna Remounting Kit 99 99 9 737 727
Replacement Antenna Mast Socket 65 22 1 467 985
Parts and labor covered under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
ANTENNA MAKES WHISTLE NOISE
Valid for port installed phones ONLY (e.g. 750iL, 850i)
Defect Code: 65 61 04 77 BV
ANTENNA MAST CANNOT BE UNSCREWED
Valid for all models W/BMW CMT1000 or CMT1000VR cellular telephone
Defect Code: 84 50 01 75 AQ
Audiovox Cellular Telephone - Kit Availability

Group 02
[email protected]
328
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 850
Bulletin Number
02 24 92 (3665)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1992
Product Engineering
TO:
Sales, Service and Parts Managers and Staff
SUBJECT:
Audiovox Cellular Telephone and Installation Kits
Models:
1991 E32/34
1987 - 1992 E30 (including the 1993 E30 convertible)
Audiovox Cellular Telephone and Installation Kits are now available for the above models. Each kit contains the phone and all required installation
components in a single carton under its main part number.
For pre-wired 1991 MY E32 and E34 vehicles, order P/N 99 99 9 737 827.
For non pre-wired 1987MY E30 vehicles through 1992MY E30 vehicles (including the 1993 E30 convertible), order P/N 99 99 9 737 828.
Part numbers are for Reference Only.

Check with your Parts Dept. for latest info.
Motorola Telephone Diagnostic Tool Kit - Usage

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
[email protected]
329
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 851
Bulletin Number
04 03 93 (3739)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Motorola Telephone Diagnostic Tool Kit Use
MODELS:
All equipped with BMW/Motorola Cellular Telephone System
Situation:
Since the introduction of the BMW CMT1000 and CMT1000VR mobile cellular telephones, a diagnostic tool kit (P/N 99 99 6 000 001) has been
available to assist in evaluating telephone component problems, using a "bench" setup. A few dealers have expressed concern that there is
insufficient information for hooking up the color-coded wires on the wiring harness included in the kit.
Correction:
The telephone transceiver, speaker, microphone, handset, and data cable connections are all coded and keyed connectors. There can be no
confusion as to how these connections are made. However, the power and ground wires should be connected as listed. Note that the "Equivalent
Vehicle Pins" column is given as a reference describing a similar example connection on an E36 vehicle. Refer to the 1993 E36 ETM, section
6561.1 for details.
Input connections are as follows:

RED Connect to 12 volt power supply, positive side (both wires)
BLACK Connect to 12 volt power supply, negative side (both wires)
GREEN Connect to 12 volt power supply, positive side (simulates key ON)
Output connections are as follows:

YELLOW Connect to radio mute or ohmmeter (Not necessary unless testing mute feature. Yellow wire will source a ground when phone is
active.)
Portable Telephone - Special Tool

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 03 95(4154)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1995
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New BMW Special Tool
MODELS:
All (equipped with Motorola CMT 2000VR portable telephone)
Situation:
The following kit has been developed to allow for identity transfers between CMT 2000VR portables. Attached you will find instructions for its
use.
Motorola Transfer Kit

P/N 84 11 1 468 739
This tool will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional kits may be purchased through your PDC.
[email protected]
330
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 852
The identity transfer procedure allows the user to transfer the Electronic Serial Number (ESN), all Number Assignment Module (NAM) data,
customer repertory memory, and any special features in use from the customer's present defective portable to the replacement unit.
NOTE
Identity transfers can only be preformed between same model BMW portables.
CAUTION
Make sure that you are grounded with a elastic strap during the procedure.
The following equipment is required to perform the transfer procedure: Identity Transfer Box (84 11 146 8 739) which includes one coil cord and
shorting clip, customer's coil cord, defective portable telephone, and a replacement portable telephone.
1. Set Transfer Box switch to "OFF" and connect wall transformer to standard AC outlet.
2. Turn off both protable telephones and remove batteries.
3. Connect coil cord modular connectors to either side of transfer box. It does not matter which unit connects to which side of the transfer box,
but it is convenient to connect the coil cord with shorting pin to the defective unit.
4. Locate the portable phone connector slot on the bottom back of the portable phone. Orient the flat accessory connector so that the white dot is
facing the same direction as the front (keyboard and display side) and slide the connector into the slot. A properly made connection will
generate an audible click.
5. Ensure that both portable telephone units are off. If they turn on, turn them off by depressing the PWR button.
CAUTION
It is possible to transfer the data in the wrong direction, erasing the customer's stored information. Perform the following steps precisely as
directed.
6. Using the shorting clip, short the battery contacts on back side of the defective portable telephone. Press PWR button while maintaining the
shorted contacts. Remove the short once the phone is on and in manual test mode. If the phone has successfully turned on in test, the display
will be flashing information about once per second.
7. On the defective portable phone, press the # button then enter number 69 followed by the #.
8. Using the same procedure as in step number 6, turn the replacement portable telephone on in the test mode.
9. On the replacement portable telephone, press the # button and turn the transfer box switch to position 1.
10. On the replacement portable phone, enter number 66 followed by #. If you see no response in the display, check that the switch is in position
1, not 2. Position 2 is not used with BMW portables and will cause the unit to ignore key presses. This will initiate the transfer procedure.
After a short delay, the replacement portable will display either a "PASS" or "FAIL" message on the display. If the "PASS" message is
displayed, the identity transfer has been completed successfully and the procedure is finished. If a "FAIL" message is displayed, refer to the
list of fail codes below to determine the cause and possible corrective action.
11. Verify the ESN in the replacement portable telephone using the 38 # command. Turn power off on transfer box and portables and disconnect
the portables.
[email protected]
331
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 853
IDENTITY TRANSFER FAIL CODES

Cellular Phone - CMT 2000VR Number Memory

Group 65
Radio and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
65 04 94 (4049)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1994
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
CMT 2OO0VR Telephone Number Memory # 60 - # 99
MODELS:
All w/BMW CMT 2OOOVR Cellular Telephone System
Situation:
The new portable cellular telephone system allows the user to store names and phone numbers whether the unit is plugged into the vehicle, or being
used in a portable "hand-held" mode in another location. Name and phone number data stored in the handset while in portable mode must later be
downloaded into the vehicle's transceiver if the user wishes to access these numbers. This procedure is fully documented and explained in the
telephone user's manual.
However, a software problem in the first few hundred CMT 2000VR vehicle transceivers produced does not allow phone number memory locations
# 60 through # 99 to be downloaded. The download stops with memory location # 59 instead of location # 99.
Phone number data for locations # 60 - # 99 can be programmed into the vehicle's transceiver manually, and all other functions and features are not
affected.
Correction:
In the case of a customer complaint about downloading memory locations # 60 - # 99 on the BMW CMT 2000VR cellular telephone system,
replace the vehicle transceiver only, with P/N 84 11 1 468 596. The software has been modified in all new and exchange transceivers available
from BMW Parts.
Parts Information:
Updated CMT 2OOOVR Exchange Transceiver 84 111 468596
Parts and labor are reimbursable under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect Code: 84 11 01 77 AZ Technical Service Bulletin # 651396 Date: 960801
Cellular Phone Antenna - Installation

Group 65
Sound System,
Cruise, Alarms, Monitors
Bulletin Number
65 13 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
[email protected]
332
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 854
August 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Installation of Cellular Phone Antenna
MODEL:
All
Situation:
During March 1996 production, E38 and E39 vehicles received a new type of coax cable connector. Depending on the antenna coupling box being
installed, an adapter may be needed to properly connect the cable to the coupling box.
In order to eliminate the loop of coax cable (routed from the antenna coupling box) visible through the rear window, BMW has redesigned the
factory supplied coupling box and the pre-wired coax cable connector at the coupling box end on all E38 and E39 vehicles produced from
approximately March 1996 on.
Depending on vehicle model, the previous coupling box was either square or rectangular in shape with the connection port centered on the right
side of the box (as viewed from inside the vehicle).
The new design coupling box will be trapezoidal in shape with the connection port at the upper left edge of the coupling box (as viewed from inside
the vehicle). This design will allow the coupling box to be mounted in such a way that the cable will be hidden behind the black window edge
masking. In order to achieve this the connector port had to be as small as possible.
This small size was achieved by making the cable connector a "Quick Connect" type similar in concept to an air hose coupler.
The new design for the coax cable coupling was phased in during March 1996 after the first 100 E39's were produced and is installed on all 5 and 7
Series vehicles that are factory prewired for cellular phones.
Correction:
[email protected]
333
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 855
Determine which antenna coupling box/coax cable combination exists in each case, using the table below and the attached listing of antenna types.
If a CMT 3000 or CPT 4000 phone is being installed in an E38 or E39 vehicle produced after 3/96, the adapter (P/N 61 13 8 369 629) for the
coupling box may be needed.
Any vehicle that has a telephone as standard equipment will have the correct antenna and coupling box installed at the factory. Depending on
vehicle model and antenna application, some E38 and E39 vehicles that have the telephone installed as an Aftersales accessory will have to use
adapter P/N 61 13 8 369 629 to mate the new "Quick Lock" coax cable to the current inventory of antenna kits.
Please note that installation or removal of this adapter will require a 4.5 mm wrench (HAZET P/N 440-4.5) or socket (SNAP ON P/N STMM 4.5).
This size may not be commonly available and may have to be special ordered.
If a situation should arise in which a vehicle is equipped with the old style cable and the antenna coupling box is of the new "Quick Lock" type, the
factory installed adapter in the coupling box can be removed and the old style cable can be used.
The table below shows the various coax cables that will be encountered in current vehicles.
Models Quick-Lock Cable? Pre-Wired?
E38, E39 (From 3/96) Yes Yes
E38, E39 (Before 3/96) No Yes
E31 No No
E36 No No
[email protected]
334
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 856
[email protected]
335
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 857
[email protected]
336
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 858
[email protected]
337
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 859
A listing of the correct combinations of antenna and connector for the various models is included.
Warranty Status: Information Only.
Motorola Mobile Phones - Replacement Parts

Group 84
Phone,
Navigation Systems
Bulletin Number
84 13 97
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1997
Project Engineering
SUBJECT:
Motorola Mobile Phones: Replacement Parts Availability
MODEL:
All
[email protected]
338
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 860
Situation:
The table provides information regarding availability of spare parts and complete kits for different models of Motorola Cellular phones.
Important:
The CMT 3000VR Transceiver is not backwards compatible with any other type of a Transceiver.
The CMT 5000VR Transceiver is backwards compatible with CMT 3000VR Transceiver, since it can be used as a replacement part on a customer
complaint basis only. A customer who has a CMT 3000VR Transceiver replaced with a CMT 5000VR, will gain the advantage of having an
Authenticated Transceiver, but will not be able to utilize all of CMT 5000VR features (e.g. the simplified keypad enable/disable), due to the fact
that the remaining CMT 3000VR components (these can not be changed) do not support the advanced features of the CMT 5000VR.
Safety Belts - Child Restraint Feature

Group 72
Special Equipment
Bulletin Number
72 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Safety Belts with Child Restraint Feature
MODELS:
All
Situation:
Beginning with September 1995 production, all new cars manufactured for sale in the United States must have safety belts in all seating positions,
except the driver's, that are capable of locking in position to properly restrain a child safety seat.
The belts used in all BMW models meet this requirement by first pulling the belt out of the inertia reel as far as the end stop. Buckle the belt, and
allow the slack to retract. The belt will now lock in this position. To release this feature, unbuckle the belt and allow it to retract fully.
Some passengers that are in the habit of pulling the belt fully out of the retractor, buckling it, and then letting the belt snap back may inadvertently
engage this feature. To prevent this from happening, they should be advised not to pull the belt out all the way against the stop.
If an owner of an earlier model requests it, the new style belts may be retrofitted into earlier production cars per the applications listed in the parts
system. The new style belts are shown on the parts system as "Belt with Child Protection".
Warranty Status:
Information only. Retrofitting of new style belts to fulfill a customer request is not covered under Warranty.
[email protected]
339
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 861
SRS - Deployment Reports

Group 72
Equipment and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
72 03 93 3820
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
SRS Deployment Reports
MODELS:
All
Situation:
In the past we have requested dealers fill out an "SRS Deployment Report" (refer to illustration) whenever they encountered a vehicle with a
deployed SRS system (airbag).
Correction:
The SRS Deployment Reports are no longer needed. Please do not submit any additional reports until further notice.
We appreciate your cooperation in providing this information. If, in the future, we require any additional information, we will inform you
accordingly.
Horns - Activated by Themselves

Woodeliff Lake, NJ September 1990 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Horn Malfunction
MODELS: All Equipped with Airbag (SRS)
Situation: Horns are activated by themselves. The malfunction may occur when driving around turns, over bumps, or when the horn is
briefly (and intentionally) activated.
[email protected]
340
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 862
Causes: 1. Insufficient clearance of the upholstered cover in the contact bridge support area.
2. Possible short circuit between the contact bridge and the steering wheel in the area of the upper spokes.
Correction: The airbag unit must be removed and reworked according to the instructions given below, but only if a complaint is
encountered.
All safety instructions contained in the repair manual must be strictly observed.
Important
Note: Under no circumstances is the gas generator to be separated from the airbag unit, for this or any other repair.
When refitting the airbag unit, tighten both screws slightly and center the airbag unit. Next tighten the right-hand screw
(viewed in direction of travel) to 8 N-m, then tighten the left-hand screw to 8 N-m.
Warranty
Information: Covered under the terms of the BMW New Car Limited Warranty of
3 Years/36,000 Miles.
Defect code: 32 33 02 22 00
Labor operation: 00 50 834
Any questions concerning warranty coverage should be discussed with your District Service Manager.
Restraint System - Transportation of Infants/Children

Group 72
Safety Restraint Systems
Bulletin Number
72 06 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1996
Product Engineering
[email protected]
341
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 863
THIS BULLETIN CONTAINS IMPORTANT INFORMATION; IT SHOULD ALSO BE DISTRIBUTED TO ALL SALES STAFF.
SUBJECT:
Transportation of Infants and Children in all BMWs including Z3
MODEL:
All
Situation:
In view of the tremendous success of the Z3, we have received numerous inquiries regarding the transportation of children in the front passenger
seat, since the vehicle is equipped with a passenger airbag.
We would like to direct you again to the warnings provided in the BMW Owner's Manual, the labels on the sun visor, and the new owner audio
cassette which describe in detail the precautions to be taken with respect to the transportation of infants and small children.
To re-emphasize:
^ Many state laws and common sense dictate that infants and small children should never be carried on the lap of an adult.
^ A Rear-Facing Child Seat should never be used in the front passenger seat, because the passenger airbag can place an extremely high load on a
rear-facing child seat in the event of deployment.
^ Also, BMW strongly recommends against the use of a forward-facing child seat in the front passenger seat.
If it is absolutely necessary for a child to be transported in the car (i.e. emergency), follow the instructions of the child seat manufacturer for
proper installation and always move the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Be sure to lock the belt according to the instructions on the belt
label and in the BMW Owner's Manual.
^ Further, BMW recommends against small children that have outgrown child seats from riding in the front passenger seat.
However, if a child must ride in the front passenger seat, the proper use of both the shoulder and lap portions of the safety belt must be assured.
If the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt does not fit correctly, the child should sit on a booster seat with the vehicle seat moved as far
rearward as possible and the safety belt properly adjusted.
Airbag Ignitor Circuit - Resistance Testing

Group 72
Equipment and Accessories
Bulletin Number
72 01 92 (3633)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Testing Resistance of Airbag Igniter Circuit
MODELS:
All Equipped with Airbag (SRS)
Certain troubleshooting procedures during airbag diagnosis involve measuring the resistance (ohmic value) of the igniter circuit of the gas
generator, using a harness adapter to open the shorting bridges in the connectors.
The Repair Manuals for all vehicles equipped with airbag state that only the multimeter function of the BMW Service Tester is to be used for
making these measurements. However, situations may arise in which the use of the Service Tester is impractical or impossible (such as a
temporarily inoperative Service Tester).
In view of these possible situations, BMW has approved the use of a digital multimeter for making these measurements, provided that the current
through the test leads during resistance measurements is sufficiently low to prevent deployment of the airbag. BMW has tested and approved the
Fluke models 83 and 87 for these measurements.
The BMW Service Tester Multimeter function should be used for testing SRS circuits at all times. If this is not possible, the Fluke Model 83 or
Model 87 may be used. Use of other, unapproved multimeters may result in unintentional deployment of the airbag, causing the destruction of an
expensive component (airbag assembly) and possible injury.
[email protected]
342
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 864
It is still absolutely necessary to comply with all other safety-related procedures conjunction with diagnosis and repair of SRS systems (e.g.,
disconnection and isolation of B-cable, storage of airbag unit with impact pad facing upwards, etc.)
Please ensure that all members of your Service Department are familiar with this information and comply with these procedures.
Air Bag System - Handling of Pyrotechnic Devices

Group 72 Equipment and Accessories
February 1992
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 72 03 89 (1835) dated March 1989 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT:
Handling of Pyrotechnic Devices: Airbag Modules
MODELS:
All
Situation:
The following procedure has been established to handle non-deployed SRS Airbag Units, once they have been removed from a vehicle.
This is applicable only for units replaced under warranty.
Handling Procedure:
Place the removed unit in the shipping container that the replacement und was shipped in from BMW. This container is properly constructed and
labeled to meet Department of Transportation regulations concerning the shipment of these devices.
Include in the container the following information:
Warranty Parts Tag and the BMW Service Tester printout of the Control Unft I.D. and fault survey.
Ship container individually to:
WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER MONTVALE, NJ 07645
[email protected]
343
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 865
Note:
UPS ground shipping is available in 48 states (not Alaska or Hawaii). The package should have the proper labeling from the factory. A Hazardous
Materials form must be filled out and attached to the top of the box. Refer to illustrations.
SRS Flash Codes - Manual Revision

Group 72 Special Equipment
[email protected]
344
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 866
SUBJECT: SRS Flash Codes
MODELS: E30 and E24 with Siemens Control Unit
Situatlon: The following Flash Codes were omitted from the Diagnostic Procedures listed in the Repair Manual:
3-4-1 4-4-1
Diagnostics: These faults are set when the Control Unit does not sense the correct ground value through the front crash sensors.
Use the diagnostic procedures on the reverse side when these flash codes are encountered.
SRS Control Module - Reset/Recall Tool
[email protected]
345
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 867
Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 22 89 (1946)
Woodcllff Lake, NJ
October 1991
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 04 22 89 (1946) dated September 1989. It contains revised information for the operating
procedures that is critical to the correct operation of the SRS Reset/Recall Tool.
Please remove and discard S.I. 04 22 89 (1946) dated September 1989 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT: SRS Reset/Recall Tool
MODELS: E23, E24, E30
Situation: A special tool has been developed to reset and recall faults in cars which Siemens SRS Control Units. Siemens SRS Control Units
are easily identifiable as the SRS light will flash when the ignition is in the "RUN" position and a fault is present versus the light
being on continuously under these same conditions with a CIPRO SRS Control Unit.
A copy of the operating instructions has been printed. The separate sheet should be kept with the tool.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Special Tool 62 1 290
Flash Code Recall
Use this procedure to activate the flash codes.
Refer to the Repair Manual (Group 32) for the flash code reference table and diagnostic procedures.
- Turn ignition OFF.

- Set the rocker switches to "Memory Recall" and "Pin 6".
- Screw the tool onto the diagnostic plug. If the vehicle has a 15 pin diagnostic plug also use special tool 61 2 060 - adapter.
- The GREEN LED must light up when the tool is screwed into place. If the RED LED lights immediately, the tool must be removed and
reconnected until the GREEN LED lights up.
- Switch the ignition to the RUN position. This must be done in one quick motion.
- The GREEN LED should go out and the RED LED should light. If the GREEN LED stays on immediately after the ignition is switched to
RUN, the procedure must be repeated by turning the ignition OFF and back to RUN. After a 15 second delay the RED LED will go out and
the GREEN LED will light. The flash code sequence will be displayed on the SRS warning lamp in the car. The LEDs on the tool will not
flash.
Flash Code Reset
Use this procedure to cancel all faults after repairs have been made.
- Turn ignition "OFF".

- Set rocker switches to "Memory Reset" and "Pin 6".
- Screw the tool onto the diagnostic connector. Special tool 61 2 060 must also be used on vehicles with 15 pin diagnostic connectors.
- The GREEN LED must light up when the tool is screwed into place. If the RED LED lights immediately, the tool must be removed and
reconnected until the GREEN LED lights up.
- Switch the ignition to the RUN position. This must be done in one quick motion. THE GREEN LED should go out and the RED LED should
light. If the GREEN LED stays on immediately after the ignition is switched to RUN, the procedure must be repeated by turning the ignition
OFF and back to RUN.
- The RED LED will now illuminate and the SRS light will remain ON.
[email protected]
346
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 868
- After approximately 15 seconds the RED LED will go out and the GREEN LED will illuminate. This indicates that the reset procedure is
completed.
- Turn ignition OFF.
- To verify, disconnect the recall/reset tool and turn the igntion to "RUN". The SRS light should go OUT after approximately 3 seconds.
Special Tool - Lateral Runout/Brake Rotor Adapter

GROUP 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 08 88 (1612)
Montvale, NJ
March 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
I. Lateral Runout Gauge
II. Brake Rotor Adapter
I. Lateral Runout Gauge
In order to properly test tire and wheel runout, this special tool has been acquired. For proper use of these tools, please refer to the VIS
program "Tire and Wheel Balancing" # 1-036.
II. Brake Rotor Adapter
In order to measure lateral runout of brake rotors equipped with floating calipers, an adapter has been developed that is to be used in
conjunction with special tools P/N 88 88 6 002 500 Dial Gauge Holder, and P/N 88 88 6 002 510 Dial Gauge.
These tools will be sent to all automotive BMW Dealers under the Automotive Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools can be ordered
directly from your Parts Distribution Center.
Brakes - New Disc Checking Tools

GROUP 34
Brakes
Bulletin Number
34 02 88 (1585)
Montvale, NJ
February 1988
Technical Dept.
[email protected]
347
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 869
SUBJECT:
Brake Discs Checking
MODELS:
All
Situation:
In order to allow faster and more accurate checking of brake discs, two new tools are being sent to all dealers via the Automatic Tool Shipment
Program.
The first tool is a vernier caliper, BMW P/N 88 88 6 341 280. This brake disc caliper is designed to measure discs that have been grooved or that
have a lip around the edge and do not allow measurement with an ordinary flat faced caliper. This caliper also has a floating scale feature which
allows the measurement to be locked in place while the caliper is opened and removed from the disc.
The second tool is brake disc finish comparison gauge, BMW P/N 88 88 6 341 270. This tool is a section of brake disc showing acceptable wear on
one side (YES), and excessive wear on the other (NO). It is used to perform comparative check of a used brake disc to see if the condition of the
friction surface allows it to be re-used without machining.
Operation:
Tool # 341 280 Open the jaws of the caliper at least 10 mm wider than the thickness of the disc. Close the jaws to the work by pushing button "A",
which will cause the stop "B" to pull the sliding scale to the correct reading. Lock the sliding scale in place by tightening lock knob "C". The jaws
can now be opened to allow the caliper to be removed and read in the normal manner.
Tool # 341 270 Compare the surface of the brake disc on the car with the sample. If the disc is as smooth or smoother than the "YES" side of the
tool, the disc does not have to be machined.
It can be re-used if, a) the thickness of the disc is greater than the machining limit stamped on the disc, and b) it is within tolerances for runout and
thickness variation.
If the surface of the disc is rougher than the sample on the "YES" side of the tool then the disc must be machined or replaced.
Engine - Oil Capacities and Oil Dipstick Part Numbers

Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 11 90 (3149)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 11 11 90 (3149) dated April 1993. Please remove and discard S.I. 11 11 90 (3149) dated April
[email protected]
348
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 870
1993 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Engine Oil Capacities
MODELS:
All Current
Situation:
The table shows all engine oil capacities for current BMW engines. These data will be included in the next edition of the technical data microfiche.
When checking the oil level after an oil change, the level should be in the upper third of the space between the MIN and MAX marks on the
dipstick. If the dipstick displays an improper reading after adding the specified amount of oil, then verify that the engine has the correct dipstick
installed. Part numbers for all current dipsticks are also included in the attached table.
Warranty Status:
Information only.
[email protected]
349
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 871
Special Tools - Automatic Tool Shipment Program

SUBJECT: New BMW Special Tools
Situation: The tools above will be sent out via the BMW Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Adddional tools may be purchased through
This primary adapter will work on all engines with direct ignition.
[email protected]
350
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 872
E31
THM-R1 TRANSMISSION
The following optional special tools will NOT be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. They can, however, be purchased through
Starting - Troubleshooting Long Cranking Times

Group 13 Fuel System
SUBJECT: Long Cranking Times
MODELS: All
Situation: The starting characteristics, and therefore the starting time, of an engine depend on several factors. All the "basics" should be
checked first before any further troubleshooting is conducted.
This Service Information Bulletin outlines basic troubleshooting hints as well as a procedure for checking the leakage rate of
an electronic fuel injector. Only leaking fuel injectors should be replaced and will be covered under warranty.
We now have to make every effort to effectively troubleshoot any "long cranking" complaint and perform the necessary
repairs while reducing non-defective component replacements.
Long Cranking With "Wet" Start

General
[email protected]
351
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 873
Information: Long Cranking with "wet" start
Symptoms:
Long Cranking accompanied with rough running, black exhaust smoke, a heavy fuel smell, spark plugs may be wet and
engine oil might have fuel smell. Complaint may be more severe in high altitude areas as air oxygen content decreases.
Special Note for Service Advisors/Service Managers:
Customers should be advised to depress the accelerator pedal approximately halfway before and during engine starting in
mountainous areas.
Troubleshooting Hints:
- Function of evaporative system. The evaporative purge valve must be closed during engine cranking.
- Spark plugs (type, condition, proper gap).
- NTC coolant temperature sensor (nominal values).
- Poor starting and/or running combined with temperature gauge fluctuation may be a product of moisture having entered the injector harness
multiplug. See S.I. 12 05 89 (1862) concerning E30, C191 (E34 x 1563) multiplug moisture.
- Electro-mechanical function of injectors.
- Check injectors for leakage as outlined on pages 3, 4 and 5.
Long Cranking With "DRY" Start

Symptoms:
Long cranking engine runs normally once started and no black exhaust smoke or heavy fuel smell occurs.
Generally, the cause of the dry start complaint is insufficient available voltage(s). This type of long cranking is not caused by a leaking injector.
Troubleshooting Hints:
- Battery properly charged (minimum 12.5V).

- Ignition coil terminal connections (tight), secondary high tension ignition wires (without leakage or corrosion).
- Spark plugs (type, condition, proper gap).
- DME Fault Memory (call up, print, and investigate accordingly).
- KL30/B+ Fusible Link(s) and all battery junction block connections must be in good condition without dynamic resistance.
- The negative battery cable should be checked for a tight metal to metal connection at both cable ends.
- The ground strap between the oil pan and the frame rail (engine ground) can suffer reduced electrical flow due to a loose connection or a
painted contact area. The strap (if used) should be removed and the contact area cleaned as required.
- Central ground connections for the DME Control Unit must make good contact at the vehicle's ground point (see appropriate ETM for
locations).
- All connectors at the main and fuel pump relay multiplugs must be tight and locked into place.
Fuel Quality
Poor gasoline quality will contribute to poor starting and/or running. See S.I. 13 01 88 (1564) concerning Gasoline Fuel Quallity
Recommendations.
In the Spring and Fall, when gas stations switch from Winter to Summer fuel, respectively from Summer to Winter, the different Reid vapor
pressures can have a significant influence on starting abilities.
This is even more complicated by the fact that depending on the geographical area and the local fuel distributor, those seasonal fuels are not
available at the same time everywhere.
Note: When long cranking complaints occur for the first time, in particular during the changing of the seasons, it can be assumed with a high
degree of probability that the fuel is the cause. Customers should be advised to fill the tanks of their cars with a different brand of high
quality fuel.
Important only after the elimination of all possible causes for a poor starting and/or running condition should the injectors be removed and tested as
per the following instructions.
Checking Fuel Injector Leakage Rate
[email protected]
352
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 874
Injector rail must be removed from engine. Refer to appropriate repair manual and flat rate manual for further information.
1. Remove retaining clips and pull fuel injectors out of injector rail.
Install injectors in cylinder order (1-6) into the injector test rail and secure them with the retaining clips.
2. Plug test wire harness connectors onto injectors.
3. Connect air hose (using the appropriate quick disconnect fitting) to the regulator/gauge assembly. No liquids, i.e., oil, water, etc. should be
present in compressed air supply.
Caution: The air pressure regulator knob (see aftached illustration) must be turned out (counterclockwise) to its stop. This will prevent
maximum air flow to the injectors, while they are in the closed position, when the air supply is connected.
4. To remove any residual fuel from the injectors, connect the test wire harness leads to a 12V power supply (injectors open) and turn the air
pressure regulator knob in (clockwise) until the maximum air pressure is reached on the gauge. Continue to blow air through for 2 minutes at
this pressure. Failure to perform this step will lead to incorrect results while performing the air leakage rate test.
Warning: Injector tips should be covered/shielded, i.e., with a clean shop rag to prevent any residual fuel in the injectors from spraying
freely into the atmosphere.
5. Regulate air pressure down to zero pressure using knob on regulator.
6. Disconnect power source from injectors (injectors closed).
[email protected]
353
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 875
7. Regulate air pressure up to the nominal fuel pressure value for the engine under test. See appropriate Technical Data microfiche.
8. Place the injector test rail in the water container supplied. For proper leakage readings, the injector tips must be pointed straight down into
the water container and submerged up to the lower "O" ring on the injector body.
Note: Only clean tap water at room temperature should be used for testing injectors.
9. Observe air bubbles escaping from the injector tips. The maximum permissible air leakage rate is 2 bubbles per injector in 20 seconds.
10. Note which injectors have an air leakage rate greater than 2 bubbles in 20 seconds.
11. Remove the injector test rail from the water container.
12. Regulate air pressure down to zero pressure.
13. Connect the test wire harness to a 12V power supply (injectors open). Regulate air pressure to the maximum air pressure reading on the
gauge and blow through injectors for 2 minutes.
Note: Any injectors which are not blown through with compressed air for at least 2 minutes after the Checking procedure will be subject
to corrosion of the injector tip. Warranty claims for injectors with traces of such corrosion will not be accepted.
14. Regulate air pressure back to zero bar and disconnect 12V power supply.
15. Remove all injectors from the test rail.
16. Replace the necessary injectors (if any) which are noted in Step 10 with new injectors. Reinstall all injectors on the engine's fuel rail.
Reinstall fuel rail with injectors on engine as per repair manual.
Run engine briefly to positively remove any remnants of water from the injectors.
Important
Note: There is no need to test new injectors before installation.
New injectors are treated with a preserving agent by the manufacturer which dissolves after approximately 5 minutes of
continuous engine operation.
Warranty
Warranty
Status: Covered under the terms and conditions of the BMW New Car Emissions Warranty of 5 Years/50,000 Miles.
Note: Warranty claims for injectors found to be not defective as per above checking procedure and/or found to be
corroded because they had not been dried after testing, will be rejected and the subject parts will be returned to the
dealer.
Defect code: 13 64 01 48 00
Labor allowance: See Flat Rate Manual for appropriate labor operation and flat rate time for removal and installation/
replacement of injectors.
Testing injectors (except M70 engine) 3 FRU

Testing injectors - M70 engine 6 FRU
(includes 1 FRU for blowing through injectors 2 times)
Starter - Motor Failures, Binding/Sticking Ignition

Group: 12
Engine Electrical
Bulletin Number
12 O3 93 (3824)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1995
Product Engineering
[email protected]
354
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 876
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 12 O3 93 (3824) dated May 1995, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
This S.I. contains a revised repair procedure for certain E36 vehicles. The black bar and asterisks identifies changes made to this revision.
SUBJECT:
Binding/Sticking Ignition - Starter Motor Failures
MODELS:
E30/E31/E32/E34/E36 (vehicles produced before 6/94)
Situation:
We have received reports of vehicles with failed starters, some with multiple failures. The starter usually does not function after the vehicle is
turned off. On E30 and E34 vehicles, symptoms the customer may indicate are loss of sunroof, window and seat heating the last time the vehicle
was driven. Vehicles may have a discharged battery as a result of continued starter engagement, and some customers may notice an additional
whirring noise from under the hood after starting.
Although few cases have been reported, it is possible this problem can occur on a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. In this case, the
gear selection switch (neutral safety switch) will cause the starter to disengage as soon as the vehicle is shifted into Drive or Reverse. However, the
starter will attempt to re-engage with the running engine when the gear selector is placed in Neutral or Park, causing a loud grinding noise and
potential flywheel/starter pinion damage.
Cause:
The steering lock is intermittently jammed or binding in the "start" position. The battery can be drained as the starter continues to run. The
"unloader" relays cause the windows and sunroof to be inoperative (E30/E34). The starter incorporates a one-way clutch that allows the engine to
spin faster than the starter, so it may be difficult to detect that the starter is remaining engaged. However, prolonged engagement of the starter will
overheat the motor windings and may eventually cause the starter to fail.
Correction:
When a vehicle with a failed starter is brought in, or the customer has complaints similar to the above, the starter electrical system (including
"unloader" relay circuits) should be checked for proper function. The starter pinion and flywheel teeth should be examined for scoring or other
mechanical damage that would indicate misalignment or improper mounting surfaces.
If a check of the starter electrical system and flywheel/pinion does not reveal a problem, the ignition cylinder/lock assembly is causing the
prolonged starter engagement. The entire MECHANICAL portion of the steering lock (lock cylinder, steering lock assembly) must be replaced
along with the "electrical" ignition switch. The starter must be replaced if damaged.
It is imperative that a questionable ignition lock cylinder be replaced, as repeat occurrences of starter failure are particularly disappointing to
customers. To reduce customer inconvenience, it may be helpful to install a precoded ignition lock cylinder temporarily. Although this forces the
customer to use two different keys for unlocking and starting, the vehicle can be returned to the customer without excessive delay. When the
"correct" coded ignition lock cylinder arrives at the dealership, it can then be installed at a later date convenient to the customer.
Until further notice, any E36 vehicle encountered with the complaint described in this Service Information should be repaired as follows:
A special starter protection relay has been developed that automatically interrupts power to the starter solenoid when a specific engine RPM is
reached. This relay is a variation of the Anti-Theft Immobilization Device introduced on E36 vehicles during 1/94 production. The starter
protection features were incorporated into the device beginning with 6/94 production. Refer to S.I. 61 01 94 (3955) for specific details on the
operation of this device.
* On E36 vehicles produced before 6/94, the starter protection function can be retrofitted. E36 vehicles produced prior to 1/94 require the
installation of a relay socket, adapter harness, and starter protection relay. E36 vehicles produced prior to 9/92 and equipped with the M50 engine
additionally require the installation of a resistor adapter in series with the black wire of the adapter hamess. Vehicles produced from 1/94 through
6/94 already have the immobilization device installed; these vehicles only require the addition of one wire and a new relay incorporating the starter
protection feature.*
Information
1. Before proceeding with the installation of the starter protection relay, the entire MECHANICAL portion of the steering lock (lock cylinder,
steering lock assembly) must be replaced along with the "electrical" ignition switch. The starter must be replaced if damaged. Unless the
vehicle is an E36, no further repairs are required. E36 vehicles produced before 6/94 should have the following additional repairs:
2. Disconnect the vehicle battery. Remove the interior trim under the steering column and remove the knee bolster.
[email protected]
355
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 877
3. Unhook the splice box above the speaker. There is a small locking tab on the top left side of the splice box. To remove, pry back locking tab
with a small flat-blade screwdriver or cotter pin hook, while pushing the splice box up.
For E36 Vehicles Produced Prior to 1/94:
4. Locate the following splice blocks in the splice box: the violet with yellow stripe wire splice block, the brown wire splice block, and the
black wire splice block.
*5. Match the same color wires (violet/yellow, brown and black) on the relay harness (P/N 61 12 8 362 049) and install the female spade lugs
into the splice box by carefully pressing the contacts onto a free blade in appropriate color splice block.*
*Important Note:
E36 vehicles produced prior to 9/92 and equipped with the M50 engine require the installation of an additional resistor adapter (P/N 61 12 1
469 443) in series between the black wire of the adapter harness and the splice block (refer to illustration). Install the heat-shrink tubing at the
connection between the adapter harness and the resistor adapter as shown.*
[email protected]
356
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 878
6. Disconnect the black 12-pin connector for the ignition switch. The connector is located on a bracket below the steering column tube. Using a
pin removal tool, press out the male pin # 8 (black/yellow) from the vehicle harness connector. Insert the male pin (black/yellow) from the
relay harness into the hole in the connector. Reconnect to the ignition switch.
7. Lock the male single-pin housing included with the relay harness onto the original male pin # 8 (black/yellow). Plug this housing into the
remaining female connection (black/yellow) on the relay harness. Continue with Step # 8.
For Vehicles Produced 1/94 to 6/94:
4 Locate the black wire splice block in the splice box.
5. Match the same color wire (black) on the relay harness (P/N 61 12 8 362 049) and install the female spade lug into the splice box by carefully
pressing the contact down on a free blade in the appropriate color splice block.
[email protected]
357
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 879
6. Using the proper pin removal tool (such as Special Tool 61 1 130), press out the relay connection in Pin 1 (black) of the relay socket on the
new starter protection harness (P/N 61 12 8 362 049). Discard the rest of this harness; it will not be used.
7. Locate the Immobilization Device (Relay K1w). The unit is in a relay socket mounted to the front of the splice box. Remove the existing
relay from the socket. Install the new pressed-out relay contact (black wire) into the Pin 1 slot on the existing vehicle harness relay socket.
Continue with Step # 8.
8. Reconnect the vehicle battery, and check the relay socket with a voltmeter. There should be B+ at Pin 2 (violet/yellow) of the relay socket
when the key is in the RUN position. There should be ground at Pin 4 (brown) at all times.
9. Plug in the appropriate starter protection relay:
Production Transmission Color Part Number
Prior to 1/94 ALL (man + auto) black/blue logo 61 35 8 364 174

1/94-6/94 Manual black/blue logo 61 35 8 364 174
1/94-6/94 Automatic yellow/black logo 61 35 8 364 175
*Start the engine and test for a frequency using a digital multimeter or the DIS tester at Pin 1 of the relay (measuring between the black wire and
ground). At idle, this frequency should be approximately 28 Hz (for M42 engine), 35 Hz (for M50 TU engine), or 40 Hz (for M50 engine). Also
verify that the tachometer is functioning properly. If these frequency readings are not attained, or if the tachometer is not functioning, check the
black wire for an open circuit, a short to B+, or a short to B-. Note: If the resistor adapter (P/N 61 12 1 469 443) is not installed (E36 vehicles
produced prior to 9/92 and equipped with the M50 engine) the tachometer may not function properly, even if the appropriate frequency value is
attained.*
10. Mount relay assembly on available slots on front of relay bracket under steering column or side of splice box. Secure any loose harness with
plastic cable ties.
10A. On vehicles equipped with automatic transmission, verify that the starter will engage only in gear selector positions "P" and "N." Any
problem is an indication that the wrong relay is installed, or the wiring was added incorrectly.
11. Reinstall the splice box above the speaker. Make certain locking tabs snap firmly into place. Replace knee bolster and interior trim.
Parts Information:
Refer to the Parts Microfiche for the part number of a "lock cylinder with code" and have the part direct shipped. Refer to Parts Bulletin 1-03 for
information on ordering. Consult with BMW Parts Technical if further assistance is needed with this ordering procedure.
In addition to the lock cylinder, the steering lock (aluminum lock housing around steering column) and the electrical switch unit must be replaced.
Additional parts required for repair of E36 vehicles produced before 6/94:
[email protected]
358
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 880
Relay Harness 61 12 8 362 049
Relay (ALL prior to 1/94, 1/94-6/94 MAN Trans) 61 35 8 364 174
-OR-
Relay (1/94-6/94 AUTO Trans ONLY) 61 35 8 364 175
NOTE:
It is imperative that the correct starter Protection Relay be installed, according to production and transmission type.
* Additional part required for repair E36 vehicles produced prior to 9/92 and equipped with M50 engine:
Resistor Adapter 61 12 1 469 443*
Parts and labor covered under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
[email protected]
359
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 881
REMOVED PARTS SHOULD BE RETURNED TO THE WPRC FOLLOWING NORMAL PROCEDURES, IF REQUESTED. It is no longer
necessary to make the special shipping arrangements outlined in older versions of this S.I. bulletin.
Defect Code: 12 41 90 51 00
Labor operations for installing starter protection relay on E36 vehicles produced before 6/94:
Labor Operation: (production prior to 1/94) 00 51 628

* (Installation of starter protection relay, relay socket and adapter harness; includes installation of resistor adapter on E36 vehicles produced prior to
9/92 and equipped with M5O engine) *
-OR
Labor Operation: (production 1/94 to 6/94) 00 51 629

(Installation of starter protection relay and tach signal wire)Technical Service Bulletin # 6212913421 Date: 920601
Fuel Gauge - Inaccurate Fuel Tank Level

Group 62
Instructions
Bulletin Number
62 12 91 (3421)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1992
Product Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin replaces (Orange) S.I. 62 12 91 (3421) Dated Nov. 1991. It incorporates additional information and refers to
another S.I. concerning a related complaint.
Please remove and discard (Orange) S.1 62 12 91 (3421) dated Nov. 1991 from your S.I. Binder.
SUBJECT:
Fuel Gauge Displays Inaccurate Fuel Tank Level
MODELS:
3 Series (E36) - Vehicles Produced Before 8/91
Situation:
Two separate, but related complaints may be encountered:
A) The fuel gauge displays an incorrect level; for example, the gauge appears to stick at approximately 1/2.
B) The fuel gauge does not show maximum level when the tank is filled.
Causes:
Two causes may exist for these complaints:
A) Left-hand side fuel level sender (P/N 16 14 1 180 517) sticking (causes gauge to appear to stick at approximately 1/2).
B) Pump nozzle shuts off prematurely when filling fuel tank, creating the incorrect impression that the fuel tank is full, and the fuel gauge does
not show the maximum level.
Correction:
E36 vehicles produced prior to 08/91 and exhibiting complaint "A" as described above should have an improved left-hand side fuel level sender
(P/N 16 14 1 180 517) installed. The improved fuel level sender bears a blue date code stamp of "9.91" or later.
Any vehicle exhibiting complaint "A" should be checked for proper alignment of the fuel level senders (refer to sections 16/12-3 and 16/12-4 of the
repair manual).
E36 vehicles exhibiting complaint "B" as described above should have the breather line inspected for restriction and position. Refer to Service
Information Bulletin 16 01 92 (3553) for this procedure.
Notes:
[email protected]
360
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 882
1) The Parts Department only stocks P/N 16 14 1 180 517 bearing blue date code stamps of "9.91" or later.
2) These complaints cannot be corrected by replacement of the instrument cluster; therefore, warranty will not cover instrument cluster
replacement for these reasons.
Parts and labor for replacing the left-hand side fuel lever sender are reimbursable under the BMW New Car Limited Warranty of 4 Years/50,000
Miles.
Defect Code:
16 14 00 12 00
Main Work Associated Work
Labor Operation:
1612001 1614520
Labor Allowance:
14 FRU 12 FRU
NOTE:
The following explanations will spell out the correct use of the work times.
Main Work:
Use this time when the only repair performed is the listed warranty repair.
Associated Work:
Use this time when other repairs or services are performed along with the listed warranty repair.
Under no circumstances should both work times be claimed. Attempts to claim both times will result in an unnecessary delay in claim processing
and payment.
Speedometer - Maximum Permissible Error

Group 62
Instruments
Bulletin Number
62 02 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Maximum Permissible Speedometer Error
MODELS:
All
A certain amount of "speedometer advance" is necessary to compensate for negative tolerances in tire diameter, electronic controls, and other
factors. This advance reduces the risk of the speedometer displaying a speed that is less than the vehicle's actual speed.
The amount of speedometer advance can be calculated by inputting a frequency (using the DIS Tester, "Kombi Test Schedule") that corresponds to
a given speed and noting the speed that is indicated by the speedometer. The maximum permitted speedometer advance is 10% of the actual (input)
speed plus 2.4 mph.
Example:
Actual Speed = 50 mph
50 mph x 10% = 5 mph; 5 mph + 2.4 mph = 7.4 mph
Therefore, the permissible displayed speed is 50 to 57.4 mph.
(Note: The displayed speed must never be less than the actual speed).
No repairs should be attempted if the speedometer advance is within 10% + 2.4 mph.
[email protected]
361
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 883
NOTE:
The amount of speedometer advance has no effect on recording of accumulated mileage in the odometer display. The odometer records total
mileage digitally and does not incorporate any "advance" tolerances.
Warranty Status: Information Only.

Headlights - Condensation/Misting
Group 63
Lights
Bulletin Number
63 07 91 (3425)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Condensation Inside Headlights
MODELS: All
Situation: Customers have complained of headlights misting over on the inside in extreme weather conditions.
Cause: The headlight housings are made mostly of plastics that allow moisture to diffuse through them. When these plastics become warm,
they give off moisture again (not just outward, but also inward). The lens of the ellipsoid principle headlights is heated in the
middle by the bulb, whereas the outer part of the lens is virtually at ambient temperature due to the cooling effect of the airflow.
This can lead to condensation forming on the cold parts of the lens. There is nothing wrong with a thin film of condensation which
temporarily covers the inside of the lens. For this very reason, headlights are not completely airtight.
Outline of systems in use:
There are ventilated and aerated headlights:
[email protected]
362
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 884
The following headlights are ventilated:
High beam headlights: E30, E32, E34

Low beam headlights: E30 up to 09/87
Front fog lights: E30 from 09/87, E36
Aerated headlights include:
Low beam headlights: E30 from 09/87, E32, E34

Headlights: E31, E36 (figure)
Lighting strip: E31
Flashing turn indicators: E31, E32, E34, E36
The aeration openings are so positioned that there is a deliberate movement of air due to differential pressure inside the headlight.
This means that when a lens is misted over, it clears again.
Example
The car is driven in extremely humid conditions (rain, fog) at a low ambient temperature. It is then driven in stop-and-go traffic or parked.
Result
The headlight housing is warmed from behind due to the heat given off by the engine. The air inside the headlight is unable to take any more
moisture so it condenses on the colder lens.
At a relative humidity of 60%, a temperature difference of 18~ F is sufficient to cause the lens to mist over; at 80% relative humidity, a difference
of just 9~ F is sufficient.
The lenses clear again depending on how the weather (humidity) changes when:
[email protected]
363
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 885
- the vehicle is parked and the engine has cooled off;

- the car is driven with no lights on (approx. 10 - 100 miles); or
- the low or high beam headlights are switched on for several minutes.
Larger droplets on the inside of the lens or water of more than a depth of 2 mm in the bottom of the headlights casing indicate that the headlight is
no longer watertight. The most common cause is damage to the headlight lens caused by tire-thrown rocks.
Note: Headlights with lenses which are only slightly misted over do not leak and there is no reason to replace them.
Service Intervall Indicator II - Installation

Group 62
Instruments
Bulletin Number
62 04 89 (1913)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 62 04 89 (1913) dated November 1989. It includes updated information regarding a new
activation switch. Please remove and discard S.I. 62 04 89 (1913) dated November 1989 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Service Interval Indicator II (7 LED'S)
MODELS:
All E23, E24, E28, and E30 vehicles so equipped.
The improved Service Interval Indicator processor/circuit boards (utilizing lithium buffer batteries and activation switch) are the only such boards
currently stocked by the Parts Distribution Centers. Before installation of the circuit board into the cluster housing, the activation switch (contact
bridge) must be installed in the "ON" position (see drawings) to activate the Service Interval Indicator. Please note that the boards for E30 vehicles
are of two types, and that the "ON" position of the switch varies from one type to the other. Refer to the drawings.
(E30: P/N 62 11 1 394 248)
The installation of the activation switch for P/N 62 11 1 385 094 (for E23, E24, and E28 vehicles) is unchanged, as it simply connects two pins on
[email protected]
364
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 886
the board.
Warranty Status:
Information only.
Brake Light Switch - Revised

Group 61
Electrical
Bulletin Number
61 03 94 (4032)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1994
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Brake Light Switch
MODELS:
3 Series (E30) (E36); 5 Series (E34); 7 Series (E32); 8 Series (E31)
Situation:
The previous mechanical brake light switch (BLS) and clutch-pedal switches have been superseded by a new generation (with quiet pick-up
contacts). Production cars of all relevant models have gradually been converted.
Only new switches will be supplied as replacement items in the future.
Procedure:
The new switches are compatible, and can be installed as shown in the table below (see "Parts").
Important:
On the following models, differences in pedal return force may cause difficulties (brake lights stay on) unless the correct brake light switch is
installed when repairs are performed as described below:
Parts:
Brake Light Switch
Old New
P/N 61 31 1 378 207 P/N 61 31 8 360 420
Brake Light and Test Switch
Old New
P/N 61 31 1 382 385 P/N 61 31 8 360 417
Clutch-pedal Switch
Old New
P/N 61 31 1 378 210 P/N 61 31 8 360 421
[email protected]
365
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 887
Windshield Wipers - Erratic Operation

Group 61
Electrical System
Bulletin Number
61 13 91 (3401)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Erratic Windshield Wiper Operation
MODELS: 3 Series (E30)
Situation: Windshield wiping/washing functions may operate intermittently.
Cause: Poor contact at the ground wire for the wiper switch. E30 vehicles equipped with cruise control may exhibit this complaint more
frequently, as the ground connection is at a screw (1) that secures both the wiper switch and the cruise control switch.
Correction: If impaired wiper/washer function is due to a poor ground at this point, move the ground wire and attach it to the lower left-hand
screw (2), so that it is grounded with the ground wire from the turn signal switch.
Note: E30 vehicles produced after late June 1991 have the wiper switch ground wire attached to the upper screw of the wiper (to
a point on the steering lock) and so should not exhibit this complaint. Because this screw is not readily accessible, the
repair for vehicles with the wiper switch ground at the lower right-hand screw is to move the ground wire to the lower
lefthand screw (as described).
Warranty
Information: Parts and labor for repositioning the ground wire are reimbursable under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited
Warranty.
[email protected]
366
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 888
Defect code: 61 31 04 79 00
Main Work Associated Work
Labor operation: 00 50 348 00 50 914
Labor allowance: 4 FRU 2 FRU
Additional labor for airbag
NOTE: The following explanations will spell out the correct use of the work times.
Main Work: Use this time when the only repair performed is the listed warranty repair.
OR
Associated Work: Use this time when other repairs or services are performed along with the listed warranty repair.
Under no circumstances should both work times be claimed. Attempts to claim both times will result in an unnecessary delay in claim
processing and payment.
Brakes - ABS, ASC, and ASC + T Malfunctions

Group 34
Brakes
Bulletin Number
34 01 92 (3490)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: ABS, ASC, and ASC + T Malfunctions Caused by Non-Approved Wheels and Tires
MODELS: All So Equipped
General
Information:
All BMWs equipped with slip-control systems (ABS, ASC, or ASC + T) utilize four wheel-speed sensors which monitor individual wheel rates of
rotation with a high degree of accuracy. The system's control unit processes these individual inputs and computes a vehicle speed, and is thereby
able to detect individual wheel speed variations from the computed speed.
If these inputs vary from each other by a certain amount, the control unit is unable to reliably perform its calculations ("plausibility" fault), and
takes itself off-line as a safety precaution ("Fail-Safe").
If a complaint is received of any of these systems (ABS, ASC, or ASC +T) being inoperative, intermittently inoperative, or illuminating the
warning lamp, verify that the vehicle is equipped with BMW-approved wheels and tires.
If it is not, DO NOT proceed with further diagnosis until the wheels and tires are replaced with original equipment (or BMW-approved) wheels and
tires.
BMW of North America cannot test all combinations of aftermarket wheels and tires for compatibility with these systems. Therefore, ABS, ASC,
and ASC + T cannot be expected to perform as designed unless BMW-approved wheels and tires are installed on the vehicle.
Please ensure that all service and sales personnel in your dealership are aware of the potential problems that can be caused by the installation of
non-BMW-approved wheels and tires. Further, responsibility for correction of these problems must be borne by the installer of the
non-BMW-approved items which caused the problem.
Tools - ABS/ASC Diagnostic Tool

[email protected]
367
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 889
Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 33 92 (3693)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 04 33 92 (3693) dated December 1992. Please remove and discard S.I. 04 33 92 (3693) dated
December 1992 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Situation:
A new BMW Special Tool has been developed that allows the technician to diagnose ABS/ASC faults in cars with non-diagnosable control
modules through the data link. For a complete list of affected cars see Service Information 34 05 92 (3692).
The ABS/ASC Tester is, and will remain the only approved method to test for faults in non-diagnosable ABS and ASC Control Modules.
Therefore, in the interest of improved customer satisfaction and warranty reduction of control modules that have been replaced incorrectly, the
ABS/ASC Tester is a mandatory tool.
This tool will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased through your PDC.
Features and Advantages of the ABS/ASC Tester
^ Stores faults in memory.
^ Component status.
^ Component activation
^ A special test diskette is included that is matched to the tester making the diagnosis of sporadic faults possible.
^ Considerably shorter function test.
^ 35 pin ABS and 55 pin ABS/ASC system can be tested.
^ Tester can be mounted and the car road tested. The tester allows for fault storage and evaluation.
^ The ABS/ASC Tester has been produced with future evaluation systems in mind. It is not limited to the current service tester.
^ When Version 3.0 MoDiC Diagnostic Software is replaced, the ABS/ASC Tester can be used in conjunction with the MoDiC.
ABS/ASC Tester Tips
^ In cars where the ABS/ASC Control Module is located in the E-Box, remove the car's standard control module and replace it with the test
module and adapter. This will allow you to close the engine's hood for test drive purposes.
^ Before you turn the ignition off, page back (up arrow) as far as you can. If this is not performed, "Data Transmission Disturbed" will be
displayed and you will have to reboot the service tester in order to continue.
^ Please be advised of the following error in the provided software. The error in no way adversely affects the diagnostic capabilities of the ABS/
[email protected]
368
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 890
ASC Tester.
Number two (2) on the main menu, "Status Request," will bring you into two input signal screens. The first screen is for pulse gears with 48
teeth. At the bottom of this screen it says "Pulse Gears, 48 Teeth." This phrase should be on the next page.
^ Read the instruction book completely before using the tester.
^ Be sure to erase the fault memory of the Test Module before starting to perform diagnostics. The person that used the tool before you may have
left faults in its memory.
Brakes - Diagnostic Capability of Slip Control Systems

Group 34
Brakes
Bulletin Number
34 05 92 (3692)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Diagnostic Capability of Slip Control Systems (ABS, ASC and ASC+T)
MODELS:
All so equipped
Situation:
Slip control systems on BMW automobiles are of three types:
ABS - Antilock Braking System

ASC - Automatic Stability Control
ASC+T - Automatic Stability Control + Traction Control
A new range of systems with diagnostic capability are being provided for slip control systems (ABS, ASC and ASC+T) which have until now only
been equipped with a limited number of diagnostic functions. These systems have differing self-diagnostic capabilities; therefore, the outline
summarizes these varied diagnostic functions. All information contained in current Repair Manual Microfiche and in current Diagnostic Procedures
Manuals remains valid.
Notes:
1. A new ABS/ASC test instrument (P/N 90 88 6 345 110) has been developed that allows fault-memory-supported troubleshooting for vehicles
which have been equipped with an incomplete self-diagnostic system, or with no self-diagnostic system at all.
2. If a vehicle is test driven with the ABS/ASC tester connected, it must be driven in a safe fashion, such that no adverse effects on handling or
stopping distances would occur with ABS/ASC/ASC+T control systems switched off.
3. The maximum permitted speed when carrying out test drives with the ABS/ASC tester connected to E23, E24 and E28 vehicles is 30 mph.
4. After any repairs are performed on any electrical or hydraulic components of the brake control system, the brake system must be checked for
proper functioning.
5. When warranty repairs are performed, a copy of the diagnostic printout must be attached to the warranty repair order and a copy must be
attached to the Warranty Parts Tag for all parts returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center. This also applies to testing performed with the
ABS/ASC tester.
Warranty Status:
Information only.
[email protected]
369
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 891
ABS/ASC Tester Applications
New Tool - Accumulator Wrench

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 32 92 (3688)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Situation:
The special tool is in stock and may be purchased through your PDC.
Body - Structural Adhesives

Group 41
[email protected]
370
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 892
Body
Bulletin Number
41 01 95 (4150)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1995
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Structural Adhesives
MODELS:
All
Situation:
In the "General Information About Body Repair" sections of the repair manuals, an adhesive is referenced under special tool number 510 032. This
adhesive is not available in the U.S.
An alternative to this adhesive has been tested and approved, and is available from 3M. The product is DP420 Epoxy Adhesive, and is used in
conjunction with the 3M EPX applicator.
To obtain this product, contact your local 3M office, and ask for the Industrial Tape and Specialities Division. A list of the 3M branch offices are
provided below for your convenience.
Alaska Anchorage (907) 522-5200

California Los Angeles (213) 726-6300
Georgia Atlanta (404) 447-7000
Hawaii Honolulu (808) 422-2721
Michigan Southfield (810) 827-2450
New Jersey West Caldwell (201) 575-2000
Texas Dallas (214) 324-8100
Technical Service Bulletin # 410104R Date: 050401
Body - Structural Repair Requirements

SI B41 01 04
Body
April 2005
Aftersales
SUBJECT
Structural Repair Requirements
MODEL
All except E52-Z8 and Alpina
SITUATION
All BMW models use advanced materials and fastening technologies. Materials such as High Strength Steels and Weld Bonding attachment
methods require the use of unique repair procedures, processes, and tools.
PROCEDURE
BMW models have specific repair procedures, and tight tolerances. BMW requires the use of an approved bench repair and measuring system when
repairing any type of damage to the structure of a BMW vehicle.
BMW defines the structure of a vehicle as all the components that comprise the body shell that are weld-bonded, rivet-bonded or welded on.
Currently the only approved bench repair systems are:
^ CarBench
^ Manta, Piranha, Muraena, or Octopus benches along with approved anchoring systems.
^ Celette
[email protected]
371
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 893
^ Dedicated bench system, or the NAJA electronic measuring system with universal fixture.
^ Car-O-Liner
^ Bench system used with the Car-O-Flex universal fixture system, B66 or B76-B77 side support, in conjunction with the Car-O-Liner
electronic measuring system.
Car Bench, Celette and Car-O-Liner work closely with BMW in designing and building fixtures and specifications, which not only provide for
accurate component location, but also provide safe and proper anchoring of the vehicle.
This equipment can be purchased through the BMW Equipment Program, which offers special pricing and payment/financing options.
For more information on the Equipment Purchase Program call: 1-888-222-7997
Technical Service Bulletin # I34901101 Date: 901101
Non-Approved Accessories - May Cause Malfunctions

11/90 I-34
SUBJECT: INSTALLATION OF NON-APPROVED ACCESSORIES/COMPONENTS
Last November a Service Information bulletin was issued to all Dealer Principals regarding the listed subject. Due to the importance of this matter, I
am herewith re-issuing the content of the bulletin and urge you to take the time to thoroughly read this information.
A point of most concern to BMW of North America, Inc. ("BMW NA") is the increasing number of customer complaints regarding the unusual
malfunction of their vehicle or a component in the vehicle.
Our investigation into these complaints have revealed that the installation of non-approved accessories/components have contributed to the majority
of these complaints.
As you are aware, automobiles produced nowadays have become highly sophisticated. The various components, both electrical and mechanical
(i.e., suspension and steering), that make up the entire vehicle have been integrated and designed to work collectively.
[email protected]
372
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 894
That is why installation of non-approved accessories and/or modifications to existing components in the vehicle may have adverse effects on its
operation and safety.
In the case of electrical accessories, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors and telephones, extensive damage to the vehicle's wiring
harness may occur when these accessories are improperly installed. The damage may occur when poor connections are made for their power and
ground leads without any concern for the circuit being tapped. Even the routing and placement of these accessories and harnesses in the vehicle can
effect other components due to certain electromagnetic interference. Examples of these effects are: whining heard through the sound system, a dead
battery and unusual/sporadic operation of electrical systems found on the vehicle. BMW makes special efforts to seal the vehicle against water from
entering the interior in particular through the firewall. Grommets are specifically designed for this purpose. We have found cases where grommets
have been perforated due to the aftermarket installations allowing the water to freely drip onto electrical connectors inside the car.
Modifications to the body structure of the vehicle are also of great concern since the structural integrity and crash worthiness can be greatly
affected. An example of this is the installation of speakers onto non-approved speaker openings. Body panels are extensively modified and cut to
allow for their installation.
We must also strongly advise against modifications to the suspension. Typical modifications are: springs, shocks, wheels and tires. Installation of
such items which are not BMW approved can have a direct effect on the vehicle road-worthiness and response in evasive situations.
It is our responsibility as an automobile importer to notify you, as a dealer of our product, that such non-approved installations/modifications can
place the burden of the vehicle's worthiness and safety upon you. In addition, you must be made aware that such nonapproved modifications and
installations may effect the validity of the BMW Warranty and will be contrary to your obligations under the Dealer Agreement.
We feel that our current offering of accessories meets the needs of our customers. New products are continuously evaluated to meet the needs of
our customers and their effects on the vehicle.
We ask that you further discuss this matter with the Sales and Service personnel within your dealership so that they are aware of all of the factors
involved with such installations.
BMW Individual Vehicles

Group 51
Body Equipment
Bulletin Number
51 06 94 (4039)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1994
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
BMW Individual Vehicles
MODELS:
All
[email protected]
373
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 895
Situation:
Vehicles produced to customer specifications under the BMW Individual program can have differences in paint, body equipment, and chassis
equipment. In order to identify these vehicles, a label will be attached in the engine compartment as illustrated.
[email protected]
374
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 896
Examples:
Warranty Status:
Information only.
Electrical System - Non Approved Aftermarket Accessories

Group 61
Electrical System
Bulletin Number
61 02 92 (3493)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1992
[email protected]
375
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 897
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Non-Approved Electrical Accessories
MODELS: All
General
Information:
With the increased sophistication of electronically controlled systems on today's BMWs, and with the increasingly interconnected nature of these
systems, the potential for interference or incompatibility problems between these systems and non-approved electrical accessories is markedly
increased.
Recently, numerous reports have been received of lengthy and expensive troubleshooting of systems which revealed that the malfunctions were the
result of installation of aftermarket non-approved accessories and which interfered with an otherwise normally operating system.
From a standpoint of logistics and economics, it is obvious that BMW cannot test every aftermarket electronic accessory that could be fitted to our
vehicles. Consequently, only BMW-approved accessories (such as radios, CD changes, alarms, cellular telephones, etc.) should be installed, as they
have been developed to be compatible and interference-free with all BMW electronically controlled systems.
In the event of customer electrically-related complaints which are:
- Repetitive
- Intermittent
- Highly unusual
- Not easily resolved by existing diagnostic procedures
... all non-approved electrical equipment (e.g., telephone, radar detector, stereo equipment, alarm, etc.) should be disconnected from the vehicle's
electrical system (but not dismounted or removed).
The diagnostic procedures, specified voltage and resistance readings, and troubleshooting instructions published by BMW assume that the vehicle
is in 100% stock condition.
If a complaint is diagnosed as being caused by a non-approved accessory, diagnosis work time and subsequent repair expenses are not covered by
the BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
SRS (Air Bag System) - Checking

Group 72
Equipment and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
72 04 93 (3822)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 32 01 91 (3261) dated June 1991.
Please remove and discard S.I. 32 01 91 (3261) dated June 1991 from your S.I. binder. Note that this bulletin has been moved to Group 72.
SUBJECT:
Checking Airbag Systems (SRS)
MODELS:
All
Situation:
Previously, BMW maintenance instructions required a check of the SRS system every three years. BMW has re-evaluated this requirement.
The electrical components of the SRS are checked by the diagnostic circuits of the SRS control module any time the ignition switch is turned on.
Any electrical malfunctions are indicated by the warning light in the active check control display, or the instrument cluster on later vehicles. All of
the SRS systems are self-diagnosing, and store faults in control module memory.
[email protected]
376
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 898
These faults can be retrieved using the BMW Service Tester or MoDiC.
(Refer to S.I. 72 02 91 (3338) concerning this procedure for E30 and E24 vehicles.)
Correction:
Checking the SRS warning light and reading out the diagnostic system is part of every inspection, as is the readout of fault code memories of all
other diagnosable control modules.
No further inspection is necessary on the SRS.
ANY DAMAGED SRS PARTS (such as torn covers on modules or other obvious damage) MUST BE REPLACED. Refer to Repair Manual group
32 for details.
Note:
The SRS information label in the glovebox will be removed for the next model year. Vehicles with front passenger airbag systems already carry
labels with the following additional information:
^ Do not place a child restraint system in the front passenger seat.
^ Children should always ride in the rear seat.
^ All occupants should wear safety belts at all times.
^ See Owners Manual for more information.
As the SRS information label in the glovebox is no longer necessary, it will (from 9/93 production onward) be removed.
On vehicles produced before 9/93, the glovebox SRS label should be peeled off and discarded the next time the vehicle is in for service.
Tools - SRS Diagnostics Cable Adapter

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 29 91 (3446)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: SRS Diagnostics
MODELS: E24/E30 (equipped with Siemens SRS Control Units)
Situation: To assist in the diagnostic procedure outlined in Service Information bulletin 72 02 91 (3338), a special cable adaptor for the
BMW Service Tester will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Every BMW dealer will be sent one SD 91-020
SRS Diagnostic Cable, free of charge.
SRS Diagnostic Cable Item No. SD 91 - 020 Introductory Price = $35.00
Additional SRS Diagnostic Cables may be ordered from the Product Engineering Group. A pre-printed order form is enclosed for
your convenience.
SRS - Diagnostic Cables

Group 72
Equipment and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
72 02 91 (3338)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1994
[email protected]
377
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 899
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes orange S.I. 72 02 91 (3338) dated August 1991, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded. Changes are shown with asterisks.
SUBJECT:
SRS Diagnostics
MODELS:
E30 and E24 (equipped with Siemens SRS Control Module)
Situation:
The BMW Service Tester can be used to call up fault codes via the RxD and TxD lines on the control module. This will provide a convenient and
reliable method for testing and diagnosis, as well as eliminate any confusion as to the interpretation of flash codes.
As the vehicle wiring harness was not equipped with TxD and RxD leads connecting the SRS control module and the Diagnostic Connector, the
special tool/procedure below must be followed in order to connect diagnostic equipment to the SRS control module on the affected vehicles. This
procedure allows fault codes to be recalled/cancelled.
Procedure:
**Using the special cable connector (SD # 91-020)**, connect the Service Tester Diagnostic cable to the SRS control module side of C250 (E24),
C280 ('92 E30 Convertible), or C240 (E30) as appropriate. Note that jumper leads contained in the BMW Connector Test Kit (P/N 88 88 6 900
322) can be used if the SD # 91-020 adapter is not available. [Each Dealer was sent one adapter. Refer to S.I. 04 29 91 (3446).] Use the chart below
and the illustration in this bulletin as a guide to the connections.
Diagnostic Cable SRS Connector
E24 Pin # 15 (RxD) C250 Pin # 6 (WT/YL)

Pin # 20 (TxD) C250 Pin # 2 (WT/VI)
Pin # 19 (Ground) Good Vehicle Ground
**E30 '92 Pin # 15 (RxD) C280 Pin # 6 (WT/BK)

Convertible Pin # 20 (TxD) C280 Pin # 7 (WT/VI)
Pin # 19 (Ground) Good Vehicle Ground
E30 Pin # 15 (TxD) C240 Pin # 6 (WT/YL)

Pin # 20 (TxD) C240 Pin # 2 (WT/VI)
Pin # 19 (Ground) Good Vehicle Ground**
Once the proper connections are made, the control module can be eyed using the Service Tester. **The new DIS Tester does not support this
procedure at this time.**
Illustration shows connections between Diagnostic Cable on BMW Service Tester and SRS control module in vehicle. Refer to chart for detailed
description of connector Pin numbers.
[email protected]
378
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 900
New Special Tool - MoDic(R) Replacement Cable
GROUP 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 28 94 (4128)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1995
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New Special Tool
MODELS:
All
SITUATION:
The MoDiC in its current configuration will not perform diagnostics on cars equipped with OBD II systems (On Board Diagnostics). In particular,
it will not diagnose DME, EML and EGS.
SOLUTION:
A MoDiC replacement cable has been developed which will allow MoDiC diagnosis and programming on both OBD II equipped and earlier
production vehicles. This cable will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
Replacement MoDiC Cable

P/N 81 12 9 428 912
Please read the cable replacement instructions before you change the cable.
The new style cord may be easily recognized because of its utilization of 7 pins instead of 6 pins at the diagnostic connector.
MODIC REPLACEMENT CABLE INSTRUCTIONS - CABLE REMOVAL
1. Unscrew the 4 battery cover screws and remove the cover.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the remaining 5 rear cover screws.
3. Unscrew and remove the strain relief on the Diagnostic Cable.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the tiny washers into the MoDiC!
4. Unplug the blue 2 pin connector (power lead from the battery).
5. Unplug the green diagnostic connector and carefully remove cable.
CABLE REPLACEMENT
Reverse the above procedure.
Note:
Please be careful when plugging in the green connector (on the diagnostic cord). Do not force it. If it will not go on easily, it is not aligned
properly.Technical Service Bulletin # 080496 Date: 961001

Group 08
MODIC
Bulletin Number
08 04 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1996
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 08 04 96 dated June 1996 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I. binder.
[email protected]
379
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 901
SUBJECT:
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
A revised and expanded version of the MODIC Programming Software has been developed. With the release of P8.0 MODIC Software, Version
P7.2 Programming Software has become invalid.
Program Highlights
^ MODIC software version P8.0 (programming/encoding) will allow DME variant coding of the following engine control module versions: DME
M1.1; M1.2; M1.3; M1.7, M1.7.2.
M3.1; M3.3.1; M3.3; M5.2 (M73).

Module DME
M5.2 318,Z3 M44

M5.2 540i,740i,840i M62
MS41.1 328i,528i M52
MS41.2 M3 S52/B32
For complete flash programming details refer to service information 12 05 96.
Applicable Service Actions Addressed by P 8.0
Parts Information

P/N 01 11 9 787 861
Information Binder under bulletin I-24 dated 4/95.
[email protected]
380
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 902
Center.
Engine Control Module Flash Programming Features

^ Flash programming is the electronic deletion and reprogramming of data and programs in the engine control module. Flash programmable
control modules can be programmed up to 13 times.
^ PROM replacement is not possible. Flash programming will automatically delete data, reprogram new data and align the engine control module
with the EWS control module.
required part numbers are located on the label of the defective engine control. The label is located on the top cover.
^ After flash programming is complete adaptation values must be cleared. P8.0 will automatically guide the technician through this procedure.
^ Adaptation of the engine control module will begin to take place automatically during the test ride.
^ "Quick clearing" of all control modules must be performed after flash programming of the engine control module is complete. When the data is
erased from the engine control module EEPROM (an EEPROM is an electrically erasable PROM) communication is temporarily interrupted
with control modules that normally communicate with the engine control module (example: AGS,MID). This interruption can result in the
setting of erroneous faults.
be discontinued. If necessary the BMW battery charger(P/N 88 88 7 000 005) may be connected before programming. Peaks in voltage caused by
Menu Access
Select 3-DME Programming

Select 2-Exchange control module
Select 1-Determine basic control module
Select 2-Program basic control module
The menu for P8.0 has 5 options. They are as follows:
1. "Determine Customer Service Measures"
This step is for special program modification updates that do not require an EPROM replacement (example M3.3.1). When activated, the
program will automatically determine whether the vehicle it is connected to is eligible for a modification. If eligible, the modification will be
displayed and can be activated by selecting the "Y" button. If the vehicle is not eligible, the program will display "No Programming Data
Available for this SG Version".
Note:
Please disregard any Service Campaign numbers that may be displayed in the software. The control module may only be updated one (1) time.
2. "Exchange Control Module"
1. Determine and program a replacement basic control module. This affects DME 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.3, 5.2 (M73) only. Under no circumstances
or
2. Reprogram a Flash programmable control module. Refer to "Flash Programming Features" for complete flash programming information (SI
12 05 96).
Step 1 Determining the basic control module.
Note:
[email protected]
381
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 903
displayed.
pre-programmed control module must be installed.
3. "Exchange EPROM"
This step is used to determine and program a programmable EPROM that is to be installed for DME 3.1 and 3.3 only. The programming procedure
is divided into 2 steps.
necessary for determining a replacement control module EPROM from the defective control module and will display the acceptable replacement
part number(s) which need to be installed in that vehicle.
The MODIC programs the newly installed EPROM with the aid of the data derived in step 1. The new control module label can be printed out by
the MODIC station printer, or completed by hand. The MODIC programs the basic control module with the latest data.
4. "Adjustment EWS - DME Vehicles From 1/95"
NOTE:
1. The DME control module has been replaced with a pre-programmed DME control module or
2. After programming a basic programmable control module or a replacement EPROM, the message "Programming complete-EWS

5. "Clear Adaptation Values"
^ This step is only used after an engine control module has been flash programmed.
^ The engine control module will temporarily operate on internally programmed default values.
^ Adaptation is an ongoing process in the Engine Control Module.
^ The default values may occasionally lead to temporary rough running characteristics. Rough running characteristics are a normal part of
the initial adaptation process.
Menu Access
Select 5 "Clear adaptation values"
Select "Y"
[email protected]
382
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 904
DISKETTE CONTENTS

How to Load V8.0 Software With the Modic Station
on the right).
Special Note:
When the MODIC is attached to a car and the main menu is displayed the "C" may be pressed to bring you to an "erase" menu. You erase a
program by simply pressing the number and.
Y or N".
Label Printing
During programming:
4. The MODIC must not be disconnectedTechnical Service Bulletin # 080396 Date: 960401
Undefined MoDic(R) Software

Bulletin #: 08 03 96
[email protected]
383
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 905
Date: April 1996
System: MODIC
Version: C7.0 coding ZCS
Model: All
Control Module: See list
Subject:
Undefined MODIC Software
Situation:
This IDC supersedes IDC 08 03 96 (V.15.0 ZCS Coding) dated March 1996. Please remove and discard 08 03 96 dated March 1996 from your
binder.
Program Highlights
^ With the introduction of C7.0 ZCS software a new numbering system takes effect. Outlined below are the details of the change.
1. The change is applicable for all MODIC and DIS software.
2. All future software versions of diagnostic and programming software will start at a base number of 7.x.
3. To easily distinguish between the different types of software (diagnostic, coding, programming) a letter will precede the version number.
Diagnostic software = D7.x

Coding software = C7.x
Programming software = P7.x
DIS CD = CD7.x
4. MODIC software (MODIC station and DIS download) will contain the same information as long as the version number is the same. Example:
C7.0 MODIC station software

and
C7.0 MODIC download software (from DIS)
5. MODIC software diskettes will have color coded labels for easy identification. The color codes will be as follows.
Diagnostic -- blue
Coding -- white
Programming -- green
^ Only codable control modules (on the vehicle in question) are displayed on the MODIC screen. The Central Coding Key determines which
control modules are codable.
conversion), write the new Central Coding Key on a label. Affix the label to the appropriate vehicle Central Coding Key sticker location.
Place the new label next to the old label. Cross out the old label. Label location -
^ After replacement the following control modules require coding with C7.0. When coding is complete check the control modules fault
memory and erase any faults present.
SERIES CONTROL MODULE REMARKS
E31 EML IIIs, PWG M73

EKM/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GM (ZKEII)
LKM
EWS II FROM 1/95
DWA II, DWA IV
AIRBAG FROM 9/93
[email protected]
384
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 906
LSM
ASC/DSC FROM 9/93
EDC III, EDC III +
E32 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DWA III, DWA IV
LSM
EDC III, EDC III +

ZVM II
EWS FROM 1/95
DWA III, DWA IV
AIRBAG
LSM
IHR, IHKR2, IHKR3
ABS/ASC V FROM 9/93
EDC III, EDC III +

ZVM II, GME (ZKE IV)
BC V
BC (E36 COMPACT)
EWS FROM 1/95
AIRBAG FROM 9/93
CVM
GR II FROM 9/94
IHKA, IHKR
ASC+T FROM 10/91
E38 EML IIIS, PWG M73

IKE
GM (ZKE III)
CCM
LM/LCM
EWS FROM 1/95
AIRBAG
GR II
IHKA, IHKR
ABS/ASC V
EDC III +
E39 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER/IKE

GM (ZKE III)
LCM
EWS
AIRBAG
GR II
IHKA
ABS/ASC V
EDCIV
[email protected]
385
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 907
[email protected]
386
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 908
Overview of Conversions
DISKETTE CONTENTS

2. Press 2 - Load diskette
3. Press 1 coding
right).
Special Note:
Attach the MODIC to a car and press the "C" to erase parts of the loaded program. You erase a program by simply pressing the number.
9. If you attempt to load a program and there is insufficient memory for it, the MoDiC will display "Memory Insufficient. Do you want to erase
Y or N".
Label Printing
[email protected]
387
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 909
Used in conjunction with the MoDiC Station (menu # 3, printing) coding labels may be printed out with the Central Coding Key. The MoDiC will
Order extra labels may be purchased through your PDC under P/N 81 22 9 407 713.
Parts Information
Software Version C7.0 A/B/C

P/N 01 11 9 788 251
Return any defective diskettes to BMW NA via the BMW Tool Warranty. Details of the program can be found in your Parts Information Binder
under bulletin I-24 dated 4/95.
This software will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Order additional copies through your Parts Distribution Center.
Service Tester - Revised and Expanded Software

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
Woodcliff Lake, NJ July 1990
Service Engineering
This Advance Dealer Bulletin (orange) supersedes S.I. 00 15 89 (1895) dated January
1990. Please remove and discard S.I. 00 15 89 (1895) dated January 1990 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT: BMW Service Tester Diskette Version 8.0 A&B
MODELS: All Equipped wah Diagnostic Link (except E31)
Situation: A revised and expanded version of the BMW Service tester software has been developed. With the release of Version 8.0,
all prior versions are invalid.
[email protected]
388
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 910
Version 8.0 Main Menu
Parts
Information: Copies of diskette version 8.0 will be delivered to you by your District Service Manager.
Important Program Additions

In the past three years, the number of diagnostic-capable control units has increased from six to thirty, making a reorganization of diagnostics
necessary.
To facilitate this, BMW has made all new programs (starting with this version) consistent in the following areas:
- CONSTRUCTION
- PROGRAM FEATURES
- HEADINGS
Refer to the following example:

All changes in the diagnostic programs pertain only to new programs. Existing programs are unchanged.
Note: The format of the diagnosing program is selected by the tester according to the identification of the control unit being diagnosed. For
example, different test plans are selected for DME M1.1 and M1.3. The new format incorporated into Version 8.0 will only be used when
a control unit is encountered that uses a new diagnosing program.
The following pages will highlight the important features of the new format.
[email protected]
389
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 911
Control Unit Survey
[email protected]
390
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 912
- The numbers of the individual control units have been reallocated

- From 1 - 9: Drive control units
- From 10 - 49: Body electronics
- As of 50: Running - gear control systems
- All other functions remain the same.
Attention! The highlighting of numbers means that only these numbers can be selected. Faults stored in the memory are displayed as before during
the quick test by highlighting the entire text.
NEW: In addition, the asterisk is turned into an "F", so as to make it possible to display "Fault stored" on the printout.
[email protected]
391
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 913
2 = Status Requests
[email protected]
392
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 914
Compilation of the status extract list:
- Select status request desired and confirm by pressing acknowledgement key.
- An asterisk appears in front of the number as an identifier.
- Repeated selection of this number clears the identifier.
- Up to 10 status requests can be compiled as desired in this way.
- The extract list can be extended or shortened.
- Call up the status extract list by pressing: V
- Clear the status extract list by pressing CE.
3 = Activate Components
- Once the highlighted number has been-selected and the acknowledgement key pressed, the component is activated by the control unit.
- Activation is cancelled by pressing the up arrow.
4 = Test Sequence - Example From Instrument Cluster
[email protected]
393
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 915
- A test sequence test whether parts of the system are operating correctly. In the case of a fault, notes on detailed troubleshooting appear.
- Not all diagnostic programs have the test sequence integrated, but they will be extended in this respect in future versions.
Note:
There is a fault if the condition shown on the screen (= condition detected by the control unit) differs from the actual condition.
Example: ON is shown for terminal 15, but the vehicle's ignition is switched off (fault: short circuit to positive).
5 = Special Functions - Example From Instrument Cluster
- Stored under Special functions are additional possibilities for diagnosis as well as special functions offered by the control unit.
6 = Output Test Code
[email protected]
394
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 916
- The test code aids quality assurance and is also the basis for constant improvement of the diagnosis programs.
- To keep the duration of the printout as short as possible, the control unit data are not output in plain test as in "Read fault memory", but
merely as numerical values.
- With new programs, a test code is no longer printed out when the ID page is printed out.
- The "Test code" printout must be enclosed with the warranty claim.
9 = Clear Fault Memory
- This function clears all the fault memories in the control unit.
Note: All defective diskettes should be returned to BMW NA via the BMW Tool Limited Warranty. Details of the program can be
found in your Parts Information binder under Dealer Bulletin 1-24.
MoDic(R) - Has Become A Mandatory Tool

[email protected]
395
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 917
Figure 1
SUBJECT: Mobile Diagnostic Computer (MODIC)
Situation: With the introduction of new models this fall and the increased usage of basic control units (refer to your Parts microfiche for
basic control unit part numbers and S.I. 13 02 90 (3009) for a quick cross reference of control unit codes) the BMW MODIC
has become a mandatory tool.
Complimenting the MODIC's efficient encoding capabilities is the enormously handy diagnostic feature. The unit's size and
simple operation (see BMW MODIC software S.I. 00 37 89 (1990)) make it a real plus to not only the technicians but also
the Service Advisors.
As explained in S.I. 13 02 90 (3009) the MODIC can be used as a parts inventory saving device. DME control units are
supplied now in a "basic" form. A basic control unit has the variant code FF01. This means that a basic control unit now has
the ability to be used in several different applications (see Figure 1) the end result being fewer control units to stock. Basic
control unfts are grouped according to:
1. Engine family
2. Engine size
3. BMW hardware number
4. Bosch hardware number
Important: Please be reminded that it is impossible to change the engine family or size through variant code
changing.
The variant code Is only used to precisely match the control unit hardware with other variables such as
vehicle type, market, equipment and so forth. Intentional miscoding will not serve any useful purpose and
may result In poor engine performance or engine damage.
Software for the MODIC is downloaded through your BMW 2013 Service tester. The MODIC contains 2 AA batteries (in the handle) that retain
the Software (see S.I. 00 37 89 (1990) for downloading instructions). The MODIC software is totally independent of the 2013 software and the two
cannot be interchanged. MODIC software will however be updated in the same manner as the 2013 software via a Service Bulletin and the
Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
[email protected]
396
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 918
To order a MODIC simply fill out the attached order form and send it to the indicated address.
BMW Mobile Diagnostic Computer (MODIC) Price = $2950.00
Special
Note: The above price can only be guaranteed through December 31, 1990.
The following spare parts are available through the Parts Distribution Centers:
Part Number Description
81 12 9 428 912 - Coiled cable with 20 pin plug

81 12 9 428 913 - RS232 download cable
[email protected]
397
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 919
Tools - New 88 Pin Universal Adapter
Woodcliff Lake, NJ September 1990 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: 88 Pin Universal Adapter
Situation: Due to the increased number of connectors on some control units (i.e. 88 Pin-M42 1.7 Motronic) a new universal adapter has
been developed.
In order to minimize interference (eg., radio frequency interference) the interior of the box is shielded. Therefore, it is vital to
ensure that the ground cable is connected to the vehicle body when the box is in use.
The new 88 Pin adapter also utilizes a Printed Circuit (PC) board inside (in place of a wiring harness). This helps keep the
capacitive and inductive load to a minimum.
Please follow approved diagnostic procedures and use fused jumpers.
This tool will be sent to all BMW automotive dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be
purchased through your Parts Distribution Center.
The following cables will not be sent through the Automatic Tools Shipment Program, but may be purchased through your Parts Distribution
Center, as spare replacement parts for the 88 Pin Universal adapter.
Red Test Cable Black Test Cable

P/N 88 88 6 614 413 P/N 88 88 6 614 412
Introd. Price = $18.03 Introd. Price = $18.03
New Special Tools - Adapter Cables

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 16 91 (3317)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1991
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 04 16 91 (3317) dated August 1991 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
[email protected]
398
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 920
Situation: The following tools are in stock and will be sent out via the BMW Automatic
Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased through your Parts Distribution Center.
Speicial Tools - Test Cables

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 26 91 (3400)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1991
Product Engineering
Situation: The following tools are in stock and will be sent out via the BMW Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may
be purchased through your PDC.
8 Pin Test Cable for 4HP22/24 P/N 88 88 6 246 000 Introductory Price = $140.09
9 Pin Test cable for THMR-1 P/N 88 88 6 246 010 Introductory Price = $151.67
The above cables are to be used in conjunction with the 26 Pin Breakout Box (88 88 6 611 459), to test the resistance value of
the speed sensor, temperature sensor, and solenoid valves on the above transmissions.

[email protected]
399
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 921
MoDic(R) - Loss of Program

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 30 91 (3454)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Loss of Program in MoDiC
Units
Affected: MoDiCs with Serial Numbers 1610 through 3574
Situation: Loss of program may occur in MoDiCs with serial numbers 1610 through 3574. If this occurs, either of two malfunctions
may occur:
- The MoDiC will display the message "No Coding Data Available;" or, - Certain Coding/Diagnosis procedures will not
be possible.
Cause: Memory fault in the MoDiC.
Correction: If a memory fault is suspected in a MoDiC with a serial number in the above range, the following test should be carried out:
1. Connect the MoDiC to vehicle diagnostic connector. If the MoDiC displays the message "low batt" on the first line,
both batteries (located in the handle) must be replaced.
2. Load the software (appropriate to the vehicle being coded or diagnosed) into the MoDiC via the BMW Service Test,
then disconnect the MoDiC from the vehicle's diagnostic connector. Leave the MoDiC disconnected for at least 5
hours (e.g., overnight).
Once this time has passed, reconnect the MoDiC to the vehicle's diagnostic connector and carry out coding diagnosis.
If coding or diagnosis is possible with no malfunctions, then the MoDiC is not affected by this memory fault.
If, on the other hand, coding or diagnosis is not completely possible, or if the MoDiC displays the message "No
Coding Data Available", proceed to step 3.
3. With the MoDiC connected to the diagnostic connector of the vehicle on which coding or diagnosis is to be performed,
load the appropriate software into the MoDiC via the BMW Service Test. Under no circumstances disconnect the
MoDiC from the vehicle's diagnostic connector after the loading procedure is completed.
Repeat the coding or diagnosis (that could not be performed in step 2). If it can now be performed without
malfunction, this confirms a memory fault in the MoDiC.
If you confirm a memory fault in a MoDiC, coding and/or diagnosis can be performed as in step 3 in the event of
malfunction during specific coding or diagnostic procedures.
If coding or diagnosis is not possible using the procedure in step 3, one or more of the following conditions could be
the cause:
- The MoDiC is not loaded with the appropriate coding/diagnostic diskette.
- A control unit is being coded for which the coding data and diskette are not yet available.
- Operator error when using the MoDiC.
Warranty
Status: An Update Program is under development for the affected MoDiCs.
Details of this program will be announced in a separate Service Information Bulletin.
Any dealers experiencing this problem should supply us with written record listing their name, address, dealer code number,
MoDiC serial number and send to:

1 BMW Plaza
[email protected]
400
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 922
Montvale, NJ 07645
Attn: Product Service Engineering (MoDiC)
as soon as possible.
Do not return any MoDiCs for this symptom until specifically instructed to do so under the terms of the MoDic Update Program.

Group 08
MODIC
Bulletin Number
08 04 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1997
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
A revised and expanded version of the MODIC Programming Software has been developed. With the release of P11.0 MODIC Software, Version
P10.0 Programming Software has become invalid.
Program Highlights
^ DIS programming and MODIC programming download (P11.0) include data for:
1. E36 328i & E39 528i DME MS 41.1 - M52 - up to 3197 prod. misfire program.
2. EGS 8.55 - M62 - exchange control module programming
E38 740i & E39 540i as of 1/97 production
E31 840i as of 9/96 production
3. M44 DME programming special disc information (SI 12 15 96)
^ MODIC software version P11.0 (programming/encoding) will allow DME variant coding of the following engine control module versions:
DME M1.1; M1.2; M1.3; M1.7, M1.7.2, M1.7.1.
M3.1; M3.3.1; M3.3; M5.2 (M73).

Module DME
M5.2 318,Z3 M44
M5.2 540i,740i,840i M62
M5.2.1 540i,740i M62
MS41.1 328i,528i M52
MS41.2 M3 S52/B32
For complete flash programming details refer to service information 12 05 96.
[email protected]
401
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 923
^ MODIC software version P11.0 (programming/encoding) will allow EGS flash programming of the following control module versions. The
EGS flash programming procedure is identical in operation to DME flash programming
ASS 440Z/5HP 24
EGS Control Model From Production Date

Module
GS 8.55 840i 9/96

GS 8.55 740I 11/97-8/97
GS 8.55 540i 11/97-8/97
GS 8.60 540i,740i 9/97
Flash Programming Features
^ Flash programming is the electronic deletion and reprogramming of data and programs in the control module. Flash programmable control
modules can be programmed up to 13 times.
^ EPROM replacement is not possible. Flash programming will automatically delete data, reprogram new data and align the engine control
module with the EWS control module.
required part numbers are located on the label of the defective control module. The label is located on the top cover.
^ After flash programming is complete adaptation values must be cleared. P11.0 will automatically guide the technician through this procedure.
^ Adaptation of the control module (DME or EGS) will begin to take place automatically during the test ride.
^ "Quick clearing" of all control modules must be performed after flash programming of the control module is complete. When the data is erased
from the control module EEPROM (an EEPROM is an electrically erasable PROM) communication is temporarily interrupted with control
modules that that normally communicate with the control module (example: AGS,MID). This interruption can result in the setting of erroneous
faults.
be discontinued. If necessary the BMW battery charger (P/N 88 88 7 000 005) may be connected before programming. Peaks in voltage caused by
Menu Access
DME EGS
Select 3-DME Programming Select 4 "EGS Programming"
Select 2-Exchange CM Select 1 Exchange CM
Select 1-Determine basic CM Select 1 Determine Basic CM
Select 2-Program basic CM Follow all program directions

The menu for "DME Programming" has 5 options.
1. Determine Customer Service Measures
This step is for special program modification updates that do not require an EPROM replacement (example M3.3.1). When activated, the
program will automatically determine whether the vehicle it is connected to is eligible for a modification. If eligible, the modification will be
displayed and can be activated by selecting the "Y" button. If the vehicle is not eligible, the program will display "No Programming Data
Available for this SG Version".
Note:
Please disregard any Service Campaign numbers that may be displayed in the software. The control module may only be updated one (1)
time.
2. Exchange Control Module
a. Determine and program a replacement basic control module. This affects DME 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.3, 5.2(M73) only. Under no circumstances
or
[email protected]
402
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 924
b. Reprogram a Flash programmable control module. Refer to "Flash Programming Features" for complete flash programming
information (SI 12 05 96).
Note:
displayed.
pre.programmed control module must be installed.
3. Exchange EPROM
This step is used to determine and program a programmable EPROM that is to be installed for DME 3.1 and 3.3 only. The programming
procedure is divided into 2 steps.
necessary for determining a replacement control module EPROM from the defective control module and will display the acceptable
replacement part number(s)which need to be installed in that vehicle.
If automatic determination is not possible, the data may be read off the label of the defective control module and entered manually into the
MODIC.
The MODIC programs the newly installed EPROM with the aid of the data derived in step 1. The new control module label can be printed
out by the MODIC station printer, or completed by hand. The MODIC programs the basic control module with the latest data.
Be advised that there may not be an EPROM for all control modules. If this is the case, a pre-programmed control module must be ordered.
4. Adjustment EWS - DME Vehicles From 1/95
NOTE:
a. The DME control module has been replaced with a pre-programmed DME control module or
b. After programming a basic programmable control module or a replacement EPROM, the message "Programming complete-EWS

5. Clear Adaptation Values
^ This step is only used after a control module has been flash programmed.
[email protected]
403
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 925
^ The control module will temporarily operate on internally programmed default values.
^ Adaptation is an ongoing process in the Control Module.
^ The default values may occasionally lead to temporary rough running characteristics (DME). Rough running characteristics are a normal
part of the initial adaptation process.
Menu Access
Select 5" Clear adaptation values"
Select "Y"
Diskette Contents

How to Load V11.0 Software With MODIC Station
on the right).
Special Note:
When the MODIC is attached to a car and the main menu is displayed the "C" may be pressed to bring you to an "erase" menu. You erase
a program by simply pressing the number and.
Y or N".
Label Printing
[email protected]
404
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 926
During programming:
4. The MODIC must not be disconnected

Parts Information
Software Version 11.0 A/B/C

P/N 01 11 9 787 861
Introductory Price $83.00
Information Binder under bulletin 1-24 dated 4/95.
Center.Technical Service Bulletin # 080596 Date: 980101
Updated MoDic(R) Diagnostic Software - D12.0

Group 08
MODIC
Bulletin Number
08 05 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1998
Product Engineering
This IDC bulletin supersedes IDC 08 OS 96 dated February 1997 which should be removed and discarded from your IDC binder.
SUBJECT:
Updated MODIC Diagnostic Software - D12.0
MODEL:
All
Situation:
A revised and expanded version of the MODIC Diagnostic Software has been developed. With the release of D12.0 MODIC Software, Previous
versions of Diagnostic Software become invalid.
Program Additions
1. Updated information for all control modules.
2. The following diagnostic programs have been revised and expanded.
DME 5.2 M73 DME 5,2 M44
MS 41.1 M52 DME 5.2 M73
ABS/ASC5 E34/38/39 IKE & Basic Cluster
Refer to IDC 07 02 96 dated January 1998 (CD12.0) for complete details
[email protected]
405
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 927
Diskette Contents
[email protected]
406
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 928
[email protected]
407
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 929
[email protected]
408
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 930
Loading D12.0 MODIC Software with the MODIC Station
1. Load Diagnosis D12.0 before any other program is loaded. This is the base program for all other programs that are to be loaded. This
program must remain in the MODIC regardless of any other D12.0 programs that are erased to increase memory space.
2. All other D12.0 programs must be loaded separately. Due to the large number of programs available on D12.0 the MODIC (I or II) is not able
to save all programs simultaneously.
3. Loading and deleting of software D12.0 is accomplished in the same manner as all previous MODIC Station compatible software.
Note:
The Modic can be loaded with the latest Diagnostic and Programming software directly from the DIS. Refer to IDC 07 02 96 for complete
details.
General Instructions
Memory capacity in the MODIC is not capable of storing all programs. For this reason only load those programs which are used frequently. Also,
do not load programs that are not currently used in the U.S.
Parts Information:

D12.0 MODIC 01 57 9 787 997 $65.00
Diagnostic Software
The above software will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional copies may be purchased through your PDC.
Information Binder under Bulletin 1-24 dated 4/95.
Central Locking System - Failure

Group 51
Body Equipment
Bulletin Number
51 09 93 (3856)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Central Locking System Failure
MODELS:
3 Series (E30)
[email protected]
409
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 931
Situation:
Under certain circumstances, complaints may be encountered in which the entire central locking system is inoperative, with all actuators electrically
inoperative, and the central locking system control module is inoperative due to an open internal fusible link.
Vehicles Affected:
E30 vehicles produced between November 1991 and December 1992 (inclusive), or those in which a faulty central locking system control module
was retrofitted.
Cause:
Faulty transistors in the central locking system control module which may sporadically cause the actuators to be powered continuously.
Correction:
If this complaint is encountered replace any defective actuators, and replace the central locking system control module with one produced week
49/92 or later.
Under no circumstances are repairs to be attempted on the central locking system control module (such as attempting to repair the internal fusible
link).
Parts Information:
Only the central locking system control modules (P/N 61 31 1 380 302) produced after week 49/92 are stocked. Refer to illustration.
Information:
Parts and labor are reimbursable under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Control Module
Defect Code: 51 26 00 85 00
Labor Operation: Use labor operation(s) and labor allowance(s)
Labor Allowance: appropriate to the model of vehicle being repaired and to the components replaced.
Horn Contact - Squeaks

Woodcliff Lake, NJ June 1990 Service Engineerlng
SUBJECT: Contact Ring/Horn Contact Causing Noise
MODELS: All
Complaint: Horn contact squeaks.
Correction: Coat the contact ring evenly with 0.5 gram of copper paste lubricant, P/N 81 22 9 400 794.
[email protected]
410
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 932
Grease the horn contact between the contact body and the guide tube (arrows) with 0.5 gram of the same paste lubricant.
Note: Push the contact body into the guide tube several times while applying lubricant to ensure sufficient lubrication.
Warranty
Status: Covered under the terms of the BMW New Car Limited Warranty of 3 Years/36,000 Miles.
Defect code: 32 33 04 39 00
Labor operation: 32 33 000 Remove and install steering wheel plus: 32 34 500 if airbag equipped
Labor allowance: Refer to Flat Rate Manual
Windshield - Bonding Adhesive Cutter

Group O4
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 18 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1996
Product Engineering
This Service Information supersedes Service Information 04 05 92 dated 2/92. Please remove 04 05 92 from your SI binder and discard it.
SUBJECT:
Bonded Windshield Adhesive Cutter
MODELS:
All
Situation:
The cutter, for bonded windshield adhesive manufactured by FEIN Power Tools Inc. and replacement knives for the cutter are no longer available
through the BMW Parts Department.
Correction:
All FEIN products may be purchased directly through FEIN Power Tools Inc. Special pricing has been negotiated for BMW dealers.
Parts Information:
Order Information:
Orders must be directed to:
FEIN Power Tools

3019 West Carson St
Pittsburgh, Pa 15204
Telephone 1 800 441 9878 x 222

Fax 412 331 3599
Windshield - Replacement Tools

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
[email protected]
411
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 933
04 01 99
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1999
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Windshield Replacement Tools
MODEL:
All
Situation:
Distribution of the following tools will be through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased through your PDC.
Tool Information:
Windshield Mounting Blocks

P/N 90 88 6 513 130
Price $5.30
These special hard foam blocks (1 & 2) are used during windshield replacement to properly tension the windshield while the glue dries. The blocks
are designed to support but not damage the windshield. Refer to Repair Manual section 51 31 000.
Windshield Tape
P/N 99 00 0 001 501
Price= $9.95
[email protected]
412
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 934
The windshield tape (3) is used with windshield mounting blocks to install vehicle windshields. This special tape resists stretching and will not mar
the vehicles finish. Refer to Repair Manual section 51 31 000 for details.
Distribution of the following tool will not be through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased through your
PDC. Refer to Parts Information bulletin 01 01 95 for tool warranty details. All prices on this bulletin are introductory prices and are only valid
during the Automatic Tool Shipment.
Windshield Lifting Device

P/N 88 88 6 513 010
Price= $262.00
This lifting device is used to R&R front. rear and side windows. Two lifting devices are included when ordered.
Centers who have previously ordered this windshield lifting device (88 88 6 513 010) may modify it to work on E39 sport wagon rear side
windows. The modification is necessary due to the angle of the glass. Modification is as follows:
1. Enlarge the fixing pin hole to approximately 15 mm on both sides of one suction cup. This procedure should be repeated on the second lifting
device.
Windshield Wiper - Chatter, Adjustment Tool Modification

Group 61
Electrical
Bulletin Number
[email protected]
413
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 935
61 08 89 (1896)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 61 08 89 (1896) dated June 1992. It incorporates revised procedures.
Please remove and discard S.I. 61 08 89 (1896) dated June 1992 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Windshield Wipers
MODELS:
3 Series (E36), 5 Series (E34), 7 Series (E32), 8 Series (E31)
Situation:
The windshield wiper blades may chatter during operation if not adjusted to the proper angle in relation to the windshield. In order to properly
adjust the blade angle, a special tool (P/N 88 88 6 009 210), has been developed. This tool is marked "E32" on the 87~ side and "E34" on the 84~
side. Only the "E32" (87~) side of the gauge is to be used for both E32 and E34 vehicles.
This tool has been modified to reflect this change. The modified tool can be recognized by its grey color and by two holes drilled through it. The
part number is unchanged. The older black tool is still usable ("E32" side only for E31, E32, E34, and E36 vehicles), but only the grey modified
tool will be stocked in the Parts Department.
Checking
Procedure:
If replacing a wiper arm, or if a wiper arm is loose, press the wiper arm onto the wiper axle (as far as the circlip on vehicles with wiper contact
pressure control [ADV]) and tighten to 25 N-m. After 15 minutes, retighten to 25 N-m to compensate for any settling.
With the wipers in the park position, check the angle of the blade by placing the "E32" side of the tool against the pivot housing of the wiper arm
(Illustration 1).
If the angle is not correct, adjust by twisting wiper arm with pliers padded with cloth to prevent scratching the paint (Illustration 2).
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR ADV-EQUIPPED VEHICLES
When checking a vehicle equipped with a wiper contact pressure control arm (driver's side), the following special instructions should be followed:
1. Make sure that the wiper arm is fully depressed on the wiper shaft.
2. With the ignition switched OFF and the wiper arm in park position, check the distance between the plunger of the wiper pressure controller
and the rocker arm. The gap must be between 0.0 and 0.2 mm. This applies to vehicles with the wiper contact pressure control arm only.
Please Note:
Windshield wiper blades are expendable, "Wear and tear" items. While the wiper blade angle must be correct, a variety of environmental factors
may contribute to complaints of chatter, streaking, or shortened wiper blade life. Prolonged exposure to strong sunlight, repeated exposure to road
salt, and extreme temperatures all contribute to these complaints, and will necessitate earlier replacement. Please ensure that your service personnel
(and customers) are aware of these circumstances.
Warranty
Information:
[email protected]
414
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 936
Adjustments covered under 12 months/12,000 miles adjustment period of the BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect Code:
61 61 06 40 00
Labor Operation:
00 50 815
Labor Allowance:
2 FRU
Electrochromic Mirror - Troubleshooting

Group 51 Body Equipment
Woodcliff Lake, NJ December 1990 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: BMW Electrochromic Mirror
MODELS: All so Equipped
General
Information: Detailed testing and troubleshooting instructions for the BMW Electrochromic Mirror have been developed. A copy of the
instructions is attached.
Attachment to S.I. 51 02 90 (3183)
BMW ELECTROCHROMIC (ECM(TM)) MIRROR TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
The BMW Electrochromic EC(TM) Mirror automatically detects and eliminates glare coming from the headlamps of following vehicles. The
EC(TM) Mirror darkens gradually as glare increases. When glare subsides the mirror becomes clear again. The EC(TM) Mirror has a 3-position
switch (OFF/ MIN/MAX) to turn on and select the sensitivity of the mirror. The mirror also has a reverse override function.
Testing EC(Tm) Mirror Operation
1. The vehicle ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.

2. The OFF/MIN/MAX sensitivity switch on the mirror must be in the MAX position.
3. Test the operation of the EC(TM) Mirror by simulating glare as follows:
a. In full daylight conditions, cover the forward facing sensor (located on the right side of the mirror back) with a dark cloth or other piece
of opaque material (Diagram A). Hold the dark cloth over the sensor until you notice the mirror start to darken.
b. Remove the cloth and the mirror should return to the clear state. (Note: In the low ambient light of a large workshop the mirror may not
return to full clear).
c. Repeat steps a. and b. serveral times to make sure the mirror operates correctly.
d. With the mirror in the dark, non-reflective stage, place the gear selector into reverse. The mirror should return to the clear stage.
e. Repeat step d. to make sure reverse override operates correctly.
Troubleshooting
[email protected]
415
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 937
Troubleshooting If Mirror Does Not Operate Correctly ...
1. In a dark area, (i.e. garage) visually check that the mirror switch panel legend is illuminated; if it is not, the problem could be in the electrical
wiring to the mirror.
2. To check the vehicle electrical wiring ...
a. Remove the wire cover on the mirror foot and disconnect the yellow electrical connector (diagram B).
b. Using a VOM, check for voltage in vehicle connector at Pin 3 (+12V,IGN. SWITCHED). Check for continuity to Pin 1 (GROUND)
diagram C.
c. Use a VOM to check Pin 2 for + 12V with gear selector in reverse (diagram C).
Circuitry Pin 1 - Vehicle chassis ground (Brown wire). Pin 2 - Reverse override (+ 12V, gear selector in reverse) (Blue/Yellow wire). (Mirror
changes to high
EC(Tm) Mirror Replacement
EC(TM) Mirror Replacement
1. If mirror wiring checks OK and mirror does not operate, replace mirror.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
^ Remove mirror from the windshield button by pulling the mirror foot directly toward you at a 90-degree angle from the windshield
(diagram D).
[email protected]
416
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 938
2. Install replacement mirror by placing mirror foot over windshield mounting button and rotating down 30-degrees to lock into proper position
(diagram E). Reconnect wiring harness connector in mirror bracket base and test mirror operation.
Replace the wire cover.

Engine - Oil Recommendations

Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 02 92 (3491)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1992
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 11 15 82 (635) which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded.
SUBJECT:
Engine Oils
General
Information:
The use of a high quality engine oil is extremely important for the operation and service life of an engine.
Engine Oil Specifications
BMW recommends the use of all engine oils that meet or exceed the American Petroleum Institute (API) classifications of SG or the European
CCMC classification of G4. Such oils may either be mineral or syntheticbased engine oils. (Combination with diesel oil specifications CD or CE
quality classifications are also permitted, e.g. SG/CE, etc.)
Note:
During the break-in period of a new engine or components of a rebuilt engine, i.e. new bearings, crankshaft, pistons, etc. only a single or multiple
grade mineral-based engine oil should be used since a synthetic-based oil has friction-reducing properties which will influence the break-in
behavior of an engine.
Since synthetic oils often posses improved lubricating properties, they tend to prolong the break-in period of an engine and consequently may lead
to increased oil consumption during the break-in period.
Therefore, it is not recommended to use a synthetic-based oil for the initial filling of a new or exchange engine. A synthetic-based oil may be used
when changing the oil for the first time in accordance with the prescribed oil change intervals. Generally, there is no problem mixing mineral-based
and synthetic engine oils with the same viscosity.
Oil Change Intervals
Under no circumstances should the oil change intervals be extended due to the greater durability of a fully synthetic engine oil. The engine oil and
filter should always be changed as per the vehicle's Service Indicator when the "Oil Service" or "Inspection" display appears.
Under severe driving conditions, it is recommended to increase the number of oil services.
Oil Viscosity
[email protected]
417
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 939
For the correct engine oil SAE viscosity/grade selection the BMW Temperature Viscosity Table should be used which is located in Group 11 of the
BMW Operating Fluids Manual and also in all BMW vehicle Owner's Manuals.
Engine Oil Additives
The use of engine oil additives is not recommended and not necessary on BMW engines. Instead, it is recommended to use one of today's highly
advanced brand name lubricating oils conforming to either API classifications SG (or higher) or CCMC classification G4 (or higher).
Engine - Will Not Start In Cold Weather

Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 08 94 (4139)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1995
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 11 08 94 (4139) dated February 1995 which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
As a reminder, the information contained in this Service Information should be referred to if starting problems arise during the colder winter
months ahead.
The [NEW] identifies changes made to this revision.
SUBJECT:
Engine Oil Viscosity Recommendations
MODELS:
All
Complaint:
Engine will not start during cold weather (32°F or lower).
Correction:
For reliable cold start performance it is imperative that the engine oil viscosity be matched to the ambient temperature range under which the
vehicles will be operated. Please refer to the chart for recommended oil viscosities.
Note that BMW released "Special Oils," which all happen to be synthetic, will cover a much wider ambient temperature range than non "Special
Oils." BMW approved "Special Oils" have gone through a dedicated BMW test procedure to determine their performance on BMW engines over
[email protected]
418
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 940
extended ambient temperature ranges. Non "Special Oils" can be either mineral based or synthetic, but these oils have not been extensively tested
over extended ambient temperature ranges in BMW engines.
The advantage of using the "Special Oils" over low viscosity non "Special Oils" is the tact that there is no need for an oil change once the ambient
temperatures increase with warmer weather.
^ "Special Oils" currently approved by BMW are Mobile 1 SAE 5W-30 and Valvoline High Performance SAE 5W-30.
^ Verify that the proper DME update has been performed.
Refer to S.I. 12 08 94 (4117) for M50 non-VANOS

Refer to S.I. 12 07 94 (4116) for M50 with VANOS
[NEW] Refer to S.I. 12 09 94 (4132) and 12 06 95 (4258) for models with M60 engines.
^ Verify that the correct spark plugs are installed.
Refer to S.I. 12 03 85 (1085) for spark plug application.
Cooling System - New Antifreeze

Group 17
Radiator
Bulletin Number
17 01 88 (1743)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1991
Service Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 17 01 88 (1743) dated November 1988. It lists a revised part number for antifreeze and makes
reference to recycled antifreeze in this bulletin. Please remove and discard S.I. 17 01 88 (1743) dated November 1988 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
New BMW Antifreeze
MODELS:
All
Situation:
A properly functioning cooling system is vital for the engine's durability. Coolants must fulfill four basic requirements:
^ Guarantee sufficient cooling.
^ Guarantee operation of cooling system in winter (prevent freezing of coolant) and in summer by boosting the boiling point.
^ Protect various metals (gray cast iron, steel, aluminum, brass, copper and solder) against corrosion.
^ Prevent excessive silicate gel precipitation, which may cause plugging of the cooling system.
Lately, silicate gel precipitation has become a major concern of the automotive industry and its customers as well.
In the attempt to protect aluminum engine parts effectively against corrosion, the amount of silicates was increased by antifreeze manufacturers.
Excessive silicate gel dropout (also known as the "Green Goo", even if the color might differ) depends mainly on the silicate content itself - also as
a consequence of an antifreeze over-concentration in the coolant, the water hardness and phosphates as part of certain, commonly used antifreeze
additives.
As a result of chemical reactions among the above mentioned components, this gel builds up inside the complete cooling system and especially
inside the radiator. It acts like a heat insulating coating, thus reducing the heat transfer from engine components to the coolant and/or from the
coolant to the air flowing through the radiator.
Consequently, the coolant temperature level inside the entire coolant circuit increases with increasing gel development until the point can be
reached where the engine might partially or totally overheat with the result of considerable damage.
Solution:
BMW of North America is proud to introduce a new antifreeze, which was developed especially to prevent excessive silicate drop-out without
[email protected]
419
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 941
taking any shortcuts concerning the well-known and general requirements for a coolant antifreeze. This BMW tested and approved antifreeze,
containing no nitrites and no phosphates, can be ordered in a 1 gallon container under P/N 88 88 6 900 316.
The initial fill of the coolant system is 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Maintain this mixture when changing the coolant, as it provides the best
overall performance. Freezing protection with this mixture is provided down to -34~F (-37~C). During winter in extremely cold areas, the
antifreeze can be increased up to 60%, which provides freezing protection down to -62~F (-52~C). Do not exceed a 60% ratio of antifreeze.
NOTE:
^ Do not mix any additives or other components into the coolant.
^ To maintain protection against excessive silicate precipitation, do not mix with different antifreeze containing nitrites and/or phosphates and
a high silicate formulation.
Although it is the policy of BMW to support most forms of recycling, it is not recommended to use recycled antifreeze in BMW automobiles.
Used coolant/antifreeze has an altered chemical stability (silicate balance) which reduces the efficiency of today's coolant systems. Only the use of
new coolant/antifreeze at the recommended change intervals will assure reliable engine coolant system operation under all conditions.
For more information on the proper disposal of used antifreeze, refer to S.I. 04 12 91 (3286).
Special Tools - Coolant Tank Adaptor

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 17 89 (1897)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1989
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
M3 Coolant Tank Adaptor
Situation:
Because of the M3's coolant tank design (plastic tank with twist on cap) it is necessary to use the above mentioned adaptor in order to pressure test
the cooling system.
This tool will be sent to all Automotive dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be ordered directly through
Recall - Coolant System Overheating

Group 00
Maintenance and
General Hints
[email protected]
420
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 942
Bulletin Number
00 10 93 (3771)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
June 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 10 93 (3771) dated May 1993. Changes are found in the shaded areas. Please remove and
discard S.I. 00 10 93 (3771) dated May 1993 from your S.I. binder.
Update your E30 Coolant System Recall binders by removing S.I. 00 10 93 (3771) dated May 1993, and inserting copies of this S.I. 00 10 93
(3771) dated June 1993.
SUBJECT:
Coolant System Recall Campaign No. 93V-015
MODELS:
1984-93 E30 (3 Series Vehicles)
Situation:
BMW of North America, Inc. has voluntarily initiated a recall campaign involving the coolant system of these vehicles.
This Service Information bulletin outlines specific procedures for the implementation of the campaign.
Description of Defect:
Refer to the copy of the customer recall notification letter attached to this S.I.
Conduct of Campaign:
This campaign affects approximately 375,000 vehicles. Due to limited parts availability and workshop capacities, this campaign will be carried out
using a staggered customer mailing, versus informing all customers at the same time.
The initial customer recall notification letters will be mailed out during the week of May 31, 1993. Mailings will continue on a staggered basis
dependent on current parts stock/supply. Generally, customers of older vehicles will be notified first.
What this means is that you will NOT automatically modify every E30 that comes into your shop for repair. You will only modify a car that's
identified as currently eligible through your DCS System or if the owner presents a customer notification letter.
One exception to this is a vehicle which has come into your dealership with an engine overheating problem. Such vehicles are to have the coolant
system modification performed before the vehicle is returned to the customer. Contact your Regional Warranty Representative with the VIN of that
vehicle, to allow for campaign claim entry on that vehicle.
Also you should not approach your customers ahead of time. The reason for this unusual procedure is that our limited parts supply will only allow
us to deal with a set number of customers at any given time. So we will only notify the number of customers that we can service with the parts we
have on hand.
Entry of vehicles into the DCS System will be concurrent with the customer mailings. At the same time, updated chassis number range listings will
be issued to all dealers.
In order to determine if a specific vehicle is currently eligible for this recall, it will be necessary to utilize the "Service Menu" of the DCS (Dealer
Communication System). Proceed to "Inquiries; "Vehicle History" and enter the chassis number (last seven characters) of the vehicle in question.
Based on the response of the system, either proceed with the corrective action or take no further action at this time.
Note:
If a customer presents the customer notification letter (for that chassis number) it is not necessary to inquire on DCS. Perform the required
modification.
Should it become necessary to perform the modification on a vehicle that is not currently eligible, contact your Regional Warranty Representative
with the VIN of that vehicle, as the warranty system will not accept the claim for this modification. Refer to S.I. 01 05 91 (3300) for Regional
Warranty Representative information.
To assist your dealership with this recall, BMW is shipping to the attention of the service manager, the following information:
Two - E30 coolant system recall binders, containing:
Service Information bulletin - Administrative Service Information bulletin - M10 modification M10 chassis number range listing Service
Information bulletin - M20 modification M20 chassis number range listing Service Information bulletin - M42 modification M42 chassis number
range listing Service Information bulletin - S14 modification S14 chassis number range listing
One binder should be kept in the service reception area for service advisor usage and the other in the workshop area for the technicians/shop
[email protected]
421
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 943
foreman.
The Service Informations will not be updated. The chassis number range listings will be updated with every customer mailing. Be sure to keep both
binders up-to-date by entering updated chassis number range listings in both binders immediately after you receive them.
Parts requirement list (included in this S.I.)
Lists parts required for each engine type with cross reference to S.I. and defect code numbers.
Technical/Administrative video
Visual explanation of the technical and administrative aspects relating to this recall.
Correction:
As this modification will not prevent engine overheating, any problems (i.e., mechanical defects, improper coolant level/antifreeze protection level,
etc.), with the coolant system should be corrected before performing the recall modification.
Such repairs are not reimbursable under this recall campaign. Some vehicles may still be covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. In
cases where no warranty coverage is provided, the customer must be made aware of the required repairs, and their liability for payment, before such
repairs are made.
Replace the radiator cap with a new version to control system pressure and provide greater coolant overflow in the event of overheating. Install
thermostatic bypass valve and associated installation hardware to control coolant temperature in the heater core.
Attached to this S.I. you will find illustrations which demonstrate how the bypass valve operates. Please use this when explaining the modification
procedure to a customer.
Note:
If during the modification the coolant supply and/or return hoses are found to be damaged (ripped/torn), so that they are no longer watertight, the
hose(s) must be replaced.
Hoses will be placed on "return indicator" for inspection in the WPRC.
One exception is the M20 models. On these, the coolant supply hose is replaced as part of this campaign.
Parts Information:
BMW will pre-allocate initial quantities of required parts. Quantities will be based on a percentage of cars your dealership has retailed.
A Parts Information bulletin providing more detail on affected parts will be mailed to your dealership's Parts Manager.
It is very important that dealership Service Managers maintain contact with Parts Managers regarding available Inventory. Service departments
should not schedule appointments until parts for an individual modification are in stock at the dealership.
The list of parts that will be shipped automatically: (See the attached parts requirements chart for more detail.)
Parts and labor are reimbursable through Campaign Entry.
Refer to the appropriate Service Information bulletin for specific special defect codes and work package numbers:
Technical Service Bulletin # NHTSA98V178000 Date: 980803

[email protected]
422
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 944
Recall 98V178000: Coolant Cap/Overflow

Vehicle Description: Passenger vehicles. A malfunction or failure of a coolant system component, such as a thermostat, water pump, or fan belt, can
result in significantly increased coolant temperature and system pressure. If the indications of a critical overheating condition is not noticed by the
driver, it is possible that damage to, or failure of, a coolant system component could occur. If a crack were to form or a seam were to separate in the
heater core end piece, hot coolant could suddenly be expelled, increasing the risk of personal injury to a vehicle occupant.
Dealers will install a new design radiator cap to control pressure and provide greater coolant overflow in the event of overheating.
Owner notification began March 31, 1999.
Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time
should contact BMW at 1-800-831-1117. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Technical Service Bulletin # II24 Date: 901101
A/T - ZF Cross Reference Part Numbers

SUBJECT: ZF TRANSMISSION CROSS REFERENCE

11/90 II-24
Supercedes II-24 Dated 8/89
[email protected]
423
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 945
The following list cross references BMW Transmission part numbers to corresponding ZF part numbers. It covers transmission assembly part
numbers only, not component parts. The ZF assembly part number can be found on the identification plate riveted to the side of the transmission
case.
A/T 4HP22/4HP22EH - Overhaul Kit Availability

Group 02
Service Development
Bulletin Number
02 13 93 (3804)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1993
Product Engineering
TO: All BMW Service Managers
[email protected]
424
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 946
SUBJECT:
Automatic Transmission Repair, Model 4HP22 and 4HP22EH
There are approximately 220,000 BMW 3, 5, 6 and 7 Series vehicles on the road with automatic transmission models 4HP22 and 4HP22EH. Most
of these vehicles are out of warranty. Here is an additional business opportunity for your Service and Parts departments. Don't let automatic
transmission repairs pass you by.
Since January of this year, BMW has offered a 3-day, technical training course (ST0021) for your technicians covering ZF transmission overhauls.
With this specialized training in place, we are herewith introducing a basic parts kit - at a very competitive price - which gives you the opportunity
to effectively compete with the mass-market transmission repair trade.
The kit contains all required friction, steel and wave plates, a complete gasket set, and snap rings for the bearing sets. A listing by part number and
quantity is included. Order your initial quantities of kits now:
You save $60.22 by buying the kit compared to purchasing the individual components.
To help you communicate to your customers that authorized BMW dealers are indeed the logical choice for transmission service, we have produced
a consumer awareness brochure - sample included - and an in-dealership poster headlined: Don't Trust Your BA4W Transmission Service to
Stranger's.
One poster will be mailed to you under separate cover. Quantities of the brochures and extra posters can be ordered by calling ADH at
[email protected]
425
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 947
908-225-2800. Ask for PD1-03931-20M (transmission brochure) and PD1-03932-1M (poster).
Please make sure that these promotional prices are utilized to get you going into the profitable business of automatic transmission repairs.
A/T - Diagnostic Strategy

Group 24
Bulletin Number
24 04 91 (3240)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Diagnosis
MODELS: All so equipped
Problem: Unnecessary replacement of automatic transmissions.
Situation: An increasing number of automatic transmissions are being returned without any technical fault. This is especially true regarding
the electronically controlled versions.
Accurate diagnosis of transmission problems is not complicated when approached methodically.
The following is intended as a general guide to help reduce unnecessary replacements by sharing the knowledge gained from
studying a large population of transmission returns.
Action: Prior to any transmission replacement, the technician must first check the basics. A Hydraulic-Mechanical Checklist has been
developed to assist in doing a thorough diagnosis. It is recommended to file a copy of the completed form in the vehicle's repair
history file.
Diagnostic Strategy
Diagnosis can be simplified by:
- Assessing what is right about the transmission before the usual approach of what is wrong.
- Isolating the problem as to an internal mechanical defect, an external peripheral system, or an electrical defect on EH
versions.
If the problem is not isolated, then diagnosis becomes a hit-and-miss proposition, almost always resulting in a loss of customer
confidence and unnecessary repair costs.
Basic Diagnostic Procedure

1. Verify the customer's complaint under similar conditions as described by the customer. (Road test with customer if possible.)
2. During road test note what is correct and what is not; i.e. shift points, shift feel, manual gear selection, engine braking, noises, etc. Record
findings on the Hydraulic-Mechanical Checklist for later reference.
3. Refer to Automatic Transmission Troubleshooting Chart and Fault Finding Tables found in Group 24 of the Repair Manuals for
recommended checks based on findings in step 2.
4. Perform necessary checks and determine type of repair needed, referring to the attached Diagnostic Hints and Fault Finding Tables found in
Group 24 of the Repair Manuals.
Do not overlook the 2013 Diagnostic Module as an important tool in the diagnostic procedure. Performing a "Brief Test" may quickly turn up faults
not only in the EGS system on EH version transmissions, but also in other vehicle systems which may affect transmission operation irregardless of
H or EH version. On EH versions, if no faults are found and diagnosis is not possible at this point, further interrogation of the electronic control
system should be conducted via the 2013 Diagnostic Module and EGS pin by pin testing as necessary to further pinpoint the failure mode before
replacing any parts.
Diagnostic Hints
[email protected]
426
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 948
Checking fluid level and condition will often reveal enough information to determine the necessary repair without going any further in the
diagnostic procedure. The following conditions suggest a transmission replacement will be necessary:
- Fluid smells burned (like a rotten egg or burned electrical coil) and has taken on a very dark color.
- Fluid is contaminated with particles of friction material.
- Fluid is discolored a milky pink. This is an indication of coolant leakage into the ATF; repair coolant leak and flush cooler lines before
installation of replacement transmission.
If in doubt about fluid condition, the oil pan should be removed for further evaluation. It is normal to see a slight build-up of material on the pan
magnets and a dark film on the bottom of the pan. Excessive deposits will be obvious and require transmission replacement. A quick check of
peripheral systems (i.e. kick-down cable adjustment on hydraulic transmissions or EGS faults memory on Electronic/Hydraulic versions) must be
made to ensure that the primary cause of failure is found and corrected to prevent a reoccurence.
As two of the more time consuming checks are pressure testing and pin by pin testing, their value in performing an accurate diagnosis and repair
must be carefully considered before investing the time and effort to carry out such testing.
If the transmission is to be exchanged, the additional information gained from pressure testing is usually not needed. Pressure testing is most
valuable when making a diagnosis in order to effect a transmission repair. Pressure testing is helpful in the diagnosis of problems which are
unresolved after the basic checks have found no faults or resulted in the correction of faults but the problem still exists. Once the transmission is out
of the car and apart on the bench, this valuable clue to the condition of the transmission's hydraulic "pulse" is lost and the chance of finding and
repairing the fault the first time are reduced.
Pressure testing is used to check the following hydraulic circuits:
- Pump
- Throttle valve (H versions)
- Throttle pressure regulating solenoid/force motor (EH versions)
- Governor (H versions)
- Forward clutch (models with forward clutch pressure tap)
- Converter clutch piston/seals (models with converter pressure tap)
A mainline pressure check will not reveal the condition of servos or clutches as these are typically applied through metered orifices. A mainline
pressure reading in this case will only reveal what is happening up to the orifice.
Monitoring mainline pressure while extending the transmission throttle cable (kickdown cable) or activating the force motor will verify the function
of both the pump and throttle pressure circuit. Low main pressure readings may indicate a problem in one or more of the following areas; clogged
filter, loose valve body bolts, leaking governor sealing rings, stuck governor valve, or a worn or damaged pump. A sticking main pressure valve or
modulation valve, defective force motor, or incorrectly adjusted transmission throttle cable are some possible areas which could result in having
either a high or low main pressure.
Monitoring torque converter pressure will be useful in the diagnosis of shudder complaints upon lock-up clutch engagement. If the pressure behind
the lock-up clutch piston exceeds 0.7 bar, the clutch will not engage fully allowing slippage of the torque converter clutch. This could indicate
either a defective torque converter or scored hook ring lands on the stator support. A quick check of the transmission serial number against that
given in the Diagnostic Hints Chart for "Stator support scored by sealing ring" will tell you which is the most likely cause.
While not as valuable as a main pressure check, checking the forward clutch apply pressure will confirm or refute a questionable diagnosis of
forward clutch failure before removing the transmission. Dont expect forward clutch pressure to be within specifications if main line pressure was
not. The validity of the pressure testing depends upon the thoroughness of the check up to this point. A misadjusted transmission throttle cable or
incorrect fluid level will affect the pressure readings.
EGS pin by pin testing is intended to complement the diagnostics of the 2013 Diagnostic Module. The majority of the checks can be made quickly
and easily with the 2013 or MoDiC without having to make or break any connections other than the connection of the 2013 or MoDiC to the
diagnostic plug. Pin by pin testing may be necessary after the 2013 specifies an area to check. It is for these instances that we have developed the
helper cards with pin identification and nominal values. The first version electronic transmission, E7 control system, does not have on board
diagnostics and therefore pin by pin testing will take on more significance when diagnosing this early system.
Faults which are a product of electrical malfunctions are rarely, if ever, eliminated by transmission replacement. The transmission fault indicator
(warning light or matrix display), when illuminated, is an alert that the problem is electrical and not mechanical. The EGS system must be
diagnosed and repaired using the BMW Diagnostic Module, ETM Diagnostic Procedures, and the "Understanding AEGS" guide.
To make EGS diagnosis simpler, technicians who are familiar with the "Understanding AEGS" guide need only perform the electrical checks using
the correct version helper card. The electrical check on the E34 and E36 THM-R1 helper cards are not covered in the "Understanding AEGS"
guide, but technicians experienced in pin by pin testing will find the checks quick and easy. An electrical problem has been detected when the test
results differ from the nominal values listed in the helper card. At that point, the technician should refer to the "Understanding AEGS" guide,
appropriate ETM, or Diagnostic Hints chart for further troubleshooting tips.
Based on our analyses, we have produced the attached Diagnostic Hints chart showing the most common failures including symptoms and
[email protected]
427
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 949
recommended repairs. As certain problems are typically confined to specific production ranges and/or transmission types, this information is
included where applicable.
Please bear in mind that this chart is not intended to cover all failure causes. Its intent is to share with the technicians the experience and knowledge
gained from studying a large population of failed transmissions. If the vehicle being diagnosed does not exhibit one of the listed symptoms, Group
24 of the appropriate repair manual contains more exhaustive troubleshooting charts.
Summary:
When transmission malfunctions occur, it is necessary to first check the basics prior to any transmission replacement. The Hydraulic-Mechanical
Checklist is intended to be a guide for evaluating the condition of the transmission.
Naturally, not all sections of the Hydraulic-Mechanical Checklist will have to be completed in every case. In certain obvious cases diagnosis can be
carried out rather quickly without the need for a fully completed checklist.
The following scenario shows how all the information in this bulletin, the repair manual microfiche, and the technical data microfiche work
together to assist the technician in providing an accurate and efficient diagnosis of transmission problems.
Vehicle: 1985 325iA, with the original transmission serial number 319127
Complaint: No reverse
Diagnostic Procedure:
1. Customer's complaint was verified as to no reverse under any conditions.
2. Basic mechanical checks showed external linkage correctly adjusted and a correct ATF fluid level with fluid dark, but not burnt, and
evidence of fine metal particles suspended in the fluid.
Road test revealed that upshifts were earlier than specified in Technical Data Microfiche. Stall test was within specifications.
3. When using the Automatic Transmission Troubleshooting Chart, the letters next to the symptom reference the Diagnostic Hints chart and the
numbers at the top of the vertical columns reference the Where To Find Information table.
Under the symptoms of No reverse on the Transmission Troubleshooting Chart, the recommended checks are fluid level and condition,
adjustment of manual selector cable, and pressure check.
4. On the Diagnostic Hints chart, governor hub or support scored by sealing rings is listed as a possible cause of a no reverse condition.
Looking in the Diagnostic Note column, the transmission in question was produced before the change to Viton sealing rings.
This type of failure could allow unregulated main pressure into the governor circuit simulating a higher than actual road speed. As this
transmission will lock out reverse above a given road speed, this type of failure could be responsible for the complaint of "no reverse" on this
vehicle. The early upshifts also support the theory of main pressure leaking into the governor circuit.
Fluid level and condition along with the adjustment of the manual selector cable were checked and found to be OK. A pressure check was not done
as it was felt that the results would not have provided any additional useful information. It was decided that the next step would be to remove the
transmission extension housing and inspect the governor hub and governor support.
As expected, the cast iron sealing rings had scored into the governor hub. The governor and hub assembly were replaced and the new Viton sealing
rings were used. Following a methodical diagnostic procedure and using the available reference material allowed for an accurate assessment of the
problem and resulted in a cost-effective on-the-car repair.
Whenever a transmission is replaced, a completed (minimum sections 1, 2, 3, and 6) hydraulic-mechanical checklist indicating internal failure must
accompany the transmission to the WPRC.
Attention: ALL TRANSMISSIONS SENT TO THE WPRC MUST HAVE COMPLETED HYDRAULIC-MECHANICAL CHECKLISTS
AND COPIES OF THE SERVICE TESTER PRINTOUTS WHERE APPLICABLE. A TRANSMISSION RECEIVED
WITHOUT A COMPLETED CHECKLIST WILL BE RETURNED TO THE REPAIRING DEALER AND THE WARRANTY
CLAIM WILL BE REFUSED.
PLEASE NOTE ALSO, THAT THE TRANSMISSION RETURNED UNDER WARRANTY WILL BE TESTED ON A
SELECTED BASIS AND RETURNED TO THE DEALER IF NO PROBLEM SHOULD BE FOUND.
Labor operation for completing

sections 1, 2, 3 and 6 of the
BMW Hydraulic-Mechanical Checklist Labor allowance
[email protected]
428
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 950
24 00 000 3 FRU
If additional diagnostic procedures are performed (i.e., sections 4 and 5 of the checklist), they should be placed under the
applicable Flat Rate Operation Number.
Materials Information:
The automatic transmission troubleshooting materials listed in this bulletin can be ordered from the BMW NA Product Engineering Dept.,
Montvale, NJ 07645, using the following order numbers.
Description SD No. Price
"Understanding AEGS" Troubleshooting Book 89-030 $20.00
AEGS Helper Cards (set of all 6) 91-010 $15.00
Hydraulic-Mechanical Checklist (pad of 25) 91-011 $2.00
A pre-printed Order Form is enclosed for your convenience.
(One set of the AEGS Helper Cards and one pad of the Hydraulic-Mechanical Checklist will be sent to all dealers free of charge).
A/T - THM-R1 Special Tools

MODEL: THM-RL transmission
The following Special tools have been developed for the THM-RI transmission and will be sent to all automotive BMW
dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
Alignment Pins (2) P/N 88 88 6 245 150 Introd. Price = $8.12

Used to center valve body.
Adapter P/N 88 88 6 245 190 Introd. Price = $6.86
[email protected]
429
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 951
Used with 88 88 6 240 021, 88 88 6 240 023, and 88 88 6 133 061 to check main pressure.
Driving Mandrel P/N 88 88 6 245 200 Introd. Price = $4.73

For radial sealing washer on shift lever shaft.
Special Tools - Transmission Alignment Gauge

GROUP 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 31 87 1550)
Montvale, NJ
February 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Transmission Alignment Gauge
MODELS:
All
Situation:
In order to correctly center the transmission with the vehicle chassis, this special tool is required. Refer to S.I. 26 01 88 (1559) for transmission
alignment procedure.
This tool will be sent to all BMW dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be ordered directly from your Parts
Distribution Center.
A/T - Scope of Repairs Policy

Group 24
Bulletin Number
[email protected]
430
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 952
24 07 91 (3256)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT:
Scope of Repairs on ZF Automatic Transmissions
Situation:
In order to reduce the cost of ownership, both during and after the warranty period, we recommend that the following repairs be performed at the
dealership in lieu of installing an exchange transmission.
(1) Troubleshooting automatic transmission (Electrical and Hydraulic)
(2) External adjustments
(3) Replacing shift linkage, accelerator cable, and park mechanism
(4) Replacing all external seals and gaskets
(5) Replacing bellhousing and extension housing
(6) Replacing transfer plate
(7) Replacing torque converter
(8) Replacing oil pump
(9) Replacing governor
(10) Replacing output flange
(11) Replacing filter screen
(12) Replacing internal transmission wiring harness
(13) Replacing solenoid valves and pressure regulator
(14) Replacing pulse transmitter
(15) Replacing EGS control unit
(16) Replacing A-clutch assembly
( ) Numbers in parenthesis refer to table "Where to Find Information".
At the present time, if more extensive repairs are needed, an exchange transmission should be installed.
For troubleshooting instructions, please refer to S.I. 24 04 91 (3240).
WHERE TO FIND INFORMATION
[email protected]
431
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 953
In addition to the Repair Manuals and Repair Instructions on microfiche, this table highlights the Service Information Bulletins that pertain to each
repair.
Technical Service Bulletin # ATRATB028 Date: 901001
A/T - Engine Vacuum Testing

BULLETIN: # 028
DATE: October 1990
SUBJECT: Engine Testing With A Vacuum Gauge
TRANSMISSION: All
Engine Testing With A Vacuum Gauge
ENGINE/TRANSMISSION RELATIONS
An important part of transmission diagnosis is to make certain the engine operates properly. If the engine performance is incorrect, the transmission
will receive the wrong information.
The engine sends signals to the transmission through a vacuum line, throttle cable or both. These signals basically synchronize torque with
transmission line pressure, shift feel and shift timing.
Malfunctions in items like the air filter, spark plugs, EGR valves and other parts of the fuel, electrical and emission systems could result in
improper transmission performance.
VACUUM GAUGE ENGINE PERFORMANCE TESTING
A vacuum gauge shows the difference between outside atmospheric pressure and the amount of vacuum present in the intake manifold.
The pistons in the engine serve as suction pumps and the amount of vacuum they create is affected by the related actions of:
^ Piston rings
^ Valves
^ Ignition system
[email protected]
432
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 954
^ Fuel control system
^ Other parts affecting the combustion process (emission devices, etc.).
Each has a characteristic effect on vacuum and you judge their performance by watching variations from normal.
It is important to judge engine performance by the general location and action of the needle on a vacuum gauge, rather than just by a vacuum
reading. Gauge readings which may be found are as follows:
NORMAL ENGINE OPERATION
At idling speed, an engine at sea level should show a steady vacuum reading between 14" and 22" HG. A quick opening and closing of the throttle
should cause vacuum to drop below 5" then rebound to 23" or more. See figure 1.
GENERAL IGNITION TROUBLES OR STICKING VALVES
With the engine idling, continued fluctuation of 1 to 2 inches may indicate an ignition problem. Check the spark plugs, spark plug gap, primary
ignition circuit, high tension cables, distributor cap or ignition coil. Fluctuations of 3 to 4 inches may be sticking valves. See figure 2.
INTAKE SYSTEM LEAKAGE, VALVE TIMING, OR LOW COMPRESSION
A vacuum reading at idle much lower than normal can indicate leakage through intake manifold gaskets, manifold-to-carburetor gaskets, vacuum
brakes or the vacuum modulator. Low readings could also be very late valve timing or worn piston rings. See figure 3.
EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE
Starting with the engine at idle, slowly increase engine speed to 3000 RPM, engine vacuum should be equal to or higher than idle vacuum at 3000
RPM.
If vacuum decreases at higher engine RPM's, an excessive exhaust back pressure is probably present.
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET LEAKAGE
[email protected]
433
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 955
With the engine Idling, the vacuum gauge pointer will drop sharply, every time the leak occurs. The drop will be from the steady reading shown by
the pointer to a reading of 10" to 12" Hg or less. If the leak Is between two cylinders, the drop will be much greater. You can determine the location
of the leak by compression tests. See figure 4.
FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM TROUBLES
All other systems in an engine must be functioning properly before you check the fuel control system as a cause for poor engine performance. If the
pointer has a slow floating motion of 4 to 5 inches - you should check the fuel control.
BULLETIN RECAP
^ Engine problems can affect transmission performance.
^ If you suspect an engine problem, connect a vacuum gauge to the intake manifold.
^ Note the location and action of the vacuum gauge needle.
^ Use the information in the bulletin to determine the engine problem.
^ Correct the engine problem before doing extensive calibration work on the transmission.
A/T - How To Use A Pressure Gauge

BULLETIN : # 078
SUBJECT: Pressure Gauge
APPLICATION: Misc.
DATE: November 1991
HOW TO USE A PRESSURE GAUGE
A significant number of calls we receive involve improper pressures, so we need to use a pressure gauge when diagnosing problems.
Using a pressure gauge can seem like a formidable task. The reason most people do not use a pressure gauge is because they do not see the value in
using one. Technicians do not see the value because the gauge readings do not tell them how to fix the problem. This article will attempt to show
the technician how to interpret pressure gauge readings so the technician can find the fix to the problem.
It is best to start pressure tests with mainline pressure. Mainline pressure should be checked in each range: P, R, N, D, 3, 2, 1. Each range, except
Park and Neutral, should be checked under three conditions: Slow idle, fast idle, and wide open throttle. A form, as in figure 1 should be made to
[email protected]
434
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 956
record the readings.
If all pressures are within specification at slow idle then the pump and pressure regulator are functioning properly.
If all pressures are low at slow idle, it indicates a potential problem in the pump, pressure regulator, filter, low fluid, or internal leakage. To help
verify where the problem is, check pressures at fast idle. If all the pressures now read normally, it usually indicates a worn pump but the problem
could still be internal leaks.
Internal leaks will usually show up in a particular range. For example a forward clutch leak would have normal pressure in Park, Reverse and
Neutral but have low pressure in all forward ranges. A direct clutch leak will show a pressure drop when the transmission shifts to third and low
pressure in reverse because in most cases, the direct clutch is on in third and reverse.
A restricted filter will usually show up as a gradual pressure drop at higher engine RPM because the filter cannot pass as much fluid as the pump is
trying to draw.
A stuck pressure regulator valve will show up as fixed line pressure which means the same pressure all the time. The pressure may vary with engine
RPM which means low pressure at slow RPM and higher pressure at higher RPM. There will be no boost in pressure from the TV or modulator
system and no reverse boost.
If pressures are high at slow idle it indicates a pressure regulator or throttle pressure problem. On most cars, the modulator controls throttle
pressure. If the transmission has a throttle pressure tap, it will tell you if the throttle pressure circuit is the problem. On GM units without a throttle
pressure tap, remove the TV plunger. If line pressure is now normal then it's a TV problem, if not it's a pressure regulator problem.
Pressures also need to be checked at stall or wide open throttle (WOT). When doing a stall test, always observe safety precautions such as checking
for broken mounts or bad brakes. Testing should always be done under operating conditions. To do a stall test, put the selector in the range to be
tested and with one foot firmly on the brake, press the accelerator to the floor then note your pressure reading. Some technicians will pull the
vacuum line off or pull the TV cable with the engine at fast idle. That is not operating conditions and will not detect a problem of trapped vacuum
or a cable problem.
If all pressure at stall are low, then you should pull the TV cable to maximum or disconnect the vacuum line. If the pressures are now OK, the
problem is in the cable or vacuum system. If the pressures are still low, then the problem is in the pump or control system.
If all pressures at stall are high, then look at the idle pressures. If the idle pressures are also high then this could be a pressure regulator or throttle
system problem. If idle pressures are normal then the problem is in just the throttle system.
The reverse stall test is also a maximum pump output test. If you suspect a weak pump then this test will help find it. Often this will show up as low
pressure at reverse stall but all other pressures including idle will be normal. If a person wanted to become really proficient with a pressure gauge
they should first put a pressure gauge on their own vehicle and leave it there for exactly one week. Every time they drive the car they should watch
the gauge. After one week, they should then put the pressure gauge on every single car in the shop that DOES NOT have a problem. Don't use the
gauge on cars WITH problems yet. After 30 days of using a gauge on units that work properly, they can then start using the gauge on units with
problems. The technician is accustomed to normal readings, abnormal readings will stand out like a sore thumb.
To fix today's transmissions, every professional technician must be proficient in the use of a pressure gauge. The only way to gain this proficiency
is to use the pressure gauge daily. Practice makes perfect.
A/T - Intermittent Electrical Problems

TECHNICAL BULLETIN # 132
DATE: Sep. 1992
TRANSMISSIONS: All Electronically Shifted Units
SUBJECT: Intermittent Electrical Problems
APPLICATION: All Electronically Shifted Units
Intermittent Electrical Problems
Wrong gear starts, no upshift, no downshift, falling out of 4th gear, etc may be caused by poor grounds. This applies to any electronically shifted
unit, import or domestic.
[email protected]
435
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 957
To test for a poor ground, connect the black lead of your digital voltmeter directly to the negative battery post and probe the suspect ground wire
with the positive lead. A good ground will read 0.1 volts or less. More than 0.1 volts is a poor ground. Keep in mind the circuit must be operating to
accurately check the ground.
[email protected]
436
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 958
[email protected]
437
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 959
Using a service manual for the vehicle you are working on, locate the transmission computer ground circuit. In the example shown, B and D are the
grounds. Now with the vehicle running in gear, backprobe B and D with the positive lead. Make sure the negative lead is hooked directly to the
NEGATIVE BATTERY POST. The voltmeter must read 0.1 or less.
A/T - Failsafe Modes

TECHNICAL BULLETIN # 191
DATE: Oct. 93
TRANSMISSION: None
SUBJECT: Failsafe Modes
[email protected]
438
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 960
APPLICATION: General
FAILSAFE MODES
Quite often you will find late model vehicles with computer shifted transmissions coming in that start off in "D" in the wrong gear. Instead of 1st,
they take off in 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear.
This can happen for several different reasons, caused by either internal transmission problems, or external control system problems.
Internal transmission causes of this problem can be faulty solenoids or stuck valves.
External control systems can also cause wrong gear starts. Two common external causes are:
^ a complete loss of power or ground to the control system.
^ a failsafe protection strategy initiated by the computer to protect itself or the transmission from an observed problem.
Both the "No Power" problem and the "Fail Safe Strategy" problem result in the same wrong gear start condition. The gears that you get in each
shifter position are the same.
[email protected]
439
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 961
Use the charts to see if the unit you have with wrong gear starts is in "Fail" or "No Power" mode. If so, you are probably looking for an electrical
problem. If you have gears other than what is shown on this chart, you probably have a valve body or solenoid problem.
A/T - Slipping or No-Shift/Metal Sealing Rings

TSB 87-48 (Aug)
SUBJECT: Metal sealing rings
Various Units
PROBLEM: Slipping, or sometimes no-shift
POSSIBLE SOLUTION: Sealing rings could be under-size.
1. Always inspect rings as outlined in SIL 84-29
[email protected]
440
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 962
[email protected]
441
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 963
2. Place ring in bore of drum where they will be running. (See Figures 1 & 2)
3. Sealing rings should be snug in bore; rings should fit all around the drum. (drum could be out-of-round)
4. Air check all drums. (Use 30 PSI air pressure only.) If air escapes you have leaks -- better find now, than later. This represents lost clutch
pressure, and could result in soft application and burned friction material.
5. Following these steps will help you save money, plus help you build better units.
A/T - Front Bushing Wear

TSB 87-54 (Sept)
SUBJECT: ALL AUTOMATICS
PROBLEM: Front Bushing Wear
CAUSE:
When diagnosing front pump bushing wear, the cause may be:
[email protected]
442
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 964
1. Excessive CONVERTER HUB RUN-OUT. This may, or may not be due to a faulty torque converter.
The torque converter can be checked visually, and with a dial indicator. (See Figure 1) Hub run-out should not exceed .010".
2. BROKEN, BENT OR CRACKED FLYWHEELS can also cause run-out. If the torque-converter-to-flywheel bolts have been loose, the
flywheel holes can become egg-shaped, or the torque converter pads may wear into the flywheel, causing run-out.
3. Another possibility is WEAR IN THE CRANKSHAFT, where it supports the torque converter pilot.(See Figure 2)
Often the crankshaft is only worn in a small area where the torque converter pilot has been against it.
If only a portion of the crankshaft is worn, rotate the crankshaft until the worn area is at 12:00 o'clock.
When the torque converter is pushed forward into the crankshaft, the torque converter pilot will bottom on a good portion, and should center
properly.
A/T - Math Formulas Part I
[email protected]
443
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 965
TSB: 89-23 (Aug)
SUBJECT:
TRANSMISSION MATH FORMULAS (Your most valuable tool)
Transmission math formulas are not reserved exclusively for engineers. Understanding some basic mathematical formulas can be one of your most
valuable tools.
The following information contained in this bulletin will discuss various basic formulas dealing with:
1. Shift Speed
2. Pressure
3. Speedometer ratios
Take the time, now, to understand these relatively simple concepts.
You will be saving yourself many problems, and considerable frustration, and also dollars, in the future.
Shift Speed and Pressure

SHIFT SPEED AND PRESSURE
To figure the area of a circle (valve or servo):
Radius (which is 1/2 the diameter) x Radius x 3.14159 = Area
EXAMPLE: A 1" diameter circle has a radius of 0.5"
0.5 x 0.5 x 3.14159 = 0.785
Therefore a 1" diameter circle has an Area of 0.785 sq. inches
Pressure x Area = Force
EXAMPLE: 100 psi line pressure, on a servo with an area of 2 square inches = force
So, 100 psi line pressure x 2 sq in = 200 pounds of force.
Force divided by Area = Pressure
EXAMPLE: 200 lbs divided by 2" = 100 psi
Force divided by Pressure = Area
EXAMPLE: 200 lbs divided by 100 psi = 2 inches
THINGS WE CAN DO WITH THESE FORMULAS:
EXAMPLE: A 700 R4 has 62 psi of line pressure at Idle.

The PR spring weighs 6.5 lbs
The tip (reaction end) of the PR valve has a diameter of 0.365" (0.365 divided by 2 = 0.1825 radius) 0.1825 x 0.1825 x 3.14159 = 0.1046" area
We want 75 psi of line pressure at Idle
First, let's see if those numbers add up, using: Pressure x Area = Force
62 psi x 0.1046 = 6.48, or 6 1/2 lb PR Spring
We want 75 psi:
Pressure x Area = Force (Spring) 75 psi x 0.1046 = 7.85 lb spring
What if we put in an 8 lb Spring? Force divided by Area = Pressure
8 lbs divided by 0.1046 = 76.48 or 76 1/2 line pressure
Now, let's look at RATIO.
Ratio is the relationship in quantity, amount or size, between two or more things.
In our example ratio is: How many psi each pound of spring will add.
[email protected]
444
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 966
Pressure divided by Force = Ratio
EXAMPLE: 62 psi divided by 6.5 lbs = 9.5 ratio Each pound of spring will increase pressure 9.5 psi
Force x Ratio = Pressure
EXAMPLE: 6.5 lbs x 9.5 = 61.75 or 62 psi
(Let's add 1 lb of spring, and see if we get 9.5 more psi.)
Force x Ratio = Pressure
EXAMPLE: 7.5 lbs x 9.5 = 71.25
New pressure Old pressure = Pressure difference
71.25 minus 61.75 = 9.5 psi change (by adding 1 lb of spring)
Once you know the ratio, a lot can be determined. Pressure divided by Ratio = Force
62 psi (actually 61.75) divided by 9.5 = 6.5 lb spring
The ratio never changes. This means that if I know that line pressure is 55 psi at idle, in a 700 R4, the the PR spring must be 5.78 lbs.
Pressure divided by Ratio = Force
So, 55 psi divided by 9.5 = 5.78 lbs.
Now, let's look at a math formula for shift speeds.
Suppose we had shift speeds of 15 mph and 20 mph, for the 1-2 & 2-3 shifts on a transmission. 20 mph may be too early for the 2-3 shift. If we
adjust TV modulator, we will move both shifts. We don't want to do that because the 1-2 shift is fine, so let's work with just the 2-3 shift spring.
EXAMPLE: Original spring divided by Original MPH = Ratio
As, 4 lbs divided by 25mph = 0.2
Ratio x Desired MPH = New Spring
0.2 x 25 mph = 5 lb spring
A 5 lb spring will raise the shift on this transmission to 25 mph.
All you need to know is -- Where is it shifting now (at MINIMUM throttle) and what does the spring weigh.
This formula will get you very close, but may be a "tad" off, because we are not accounting for TV pressure helping the spring. This is why you
want to check it at minimum throttle, so TV has the least effect.
Speedometer Ratios
Finally, let's look at speedometer ratios.
Suppose we put an exchange transmission in a car, and now the speedometer is off, because the speedometer drive gear has a different tooth count.
What do we have to do to the driven gear to correct it?
Let's say the old drive gear had 7 teeth and the old driven gear had 21 teeth. The exchange unit had 8 teeth on the drive gear.
Old Drive Gear divided by the New Drive Gear = Ratio
7 teeth divided by 8 teeth = 0.875
Old Driven Gear divided by Ratio = New Driven Gear
21 teeth divided by 0.875 = 24 teeth
A 24 tooth driven gear will correct the speedometer error.
Let's do one more speedometer change. This time the old drive is 9, and the new drive is 10. The old driven gear is still 21.
Old Drive Gear divided by New Drive Gear = Ratio
[email protected]
445
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 967
9 tooth divided by 10 tooth = 0.9
Old Driven Gear divided by Ratio = New Driven Gear
21 tooth divided by 0.9 = 23.33 teeth
We can't get a 23.3 tooth count so we round it off to 23 teeth. Now the speedometer will be close, but not exact, because we had to round off the
number.
A/T - Twenty Steps To Successful Repairs

TSB 89-27 (Sept)
SUBJECT: TWENTY STEPS TO SUCCESSFUL TRANSMISSION REPAIR
1. As you start work on a transmission, read your ATRA bulletins pertaining to that transmission. (If you do this every time, before you know it
you'll have the bulletins memorized.)
2. Clean the entire transmission, including the valve body.
3. Check pumps, valve bodies, and cases for warpage.
4. Flat file pumps, valve bodies, and cases. (Just a few strokes with the file to knock off high spots and handle burrs.)
5. Check all pump gear clearances.
6. Check planet pinion endplay and side to side motion.
7. Soak all planet assemblies.
8. Soak all friction material for 15-30 minutes.
9. Sand, tumble, or replace all steel plates.
10. Re-surface all drums on which a band rides.
11. Replace all rotating oi1 control rings.
12. Check all oil control rings, and rubber products in their bores for proper fit.
13. Replace all major support bushings and bushings that control lube oil.
14. Pre-lubricate all bushings and thrust washers.
15. Pre-lube pumps.
16. Pre-fill torque converters.
17. Use available manuals to find specifications.
18. Set correct clutch and band clearances
19. Take the time to set total unit endplay
20. Use a torque wrench on all pumps and valve bodies.

A/T - Math Part II

TSB: 89-30 (Oct)
SUBJECT: TRANSMISSION MATH - Part II
Planetary Gear Sets:
Knowing the gear ratios of an automatic transmission can come in handy at times -- especially when you're swapping transmission types or
differentials. The problem is in trying to find a manual with the ratios listed. What do you do?
[email protected]
446
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 968
BREAK OUT THE CALCULATOR, AND FIGURE IT OUT.
When you figure the gear ratios for planetary gear sets, it is just like any other gear set. You divide the output gear by the input. Also, don't count
the idler gear; planetaries are considered idler gears. Set them aside, their tooth count doesn't matter.
Now for the tricky part -- which gear do you consider the input, and which one the output? Figure 1 shows a planetary gear set with 34 teeth on the
ring gear and 20 teeth on the Sun gear.
FOR GEAR REDUCTION, one of the gears is held stationary, and the other is used for the INPUT. THE TOOTH COUNT FOR THE OUTPUT
GEAR IS THE SUM OF THE SUN GEAR AND THE RING GEAR, so if you are using the Sun gear for the input, then the ring gear + the Sun
gear divided by the Sun gear = Ratio.
EXAMPLE: 34 + 20 divided by 20 = 2.7:1 This is how 1st gear on a THM 700 R4 is calculated. (See figure)
When the ring gear is used as the input, then the ring gear + the Sun gear divided by the ring gear = Ratio.
EXAMPLE: 34 + 20 divided by 34 = 1.58 This is now 2nd gear on a THM 350 is calculated. (See figure)
FOR OVERDRIVE, the sum of the ring gear + Sun gear is used for the input tooth count.
So, IF THE SUN GEAR IS HELD, then the ring gear divided by (ring gear + Sun gear) = Ratio
EXAMPLE: 34 divided by (34 + 20) = .63:1 Look familiar?
[email protected]
447
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 969
The A4LD, the THM 200-4R, the A-140E, the A-40D, the THM 325-4L are some of the units that use this method of getting overdrive. (See
figure)
If the ring gear is held, then the Sun gear divided by (ring gear = Sun gear) = Ratio
EXAMPLE: 20 divided by (34 + 20) = .37:1 (See figure)
REVERSE IS THE EASIEST - THE PLANET IS HELD.
The Sun gear is the input, and the ring gear is the output. The formula for this is: The ring gear divided by the Sun gear = Ratio.
EXAMPLE: 34 divided by 20 = 1.7 (See figure)
Occasionally, the ring gear is used as the input, and the Sun gear as the output.
The formula for this is: The Sun gear divided by the ring gear = Ratio.
EXAMPLE: 20 divided by 34 = .59

(See figure)
[email protected]
448
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 970
Notice that the output is overdriven.
A transmission using this method must use another planetary gear set to reduce the output. The Mercedes W3A-040 is a good example of this
To get more than one gear forward and a reverse, requires multiple, or compound planetary gear sets.
Two of the most common of these are the SIMPSON GEAR SET, used in transmissions like the THM 350, the Ford C-4, and the TF 6 & 8, and the
RAVIGNEAUX GEAR SET, found in transmissions such as the FMX, the AOD, and the T-35.
Figuring out all the ratios for these transmissions is a little tricky, so I'll give you the formulas, and let you figure out how these formulas were
derived.
THE SIMPSON GEAR SET:
For this example I'll use a THM 200, which has 74 TEETH ON THE FRONT RING GEAR, 42 TEETH ON THE FRONT SUN GEAR, 30
TEETH ON THE REAR SUN GEAR, AND 62 TEETH ON THE REAR RING GEAR.
The formula for 1ST GEAR is: rear ring divided by rear Sun x front Sun plus front Sun + front ring divided by front ring.
EXAMPLE: On the THM 200, it would be:
62 divided by 30 x 42 + 42 + 74 divided by 74 = 2.74:1
SECOND GEAR is easy: Front Sun + front ring divided by front ring.
EXAMPLE: 42 + 74 divided by 74 = 1.57:1
THIRD GEAR is Direct Drive, or 1:1
REVERSE is rear ring divided by rear Sun
EXAMPLE: 62 divided by 30 = 2.06
THM 440-T4 (BACKWARDS SIMPSON):
The THM 440 T4 is sort of a backwards version of a Simpson gear set, and although it looks complicated, it really is very simple.
The front Sun gear has 26 teeth, while the rear Sun gear has 42. The front ring gear has 62 teeth, but keep in mind that it is part of the rear carrier,
just as the rear ring gear is part of the front carrier, with a tooth count of 74.
As I said earlier, the THM 440 T4 is sort of a backwards version of a Simpson gear set, so in figuring the ratio for 1ST GEAR -- it is identical,
except you substitute the words "front" and "rear" in the appropriate places. Front ring divided by front sun x rear Sun + rear Sun + rear ring
divided by rear ring = Ratio
EXAMPLE: 62 divided by 26 x 42 + 42 + 74 divided by 74 = 2.92:1
2ND GEAR: Rear Sun + rear ring divided by rear ring
Example: 42 + 74 divided by 74 = 1.57:1
3RD GEAR: Direct Drive, or 1:1
4TH GEAR: Front ring divided by (front Sun + front ring = Ratio
EXAMPLE: 62 divided by (26 + 62) = .74:1
RAVIGNEAUX GEAR SET:
This is considered a compound gear set, and for this example I'll use an AOD, which has:
36 teeth on the front Sun gear

30 teeth on the rear Sun gear, and
72 teeth on the ring gear
The formula for first gear is: Ring gear divided by rear Sun gear = Ratio
EXAMPLE: 72 divided by 30 = 2.4:1
SECOND GEAR formula is: Rear Sun + front Sun divided by rear Sun x Ring divided by (Ring + front Sun)
[email protected]
449
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 971
EXAMPLE: (30 + 36) divided by 30 x 72 divided by (72 + 36) = Ratio 66 divided by 30 x 72 divided by 108 = 1.47
THIRD GEAR is Direct, or 1:1
FOURTH GEAR is: Ring gear divided by (ring gear + front Sun gear) = Ratio
EXAMPLE: 72 divided by (72 + 36) = .67:1
REVERSE on a Ford AOD is: Ring gear divided by front Sun gear.
EXAMPLE: 72 divided by 36 = 2:1
A/T - Choosing the Right ATF

TRANSMISSION: ALL
BULLETIN: # 9002006
SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Fluid
DATE: Feb 1990
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
CHOOSING YOUR ATF
Different ATF's (Automatic Transmission Fluid) can have different frictional properties which can produce different shift characteristics. You may
have already experienced problems like lock-up shudder, or squawks on shifts and have corrected them by changing the fluid. This alone tells, you
that friction material and fluids are critical in today's cars.
MEETING THE O.E.M. SPECIFICATIONS
The first thing to consider when choosing an ATF is "Does it meet the O.E.M. specification?" ATF's wishing to be labeled as DEXRON II and/or
MERCON must first meet the respective minimum requirements. It's important to note that even though the specification for DEXRON II and
MERCON are currently very similar, THEY ARE NOT IDENTICAL. Also note, even fluids which meet the same specification may not be
identical. One fluid may just meet a specification and, another may far surpass it. You should know what your fluids properties are! You can get
that information from your fluid supplier.
EVALUATING YOUR FLUID
Ask your supplier to prove (certify) that the fluid meets O.E.M. specifications (MERCON OR DEXRON II). He will do that by supplying you with
the license (certification) number issued to him by the O.E.M.
[email protected]
450
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 972
A DEXRON-II license number (sometimes referred to as a "D" number) will always start D-2. A typical DEXRON license number can be seen in
Figure 2.
MERCON license numbers will be six digits starting with M as shown in Figure 3..
TRY TO MEET SEVERAL SPECIFICATIONS!
DEXRON II and MERCON have different minimum specifications, so a product that meets BOTH specifications may be better then those meeting
only one spec. Meeting other specs, in addition to the first two can be an added benefit. If a fluid is licensed as DEXRON II AND MERCON as
well as others like Allison C-4, or Caterpillar TO-2/TO-4, it means the fluid had to pass more tests and may be a better fluid.
Lastly, demand that the license numbers be placed on all your invoices especially if you buy in bulk. If your supplier is unwilling, it is very likely
that they are supplying you an unlicensed fluid. Licensed suppliers are required to supply the license numbers to their customers as part of their
agreement with the O.E.M.
OTHER THINGS TO CHECK
So now you've narrowed your choices down to a few suppliers that have O.E.M. license numbers. How do you compare two fluids that meet the
same O.E.M. Spec.? Ask your supplier to give you the viscometrics on the fluid you buy.
An excellent "bench mark of the overall quality of a fluid is its viscosity at -40 degrees. This is measured in "centipoise" or "cPs". DEXRON II
specification says viscosity will be no more then 50,000 cPs @ - 40 degrees. (Some poor fluids have tested at over 1,000,000 cPs) In general, the
lower the number, the better the fluid.
Keep in mind that as the number goes down the price of the fluid usually goes up. (You get what you pay for) Most good fluids will average around
[email protected]
451
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 973
35,000 cPs. Hydrotreated (or Hydrocracked) fluids average around 20,000 cPs or less. (Hydrotreating is a refining process done to the base oil to
clean out contaminants or impurities) Synthetic ATF's average 10,000 cPs or less, and some are as low as 5000 cPs. Viscosity at -40 degrees is a
function of the base stock from which the ATF is made. A low number indicates a premium base oil OR an expensive refining process.
(Hydrotreating)
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:
Transmission Digest August '89

Page 91 December '89 Page 51
BULLETIN RECAP
^ Only use fluids with O.E.M. approvals.
^ Try to get a fluid that meets more than one spec (e.g DEXRON II AND MERCON)
^ Check the viscosity at -40 degrees. The lower the number the better.
^ Avoid bargain basement fluids with no license numbers.

M/T - Difficult to Shift, Diagnostic Tips

Group 23
Manual Transmission
Bulletin Number
23 01 99
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1999
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 23 01 88 (1581) dated February 1988 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I.
binder.
SUBJECT:
Manual Transmission Difficult to Shift - Diagnostic Tips
MODEL:
All with Manual Transmission
Situation:
Transmission may be difficult to shift especially first gear engagement and/or gear shift linkage is binding.
Note:
Field observations have indicated that a transmission which is difficult to shift (especially into first gear) is primarily a clutch related problem
and only in isolated cases a failure in the transmission itself.
Procedure:
If the above customer complaint is received the following diagnostic tips will assist in troubleshooting a clutch, gear shift linkage or transmission
problem.
Verify the customer complaint:
Note:
Engage the parking brake and assure that no people or objects are in the vehicle's path.
- Run the engine at idle speed
- Press the clutch pedal to the floor
- From the neutral stick shift position engage first gear
If first gear is difficult to engage, hold the stick shift at the resistance point (approximately half of the total stick shift travel) with constant force.
Then switch the ignition off with the other hand.
Diagnosis 1:
[email protected]
452
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 974
If first gear now engages completely, i.e. the stick shift moves to the end position without any additional pressure applied, there is a problem in the
clutch system.
Explanation:
Because the clutch does not uncouple completely, a residual torque is transmitted to the transmission input shaft when the engine is running. This
inhibits the release and meshing of the sliding sleeve, in the transmission, at the end of the synchronization process.
Turning the engine off relieves the input shaft of this torque thus simulating a completely uncoupled clutch.
Diagnosis 2:
If the stick shift remains at the resistance point, there is a problem in the external gear shift linkage or in the transmission.
Cause:
Diagnosis 1:
Possible causes for a clutch problem as per Diagnosis 1 above are:
- Input shaft taper splines not lubricated properly I grease dried out.
- Clutch disc difficult to move on transmission input shaft.
- Clutch disc wobble.
- Air in the hydraulic system of clutch mechanism.
- Release bearing defective or difficult to move on the guide sleeve.
- Clutch disc or pressure plate broken I worn out.
Diagnosis 2:
Possible causes for gear shift linkage binding and/or internal transmission problems as per Diagnosis 2 above:
- External gearshift linkage binding (shift rod joints stiff).
- Stick shift bellows boot incorrectly installed (positioned too high or too low on the stick shift lever).
- Sound deadening between the outer gear shift linkage and the body incorrectly installed and/or distorted.
Possible causes inside of the transmission:
- Faulty synchronization.
- Internal gear shift linkage binding.
- Water in the transmission fluid. (rare)
Correction:
Diagnosis 1:
- Remove the transmission.
- Remove and/or inspect the pressure plate, clutch disc and release bearing. (Replace components if necessary.)
Note:
The plastic sliding sleeve which the clutch release bearing slides on should never be lubricated since the grease will allow the clutch wear
particles and other contamination to build up and cause an increase in clutch pedal effort. See Service Information bulletin 21 01 94 for
further information.
- Carefully clean the transmission input shaft (tapered splines and guide section of shaft).
- Using a paint brush, apply a thin coating of "Esso UNIREX 82" grease on the transmission input shaft (tapered splines and guide section of the
shaft).
Note:
"Esso UNIREX S2" taper spline grease was phased into production approximately 4/98 and replaces "Microlube G~61 BMW" grease. The new
grease has proven to be more resistant to lubrication breakdown under all operating conditions and is available under BMW part number 83 23
[email protected]
453
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 975
9 416 138.
Only use "Esso UNI REX 82" taper spline grease when repairs become necessary which involve the cleaning and lubrication of the transmission
input shaft.
- Reinstall the transmission.
For additional information on troubleshooting the clutch refer to the repair manual section 2190.
Diagnosis 2:
- Carefully inspect the gear shift linkage areas described in Diagnosis 2 section above. Repair as necessary.
- If the gear shift linkage is functioning properly without binding the cause is an internal fault in the transmission.
Note:
If the transmission is replaced due to an internal fault, using a paint brush apply a thin coating of "Esso UNIREX 82" grease on the transmission
input shaft (tapered splines and guide section of the shaft) before installing the new transmission.
Parts Information:
Part Number Qty Description
83 23 9416 138 1 "Esso UNIREX 82" (40g tube)
Information only.
Flywheel and Attaching Hardware - Change

GROUP 11
Engine
Bulletin
11 05 88 (1742)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1988
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
Flywheel and Attaching Hardware Change
MODEL:
M3
Situation:
A flywheel modification has been phased in gradually since June 1988.
NOTE:
The new version flywheel can be used on earlier engines; however, the correct bolts must always be matched to the flywheel.
OLD VERSION NEW VERSION
Description Part Number Part Number
Flywheel 11 22 1 307 542 11 22 1 311 862
Mounting bolt 11 22 0 616 142 11 22 0 616 143
Bolt length 28 mm 22 mm
Flange thickness 17 mm 11 mm
Installation:
1) Clean crankshaft threaded bores.
2) Lock flywheel with special tool No. 11 2 160.
3) Always use new expansion bolts (never reuse flywheel bolts!).
[email protected]
454
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 976
4) Seal bolt threads with red Loctite(R) No. 270.
5) Torque to specifications (105 N-m/76 ft.lbs).
Parts
Information:
The next edition of the E30 parts microfiche will contain this updated information.
Warranty
Status:
Information only.
Alpine/Pioneer CD Player - Mounting Brackets

Group 65
Radio and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
65 08 90 (3184)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1991
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 65 08 90 dated January 1991. It incorporates further information concerning exchange units (see
Situation # 1).
Please remove and discard S.I. 65 08 90 (3184) dated January 1991 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT: Alpine/Pioneer CD Player Mounting Brackets
Models: All
Situation # 1: When exchanging old style Pioneer CD changer (Models CDX-M83 or

CDX-M90) for the new smaller, 3rd generation Pioneer CD changer
(P/N 88 88 1 600 261), also order special bracket kit
(P/N 88 88 1 600 264) for installing the changer. This kit includes the
power cable. The old bracket is too large to fit the exchange CD changer
properly.
Situation # 2: On some E34 vehicles there may be a problem with the mounting location
of the Alpine CD Player. The location of the threaded inserts (in the trunk side
of the parcel shelf) used to mount the two-piece bracketry
(P/N 65 12 9 059 415) may be too far to the left (driver's) side of
the vehicle. With the player mounted to the brackets (using the original
marked holes) the trunk lid hinge may hit the side of the player when the
trunk lid is closed.
If the trunk lid hinge hits the CD player, the Alpine bracket must be modified using the following procedure:
[email protected]
455
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 977
Instructions
1) See illustration # 1. Identify the four holes (A, B, C, D) in the CD side of the two-piece bracketry to be used to attach the bracket to the
Alpine bracket.
2) See illustration # 2. Identify the holes in the Alpine bracket marked A and B in the diagram. These holes were not used in the original
mounting instructions but will be used in this installation.
3) Position the CD side of the two-piece bracketry on top of the Alpine bracket so that holes A and B in both brackets line up.
4) Use the CD side of the two-piece bracketry as a template to mark the location of holes C and D on the Alpine bracket.
5) Separate the two pieces. Drill a 6 mm hole at the marked locations. Clean and deburr the holes.
[email protected]
456
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 978
6) See illustration # 3. Use the nuts, bolts and washers from the CD installation kit to secure the two brackets together using holes A, B, C, D as
outlined in the illustration.
7) Proceed with the installation of the CD player as outlined in the installation instructions included in the kit.
Oil Service Indicator - Resetting

Group 62
Instruments
Bulletin Number
62 10 91 (3399)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1991
Product Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin supercedes S.I. 62 10 91 (3399), dated October 1991. It incorporates a revised procedure.
Please remove and discard S.I. 62 10 91 (3399) dated October 1991 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT: Resetting of Service Indicator for Oil Service
Situation: On E36 vehicles with Instrument Clusters having a software level up to and including level 14.0, it may be, difficult to reset
the S.I. display after an Oil Service.
The resetting function for the inspection operates correctly.
Correction: After pressing the yellow oil service reset button on the S.I. resetting tool (# 62 1 110), if the indicator is not reset, this
operation should be repeated until successful (several times if necessary).
Important Notes:
1) It is not possible to reset the indicator with the BMW Service Tester or MoDiC.
2) The Instrument Cluster should not be replaced for this complaint.
3) The red inspection button on the S.I. resetting tool should not be pressed if no inspection has been performed.
Warranty
[email protected]
457
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 979
Tools - Service Indicator Resetting and Adapter
Group 62
Instruments
Bulletin Number
62 07 91 (3357)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT:
Resetting Service Indicator
MODELS:
All equipped with 20-pin diagnostic connector
Situation:
Difficulty in resetting the Service Indicator of the above-mentioned vehicles may be encountered when using BMW special tool P/N 88 88 6 621
100 (15 pin tool), in conjunction with BMW special tool P/N 88 88 6 621 140 (adapter, 15 to 20 pin). Please note that this combination (S.I.
resetting tool and adapter) has been superseded by BMW special tool P/N 88 88 6 621 110 (20 pin tool). Please refer to S.I. 04 28 89 (1994).

Ignition Timing Angle - Diagnostic Readout

Group 12
Engine - Electrical
Bulletin Number
12 01 91 (3202)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT:
Engine Test-Ignition Timing Angle Diagnostic Readout
MODEL:
M3
Situation:
When performing an engine test, the ignition timing angle cannot be read out on some vehicles. However, there is no effect on the proper
functioning of the engine management system.
Cause:
The three wires in the female plug housing (connector C152) for the TDC position sensor were incorrectly inserted when the wiring harnesses were
produced.
The three-pole plug connection is located on the firewall under the plastic cover and can be identified by a red plastic wire tie.
Correction:
Peel back rubber cap from female plug and cut the three wires as close to the plug housing as possible. Using the appropriate female connectors and
a new plug housing (P/N 12 52 1 706 068), insert wires as follows:
Chamber 1: yellow wire

Chamber 2: black wire
Chamber 3: shielded wire
Warranty
Status:
Covered under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect code: 12 11 27 79 00
Labor allowance: 4 FRUs
[email protected]
458
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 980
Instrument Cluster - Cannot Be Coded With MoDic

Group 62
Instruments
Bulletin Number
62 15 91 (3452)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Instrument Cluster Cannot Be Coded with MoDiC
Situation: When attempting to code an Instrument Cluster (or other control units), the MoDiC may display the message "no coding data
available for this control unit version".
Cause: Memory fault in the MoDiC.
Note: MoDiCs with serial numbers 1610 through 3574 only may be affected.
Correction: An update program is under development for the affected MoDiCs. This program will be addressed in a separate Service
Information Bulletin.
Until this update is implemented, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the MoDiC to the vehicle on which the coding (or diagnosis) is to be performed.
2. Load the appropriate software into the MoDiC via the Service Test.
3. Perform coding (or diagnosis) on the vehicle, without disconnecting the MoDiC from the vehicle's electrical system
after the loading procedure is completed.
If coding or diagnosis is not possible using this procedure, this could be due to one of the following causes:
- MoDiC is not loaded with correct coding or diagnosis diskette.
- A control unit is being coded for which coding data and diskette are not yet available.
- Operator error when using the MoDiC.
Warranty
Service Information
Date: January 1995
Section: 8
System: MoDiC
Version: 14.0 Diagnostics
Model: All
Control Module: All
Subject:
[email protected]
459
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 981
Updated MoDiC Diagnostic Software
Situation:
A revised and expanded version of the MoDiC Diagnostic Software has been developed. With the release of V14.0 MoDiC Software, Version 13.0
Diagnostic Software (P/N 01 00 1 468 613) has become invalid.
Parts Information:
Version 14.0 MoDiC 01 00 1 468 613 $51.95

Diagnostic Software
The above software will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional copies may be purchased through your PDC.
Information Binder under Bulletin 1-24 or Service Information 00 19 86 (1257).
Program Additions
1. Update information for all control modules.
2. The 2013 Service Tester will no longer download software to BMW MoDiC.
3. A new security feature in the software will automatically erase your password twice a year. Please note that the password is the number that
you made up and entered. This should not be confused with your code number which came in the MoDiC station and cannot be changed.
When your password is erased, the message "Enter Code Number" will be displayed. Keep both of these numbers in a safe place. If you have
misplaced your code number, please contact the Technical Hotline with:
1. Your Name
2. Dealer Name
3. Dealer Code
4. MoDiC Station Serial number
4. High density diskettes have been utilized. Because of this, only 2 diskettes have been used per set.
5. Data has been condensed. This allows you to load more programs into the MoDiC.
Diskette Contents
Version 14.0 MoDiC Software comprises of 2 diskettes: 14.0A and 14.0B.
Contents Disc 14.0A
Required
Space
1. Diagnosis V14.0 283

2. DME 618
3. EGS 225
4. EML 140
Contents Disc 14.0B
Required
Space
1. VNC 5
2. GSR 5
3. CVM 16
4. VMX 4
5. FHK 10
6. Heater-A/C 71
7. SHD 10
8. Xenon Lights 22
9. PDC 23
10. LSM 9
11. SPM/SM 27
12. Airbag 24
13. DWA 29
14. BC/MID 33
[email protected]
460
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 982
15. LKM 11
16. Instrument Cluster 101
17. IR 41
18. ZKE/ZVM 150
19. EKM 36
20. ADS 3
21. EDC 10
22. AHK 66
23. ABS/ASC/ABD 124
24. GSA 14
25. DSC 27
26. ABS Tester 17
27. Brief Test 92
Diagnosis Programs For Control Modules
[email protected]
461
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 983
Version 14.0 diskettes contain diagnosis programs for the listed control modules.
Control modules in bold are not currently available on U.S. models.
Loading V14.0 MoDiC Software with the MoDiC Station
1. Load "Diagnosis V14.0" before any other program is loaded. This is the base program for all other programs that are to be loaded. This program
must remain in the MoDiC regardless of any other V14.0 programs that are erased to increase memory space.
[email protected]
462
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 984
2. All other V14.0 programs must be loaded separately. Due to the large number of programs available on V14.0 the MoDiC (I or II) is not able to
save all programs simultaneously.
3. Loading and deleting of software V14.0 is accomplished in the same manner as all previous MoDiC (MoDiC Station compatible software). See
IDC 009/92-08, pages 3 and 4 for further details.
Test Code Printing
Test Code printing is accomplished in the same manner as previously detailed in IDC 1004/92-8.
Note:
Disregard step 1. This no longer applies.
General Instructions
Memory capacity in the MoDiC II is not capable of storing all programs. For this reason only load those programs which are used frequently. Also,
do not load programs that are not currently used in the U.S.
Proper Care and Feeding of Your Diskette
Don'ts
1. Bend
2. Get them wet
3. Store near magnetic sources, such as motors, magnetic screw drivers, power sources, etc.
4. Keep away from extreme heat
Do's
1. Keep them in a cool dry place
2. Keep them in the IDC Binder or protective diskette box

Service Information
Bulletin#: IDC 1015/95-15
Date: February 1995
Section: 15
System: MoDiC
Version: 12.0 Coding ZCS
Model: All
Control Module: All
Subject:
Updated MoDiC Software - This IDC supersedes IDC 1011/94-15 - Version 12.0 supersedes Version 11.2.
Situation:
Updated MoDiC software is available for the BMW MoDiC. MoDiC software does not operate the 2013 Service Tester.
This diskette contains encoding programs only. All diagnostic work should be done with the current diagnostic software.

P/N 01 11 9 788 251
Information Binder under bulletin 1-24 or Service Information #00 19 86 (1275).
[email protected]
463
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 985
Center.
DISKETTE CONTENTS
Req'd
Disc A: Space
Coding program for all models 380

Data E32 42
Data E34 134
Req'd
Disc B: Space
Data E31 90
Data E36 345
Data E38 207
Loading of V12.0 Software
Loading V12.0 Software
How to Load V12.0 software with the MoDiC Station

(MoDiC I or MoDiC II)
Label Printing
Used in conjunction with the MoDiC Station (menu #3, printing) The central coding key may be printed on coding labels. The MoDiC will store
the data for printing if:
2. The function "display coding key and store in MoDiC" is displayed and selected.
[email protected]
464
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 986
Program Additions
^ Updated information for all models
^ V12.0 will modify the deployment times of ZAE Control Modules on E36 vehicles equipped with M50 or S50 U.S. engines. The new
information is transmitted through #19 Airbag in the recoding section.
^ Only control modules that can be coded (on the vehicle the MoDiC is attached to) will be displayed on the MoDiC. The software determines
this through the Central Encoding Key.
^ The following control modules can be encoded with 12.0:
E36: KOMBI (Instrument Cluster)

ZKE IV, ZVM II
BC V, BC im E36 compact
AIRBAG
CVM
IHKR
ASC+T
EWS II
E38: EML, IIIS, PWG

IKE
CCM
IM
AIRBAG
GR II
IHKA
ABS/ASC V
EDC III+
EWS II
E31: EML IIIS, PWG

EKM/KOMBI
ZKE
LKM
DWA III, DWA IV
AIRBAG
LSM
ASC/DSC
EDC III
EWS II

DWA III, DWA IV
LSM
EDC III, EDC III+
EWS II

DWA III, DWA IV
AIRBAG
IHKR2, IHKR3
ABS/ASC V
EDC III, EDC III+
EWS II
^ After encoding IHKA control modules (E38), you must disconnect the battery of the control module for at least 10 seconds. After
reconnecting, the new encoding data will be activated.
For all other encodable control modules in the E38, turning the ignition off for at least 10 seconds will ensure activation.
^ During the encoding of an IKE or LM control module, the vehicle chassis will be "burned" into the control module. Once the chassis number
has been burned into that module, it can only be used in that vehicle. It is then impossible to change the chassis number.
If the chassis number has not yet been burned into the control module, the software will allow you to encode the control module without a firm
chassis number assignment (for diagnostic purposes). In this mode, the manipulation dot on the instrument cluster will be illuminated until the
control module is replaced by the old module or the new one is permanently encoded.
^ A coding program for EWS II has been added. EWS stands for Electronic Immobilizer System." If an EWS control module is replaced and the
[email protected]
465
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 987
information from the old EWS control module has been successfully retrieved and passed on to the new EWS, the EWS will automatically be
synchronized with the DME. If the information cannot be retrieved from the old EWS control module, the EWS and DME must be
synchronized using V5.0 (or newer) Programming software. Please refer to IDC 1014/95-15 and TRI 61 01 95 (2144) for more details on
EWS.
Version 12.0 coding replaces Version 11.2 coding.

DIS Schematic Information

Group 07
DIS
Bulletin Number
07 01 98
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1998
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
DIS Schematic Information
MODEL:
ALL
Situation:
The following information is for the purpose of compiling information regarding the use of the DIS Documents section. This SIB will be updated as
new items/software changes or additions are developed.
The Documents section of the DIS contains wiring schematics and related information such as pin assignments and component locations similar to
those found in printed ETMs for other models. Accessing the various components of DIS schematics is obviously different from printed versions
and is the subject of this IDC.
Document Abbreviations
The following document abbreviations can be found in the header of the document window or section boxes (1).
BS - block diagrams
EO - component locations
FB - functional descriptions
FP - functional test instructions
HI - help information
MM - measuring equipment
PB - pin assignments
SO - set points
SP - schematic with wire sizes, colors,
ST - connector view
Colored Frames and Colored Window Headers

Colored frames:
[email protected]
466
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 988
Colored frames within documents are active fields. The color of the frame changes when a field is selected. A displayed schematic will have the
colored frames in green. When a frame is selected for a closer view for example going from general module to power windows, the power windows
frame will turn yellow. The corresponding documents, measurements (if available) or test functions (if available) can be requested for the selected
component by pressing either the "Documents", "Measurement System" or "Test Schedule" buttons.
Colored Window Headers
Description headers (1) above the opened document window can also be selected. As with the colored frames when selected they go from green to
yellow. The same conditions for colored frames applies to window headers. In addition, the entire document with vehicle description can be
printed. Refer to "Printing Documents "for details.
Printed Documents
While in any screen if "Print" then "shield" is selected (2).
[email protected]
467
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 989
A copy of the screen complete with borders will be printed. This printing takes extra time and does not print the vehicle information or complete
schematics. For a more useful schematic printout follow the instructions below.
1. Highlight the header of the window that you wish to print. The header will turn yellow.
2. Select "Print"
3. Select "Document"
This will print a more useful schematic that will not have the borders but will contain:
1. Date
2. Time
3. Page number (this style of printout may contain multiple pages for entire schematics)
4. Description (example: Drivers side power window)
Vehicle information (example: 5 E39/540iA M62 Lim/USA LHD/1997)
The style of the schematic printed out will be closer in design to printed ETMs.
If you have selected a module with more complex peripherals such as the general module, the schematic may not contain printed descriptions of the
peripherals. To view a description of the pin assignments complete with:
1. Pin number
2. Pin Type
3. Description of signal type
4. Connection/measurement notes
Select the header on top of the schematic (turns yellow) then:
[email protected]
468
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 990
2. Select the "PB" description on the "Right page" in this example it was "A1 General Module PB"
3. Select "Display"
Now the general module schematic will be on the left page and the pin assignments.will be on the right. The pin assignment section (PB) and the
schematic (SP) can both be printed as described at the beginning of this section. This will allow you to have a complete layout of the desired
component and a description of the pin assignments.
You may also print a copy of the diagnosis report while in the document mode (3). The diagnosis report: will contain:
1. Date/Time
2. Retailer information
3. DIS software installed
4. Vehicle information
5. Quick test results
6. Operations performed in order
Moving About the Schematic
[email protected]
469
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 991
With the schematic of a component or system displayed you can find a connector location by:
1. Select the connector (turns yellow)

3. Select the connector # (EO) on the "Right Page"
4. Select "Display"
With the schematic of a component or system displayed you can find the connector view by:
1. Select the connector (turns yellow)

3. Select the connector # (ST) on the "Right Page"
4. Select "Display"
Note:
Connector location and view may be viewed at the same time by selecting EO and ST at the document page
Moving from a major component such as the general module (to use an example give above) to a sub-component such as the power window circuit
is an easy process.
1. Highlight the desired power window circuit (turns yellow)

2. Select "document"
3. Select "component" (SP) on "Left Page" (S07 98 U01 # 4)
4. Select "Display"
[email protected]
470
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 992
The schematic of the desired sub-component will now be displayed.
Further movements to other sub-components may be performed as described above. If you wish to back up one schematic or all the way to the first
schematic (general module in the example) simply:
Select the "-->" in a box on the left bottom side of the schematic. You will go back one screen for each selection of the "-->" (1).
Updated MoDic(R) Software - C11.0 ZCS Coding

Group 08
MODIC
Bulletin Number
08 03 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1997
Product Engineering
This IDC bulletin supersedes IDC 08 03 96 dated June 1997 which should be removed and discarded from your DC binder.
SUBJECT:
Updated MODIC Software C11.0 ZCS Coding
MODEL:
ALL
[email protected]
471
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 993
[email protected]
472
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 994
[email protected]
473
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 995
[email protected]
474
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 996
Situation:
A revised and expanded version of the MODIC ZCS coding Software has been developed. With the release of C11.0 MODIC Software, Version
C10.0 ZCS Encoding Software has become invalid.
Program Highlights
^ New data for E38 with DSC steering angle sensor
^ Only codeable control modules (on the vehicle in question) are displayed on the MODIC screen. The Central Coding Key determines which
control modules are codable.
^ Video modules must be coded to the vehicle when replaced. The coding sets the Video module language which is derived from the vehicles
ZCS.
^ When replacing an EWS III control module the alignment with the DME control module is automatically performed. This alignment
permanently aligns the DME control module to that vehicle and can no longer be swapped into another vehicle for test purposes.
conversion), write the new Central Coding Key on a label. Affix the label to the appropriate vehicle Central Coding Key sticker location. Place
the new label next to the old label. Cross out the old label. Label location -
^ After replacement the following control modules require coding with C11.0. When coding is complete check the control module's fault memory
and erase any faults present.

2. Press 2 -- Load diskette then --
5. Press "Y"-- Disc A will now load. Please note that if you do not have an earlier version of this software in your MODIC you will not have to
[email protected]
475
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 997
right)
Special Note:
Attach the MODIC to a car and press the "C" to erase parts of the loaded program. You erase a program by simply pressing the number and
Y or N."
Label Printing
Order extra labels through your PDC under P/N 81 22 1 466 646.
Parts Information
Software Version C11.0 A/B
P/N 01 11 9 788 251
Return any defective diskettes to BMW NA via the BMW Tool Warranty. Details of the program can be found in your Parts Information Binder
under bulletin 1-24 dated 4/95.
Additional copies may be purchased through your Parts Distribution Center. Technical Service Bulletin # IDC001928 Date: 920501
MoDic(R) System - Undefined Software Message

Information Diagnosis/Coding
Date: May 1992
Section: 8
System: MoDiC
Version: All MoDiC Software
Model: All
Control Module: N/A
Subject:
Undefined Software Message
Situation:
The message "TBS LEER" may appear on the MoDiC screen with no explanation. This means Text Building Stone (Text Memory Block) Empty.
This message has nothing to do with diagnostic or coding capabilities at the dealership level. It is used exclusively during the software production
process.
Solution:
If you come upon this message please note the software version and frame where it appeared on a "Pink Sheet" and send the pink sheet to BMW
through the normal channels.
DIS tester Software - Update

BULLETIN #: IDC 002/95-6
[email protected]
476
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 998
DATE: April 1995
SECTION: 6
SYSTEM: DIS
VERSION: 3.0
MODEL: ALL
CONTROL MODULE: ALL
SUBJECT:
Updated DIS Software
SITUATION:
New updated software is flow available for the DIS Tester. This IDC supersedes DC 002/956 dated October 1994 which should be removed from
your binder and discarded.
PROGRAM HIGHLIGHTS
^ Operational programs for V3.0 (DIS only) include:
1. E38 Diagnosis programs, schematics, installation locations, functional descriptions, pin assignments, connector views.
2. Version 15 Diagnostics for E30, E31, E32, E34 and E36.
3. Version 12.0 coding software for coding of control units that use the Central Coding Code (ZCS). For Series E31, E32 as of 10/91, E34 as of
10/91, E36 and E38.
^ Operation programs for MoDiC download include:
1. Version 12.0 coding. This program uses the same parameters as V12 DIS coding.
2. Version 1.0 coding code. Coding of control modules with individual codes. For Series E32 and E34 from 9/90 to 10/91.
3. Version 5.0 programming. DO NOT USE THIS PROGRAM. In its place use V5.1 programming (P/N 01 11 9 789 121. Refer to IDC
1014/95-6 for complete details. Do not attempt to load this program with the DIS. Loading should only be done with the MoDiC station.
4. Version 14.1 Diagnostics for Series E30, E31, E32, E34 and E36.
NOTE
Please be advised of the error described. This error will be present in both DIS and MoDiC V12.0 coding software.
^ New diagnostic program for EWS (Electronic Immobilization System).
PARTS INFORMATION
DIS Software V3.0

P/N 01 57 9 788 617
Price = Free of Charge to DIS Users
A complete set of V3.0 DIS software will be sent to all BMW dealers via the BMW Automatic Tool Shipment Program.
[email protected]
477
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 999
DIS Loading Instructions

DIS LOADING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Version 3.0 requires a complete system load. Version 3.0 includes the following:
1 DIS Installation 1 3.5 inch floppy disc (red label)

1 DIS Installation 2 3.5 inch floppy disc (red label)
1 DIS Basissystem V3.0 CD (red label)
1 DIS Program V3.0 CD (white label)
If you do not have all of the above software, do not start the loading procedure. Contact your PDC.
2. After your installation is complete keep the two installation floppy diskettes and the Basic system CD in a safe place. Do not throw them out.
3. A set of loading instructions are illustrated with this bulletin. Follow them step by step.
Proper Care and Feeding of CDs
3. The disc revolves at high speed within the CD drive. Never use a defective or bent disc.
4. If the disc should become soiled, gently wipe the surface with a soft lint-free cloth, wiping from the center of the disc to the edge.
5. Do not use record cleaning sprays or anti-static agents on CDs
6. Do not store in direct sunlight.
CD Return Procedure
CD RETURN PROCEDURE
As agreed in your DIS USE AGREEMENT and defined in the General Terms of License Agreement for BMW EPC/TIS" under section 6 (Property
rights of the data carrier), whenever the licensee receives a new version of the product on a data carrier (CD), he shall return the data carrier (CD)
used previously to the provider.
- EPC
- TIS
- DIS
charge of $300-00 each. These will be credited to you upon your return of the earlier version CD of the same part number.
- P/N 86 00 0 000 043 EPC

- P/N 86 00 0 000 045 TIS
- P/N 86 00 0 000 046 DIS
[email protected]
478
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1000
Precoded Control Module Order Form
Please fax this form to the BMW Direct Shipment Department at 1-800-428-8806. This form should only be used for E31 and E36 vehicles
produced from 3/95 and later. A Precoded Control Module will be shipped directly to you.
DIS V3.0 Installation Instruction

DIS V3.0 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
Before starting this procedure make sure that you have:
1 DIS Installation 1 3.5" floppy disc (red label)

1 DIS Installation 2 3.5" floppy disc (red label)
1 DIS Basissystem V3.0 CD (red label)
1 DIS Program V3.0 CD (white label)
If you do not have all of the above software do not start this procedure. Total loading time is approximately 3 hours.
1. With the DIS at the administration screen, deactivate CD drive 1 and remove the CD caddy. Repeat this procedure for CD drive 2.
2. Switch the power switch on the monitor off.
3. Connect the keyboard to the interface in the MoDiC station drawer.
4. Insert V3.0 "Installation 1" floppy in the floppy drive. The write protect tab must be open.
5. Switch the power switch on the monitor on. After approximately two minutes the message "Insert floppy Installation 2 and press <return>
will be displayed.
6. Remove Installation 1 floppy and insert the Installation 2 floppy in the disc drive. Press the enter/return key. The write protect tab must be
closed.
7. When the message "Insert Basic System CD in drive CD1 and press return" appears on the screen, place the Basic System CD (red label) in a
CD caddy and insert the caddy into CD drive 1 (top drive).
8. Press return. This installation procedure takes approximately 30 minutes. Note: An error message may appear on the screen during this
installation. Ignore this message.
[email protected]
479
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1001
9. At the end of the installation procedure, the illustrated message will appear:
10. Remove the Installation 2 disc and press return.
NOTE
Touch screen calibration will be the next operation. Touch screen calibration is a critical process that sets up the hardware and the software.
Please take great care and follow the instructions.
11. The message "Please touch the bottom left hand corner will be displayed. Touch the bottom left comer and lift your finger - do not slide your
finger. Wait for the message "first calibration point reached. Please touch the right hand top corner."
12. Touch the right hand top corner and lift your finger.
13. An arrow will now appear at the lower left hand corner. Touch this spot. Be careful to lift your finger.
14. An arrow will now appear at the upper right hand comer. Touch this spot. Be careful to lift your finger. Crossed lines will be displayed at the
end of this step. They will disappear in a few seconds. The cursor setting may be affected if the screen is touched with a metallic object.
15. When the language selection screen is displayed, select "3 English (US)." Selection must be carried out via the keyboard. Press return.
16. You will be asked to confirm this. Confirm your selection and press return.
NOTE
The language screen inputs are mandatory. Further inputs are not possible unless the same language has been selected two times.
17. A dealer data screen is now displayed. Dealer data must be input via the keyboard. Fields 1 = dealer number, 2 = company name and 4 =
address are mandatory fields. These fields must be input correctly or they cannot be exited. The qualifiers for these fields are as follows:
1. DEALER NO. AN INPUT OF EXACTLY 6 DIGITS MUST BE MADE.
2. COMPANY NAME AN INPUT MUST BE MADE OF AT LEAST 2 CHARACTERS.
4. ADDRESS AN INPUT MUST BE MADE OF AT LEAST 2 CHARACTERS.
18. Enter the required data, follow each line entered with the return key. Lines 3, 5 and 6 may be skipped by pressing the return key.
19. A screen will appear that will display all of the dealer data that you have entered. Press "Y" if it is correct. If you press "N" you will be asked
which line you wish to correct. Enter the line number and retype the information. Press return.
20. The DIS start screen will now appear.
NOTE
ALL FURTHER FUNCTIONS WILL BE CARRIED OUT VIA THE TOUCH SCREEN. DO NOT REMOVE THE KEYBOARD WHILE
THE TESTER IS POWER UP. YOU MAY REMOVE THE KEYBOARD THE NEXT TIME THE TESTER IS OFF.
21. The following steps will guide you through the installation of the DIS Program CD. Basissystem V3.0 must be installed before you load the
program CD. The version number of the installed basic system can be displayed by pressing the "services version" button at the DIS start
screen. The version of V3.0 basic system will read
"Administration 3.1.0
Basic system V3.0"
22. At the DIS start screen, activate "administration" and then highlight CD drive 1.
23. Press "deactivate CD." Remove the CD caddy from CD drive 1. Remove the Basissystem CD from the caddy.
24. Insert program CD (white label) in the caddy. The CD must be installed so that the CD label can be seen through the clear side of the caddy.
25. Carefully insert the program CD caddy into CD drive 1. Make sure that the label is up and the arrow on the caddy is forward.
26. Press the "activate CD" button. The version number will be displayed in the CD drive Allocation box. The version should read V3.0.
27. Press the "installation" button under "DIS."
[email protected]
480
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1002
28. A box will appear that will ask you to input a password. The password that must be entered is the last five digits of the dealer number that
you input. For example: If the dealer number that you entered was 012345, the password that you must enter is 12345.
29. A DIS installation box will now appear. Press "OK." The cursor will be displayed as an hourglass and "x" will fill the box until the loading is
complete. When loading is complete, press "OK."
30. Press "END" at the top of the screen and then press "quit." The DIS program CD must remain in the drive.
31. Press the "administration" button and select CD drive 2 in the dialog box.
32. Insert the TIS CD (11/94) with its caddy into CD drive 2. The arrow must be forward and the clear window up.
33. Press "activate CD." The version number of the CD will be displayed. The latest TIS CD is 11/94 V2.1.
34. Press "installation" then "OK." The cursor will again be displayed as an hourglass and "X" will fill the box. The TIS installation procedure
will take between two and three hours.
35. When loading is complete, press "OK."
36. Then press "end" and "quit." The TIS CD must remain in the drive.
MoDic(R) - Updated Software

Date: April 1992
Section: 15
System: MoDiC
Version: Encoding V5.01 A/B
Model: All
Control Module: All
Subject:
Updated MoDiC Software
Situation:
Updated MoDiC software is now available for the BMW MoDiC. MoDiC software does not operate the 2013 Service Tester.

P/N 01 11 9 786 441
Information Binder under bulletin 1-24 or Service Information # 00 19 86 (1257).
Center.
SOFTWARE VERSION 5.01 (For BMW MoDiC)
How to load the 5.01 Software
To help deter theft of your MoDiC from your service shop, a secret code has been built into the 5.01 software that will prevent an unauthorized
person downloading the software. Software must be downloaded when,
1. Memory batteries in the MoDiC die;
[email protected]
481
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1003
2. Fifty control units have been encoded;
3. New updated software has become available.
Downloading
Version 5.01 has a download menu that allows you to either erase any programs currently in the MoDiC memory, or not erase the MoDiC memory.
See sample menu.
Your secret code for V5.01 is the same code you were assigned for V4.02.
Partial load option.
Version 5.01 is the first version to contain a partial load option for the MoDiC.
This means that specific programs can be loaded independently of one another. The only restriction is the MoDiC memory limitation of the MoDiC
I (1 MB) and the MoDiC II (2 MB).
This makes it possible to run any combination of coding program, and diagnostic program until your MoDiC reaches its memory capacity.
For example, it is possible with a MoDiC II to have the following programs in the memory all at the same time:
5.01 Coding 01 11 9 786 441

3.0 Diagnostic 01 57 9 783 797
1.0 E36 Diagnostic 01 57 9 785 057
1.0 Tank Characteristic Line 01 57 9 781 647
Steps (For Modic II)

Downloading Steps (for MoDiC II)
1. Load Version 3.0 diagnostic in the normal manner.
2. Load Tank Characteristic Line in the normal manner.
3. Load both diskettes of 5.01 coding by selecting # 2 on the loading menu. See previous example of loading menu screen.
4. After both 5.01 diskettes have been loaded and the menu screen is displayed on the
Service Tester, remove 5.01 from the Service Tester drive and replace it with E36 Diagnostic software. Select # 2 again to begin loading without
memory removal.
Downloading Steps (For Modic I)

Loading of Version 5.01 is accomplished by using the same downloading sequence that 4.02 required.
Important - Diskette A must always be loaded before loading diskette B.
[email protected]
482
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1004
[email protected]
483
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1005
[email protected]
484
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1006
MoDic(R) - Current Diagnostic and Coding Software

Bulletin: IDC 008/91-20
Date: MAY 1992
Section: 20
System: BST/MoDiC
Version: ALL
Model: ALL
Control Module: ALL
Subject:
Current Diagnostic and Coding Software
Situation:
Below please find a list of current Service Tester and MoDiC software.
LIST OF CURRENT BMW SERVICE SOFTWARE
2013 Service Tester
Version Description Model Part Number
1.0 Diagnostic diskette E36 only 01 51 9 784 797

2.0 A & B Diagnostic diskette E31 only 01 57 9 785 047
9.0 A, B, & C Diagnostic diskette All except E31 & E36 01 57 9 784 677
Airbag Diagnostic diskette All 1992 and later 01 57 9 786 037
MoDiC
Version Description Model Part Number
[email protected]
485
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1007
5.01 Encoding E31,E32,E34,E36 01 11 9 786 441

3.0 Diagnostic All 01 57 9 783 797
1.0 Diagnostic E36 01 57 9 785 057
1.0 Tank Characteristic Line E32/E34 01 57 9 781 647
Service Information
Date: February 1995
Section: 15
System: MoDiC
Version: 5.1 Programming/Encoding
Model: DME 1.X/3.1/3.3/3.3.1/5.2
Control Module: All
Subject:
Updated MoDiC Software - This IDC supersedes IDC 1010/94-15. Version 5.1 Programming supersedes all previous Programming software.
Situation:
New software is available for the BMW MoDiC. MoDiC software does not operate the DIS Service Tester.
PROGRAM HIGHLIGHTS
^ For VANOS vehicles it is extremely important that the control unit or battery voltage are not removed/disconnected prior to beginning the
programming update procedure, unless you proceed as follows:
If the DME control module or battery voltage needs to be disconnected at any point prior to starting the update, the engine must be restarted
and all faults cleared before the update is performed.
^ Version 5.1 programming contains updated information for M60 engines (with automatic transmissions and without EWS II). The updated
information will be downloaded automatically when menu choice 3 - Exchange EPROM or 2 - Exchange Control Module is chosen.
^ MoDiC software version 5.1 (programming/encoding) will assist the technician in determining the part number of a proper replacement
EPROM or "basic" control module. This will be useful for the current service action involving M50 engine control module (DME M3.1)
EPROM replacements (see SI 12 08 94 (4117)) as well in any case where a DME control module needs to be replaced. During the so called
"determination process" this MoDiC software will interrogate the currently installed DME control module for its software and hardware
identification and suggest a proper replacement EPROM or "Basic" DME part number from its internal program memory. Naturally, this
determination process will only function if the DME identification is known to the MoDiC software; conversely, the technician should follow
the MoDiC's determination suggestion for a replacement EPROM or DME part number in all cases since such a suggestion will only be
displayed on the MoDiC if the DME identification has been accepted as plausible.
^ MoDiC software version 5.1 (programming/encoding) will allow DME variant coding of the following engine control module versions: DME
M1.1; M1.2; M1.3; M1.7.
^ MoDiC software version 5.1 (programming/encoding) will allow DME programming of the following engine control module versions: DME
M3.1; M3.3.1; M3.3; MS41.0 (M52); M5.2 (M73).
^ Due to program modifications on M60 B30 and M60 B40 engines, the engine timing and injection signal status pages (V14.0 Diagnostics)
will show incorrect values. This problem will be corrected in the next version of Diagnostic software.
^ At this time not all control modules (DME 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.3, 5.2) have a basic programmable control module available. If you run into this
situation, you must order a preprogrammed module. All programs for the control modules have been updated.
^ DME control modules (M50, M60, M73) may only be programmed one time. Control modules using variant encoding may be encoded up to
eight (8) times.
^ There is a new EWS (Electronic Immobilizer System) II program. If an EWS control module is replaced, it must be coded with Version 12.0
coding (or newer). If the information from the old EWS control module has been successfully retrieved and passed on to the new EWS, the
EWS will automatically be synchronized with the DME. If the information cannot be retrieved from the old EWS control module, the EWS
and DME must be synchronized using V5.1 or newer programming software. See # 4 under "Programming the Control Module" for more
information on synchronization. If the DME has been replaced, it must also be "synchronized" with the EWS. For more complete information
[email protected]
486
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1008
regarding EWS, please refer to TRI 61 01 95 (2144) and IDC 1015/95-15.
^ Version 5.1 programming contains updated information for the following condition:
1. Cold start and oxygen sensor thermal shock for DME 3.1 M50 without VANOS. The update information will be automatically downloaded
in the appropriate vehicle when either step 2 - "Exchange Control Unit" or step 3 "Exchange EPROM" is utilized.
Diskette Contents
DISKETTE CONTENTS
Determine Customer Service Measures
The menu for V5.1 has three options. They are as follows:
"Determine Customer Service Measures
This step is for special program modifications only. When activated, the program will automatically determine whether the vehicle it is
connected to is eligible for any current modification. If it is, it will display which ones and you may start the modification with the press of
the "Y" button. If the vehicle is not eligible, the program will display "No Programming Data Available for this SG Version."
Note:
Please disregard any Service Campaign numbers that may be displayed in the software. The control module may only be updated one (1)
time.
The modifications contained in V5.1 are as follows:
^ Cold start for DME 3.1 M50 with VANOS
Exchange Control Module

"Exchange Control Module"
This step is used to determine the basic control module part number that is to be used on the vehicle. This affects DME 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.3, 5.2
only. Under no circumstances should the parts microfiche be used in place of the determination step.
The programming procedure is divided into two steps:
The MoDiC reads the data (chassis number, part number of the basic control module, and part number of the programmed control module)
necessary for programming from the defective control module and determines the part numbers of the possible basic control modules which
may be installed in that vehicle.
Note:
If this is not possible, the data may be read off the label of the defective control module and entered manually into the MoDiC.
The MoDiC programs the newly installed basic control module with the aid of the data derived by Step 1. The new control unit label can be
printed out by the MoDiC station printer, or completed by hand.
The MoDiC programs the basic control module with the latest data. Because of this, the programmed basic control module may have a
different part number.
Basic control modules may only be programmed one time. If a basic control module can no longer be programmed, the message "Basic
control module defective. Install new control module" is displayed.
This procedure takes approximately three minutes. Extensive help information is available by pressing the "C" key on the MoDiC. This help
[email protected]
487
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1009
preprogrammed control module must be installed.
Exchange PROM
"Exchange EPROM"
This step is used to determine the part number for the programmable EPROM that is to be used on this vehicle. This step affects DME 3.1
and 3.3 only. The programming procedure is divided into two steps.
The MoDiC reads the data (chassis number, part number of the basic control module, and part number of the programmed control module)
necessary for programming from the defective control module and determines the part numbers of the possible EPROM which may be
installed in that vehicle.
If this is not possible, the data may be read off the label of the defective control module and entered manually into the MoDiC.
Step 2- "Program EPROM"
The MoDiC programs the newly installed EPROM with the aid of the data derived by Step 1. The new control unit label can be printed out
by the MoDiC station printer, or completed by hand.
The MoDiC programs the EPROM with the latest data. Because of this, the programmed basic control module may have a different part
number.
EPROMs may only be programmed one time. It is possible, however, to install another new EPROM.
This procedure takes approximately three minutes. Extensive help information is available by pressing the "C" key on the MoDiC. This help
Adjustment of EWS - DME Vehicles

"Adjustment EWS - DME Vehicles from 1/95"
This step is used to synchronize an EWS and DME control module after the DME has been replaced. If the EWS control module is replaced,
it must be coded with V12.0 or later coding software (IDC 1015/95-15).
The software will ask you to
1. Switch ignition on
2. Start adjustment EWS-DME Y/N
If you press "Y" the EWS and DME control modules will automatically be synchronized. If the car does not have EWS, the message "Control
Module Not Found" will be displayed.
If you press "N", the software will return to the main menu.
Please refer to TRI 61 01 95 (2144) for complete EWS details.

Loading V5.1 Software
[email protected]
488
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1010
How to Load V5.1 Software with the MoDiC Station

(MoDiC I or MoDiC II)
Label Printing
Used in conjunction with the MoDiC Station (menu #3, printing) coding labels may be printed out with the Central Key. The MoDiC will store the
data for printing if:
1. The function "display coding key and store in MoDiC" is displayed and selected.

PREREQUISITES FOR PROGRAMMING
The vehicle battery must be fully charged. During programming:

4. The MoDiC must not be disconnected.
Parts Information

P/N 01 11 9 789 121
Information Binder under bulletin 1-24 or Service Information # 00 19 86 (1275).
Center.
[email protected]
489
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1011
Note:
Be advised that the part number on the diskette (01 11 9 787 121) is NOT the correct part number. The correct part number is as stated above,
01 11 9 789 121.
Steering - Microfiche Error Update

Group 32
Bulletin Number
32 03 93 (3839)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1993
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Microfiche Error
MODELS:
E30
Situation:
E30 Repair Manual Microfiche, P/N 01 51 9 770 561, Edition 7, dated 7/90 contains an error on page 32-7/h, frame 30 32 136.
Correction:
The frame refers to special tool, P/N 321 180. This is incorrect; the correct P/N is 321 160.
Engine Oil Capacities - All Current Models

Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 11 90 (3149)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
August 1995
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 11 11 90 (3149) dated November 1994, which should be removed from your S.I. binder and
discarded.
SUBJECT:
MODELS:
All Current
[email protected]
490
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1012
Situation:
When checking the oil level after an oil change, the level should be in the upper third of the space between MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick. If
the dipstick displays an improper reading after adding the specified amount of oil, then verify that the engine has the correct dipstick installed. Part
numbers for all current dipsticks are also included in the attached table.
Warranty Status:
Information only.
Engine - Oil Capacities Chart Error

[email protected]
491
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1013
Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 11 90 (3149)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1992
Product Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 11 11 90 (3149) dated September 1992. It includes a correction for the E30 (S14) engine oil
capacity. Please remove and discard S.I. 11 11 90 (3149) dated September 1992 from your S.I. Binder.
SUBJECT:
Engine Oil Capacities Chart Error
MODELS:
E30 with S14 Engine
Situation:
Please be advised of the following error on the Engine Oil Capacities Chart which was distributed as an attachment to S.I. numbers 11 11 90 (3149)
and 00 22 92 (3647) (chrome coated chart) dated September 1992.
Error:
The oil capacities for the E30 (S14 engine) are located under E30 (M70 engine).
Correction:
Please correct your charts manually by deleting the oil capacities shown for "E30 M70" and inserting that information into the "E30 S14" box on
the chart.
These corrections will be made with the next update of the Engine Oil Capacities Chart.
Engine - Oil Capacities

Group 11
Engine
Bulletin Number
11 11 90 (3149)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1992
Service Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 11 11 90 (3149) dated May 1991. It corrects the oil capacities for the E36 (M50) and includes the
E36 (M42) oil capacities and dipstick part number.
Please remove and discard S.I. 11 11 90 (3149) dated May 1991 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
MODELS:
All Current
Situation:
When checking the oil level after an oil change, the level should be in the upper third of the space between the MIN and MAX marks on the
dipstick. If the dipstick displays an improper reading after adding the specified amount of oil, then verify that the engine has the correct dipstick
installed. Part numbers for all current dipsticks are also included in the table.
Warranty
Status:
Information only.
[email protected]
492
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1014
Engine oil capacities for current BMW models
Electrical Connnectors - Stabilant 22A Contact Enhancer

GROUP 61
Bulletin Number
61 05 00
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
Service Engineering
July 2000
[email protected]
493
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1015
This Service Information bulletins supersedes S.I. 61 05 00 dated May 2000.
SUBJECT
Stabilant 22A Electrical Contact Enhancer
MODEL
All
GENERAL INFORMATION
Connectors carrying low current, are particularly susceptible to the formation of deposits. These deposits affect the resistance of the circuit running
through the plug connector and, depending on the sensitivity of the particular circuit, can cause system malfunctions (very often intermittent in
nature), and the activation of warning lamps and check control indicators. Airbag circuits and sensor circuits are typical examples of low current
circuits.
In many cases, part replacement may temporarily cure the problem, not because the part was faulty, but because the wiping action of disconnecting
and reconnecting the connector wipes clean the metal to metal surfaces within the connector itself.
Where the connector may be the cause of the vehicle problem:
-- Without disconnecting the connector, if possible, measure the resistance of the circuit running through the connector to confirm the connector
has high resistance. A good connector will have close to zero ohms resistance.
-- Remove both male and female terminals from the connector housing and visually examine them to confirm the integrity of the wire crimps, and
in the case of certain types of male terminal, the integrity of the weld of the male pin to the terminal itself. Reinstall the terminals in their
housings.
-- Liberally spray both male and female connectors with a zero residue electrical contact cleaner.
-- Allow to air dry. Do not dry with shop air supply as this may recontaminate the connector.
-- Read and understand any Stabilant 22A safety precautions provided by the manufacturer.
-- Apply Stabilant 22A to both male and female connectors so the terminals are completely wet. A cotton swab may be used if required.
-- Reconnect the connectors while still wet.
Stabilant 22A evaporates and leaves a thin polymer film which is conductive between the mating surfaces, while staying non-conductive between
adjacent pins. At the same time it prevents the formation of any further harmful deposits.
NOTE:
Stabilant 22A must not be used on Oxygen Sensor connectors. To function, oxygen sensors require a flow of oxygen through the terminal
connector to the sensor element. Stabilant 22A will affect this flow of oxygen, and will result in irreparable damage to the sensor.
Stabilant 22A may be obtained directly from Wurth USA., Inc:
Wurth P/N - 893622
An initial supply consisting of:
(1) bottle P/N 593622 Stabilant 22A

(1) can P/N 89365 Wurth Zero Residue Electrical Contact
Cleaner will be shipped by Wurth USA
to
each BMW Center under the Automatic Shipment Program
[email protected]
494
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1016
Stabilant 22A may be claimed when used in conjunction with repairs performed under the terms of the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The sublet allowance claimed for Stabilant 22A, should reflect the value of the product used for the repair, up to a maximum of $2.
Electrical Trouble Shooting Manuals - Available on CD

Group 00
Bulletin Number
00 10 98
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1999
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 10 98 dated August 1998 which should be removed and discarded from your S.I. binder.
Changes to this revision are identified by asterisks.
SUBJECT:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manuals Available on CD-ROM
MODEL:
E30, E36 (3 Series)
E28, E34 (5 Series)
E24 (6 Series)
E23, E32 (7 Series)
E31 (8 Series)
For your convenience, Electrical Troubleshooting Manuals (ETMs) previously available only on paper, have been produced on CD-ROM. These
CDs provide a valuable supplement to the paper ETMs published from 1982 onwards.
The CDs must be ordered as a set comprising of (2) CD-ROMs:

CD 1 Application files and data tiles
CD 2 Data files
This CD set is available at a special price of $95, and will not be shipped under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Please use the enclosed
pre-printed order form when placing your order.
**CD 2 of the above set has been updated to include 1997 Final Editions (E36, E36/5 and E36/7), 1998 Supplements (E36/7), and 1999
Preliminary Edition (E36/7). Users recommended to update their set by ordering CD 2 V1.1 **
[email protected]
495
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1017
Electrical Repair Kit IV - Additional Connectors

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin
04 02 98
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1998
Product Engineering
[email protected]
496
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1018
SUBJECT:
Additional Connectors for Electrical Repair Kit IV
MODEL:
All
Situation:
Distribution of the following connectors will be through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional connectors may be purchased through
your PDC. All prices on this bulletin are introductory prices and are only valid during the Automatic Tool Shipment.
The following connectors are to be added to electrical connector kit IV P/N 90 88 6 619 020 (refer to SIB 04 18 92). There are no open bin
locations in kit IV. The connectors and repair kit 0 must be kept in their bags and stored in the top tray.
Black 2 pin socket without unlocking device - code 1

(example-injectors)
P/N 90 88 6 619 111
Price = $1.95 (Qty 3)
Black 2 pin socket with unlocking device - code 1

(example-oil pressure switch or speed sensor)
P/N 90 88 6 619 112
Price = $2.05 (Qty 3)
[email protected]
497
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1019
P/N 90 88 6 619 114
Price = $2.20 (Qty 3)
Gray 3 pin socket with unlocking device - code 1

P/N 90 88 6 619 115
Price = $2.45 (Qty 3)

P/N 90 88 6 619 116
Price = $2.20 (Qty 3)

P/N 90 88 6 619 117
Price = $2.30 (Qty 3)
[email protected]
498
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1020
Repair Kit O for SLK 2.8 ELA connectors

P/N 90 88 6 619 211
Price = $48.00
SLK = Sensor lamellar contact (thin flat seal)

ELA = Single conductor seal
Kit O consists of:
^ 10- prefabricated 0.5mm replacement wires

^ 10- prefabricated 1 .0mm replacement wires
^ 20- 0.5 mm butt connectors
^ 20- 1.0 mm butt connectors
^ 40- shrink tubing
^ 5- Welsh plugs
Connector "Code" Explanations
Coding slots ensure that only the correct connector can be inserted in a specified location.
Code I Connector
There is one coding slot and it is located in the middle.
[email protected]
499
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1021
Code II Connector
There are two coding slots and they are located on both sides.
Code III Connector

There is one coding slot and it is located to the side.
Relay - Remote Test Kit

SUBJECT: Relay Test Kit
Situation: A special tool has been developed that will allow the testing of relays (in the engine compartment, under the rear seat, and luggage
compartment) from the driver's seat.
Electrical troubleshooting manuals and diagnostic manuals must be referred to for proper polarity and voltage specifications for the
relay connections.
[email protected]
500
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1022
This tool will be sent to all automotive dealers under the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased
through your Parts Distribution Center.
Electrical Connector Kit Supplement

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 04 95(4155)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1995
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New Electrical Connector Kit Supplement
MODELS:
All
Situation:
The following Electrical Connector Kits have been developed in order to supplement already existing Electrical Connector Kits I (81 24 9 408 080)
and II (81 24 9 408 300). These supplemental kits may be purchased through your PDC.
Supplement - Kit I
P/N 90 88 6 618 081
This supplement should be stored in Kit I, P/N 81 24 9 408 080. A decal is included that explains where the connectors are to be placed. The pieces
in this supplement are only available in a kit form. They are not available separately.
Supplement - Kit II
P/N 90 88 6 618 082
This supplement should be stored in Kit II, P/N 81 24 9 408 300. A decal is included that explains where the connectors are to be placed. The
pieces in this supplement are only available in a kit form. They are not available separately.
Instruction Manual
P/N 90 88 6 618 084
Instruction Manual for Supplemental Kits I and II above and III previously announced in Service Information 04 30 92 (3672).
Electrical Connector Kit 4 - Supplement

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 06 99
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1999
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Electrical Connector Kit 4 Supplement
MODEL:
All
Situation:
[email protected]
501
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1023
Tool Information:
Electrical Kit 4 Supplement

P/N 90 88 6 619 120
Price = $28.30
A supplementary kit for Electrical Connector Kit IV (P/N 90 88 6 619 020 SIB 04 18 92) has been developed. It includes many recently utilized
connectors. The supplement kit contents are: 8 Pin contact carrier black, D2.5 round contacts( example- E39 rear lights). 2 Pieces.
2 Pin contact carrier black and gray, flat spring contacts with single wire seals (example- E46 high beam headlights). 2 of each.
2 Pin contact carrier black. Miniature double flat spring contacts, 2.8 mm wide. (example- E46 windscreen washer pump). 1 piece.
3 Pin contact carrier black. Double flat spring contacts with single wire seals (example- E46 fan motor). 1 piece.
[email protected]
502
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1024
6 Pin contact carrier navy blue. Micro quadlock system with single wire seals (example- ride height sensor). 2 pieces.
8 Pin contact carrier navy blue. Micro quadlock system with single wire seals (example- E46 cruise control). 2 pieces.
6 Pin contact carrier black and natural. ELO 2.8 mm electronic contacts for heavy loads without single wire seals (example- E46 rear lights). 2
pieces.
3 Pin contact carrier black and natural. ELO 2.8 mm electronic contacts for heavy loads without single wire seals. 2 pieces
2 Pin contact carrier navy blue. Micro quadlock system 2.8 mm contacts for heavy loads, with single wire seals (example- E46 turn signals). 2
pieces.
[email protected]
503
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1025
Sealing plugs (single wire seals).

10 pieces (blue) for 0.5-1.0 mm wire
3 pieces (yellow) for 0.5-1.0 mm wire
6 pieces (white) for 1.5-2.5 mm wire
Throttle Housing Gasket - Sealing Instruction

Group 11 Engine
SUBJECT: Throttle Housing Gasket Sealing
MODEL: M3 (E30)
Situation: Whenever repairs are performed on an S14 engine involving the replacement or removal and installation of the throttle
housing gaskets (located between the cylinder head and the throttle housings), the following guidelines must be observed:
- When installing throttle housing gaskets, a thin bead of 3 Bond 1207 silicone sealer (BMW P/N 81 22 9 407 439) or its
equivalent, such as Wurth DP300 or Loctite 515, should be applied to the sealing ridge (see illustration) on both sides
of the gasket before installation. All US version S14 engines utilize throttle housing gaskets with an inside diameter of
approximately 33 millimeters as shown.
Unless there is obvious damage to the sealing ridge area, used gaskets should be reinstalled by applying a thin bead of silicone sealer as described
above.
Note: The tightening torque for the throttle housing gasket to the cylinder head sealing surface is 9-11 N-m (6.5-8.0 ft.lbs.).
Warranty
Status: Covered under the terms of the applicable BMW Emissions Warranty.
Defect code: 13 54 00 48 00
(This labor operation includes checking engine idle speed and CO level, adjusting if necessary.)
Wheel - Size/Configuration
Group 36
[email protected]
504
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1026
Wheels and Tires
Bulletin Number
36 02 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
February 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Wheel Configuration
MODELS:
All
Situation:
The center hub diameter of the wheels used on E39 models is 74 mm, which is larger than the 72.5 mm center hub diameter used on other BMW
models.
Wheels from other BMW models will not fit over the E39 hub, and therefore cannot be installed. Conversely, wheels from E39 models will fit over
the hub of other BMW models, but they will not properly center, and therefore must not be installed.
Convertible Top - Replacement Parts

Group 54
Convertible Top
Bulletin Number
54 02 90 (3022)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1992
Product Engineering
This bulletin supersedes S.I. 54 02 90 (3022) dated February 1990. It contains additional information. Please remove S.I. 54 02 90 (3022) dated
February 1990 from your S.I. binder and discard.
SUBJECT:
Replacement Parts for Convertible Top
MODEL:
E30 Convertible
Situation:
The convertible top frame assembly contains a number of pivot screws and rivets which are not shown on the parts microfiche. Since these parts
can wear, break, or fall out and become lost, the most common ones have been made available through the Parts System.
[email protected]
505
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1027
Please refer to the diagram for the part numbers of the various part.
Replacement:
The original screws are staked in place with a punch after they have been installed. If the original screw cannot be readily removed, it may be
necessary to use a pointed die grinder stone on the staked area to allow the original screw to be removed.
When installing a new screw, use a thread lock liquid and a center punch to stake the screw in place.
Audio - Electric Antenna Mast Replacement Tool Tip
[email protected]
506
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1028
Group 65 Radio and Accessories
Tool Tip
SUBJECT: Electric Antenna Mast Replacement
Situation: The process of turning the radio on and off in order to replace an antenna mast can be a time consuming job.
Solution: A quick connect-disconnect switch can be fashioned that will allow you to run the antenna directly from the trunk.
Required parts
1. Male and female electric antenna connectors from Electrical Repair Kit I
2. Approximately 2 feet of wire
3. Inline fuse holder with 7.5 amp fuse
4. Single pole toggle switch
5. Wire ties
6. Shrink tubing (optional)
7. Female spade connectors (2)
Assemble parts as shown in drawing.
Note: Fuse holder and switch should be placed in the white wire.
Directions for use
1. Disconnect electrical connector at power antenna.

2. Install switching tool.
3. With toggle switch in the off position, turn ignition switch to position 2.
4. Turn radio on.
5. Operate toggle switch as required to replace mast.
Suggested by Frank Costello of BMW Gallery, Norwood, MA.

Special Tools - Seat Belt Pliers

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 12 89 (1853)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1989
Technical Dept.
[email protected]
507
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1029
SUBJECT:
Seat Belt Pliers
Situation:
When it is necessary to replace the seat belt stop button, the above mentioned pliers used in conjuction with the new button halves (see Parts Fiche)
will restore the belt to factory condition.
Interior Vinyl Trim - Shrinks/Pulls Loose

Group 51
Body Equipment
Bulletin Number
51 01 93 (3766)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin replaces S.I. 51 12 87 (1484) dated October 1987. Please remove and discard S.I. 51 12 87 (1484) dated October
SUBJECT:
Interior Trim
MODELS:
All
Situation:
The vinyl trim covering door panels and other interior trim pieces can possibly shrink due to variations in temperature and humidity. This shrinkage
[email protected]
508
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1030
can cause the vinyl trim to pull loose from its backing, especially around the outside edges and cutouts in the panel.
Correction:
Many of the loose pieces of vinyl can be reglued using 3M Super Weatherstrip Adhesive (yellow). Apply the adhesive as per manufacturer's
directions, and stretch and wrap the loose material into place, clamping it in position until it sets.
Note:
This repair works best on flat or outside curved panels. On inside curved panels the vinyl cannot always be stretched far enough to completely
adhere to the backing, and can easily pull loose again.
Warranty Status:
Covered under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect code and labor information: Please refer to the appropriate section of the Defect Code Catalog and Flat Rate Manual for the involved trim
pieces.
Windows/Glass - New Adhesive Kit

Group 51
Body Equipment
Bulletin Number
51 O9 98
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1998
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
New Glass Adhesive Kit
MODEL:
All
Situation:
The glass adhesive kit, part number 83 19 9 407 850, supplied through the parts system is being replaced by a new kit, part number 81 22 9 407
497. This new kit replaces the two component activator and primer with a single component cleaner. This change makes the installation procedure
simpler.
Any old style kits in stock are still approved and may be used until the expiration date on the package.
Procedure:
Follow instructions for each kit as printed on package.
Information only.Technical Service Bulletin # 9901903125 Date: 910101
Engine/Luggage Compartment - Clear Coating Discontinued

Group 99 Paint
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 99 01 90 (3125) dated October 1990. It provides flat rate information. Please remove and discard
S.I. 99 01 90 (3125) dated October 1990 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT: Paint in Engine and Luggage Compartments, Metallic Colors
MODELS: All
Situation: As of approximately June 1990 production, clear coating of the metallic color paints in the engine compartment and luggage
compartment was discontinued, as it was determined that it is unnecessary.
In case of customer inquiries, please advise them that the deletion of the clear coat is intentional, and does not constitute a defect.
Subsequent clear coating of the paint in the engine or luggage compartment will not be reimbursed by BMW.
[email protected]
509
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1031
Flat rate operations and times for non-metallic paints should be used when necessary to repaint the engine or luggage
compartments of vehicles produced from June 1990 on.
Paint - Approved Materials

Group 99
Paintwork
Bulletin Number
99 02 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
July 1996
SUBJECT:
Paint Materials Approval
MODEL:
All
Situation:
BMW of North America, Inc. is pleased to announce the approval of paint products for use on BMW vehicles from: SPIES HECKER - STANDOX
These paint brands have long been associated with BMW through the supply of original production line materials and have both recently been
approved by BMW for vehicle refinishing.
Approved products meet or exceed technical specifications established by BMW and are therefore recommended for use in collision repair and
warranty paintwork.
For information on approved paint products, please contact:
Dan Doot at (201) 307-4249
For technical information and availability on these paint brands, please contact the following companies:
Spies Hecker, Inc. American Standox, Inc.

55 Sea Lane 47802 West Anchor Ct.
Farmingdale, NY 11735 Plymouth, MI 48170
Phone: 1(800) 447-7437 Phone: 1(800) 551-9296
Fax: (516) 777-7117 Fax: (313) 454-4984
Paint and Paint Repairs - Warranty Coverage

Group 01
Warranty
Bulletin Number
01 01 94 (3986)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
December 1996
Warranty
This bulletin supersedes Service Information Bulletin 01/01/94 (3986) dated April 1994. This revised bulletin includes information on all approved
paint products (also see 5.1. Bulletin 99 O2 96 dated July 1996), as well as the latest warranty coverage enhancements that are shared by all
approved paint suppliers.
SUBJECT:
Warranty Coverage - Paint and Paint Repairs
MODELS:
All
SITUATION:
[email protected]
510
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1032
This bulletin restates, summarizes, and clarifies existing New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage of paint defects and explains the additional
coverage afforded through our approved paint suppliers (when using approved paint products/systems) during and after the "New Vehicle Limited
Warranty" period.
BMW "New Vehicle Limited Warranty" - Paint Finish Coverage
BMW warrants the original paint finish on all new vehicles for the duration of the "New Vehicle Limited Warranty" period against defects in
material or workmanship. This warranty does not cover damage, paint deterioration due to external factors (such as acid rain, industrial fallout,
etc.), or normal deterioration. For more detailed information on coverage and exclusions, please refer to the current Warranty Policy and
Procedures Manual, Section 5.
Approved Paint Manufacturers' Warranty Coverage
BMW-approved paint materials used for paint refinishing performed under the "New Vehicle Limited Warranty" applied by qualified personnel
certified (as defined in the next section) in the application process of these products will be warranted against defects in material or workmanship
(of the paint material itself) for the duration of the "New Vehicle Limited Warranty" or for the paint manufacturers' limited warranty, whichever is
longer. All approved paint manufacturers offer the following limited warranty coverage:
Product Type Paint Manufacturers'

Limited Warranty*
Basecoat/Clearcoat System Years 1-5 100%, Years 6+50%
Waterborne Basecoat/Clearcoat System Years 1-5 100%, Years 6+50%
H.S. Urethane Topcoat System Years 1-3 100%, Years 4-7 50%
Single Stage Urethane System Years 1-3 100%, Years 4-5 50%
* The manufacturers' limited warranty will cover eligible paint defects on the covered vehicle for the time period specified (from the date of the
paint repair) for the vehicle owner at the time of the paint repair, as noted on the repair documentation. The paint manufacturers' warranty cannot be
transferred to a second or subsequent owner unless the vehicle is under the BMW "New Vehicle Limited Warranty".
Neither our New Vehicle Limited Warranty or the paint manufacturers' warranty is applicable in situations where the failure at hand is attributed to
a workmanship problem (on the part of the painter) from a previous repair. Warrantable repairs to previously refinished areas will be processed
according to the warranty status of the vehicle being repaired (also see "Authorization Requirements").
Recommended Refinishing Materials/Procedures, Certification and Training Requirements
Should a situation arise whereby paint refinishing becomes necessary, BMW requires the use of BMW approved paint products and application
procedures. The materials provided by the manufacturers previously specified are the only approved refinishing products for use on BMW cars.
BMW NA does not recommend nor encourage the use of non-approved products or application processes for any refinishing situations.
Please note that certain paint products will continue to be supplied by BMW NA directly, such as paint sticks and spray touch-up applications (see
applicable Parts and Service Information Bulletins for more detail).
Paint system training is available through the BMW NA National Training Department and through the manufacturers' training centers. Please note
that certification is a prerequisite for paint warranty consideration (independent body shops doing sublet work for BMW dealers must also be
certified in order to perform warranty repairs). To maintain certification recognition, painters must continue to update their level of training to be
concurrent with new paint systems (materials and application procedures) as they evolve.
Authorization Requirements
For initial paint defects and repairs performed on vehicles still within the "New Vehicle Limited Warranty", authorization is required from your
BMW NA Market Team only.
For any subsequent repair(s) of the same area on vehicles still within the "New Vehicle Limited Warranty," joint authorization is required from
both your Market Team and a representative from the applicable paint manufacturer. Repairs to previously refinished areas on vehicles no longer
covered under the "New Vehicle Limited Warranty" require the authorization of the applicable paint manufacturers representative only, following
the guidelines of that manufacturer. In all cases, repairs must be approved prior to the actual performance of the repairs. Full documentation will be
required for any consideration, including copies of the original (first) repair order, which should fully document the use of BMW approved
materials (and which manufacturers' materials were used) in the course of repairs.
Claims Procedure: Vehicles Within "New Vehicle Limited Warranty"
[email protected]
511
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1033
For vehicles still covered by the "New Vehicle Limited Warranty," the claims will be entered and processed through the BMW NA warranty
system, utilizing the BMW flat rate manuals and labor operations as a guide to determine reasonable labor charges. Labor performed by an
independent sublet shop will be paid at the labor rate of that shop. Please note that every sublet claim is reviewed by an examiner on a case-by-case
basis for reasonableness given the market conditions on the date of repair. The acceptance of the labor rate is dependent upon a comparison with the
labor rate of the BMW NA dealership coordinating the repairs. Sublet reimbursement is based on actual dealer cost. The claim comments should
fully explain the details of the actual paint failure, as well as reference the specifics of any prior related paint failures.
Claims Procedure: Vehicles out of "New Vehicle Limited Warranty"
Repairs to previously refinished areas on a vehicle that is no longer covered under the BMW "New Vehicle Limited Warranty" should be submitted
as per the applicable manufacturers' guidelines. Please contact your paint jobber for further information and assistance.
For Further Information:
Should you have any additional questions, please direct them to either your Market Team (vehicles still within "New Vehicle Limited Warranty")
or, upon expiration of that warranty, to the applicable paint manufacturer.
Electrical - 2 and 3 Pin Plug Connector Seal Information

Group 12
Engine Electrical
Bulletin Number
12 01 95
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1996
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 12 01 95 (4205) dated September 1995. It changes the prepacked quantities for the two part
numbers in the bulletin. Please remove and discard S.I. 12 01 95 (4205) dated September 1995 from your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Seal on 2 and 3 Pin Plug Connectors
MODELS:
All
Situation:
When connecting or disconnecting 2 or 3 pin plug connectors (for example, on the injection valve, throttle valve potentiometer, or engine coolant
temperature sensor), it is possible for the rectangular seal to fall out of the plug housing. If this should occur, the loss of the seal can easily go
unnoticed.
As well as preventing moisture from seeping into the plug, the seal also ensures that the two halves of the plug are properly tensioned so that the
contacts do not move within the plug. If such movement should occur, the contacts may develop corrosion.
Corroded and/or loose contacts can cause problems with the proper functioning of the vehicle, and may cause difficulty in diagnosis due to the
[email protected]
512
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1034
possibly intermittent nature of such problems.
Affected Vehicles:
All models
Procedure:
It is essential that you check that the seal is in place before connecting a 2 or 3 pin plug connector. If the seal is missing, it must be replaced.
Parts Information:
Description Part Number Contents
3 Pin Seal 61 13 1 358 604 1 per pack

2 Pin Seal 12 52 1 732 593 1 per pack

A/T - Slips/Engine Races When Upshifting From 3rd Gear

Group 24
Bulletin Number
24 10 91 (3428)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Transmission Valve Body Modification
MODELS: All with 4HP22 EH E7 control system
Customer
Complaint: Transmission slips and engine races when upshifting from third gear. If vehicle is slowed down, power transmission resumes.
Situation: The 1-2/3-4 sequence valve in the transmission valve body is sticking in its bore. If this occurs, instead of releasing the "E" clutch
and applying the "F" clutch for 4th gear, now the "B" and "C" clutch are both released when MV1 is energized. The engine races
when this occurs as the one-way clutch for first gear is overrunning due to the high road speed. If the vehicle speed is reduced or
throttle is applied to induce a 4-3 downshift, power transmission is resumed.
Diagnosis: The following quick check will provide an exact diagnosis of this complaint:
As the engine starts to race, select 3rd gear by either of two methods
- by moving gear selector lever from position D to position 3

- by switching program selector from E to either S or M
If the power transmission is immediately restored by the above actions, it is confirmed that the 1-2/3-4 sequence valve is sticking.
Solution: A repair kit is now available which includes the necessary parts to be exchanged on the transmission valve body.
Parts Included In Repair Kit
[email protected]
513
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1035
1) Housing for MV1 and MV2

2) Sequence valve 1-2/3-4
3) Compression spring
4) Support plate
5) Intermediate plate
Parts To Be Transferred From Old to New Valve Housing
6) Support plate 11) MV1 and MV2

7) Ring 12) Fixing plate
8) Inner compression spring (if used) 13) Cap screw
9) Compression spring 14) Check ball
10) Piston
Absolute cleanliness is a must during the exchange of the valve body parts. Only clean, lint-free rags should be used during this operation.
Torque specifications should be strictly adhered to:
- Valve housing to valve body bolts 5 N-m

- Valve body to transmission 8 N-m
- Oil strainer 8 N-m
Parts
Information: The repair kit is available under the following part number:
Valve body repair kit 88 88 9 999 422
Warranty
Information: Covered under the terms of the applicable BMW New Car Limited Warranty.
Defect code: 24 33 00 29 00
Description Labor operation Model FRU
R & R valve body 24 30 002 635CSiA 14

R & R valve body 24 30 004 535iA, 735iA 14
Exchange valve housing 24 99 000 535iA, 635CSiA, 735iA 2
[email protected]
514
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1036
Safety Belt Tensioner - Replacement

Group 72
Equipment and
Accessories
Bulletin Number
72 03 91 (3352)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Safety Belt Tensioner
MODEL: 3-Series (E36)
Situation: The E36 is equipped with a mechanical safety belt tensioner which is designed to take up slack in the safety belt in the event of a
frontal collision.
A frontal impact triggers the mechanical impact sensor, releasing the pre-tensioned spring, pulling the belt receptacle down
approximately 55 mm. This tightens the lap and shoulder belts, if fastened.
IMPORTANT
Any safety belt tensioners that have been activated must be replaced; they cannot be reset. Any tensioners that have not been
activated, and are being replaced for another reason (i.e. cosmetic damage) must be disarmed before disposal to prevent accidental
injury to untrained personnel who may subsequently handle the part.
[email protected]
515
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1037
Procedure: Warning: Never handle the assembly in area A when removing, carrying or working on the unit as injury may occur if the unit is
accidentally activated.
Mount the assembly in a bench vise as illustrated. The belt receptacle should be horizontal, with the vise clamping down on the
mounting area.
Pull the safety cable out to it's stop, and hold in place with locking jaw pliers for the remainder of the procedure.
The belt receptacle should not be pointed at any one during deactivation.
[email protected]
516
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1038
Strike the housing in area sharply with a hammer to trigger the tensioner. The receptacle should move approximately 55 mm toward the base.
The assembly may now be disposed of.
Warranty
Cassette Player - Howling, Dull Bass/Reduced Treble

Group 65
Bulletin Number
65 10 91 (3345)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1991
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Care of Cassettes and BMW Radio/Cassette Players
MODELS:
All
Complaint:
Howling, dull bass and reduced treble response during cassette playback.
Situation:
Dirt and paper remnants were found on the playback head, capstan and pinch roller on a large number of radio/cassette players which had been
returned following complaints. This soiling results from the use of low quality or carelessly treated cassettes.
Remedy:
BMW radio/cassette players are fitted with a high quality long-lasting playback head which ensures optimum performance. In order to guarantee
trouble-free operation, we suggest observing the following recommendations regarding the care of cassettes and car radio/cassette players:
- Only C60 cassettes should be used. If only cassette tapes made by reputable manufacturers are played, the tape drive stays cleaner longer and
optimum sound reproduction is maintained.
- Metal, ferric oxide, chrome dioxide and ferrochrome cassette tapes are all suitable.
- Cassettes should always be stored in their original cases or other protective cases to protect them against dust, dirt and direct sunlight.
- Temperatures exceeding 50°C (125°F) or below freezing may affect the running of the tape so that the playback may be uneven or there may be
skipping. Consequently, ft is advisable to ensure that cassettes are at room temperature before being used. Should cassettes be exposed to
excessive heat, the case can become warped or the paper label can come loose and affect the function of the cassette player.
It is normally possible to clean the drive components if they are only affected by everyday dirt with the regular use of a wet/dry cleaning cassette.
Please consult your local cassette outlet for further information.
Running problems and sound distortion may arise after approximately 100 playing hours, depending upon the quality of the cassette. This is caused
the coating of the tape rubbing off onto the playback head and the pinch roller. Should these parts be very dirty, they should be cleaned with a
cotton swab which has been dipped in alcohol. Never ever use hard objects to remove dirt or paper remnants from the cassette drive.
Warranty Status: Information only

[email protected]
517
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1039
New BMW Special Tools..

Group 04
Tools and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 16 97
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1997
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
MODEL:
All
Situation:
Used in conjunction with crimping pliers 90 88 6 619 041 which were distributed via Automatic Tool Shipment with Electrical connector kit 4 (04
18 92) to attach new radio antenna connectors. Refer to repair manual section 00 51 277.
Included with this shipment is a package of radio antenna connectors.
Note:
1 order = 5 pieces. Additional pieces may be ordered through your PDC.
Distribution of the following tool will not be through the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Tools may be purchased through your PDC. Refer to
Parts Information bulletin 01 01 95 for tool warranty details.
Support Feet-All models except Z3 P/N 90 88 6 000 208 Price = $300.00
Used in conjunction with engine support 88 88 6 000 200 to raise the engine for oil pan or front axle support removal. The new feet are adjustable.
Refer to repair manual section 11 13 000.
Seat Rail - New Special Tool

Group 04
[email protected]
518
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1040
Tool and Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 03 92 (3481)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: New BMW Special Tool
Subject: The following BMW Special tool will be sent out via the Automatic Tool Shipment Program. Additional tools may be purchased through
your PDC.
A/C System - Fill Capacity and Information

Group 64
Heating and
Air Conditioning
Bulletin Number
64 01 90 (3042)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
March 1993
Product Engineering
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 64 01 90 (3042) dated April 1990. Please remove and discard S.I. 64 01 90 (3042) dated April
SUBJECT:
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Fill Capacity and Information
MODELS:
All
[email protected]
519
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1041
Information:
The following is a listing of reference information for servicing BMW Air Conditioning systems. Please refer to this chart when
evacuating/recharging BMW A/C systems.
Note that some 1993 Model Year early production R-134a equipped vehicles have under-hood labels that specify higher charge values than those
specified here and in the microfiche. Testing has confirmed that the values given here are the optimum fill capacities. Consult the chart before
refilling. Labels with the lower refrigerant charge amount specified on the chart have been phased into production as of 11/92.
When performing repairs to the A/C system that require recharging, only the specifications given in this S.I. should be used, as well as the label part
numbers, as appropriate (see chart). However, inadvertent refrigerant charging up to the fill capacity given on an "original" ('93 MY production
prior to 11/92) under-hood label will not cause any problems.
Warranty Status:
Information only
Technical Service Bulletin # 0020913302R Date: 921001
A/C - Vermont CFC Legislation

Group 00
Maintenance and
[email protected]
520
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1042
General Hints
Bulletin Number
00 20 91R (3302)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1992
Product Engineering
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 00 20 91 (3302) dated June 1991. Please remove S.I. 00 20 91 (3302) dated June 1991 from your
S.I. binder and discard it.
SUBJECT:
VERMONT CFC LEGISLATION
On June 12, 1991, new Legislation in Vermont became Law. This Legislation will ultimately prohibit Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) from use in
automotive air conditioning systems, due to their adverse environmental effects. This Legislation will also require labeling of all new vehicles
offered for sale with air conditioning (AC) systems which contain CFCs.
Beginning with motor vehicle model year 1995, the sale of vehicles with AC systems using CFCs is prohibited, unless during 1995, at least 10
percent of new motor vehicles are equipped with AC systems that use refrigerants other than CFCs. In 1996 this increases to 25 percent, in 1997 to
50 percent, and after 1997, all new motor vehicles must use refrigerants other than CFCs.
Effective July 1, 1991, no new motor vehicle may be sold or offered for retail sale in the State of Vermont if it has an AC system which uses CFCs,
unless it bears an 8 inch by 11 inch placard. This placard must be attached to a passenger window and must contain the following language:
"AIR CONDITIONING IN THIS VEHICLE CONTAINS CHLOROFLUOROCARBONS (CFCs). CFCs DEPLETE THE EARTH'S
PROTECTIVE OZONE LAYER, CAUSING SKIN CANCER AND ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE."
Please attach the placard to a passenger window prior to display or sale of a motor vehicle using CFC containing refrigerants.
Note:
Removal of placard is at discretion of customer.
Beginning with model year 1993, all BMW vehicles use CFC-Free Refrigerants in our air-conditioning systems. Therefore, the 8 x 11 inch placard
described on the previous page must no longer be attached to a window of model year 1993 or later vehicles.
A/C - Freon (R) R12 Recycling Poster

Group 02
Service Development
Bulletin Number
02 02 92 (3479)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
January 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT: Freon (R) R12 Recycling Poster
Situation:
We have all become aware of how chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) destroy the stratospheric ozone layer that shields the earth from harmful ultraviolet
radiation. Studies have shown that an increase in cataracts and skin cancer is already evident while the threat of global warming and its effects on
our animal population, crop yields and plant life is unsettling to say the least. However, many of your customers may not be aware of the fact that
one of the greatest sources of CFC release in the United States is the automobile air conditioning system.
As outlined in S.I. 04 07 90 (3075), dated June 1990, all BMW dealers were required to purchase and use a Freon (R) R12 recycling station by
January 1, 1991. This policy was in direct response to various states, and subsequently the federal government, making it illegal to service an
automotive A/C unless a recycling machine is used. The same law also requires that technicians, performing the service, be properly trained and
certified. It is expected that the EPA will approve programs from ASE, MACS and others in February/March 1992. An additional bulletin will be
released when government approval of these certification programs occurs.
Since one of our goals for the '90s is to expand our performance image to quality, safety and social responsibility we firmly believe it is important
to make your customers aware of your commitment to preventing the threat CFCs have to both human health and our enviroment.
Under separate cover you will receive a copy of this Service Information Bulletin and two copies of a poster that promotes the fact that you clean
[email protected]
521
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1043
and recycle Freon (R) R12 in a safe and efficient manner. We recommend that you remove the "Staying Beautiful One Year" poster that you have
framed in the customer reception area and install this new poster. If you wish to order additional posters call Walter Ford at (201) 307-4247 and ask
for poster no. ZU-0-2 91-42.
A/C - Recycling Freon(R) R12

Woodcliff Lake, NJ June 1990 Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Freon(R) R12 Recycling
Situation: Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCS) are an integral part of Freon(R) R12. CFCs destroy the stratospheric ozone layer that shields
the earth from harmful ultraviolet radiation. One of the largest sources of CFC release in the United States is the automobile
air conditioning system.
International agreements have been signed regarding the manufacture and use of Chlorofluorcarbons (CFCs), such as the
Freon(R) R12 used in automotive air conditioners, and the Federal Government and various states have launched a
three-pronged attack on CFCS.
^ Recently enacted Federal legislation has imposed a tax on R12 effective January 1990. The law also imposes a tax on
inventoried stocks of R12 as of that date. Tax is set at $1.37 per pound for 1990 and 1991 with increments to $2.65 per
pound by 1994. The increase will be $.45 per pound per year thereafter.
^ Various state laws and bills will make it illegal, effective with the '93 model year, to sell or register new vehicles if
they have air conditioners that can use CFCS.
^ Various state laws and bills will make it illegal, effective Jan 1, 1991, to service an automotive A/C unless an approved
recycling machine is used. Without such an exact deadline, the Federal Government also has this requirement of all
dealerships.
Solution: The ultimate solution is to stop using products that utilize CFCs in their makeup. While an afternative source for an air
conditioning medium is being researched, all BMW automotive dealers will be required to purchase and use a Freon(R) R12
recycling station by January 1, 1991.
BMW has thoroughly tested all units on the market that meet UL standards as specified by the EPA and recommends two
units for BMW dealership use.
They are the White Industries 01 050 and the Kent Moore J3800-B. Dealer cost for the White Industries 01 050 unit is $1786.32, and for the Kent
Moore unit the dealer cost is $2360.00.
Features of the White 01 050
^ Anti-blowback valves on the high and low pressure lines
^ 2-50 lb. recovery tanks with built-in oil separators
^ 2 step process
^ Moisture indicator
^ Full tank light
^ Automatic shutdown in case of overfilling
Magnetic labels for storage tanks - enables shop personnel to determine condition of R12
^ Low pressure gauge buift into machine - no need for head gauges to evacuate
Features of the Kent Moore J38100-B
^ 3 hoses with shut-off valves
^ Instructional video tape
^ Easy-to-understand control panel
^ Continuous loop recycling
^ 2-30 lb. storage tanks
[email protected]
522
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1044
^ Automatic air purge
For more detailed information please see the attached literature from the manufacturers. This literature should be placed in the "General Support"
section of your Service Equipment Program Binder.
Orders for recycling centers are being accepted through the BMW Service Equipment Program. New binders were sent to all dealers in January of
this year. Orders can be mailed to the address below or faxed to Product Service/Engineering at (201) 930-8401.
BMW of North America, Inc. 1 BMW Plaza
Montvale, NJ 07645
Attn: Product Service/Engineering

It is important to note that A/C recycling can be a profit center as shown below.
Recycling Cost Analysis
Facts = 1) BMW Automobiles average 2.98 lb. of R12/car

2) Current tax on a lb. of R12 = $1.37
So ....
^ At 8 cars per week x 2.98 lb. per car = 23.84 lb. of R12/week
^ 23.84 lb. R12 x 52 weeks = 1239.68 lb. R12
^ 1239.68 lb. R12 x new tax rate of $1.37 per lb.- $1,698.36 of tax per year.
Promoting the fact that your dealership recycles R12 can be a sign to your customer that you are actually doing something to help the environment.
New A/C Leak Detection Equipment

Group 04
Tools and
Equipment
Bulletin Number
04 26 92 (3644)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
October 1992
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
Air Conditioning Leak Detection
Situation:
The introduction of R134a requires new leak detection equipment.
Solution:
BMW has tested and approved a leak detector that is manufactured by TIF Instruments. It is the model TIF 5550.
TIF 5550 Features
^ Comes in a heavy duty plastic case.
^ Comes with batteries.
^ Comes with spare sensing tip.
^ Comes with comprehensive owner's manual.
^ Unit senses R12 and R134a with just the flip of a switch.
^ Unit automatically calibrates after you turn it on.
^ If the leak has caused an area of the engine compartment to be saturated with R12 or R13a, you can recalibrate the unit for that area.
[email protected]
523
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1045
^ Detectable leak rate is .40 ounce of R12 or R134a per year.
^ Built in pump reduces response time.
The TIF 5550 is available through the BMW Service Equipment Program. Please send order in writing to Bob Lyons at:

BMW Plaza
Montvale, NJ 07645
Fax: 201-930-8401
BMW Dealer Cost - $135.00
A/C System - Refrigerant Capacity Information

Group 64
Bulletin Number
64 21 92 (3695)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
November 1992
Product Engineering
This Service Information Supersedes S.I. 64 01 90 (3042) dated April 1990. Please remove and discard S.I. 64 01 90 (3042) dated April 1990 from
your S.I. binder.
SUBJECT:
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Fill Capacity and Information
MODELS:
All
Information:
The following is a listing of reference information for servicing BMW Air Conditioning systems. Please refer to these chart when
evacuating/recharging BMW A/C systems.
[email protected]
524
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1046
[email protected]
525
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1047
Note:
That some 1993 Model Year early production R-134a equipped vehicle have under-hood labels that specify higher charge values than those
specified here and in the microfiche. Testing has confirmed that the values given here are the optimum fill capacities. Consult the chart shown
before refilling. Labels with the lower refrigerant charge amount will be phased into production along with the charge amount. BMW will
inform dealers when the labels are available for spare parts usage.
When performing repairs to the A/C system that require recharging, only the specifications given in this S.I. should be used, as well as the new
labels, as soon as they are available. However, inadvertent refrigerant charging up to the fill capacity given on the original under-hood label will not
cause any problems.
A/T - Dipstick Production Change, No Retrofit

Group 24
Bulletin Number
24 05 89 (1945)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
September 1989
Technical Dept.
SUBJECT:
[email protected]
526
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1048
Transmission Oil Dipstick
MODELS:
All equipped with automatic transmission
An improved transmission oil dipstick will be phased into series production early in the 1990 model year.
The new dipstick will lock onto the end of the dipstick tube by means of the black cylindrical grip.
The lock is released with a tilted, lateral movement of the black cylindrical grip (see illustration).
The purpose of the new locking grip is to prevent incorrect "lopping up" of the ATF level by untrained personnel. The new dipstick also provides
an improved sealing function.
It is not possible to retrofit the new locking dipstick to automatic transmissions fitted with the previous version.
Audio - 6-Disc Alpine CD Changer Troubleshooting Guide

Group 65
Bulletin Number
65 02 96
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
April 1996
Product Engineering
SUBJECT:
6-Disc Alpine CD changer Troubleshooting Guide
Situation:
The Warranty Part Return Center has been receiving a large amount of replaced 6-Disc CD changers with the problem description "CD player
inoperative" which proved to be non-defective.
It is essential to provide a more detailed problem description to ensure effective defect analysis and acceptance under warranty.
[email protected]
527
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1049
Action:
Customer complaints like "CD changer skips" or "CD changer jams" may also be caused by other reasons than a defective CD changer. Before
replacing the CD changer you should check every part that could cause the malfunction according to the new Troubleshooting Guide for Alpine CD
changers.
Three copies of the Troubleshooting Guide and five Magazine Eject Cards are sent to each dealer along with this Service Information. The plastic
Magazine Eject Card is not included in this bulletin. Additional copies of the Troubleshooting Guide can be ordered using SD 92-074.
Procedure:
Familiarize yourself with the contents of the new Troubleshooting Guide and use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts to ensure that a reported
malfunction is due to a defective CD changer before replacing it.
The Magazine Eject Card allows you to release a jammed CD magazine and restore the changer to normal operation (see section V of the
Troubleshooting Guide).
If the malfunction is caused by an operator error, you should remind the customer of proper magazine and CD handling.
Alignment - Specifications and Microfiche Correction

Group 32 Steering and Wheel Alignment
Woodcliff Lake, NJ October 1990 Service Engineerlng
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. 32 02 90 (3124) which should be removed from your S.I. binder and discarded. It is being
reprinted to prevent any misunderstanding of the dash in front of the toe in settings, which is a typographical error.
SUBJECT: Wheel Alignment Data
MODELS: M5 (E34), M3 (1990,1991 Model Years)
Situation: Technical Data microfiche No. 5, dated 5/90, gives incorrect front toe settings for the M5, and incorrect rear toe settings for the
M3. The correct data is as follows:
M5 (E34) Front
Totaltoein: 0~ 20' +/- 5'
M3 (as of 1990 Model Year) Rear
Total toe in: 0~ 28'+/- 7'

Alignment - Checking and Setting Revisions

Group 32
Steering and
Wheel Alignment
Bulletin Number
32 02 91 (3263)
Woodcliff Lake, NJ
May 1991
Service Engineering
SUBJECT: Revised Conditions for Checking and Setting Wheel Alignment
MODELS: All
Situation: In order to more accurately check and adjust wheel alignment, a revision has been made to the standard conditions required for
a wheel alignment.
The revision is that the vehicle is loaded as described in the Technical Data, Page 32-100, and then the loading is adjusted, if
necessary, to bring the vehicle height to specification. This eliminates any camber or toe variations due to ride height being
different than design specification.
Procedure: Drive the vehicle onto the alignment rack, remove the lock pins from the turntables and slip plates, and load with weight bags
[email protected]
528
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1050
as per Technical Data, Page 32-100. Measure the ride height from the bottom of the rim flange vertically to the bottom of the
wheel opening. Check the ride height against the specification in the Technical Data, sections 31 and 33. If the ride height
varies from the specification listed (disregard the tolerance), add or remove weight as necessary to bring the ride height to the
listed specification. (Note: vehicles equipped with self-levelling suspension must have the levelling system powered up. Set
rear ride height by adjusting self-levelling to proper specification.)
When the ride height has been adjusted to specification, check and adjust alignment as required.
For your convenience, attached is a chart showing weight requirements for normal loading and ride height specifications for all
current models, as equipped when sold. For vehicles equipped with optional wheels, please refer to ride height specifications,
sections 31 and 33 of Technical Data.
Note: Specifications are not available for vehicles equipped with non-approved or non-BMW wheels, or for vehicles with
modified suspensions or body parts.
Warranty
Attachment to S.I. 32 02 91 (3263)
STANDARD VEHICLE LOAD
Model
3 Series Convertibles All others
6 Series
8 Series
All M Cars
^ 68 kg (150 lbs.) on each front ^ 68 kg (150 lbs.) on each front seat (seats in middle position)
seat (seats in middle position)
^ 14 kg (30 lbs.) in middle of trunk ^ 68 kg (150 lbs.) on middle of
^ full tank of fuel rear seat
^ 21 kg (46 lbs.) in middle of trunk
^ full tank of fuel
RIDE HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS (in mm)
(Standard Equipment Only)
E30 E30 E30 E30

Sedan Convertible 325iX M3
Front 565 570 565 556

Rear 505 510 510 529
E31
Front 598
Rear 569
E32
Front 588
Rear 522
E34 E34
525i/535i M5
Front 588 596
Rear 522 545
[email protected]
529
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1051
E36
Front 576
Rear 523
A/T, M/T - Repair Precautions to Prevent Damage

June 2006
Technical Service
SI B 11 04 06
Engine
SUBJECT
Engine, Transmission, or Clutch Related Complaints
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Various complaints concerning the engine, transmission, clutch, or noise characteristics of the vehicle have been traced to the absence or damage of
the alignment dowels between the engine and
transmission.
In many cases the dowels required to center the engine/transmission were not fitted, or were damaged, during a previous repair in which the engine
and transmission were separated.
If the alignment of the engine flywheel to the transmission input shaft, or torque converter, is incorrect any of the following complaints may result:
1. Clutch complaints: slipping, shudder, or poor disengagement.
2. Noise from transmission input shaft.
3. Transmission pops out of gear.
4. Difficulty changing gears.
5. Internal damage to an automatic transmission.
PROCEDURE
When performing any repair, which involves separating the engine and transmission, always check that the dowels are undamaged and properly in
place before reassembly.
Important notes:
For engines with a magnesium crankcase only aluminum dowels may be used. Always refer to ETK for the correct dowels for the engine and
model concerned.
Information only. Any damage as a result of missing or damaged dowels is not a warranty matter.
Fuel System - Damage Caused By Fuel Contaminants

May 2006
Technical Service
SI B 13 03 06
Fuel Systems
SUBJECT
Fuel Pump Failure after Refueling with Ethanol Fuel Blend
MODEL
All
SITUATION
[email protected]
530
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1052
Engine dies shortly after refueling, and cannot be restarted again.
CAUSE
Fuel contamination related to a recent introduction of ethanol fuel blends. Ethanol is used as an octane booster, and replaces MTBE (methyl
tertiary-butyl ether) in many fuel formulations. High levels of water and other residue contaminants may cause damage to a fuel delivery system.
The introduction of ethanol to existing storage tank and distribution systems has acted to absorb the build-up of water and free residual
contaminants accumulating over a period of time at these locations and permits them to be pumped into vehicles at the time of refueling. Aside
from the engine not running, early tests on vehicles with severe contamination reveal, for example, oxidation as the cause for fuel pump seizure on
the E46 and a clogged fuel filter as the cause for a ruptured in-tank fuel line on the E65/66 N73 (760Li/i).
CORRECTION
In case of a fuel delivery system failure after refueling, follow the procedure below:
1. Drain all contaminated fuel from the fuel tank and fuel lines.
2. Clean all deposits/residue from the bottom of the fuel tank.
3. Replace the fuel filter/regulator assembly
4. Replace the fuel pump if seized, or if the in-tank pressure line is ruptured.
NOTE:
For more information related to ethanol fuel blends refer to SI B13 01 06 (Alcohol Fuel Blends in BMW Vehicles).
BMW NA does not cover damage caused by contaminated fuel. Customers should be directed to the facility where the fuel was purchased.
A/C Replacement Compressor Information Insert

SI B 64 04 02
February 2006
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes Advance S.I. B64 04 02 dated December 2002. The content of the Service Information is unchanged.
SUBJECT
Replacement A/C Compressor Information Insert
MODEL
ALL
SITUATION
When replacing an Air Conditioning compressor, there is an information page inside the parts box that gives conflicting information about
replacing the receiver/dryer.
CAUSE
The supplying vendor for the compressor inserts a page that contains generic information about re~acement A/C compressors~
CORRECTION
If you receive a compressor with the insert page shown, inside the replacement compressor box, disregard these instructions. The receiver dryer
should only be replaced under the following conditions as outlined in the TIS repair instructions RA 64 53.....
[email protected]
531
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1053
^ If the compressor has caused contamination of the refrigerant with fillings or shavings.
^ If the vehicle comes in with a system leak or complete loss of refrigerant.
^ If the refrigerant circuit has been opened up for a period exceeding 24 hours.
DisclaimerTechnical Service Bulletin # 651006 Date: 060501
Audio System - Erratic/Inoperative CD Player

May 2006
Technical Service
SI B 65 10 06
Sound System, Cruise, Alarms, Monitors
SUBJECT
New Audio-Test-CD for Diagnosing a Faulty CD/Audio-DVD Drive or Media
MODEL
All vehicles with CD drive, CD Changer and/or Audio-DVD drive (only on CCC vehicles)
SITUATION
Certain issues with the audio when listening to CDs, such as:
^ CD is not accepted
^ CD skips
^ CD can not be read
^ Permanent or intermittent interruptions
CAUSE
The CD drive/Audio-DVD drive is not working correctly or the media used by the customer is defective.
INFORMATION
The Audio-Test-CD has to be used for a preliminary analysis in the customer vehicle.
The Audio-Test-CD Track # 12 contains the borderline case which the CD or Audio-DVD drive must be able to play CD's without faults.
All the other Tracks on the Audio-Test-CD can be used for additional audio system issues.
PROCEDURE
1. Insert the Audio-Test-CD into the CD drive, Audio DVD drive or CD Changer
[email protected]
532
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1054
2. Select and play Track # 12
3. If there is no malfunction (CD skips, interruptions, etc.) when playing Track # 12:
^ Do not replace parts
^ Check the CD used by the customer
4. If there is a malfunction (CD skips, interruptions, etc.) when playing Track # 12:
^ Replace the defective CD/Audio-DVD drive or CD Changer
Please note:
^ Do not touch the reflective surface
^ Do not stick labels or write on the surface
^ Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight or high temperatures
^ Remove the CD from its protective cover only prior to immediate use
PARTS INFORMATION
Additional copies of the ATC can be ordered if necessary.
Covered under the terms of the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Defect Code Refer to KSD
Labor Operation: Refer to KSD
Labor Allowance: Refer to KSD
IMPORTANT:
The Audio-Test-CD has to be used for a preliminary analysis before replacing parts.
Battery - Charging Voltage Change

SI B 04 27 06
October 2006
Tools and Equipment

Technical Service
SUBJECT
Vehicle Battery Charging Voltage Change
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
To improve the quality of battery charging on BMW vehicles, the charging voltage on approved BMW chargers has been increased to 14.8
volts. This means that the Deutronic DBL430 battery charger must have its charging voltage changed to 14.8 volts. If the menu choice "Factory
Settings" is selected at any time, the factory default of 14.4 volts is set. In this case, the procedure that follows must be performed again.
PROCEDURE
Follow the following procedure to set the Deutronic DBL430 charging voltage to 14.8 volts. The battery charge must not be connected to a vehicle
when performing this procedure. Only connect the 110 volt (AC) line to a suitable outlet.
[email protected]
533
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1055
1. Remove the 12 volt DC cables from a battery/vehicle if so connected
2. Plug the 110 volt line to suitable outlet
3. Switch the charger on using the main power switch on the front. The message "Battery Error" is displayed.
4. Press and hold the 2 arrow buttons (< >) for at least 3 seconds.
5. Release the buttons, the Language display screen appears.
6. Use the arrow buttons (<>) to put the parentheses around "(Eng)".
7. Press the ""menu" button ~2 times to display the "Charge Config" Menu.
8. Select this menu with the right arrow button (>).
9. Change the charging voltage using the arrow buttons. The voltage must be changed to 14.8 volts.
[email protected]
534
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1056
10. Confirm the new setting with the "Enter" button.
11. Confirm the "Save Value" question with the left arrow (<) button.
12. Confirm save (again) with the left arrow (<).
13. Turn charger off using the main power switch.
14. The charger may be used at this time. This procedure need only to be performed one time unless the "Factory Settings" option is restored.
Restraints - Passenger Air Bag Status Lamp Information

SI B 72 06 03
Safety Restraint Systems
November 2006
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. B72 06 03 dated October 2004.
SUBJECT
Passenger Airbag Status Lamp
MODEL
All models with a Passenger Airbag Status Lamp.
INFORMATION
This bulletin is intended to address customer questions you may receive regarding the operation of the Passenger Airbag Status Lamp after they
have consulted the Owner's Manual.
The Passenger Airbag Status Lamp is installed to meet a National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) regulation and, except for Z4,
is located in the headliner near the interior light (The E60 installation is shown in the illustration). On the Z4, the status lamp is located on the
[email protected]
535
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1057
center console.
The Passenger Airbag Status Lamp illuminates to show that the front passenger airbag is OFF (not active). The Passenger Status Airbag Lamp. The
lamp illuminates with constant brightness regardless of day or night.
NEW For E60/E65/E66 to 9/04, E83 to 9/05 and Z4 to 10/04, the lamp is illuminated for two conditions:
- With the ignition in the "ON" position AND the passenger seat unoccupied.
- With the ignition in the "ON" position AND when a child in a rear facing child-restraint system is recognized.
The lamp illuminates briefly during startup and stays illuminated if a child in a rear facing child-restraint system is recognized or if the passenger
seat is unoccupied. The lamp goes out if an adult or a child of sufficient size is recognized.
[NEW] For all other vehicles, the lamp is illuminated:

- Only with the ignition in the "ON" position AND when a child in a rear facing child-restraint system is recognized.
The lamp illuminates briefly during startup and stays illuminated if a child in a rear facing child-restraint system is recognized. The lamp goes out if
an adult or a child of sufficient size is recognized, or if the passenger seat is unoccupied. Technical Service Bulletin # 512106 Date:
060901
Body - Glass Repair Recommendations/Service Kit

SI B51 21 06
September 2006
Body Equipment
Aftersales
SUBJECT
Glass Repair from BMW
BMW Aftersales Business Development & Marketing is pleased to announce "Glass Repair from BMW".
At least one in ten BMWs sustains some degree of windshield damage each year. Experience has shown, however, that up to 40% of windshield
damage can be repaired.
Introducing Glass Repair from BMW. This windshield repair service gives Service Advisors the opportunity to further communicate the "One Stop
Shop" approach to all your service clients. And by drawing new windshield repair business to your workshop, you may benefit from cross-selling
opportunities, such as increased windshield sales.
Since windshields can be repaired in approximately 30 minutes, this type of work should also be offered as part of BMW Fast Lane Service, for
participating centers.
ATTACHMENTS
view PDF attachment B512106Information.
[email protected]
536
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1058
What types of impact damage can be repaired?
When can a windshield not be repaired?

- Any type of damage that is in the Driver's Primary Viewing Area (DPVA) should not be repaired
- Stress cracks or long cracks
- Damage that penetrates the windshield completely
What is the Driver's Primary Viewing Area (DPVA)?
- An area on the exterior of the windshield:

- 12 inches wide (300 mm wide)
- Centered on the driver's position
- Extends from the top to the bottom of the wiper sweep
Delta Kits has been a premier windshield repair supplier since 1984. Their technical service personnel have accumulated many years of actual field
experience, so BMW centers can count on quick and accurate answers to questions or concerns about windshield repair. Technical support and
product information are free, as are all phone calls from within the United States.
The windshield repair system comes complete with everything necessary to achieve professional quality windshield repairs. And because these kits
do not contain any unnecessary items, windshield repairs are faster, use less resin per repair and cost less than other professional systems.
Included is an order form and price sheet for the windshield repair tool kit and supplies from our business partner, Delta Kits. A complete product
catalog is available from Delta by calling 800-548-8332 option 1.
BMW Centers will receive a 10% discount on all products and materials.
What is the cost of the kit and materials?
The following is to clarify the contents of the Windshield Repair Systems. Each kit contains everything you need to begin making repairs.
Included with each kit is a training DVD that will help get you started.
EZK-101 Windshield Repair System - Single Bridge Professional 12v
This single bridge windshield repair system includes the new BTYC100 mobile battery system and top of the line 40-13 12v ultraviolet curing light.
With this system, you no longer need to worry about accessing the 12v outlet in your customer's vehicle; everything you need is in your
[email protected]
537
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1059
Windshield Repair system!
In addition to a B300 (Complete Bridge and Injection Assembly), each EZK-101 single bridge windshield repair system includes:
144-503 Tool box with Custom Fitted Foam Interior

40-13 12v Ultraviolet Lamp
BTYC100 Mobile Battery System
12-1A Cordless Drill with Charger & 1/16" Collet
144-1 2 15ml Bottles of Premium Bond Resin
144-2 7ml Bottle of Premium Pit Resin
144-3 7ml Bottle of Premium Pit Polish
144-4 Box of 100 Razor Blades
50-1 Instruction Manual
77-8T Pack of 100 Curing Tabs
77-8 100' Roll of Curing Film
144-7 Inspection Mirror
77-10 Butane Lighter
FG2 Pack of 5 Round End Carbide Burs
FG701 Pack of 5 Tapered End Carbide Burs
77-7G Steel Point Probe
77-9 Nylon Suction Cup Removal Stick
DR-52 Resin Droppers
77-4W 2 Packs of 5 White Injector Seals
JR300 Cleaning Jar & Cap
50-5 Training Video
EZK-121 Windshield Repair System - Double Bridge Professional 12v
Includes all the same great features found in the EZK-101 repair system, but with an extra B300 (Complete Bridge and Injection Assembly) for the
busy glass technician.
BMW-121 Windshield Repair System - As seen at the 2006 NAC

This kit was designed for BMW to be the ultimate in glass repair. This kit was used at the 2005 NAC.
BMW121 Double Bridge 12 Volt Windshield Repair System includes:
BMW Toolbox with Custom Fitted Foam Interior

B300 Complete Bridge Assembly (2)
40-13 12v Ultraviolet Lamp
BTYC100 Mobile Battery System
12-1A Cordless Drill with Charger &1/16 inches Collet
144-8SS 5 packs MagniBond Resin One Shots (5 one shot syringes per pack)
144-2 7ml Bottle of Premium Pit Resin
144-3 7ml Bottle of Premium Pit Polish
144-4 Box of 100 Razor Blades
50-1 Instruction Manual
50-5 Training Video
77-8T Pack of 100 Curing Tabs
77-8 100' Roll of Curing Film
144-7 Inspection Mirror
FG2 Pack of 5 Round End Carbide Burs
FG701 Pack of 5 Tapered End Carbide Burs
77-7G Steel Point Probe
77-9 Nylon Suction Cup Removal Stick
77-4W 2 Packs of 5 White Injector Seals
JR300 Cleaning Jar & Cap
DS100 Moisture Evaporator
IR101 Infrared Digital Thermometer
UVS100 Ultraviolet Shield
NIT100 Protective Nitrile Gloves
PEW000 Protective Eyewear
HP200 Hood Protector
The following items are not included in kits EZK-101 and EZK-121 but are a recommended purchase.
144-8SS MagniBond Resin One Shots
Popular MagniBond Resin in single application syringes. Each syringe holds just enough resin for one large windshield repair. Eliminates resin
waste, inventory problems and employee theft. Packaged in UV resistant syringes and UV resistant pouches. Sold in packs of five.
[email protected]
538
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1060
UVS100 Ultraviolet Shield
Suction cups on all four corners keep the UVS100 attached securely to the glass. Blocks the sun's ultraviolet rays to eliminate premature curing.
May also be used as a rain shield. Standard size: 8 inches x 16 inches. Custom lengths available upon request.
Training
Windshield repair training will be announced shortly.
Instruments - SIA Function Not Available

SI B 62 15 06
Instruments
December 2006
Technical Service
SUBJECT
SIA Function Not Available
MODEL
E30 (3 Series)
SITUATION
Please be aware that the SIA function has been deleted on replacement instrument clusters.
In case of a customer complaint, please advise the customer that no repairs are possible for this particular feature.
Electrical - Wiring Harness Repair Information

SI B 61 01 07
April 2007
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Wiring Harness Repairs
MODEL
All - including new (unsold) vehicles
INFORMATION
Wiring repairs can be performed on all vehicles including those not yet retailed. In most cases a harness repair is preferable to harness replacement
because a harness replacement can introduce new problems simply because of the complexity of the installation.
Refer to Repair Instructions in groups RA 61 00 and RA 61 13 for specific details on how to perform repairs. These Repair Instructions include
information on all aspects of wire repair, including:
^ Tools and equipment
^ Available types of repair connector
[email protected]
539
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1061
^ Repair kits
^ Connector removal techniques
^ Wire repair techniques
^ Twisted pair repair techniques
^ Optical fiber repair techniques
^ Etc.
Remember, many of the most difficult problems to troubleshoot are caused by wiring issues. It is therefore very important not to take short cuts
when performing wiring harness repairs. Always use the recommended tools and follow the repair instructions.
Information only
Fuel System - TOP TIER Gasoline Usage Recommendations

SI B 13 02 06
September 2006
Fuel Systems
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. B13 02 06 dated April 2006.
SUBJECT
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in BMW Vehicles
MODEL
All with gasoline engines
INFORMATION
Deposit-control additives have been required by the EPA in all gasoline from 1995; however, since the introduction of the lowest additive
concentration (LAC) most gasoline manufacturers have actually reduced the concentration level of detergent additives by up to 50%.
Low content of cleaning additives results in an excessive accumulation of deposits on fuel injectors, the intake valves, the exhaust manifold or
inside the combustion chamber. Due to deposits build-up, customers may experience various driveablity problems (e.g. cold start problems, rough
idle), increased emissions with Service Engine Soon light illumination, reduced engine performance and poor fuel economy.
In order to increase the level of detergent additives in gasoline, the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline requirements were approved by four automotive
companies (BMW, GM, Honda and Toyota).
Usage of the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner, and will reduce deposits-related concerns.
A number of gasoline retailers have already met the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline requirements and are offering this product in all octane grades
in all of their respective marketing areas. The current TOP TIER Gasoline retailers are: Chevron(R); Texaco(R); QuickTrip(R); ConocoPhillips(R);
76(R); Shell(R); Entec Stations(R); MFA Oil Company(R); Kwik Trip(R)/Kwik Star(R); The Somerset Refinery, Inc.(R); Aloha Petroleum(R);
Jiffy Mart(R); Mahalo(R); Trip-Par Oil Company(R). All gasoline outlets carrying the brand of the approved retailer must conform to TOP TIER
requirements on products advertised as such.
RECOMMENDATION
BMW recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline of minimum octane rating of AKI 91 and with alcohol content of less then 10% by
[email protected]
540
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1062
volume (or any other oxygenates with up to 2.8% of oxygen by weight). Only the exclusive usage of TOP TIER Gasoline provides the full benefit
of reducing deposits build-up.
NOTE:
For more information related to alcohol fuels refer to SI B13 01 06 (Alcohol Fuel Blends in BMW Vehicles).
[NEW] If the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is unavailable, we recommend BMW Group FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER PLUS (PN 82 14 0 413
341) be added to the gas tank. For optimum cleaning and deposits control, add a 20 fl. oz. bottle every 3,000 miles when refueling.
[NEW] BMW Group FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER

PLUS.
PN 82 14 0 413 341,
1 bottle, 20 fl. oz.
Ordering in multiples of 6 bottles per case.
[NEW PARTS] INFORMATION
Because carbon deposit build-up is related to fuel quality, it cannot be considered as a defect in vehicle's materials or workmanship. Consequently,
usage of BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus is not covered under the terms of the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty or maintenance plan.
Fuel System - Fuel Quality and Additive Information

SI B 13 07 06
Fuel Systems
November 2006
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Gasoline Quality & Detergent Additives - Customer Information Brochure
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
In recent years, field experiences have shown a significant increase in various driveability complaints due to variations in fuel quality offered by
different manufactures in the U.S.
The quality of gasoline is determined by many factors, with the percentage of alcohol (mainly ethanol) and the level of detergent additives
becoming the key contributors.
To help BMW Technicians correctly understand and diagnose fuel driveability problems, the following Service Information Bulletins were
published in TIS:
- B13 01 06 - Alcohol Fuel Blends in BMW Vehicles;
- B13 02 06 - Top Tier Detergent Gasoline in BMW Vehicles;
[email protected]
541
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1063
- B13 03 06 - Fuel Pump Failure after Refueling with Ethanol Blend;
- B13 04 06 - Alcohol Detection Procedure;
- B13 05 06 - BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus.
It becomes extremely important to educate BMW consumers about importance of gasoline quality, and its influence on vehicle's driveability.
In order to help you communicate fuel quality related topics to your customers, BMW NA published a consumer brochure: "Beyond Octane - How
additives in gasoline are affecting your BMW's performance". Copy of this brochure is attached.
It is available from Harte-Hanks at 609-409-2737, or via CenterNet under After sales-Marketing materials (item BMW-FAB-10/06; cost $0.00;
max. order 50 pieces).
Make sure to provide this information to your BMW owners.
Coming clean on gasoline: ethanol, additives and how fuel mixtures affect your engine.
If you think all gasoline is the same, try telling that to your engine.
There are significant differences in the fuel quality offered by different manufacturers in the U.S. The quality of the fuel is determined by the
percentage of ethanol in the mixture and the level of detergent additives.
Depending on these factors, your vehicle's performance and fuel efficiency can be affected.
Beyond octane:
How additives in gasoline are affecting your BMW's performance.
What you should know about what goes into your tank.
What is Ethanol?
Ethanol is a type of alcohol which is combined with gasoline, primarily to reduce engine knock. In combustion, ethanol provides less energy than
gasoline, resulting in reduced fuel economy. When ethanol burns inside the engine, it tends to form a weaker mixture that may cause misfire, rough
idle and cold start issues in your vehicle. In addition, engine components may deteriorate overtime when in contact with ethanol.
Consequently, commercial gasoline is limited to a maximum of10% ethanol. As stated in your BMW Owner's Manual, fuels containing 10% or less
ethanol will NOT void the applicable warranties covering defects in materials or workmanship.
Detergent additives and how they affect fuel quality.
Detergent additives have been required by the EPA in gasoline since 1995 to control the formation of engine and fuel system deposits. Lower
quality gasoline is formulated with less effective and less expensive detergent additives. Over time, even occasional use of this gasoline robs your
engine of its power, performance and fuel efficiency.
What gasoline does BMW recommend?
BMW recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline with a minimum octane rating of AKI 91. This gasoline also complies with the 10% orless
ethanol requirement. It's a higher standard with enhanced fuel detergency that helps to avoid driveability problems.
Get better performance from a cleaner engine with BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus.
[email protected]
542
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1064
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is unavailable in your area, how can you make sure your BMW gets the full amount of detergent it needs to burn
cleanly and run smoothly? For optimum cleaning, use one bottle of BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus every 3,000 miles when refueling. This
will help keep your BMW's fuel injectors and intake valves clean, to get the most performance, fuel efficiency - and fun - from every mile.
BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus (20 fl.oz.)

8214 0 413 341 MSRP $12.50Technical Service Bulletin # 160107 Date: 070802
Emissions - Evaporative Emissions System Testing

SI B 16 01 07
Fuel Supply Systems
August 2007
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. B16 01 07 dated August 2007.
SUBJECT
Testing Evaporative Systems for Leaks
MODEL
All Models
INFORMATION
Testing evaporative systems for leaks is very challenging. We have developed some diagnostic hints along with the introduction of a new special
tool to properly connect a smoke machine to the DMTL fresh air vent/filter connection.
Recently the VACUTEC(R) Smoke Machine [NEW] 625-522B-BMW has been added to the BMW Equipment Program. The VACUTEC(R)
Smoke Machine[NEW] 625-522B-BMW is the only approved testing device for fuel and evaporative systems. This device automatically converts
air to high purity nitrogen using Pressure Swing Absorption (PSA) nitrogen technology. Orders for the VACUTEC(R) Smoke Machine [NEW]
625-522B-BMW can be placed by calling the BMW Equipment program at 1-888-222-7997.
Included with the new VACUTEC(R) smoke machine are various caps and adaptors to help connect the applicator hose to the vehicle. It is always
suggested to not disturb the system before testing, try to create as little as possible disturbance to the system when connecting the smoke machine.
This smoke machine utilizes an UltraTraceUV(R) smoke solution. The smoke solution incorporates an ultraviolet dye which helps pinpoint the leak
with an ultraviolet residue surrounding the leak area. Determining the source of the leak is made easy when the included Hi-Density True UV LED
light and incandescent white light are used.
[email protected]
543
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1065
Shown is a new test tool which can connect directly to DMTL (Diagnosis Module Tank Leakage) pump equipped vehicles only after the fresh air
filter connection has been removed.
Evaporative Test Adaptor (for vehicles equipped with a DMTL pump)

PN 83 30 0 433 207
1. Bead Chain Support
2. Hose
3. Quick Connect
Hose Connection to DMTL
1. Quick Connect Adaptor
2. DMTL fresh air filter connection
When properly connecting the tool to the system the main benefit is that it does not disturb the integrity of the system. This tool should be used
anytime the vehicle is in the workshop for a small or large leak in evaporative system. Shown in the picture is the tool connected to the DMTL at
the fresh air filter connection.
1. Quick Connect Adaptor
2. Clear Hose
3. Smoke application hose/adaptor
All vehicles equipped with a LDP (Leak Diagnosis Pump) system.
[email protected]
544
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1066
Vehicles equipped with the LDP system will require a series of small pieces of rubber hose to adapt the smoke machine application hose.
1. LDP Pump
2. Hose with 16mm inside diameter
3. Hose with 18mm outside diameter
4. Smoke application hose/adaptor
1. LDP Pump
2. Hose with 16mm diameter placed over LDP fresh air filter connection.
3. Hose with 18mm outside diameter pushed in side of hose with 16 mm inside diameter
4. Smoke application hose/adaptor pushed into
For more information regarding evaporative system testing describing possible fire hazards using oxygen vs. nitrogen please refer to the following
SAE website.
www.sae.org/technical/papers/2007-01-1235
Information only
Disclaimer
Body/Frame - Structural Repair Requirements

SI B 41 01 04
Body
October 2007
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes S.I. B41 01 04 dated April 2005.
SUBJECT
[email protected]
545
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1067
Structural Repair Requirements
MODEL
All except E52-Z8
SITUATION
All BMW models use advanced materials and fastening technologies. Materials such as High Strength Steels and Weld Bonding attachment
methods require the use of unique repair procedures, processes and tools.
PROCEDURE
BMW models have specific repair procedures and fixed tolerances. BMW requires the use of an approved repair bench and measuring system when
replacing any structural components of a BMW vehicle.
BMW defines the structure of a vehicle as the components that comprise the body shell that are weld-bonded, rivet bonded or welded on. Currently
the only approved bench repair systems are:
^ Car Bench - Manta, Piranha, Murena, or Octopus repair benches in conjunction with dedicated fixtures, mini jigs or universal fixtures. The
Contact electronic measuring system is also approved.
^ Celette - dedicated bench system with fixtures, or the NAJA electronic measuring system with positioning tool NA. 1000
^ Car-O-Liner bench system and electronic measuring system used in conjunction with:
^ Car-O-Flex or EVO 3 Universal fixture system
^ B66, or B76-B77 side support, or EVO 1 and 2 support system - any one (1) of these three (3) is required
Car Bench, Celette, and Car-O-Liner work closely with BMW in designing and building fixtures within BMW specifications, which not only
provides accurate component location, but also provides safe and proper anchoring of the vehicle.
BMW also separates the different repair bench setups into two categories:
^ Diagnostic setup - A fixture setup used for diagnosing damage. This setup is not designed to anchor the vehicle in any way, but only
supports the weight of undamaged areas in order to maintain a proper datum line. This setup may require removal of exhaust systems,
suspension components, splash shields, etc. The benefit is accurate dimensioning and diagnosis with minimal removal of components. This
set up is typically used during the blueprinting stage of the repair to develop an accurate repair plan.
^ Anchoring setup - A fixture setup used for anchoring a vehicle while making corrective pulls. This setup uses a minimum of six (6)
anchoring points including four (4) rocker clamps and two (2) additional fixtures in the damaged area. This set up is common with universal
type repair benches because of the limited holding capacity of a universal system. Depending on the damage the vehicle may require more
anchoring points which is determined by a trained BMW Body Repair Technician, but six (6) is the minimum for any vehicle requiring
corrective pulls. With a dedicated repair bench more holding points are necessary in the area requiring corrective pulls.
^ Combination Setup - Utilization of both diagnostic and anchoring setup for repair (i.e. Diagnostic setup in rear for the undamaged area of
vehicle and anchoring setup in front for the damaged area of the vehicle). The advantages are labor time savings and less removal and
installation of components. This setup may only be used in conjunction with rocker / jack clamps. To determine if this setup can be utilized
a trained BMW Body Repair Technician must create a repair plan to ensure proper anchoring can be accomplished.
This equipment can be purchased through the BMW Equipment Program, which offers special pricing and payment/financing options. For more
information on the Equipment Purchase Program.
Disclaimer
Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly

SI B 65 42 07
Audio, Navigation, Monitors, Alarms, SRS
January 2008
Technical Service
SUBJECT:
Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly - Troubleshooting
[email protected]
546
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1068
MODEL:
All with DWA Alarm (Option 302)
DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
When troubleshooting a customer complaint that the DWA (Anti-theft alarm system) triggers unexpectedly, stored fault codes may be misleading
and result in an incorrect repair.
The first check must be to check the alarm counter, which shows the component responsible for the false alarms and the alarm frequency.
The alarm counter is checked using the BMW diagnosis equipment as follows:
^ MOST bus vehicles: "Function selection/Complete vehicle/Body/Locking and security functions/Burglar alarm system/DWA activations".
^ I-bus vehicles: The input responsible for alarm triggering is stored in the alarm memory in the ZKE (General Module). The alarm memory can
be read out with the "short test" or with "read fault memory" in the diagnosis program.
Continue troubleshooting based on the results from the alarm counter check.
Information only
Disclaimer
Drivetrain - Differential Cover Sealant

SI B 33 03 08
Rear Axle
April 2008
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Differential Cover Sealer
MODEL
All models
INFORMATION
Resealing the differential cover requires a liquid sealer as per Repair Instruction RA 33 11 ... Replacing rear cover gasket on rear deferential. The
Repair Instruction advises the technician to refer to the EPC for the correct sealer; however, this material is not available via the BMW parts
distribution system. It is recommended that the Loctite Sealer 5970 be used to perform these repairs; when needed, it must be ordered via telephone
from the following vendor.
PARTS INFORMATION
Applied Industrial Technologies
Telephone: 517-787-2414
Payment Type: MasterCard or Visa
Order item number 39246 (Loctite 5970 300ml)
Material cost: $35.48 plus $9.77 for shipping and handling
Note:
One 300ml tube will be needed per vehicle. An unopened tube of sealer has a shelf life of 6 months, and it is recommended that the sealer be
ordered on a case-by-case basis only.
[email protected]
547
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1069
Disclaimer
Audio System - Retrieving Radio Security Codes

SI B 65 05 99
Sound Systems, Cruise, Alarms, Monitors
February 2008
Technical Service
This Service Information Bulletin supersedes S.I. 65 05 99 dated January 2008.
SUBJECT
Radio Security Codes in DCS
MODEL
All with anti-theft radio
SITUATION
Procedure to obtain Radio security codes via DCS
PROCEDURE
In order to obtain the correct radio security code:
1. If possible, ask the customer where the "radio security code" card is located, (normally with the Owner's Manual). It is recommended that the
BMW Center keep the radio codes on file.
2. In some situations the "radio security code" card cannot be located. In order to avoid unnecessary delays in obtaining the correct radio
security code, the radio code can be found using DCS, for radios manufactured by Alpine, Pioneer and Blaupunkt.
BMW uses several different manufacturers of radios. The most common are: Alpine, Pioneer and Blaupunkt. On earlier production vehicles the
following radio brands can be found: Bavaria, Becker and Phillips. The manufacturers name is always printed on the radio label for easy
identification (label is located on top of the radio chassis). Most radio codes for Alpine, Pioneer and Blaupunkt are available via DCS. Each radio
manufacturer has a different method of obtaining their security code. Use the following as a guideline when retrieving the proper serial numbers
and entering into DCS to obtain the radio code.
Alpine Non I-Bus Radio- (E30, E34, E36 vehicles)
[email protected]
548
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1070
Alpine radios use two types of serial numbers. The radio serial number will contain either nine or ten characters. For either type of serial number
enter all characters into DCS.
Example: S/N A50223456
Enter: A50223456
Example: S/N A50223456a
Enter: A50223456a
IMPORTANT: If the serial number begins with

A501.... When entering into DCS change the first
letter to B.
Example: S/N A50123456
Enter: B501 23456
Alpine I-Bus Radio - (E36 from 96MY)
With the introduction of I-Bus technology (from 1996

production), radio serial numbers can be displayed in
the radio matrix by using the radio Service Function:
^ Turn the radio OFF and ON again
^ Press and hold the "m" button for 5 seconds
^ A number will display in the radio matrix
^ Example: SNT0123456 or W0123456
^ Turn radio OFF to exit Service Function
^ Enter into DCS the last eight characters to obtain the code. Enter: T0123456 or W0123456
If the radio serial number cannot be displayed using the Service Function, remove the radio and obtain the serial number from the radio chassis.
Alpine I-Bus serial numbers contain fourteen or fifteen characters. If the serial number contains 15 characters, drop the last letter and use the last
[email protected]
549
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1071
eight characters and enter into DCS.
Example: S/N AL6BDUT0123456a

Enter: T0123456 into DCS
If the serial number contains 14 characters use the last eight remaining characters and enter into DCS.
Example: S/N AL6BDUT0123456

Enter: T0123456
If the ALPINE anti-theft code is not found in DCS, ALPINE has created a website to obtain these radio codes. Log on to the ALPINE website.
The ALPINE Anti-Theft code will then be displayed immediately.
[NEW] Important: Do not change the Password since this deactivates the access for all other users!
Pioneer Radio - (E30, E31, E32)
Pioneer radio serial numbers contain ten characters. The first three characters are always letters, followed by seven digits. To obtain a radio code
through DCS, enter the full serial number.
Example: S/N POL0123456

Enter: POL0123456
Pioneer Radio- (E34, E36)
Pioneer radio serial numbers contain ten characters. The first three characters are always letters, followed by seven digits. To obtain radio code
through DCS, enter the full serial number.
Example: S/N POL0123456

Enter: POL01234562345
If the first letters are missing or if the radio code obtained through DCS is invalid, an alternate method must be used. The first three letters of the
serial number must be changed. Example: If the serial number is between 0000001 to 0000100, enter "pid" in front of the serial number.
Blaupunkt Radio- (CD43 used in E36/7)
Blaupunkt radio codes are now available in DCS. The radio serial numbers can be pulled up in the radio matrix by using the radio Service Function:
^ Turn the radio OFF and ON again
^ Press and hold the "m" button for 5 seconds
^ A number will appear in the matrix
[email protected]
550
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1072
^ Example: W1478822
^ Turn radio OFF to deactivate Service Function
^ Enter all eight characters into DCS to obtain a radio code.
If the radio serial number cannot be displayed by using the Service Function, remove the radio to obtain the serial number from the label. Blaupunkt
radios have serial numbers containing fourteen characters. Enter the last eight characters into DCS.
Example: S/N BP8272W1483692

Enter: W1483692
There are some instances where the serial number displayed in the radio matrix displays all numbers. The first number is usually a 1. If this is the
case you need to replace the 1 with either a Y or Z when entering into DCS.
Example: S/N BP027319661001

Enter: Y9661001 or Z9661001
PHILLIPS- radio codes are only available via PuMA (submitting a PuMA case). Example: PH7850S1083150. The complete serial number is
required.
BAVARIA- radio codes are only available through via PuMA (submitting a PuMA case).
Example: PI92XXC0012345. The complete serial number is required.
BECKER- radio codes are only available via PuMA (submitting a PuMA case). Example: BE0729X570438. The complete serial number is
required.
Please note: Three unsuccessful attempts to enter the code will result in the radio being disabled for an hour. If the radio is disabled, the key must
be left in KLR and the radio must be switched on for an hour. For those radio codes that are not found in DCS, please submit a PuMA case
including the radio serial number and manufacturer. Refer to SI B00 01 03 for information on how to use PuMA.
For Information only.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
551
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1073
view PDF attachment B650599Attachment_A.
Disclaimer
[email protected]
552
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1074
Paint - Environmental/Industrial Fallout Repair

SI B 99 01 08
Paint Work
September 2008
Aftersales
SUBJECT
Environmental Paint Damage Repair
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Environmental issues can damage painted surfaces. Issues such as acid rain, industrial fallout, rail dust, bird droppings, and bugs can all damage the
paint surface. Repair processes are in place to repair
damage caused by these issues.
Industrial fallout or rail dust issues typically occur when new vehicles have been transported by rail to a location, or when a vehicle is located near
rail tracks for an extended period of time. Rail dust is comprised of heated iron particles from train brakes that, when airborne, will land on the
horizontal surfaces of vehicles and imbed themselves into the paint surface.
Typical sanding and polishing techniques alone will not resolve the issue of rail dust. BMW, in cooperation with 3M, has developed a procedure for
removing and correcting rail dust damage for the paint surface of a vehicle. Below are the process and product for removing and correcting rail dust
damage.
PROCEDURE
The process below is for the removal of contamination and minor paint surface defects resulting from transportation and storage of new vehicles.
Please be sure to use only BMW approved products when attempting to make a repair to the paint surface!
1. Wash and rinse the vehicle thoroughly, using BMW approved car wash soap*.
2. Check exterior surfaces for contaminants a rough or gritty feel, or use a white terry cloth towel to see if you get small snags of material on
the surface.
3. Work contaminated areas with a 3M clay bar, using light pressure and car wash soap or 3Mtrade; Gloss Enhancer as a lubricant.
4. Rinse and dry the surface.
5. Knead the clay periodically to expose a new surface.
6. Polish the surface, using BMW approved polishing materials and techniques
Note:
Refer to the BMW Color system manual for approved polishing materials and proper techniques.
* Please see page two for a list of BMW approved materials.
PARTS INFORMATION
The following materials are approved by BMW for the removal of rail dust and for the repair of the paint surface:
^ 3M(TM) 200 gram clay bar - PN 38070
^ 3M(TM) Finesse-Ittrade; SRC Finishing Material - PN 05927
^ 3M(TM) Wool Pad - PN 05703 or 05719
^ 3M(TM) Detailing Cloth - PN 06016
^ 3M(TM) Black Foam Pad - PN 05725 or 05738
^ 3M(TM) Perfect-It 3000trade; Ultrafin SE - PN 06068
^ 3M(TM) Yellow Wool Pad - PN 05713
^ 3M(TM) Perfect-It trade; Foam Polishing Pad Glaze - PN 05996
[email protected]
553
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1075
^ 3M(TM) Black Foam Pad - PN 05729
^ 3M(TM) Car Wash Soap - PN 39000
^ 3M(TM) Detailing Cloth - PN 06017
^ BMW Car Wash Soap - 83 12 0 412 530
^ BMW Polishing Cloth - 83 12 0 411 891
For product safety and health information, please see the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS 08-5407-5), or contact:
3M Automotive Aftermarket Division
3M Center, Bldg. 223-6N-01
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Disclaimer
Audio System - AM/FM Radio Reception Problems

SI B65 01 04
July 2008
Technical Service
SUBJECT
AM/FM Radio Reception Problems Radio/Antenna Diagnosis
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Various AM/FM reception problems
CAUSE
^ Environmental conditions
^ Signal transmission problems
^ Poor electrical connections (ground or power)
^ Soiled rear window glass (film and/or residue buildup on interior/antenna grid side of the window)
^ Poor antenna connections
^ Defective parts (some addressed by SIBs for specific models and complaints)
^ Tinted windows
^ [NEW] HD radio
INFORMATION
The Antenna
Many of the problems which occur with a car and not with a home stereo system stem from the differences between home and car antennas. A
[email protected]
554
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1076
home radio/TV antenna, which is considerably larger, is usually mounted on the highest point of the roof. It is often multi-directional for tuning in
to the best possible reception; a home antenna always remains in one place.
On the other hand, the antenna in a car is much smaller. It sits close to the ground, rather than being high in the air. It is virtually always in motion.
Given the difficult job car antennas are asked to perform, should problems with AM/FM reception be encountered by customers, it is most likely
not the fault of the BMW radio.
The stations that the customer is able to receive will depend largely upon signal strength. This varies depending upon the time of day, the season
and other factors.
AM Reception
AM radio waves generally deliver a powerful, continuous signal over more than a one-hundred-mile radius from their point of origin, even in
mountainous or inner-city areas. This is because AM waves are dispersed as ground waves, which follow the curvature of the earth, and space
waves, which actually bounce off the upper ionosphere, creating a downward route to the automobile, no matter where it is driven.
This factor is much better at night, and also tends to be better in winter than in summer.
AM signal transmission problems

The problem with AM reception is that it is highly susceptible to electrical interference from sources such as power lines, electrical storms, and
even nearby vehicles.
In the United States, due to the large number of stations, many smaller AM stations are required to sign off or reduce power sharply at sunset, in
order to reduce interference with distant stations.
For AM signals, the single most important factor for good reception is the time of day. AM signals almost always get absorbed by the diffusion
layer of the ionosphere during daylight hours. As a result, all AM signals received during midday hours will arrive by ground wave, making
reception of signals over a few hundred miles away unusual in daylight. At night, however, the ionosphere reflects AM signals ("skywave"),
making it possible for signals to be heard at much greater distances.
[email protected]
555
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1077
FM Reception
FM reception which can include the car's local Weather Band station is usually better in sound quality than AM reception. However, unlike AM
waves, FM signals are weaker, delivering reception for only about forty to fifty miles under even the best conditions.
FM signal transmission problems

With FM signals, several problems can occur as a result of the way in which these signals travel and their relative lack of strength.
Dead Spots - If a direct FM wave and a reflected FM wave reach the car antenna at the same time, they will cancel each other out, creating a dead
spot.
Multipath - This is similar to a dead spot in that two stations are fighting for the same general frequency. A "multipath" is an area in which a
reflected FM signal is occupying a frequency very close to that of a direct signal. If the reflected wave is stronger than the direct wave, the result
will be a fluttering sound as the car passes through that area. This happens very often in inner-city areas.
Fading - This occurs as the car is leaving the effective reception range of the FM station; the signal becomes weak and fuzzy. Because the range of
most FM stations is only about forty miles, fading may be experienced quite often during long trips and even right in a motorist's own
neighborhood - if a particular FM station is broadcasting from forty miles away or more.
Station Swapping - An FM receiver is designed to search for and lock onto the strongest signal in any area. However, if there are two stations in a
given area that are broadcasting on very close frequencies, the radio may "swap" back and forth between these two stations, depending on which
signal is stronger.
Stereo Broadcasts
Stereo broadcasts have an effective range of only about forty miles, unlike mono broadcasts, whose effective range is usually about fifty miles.
This means that if someone is listening to an FM stereo broadcast, and the car is thirty miles away from the transmitter, interference may be
experienced. With a mono broadcast, on the other hand, such interference will not be heard until the car is approximately forty to fifty miles away
from the transmitter.
The Weather Band is a special feature on some BMW radios. It is designed as a special convenience for drivers as they travel from one place to
another. During a trip, the Weather Band will automatically seek out the strongest weather broadcast in any given area. When it finds a signal
strong enough to lock onto, it automatically does so.
[NEW] HD Radio
HD radio has its own unique issues that affect reception quality. For more information, refer to B65 25 05.
CORRECTION
Effective radio diagnosis starts with screening the complaint. When a customer complains about a radio problem, it is very important to observe the
complaint and explain the functionality to the customer (as outlined above) prior to turning the car in for diagnosing and repairing.
1. Get a detailed description of the complaint from the customer, including the precise circumstances under which the problem occurs.
2. Whenever possible, the customer should be asked to demonstrate the problem.
3. If the problem is caused by external interference, ask the customer which stations or frequencies are delivering poor reception. This will help
to determine whether the problem is location or distance-related.
4. Try to determine through the customer interview whether the problem is intermittent or constant.
5. Determine whether the problem is weather or temperature-related.
Once all pertinent information relating to the complaint has been gathered, refer to the following steps:
[email protected]
556
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1078
1. Verify the customer complaint and attempt to duplicate the problem. Find out if the problem occurs on AM band, FM band or both.
On vehicles with rear window defogger/grid antennas, thoroughly clean the inside of the rear window with BMW Window Cleaner, using a
lint-free cloth to eliminate any conductive coatings on the glass. The grids can easily be damaged by rubbing too strongly or using an abrasive
detergent.
2. Check existing Service Information bulletins (refer to the attached list of SIs) in order to determine whether a service procedure has already
been developed for the problem in question. If an SI for the problem is available, troubleshooting can begin as described in that bulletin.
3. If no information can be found in existing Service Information bulletins, it is your responsibility to decide what the logical source of the
problem might be by troubleshooting the vehicle itself. If the problem appears to be in a sound system component other than the radio or
some other component of the vehicle, the entire system should be diagnosed. Through system diagnosis, it is possible to find things like a
loose ground wire on the antenna, or a pinched speaker cable.
4. Most of our vehicles use a diversity antenna system and may use more than one piece of glass and more than one receiver antenna for
reception. Refer to the appropriate schematic to troubleshoot the system.
5. Check all connections at the antenna amplifier module, rear glass and radio. Make sure that connections are tight; check the knurled nut
antenna connection at the antenna amplifier, and look for signs of damage or corrosion.
6. A poor body ground can cause a "leak" into the antenna circuit. Check all relevant grounds, including the following:
- Battery ground connection to the body
- Engine ground to body connection
- Radio ground
- Amplifier ground (if equipped)
- DSP ground (if equipped)
- Ground connections in the C-pillar for the rear glass and defrost circuit
7. Check the mounting of the antenna amplifier module. This is typically case grounded, so a loose mounting screw can cause reception
problems.
8. If there is bad or no reception on either AM or FM, make sure that the coaxial cable coming from the antenna amplifier module is not
internally shorted. Disconnect both ends of the cable and check for continuity between the outer and the inner conductors of the cable. There
should be an open circuit between the outer and inner conductor.
9. Check to make sure that power is supplied to the antenna amplifier module (white wire = B+).
10. If the reception is ONLY affected with the defroster turned on, the problem may be:
^ The defrost trap circuits (small boxes located in the C-pillar, wired to the rear window) may be defective and can be replaced.
^ The mounting glue for the glass is forming a conductive path across multiple lines on the defroster grid.
^ There is a break in the defroster grid.
Jump your antenna inputs from your antenna amplifier to a stock (replacement) rear window or another vehicle's rear window, and retest to see
whether the defroster still causes the reception loss. If yes, the fault is in the car; if no, replace the rear window.
[email protected]
557
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1079
[email protected]
558
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1080
[email protected]
559
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1081
Additional Service Informations:
Disclaimer
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Information

SI B 32 10 08
August 2008
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Wheel Alignment Data
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
The need to perform a wheel alignment is generally dictated by a component replacement, such as a steering gear, or to address a customer
complaint related to a vehicle's handling characteristics.
Many wheel alignment machines use a multicolored display to indicate alignment measurements, such as camber and toe. Some machines will
display a reading in a red font to indicate that an adjustment is recommended. However, a red display in and of itself does not indicate that the
[email protected]
560
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1082
vehicle falls outside of the alignment specifications. Since many of the alignment specifications include a tolerance or variation, always refer to the
alignment specifications in the Repair Manual.
Please note that brand new vehicles and vehicles which have been suspended on a lift may exhibit some deviation from nominal specifications, due
to the fact that the suspension has not fully settled.
Disclaimer
A/C - Control Assembly Damage Information

SI B 64 05 08
October 2008
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Damage to the Air Conditioning Control Panel
MODEL
ALL
INFORMATION
For occupant safety in the event of a crash, the operating elements must, by law, give a visual indication of a specific level of force. This force is
sufficiently high that damage will not occur under normal operation. If this force is exceeded as a result of external factors, and damage is thereby
caused to the Air Conditioning Control Panel, this damage is graded as being caused by the use of excessive force.
Typical examples of damage caused by excessive force are, for example, where the temperature controller/rotary controls and buttons on the air
conditioning control panel have been pushed in or have impact, scratch or pressure marks. In other cases, the rotary controls and buttons are stiff;
they make noise when turned and their function is limited.
In order to be able to identify these cases of damage caused by the use of excessive force, pictures are attached with examples of such cases.
Example illustrations
Picture 1: Damage to the surface and buttons by excessive force
Picture 2: Button pushed in too far
Picture 3: Scratched panel surface
If the Air Conditioning Control Panel has clearly been damaged due to the use of excessive force, the replacement part cost cannot be claimed
under Warranty.
Control panels which have physical damage are not covered under Warranty.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
561
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1083
view B640508Picture_1.
[email protected]
562
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1084
Disclaimer
Wipers/Washers - Windshield Washer Malfunctions

SI B61 01 09
March 2009
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Windshield Washer Malfunction
MODEL
All models
SITUATION
The windshield washer jets spray a very low volume of fluid, or no fluid at all. In many cases, the strainer, located on the windshield washer fluid
pump, has become clogged by debris or an algae-like substance.
CAUSE
A buildup of debris or the presence of an algae-like substance on the strainer
^ The buildup of debris is typically caused by particles remaining in the system from manufacturing, and primarily occurs on low-mileage
vehicles.
^ The algae-like substance is typically caused by using non-approved washer fluid or straight water in the washer fluid reservoir.
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the washer fluid pump per Repair Instruction REP 61 71 100.
2. When the pump is removed, most of the existing washer fluid in the reservoir should be drained and properly discarded.
3. Replace the strainer, which is installed on the end of the pump. The updated strainer has a larger mesh to avoid future occurrences.
[email protected]
563
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1085
4. Do not replace the washer pump, provided that it is still functioning properly.
5. Refill the washer fluid reservoir with BMW washer fluid at the specified concentration.
PARTS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Body - Windshield Damage Analysis

SI B51 35 08
Body Equipment
January 2009
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Cracked or Damaged Windshields
MODEL
All models
SITUATION
The windshield may become cracked or damaged for a variety of reasons. While the windshield requires repair or replacement, it is important to
take note of the following guidelines regarding what types of damage may or may not be covered by the BMW New Vehicle Warranty.
CAUSE
Windshield damage is typically caused by one of the following:
1. Outside influence typically stone chips in nearly all cases
2. Excessive force applied such as levering out the A-pillar trim
3. Stress crack due to heavy torsional loads on the vehicle's body or an incorrectly-fitted windshield (least common cause)
[email protected]
564
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1086
PROCEDURE
When evaluating a cracked or damaged windshield to determine whether it is eligible to be claimed under warranty, it is necessary to determine the
root cause of the damage. Reviewing the following possible causes will help to determine the root cause.
Outside Influence
^ An outside influence is responsible for the damage if:
1. One or more chips are present on the outside of the glass along the crack;
2. A crack started from anywhere other than an outside edge.
^ Run a non-permanent felt tip pen or small marker over the length of the damaged area. Even very minor surface damage will be felt.
^ Often when a small stone chip occurs, the subsequent crack takes time to develop, as the vehicle is subject to normal torsional loads or
temperature fluctuations.
^ Any damage due to an outside influence will not be covered under warranty.
Excessive force
^ A windshield may become damaged due to excessive force being applied while performing other repairs, such as levering out the A-pillar trim
or removing a rear view mirror.
^ If the windshield is damaged as a result of excessive force being applied, warranty consideration will not be given.
Stress crack
^ Under very isolated circumstances, a stress crack may form due to a combination of glass position and heavy torsional loads on the body of the
vehicle.
^ These cracks always start from an outside edge of the glass.
^ Most often the cracks begin at one of the corners of the windshield.
^ Stress cracks typically occur within the first year or 10,000 miles of the vehicle's service life.
Additional Notes:
Only OEM BMW windshields may be considered for a warranty claim where a stress crack is the root cause. If a non BMW windshield was
installed in the vehicle, any resulting damage (i.e., cracks, water leaks, etc.) will not be covered. BMW windshields can be identified by a BMW
Roundel stamped on the glass in one of the lower corners.
If the damage to the glass is due to an outside influence, very often the glass can be repaired as opposed to being replaced. For additional
information on this repair and recommended repair kits, refer to Parts bulletin 51 09 06.
Disclaimer
[email protected]
565
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1087
Electrical - Battery Charging And Testing Procedure

SI B 61 11 09
June 2009
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Battery Charging and Testing Procedure
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
The following proper battery testing and charging procedures are necessary to fulfill the requirements of the warranty as well as meeting customer
expectations.
Vehicles with a discharged battery must have their batteries charged and tested prior to proceeding with further diagnostics.
Battery Charging Procedure
1. As described in bulletin SI B04 27 06, be certain that the charging voltage on approved BMW chargers has been set to 14.8 volts. Failure to set
the charge rate to 14.8 volts will result in the charger switching to FC (floating charge) before the battery is adequately charged.
2. Be sure to refer to the Deutronic DBL-430/DBL-800 or V&H MultiCharger 750 manuals for proper charger setup procedures. Additionally on
Deutronic chargers refer to attachments "DBL-430 Settings" and "DBL-800 Settings" for the correct default settings to use.
When using any Deutronic battery charger, be sure that the charging amperage has been set at 15%-20% above the amp hour rating of the battery.
Since the Deutronic DBL-430 is only adjustable in amperage increments of 10, it may be necessary to round up to the next higher amperage setting.
Failure to do so will result in an undercharged battery. For a 90Ah battery, set to 110A and for 110Ah, set to 130A.
The Deutronic DBL-800 charger, as well as the V&H MultiCharger 750, is self-calibrating; however, voltage and amperage can be manually set in
the service menu and should be checked and adjusted as necessary, prior to charging.
3. If the vehicle is equipped with an IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor), be sure to charge the battery from the service port or disconnect the battery
from the vehicle. DO NOT connect the charger directly to the IBS.
4. A fully charged battery is indicated on the Deutronics chargers by a green LED and the letters "FC" for "Floating Charge" being visible in the
LCD display. The V&H MultiCharger 750 will display "Battery Full" in the LCD display.
Midtronics Battery Testing Procedure
1. All battery tests must be performed directly at the battery.
2. For in-vehicle testing, all electronic loads must be off, as a high-current draw in the period before sleep mode may adversely affect the result.
3. Both Midtronics tester clamps must be firmly attached to the appropriate battery terminals which have been cleaned with a wire brush. Follow
the menu prompts.
4. Select "IN-VEHICLE" or "OUT-OF-VEHICLE" (as appropriate).
5. Select the CCA rating from the vehicle battery label.
6. If the warning "SYSTEM NOISE" is displayed, be sure all electrical loads such as open doors, interior lighting or active systems are turned off.
In rare cases, it is possible for an active BUS line to produce sufficient electrical noise to hamper testing. In such instances, the BUS must be
allowed to enter sleep mode before proceeding, or the vehicle may be placed in sleep mode using the diagnostic equipment.
7. Dependent on the battery voltage, the question "BEFORE CHARGE" or "AFTER CHARGE" will be displayed.
^ "BEFORE CHARGE" must be selected if the battery has not yet been charged.
^ "AFTER CHARGE" must be selected after the battery has been charged.
8. After testing, use the Midtronics printer to print a result ticket with the warranty code. The following tester results are possible:
a. "CHARGE & RETEST" - If the battery has less than approximately 8 volts when tested and the tester does not find the battery to be
[email protected]
566
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1088
defective (e.g., a shorted cell), the battery will be tested and the message "CHARGE & RETEST" will be displayed.
b. "GOOD--RECHARGE" - If the tester displays "GOOD--RECHARGE", the battery must be retested after recharging.
Note:
Should the tester display "GOOD--RECHARGE" after fully charging, print a second result ticket and charge the battery for two additional hours.
If the tester still displays "GOOD--RECHARGE", print the results and replace the battery.
c. "GOOD BATTERY" - Only release the vehicle when the tester displays "GOOD BATTERY" and the open circuit voltage (OCV) is 12.6
volts or higher this indicates a fully charged battery. Note that the display "GOOD BATTERY" is not in itself an indication of a fully
charged battery. This is important, as the Midtronics tester does not require a 100% state of charge to determine whether the battery is good;
however, a 100% state of charge is necessary to insure proper and trouble-free operation of the vehicle's electrical system components.
d. "REPLACE BATTERY" - If the tester determines the battery to be defective, the message "REPLACE BATTERY" will be displayed.
9. Retain all Midtronics printouts with the warranty code in the vehicle file.
Additional Information
1. Below is an Open Circuit Voltage chart listing battery voltage as it relates to the state of battery charge.
An Open Circuit Voltage measurement is only valid if the surface charge has been removed. It can be measured using a multimeter. It is also the
voltage shown on the Midtronics printout. To remove the surface charge, turn on the high beams for one minute and then allow the battery voltage
to stabilize (approximately one minute) before testing.
Open Circuit Voltage vs. State of Battery Charge
2. If the Midtronics tester detects a surface charge, it will be displayed on the tester. Follow the prompts to turn on the headlights for about one
minute, and then follow the prompts. The tester will continue
testing the battery automatically. For best results when testing the battery out of the vehicle, always remove the surface charge before testing if the
battery has been charged.
3. Do not replace a battery just because the eye is black. The green eye is only an indicator of the cell to which it is attached.
4. When a discharged battery is encountered, check the function of the charging system. Perform the "Energy Diagnostics" test plan (B61 13 05)
and, if necessary, check the electrical system for closed circuit current draw as per SI B61 08 00.
5. Other related Service Information bulletins:
^ SI B04 25 02 Operation of current Midtronics tester
^ SI B04 11 02 - Operation of Deutronic DBL-430 charger
Warranty Code for claims relating to all BMW Batteries
The warranty code is an encrypted code that includes all of the information from the printout.
Excluding the situation described in Note 2 (below), the Midtronics tester must be used for testing batteries with charge related defects, and that are
to be claimed under warranty.
On completion of a battery test, print out the results, and file the printout with the completed repair order for future reference, if requested.
[email protected]
567
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1089
The printout contains a warranty code (1). This code must be included in the "Comments" section when submitting the warranty claim. Failure to
quote the warranty code in the comments of the warranty claim may result in a delay in processing or refusal of the warranty claim.
Notes
1. The "Warranty Code" is not an authorization number to replace the battery. Only replace the battery when this is stated in the test results (for
example, "Replace Battery") or in the special case identified in 8b), above.
2. For vehicles with power management systems (vehicles with an IBS [Intelligent Battery Sensor]): If the battery is damaged due to discharge
prior to QC1, depending on the vehicle model, either the message "Battery damaged, replace battery before delivery" will show during CBS
Handover Inspection, or a similarly worded Check Control message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In this case, a Midtronics
printout is not required because the CBS message will be transmitted automatically within the FASTA data.
3. Battery failures that are the result of storage neglect or physical damage will not be covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
B611109_DBL-430_Manual
[email protected]
568
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1090
[email protected]
569
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1091
[email protected]
570
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1092
[email protected]
571
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1093
[email protected]
572
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1094
[email protected]
573
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1095
[email protected]
574
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1096
[email protected]
575
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1097
Instruction Manual Pages 1 through 13
[email protected]
576
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1098
[email protected]
577
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1099
[email protected]
578
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1100
[email protected]
579
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1101
[email protected]
580
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1102
[email protected]
581
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1103
[email protected]
582
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1104
[email protected]
583
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1105
[email protected]
584
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1106
[email protected]
585
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1107
[email protected]
586
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1108
B611109_DBL-800_Manual
[email protected]
587
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1109
[email protected]
588
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1110
[email protected]
589
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1111
[email protected]
590
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1112
[email protected]
591
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1113
DBL Manual Pages 33 through 42
[email protected]
592
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1114
[email protected]
593
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1115
[email protected]
594
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1116
[email protected]
595
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1117
[email protected]
596
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1118
DBL Manual Pages 43 through 52
[email protected]
597
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1119
B611109_V&H_Manual
[email protected]
598
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1120
[email protected]
599
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1121
[email protected]
600
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1122
[email protected]
601
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1123
[email protected]
602
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1124
[email protected]
603
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1125
[email protected]
604
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1126
[email protected]
605
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1127
[email protected]
606
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1128
[email protected]
607
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1129
[email protected]
608
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1130
V & H Manual Pages 54 through 64
[email protected]
609
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1131
[email protected]
610
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1132
[email protected]
611
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1133
[email protected]
612
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1134
[email protected]
613
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1135
[email protected]
614
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1136
[email protected]
615
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1137
[email protected]
616
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1138
V & H Manual Pages 65 through 74
[email protected]
617
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1139
[email protected]
618
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1140
[email protected]
619
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1141
[email protected]
620
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1142
[email protected]
621
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1143
[email protected]
622
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1144
[email protected]
623
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1145
[email protected]
624
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1146
[email protected]
625
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1147
[email protected]
626
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1148
[email protected]
627
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1149
[email protected]
628
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1150
V & H Manual Pages 75 through 86 Technical Service Bulletin # 340409 Date: 091001
Brakes - Brake Rotor Removal Procedures/Precautions

SI B 34 04 09
Brakes
October 2009
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Repair Procedures - Brake Disc/Rotor Removal
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
Due to exposure to various environmental conditions, corrosion can form at the wheel's center hub, making it difficult to remove the brake disc
during service work. In order to avoid damage to other system components, the instructions in the Repair Manual must be adhered to when
removing the brake discs.
[email protected]
629
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1151
Do not remove the brake disc by striking the friction area with a hammer or other tool. Excess force applied to the brake disc can result in damage
to the drive flange, wheel bearing, carrier, and/or CV joint.
To aid in the removal of the brake disc, a suitable puller (2) can be used. When using a puller (2) to remove the disc, two wheel lugs (1) should be
used to support the disc when it is separated from the drive flange.
Lighting - Headlamp Condensation Diagnosis

SI B 63 04 08
Lights
November 2009
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B63 04 08 dated June 2008.
SUBJECT
Headlamp Moisture: Fault Diagnostics
MODEL
[NEW] All models
SITUATION
There is water or condensation in one or both headlamps.
[NEW] INFORMATION
Under some environmental conditions, condensation can occur without there being a faulty headlamp. A comprehensive test plan that will allow an
accurate diagnosis and repair is available. Follow the relevant test plan in diagnostics, using the latest ISTA diagnosis version. Select "Information
search" and the test plan may be accessed in two ways:
1. Using the "Text search" tab, select "Search for document title" and search using the term "Headlight fogging".
2. Using the "Function structure" tab, select "Body Mechanism, noises, optical element; leaks Water ingress Headlight fogged on inside Start
search ".
[email protected]
630
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1152
Note that a Diagnosis Code will be produced at the end of the test module. Be sure to include the code in the "Comments" section of the warranty
claim.
Audio System - Interference/Noise From Door Speakers

SI B 65 32 09
November 2009
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Interference Noise from the Loudspeakers
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Interference noise from the door loudspeakers can be heard in all audio modes.
CAUSE
Cause 1: The door panel is improperly fitted (torsion, stress, etc.).
Cause 2: The loudspeaker wiring or the loudspeaker itself is damaged.
CORRECTION
Work through the appropriate test modules integrated in ISTA diagnosis.
Cause 1: Test module W6513_WAS1 Noise from speaker (refer to Attachment A).
Cause 2: Test module B6512_AudioCICR-Speaker (refer to Attachment B).
[email protected]
631
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1153
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
632
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1154
view PDF attachment B653209_Attachment_A.
[email protected]
633
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1155
[email protected]
634
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1156
view PDF attachment B653209_Attachment_B.
Cooling System - Proper Cooling System Service Procedure

SI B 17 01 10
Cooling System
March 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Proper Evacuation and/or Filling of Cooling System after Repairs
MODEL
[email protected]
635
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1157
All
SITUATION
It can no longer be assured that all air is bled from a modern cooling system after it has been opened for repairs. This can result in poor
performance of the cooling system and also erratic operation of systems utilizing cooling system temperature values. A special tool has been
developed that ensures complete evacuation of all air in the system prior to filling, and also validates if the system is free of leaks prior to filling
with coolant.
PROCEDURE
The Coolant Vacuum Charger tool P/N 81 39 2 152 470 (SI B04 34 08) must be used after completing major cooling systems repairs, or when the
cooling system is drained and needs to be refilled with fresh coolant. Repair instructions for operating the vacuum charge unit are in the attachment
below.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
636
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1158
[email protected]
637
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1159
[email protected]
638
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1160
[email protected]
639
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1161
[email protected]
640
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1162
Attachment - B170110_RA_17_00_039.
[email protected]
641
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1163
A/C - Compressor Noise Troubleshooting
SI B 64 21 05
May 2010
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B64 21 05 dated May 2008.
SUBJECT
Troubleshooting Air Conditioning Compressor Noise
MODEL
All
SITUATION
A high percentage of air conditioning compressors which are returned under warranty for complaints of noisy operation have been found to be
non-defective.
PROCEDURE
[NEW] This procedure only applies to compressor noise diagnosis that does not require a DIAGCODE as per SI B01 01 10. For these vehicles,
complete the mechanical diagnosis test plan in ISTA (Integrated Service Technical Application). This test plan can be found by performing a text
search using the search term "M6450", or by selecting the following path: "Function structure / Body / Heating and Air Conditioning systems" and
"Start search".
In order to assist with the diagnosis of noisy compressors, a "Check Sheet" has been developed to assist the workshop with gathering information
from the customer to ensure proper diagnosis the first time. Please return this "Check Sheet" with any replaced compressor.
Check to see whether a relevant fault symptom is available, using fault symptom diagnosis. Refer to SI B64 04 07 for more information on how to
access fault symptom troubleshooting.
If no fault symptom is available, please use the attached "Compressor Noise Diagnosis" chart when diagnosing any air conditioning compressor
noises.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
642
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1164
view PDF attachment B642105Customer_Checksheet.
[email protected]
643
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1165
view PDF attachment B642105Diagnosis_Flowchart.
Computers/Control - Loading/Activation Of Enabling Codes

SI B 09 04 09
May 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Enabling Codes
MODEL
All
SITUATION
Enabling Codes are needed for certain module replacements, retrofits, crashed modules or during the QC1 Pre-Delivery Check. This bulletin gives
a general overview of Enabling Codes, which parts are affected, and how to load and activate Enabling Codes.
WHAT ARE FSC ENABLING CODES?
[email protected]
644
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1166
The abbreviation FSC stands for Freischaltcode, which is the German translation for Enabling Code. These codes are used to enable hardware or
software in our vehicles to protect unauthorized access to various vehicle functions. These codes are ordered via the EPC and delivered through the
Sweeping Technology system, SWT.
WHY DO WE NEED ENABLING CODES?
Hardware activation:
With the introduction of the Night Vision System in March 2006, Enabling Codes were first used in a BMW vehicle to activate the components
(Camera and control module) in the vehicle. These codes are the result of a legal requirement, because of strict conditions applying to the use of
this Night Vision technology. With Enabling Codes, BMW could ensure that the system can only be used in the registered vehicle.
Software activation:
Enabling Codes allow BMW to develop new business models like software as a product. This means that the hardware functionality is already in
the vehicle, but is not usable by the customer until he or she purchases and enters the Enabling Code into the vehicle. The first use of the software
Enabling Codes was in the CCC (Car Communication Computer) in March 2007. Enabling Codes protected the speech recognition software within
the CCC.
WHICH SYSTEMS OR CONTROL MODULES REQUIRE ENABLING CODES
^ CCC head unit
^ CIC head unit
^ CIC navigation road map
^ NiVi (Night Vision) camera or control module
^ SDARS (Satellite radio)
^ BMW Performance Power Kit retrofit
^ Future applications
WHAT ARE THE DIFFERENT TYPES OF ENABLING CODES?
1. "INITIAL" Enabling Code*
2. "REPAIR" Enabling Code*
3. "RETROFIT" Enabling Code (Customer pay)
4. "UPDATE" Enabling Code (Customer pay)
* Supplied free of charge
WHICH CODE IS NEEDED AT QC1?
Order an INITIAL navigation map Enabling Code.
All 3/2010 or later vehicles with navigation (option 609) will require an Enabling Code to activate the navigation map for the first time.
The code is entered when running the QC1 test module. No programming is required.
For more detail, refer to SI B65 30 09.
WHICH CODE IS NEEDED FOR A REPAIR OR PARTS REPLACEMENT?
Order the REPAIR Enabling Code directly in ASAP. Refer to the attachment how to order and retrieve Enabling Codes in ASAP.
Depending on the vehicle system, there are a number of different procedures:
CCC: Order a REPAIR Enabling Code any time a CCC is replaced in order to activate SVS. The Enabling Codes are shown in the EPC. For details,
refer to SI B09 02 07. Only for E60 vehicles produced between 9/2003 and 12/2003: submit a PuMA case to request the REPAIR Enabling Codes.
CIC: Order REPAIR Enabling Codes any time a CIC is replaced in order to activate SVS and the navigation system. For details, refer to SI B65 28
08.
[email protected]
645
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1167
NiVi: These REPAIR codes are supplied automatically with the parts when ordered. These codes are supplied on a CD and come with the camera
or control module.
SDARS (from 9/09): Order REPAIR Enabling Codes any time an SDARS component (CIC, RAD2+, etc.) is replaced.
DME with Power Kit upgrade: Order a REPAIR Enabling Code any time a DME is replaced.
WHICH CODE IS NEEDED FOR A RETROFIT INSTALLATION?
Order the RETROFIT Enabling Code.
Depending on the vehicle system, there are a number of different procedures:
BMW Performance Power Kit Retrofit: This RETROFIT code is ordered via the EPC. The CD key is delivered to the dealer in a red envelope that
is supplied as part of the retrofit kit. Instructions for obtaining the RETROFIT Enabling Code are described in the installation instructions in ASAP
(Refer to Parts Information bulletin 11 06 09).
SDARS Retrofit: Instructions for obtaining the RETROFIT Enabling Code are described in the installation instructions in ASAP (refer to Parts
Information bulletin [NEW] 65 02 10).
WHICH CODE IS NEEDED FOR AN UPDATE INSTALLATION?
Order the UPDATE Enabling Code for a Navigation Road Map Upgrade (installing a map update): Instructions for obtaining the UPDATE
Enabling Code are described in the installation instructions in ASAP (Refer to Parts Information bulletin 65 03 10). Installation is also described in
SI B65 38 09.
INFORMATION ON LOADING ENABLING CODES
Please follow the procedures below to load and activate the Enabling Codes with ISTA/P. Refer to the attached documents for detailed information
and screenshots. Refer to SI B09 05 09 to determine which Enabling Code is needed for which function and/or component.
Module Replacement Procedure
^ ISTA/P will ask you to import codes depending on option codes and the replaced module. For details on unidentified which code is being
requested by ISTA/P, please see SI B09 05 09.
^ Request and download "REPAIR enable codes" in ASAP.
Retrofit Procedure
^ Order codes as listed in the installation instructions and/or EPC (it may take up to 24 hours to generate codes); Note: Codes expire after 30 days.
^ ISTA/P will ask you to import codes.
^ Download the RETROFIT codes in ASAP, at which point the retrofit will be charged to the dealer.
Crashed Module Procedure
^ ISTA/P will ask you to import codes depending on which module crashed. For details on the unidentified which code is being requested by
ISTA/P, please see SI B09 05 09.
^ Request and download "repair enable codes" in ASAP.
^ Try to import and activate in another ISTA/P session.
^ If those codes don't work, open a PuMA case to generate new codes.
QC1 with Navigation (SA 609) Procedure
^ Refer to SI B65 30 09 (no programming required).
TROUBLESHOOTING
If you don't receive the ordered code or have problems using the code, check the following:
1. That the correct VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) was used for the order check the VIN on the vehicle, not the Repair Order.
2. That the correct ordering instructions were followed refer to earlier sections of this Service Information.
[email protected]
646
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1168
3. The correct dealer number was used. If your dealer has multiple locations and dealer numbers, you must make sure your Parts department orders
the codes under the same dealer number that you enter into ASAP to download the codes.
4. That the correct code was ordered for the situation with which you are dealing.
^ INITIAL Code for CIC Road Map Enabling during QC1
^ REPAIR code for vehicle repair or parts replacement
^ RETROFIT code for a new installation in a vehicle
^ UPDATE Code for CIC Road Map Upgrade.
5. NOTE - If you order the wrong code and the code carries a cost, your dealership will be billed when the code is downloaded.
6. The date when ordered, because the Enabling Codes have a shelf life of 30 days.
7. If the wrong dealer code was used, or the wrong part number was ordered in the case where the message "No delivery possible please check part
number" is displayed.
8. If the wrong part number code was ordered in the case that the "pdf" file was not received when ordering an INITIAL code for the Navigation
road map at QC1.
9. If the vehicle was swapped from another dealer who had ordered but not downloaded the Enabling Code. The ordering dealer must cancel the
previous order.
10. If the same code for the same VIN was ordered twice in the same order - submit a PuMA case requesting assistance.
For further details on importing these codes into ISTA/P, please see CenterNet under: BMW./ Aftersales Portal / Service, Workshop Technology /
Vehicle Programming.
If after following all these steps additional support is required, please submit a PuMA case using "FSC Support Requested" in the subject line.
ATTACHMENTS
B090409Attachment.pdf describes how to load the codes from ASAP into ISTA/P.
B090409SWT_Info.pdf provides a more detailed description of how to get the codes from ASAP.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
647
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1169
[email protected]
648
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1170
[email protected]
649
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1171
[email protected]
650
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1172
view PDF attachment B090409Attachment.
[email protected]
651
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1173
[email protected]
652
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1174
[email protected]
653
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1175
[email protected]
654
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1176
view PDF attachment B090409SWT_Info.
A/C - Revised Refrigerant/Compressor Oil Reuse Statement

SI B 64 09 10
September 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Refrigerant and Compressor Oil Reuse
MODEL
All
SITUATION
The A/C compressor test plans state "the extracted refrigerant must not be reused". This statement is incorrect.
CAUSE
Incorrect statement in the A/C compressor test plan.
INFORMATION
[email protected]
655
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1177
The extracted refrigerant can be reused. The test plan statement should read "the extracted compressor oil must not be reused". This statement will
be corrected in a future version of ISTA.
Cell Phone - Bluetooth Compatibility Information

SI B84 04 10
Communication Systems
October 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
General Bluetooth Information
MODEL
All vehicles with option 644 or 639
SITUATION
The customer experiences termination of the Bluetooth connection during telephone calls; a switch to Privacy mode; or faults during the telephone
book transfer for no apparent reason. Some customers might experience voice quality issues in the car or on the landline side.
CAUSE
The terminal device (mobile phone) is most likely not 100% compliant with the BMW Assist Bluetooth hands-free kit.
PROCEDURE
To check restrictions for the customer's terminal device (mobile phone), please refer to the following web site:
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth
The attachment provides instructions on how to use and interpret the website.
Important note:
Only BMW tested phones are displayed on the web site. A variety of other Bluetooth phones is compatible with the BMW Assist hands-free kit but
not tested by BMW. In those cases, please assist the customer in pairing the phone - if the phone still doesn't work with the hands-free kit, inform
the customer about Bluetooth compatibility issues. Please send a feedback to:
[email protected]
Containing information about the phone model (exact model code), used software version, network provider, details about the complaint (vehicle
status, phone status, performed action).
If the encountered issues on a BMW tested phone differ from the information provided on the website, please perform diagnostics with the ISTA
workshop system and follow the test plan.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
656
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1178
[email protected]
657
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1179
ATTACHMENT - PROCEDURE
Restraint System - Passenger Airbag Status Lamp Info.

SI B 65 24 03
August 2010
Technical Service
This Service Information bulletin supersedes SI B65 24 03 dated November 2006.
SUBJECT
Passenger Airbag Status Lamp
MODELS
All models with a Passenger Airbag Status Lamp
INFORMATION
This bulletin is intended to address customer questions you may receive regarding operation of the Passenger Airbag Status Lamp, once the
customer has consulted the Owner's Manual.
The Passenger Airbag Status Lamp is installed to meet a National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) regulation and, except for in
the Z4, is located in the headliner near the interior light (the E60 installation is shown in the illustration). On the Z4, the status lamp is located on
the center console.
[email protected]
658
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1180
The Passenger Airbag Status Lamp illuminates to show that the front passenger airbag is OFF (not active).
[NEW] For an overview by vehicle, refer to the attachment "POL matrix"
[NEW] For E60, E65 and E66 to 9/04; E83 to 9/05; E85 to 10/04; and F01 and F02 to 9/09 with the 0C3 (pressure-sensing) occupancy mat,
the lamp is illuminated:
^ With the ignition in the "ON" position AND the passenger seat unoccupied
^ With the ignition in the "ON" position AND when a child in a rear-facing child restraint system is recognized
^ [NEW] With the ignition in the "ON" position AND the passenger airbag deactivation switch in the "OFF" position (E85 only).
The lamp illuminates briefly during start-up and stays illuminated if a child in a rear-facing child restraint system is recognized or if the passenger
seat is unoccupied. The lamp goes out if an adult or a child of sufficient size is recognized.
[NEW] For all vehicles with the 0C3 (pressure-sensing) occupancy mat except those stated above, the lamp is illuminated:
^ With the ignition in the "ON" position AND when a child in a rear-facing child restraint system is recognized
^ With the ignition in the "ON" position AND the passenger airbag deactivation switch in the "OFF" position (E85 and E86 only).
The lamp illuminates briefly during start-up and stays illuminated if a child in a rear-facing child restraint system is recognized. The lamp goes out
if an adult or a child of sufficient size is recognized, or if the passenger seat is unoccupied.
[NEW] For all vehicles with the CIS (capacitive-sensing) occupancy mat, the lamp is illuminated:
^ With the ignition in the "ON" position AND the passenger seat unoccupied
^ [NEW] With the ignition in the "ON" position AND when a child in a child restraint system is recognized.
The lamp illuminates briefly during start-up and stays illuminated if a child in a child restraint system is recognized. The lamp goes out if the
passenger seat is occupied, regardless of the size of the individual (no child restraint system).
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
659
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1181
view PDF attachment
Fuel System - BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus Info.

SI B 13 05 06
Fuel System
August 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus
MODEL
All
[email protected]
660
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1182
SITUATION
Recent field experiences have shown a significant increase in various drivability complaints due to excessive carbon deposits in engines
combustion chambers on the intake valves and fuel injectors.
The overall rise in carbon deposit accumulation is generally attributed to poor gasoline quality; namely, a low level of cleaning additives and fuel
contamination.
TECHNICAL BACKGROUND
Combustion chamber deposit formation is a by-product of the gasoline burning process. Fuel injector and intake valve deposits may become less
troublesome with the recently introduced Top Tier Detergent Gasoline deposit control standards, which are exceeding the detergent requirements
imposed by the EPA in 1995.
However, vehicles that do not exclusively use a Top Tier Detergent Gasoline or are regularly driven under severe conditions, such as stop-and-go
traffic, high ambient temperatures and high altitude, can experience performance problems caused by intake system and combustion chamber
deposits.
The most common customer complaints may include:
FUEL INJECTORS
Deposits at the injector's tip can impact fuel flow, upsetting the air/fuel mixture ratio.
Symptoms:
^ Hesitation or stumble during acceleration or even loss of power
^ Poor fuel efficiency
^ Increased emissions of HC and CO
^ "Service Engine Soon" lamp illumination due to intermittent misfire faults or lean mixture adaptation values.
INTAKE VALVES:
Deposits at the valves and on the intake manifold ports can absorb fuel during the warm-up phase, leaning out the air/fuel mixture ratio. Carbon
buildup may disturb mixture flow at low throttle conditions/idle speeds.
Symptoms:
^ Poor drivability
^ Loss of power
^ Unstable/rough idle
^ Increased emissions of HC, CO and NOx
^ "Service Engine Soon" lamp illumination due to intermittent misfire faults.
COMBUSTION CHAMBER:
Combustion Chamber Deposit Interference, or CCDI, occurs when there is contact between carbon deposits on the piston crown and cylinder head.
The noise can be confused or misdiagnosed as ping, knock or other noises that could indicate a mechanical failure. CCDI occurs first as a cold start
noise that can fade as the engine warms to operating temperature. The noise will reoccur at the next cold start. As deposits build, there is an
increase in compression temperature that may cause pre-ignition detonations.
Symptoms:
^ Knocking
^ Pinging
^ Run-on
^ Poor acceleration
^ Octane requirement increase
[email protected]
661
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1183
^ Increased emissions of NOx
^ Engine idle speed surges.
Depending on the manufacturer, fuels may contain various additives such as: oxidation and corrosion inhibitors, metal deactivators, emulsifiers,
anti-icing agents and dyes. They are also required to include some form of an intake system deposit control package. Unfortunately, not all fuels are
created equal, and some additive packages are not effective enough to maintain integrity of the intake systems in high performance engines, or
engines operating under severe environmental conditions. Even worse, the intake system deposit control additives in some fuels may actually
contribute to the combustion chamber deposit accumulation and to the problems associated with those deposits: knock, run-on and increased
emissions of oxides of nitrogen.
RECOMMENDATION
BMW recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline with a minimum octane rating of AKI 91 and with alcohol content of less then 10% by
volume (or any other oxygenates with up to 2.8% of oxygen by weight). Only the exclusive use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline provides the full
benefit of reducing deposit formation. For more information related to TOP TIER Gasoline, refer to SI B13 02 06.
If the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is unavailable, we recommend that BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus (P/N 82 14 0 413 341) be added to
the gas tank. For optimum cleaning and deposit control, add a 20 fl. oz. bottle every 3,000 miles when refueling.
Regular use of BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus can help address carbon deposits related to the symptoms listed above. By removing these
deposits, an engine may experience restored power, performance and fuel efficiency; a smoother idle running; lower emissions; and reduced octane
requirement.
BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus uses polyether amine TECHRONreg;-based technology developed and patented by Chevron. BMW Group
Fuel System Cleaner Plus has proven to clean up deposits in fuel injectors, ports and intake valves, and reduces the harmful effects of combustion
chamber deposits. It helps restore performance lost due to deposit buildup.
Chevron and BMW have run extensive "no harm" tests with polyether amine technology. When used as directed, it will not harm catalytic
converters, oxygen sensors, or any other mechanical components of the engine or fuel delivery system.
The effectiveness of the additive depends on its presence in the gasoline in large concentrations for short periods of time. One treatment is usually
sufficient, but a second treatment (one 20 oz. bottle per each consecutive full tank of gas) may give additional benefits. To keep your fuel intake
system clean, we recommend usage at every 3,000 miles.
Additionally, the vehicle's fuel sending units, equipped with silver-plated resistor card/contacts, are especially vulnerable to attacks by the elemental
sulfur and/or hydrogen sulfide found in fuels. Adding BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus immediately upon noticing erratic fuel gauge
behavior may, in many cases, restore proper performance due to the additive's ability to remove the harmful sulfur compounds from the sending
unit's contact surface. Additionally, BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus can help protect the fuel gauge from future malfunctioning by coating
all metal surfaces of the fuel system.
BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus.

P/N 82 14 0 413 341
1 bottle, 20 fl. oz.
Order in multiples of 6 bottles per case.
[NEW] Note:
BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus is the only BMW approved in-tank additive. Using non-approved fluids or tools can lead to premature
component failure and will not be covered under Warranty.
PARTS INFORMATION
[email protected]
662
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1184
[NEW] Because carbon deposit buildup is related to fuel quality, it cannot be considered as a defect in the vehicle's materials or workmanship.
Consequently, usage of BMW Group Fuel System Cleaner Plus is not covered under the terms of the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
maintenance plan or the Certified Pre-Owned program.
Accessories - Integrated Univ. Remote Control Diag. Tips

SI B66 10 10
Distance Systems, Cruise Control, Remote Control
October 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Diagnosis Tips - Integrated Universal Remote Control (UGDO)
MODEL
All with option code 319 (Universal garage door opener)
SITUATION
The Integrated Universal Remote Control (UGDO) is located in the interior mirror and is typically used for controlling garage door openers.
Most interior mirrors replaced for UGDO complaints are without fault when tested. This Service Information provides diagnostic tips in order to
avoid unnecessary mirror replacement.
INFORMATION
Information on the HomeLink(R) UGDO can be found at www.homelink.com/home.php. Direct the customer to this excellent resource if diagnosis
at the dealership indicates that the UGDO is working correctly and the customer needs additional programming assistance. Additional UGDO
information can be found in the vehicle Owner's Manual.
Programming problems:
Request that the customer bring in the hand-held remote control transmitter (remote) that is causing difficulty, together with any other remotes that
the customer uses. If necessary, the UGDO can be reprogrammed using these remotes. For rolling code devices, the customer will need to train the
UGDO upon returning home (see item 5 below).
NOTE:
If the customer has a regular full-size remote as well as a smaller (key ring) remote, only the full-size remote should be used for the programming
procedure.
With the vehicle ignition turned to the "on" position, check the status of the UGDO by pressing each of the programming buttons. Note that the
UGDO is "off" if the vehicle ignition is "off".
1. Each button should illuminate the LED in some way (steady on or flashing). This indicates a fully functional UGDO.
^ If no LED illuminates, possible causes are:
^ Ignition not switched on
^ No power or ground
^ Faulty mirror
^ If one button illuminates the LED, but any one or two buttons do not, the mirror is faulty.
2. If any button illuminates with a slow flashing LED, the memory is empty; the button has not been programmed.
^ Check the batteries in the customer remote control and replace if necessary.
^ Refer to the attachment from step 2 to program the UGDO.
3. If every button illuminates with a steady "on" LED, most likely the customer has not cleared the factory setting. Attentively, the customer has
programmed each button with a fixed code. (Check with the customer.)
^ Refer to the attachment from step 1 to delete the stored memories and program the UGDO.
[email protected]
663
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1185
4. If any button illuminates with a steady "on" LED, the button has been programmed with a fixed code.
^ Check that the correct remote is being used.
^ The garage door may have a range problem.
5. If any button illuminates with a rapid flashing LED, followed after 2 seconds by a steady "on" LED, the button has been programmed with a
rolling code. However, the training mode for the rolling code may not have been successfully completed.
^ Provide the attachment to the customer and refer the customer to steps 5 - 7. Direct the customer to the instructional videos on the HomeLink(R)
website, www.homelink.com/program.php..
Range problems:
1. Advise the customer that the UGDO range is less than the original hand-held remote's range. A range of less than 50% of the original remote's
range should be investigated as a vehicle/interior mirror problem.
2. If the UGDO and the original remote both have reduced range, the UGDO is not at fault. The customer should check the garage door opener;
possibly, the antenna wire is not properly extended.
WARRANTY Information
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
664
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1186
view PDF attachment B661010 Attachment.

Interior - Proper Installation Of Carpet Floor Mats

SI B51 40 10
Body Equipment
November 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Proper Installation of BMW Carpet Floor Mats
MODEL
All
SITUATION
The intent of this bulletin is to ensure proper carpet floor mat installation and increase customer satisfaction. Our internal quality observations have
shown that improper floor mat installation can occur during the new car preparation or when the service department is detailing the interior. Also,
the customer or car wash attendant may remove the floor mats for interior cleaning. This can lead to damage to the retaining system and result in
[email protected]
665
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1187
improper installation. The installation guide attached is also included with the new floor mat sets. These installation instructions must be reviewed
and followed while installing the floor mats. The installation guide must also be given to the customer for future reference.
CAUSE
The center installations of floor mats are inconsistent.
PROCEDURE
Refer to attachment B514010.pdf
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
666
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1188
B51 40 10 - Procedure
[email protected]
667
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1189
[email protected]
668
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1190
B514010 - Floor Mat Installation Guide
Wheel/Tires - New Style Tire Valves

SI B36 01 10
Wheels and Tires
November 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
New Style Tire Valves
MODEL
All
INFORMATION
[email protected]
669
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1191
The tire valves for use with Tire Pressure Monitor Systems have been redesigned. The new style valves (on the right in the illustration) can be
identified by the smaller/conventional type cap (1) and the tapered seat at the valve's base (3).
^ The sealing washer (indicated by the arrow) is no longer required with the new style valve.
^ The valve has been modified in the area of the rubber seal (3).
^ The only component which is interchangeable between the two valves is the valve cap (1). When replacing a tire valve, the old cap can be
reused, if necessary, to ensure that all the tire valves are fitted with matching caps.
^ Always refer to the Repair Manual for proper installation instructions, including tightening torques.

M/T - Dual Mass Flywheel Diagnostic Criteria

SI B21 01 10
Clutch
November 2010
Technical Service
SUBJECT
Dual Mass Flywheel - Diagnosis and Inspection
MODEL
All models equipped with dual-mass flywheel, except Motorsport vehicles
INFORMATION
Prior to condemning the dual-mass flywheel as defective, the following three criteria have to be checked and evaluated:
1. Total rotational angle at no load condition (with applied torque less then 20 Nm)
2. Secondary plate longitudal axial play
3. Friction surface appearance changes due to thermal overload.
PROCEDURE
Refer to the attached "Dual-mass Flywheel Inspection" document for the complete inspection procedure.
The dual-mass flywheel replacement is justified only if one or more of the following criteria are met:
1. The total rotational free-play, measured at the flywheel gear ring, is equal or greater than 7 tooth gaps.
2. The secondary plate total axial bearing play, measured at outside diameter of the flywheel, is equal or greater than 5 mm.
3. A significant discoloration in the adjoining area outside the friction ring, or a severe ablation/erosion of the friction area, is present.
[email protected]
670
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1192
Warranty claims may be denied:
^ If the diagnostic procedure outlined above is not followed when replacing a dual-mass flywheel.
ATTACHMENTS
[email protected]
671
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1193
[email protected]
672
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1194
[email protected]
673
BMW M3 (E30) L4-2302cc 2.3L DOHC (S14) 1195
B210110_Dual_Mass_Flywheel_Inspection
[email protected]

BMW M3 E30 S14 Repair

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW M3 E30 S14 Repair

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW M3 E30 S14 Repair

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW M3 E30

with L4 2.3L S14 Dohc Engine

Vehicle Identification Number

VIN Location On Vehicle

The VIN is located on the vehicle in the following locations:

Vehicle Production Dates

Vehicle Production Anti-theft Labels

If equipped, the label is placed on the following locations:

The 5 Primary Types of Automotive Signals

THERE ARE 5 PRIMARY SIGNAL TYPES FOUND IN AUTOMOBILES

1. DIRECT CURRENT (DC) SIGNALS

The types of sensors or devices in a vehicle that produce DC signals are:

2. ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) SIGNALS

The types of sensors or devices in a vehicle that produce AC signals are:

^ Magnetic Camshaft (CMP) and Crankshaft (CKP) position sensors

^ Antilock Brake System (ABS) wheel speed sensors

^ Vehicle Speed Sensors (VSS)

^ Knock Sensors (KS)

3. FIXED PULSE WIDTH SIGNALS

^ Hall Effect, CMP and CKP sensors

^ Digital mass airflow sensors

^ Ford MAP sensors

^ Camshaft (CMP) and Crankshaft (CKP) sensors

4. PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SIGNALS

^ Electronic spark timing circuits

^ EGR control solenoids

^ Idle air control motors and solenoids

^ Ignition coil primary

5. SERIAL DATA (Multiplexed) SIGNALS

The 5 Critical Dimensions

THE FIVE CRITICAL DIMENSIONS ARE:

CRITICAL DIMENSION DEFINITIONS:

Amplitude - The voltage of the electronic signal at a certain point in time.

Pulse Width - The on-time, or duty cycle of the electronic signal.

Time Per Division VS. Frequency Chart

Chart For Determining Time Base Setting, Based On Signal Frequency

Setting Up A DSO to Display A Waveform

To display a waveform you must set:

3) Trigger level, or trigger mode to "AUTO"

Chart For Determining Time Base Setting, Based On Signal Frequency

When A Waveform Fails to Appear

Quick Reference Labscope Glossary

Voltage Scale: The amount of voltage each vertical division represents.

Time base: The amount of time each horizontal division represents.

DC coupling: Allows both AC and DC voltages to be displayed.

VIN PLATE LOCATION:

All - Left side of instrument panel, visible through windshield.

(1) MODEL YEAR IDENTIFICATION:

10th character of VIN

(2) ENGINE CODE LOCATION:

Prefix to engine number, stamped on engine block.

(3) ENGINE CODE:

(4) ENGINE IDENTIFICATION:

- Remove cylinder head cover.

- Unscrew distributor rotor (4).

Installation Note: Tightening torque: 23 + 1 Nm (16.5 + 0.5 ft lbs).

- Unscrew and remove distributor housing, and plugs.

Installation Note: Check O-rings, replacing it necessary.

- Remove end cover.